^W»Sii| 


CAVALRY 
DRILL ,  REGULATIONS 

1916 


:r-r 


t- 


TUFTS   UNIVERSITY    LIBRARIES 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  Medicine 
Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University 
200  Westboro  Road 
'iorth  Grafton,  MA  01536 


^AR  DEPARTMENT    :     OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  OF  STAFF 

CAVALRY 
DRILL  REGULATIONS 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY 

1916 

T 
CORRECTED  TO  DECEMBER  31,  1917 

(CHANGES  NOS.  1  AND  2) 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1918 


War  Department, 

Document  No.  561, 

Qifice  of  the  Chief  of  Stai 


Wak  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 

Washington,  October  26,  1916. 
The  following  system  of  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations  is  pub' 
lished  for  the  information  and  government  of  the  Army  and 
the  National  Guard  of  the  United  States.  With  a  view  to 
insure  uniformity  throughout  the  Army,  all  Cavalry  drill 
formations  and  evolutions  not  embraced  in  this  system  are 
prohibited  and  those  herein  prescribed  will  be  strictly  observed. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

H.  L.  Scott, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 


I 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Definitions Pages  13-16 

Introduction Pars.  1-33 

Part   I.  Individual   Instruction. 

Paragraphs. 

General  provisions 34-50 

School  of  tlie  trooper,  dismounted 51-171 

Object,  cautions,  physical  training 54-55 

Individual  instruction  without  arms 56-89 

Position     of     trooper     at     attention,     rests, 

facings,  etc 56-67 

Steps  and  marchings 6S-S9 

Individual  instruction  with  arms 90-171 

Manual  of  the  rifle 90-120 

Loadings  and  firings 121-140 

Target  designation 141 

The  use  of  cover 142-143 

Observation 144 

Manual  of  the  pistol 145-156 

Employment  of  the  pistol 157-161 

Manual  of  the  saber 162-171 

School  of  the  trooper,  mounted 172-320 

Object,  cautions,  standard  required 172-176 

Schedule  of  instruction 176 

First  period :  Preparatory  instruction 177-223 

Folding  and  putting  on  saddle  blanket,  etc 178-180 

Saddling  and  unsaddling 181-183 

Bridling  and  unbridling,  etc 184-190 

Mounting  and  dismounting _- 191-193 

The  reins,  the  aids,  suppling,  etc 194-223 

5 


6  CONTENTS. 

School  of  the  trooper,  mounted — Continued.  Paragraphs. 

Second  period  :  Worlv  on  tlie  snaffle 224-268 

Schedule  of  instruction 224 

The  walk,  the  halt,  by  the  flank,  and  oblique_  225-230 
General   provisions   and   marching  on   fixed 

points 231-232 

Circling,    trot,    gallop,    changes   of  gait   and 

hand  233-240 

Suppling,   posting,   care  of  horses   and   sad- 
dlery   241-243 

Use  of  arms,  mounted 244-255 

Inspection  of  arms  and  equipment 256-268 

Third  period  :  Work  on  the  double  snaffle 209-300 

Schedule  of  instruction 269 

The  about  and  other  individual  movements 270-289 

Work  on  varied  ground,  applications 290-300 

Fourth  period :  Work  on  the  bit  and  bridoon 301-320 

Schedule  of  instruction 301 

Adjustment  of  and  work  with  double  bridle__  302-318 

Proof  of  training 319 

The  trained  trooper 320 

Pakt  II.  Elementaky  Collective  Instruction. 

General  provisions  and  basic  principles 321-339 

School  of  the  squad 340-445 

Purpose 340-349 

Forming,  aligning,  and  leading  the  squad 350-367 

Formations,  close  and  extended  order,  guide 368-377 

Commands  and  arm  signals 378-381 

Detailed  description  of  movements 382-416 

The  mounted  attack 417-420 

Passing  from  mounted  to  dismounted  action 421-437 

Remounting,  passing  obstacles,  instruction 438-445 

Part  III.  General  Principles  of  the  Drill. 

General  provisions 446-447 

Leading 448-456 

Conducting  the  march 454-455 

Temporary  leader 456 


CONTENTS.  7 

Paragraphs. 

Center 457-460 

Commands 461-466 

Movements  in  general 467-470 

Changes  of  direction 471 

Movements  in  column  of  tv\'OS  and  troopers 472 

Extended  order  movements 473-474 

Simultaneous    movements    by    platoons,    troops,    and 

squadrons 475 

Exceptional  movements  and  changes  of  formation 476-479 

Successive    formations 480-481 

Movements  on  foot,  order 482-485 

Miscellaneous 486-488 

Paet  IV.  The  Teoop  and  its  Subdivisions. 

General  provisions 489-507 

Adjustments  in  platoons  and  sections 497 

Designation  of  platoons  and  sections 498 

Formation  and  verification 499-505 

Reporting  absentees  and  inspecting 506-507 

School  of  the  platoon 508-581 

Special  provisions 508-511 

Platoon  formations ^ 512-514 

Order 515-516 

To  form  the  platoon  (mounted) 517-527 

Positions  of  platoon  leaders  and  file  closers 528 

To  mount  and  dismount 529 

To  dismiss  the  platoon 530 

Alignment 531 

Leading  the  platoon,  guide  of  the  platoon 532-535 

Movements  executed  by  the  platoon 536-539 

Commands  and  corresponding  signals 540 

Detailed  description  of  movements,  close  order 541-548 

Double  rank 549-555 

Extended  order 556-560 

The  rally 561 

The  charge 562-565 

The  pistol  attack .566-568 

Ground  scouts  and  combat  patrols ^ 569-571 


8  CONTENTS. 

School  of  the  platoon — Continued.                                  Paragraphs 
Movements    for    passing    from    mounted    to    dis- 
mounted action 572-576 

Obstacles 577 

Combat 578-581 

The  troop 582-670 

Special  provisions 582-583 

Troop  formations 584 

Order 585-586 

Echeloning  of  platoons 587 

To  form  the  troop  (mounted) 588-597 

To  form  the  troop  (dismounted) 598 

Positions  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  and 

others  out  of  ranks 599-604 

Movements  by  fours,  twos,  and  troopers 605-607 

To  mount  and  dismount 608 

Rests,  at  ease,  and  route  order 609 

To  dismiss  the  troop  and  alignments 610-611 

Leading  the  troop 612 

Changes  of  direction 613 

The  oblique 614 

Obstacles 615 

Commands  and  corresponding  arm  signals 616 

Movements  executed  by  the  troop  (close  order) 617-629 

Line  or  single  rank 617-618 

Double  rank 619-620 

Line  of  double  columns 621 

Line  of  platoon  columns 622 

Column  of  platoons 623-624 

Double  column 625-626 

Column  of  fours 627-628 

Column  of  twos  or  troopers 629 

Movements    executed    by    the    troop     (extended 

order) 630-634 

Line  of  platoons 632 

Foragers 633-634 

The  assembly 635-637 

The  rally 638 

The  mounted  attack 639-646 

The  troop  acting  alone 639-645 

The  troop  in  the  squadron 646 


CONTENTS.  9 

The  troor>— Continued.  Paragraphs.  • 

Passing  from  mounted  to  dismounted  action 647-649 

Dismounted  combat 650-670 

General  considerations 650-653 

Tlie  fire  attack 654-656 

Fire 657-661 

Fire  direction 662 

Fire  control 663 

Fire  discipline 664-668 

Ranges 669 

Reconnaissance  before  combat 670 

Paft  y.  The  Squadron  and  Higher  Units. 

The  squadron 671-735 

Special  provisions 671-673 

To  form  and  dismiss  the  squadron 674-675 

Posts  of  officers,  etc 676-678 

Squadron  formations 679 

Commands  and  signals 680 

Evolutions  of  the  squadron  (close  order) 681-705 

Line 682-683 

Line  of  troop  columns 684—685 

Line  of  platoon  columns 686 

Mass 687-688 

Platoon  mass ^  689-690 

To  change  direction 691 

Double  rank 692-694 

Column  of  fours 695-^96 

Column  of  platoons 697-698 

Double  column 699-700 

Echelon 701-705 

Route  marches,  assembly,  rally 706-708 

Extended  order 709 

Mounted  attack 710-715 

Dismounted  fire  action 71&-735 

General  considerations 716-721 

Deployment 722 

Designation  of  objective 723 

Distribution  of  fire 724 


10  CONTENTS. 

'The  squadron — Continued. 

Dismounted  fire  action — Continued.  Paragraphs. 

Fire  direction  and  control 725 

Firing  line,  supports,  reserves 728 

Flanlis   of  line 727 

Led  horses 728 

Orders 729 

Reconnaissance 730 

Scouts  and  patrols 731 

The  lire  attack 732-733 

The  defense 734-735 

The  regiment 736-762 

Special  provisions 736 

To  form  and  dismiss  the  regiment 737-738 

Posts  of  officers,  etc 739-746 

General  provisions  as  to  evolutions 747-751 

Regimental  formations,  commands,  signals 752-753 

Route  marches 754 

The  charge,  assembly,  and  rally 755-757 

Extended  order 758-759 

Dismounted  action 760-761 

The  regiment  in  brigade 762 

The  brigade 763-767 

Brigade  formations 764 

Field  exercises 765-767 

The   division 768-771 

Part  VI.  Ceeemonies,  Inspections,  and  Mustek. 

Ceremonies 772-876 

Prescribed    ceremonies 772 

General  rules  for  reviews 773-796 

To  form  squadron  for  ceremonies 797-800 

Squadron  review 801-809 

To  form  regiment  for  ceremonies 810-811 

Regimental  review 812-815 

Brigade  review 816 

Garrison  review 817 

Parades 818-830 

Squadron  parade 819-829 

Regimental   parade 830 


CONTENTS.  li 

Ceremonies — Continued.  Paragraphs. 

Escorts 831-855 

Escort  of  honor 831 

Funeral   escort ^ 832-846 

Escort  to  tlie  standard 847-855 

Guard    mounting 856-876 

Formal  guard  mounting,  mounted 857-865 

Relieving  the  old  guard 866-875 

Formal  guard  mounting,  dismounted 876 

Inspections 877-888 

Troop,    mounted 877-881 

Troop,  dismounted 882 

Squadron,  mounted 883 

Regimental,    mounted 884 

Machine-gun  troop 885 

Headouarters  troop 886-887 

Supply  troop 888 

Muster 889-891 

Regimental,  squadron,  troop 889-891 

PaKT    VII.    MiSCELLANEOrS. 

Manuals 892-906 

Of  the  guidon 892-898 

Of  the  standard ^___  899-906 

Honors  and  salutes 907-927 

Training  remounts ._ 928-964 

General  provisions '- 928-935 

First  period,  preliminary,  dismounted 936-940 

Leading,  longe,  mounting 936-939 

Training  to  bear  saber 940 

Second  period,  conditioning  and  training 941-944 

Mounted  work,  obedience  to  aids 941-942 

Conditioning,  hygiene 943-944 

Third  period,  continuation  of  second 945-950 

Outdoor  work,  obedience  to  aids 945-946 

Jumping,  use  of  arms 947-950 

Fourth  period,  final  conditioning 951-964 

Duty  in  ranks,  work  with  the  bit 951-952 

Suppleness  and  mobility „ 953-958 

Conditioning,  special  training . 959-964 


12  CONTENTS. 

Paragraphs. 

Care  of  horses 965-974 

General  provisions  and  rules 965-966 

Stable  management 967-968 

Grooming  and  watering 969-970 

Feeding  and  exercising 971-972 

Sick  horses 973 

Shoeing 974 

Care  of  saddlery 975 

Fitting  the  saddle 976 

Marches,  camps 977-987 

General  provisions 977 

Preparation 978 

The  march,  its  length  and  rate 979 

Formations 980 

Halts 981 

Watering 982 

Feeding 983 

Camps,  location  of 984-985 

Herding 986 

Forced  and  night  marches 987 

Signals,  arm,  whistle,  bugle,  semaphore 988-997 

General  provisions 988-989 

Arm  signals 990 

Whistle  signals 991 

Bugle  signals 992-996 

Alarm  calls 993 

Service  calls 994 

Drill  and  field  calls 995 

List  of  bugle  calls 996 

Semaphore  code 997 

Bugle  calls,  music  for Appendix. 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

DEFINITIONS. 

Alig-nmeat. — The  placing  of  several  troopers  or  units  on  the 
same  straight  line;  also  the  line  on  which  such  adjustment 
is  made. 

Assemhly. — ^The  grouping  in  order,  and  in  a  close-order 
formation,  of  the  elements  of  a  command.  The  special  ar- 
rangement and  condition  that  constitute  order  for  each  unit 
are  explained  in  the  corresponding  part  of  the  text.  The 
purpose  of  the  assembly  is  to  bring  about  a  close-order  forma- 
tion in  order. 

Base. — The  element  on  which  a  formation  or  movement  is 
regulated.  The  base  may  be  a  trooper,  two,  four,  section, 
platoon,  or  larger  unit.  When  the  base  is  a  single  trooper 
in  ranks,  he  may  also  be  termed  the  guide. 

Center. — The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command.  If  the 
number  of  elements  considered  be  eveu,  the  right  center  ele- 
ment will  be  meant  when  the  center  element  is  referred  to. 

Column. — ^A  formation  in  which  the  elements  of  a  command 
are  placed  one  behind  the  other.  The  elements  here  referred  to 
may  be  troopers,  twos,  fours,  sections,  platoons,  or  larger 
units.  When  used  in  these  regulations  as  a  word  of  com- 
mand, without  qualifying  words  indicating  the  kind  of  column 
(as  of  twos,  of  platoons,  etc.),  column  signifies  a  column  of 
fours.  In  all  other  cases  the  word  is  to  be  understood  in  its 
general  sense  unless  the  context  indicates  the  contrary. 

Deployment. — An  evolution  in  which  the  command  extends 
its  front,  as  in  forming  line  from  column  or  in  passing  from 
close  order  to  extended  order. 

Depth. — The  space  from  front  to  rear  of  any  formation,  in- 
cluding the  front  and  rear  elements. 

Directing  leader. — The  leader  of  a  subordinate  unit  who 
temporarily  conducts  the  march  when  the  commander  is  not 
leading  in  person.     A  trooper  in  the  rank  of  a  platoon  or 

13 


14  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

smaller  unit  who  similarly  conducts  the  march  is  termed  a 
directing"  guide. 

Direction  of  march.— ^The  direction  in  which  the  base  of  the 
command  in  question,  whether  actually  in  march  or  halted, 
is  facing  at  the  instant  considered. 

Disposition. — The  distribution  of  the  elements  of  a  command, 
and  the  formations  and  duties  assigned  to  each  for  the  accom- 
plishment of  a  common  purpose. 

Distance. — The  space  between  men  or  bodies  of  troops 
measured  in  the  direction  of  depth.  Distance  is  measured — 
mounted,  from  the  croup  of  the  horse  in  front  to  the  head 
of  the  horse  in  rear ;  dismounted,  from  the  back  of  the 
trooper  in  front  to  the  breast  of  the  trooper  in  rear. 

Dress. — The  act  of  taking  a  correct  alignment. 

Drill. — The  exercises  ^nd  evolutions  taught  on  the  drill 
ground  and  executed  in  accordance  with  definitely  prescribed 
methods. 

Echelon. — A  body  of  troops  is  in  echelon  with  reference  to 
another  when  it  is  more  advanced  or  less  advanced  and  un- 
masks or  uncovers  the  other  body,  wholly  or  in  part;  units 
thus  placed  are  called  echelons. 

Element. — One  of  the  component  subdivisions  of  a  command. 
As  used  in  these  regulations  the  term  element  is  a  general  one 
and  may  mean  a  single  trooper,  a  set  of  twos,  a  four,  section, 
platoon,  or  larger  unit  according  to  the  command  and  forma- 
tion that  are  being  considered.  The  expression  elements  of  the 
column  refers  to  the  several  troopers,  fours,  platoons,  or  other 
units  that  are  placed  successively,  one  behind  another,  in  any 
column  formation. 

Evolutions. — Movements  by  which  a  command  changes  its 
position  or  passes  from  one  formation  to  another. 

File  closers. — Officers  or  noncommissioned  oflficers  placed  out 
of  ranks,  whose  duty  it  is  to  supervise  the  men  in  ranks  and 
see  that  the  orders  of  the  commander  are  carried  out.  For 
convenience,  this  term  is  applied  to  any  man  posted  as  a 
file  closer. 

Flank. — The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  column. 

In  speaking  of  the  enemy  the  term  right  flank  or  left  flank 
is  used  to  designate  the  flank  that  would  be  so  designated 
by  him. 


DEFINITIONS.  15 

Flank  guard. — An  element  of  a  command  disposed  with  a 
view  to  protecting  a  flank. 

Foragers. — Mounted  troopers  distributed  in  line  in  extended 
order ;  also  the  formation  in  which  the  troopers  are  so  dis- 
tributed. 

Formation. — The  arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command 
in  line,  column,  or  echelon. 

Gait. — One  of  the  special  movements  of  the  horse,  as  the 
walk,  the  trot,  or  the  gallop. 

Gait  of  march. — The  gait  at  which  the  base  of  the  command 
in  question  is  moving  at  the  instant  considered. 

Horse  length. — A  term  of  measurement.  For  convenience  in 
estimating  space,  a  horse  length  is  considered  as  3  yards ;  by 
actual  measure  it  is  about  8  feet. 

Interval. — The  lateral  space  between  the  elements  or  frac- 
tions of  a  command.  Interval  is  measured :  Mounted,  from 
the  left  knee  of  the  man  at  the  right  of  the  open  space  to  the 
right  knee  of  the  man  at  the  left  of  the  open  space;  dis- 
mounted, interval  is  measured  on  similar  principles,  but  from 
elbow  to  elbow. 

Line. — A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are 
abreast  of  each  other.  When  the  elements  are  in  column  the 
formation  is  called  a  line  of  columns. 

Maneuvers. — Operations  against  an  outlined  or  actual  force 
under  a  separate  commander,  who,  within  the  limits  of  the 
assumed  situation,  is  free  to  adopt  any  formations  and  make 
any  movements  he  chooses. 

Order. — An  indication  of  the  will  of  the  commander  in  what- 
evGi*  form  conveyed.  An  order  may  be  given  orally,  by  signal, 
or  in  any  manner  that  is  intelligible  to  those  for  whom  it  is 
intended.  The  expression,  in  order,  has  no  reference  to  this 
definition,  but  is  used  to  indicate  a  special  arrangement  and 
condition  of  the  elements  of  a  command. 

Order,  close. — This  includes  formations  in  which  the  intervals 
anji  distances  between  elements  are  habitually  based  upon 
th6se  required  for  forming  the  normal  line  formation  V)f  each 
unit  of  the  formation. 

Order,  extended. — The  formation  in  which  the  troopers,  or 
the  subdivisions,  or  both,  are  separated  by  intervals  or  dis- 
tances greater  than  in  close  order. 


16  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Pace. — Used  with  reference  to  gait,  pace  signifies  the  rate  of 
speed  of  tlie  gait.  Used  as  a  unit  of  measure,  pace  signifies 
a  step  of  30  inches. 

Patrol. — A  group  detached  from  a  command  and  operating 
with  specific  mission,  usually  related  to  security  or  informa- 
tion. The  term  is  ordinarily  applied  to  groups  varying  in  size 
from  two  men  to  a  platoon.  They  are  frequently  designated 
by  special  names  connected  with  their  principal  mission  or 
their  composition ;  as,  reconnoitering  patrols,  combat  patrols, 
visiting  patrols,  officer's  patrols. 

Ployment. — An  evolution  in  which  the  command  diminishes- 
its  front,  as  in  passing  from  line  to  column,  or  from  extended 
order  to  close  order. 

Rally. — The  rapid  grouping  behind  the  leader  of  the  ele- 
ments of  a  command,  without  reference  to  their  previous 
situation  or  formation. 

The  object  of  the  rally  is  to  reestablish  cohesion  with  a 
view  to  immediate  action,  or  to  form  line  in  a  new  direction 
wiien  the  regular  method  of  forming  line  would  be  slow  or 
complicated.  It  is  executed  in  the  order  of  arrival  of  the 
elements  of  the  command  without  regard  to  their  normal 
order.  The  formation  in  which  each  unit  is  rallied  is  fixed 
in  the  drill  instructions  of  that  unit. 

Rank. — Two  or  more  troopers  placed  side  by  side. 

Scouts. — Individual  troopers  detached  from  their  commands 
and  operating  with  a  definite  mission  related  to  security  or 
information. 

Skirmishers. — Dismounted  troopers  in  line  in  extended 
order ;  also  the  formation  in  which  tlie  troopers  are  so  placed. 

Successive  formation. — A  formation  in  which  the  elements 
take  their  places  successively. 

Tactical  exercise. — An  operation  against  an  outlined  or  repre- 
sented enemy  wliose  movements  are  restricted  with  a  view 
to  illustrating  some  particular  tactical  principle. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Duties  and  Responsibilities  of  Regimental  Officers. 

1.  The  colonel  is  charged  with  the  application  of  these 
regulations  in  so  far  as  they  pertain  to  his  regiment. 

He  is  responsible  for  the  instruction,  efficiency,  and  har- 
monious cooperation  of  his  officers,  and  must  vigilantly  pre- 
serve for  each  the  initiative  pertaining  to  his  sphere  of 
responsibility. 

Unity  of  purpose  and  coordination  of  effort  can  be  secured 
only  through  the  impulse  of  the  will  of  the  chief  transmitted 
through  his  agents.  To  this  end  the  colonel  will  personally 
direct  the  instruction  of  his  field  officers  and  captains  in  all 
that  pertains  to  their  role  and  their  duties  in  peace  and  war, 
and  will  assure  himself  that  all  his  officers  maintain  them- 
selves in  fit  physical  condition  for  active  campaign. 

2.  The  lieutenant  colonel  aids  the  colonel  in  the  execution 
of  his  task  in  such  manner  as  the  colonel  may  direct,  super- 
vises the  execution  of  his  orders,  and  in  his  absence  takes  his 
place  and  assumes  his  duties. 

3.  The  majors  are  responsible  for  the  instruction  and  prep- 
aration for  war  of  their  respective  squadrons.  They  see  that 
the  general  methods  prescribed  by  the  colonel  are  followed 
and  that  the  results  sought  by  the  colonel  are  attained.  They 
leave  to  the  captains  a  wide  initiative  in  the  choice  of  means. 

4.  The  captains  are  responsible  for  the  instruction  and  prep- 
aration for  war  of  their  respective  troops. 

They  should  have  a  large  liberty  as  to  the  means  employed. 
The  end  to  be  attained  having  been  indicated,  superior  author- 
ity should  interfere  in  the  instruction  of  the  troop  only  when 
necessary  to  insure  diligence,  rectify  mistakes,  or  to  prevent 
omissions. 

Within  the  limits  set  by  superior  commanders  the  captain 
will  vary  the  nature  of  his  exercises  and  instruction  in  order 
to  maintain  interest. 

38218  °— 18 2  17 


18         CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

He  will  personally  direct  the  education  of  his  lieutenants 
and  noncommissioned  officers  and  the  training  of  his  cooks, 
horseshoers,  saddler,  and  buglers  in  so  far  as  this  is  conducted 
M'ithin  the  troop,  and  will  exercise  a  constant  personal  super- 
vision over  all  the  instruction  imparted  to  his  troop. 

The  troop  being  the  true  unit  of  instruction,  the  captain's 
duties  are  of  the  greatest  importance  and  require  his  constant 
attention  and  undivided  interest. 

5.  The  lieutenants  share  with  their  captain  the  responsibility 
for  the  moral  and  military  training  of  their  men  as  well  as 
for  their  appearance,  and  for  the  condition  of  the  horses,  arms, 
and  equipments  of  their  platoons. 

They  are  responsible  to  the  captain  for  the  collective  train- 
ing of  their  platoons  and  for  the  individual  instruction  of  their 
men  and  horses  in  so  far  as  this  has  not  been  otherwise  pro- 
vided for. 

They  should  know  the  antecedents,  character,  ability,  and 
special  fitness  of  every  man  under  their  command  and  the 
temper,  endurance,  and  capability  of  every  horse  committed 
to  their  charge,  and  be  able  to  judge  accurately  what  can  be 
expected  of  each  man  and  horse. 

6.  The  adjutant  and  the  supply  officer,  in  addition  to  their 
duties  in  connection,  respectively,  with  the  headquarters 
troop  and  supply  troop,  perform  the  functions  imposed  upon 
them  by  Army  Regulations  and  assist  the  colonel  in  the  dis- 
charge of  his  duties. 

INSTRUCTION. 

,  Geneeal  Provisions. 
■>. 

7.  The  instruction  of  his  command  in  all  that  pertains  to  its 
duties  in  war  is,  next  to  effective  leadership,  the  most  im- 
portant duty  devolving  upon  a  commander.  AH  other  service 
functions  must  be  subordinate  to  it. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  are  charged  with  a 
responsibility  commensurate  with  their  grade  or  rank  for  the 
performance  of  this  most  important  duty.  They  must  devote 
to  it  their  best  efforts  and  their  unremitting  care  and  atten- 
tion. 


INSTRUCTION.  19 

Instruction  must  not  be  limited  to  mere  professional  train- 
ing, but  must  be  extended  to  include  the  moral  education  and 
physical  development  essential  to  success  in  war. 

it  must  not  only  develop  the  memory  and  intelligence  of 
the  trooper,  but  must  awaken  in  him  a  sense  of  pride  in  his 
profession,  a  confidence  in  his  ability  to  overcome  his  enemy, 
a  feeling  of  devotion  to  his  leaders,  and  that  pride  in  his 
country's  institutions  and  past  achievements  which  increases 
patriotism. 

Such  instruction  tends  more  surely  to  the  inculcation  and 
enforcement  of  discipline  than  do  the  most  exacting  orders 
and  regulations. 

8.  The  instruction  in  the  regiment  must  be  conducted  during 
the  entire  year  so  as  to  fulfill  the  following  conditions : 

(a)  The  regiment  must  at  all  times  be  prepared  to  take 
the  field. 

(b)  Recruits  must  be  brought  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent 
with  thorough  training  to  a  state  of  preparation  for  field 
service. 

(c)  The  system  must  be  such  as  to  bring  the  regiment  to 
a  proper  state  of  preparation  for  participation  in  the  annual 
maneuvers  or  field  exercises. 

9.  Taking  into  consideration  the  local  conditions,  the  brigade 
commanders  will  regulate  the  employment  of  time  and  the 
rate  of  progress. 

They  will  assure  themselves  of  results  obtained  by  suitable 
personal  inspections. 

10.  Instruction  in  maneuvers  and  in  marching  and  camping 
should  be  carried  out  at  the  same  time,  and  in  the  manner 
and  season  best  suited  to  the  climate  and  other  conditions. 

11.  Tactical  exercises  should  be  held  frequently;  always 
with  an  indicated  enemy  and  under  conditions  approaching 
as  nearly  as  possible  those  of  war.  The  units  participating 
must  be  under  their  permanent  leaders  and  at  as  nearly  full 
strength  as  conditions  will  permit. 

12.  It  must  be  the  effort  of  every  leader  to  awaken  in  his 
subordinates  the  spirit  of  initiative  and  mutual  helpfulness 
and  to  develop  to  the  greatest  extent  that  aggressive  desire  to 
close  with  the  enemy,  which,  in  war,  is  the  first  condition 
of  success. 


20  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

13.  The  course  of  instruction  will  comprise : 

(a)  The  instruction  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers, 
and  special  grades. 

(&)  The  instruction  of  the  trooper  individually  and  in  the 
squad  and  platoon. 

The  first  has  for  its  object  the  preparation  of  officers  and 
noncommissioned  officers  for  the  performance  of  their  duty 
as  instructors  and  leaders  of  units  and  of  the  men  of  special 
grades  (cooks,  buglers,  horseshoers,  and  saddler)  for  the 
performance  of  their  functions.  It  must  include  every  detail 
of  service  and  all  the  operations  in  which  cavalry  iuay  be 
called  upon  to  participate  in  war. 

14.  To  impart  instruction  efficiently,  officers  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers  must  be  able  to  execute,  with  the  greatest 
degree  of  skill,  all  that  they  are  called  upon  to  teach  others, 
and  must  understand  and  use  to  practical  advantage  the 
methods  of  instruction  recognized  as  the  best. 

To  be  able  to  lead  their  units  without  hesitation  and  with 
success  they  should  be  practiced  in  assuming  situations  in 
which  they  will  find  themselves  in  war  and  in  indicating  the 
most  rapid  and  simple  measures  to  meet  the  conditions.  They 
will  be  tested  from  time  to  time  in  their  knowledge  of  that 
portion  of  these  regulations  and  of  the  service  manuals  bear- 
ing upon  their  duties,  and  will  be  required  to  solve  map  and 
terrain  problems  based  upon  situations  which  they  would 
probably  meet  in  war. 

15.  The  colonel  is  charged  with  the  instruction  of  the  field 
officers  and  captains  and  the  regimental  noncommissioned 
staff;  the  captains  with  the  instruction  of  the  lieutenants, 
noncommissioned  officers,  and  special  grades  of  their  troops. 

16.  Drills  at  attention,  close-order  drills,  and  field  exercises 
all  have  their  part  in  the  training  of  troops,  but  each  has 
distinct  functions.  Their  respective  uses  should  be  regulated 
accordingly. 

17.  Drills  at  attention  are  designed  to  teach  the  mechanism 
of  close  order  movements ;  to  train  troops  to  move  rapidly, 
quietly,  and  easily  in  any  formation  desired  by  the  commander, 
and  as  preparation  for  the  mounted  charge.  They  have  as  a 
further  object  of  special  importance  the  development  in  the 
soldier  of  those  habits  of  alertness,  precision,  and  discipline 
that  are  essential  to  success  in  war.     These  drills  should  be 


INSTRUCTION.  21 

frequent  but  short.     Accuracy  and  precision  must  be  insisted 
upon  iu  their  execution. 

18.  Extended-order  drills  have  as  their  special  purpose  the 
teaching  of  the  mechanism  of  deployment  and,  in  general,  the 
handling  of  troops  in  all  combat  other  than  the  close  order 
charge.  They  are  habitually  executed  at  ease.  The  increased 
freedom  of  movement  thus  given  the  trooper  is  not  only 
desirable  to  avoid  unnecessary  fatigue,  but  is  essential  to  the 
purposes  of  the  drill  which  include,  among  other  things,  the 
proper  use  of  individual  cover  by  skirmishers.  This  neces- 
sary freedom  must  be  made  no  excuse  for  laxness  in  the  exe- 
cution of  the  exercises.  One  of  the  most  important  objects 
of  the  latter  is  to  develop  leaders  able  to  control  men  in  the 
extended  formations  necessary  in  dismounted  fire  action  and 
to  accustom  the  troopers  to  the  control  of  their  leaders  under 
similar  conditions.  Extended-order  drills  should  be  frequent 
and  thorough,  and,  within  their  proper  scope,  executed  as 
accurately  as  drills  at  attention. 

19.  Field  exercises  are  designed  to  afford  practice  in  ap- 
plying to  conditions  such  as  are  incident  to  campaign  the 
instruction  given  at. drill.  Assumed  situations  are  employed 
and  operations  are  ordinarily  directed  against  an  enemy 
who  may  be  imaginary,  outlined,  or  represented.  Field  ex- 
ercises may  take  various  forms  involving  any  of  the  phases 
of  field  service.  When  simulated  combat  is  one  of  the  features 
involved,  they  are  frequently  termed  comfeat  exercises. 
Tactical  exercises  and  maneuvers  are  forms  of  field  exercises. 

In  all  such  exercises  the  benefit  derived  is  apt  to  be  in  direct 
proportion  to  the  extent  to  which  the  actual  and  assumed  con- 
ditions approximate  war  conditions.  With  a  view  tc  provid- 
ing war  strength  organizations,  thus  giving  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  the  required  experience  in  handling  such 
units;  platoons,  troops,  and  squadrons  should  frequently  be 
consolidated.  Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  not  re- 
quired to  complete  the  full  quota  of  the  units  may  be  assigned 
as  observers  or  umpires. 

Every  exercise  should  conclude  with  a  discussion,  on  the 
field,  of  the  exercise  and  principles  involved. 

20.  Extended-order  drills  and  field  exercises  must  not  he 
delayed  until  close-order  instruction  is  completed.  They  must, 
on  the  CQfUrary,  be  taken  up  as  early  as  possible  in  the  scheme 


22  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

of  instruction  and  given  a  constantly  increasing  proportion  of 
the  time  devoted  to  instruction  as  tlie  training  progresses. 

21.  In  field  exercises  the  enemy  is  said  to  be  imaginaiy 
when  his  position  and  force  are  merely  assumed ;  outlined 
when  his  position  and  force  are  indicated  by  a  few  men; 
represented  when  a  body  of  troops  acts  as  such. 

INSTRUCTION    OF    OFFICERS. 

22.  The  worth  of  a  command  to  the  Government  depends 
largely  upon  the  training  and  knowledge  of  its  officers. 

Nothing  should  be  neglected  which  will  tend  to  increase 
their  professional  knowledge  or  to  elevate  their  moral  and 
intellectual  level. 

Apart  from  the  instruction  imparted  by  their  commanders, 
all  officers  should  regard  it  as  their  duty  to  labor  ceaselessly 
to  perfect  their  military  training,  to  keep  themselves  abreast 
of  all  progress  in  their  arm,  and  to  study  the  conditions  and 
necessities  of  modern  war.  They  must  possess,  as  a  founda- 
tion for  all  training,  a  thorough  theoretical  and  practical 
knowledge  of  horsemanship,  of  the  regulations  concerning 
their  arm,  and  of  the  duties  they  will  be  called  upon  to  as- 
sume in  peace  or  war. 

In  addition,  they  should  have  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
organization,  formation,  and  tactics  of'  the  other  arms,  of 
topography,  fortification,  and  other  military  subjects  that 
bear  upon  the  great  variety  of  missions  with  which  they  may 
be  charged.  For  this  purpose  full  use  should  be  made  of  the 
presence  of  troops  of  other  arms  in  the  garrison  or  in  ma- 
neuvers. 

Map  and  terrain  exercises  should  be  devised  to  enable  the 
officers  to  make  practical  application  of  what  they  have 
learned.  These  exercises  must  be  simple  and  entirely  practical 
and  suited  to  the  grade  of  the  officer  under  instruction.  Their 
principal  aim  should  be  to  train  the  officer  to  grasp  quickly 
situations  in  war,  to  form  correct  decisions,  and  to  formulate 
from  them  clear  and  precise  orders  and  reports. 

Officers  of  all  grades  must  acquire  skill  in  the  use  of  every 
arm  carried  by  their  men,  and  must  keep  up  bold  and  vigorous 
riding. 


INSTRUCTION.  23 

An  officer,  preferably  not  below  the  grade  of  captain,  will 
be  designated  to  giAe  instruction  in  efluitation  to  officers  re- 
quiring it. 

23.  Officers  should  bear  in  mind  that  their  manner  of  im- 
parting instruction  and  their  personal  bearing  and  aptitude 
have  a  great  influence  upon  the  men  under  their  charge.  A 
sound  soldierly  spirit  can  not  be  developed  by  rules,  but  much 
can  be  accomplished  by  force  of  example  in  teaching  high 
ideals  of  personal  conduct  and  in  training  men  to  meet  priva- 
tions cheerfully  and  never  to  grumble  at  work  or  hardship. 

INSTEUCTION    OF    NONCOMMISSIONED    OFFICERS. 

24.  Noncommissioned  officers  must  be  able  to  instruct  in  the 
school  of  the  trooper  and  of  the  platoon,  to  assist  their  officers 
in  the  details  of  service,  and  to  replace  them  in  case  of 
necessity. 

Their  theoretical  instruction  will  embrace  such  of  these 
regulations  as  pertain  to  their  duties,  to  include  the  school  of 
the  trooper,  the  platoon,  and  the  troop ;  the  interior  economy 
of  the  troop ;  the  service  manuals  applicable  to  troop  duties ; 
elementary  lessons  in  hygiene  and  liippology ;  and  related 
subjects. 

Their  practical  instruction  will  embrace  all  that  is  neces- 
sary to  prepare  them  for  their  duties  as  instructors,  for  their 
functions  in  the  school  of  the  platoon  and  troop,  and  for  any 
missions  with  which  they  may  be  charged  in  war. 

They  must  be  trained  to  comprehend  the  formations  and 
movements  of  troops  of  all  arms,  to  read  a  map  readily,  and 
to  write  a  succinct  report  accompanied,  when  necessary,  by  a 
sketch  shovN^ing  the  location  and  disposition  of  troops. 

The  colonel  may  designate  an  officer  to  perfect  and  develop 
the  training  in  equitation  of  the  noncommissioned  officers  of 
his  command.  ,    • 

INSTRUCTION   OF  THE    SPECIAL   GRADES. 

25.  To  replace  casualties  in  the  grades  of  stable  sergeant, 
cook,  horseshoer,  and  saddler  the  captain  will  cause  instruc- 
tion to  be  given  to  selected  privates  who  show  aptitude  for 
these  duties. 

The  buglers  will  be  trained  and  instructed  by  the  sergeant 
bugler  under  the  supervision  of  the  adjutant. 


24  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  wagoner  will  be  instructed  under  the  supervision  of 
the  supply  officer  in  the  principles  of  draft,  the  care  of  wagons, 
and  the  care  and  fitting  of  harness. 

INSTEUCTION    OF    THE    TROOPEE. 

26.  The  instruction  of  the  trooper  is  conducted  in  each  troop 
under  direction  of  the  captain,  who  is  assisted  by  his  officers 
and  noncommissioned  officers  according  to  their  several  apti- 
tudes and  grades.  The  course  of  instruction  should  be  so  ar- 
ranged as  to  bring  the  trooper  to  the  highest  degree  of  well- 
balanced  efficiency  in  the  briefest  practicable  period. 

While  the  captain  should  carry  on  this  instruction  accord- 
ing to  a  systematic,  prearranged  plan,  he  must  be  left  free  to 
alter  his  plan  to  meet  unforeseen  conditions.  The  interference 
of  superiors  will  be  limited  to  the  correction  of  errors  and  the 
indication  of  omissions. 

All  instruction  must  be  conducted  with  a  view  to  fitting  the 
trooper  to  play  his  part  in  war. 

Discipline,  equitation,  the  use  of  arms,  and  the  cultivation 
of  morale  are  the  essential  elements. 

27.  In  the  daily  tasks  constant  effort  should  be  made  to 
develop  in  the  trooper  a  taste  for  physical  exercise,  to  perfect 
his  knov/ledge  of  the  horse  and  of  his  capacity  and  limitations 
and  of  the  care  that  should  be  given  him,  and  to  assure  the 
proper  care,  fit,  and  adjustment  of  the  equipment  and  the 
habitual  care  of , arms. 

28.  The  instruction  in  small-arms  practice  and  swordsman- 
ship must  be  conducted  with  the  view  of  giving  to  the  trooper 
complete  confidence  in  his  ability  to  OTercome  his  enemy  with 
whatever  weapon  he  may  be  called  upon  to  meet  him. 

29.  Instruction  in  field  service  should  be  so  arranged  as  to 
prepare  the  trooper  for  the  duties  that  will  fall  to  him  in 
campaign,  to  develop  and  guide  his  initiative,  and  to  instill  in 
him  the  spirit  of  the  offensive. 

30.  Instructors  must  endeavor  from  the  first  to  acquire  a 
knowledge  of  the  character  and  aptitude  of  each  trooper  under 
their  charge.  They  should  exercise  patience  and  avoid 
familiarity.  The  work  should  be  so  regulated  that  all  troopers', 
will  have  at  least  one  mounted  exercise  daily  except  Sunday. 

31.  Recnat  instruction  will  receive  the  special  attention  of 
the  captain  and  will  be  so  conducted  as  to  prepare  the  recruit, 


INSTRUCTION.  25 

as  quickly  as  is  consistent  with  thorough  work,  to  take  hig 
phice  in  ranks. 

This  will  he  accomplished  when  the  recruit : 

(a)  Is  able  to  ride  his  horse  on  the  bit  with  one  hand  at  all 
gaits. 

(b)  Has  learned  to  care  for  his  horse,  pack  his  saddle,  and 
take  proper  care  of  his  arms  and  equipments. 

(c)  Has  mastered  the  use  of  his  arms  mounted  and  dis- 
mounted. 

( (J )   Has  acquired  an  elementary  knowledge  of  field  service. 

The  captain  is  the  judge  as  to  when  this  proficiency  has 
been  attained.  Undue  haste  in  placing  the  recruits  in  ranks 
must  be  avoided,  since  it  leads  to  loss  of  time  in  the  school  of 
the  platoon  and  squadron. 

COLLECTm:   INSTRirCTIOX. 

32.  The  colonel  designates  the  period  to  be  devoted  to  each 
of  the  several  schools  of  the  troop,  squadron,  and  regiment. 

The  time  which  should  be  apportioned  to  each  item  of  col- 
lective instruction  must  vary  with  the  circumstances.  Ample 
time  must  be  allotted  to  the  school  of  the  troop.  Within  the 
period  allotted  to  the  troop,  the  captain  will  decide  when  the 
instruction  in  the  school  of  the  troop  shall  be  begun.  He  will 
assure  himself  before  undertaking  this  instruction  that  each 
lieutenant  Las  brought  his  platoon  to  a  proper  state  of  prep- 
aration. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  undue  lengthening  of  the  period 
devoted  to  elementary  collective  work,  instruction  in  the  school 
of  the  squad  must  be  begun  soon  after  the  commencement  of 
the  individual  instruction. 

During  the  time  devoted  to  the  instruction  of  the  larger 
units,  commanders  of  the  smaller  units  must  take  advantage 
of  all  opportunities  to  continue  the  instruction  of  their  com- 
mands. 

A  reasonable  portion  of  the  period  allotted  to  the  regiment 
should  be  devoted  to  such  drill  as  will  render  the  force  supple 
and  handy. 

38.  The  training  of  regiments  in  brigades,  and  of  brigades 
in  divisions,  with  the  proper  complement  of  horse  artillery 
and  auxiliary  troops,  is  important,  both  to  insure  cooperation 
and  to  give  practice  to  the  higher  leaders  and  their  staffs. 


PART  L— INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION. 

General  Peovisions, 

34.  Tliorough  training  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  is  the 
basis  of  efhciency. 

35.  Sliort  and  frequent  drills  are  preferable  to  long  ones, 
which  exhaust  the  attention  of  both  instructor  and  recruit. 

36.  As  the  instruction  progresses,  the  recruits  will  be 
grouped  according  to  proficiency,  in  order  that  all  may  ad- 
vance as  rapidly  as  their  abilities  permit.  Those  who  lack 
aptitude  and  quickness  will  be  separated  from  the  others  and 
placed  under  experienced  drillmasters. 

37.  The  individual  dismounted  instruction  of  the  recruit  is 
habitually  given  by  experienced  noncommissioned  officers,  espe- 
cially selected  for  that  purpose.  All  such  instruction  is  under 
the  careful  personal  supervision  of  a  commissioned  officer,  and 
in  the  corresponding  mounted  instruction  it  is  desirable  that 
the  actual  instructor  be  a  commissioned  officer  when  this  is 
practicable.  All  lieutenants  will  be  required  to  instruct  re- 
cruits in  person  sufficiently  to  acquire  skill  in  such  work. 

When  recruits,  upon  their  arrival  at  a  station,  are  assigned 
to  their  respective  troops  for  training,  the  captains  prescribe 
and  supervise  the  instruction. 

38.  The  instructor  will  always  maintain  a  military  bearing 
and  by  a  quiet,  firm  demeanor,  set  a  proper  example  to  his 
men.  A  calm  and  even  temper  is  indispensable.  Unnecessarily 
loud  commands  and  prolonged  explanations  are  to  be  avoided. 

As  the  recruits  become  somewhat  proficient  in  the  school  of 
the  trooper,  the  officer  superintending  the  instruction  may  call 
upon  them  in  turn  to  drill  the  squad  in  his  presence  and  to 
correct  any  errors  that  may  be  observed.  This  will  Increase 
their  interest,  hasten  their  instruction,  and  facilitate  judg- 
ment upon  their  fitness  for  the  duties  of  noncommissioned 
officers. 

39.  A  carefully  thought  out  program  of  instruction,  prepared 
in  advance  and  based  upon  the  probable  time  and  facilities  for 

26 


INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION.  27 

instruction  that  the  case  in  question  may  present,  is  essential 
to  economy  of  time  and  effort  and  to  systematic,  thorough 
instruction. 

40.  The  preliminary  individual  instruction,  dismounted  and 
mounted,  should  be  carried  on  during  different  drill  hours  of 
the  same  days.  This  preliminary  phase  should  include,  in 
addition  to  regular  drill,  instruction  in :  The  elements  of  dis- 
cipline;  the  names  of  the  various  parts  of  the  arms  and 
equipment ;  the  proper  care  of  arms,  equipment,  and  clothing ; 
elementary  instruction  as  to  the  names  of  those  parts  of  the 
horse  that  are  frequently  referred  to  at  drill  and  stable  duty ; 
grooming ;  a  few  simple  rules  regarding  the  care  of  the  horse ; 
personal  hygiene :  and  other  related  subjects. 

41.  As  soon  as  the  instruction  shall  have  advanced  so  far  as 
to  include  the  few  necessary  preliminary  drills,  collective  in- 
struction in  the  school  of  the  squad  will  be  taken  up.  This 
instruction  may,  like  the  individual  instruction,  properly  be 
carried  on  during  different  hours  of  the  same  drill  days,  in 
both  mounted  and  dismounted  phases.  The  recruits  meanwhile 
continue  their  progress  in  the  individual  instruction. 

42.  The  progress  in  mounted  collective  instruction  must  be 
carefully  regufated  in  accordance  with  the  recruit's  confidence 
and  skill  in  the  management  of  his  mount,  and  must  progress 
no  faster  than  tbe  recruit's  horsemanship  justifies;  but  this 
restriction  need  not  affect  the  dismounted  collective  instruc- 
tion, and  the  latter  may  properly  be  carried  forward  as  rap- 
idly as  the  state  of  the  dismounted  individual  instruction  will 
permit.  By  the  time  the  recruit's  instruction  in  equitation  has 
progressed  so  as  to  prepare  him  for  mounted  drills  at  the 
faster  gaits,  he  should  have  learned  the  mechanism  of  all  the 
movements  by  executing  them  at  a  walk.  His  course  of  dis- 
mounted training  should  meanwhile  have  included  not  only  the 
close-order  movements  of  the  squad  but  the  mechanism  of  ex- 
tended order,  practice  in  the  use  of  the  saber,  a  little  prepara- 
tory range  practice  with  the  rifle  and  pistol,  and  work  in  the 
nature  of  minor  field  exercises  involving  dismounted  fire 
action.  He  should,  during  the  same  period,  have  learned  the 
mechanism  of  passing  from  mounted  action  to  dismounted 
action  and  should  have  acquired  familiarity  with  all  com- 
mands and  signals  used  in  the  squad.  The  recruit  will  thus 
ordinarily  be  ready  to  enter  with  reasonable  efficiency  upon 


28         CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

certain  phases  of  the  work  in  the  platoon  and  troop  before  his 
individual  mounted  instruction  is  completed. 

43.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands : 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  or 
ARMS,  causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  boldface  type, 
those  of  execution  by  CAPITALS. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  in- 
terval of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit 
of  being  properly  understood ;  the  command  of  execution 
should  be  given  at  the  instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

The  preparatory  command  is  enunciated  distinctly,  with  a 
rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner  that  the  com- 
mand of  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

On  foot,  the  command  of  execution  is  firm  in  tone  and  brief. 

In  mounted  movements  the  preparatory  command  is  usually 
somewhat  prolonged  to  insure  its  being  heard,  and  the  com- 
mand of  execution  is  always  prolonged. 

Commands  tvill  he  given  no  louder  than  is  necessary. 

Laxness  or  indiiference  suggested  in  the  manner  of  giving 
a  command  is  certain  to  result  in  corresponding  carelessness 
of  execution. 

44.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or  being  at  the  halt, 
to  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun :  AS  YOU  WERE. 
Any  movement  ceases  and  the  former  position  is  resumed. 

45.  To  stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  marching, 
for  the  correction  of  errors,  the  commands  may  be  given:  1. 
In  place,  2.  HALT.  All  halt  and  stand  fast.  If  executed  dis- 
mounted, the  position  of  the  rifle  is  not  changed.  To  resume 
the  movement,  the  commands  are:  1.  Resume;  or,  1.  Resume, 
trot;  or,  1.  Resume,  gallop.  2.  MARCH.  The  movement  is 
then  completed  as  if  it  had  not  been  interrupted. 

46.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  to  sub- 
stitute the  word  "  left "  for  "  right,"  and  the  reverse,  to  have 
the  explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement  toward  the 
other  flank.  The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of 
the  movements  toward  either  flank.  The  substitute  word  of 
the  command  is  placed  within  parentheses^ 


INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION.  29 

47.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

Any  movement  on  foot  not  specially  excepted  may  be 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command 
double  time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

48.  As  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go 
wherever  their  presence  is  necessary. 

49.  Before  beginning  work,  the  instructor  always  assures 
himself  that  those  under  his  charge  are  neatly  dressed  and 
in  proper  uniform.  At  mounted  formations  he  Mall  also  re- 
quire that  horses  be  properly  groomed  and  that  equipments 
be  in  good  condition  and  adjusted  as  prescribed. 

50.  The  value  of  recruit  drill  as  an  exercise  in  teaching  dis- 
cipline must  be  kept  constantly  in  view  by  the  instructor.  No 
phase  of  the  instruction  is  of  such  great  ultimate  importance. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED. 

51.  The  object  of  this  school  is  to  develop  the  strength  and 
agility  of  the  trooper,  to  give  him  a  military  bearing,  to  fix 
in  him  the  habit  of  sustained  attention  and  instant  obedience, 
to  prepare  him  for  instruction  in  mounted  combat  with  the 
saber  and  pistol,  and  to  train  him  in  dismounted  combat  with 
the  rifle. 

In  order  to  make  rapid  progress  in  those  exercises  which 
form  the  basis  of  instruction  of  the  trooper,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  lessons  should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  given  indi- 
vidually. 

52.  Cautions  to  instructors. — The  instructor  explains  briefly 
each  movement,  first  executing  it  himself  if  practicable.  He 
requires  the  recruits  to  take  the  proper  positions  unassisted 
and  does  not  touch  them  for  the  purpose  of  correcting  them, 
except  when  they  are  unable  to  correct  themselves.  He  avoids 
keeping  them  too  long  at  the  same  movement,  although  each 
should  be  understood  before  passing  to  another.  He  exacts 
by  degrees  the  desired  precision  and  uniformity.  Recruits 
should  be  allowed  to  stand  at  ease  frequently.  During  these 
pauses  the  instructor  will  not  be  idle,  but  opportunity  will  be 
taken  to  talk  to  the  men,  to  encourage  them  to  ask  questions, 
and  so  to  develop  their  confidence  and  common  sense. 

53.  During  the  period  devoted  to  preliminary  instruction, 
without  arms,  the  recruit  will  be  prepared  for  subsequent  in- 
struction with  arms  by  being  taught  the  names  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  the  different  weapons  and  the  proper  methods 
of  cleaning,  disassembling,  assembling,  and  operating  the 
latter. 

Physical  Teaining. 

54.  The  physical  training  of  the  soldier  must  receive  due 
attention.  Its  direct  results  are  to  increase  the  soldier's 
strength,  agility,  and  endurance,  and  it  has  indirect  results 
of  far-reaching  Value  in  connection  with  discipline  and  morale. 
It  should  begin  with  his  first  instruction  as  a  recruit  and  be 
continued  throughout  his  entire  enlistment.    The  methods  pre- 

30 


INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT   ARMS.  31 

scribed  in  the  authorized  Manual  of  Physical  Training  will  be 
followed  with  a  view  to  malting  the  soldier's  development 
thorough  and  well  balanced,  and  to  prevent  the  instruction 
from  becoming  unnecessarily  tedious  and  monotonous. 

55.  In  the  earlier  phases  of  the  recruit  instruction,  and 
under  temporary  conditions  that  do  not  favor  the  carrying  out 
of  a  more  comprehensive  scheme  of  training,  special  attention 
will  be  given  to  the  setting-up  exercises.  Running,  jumping, 
and  swimming  are  phases  of  training  of  special  importance  to 
the  soldier. 

Individual  Insteuction  Without  Arms. 

56.  For  this  instruction  a  few  recruits,  usually  not  exceed- 
ing 3  or  4,  are  placed  (as  a  squad)  in  single  rank,  facing  to 
the  front. 

57.  To  teach  the  recruits  how  to  form  in  ranks  the  instructor 
will  first  place  them  in  single  rank,  arranged  according  to 
height,  the  tallest  man  on  the  right,  with  intervals  of  about  4 
inches  between  men,  and  will  explain  that  the  object  of  these 
intervals  is  to  give  freedom  of  movement  in  marching  and  in 
the  use  of  the  rifle  in  ranks.  He  will  then  direct  each  man 
singly  to  place  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  on  the  hip,  fingers 
pointing  downward,  and  draw  attention  to  the  fact  that  the 
indicated  interval  of  about  4  inches  may  be  verified  by  each 
man  so  placing  himself  that  his  right  arm,  when  hanging 
naturally  at  his  side,  touches  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his 
right.  When  this  is  understood,  he  will  cause  the  recruits  to 
fall  out  and  successively  to  place  themselves  as  before,  each 
man  verifying  his  interval  by  causing  his  right  arm  to  touch 
the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on  his  right,  the  latter's  hand 
being  on  his  hip,  as  already  explained.  He  will  then  explain 
that  at  the  command  FALL  IN  the  men  will,  beginning  with 
the  right  trooper,  successively  and  quickly  take  their  places 
in  rank,  each  man  placing  the  left  hand  at  the  hip  as  above 
and  dropping  his  hand  to  his  side  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his 
left  has  the  proper  interval. 

58.  The  recruits  having  had  sufficient  instruction  to  under- 
stand how  to  form  by  command,  the  instructor  commands: 
PALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  as  prescribed  in  par.  57,  each  taking 
the  position  of  attention  as  described  below." 


32  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

As  soon  as  the  recruits  have  had  sufficient  preliminary 
instruction  they  M^lll  habitually  be  formed  as  regularly  pre- 
scribed for  a  squad. 

POSITION    OF    THE    TROOPER,    OR    ATTENTION     (DISMOUNTED). 

59.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly ;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips ;  chest  lifted  and  arched ;  shoulders  square 
and  falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam 
of  the  breeches. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so  that 
the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical ;  eyes  to  the  front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls 
of  the  feet. 

THE   RESTS. 

60.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST; 
AT  EASE;  and  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attenton,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but 
is  not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place 
and  is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immobility. 

1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent;  clasp  the  hands,  without 
constraint,  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers  joined, 
left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand ;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness 
of  position. 

61.  Being  in  march,  at  the  command:  1.  Route  order,  2. 
MARCH;  or  1.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH,  the  men  keep  their  places 
in  ranks  but  are  not  required  to  keep  the  step ;  at  route  order, 
they  are  not  required  to  preserve  silence.  If  halted  from 
route  order,  the  men  stand  at  rest;  if  halted  from  at  ease,  they 
remain  at  ease. 


INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT   ARMS. 


Marching  at  route  order  or  at  ease,  rifles  are  carried  at  will, 
the  muzzles  elevated. 

62.  To  resume  the  attention:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  men  take  the  position  of  the  trooper,  dis- 
mounted (par.  59).  If  marching:,  the  cadenced  step  in  quick 
time  is  resumed  and  rifles,  if  carried,  are  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder. 

63.  To  dismiss  the  squad:  DISMISSED. 

EYES    BIGHT    OE   LEFT. 

64.  1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique, 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  man  in,  or  supposed  to  be 
in,  the  same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front. 

FACINGS. 

65.  To  the  flank:  1.  Right,  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot ;  place  the  left  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  right.  Left  face  is  executed  on  the 
left  heel  in  the  corresponding  manner. 

66.  To  the  rear :  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 
Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half 

foot  length  to  the  rear  and  slightly  to  the  left 
of  the  left  heel  without  changing  the  position  of 
the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  place  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

67.  1.   Hand,  2.   SALUTE. 
Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of 

the   forefinger   touches   the  lower   part   of  tlie 

headdress  above  the  right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  _ 

extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  forearm  -^^q  2,  par.  67. 

inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight; 

at  the  same  time  look  toward  the  person  saluted.     (TWO), 

Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the  side.     The  salute  for  officers  is 

the  same   (Fig.  1). 

For  rules  governing  salutes  see  Honors  and  Salutes. 


3821S 


-18- 


34         CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

STEPS    AND    MARCHINGS. 

68.  All  steps  and  m.irchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

69.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate 
of  120  steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches ;  the 
cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  ISO  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  the 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left,  right,  the  instant 
the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

70.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the  command ;  in  the 
latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 

Example :  1.  Forward,  double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

71.  It  should  l)e  explained  to  the  recruits  that  in  collective 
drills  and  exercises  one  of  the  troopers,  termed  the  guide, 
habitually  has  to  follow  a  leader  or  direct  himself  upon  some 
designated  objective,  the  other  troopers  regulating  their  march 
so  as,  in  line,  to  march  abreast  of  the  guide,  maintaining  their 
approximate  intervals.  The  necessity,  in  this  connection,  for 
learning  to  march  steadily  in  a  given  direction  without  waver- 
ing from  side  to  side  should  further  be  pointed  out.  Each 
recruit  should  then  be  practiced  individually  in  marching 
upon  a  designated  objective,  selecting  for  that  purpose  two 
points  of  direction  on  the  straight  line  that  passes  through 
the  trooper  and  the  objective  and  keeping  constantly  in  the 
prolongation  of  that  line.  When  the  objective  is  sufficiently 
distinct  it  should  be  taken  as  one  of  the  points  of  direction 
and  another  point  in  line  with  the  trooper  and  the  objective, 
and  either  nearer  or  more  distant  than  the  latter  be  selected 
as  a  second  point  to  fix  the  direction  of  march. 

QUICK  TIME  AND  DOUBLE  TIME. 

72.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time:  1. 
Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to 
the  right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 


INSTRrCTION"  WITHOUT   ARMS.  35 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock ;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the 
right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above;  continue  the  march.  The 
arms  swing  naturally. 

73.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march 
forward  in  double  time :  1.  Forward,  double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march,  raise  the 
forearms,  fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the 
waist  line,  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence 
of  double  time,  allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  to  the 
arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  MARCH,  given 
as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time 
and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

74.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  march,   given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 

ground,   advance   and  plant  the  other  foot   in  double  time; 
resume  the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO    MARK    TIME. 

75.  Being  in  march:  1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot 
in  rear  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each 
foot  about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  w^ith  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

THE    HALF    STEP. 

76.  1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in  double 
time. 

77.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be  executed 
one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time  :  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 


36  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

SIDE    STEP. 

78.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Right  (left)  step,  2. 
MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right ;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the 
cadence  of  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
other  command. 

BACK   STEP. 

79.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time :  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
other  command. 

TO  HALT. 

80.  To  stop  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching ;  raise  and  place  the  rear 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the 
hands  by  the  sides. 

TO    MARCH   BY   THE   FLANK. 

81.  Being  in  march :  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
in  marching,  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right 
foot. 

This  movement  is  not  executed  by  signal  except  in  foragers. 

TO  MAKCH   TO  THE  REAR. 

82.  Being  in  march:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  turn  to  the  right-about 


INSTEUCTION  WITHOUT   ASMS.  37 

on  the  balls  of  both  feet,  and  immediately  step  off  with  the 
left  foot. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right-about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

This  movement  is  not  executed  by  signal  except  in  foragers. 

CHANGE    STEP. 

83.  Being  in  march :  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left,  and  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand MARCH  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

TO  COUNT  FOURS. 

84.  Being  in  line,  at  the  command,  COUNT  FOURS,  all  the 
troopers  in  the  rank  except  the  right  trooper  execute  eyes  right 
and,  beginning  on  -the  right,  count  successively  1,  2,  3,  4. 
Each  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  as  he  counts. 

Fours  may  be  counted  at  the  halt  or  marching,  mounted  or 
dismounted,  in  line  or  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers.  In 
counting  fours  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers  the  elements 
count  off  successively  from  front  to  rear  in  the  column  and 
from  right  to  left  in  each  two.  Eyes  right  is  not  executed 
when  counting  fours  from  column  of  twos  or  troopers. 

TO   TAKE  INTERVALS   AND   DISTANCES. 

85.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Take  interval,  to  the  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  all  face  to  the  right  and  the  leading 
trooper  steps  off;  the  other  men  step  off  in  succession,  each 
following  the  preceding  trooper  at  four  paces. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  intervals, 
all  halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

88.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  squad :  1.  Assemble  to 
the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH.  The  trooper  on  the  right  stands 
fast.  The  other  troopers  face  to  the  right,  close  by  the  shortest 
line  and  face  to  the  front. 


38  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

87.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  fours  having  been  counted: 

1.  Take  distance,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  No.  1  moves  straight  to  the  front; 
Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  in  the  order  named,  move  straight  to  the  front, 
each  stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man  at  4  paces. 
The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their  distances. 

If  there  be  more  than  one  No.  1,  all  the  Nos.  1  move  for- 
ward together,  guiding  on  the  right  trooper.  The  same  prin- 
ciple applies  to  the  other  numbers. 

88.  The  normal  interval  and  distance  of  4  paces  indicated, 
respectively,  in  pars.  34  and  36,  may  be  increased  or  diminished 
by  adding  to  the  corresponding  preparatory  command  the  in- 
dication of  the  interval  or  distance  desired ;  thus :  1.  Take 
interval  to  the  right  at  1  pace,  2.  MARCH,  etc. ;  1.  Take  dis- 
tance, at  2  paces,  2.  MARCH,  etc. 

89.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad :  1.  Assemble, 

2.  MARCH. 

No.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ;  the  other  numbers  move 
forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 

Individual  Insteuction  With  Aems. 

manual  of  the  eifle. 

90.  When  the  recruit  has  made  fair  progress  in  the  instruc- 
tion witliout  arms,  including  that  required  by  par.  53,  he  is 
taught  the  manual  of  arms.  Instruction  without  arms  and 
that  with  arms  alternate. 

91.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  rifle : 
First.  The  rifle  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually 
carried  locked ;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  the 
"  safe."  At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the 
trigger  pulled. 

Second.  AVhenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  rifles  are 
immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2. 
ARMS;  3.  Order  (right  shoulder,  port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "  off "  except  when  cart- 
ridges are  actually  used. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE. 


39 


Fourth.  Fall  In  is  executed  with  the  rifle  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  witliout  arras.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Fifth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  rifle  is 
brought  to  the  riglit  shoulder  at  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Move- 
ments may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  pre- 
paratory command  with  the  words  at  trail,  as,  1.  At  trail,  for- 
ward, 2.'  MARCH;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking 
interval,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the  owler,  raise 
the  rifle  to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume  the  order  on 
halting. 

Sixth.  The  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The 
execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Seventh.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when 
without  arms. 

92.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual 
of  arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the 
balance  (center  of  gravity)  the  thumb  clasps 
the  rifle;  the  sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of 
the  hand.     (Figs.  6,  12.) 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  rifle  "  diagon- 
ally across  the  body  "  the  position  of  the  rifle, 
left  arm,  and  hand  are  the  same  as  in  port 
arms.      (Fig.  6.) 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  posi- 
tion in  the  manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last 
concludes  with  the  butt  of  the  rifle  about  3 
inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the 
left  hand  above  and  near  the  right,  steadying 
the  rifle,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm 
and  wrist  straight  and  inclining  downward,  all 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the  rifle.  To  complete  the 
order,  lower  the  rifle  gently  to  the  ground  with  the  right  hand, 
drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the  position  of  order 
arms.      (Fig.  2.) 

Allowing  the  rifle  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  arm  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 


Fig.  2,  par.  92. 


40 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time; 
the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to 
the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  ac- 
quired as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  rifles. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements 
are  for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and 
executed  in  detail ;  in  this  case  the  command  of  execution 
determines  the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the 
commands,  two,  three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first 
cautions:  By  the  numbers;  all  movement  divided  into  motions 
are  then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions : 
Without  the  numbers;  or  commands  movements  other  than 
those  in  the  manual  of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  rifle. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of 
weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle  may 
be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 
93.  Position  of  order  arms, 
standing :  The  butt 
rests  evenly  on  the 
ground,  barrel  to  the 
rear,  toe  of  the  butt 
on  a  line  with  toe  of, 
and  touching,  the  right 
shoe,  arms  and  hands 
hanging  naturally, 
right  hand  holding 
the  rifle  between  the 
t  h  u  m  b  and  fingers. 
(Figs.  3,  4.) 
1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
With  the  right  hand  carry  the  rifle  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  ver-FiG.5,par.94. 
tical,  grasp  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance, 
forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the  body.  (TWO) 
Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand.     (Fig,  5.) 


R 


Fig.  3,  par.  93.    Fig.  4,  par.  93. 
94.  Being  at  order  arms: 


MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE. 


41 


95.  Being  at  order  arms:   1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

With  tiie  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 
across  the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both 
hands ;  the  right,  palm  down,  at  the  small  of  the 
stock ;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the  balance ;  barrel 
up,  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 
junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder  ;  right 
forearm  horizontal ;  left  forearm  resting  against 
the  body ;  the  rifle  in  a  vertical  plane  parallel  to 
the  front.     (Fig.  6.) 

96.  Being  at  present  arms:    1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 
Carry  the  rifle  diagonally  across  the  body  and 

take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

97.  Being  at  port  arms:    1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
Carry  the  rifle  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of 

the  center  of  the  body  and  take  the  position  of 
present  arms. 

98.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms:    1.   Order,  pj(,Qp^j.y^5^ 
2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand ;  lower  and  carry  the  rifle  to  the 
right  Vvith  the  left  hand ;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order. 
(TWO)  Complete  the  order. 

99.  Being  at   order  arms:    1.   Right   shoulder, 
2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  rifle 
diagonally  across  the  body  ;  carry  the  right  hand 
quickly  to  the  butt,  embracing  it,  the  heel  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers.  (TWO)  Without 
changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the 
rifle  on  the  right  shoulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined 
at  an  angle  of  about  45°  from  the  horizontal, 
trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder, 
right  elbow  near  the  side,  the  rifle  in  a  vertical 
plane  perpendicular  to  the  front ;  carry  the  left 
hand,  thumb,  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  to 
the  small  of  the  stock,  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straight  and  elbow  down. 
(THREE)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side.     (JFig.  7.) 


42  CAVALRY  BIIILL  REGULATIONS. 

100.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO),  (THREE)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from 
port  arms. 

101.  Being  at  port  arms:   1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.     (TWO),   (THREE)  As 

in  right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

102.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:   1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

103.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:   1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
I     Execute  port  arms.     (THREE)   Execute  present  arms. 

104.  Being  at  present  arms:   1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (TWO),  (THREE),   (FOUR).     Execute 

right  shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

105.  Being  at  port  arms:   1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Carry  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the  left 

shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der ;  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel 
between  first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on 
the  stock.     ( TWO )  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder,  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At 
the  command  Arms  execute  port  arms  and  con- 
tinue in  cadence  to  the  position  ordered. 

106.  Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port, 
2.  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
small  of  the  stock.  (TWO)  Carry  the  rifle  to 
the  right  with  the  right  hand,  regrasp  it  with 
the  left  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

107.  Being  at  order  arms:   1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 
Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the 

rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent;  carry  the  muzzle 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  barrel  to  the 
left;   grasp  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  just 

Fig.  8,  par.  107.    below  the  stacking  swivel  and  with  the  right 

hand  below  and  against  the  left.     (Fig.  8.) 


MANTJAI   OF  THE  RIFLE. 


43 


Being  at  parade  rest:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTIOIT. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  rifle  opposite 
the  right  hip. 

108.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Trail,  2.  ARMS. 

Raise   the   rifle,   right   arm   slightly   bent,   and  ■  incline   the 
muzzle  forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  an 
angle  of  about  30°  with  the  vertical.     (Fig.  9.) 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  in-    . 
convenience  to  others,  the  rifle  may  be  grasped 
at  the  balance  and  muzzle  lowered  until  the 
rifle  is  horizontal ;  a  similar  position  in  the  left 
hand  may  be  used. 

109.  Being  at  trail  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 
Lower  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and  re- 
sume the  order. 


EIFLE    SALUTE. 


110.  Being  at  right  shoulder     fig.  9,  par.  108. 
arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of 
the  stock,  forearm  horizontal,  palm  of  the 
hand  down,  thumb  and  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined, 
forefinger  touching  end  of 
cocking  piece;  look  toward 
the  person  saluted.  (TWO) 
Drop  left  hand  by  the  side; 
turn  head  and  eyes  to  the 
front.     (Fig.  10.) 

With  the  rifle  on  the  left 
shoulder,  the  salute  is  rendered  in  a  corre- 
sponding manner  with  the  right  hand. 

111.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms:   1.  Rifle, 
2.  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right 
side,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined,  forefinger  against 
the  rifle  near  the  muzzle;  look  toward  the  person  saluted. 
(TWO)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side ;  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  front.     (Fig.  11.) 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  Honors  and  Salutes. 


Fig.  10,  par.  110. 


Fig.  11,  par.  111. 


44  CAVALRY  DKILL  REGULATIONS. 

THE    INSPECTION. 

112.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 
At  tlie  second  command,  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(TWO)  Seize  tlie  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  turn  the 
handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back  and  glance  at 
the  chamber.  Having  found  the  chamber 
empty,  or  having  emptied  it,  raise  the  head 
and  eyes  to  the  front.     (Fig.  12.) 

113.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order 
(right  shoulder,  port),  2.  AE,MS. 

At  the  preparatory  command,  push  the  bolt 
forward,  turn  the  handle  down,  pull  the  trig- 
ger, and  resume  port  arms.  At  the  command 
arms  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO  DISMISS. 

Fig.  12,  par.  112.         ^^^    Being  at  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS, 
3.  Port,  4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 

TO  STACK  AND  TAKE  AEMS. 

115.  Three  rifles  only  are  used  to  make  a  stack;  rifles  not 
SO  used  are,  in  this  connection,  termed  loose  rifles. 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:    STACK  ARMS. 

At  the  command  stack.  No.  3  steps  back  and  covers  No.  2, 
No.  2  raises  his  rifle  with  the  right  hand,  grasps  it  with  the  left 
at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his  feet,  barrel 
to  the  f^ont,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front  and  opposite 
the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger raising  the  stacking  swivel ;  No.  3  then  passes  his 
rifle,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  No.  2,  who  grasps  it  between  the 
bands  with  his  right  hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in 
advance  of  that  of  his  own  rifle  and  opposite  the  right  of  the 
interval,  the  right  hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages  with 
that  of  his  own  rifle ;  No  1  raises  his  rifle  with  the  right  hand, 
carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  guid- 
ing the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower  hook  of  the  swivel 


KNEELING  AND  LYING  DOWN.  45 

of  his  own  rifle  with  the  free  hook  of  that  of  No.  3 ;  he  then 
turns  the  barrel  outward  into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other 
two  rifles  and  lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground  to  the  right  of 
and  against  the  toe  of  his  right  shoe.  No.  2  lays  loose  rifles 
on  the  stack;  No.  3  resumes  his  place  in  line.  When  each 
man  has  finished  handling  rifles,  he  takes  the  position  of 
attention.  The  instructor  may  then  rest  or  dismiss  the  squad, 
leaving  the  arms  stacked. 

On  re-forming,   the  men  take  their  places   in  rear   of  the 
stacks. 

116.  Being  in  line,  behind  the  stacks:    TAKE  AEMS. 

No.  3  steps  back  and  covers  No.  2 ;  No.  2  returns  the  loose 
rifles,  then  grasps  his  own  rifle  with  the  left  hand,  the  rifle 
of  No  3  with  his  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ; 
No.  1  grasps  his  rifle  in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand. 
No.  1  disengages  his  rifle  by  raising  the  butt  from  the  ground 
and  then  turning  the  rifle  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from  the 
stack ;  No.  2  disengages  and  detaches  his  rifle  by  turning  it 
to  the  left,  and  then  passes  the  rifle  of  No.  3  to  him ;  No.  3 
resumes  his  place  in  line ;  all  resume  the 
order. 

KNEELING    AND    LYING    DOWN. 

117.  If  Standing:  KNEEL. 
Half  face  to  the  right ;  carry  the  right  toe 

about  1  foot  to  the  left  rear  of  the  left  heel; 

kneel  on  the  right  knee,  sitting  as  nearly  as 

possible  on  the  right  heel;  left  forearm  across 

left  thigh ;  rifle  remains  in  position  of  order 

arms,  right  hand  grasping  it  above  the  lower  Fig.  13,  par.  117. 

band.     This  is  the  position  of  order  arms,  kneeling.     (Fig.  13.) 

118.  If  standing  or  kneeling:  LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee 

against  left  heel ;  carry  back 

the  left  foot  and  lie  flat  on 

the     belly,     inclining     body 

about  35°  to  the  right ;  rifle 

Fig.  14,  par.  118.  horizontal,  barrel  up,  muzzle 

off  the  ground  and  pointed 

to  the  front ;  elbows  on  the  ground ;  left  hand  at  the  balance, 

right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  opposite  the  neck. 

This  is  the  position  of  order  arms,  lying  down.     (Fig.  14.) 


46  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

119.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground 
marked  by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  the  body  on  both  knees ;  stand  up,  faced 
to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

120.  If  lying  down :  KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees,  take  the  position  of  kneel. 
When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may  be 
taken  instead  of  the  position  kneeling. 

LOADINGS    AND    FIKINGS, 

121.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings  are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

122.  Rifles  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded  with- 
out command  until  the  command  unload  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted. 

123.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting. 
Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but 
may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  un- 
mistakable; in  such  cases  the  battle  sight  is  used  if  no  sight 
setting  is  announced.  The  troopers  must  be  practiced  repeat- 
edly in  locating  targets,  making  the  appropriate  sight  settings, 
and  simulating  fire  on  the  target  indicated. 

124.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announce- 
ment need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is 
necessary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming 
point  or  target  designated  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced 
until  a  change  is  ordered. 

125.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting;  if 
the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the  first 
command  for  firing. 

126.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to 
accurute  firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 


LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 


47 


127.  The  correct  estimation  of  distances  is  of  great  impor- 
tance in  connection  with  all  rifle  firing  except  that  at  short 
ranges.  Instruction  of  the  recruit  in  this  phase  of  training 
must  not  be  delayed  until  range  firing  is  taken  up,  but  should 
be  begun  in  the  early  instruction  and  carried  forward  pro- 
gressively, thus  gradually  developing  the  faculties  involved. 
In  the  same  way,  the  occasional  firing  of  a  few  shots,  first  with 
blank  cartridges  and  later  with  ball  cartridges  at  short  range 
and  under  conditions  permitting  very  careful  detailed  super- 
vision of  each  man's  position,  will  be  found  of  exceptional 
value  as  a  preliminary  exercise  to  the  course  of  range  firing 
prescribed  for  recruits.  Detailed  directions  for  conducting  the 
instruction  of  the  recruit  in  estimating  dis- 
tances and  in  rifle  firing  are  prescribed  in 
the  Small  Arms  Firing  Manual. 


Fig.  15,  par.  128. 


12S.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at 
halt:  1.  With  dummy  (blank  or  ball)  car- 
tridges, 2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  trooper  faces 
half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  1  foot, 
to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  gi*eatest  firmness  and  steadi- 
ness of  the  body,  raises  or  lowers  the  rifle 
and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  bal- 
ance, left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock, 
muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and.  turns 
the  cut-off  up.  With  the  right  hand  he 
turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes  a 
loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip 
slots,  places  the  thumb  on  the  pov/der  space 
of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers  extending 
around  the  rifle  and  tips  resting  on  the 
magazine  floor  plate ;  forces  the  cartridges 
into  the  magazine  by  pressing  down  with  the 
thumb :  without  removing  the  clip  thrusts 
|p  .„„       the   bolt   home,    turning   down   the   handle; 

'  ^^'''    ^*      turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  "  safe  "  ;  and 
carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  rifles  being  held 
as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 


Fig. 


48  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar; 
if  Ivneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh ;  if  sitting, 
the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees ;  if  lying  down,  the  left 
hand  steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of 
the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load.     (Figs.  15,  16.) 

129.  For  instruction  in  loading:  1.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 
Executed  as  above  described,  except  that  the  cut-off  remains 

"  off  "  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  Is  simulated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later, 
blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

130.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "  off,"  The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or 
in  part  while  "  off "  or  "  on "  by  pressing  cartridges  singly 
down  and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proper  place.  The  use 
of  the  rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as 
exceptional. 

TO    UNLOAD. 

131.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is 
closed  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it 
from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open, 
pressing  the  follow^er  down  and  back  to  engage  it  under  the 
bolt,  and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home ;  the  trigger  is  pulled. 
The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to 
the  belt,  and  the  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order. 


TO    SET   THE    SIGHT. 

132.  RANGE,  ELEVEN  HUNDRED  (EIGHT-FIETY,  ETC.),  or 
BATTLE  SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.     The  instructor 
explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 


LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 


49 


TO   FIRE   BY    VOLLEY. 

133.  1.  READY,  2.  AIM,  3.  Squad,  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  command  ready,  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  "  ready  "  ; 
at  the  command  aim,  raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands  and  sup- 
port the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollo\y  of  the  right  shoulder, 
right  thumb  clasping  the  stock,  barrel 
horizontal,  left  elbow  well  under  the  rifle, 
right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  in- 
cline the  head  slightly  forward  and  a 
little  to  the  right,  cheek  against  the  stock, 
left  eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through 
the  notch  of  the  rear  sight  so  as  to  per- 
ceive the  object  aimed  at,  second  joint  of 
forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front 
of  the  trigger  and  taking  up  the  slack; 

top  of  front  sight  is 

carefully  raised  into, 

and  held  in,  the  line 

of  sight. 

In  aiming  kneeling 

the  left  elbow  rests 

on  the  left  knee,  point  of  elbow  in  front 

of  kneecap.     In  aiming  sitting  the  elbows 
FIG.  18,  par.  133.         are  supported  by  the  knees.    ^ 

In  aiming  lying  down  raise  the  rifle 
with  both  hands,  rest  on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly 
against  the  right  shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire,  press  ,,^^s^r7-~~^^r-->^^^^"' 
the  finger  against  the  trigger  ; 
fire  without  deranging  the 
aim  and  without  lowering  or 
turning  the  rifle;  lower  the 
rifle  to  the  position  of  load  and  load.      (Figs.  17,  18,  19.) 

134.  To  continue  the  firing:  1.  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 
Each  command  is  executed  as  previously  explained.     Load 

(from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting 
home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at 
the  "ready." 

3821S  ^—18— — 4 


Fig.  17,  par.  133. 


Fig.  19,  par.  133. 


50  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

TO   FIRE   AT    WILL. 

135.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the  ready, 
anns  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target, 
fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  ordered  to  suspend  or 
cease  firing. 

136.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts:  FASTER  (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots 
per  minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges, 
devoting  the  minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum 
to  deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  deliber- 
ation, and  to  habituate  men  to  battle  conditions,  small  and 
comparatively  indistinct  targets  are  designated. 

TO   FIKE   BY   CLIP. 

137.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fire  at  will,  except  that  each 
man,  after  having  exhausted  the  cartridges  then  in  the  rifle, 
suspends  firing. 

TO    SUSPEND   FIEING. 

138.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 
repeats  same,  if  necessary,  or  commands :  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

Firing  stops ;  rifles  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  position 
of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  sights  unchanged. 
The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming  point,  or  the 
place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which  it  is 
expected  to  reappear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease 
firing. 

TO   CEASE   FIEING. 

139.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  rifles  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the 
position  of  load,  the  cut-off  turned  down  if  firing  from  maga- 
zine, the  cartridge  is  drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is  ejected,  the 
trigger  is  pulled,  sights  are  laid  down,  and  the  rifle  is  brought 
to  the  order. 


TARGET  DESIGNATION.  61 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes 
of  position  or  to  steady  the  men. 

140.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  tlie  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

TARGET   DESIGNATION. 

141.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the  firing 
line,  they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one  another 
target  and  aiming  point  designations  and  in  qiflckly  locating 
and  pointing  out  a  designated  target.  They  should  be  taught 
to  distinguish,  from  a  prone  position,  distant  objects,  par- 
ticularly troops,  both  with  the  naked  eye  and  with  field  glasses. 

Owing  to  the  invariable  custom  of  attempting  to  conceal  fire 
trenches,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  ready  method  of  indi- 
cating the  exact  location  of  an  indistinct  pit  or  trench  occupied 
or  supposed  to  be  occupied  by  an  enemy  in  order  that  effective 
fire  may  be  opened.  The  so-called  clock  system  furnishes  one 
of  the  simplest  devices  for  so  doing.  Two  methods  of  apply- 
ing this  system  are  indicated  below. 

First  method:  That  in  which  an  imaginary  clock  dial  is 
assumed  to  be  horizontal,  its  center  at  the  firing  point  and  the 
center-XII  line  of  the  dial  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the 
firing  line. 

To  designate  a  target  the  commander  announces,  for  ex- 
ample :  Target  at  11  o'clock,  range  800  yards,  a  trench.  Each 
man  looks  along  the  center-11  o'clock  line  of  his  imaginary 
dial,  estimates  the  distance  (800  yards)  along  that  line,  and 
thereby  locates  the  trench. 

In  this  method  it  is  necessary  that  the  target  be  visible  to 
the  naked  eye  and  that  each  man  be  able  to  estimate  distances 
with  fair  accuracy. 

Second  method:  That  in  which  an  imaginary  clock  dial  is 
assumed  to  be  vertical,  its  center  being  at  a  prominent,  distant 
point  selected  by  the  commander  and  called  the  reference 
point. 

To  designate  a  target  the  commander  announces,  for  ex- 
ample :  Reference  point,  that  clump  of  trees  on  hill  crest. 
When  the  men  have  located  the  reference  point  he  announces : 
Target  at  4  o'clock,  2  finger  widths,  range  1,000  yards,  a  gun 


52  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

pit.  By  a  finger  width  is  meant  the  distance  on  the  face  of 
the  assumed  vertical  clock  (actually  on  the  landscape)  inter- 
cepted by  the  breadth  of  a  man's  finger  held  perpendicularly 
to  his  hand  and  arm,  the  latter  being  fully  extended  in  the 
direction  of  the  reference  point. 

Each  man  looks  along  the  center-4  o'clock  line  of  the  imagi- 
nary (vertical)  dial,  measures,  on  this  line,  a  point  distant  2 
finger-widths  from  the  reference  point  (the  center  of  the 
dial ) ,  and  thus  locates  the  gun  pit. 

A  combination  of  the  two  methods  may  be  necessary  when, 
in  using  the  second  method,  the  reference  point  is  not  readily 
identified.  Thus,  in  the  case  mentioned,  it  may,  for  example, 
be  necessary  to  say:  Reference  point  at  1  o'clock,  clump  of 
trees  on  hill  crest. 

In  both  methods  the  sequence  of  commands  laid  down  should 
be  observed. 

Various  devices  for  pointing  out  indistinct  targets  may  be 
improvised  and  used. 

THE   USE    OF   COVEB. 

142.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in  the 
individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advantage 
of  natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  effectively 
upon  the  enemy ;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy,  he  must  do  so 
steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  practicable,  taking  advantage  of 
any  available  cover  while  setting  the  sights,  firing,  or 
advancing. 

To  teach  him  to  fire  easily  and  effectively,  at  the  same  time 
concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is  prac- 
ticed in  simulated  firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  kneeling,  and 
crouching  positions,  from  behind  hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of 
earth  or  rocks,  from  depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or 
windows.  He  is  taught  to  fire  around  the  right  side  of  his 
concealment  whenever  practicable,  or,  when  this  is  not  practi- 
cable, to  rise  enough  to  fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 

When  these  details  are  understood,  he  is  required  to  select 
cover  with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  him- 
self behind  it  in  proper  position  for  firing. 


USE  OF  COVER.  63 

143.  Tlie  disadvantage  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  ,/iace, 
however  good  tlie  concealment,  sliould  be  explained.  He  should 
be  taught  to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in 
advance  before  leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running  rapidlj'' 
toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He  should  be 
trained  in  springing  from  a  prone  position  behind  concealment, 
running  at  top  speed  to  cover  and  throwing  himself  behind  it. 
He  should  also  be  practiced  in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover 
by  crawling,  or  by  'lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the 
right  hand,  and  pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg- 
He  should  be  taught  that  when  fired  on  while  acting  inde- 
pendently, he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover,  and  then 
endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy ;  also  that  in  the  sun  he  is  visible 
to  a  much  greater  degree  than  when  in  the  shade. 

The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is  continued 
in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  squad  and  platoon,  but  he  must 
then  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the  platoon  or  troop 
and  the  effectiveness  of  its  fire  is  of  greater  importance  than 
the  question  of  cover  for  individuals  should  the  Hvo  considera- 
tions conflict.  He  should  also  be  taught  that  he  may  not  move 
about  or  shift  his  position  in  the  firing  line  except  to  get  a 
better  view  of  the  target. 

OBSEEVATION. 

144.  In  order  to  develop  the  faculty  of  rapid  and  accurate 
observation,  vrhich  is  of  great  importance  in  campaign,  the 
recruit  should  be  trained  in  taking  notice  of  his  surroundings, 
at  first  from  selected  positions  and  later  at  the  various  gaits. 

He  should  be  practiced  under  various  conditions  of  weather 
in  recognizing  colors  and  forms ;  in  pointing  out  and  naming 
military  features  of  the  ground ;  in  observing  the  effect  of  the 
direction  of  light  on  distinctness  of  objects;  in  recognizing 
at  gradually  increasing  distances  the  animate  and  inanimate 
objects  ordinarily  met  with  in  the  field ;  in  counting  distant 
objects ;  and  in  estimating  the  size  of  groups,  such  as  herds  of 
animals  and  bodies  of  troops. 


54  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

MANUAL    OF    THE    PISTOL. 

145.  Instruction  under  this  head  is  first  given  on  foot,  the 
recruit  having  previously  been  made  familiar  with  the  mecha-. 
nism  of  the  pistol,  the  names  of  the  principal  parts,  and  the 
method  of  cleaning,  assembling,  and  operating  it. 

When  a  lanyard  is  used  the  snaps  are  attached  to  the  butt 
of  the  pistol  and  the  magazine,  the  lanyard  is  passed  over  the 
head,  and  the  sliding  loop  drawn  snug  against  the  right  arm- 
pit. The  lanyard  should  then  be  of  just  such  length  that  the 
arm  can  be  extended  without  constraint. 

For  dismounted  instruction  with  the  pistol  the  troopers  may 
be  formed  with  or  without  intervals. 

During  instruction  in  the  manual  of  the  pistol  given  w^hen 
dismounted  with  intervals  each  trooper  terminates  the  first 
execution  of  raise  pistol  by  carrying  his  right  foot  24  inches 
to  the  right  and  placing  his  left  hand  in  the  position  of  his 
bridle  hand.  This  position  is  then  retained  until  return  pistol 
is  executed,  when  the  position  of  attention  is  resumed. 

At  all  other  times  when  movements  in  the  manual  of  the 
pistol  are  executed  dismounted  the  left  hand  is  raised  to  the 
position  of  the  bridle  hand  whenever  used  to  manipulate  the 
mechanism  and  is  then  dropped  again  to  the  side. 

146.  Except  in  the  act  of  firing,  the  automatic  pistol,  when 
actually  on  the  person,  whether  loaded  or 
unloaded,  will  be  carried  cocked  and  locked. 
At  all  other  times  the  hammer  will  be  lowered 
fully  dotvn. 

147.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster,  to  raise 
pistol :  1.  Raise,  2.  PISTOL. 

Raise:  Unbutton  the  flap  of  the  holster 
with  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back 
of  the  hand  outward. 

PISTOL:  Draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster; 
reverse  it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the 
stock  with  the  thumb  and  last  three  fingers, 
forefinger  outside  the  guard,  barrel  to  the 
1  iG.  20,  par.  147.  j,g^j,  ^j-,^  inclined  to  the  front  at  an  angle  of 
30°,  hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the 
point  of  the  right  shoulder.  This  is  the  position  of  raise  plstoL 
(Fig.  20.) 


MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL. 


55 


Fig.  21,  par.  148  (a). 
Stock  pointing  np- 


148.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  inspect  pistol:  1.  Inspection, 
2.  PISTOL. 

(a)  When  a  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Push  down  the  safety- 
lock  and  lower  the  right  hand  to  within 
easy  reach  of  the  left,  pistol  pointed  up- 
ward and  to  the  right  front  at  an  angle  of 
about  30° ;  grasp  the  corrugations  of  the 
slide  with  the  left  thumb  and  forefinger, 
thumb  to  the  right ;  thrust  upward  with 
the  right  hand,  thus  drawing  back  the 
slide  until  the  slide  stop  is  engaged  (fig. 
23)  ;  resume  raise  pistol  (fig.  21). 

(h)  When  no  magazine  is  in  the  pistol: 
Push  down  the  safety  lock  and  lower  the 
pistol  to  the  left  hand,  rotating  the  pistol 
so  that  the  sights  move  to  the  left,  barrel 
pointing  downward  and  to  the  left  front 
ward  and  to  the  right  front;  with  the  left  thumb  and  fore- 
finger grasp  the  corrugations  of  the  slide,  back  of  the  left  hand 
down  (fig.  22)  ;  change  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand  slightly 
until  the  thumb  presses  against  tbe  rounded  surface  of  the 
slide  stop ;  thrust  downward  and  to  the 
left  front  with  the  right  hand,  thus  draw- 
ing back  the  slide,  and  at  the  same  time 
press  the  slide  stop  with  the  right  thumb 
against  the  slide  until  it  engages ;  resume 
raise  pistol. 

Inspection  pistol  is  never  executed  with 
a  loaded  pistol  or  with  a  loaded  magazine 
in  the  pistol. 

149.  1.  Heturn,  2.  PISTOL. 
(a)  Being  at  raise  pistol;  lock  the 
pistol,  if  not  locked ;  lower  the  pistol  to 
Fig.  22,  par.  148  (6).  ^i^q  holster,  reversing  it,  muzzle  down, 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  right;  raise  the  flap  of  the  holster 
with  the  right  thumb ;  insert  the  pistol  in  the  holster  and 
thrust  it  home;  button  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the  right 
hand. 

(&)  Being  at  inspection  pistol;  (with  a  magazine  in  the 
pistol)  lower  the  pistol  to  the  left  hand  and  grasp  the  slide  as 
prescribed  for  inspection  pistol  without  magazine  (par.  148-&, 
fig.  22)  ;  thrust  downward  and  to  the  left  front  with  the  right 


5^8  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

hand,  thus  relieving  the  pressure  on  the  slide  stop,  and  at  the 
same  time  disengage  the  slide  stop  with  the  right  thumb; 
release  the  slide ;  reverse  and  lock  the  pistol ;  place  it  in 
holster  as  prescribed  in  (a).  If  there  is  no  magazine  in  the 
pistol,  lower  it  to  the  bridle  hand  as  in  load  (par.  151)  ;  draw 
back  the  slide  and  release  it ;  lock  the  pistol  and  place  it  in 
the  holster. 

When  the  last  shot  is  fired  the  slide  stop  engages  auto- 
matically. Return  pistol  is  then  executed  as  from  inspection 
pistol  (5). 

150.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  insert  a  magazine  in  the  pistol : 
1.  Insert,  2.  MAGAZINE,  or  2.  LOADED  MAGAZINE. 

(«)  When  a  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Lower  the  pistol 
into  the  left  hand,  rotating  it  so  that  the  sights  move  to  the 
left ;  grasp  the  slide  with  the  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  down, 
barrel  pointing  downward  to  the  left  front,  stock  pointing 
upward  to  the  right  front ;  release  the  magazine  catch  with 
the  middle  finger  of  the  left  hand;  withdraw  the  magazine 
with  the  right  hand ;  insert  the  designated  magazine  and 
resume  raise  pistol.  If  there  be  no  empty  space  in  the  maga- 
zine pocket  when  the  magazine  is  withdrawn  from  the  pistol, 
the  magazine  may  be  held  between  the  left  thumb  and  the 
stock  of  the  pistol  until  the  magazine  has  been  taken  from 
the  pocket  and  inserted ;  the  magazine  withdrawn  from  the 
pistol  is  then  inserted  in  the  magazine  pocket. 

Whenever  the  magazine  catch  is  released, 
the  right, hand  should  be  so  placed  as  to  limit 
the  motion  of  the  magazine  and  prevent  its 
falling  out. 

{b)  When  no  magazine  is  in  the  pistol: 
Lower  the  pistol  into  the  left  hand  and  grasp 
it  as  before ;  insert  the  designated  magazine 
and  relume  raise  pistol. 

A  loaded  magazine  will  never  be  inserted 
without  specific  command. 

151.  Being  at  raise  pistol  with  a  loaded  maga- 
zine in  the  pistol,  to  load:  LOAD:  Push  down 
Fig.  23,  par.  151.  the  safety  lock  and  lower  the  pistol  to  the 
bridle  hand  as  prescribed  for  inspection  pistol 
when  a  magazine  is  in  the  pistol  (par.  148  (a))  ;  operate  the 
slide ;  engage  the  safety  lock  with  the  right  thumb  and  raise 
pistol.     (Fig.  23.) 


MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL.  57 

To  simulate  loading  for  instruction,  first  withdraw  the 
empty  magazine. 

The  command  load  may  be  given  in  connection  with  the 
insertion  of  the  magazine,  for  example :  1.  Insert,  2.  LOADED 
MAGAZINE;  3.  LOAD. 

After  inserting  magazine,  reverse  the  pistol  and  load  as 
above  prescribed. 

152.  Being  in  any  position,  to  eject  the  cartridge  from  the 
receiver :  UNLOAD. 

Pass  the  pistol  iTito  the  left  hand  as  in  insert  magazine; 
release  the  magazine  catch  with  the  middle  finger  of  the  left 
hand,  slightly  disengaging  the  magazine ;  push  down  the  safety 
lock  with  tiie  right  thumb ;  operate  the  slide  to  eject  the 
cartridge;  engage  the  magazine;  raise  and  lock  the  pistol. 

153.  Being  in  anv  position,  to  withdraw  the  magazine  from 
the  pistol :  WITHDRAW  MAGAZINE. 

Handle  the  pistol  as  in  insert  magazine;  release  the  maga- 
zine catch ;  withdraw  tiie  magazine  and  execute  raise  pistol. 

Recruits  are  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and  firing  Avith- 
out  cartridges,  and  preferably  without  a  magazine  in  the 
pistol,  to  avoid  wear  on  the  magazine  lips.  Loading  and 
pointing  practice  should  be  had  at  all  gaits. 

154.  The  hammer  is  always  lowered  preparatory  to  placing 
the  pistol  in  the  arm  rack  or  other  place  of  deposit. 

155.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  lower  the  hammer : 

(a)  Using'  "both  hands:  Push  down  the  safety  lock;  assume 
the  position  of  load;  seat  the  right  thumb  firmly  on  the  ham- 
mer and  hold  it  there;  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  right  and 
press  the  grip  safety  with  the  left  thumb;  insert  the  fore- 
finger inside  the  trigger  guard ;  press  the  trigger  and  carefully 
let  the  hammer  down  with  the  right  thumb.  Resume  raise 
pistol. 

(h)  Using  but  one  hand:  Raise  the  right  hand  until  the 
muzzle  of  the  pistol  is  well  above  the  head ;  disengage  the 
safety  lock;  seat  the  ball  of  the  right  thumb  firmly  on  the 
hammer ;  bear  down  the  grip  safety  by  pressure  on  the  ham- 
mer;  press  the  trigger  and  carefully  let  down  the  hammer 
with  the  right  thumb. 

156.  To  charge  the  magazine:  Hold  the  magazine  in  the  left 
hand,  open  end  up,  rounded  side  to  the  riglit.  Take  the  car- 
tridge in  the  right  hand,  thumb  on  the  rim,  bullet  end  pointing 


68  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

to  the  right ;  place  the  rim  on  the  end  of  the  magazine  fol- 
lower ;  force  down  the  magazine  spring  and  slip  the  cartridge 
to  the  left  of  the  magazine.  The  next  cartridge  is  similarly- 
slipped  in  by  placing  it  on  the  cartridge  just  inserted  and 
forcing  down  the  spring. 

The  magazine  may  be  charged  with  any  number  of  car- 
tridges from  one  to  seven. 

Before  dismissing  the  squad,  pistols  will  be  inspected,  and 
if  found  loaded,  will  be  unloaded  and  magazines  withdrawn 
to  prevent  loaded  or  partially  loaded  magazines  being  left  in 
the  pistol.  Except  at  target  practice,  on  guard  duty,  or  active 
service,  the  pistol  is  habitually  carried  unloaded  with  empty 
magazine. 

EMPLOYMENT  OF  THE  PISTOL. 

157.  The  pistol  is  primarily  a  weapon  for  use  at  very  close 
range.  Its  characteristic  employment  by  cavalry  is  in  mounted 
firing  from  a  horse  moving  at  a  rapid  gait.  Under  such  con- 
ditions its  effectiveness  is  almost  negligible  at  ranges  over  25 
yards  against  individuals  or  over  50  yards  against  a  line  in 
close  order  except  in  the  hands  of  exceptionally  skilled  shots, 
and  the  effectiveness  rapidly  decreases  at  ranges  over  5  to  10 
yards.  These  limitations  on  the  use  of  the  pistol  are  due  not 
to  its  short  range  as  a  weapon  but  to  the  difficulties  of  direct- 
ing it  accurately  under  the  conditions  of  use.  While  the  pistol 
is  a  weapon  employing  fire  action,  its  tactical  employment  is 
more  nearly  analogous  to  that  of  either  the  saber  or  bayonet 
than  to  that  of  the  rifle. 

158.  From  the  preceding  paragraph  it  results  that  there  is 
no  need,  in  connection  with  the  employment  of  the  pistol  as  a 
weapon  of  mounted  combat,  for  commands  that  purport  to 
designate  a  target  or  to  indicate  range  or  other  details  for  the 
direction  of  fire.  The  only  commands  ordinarily  needed  are 
those  required  for  instruction  purposes.  (See  Small- Arms 
Firing  Manual. ) 

159.  The  effectiveness  of  the  individual  trooper  in  mounted 
pistol  combat  depends  upon  : 

(a)  Thorough  familiarity  with  the  weapon  and  facility  in 
manipulating  its  mechanism  under  all  conditions.  This  is 
acquired  by  training  in  the  Manual  of  the  Pistol.  Constant 
practice  is  necessary  in  rapidly  drawing  the  pistol  from  its 


MANUAL  OF  THE   SABER,  DISMOUNTED.  59 

holster,  loading  it,  withdrawing  magazine,  and  inserting  mag- 
azine, at  tirst  at  a  halt,  later  in  motion,  and  finally  at  rapid 
gaits. 

(b)  Skill  in  firing  the  pistol.  This  is  acquired  by  actual 
practice  in  the  preliminary  exercises  and  range  firing  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

(c)  Control  of  the  horse.  This  is  acquired  in  the  School  of 
the  Trooper. 

(d)  The  thorough  inculcation  in  the  trooper  of  the  habit  of 
withholding  his  fire  until  tcithin  close  range.  This  can  well 
be  accomplished  in  individual  training  by  exercises  in  firing  or 
simulating  fire  at  one  or  more  silhouette  targets.  The  trooper 
approaches  at  a  gait  graduated  in  accordance  with  his  state 
of  training  and  is  required  to  withhold  his  fire  until  he  passes 
a  certain  line. 

160.  The  other  elements  that  enter  into  effective  use  of  the 
pistol  as  a  mounted  weapon  relate  to  the  formations  and  tac- 
tics employed  rather  than  to  individual  training.  They  per- 
tain, therefore,  to  collective  rather  than  individual  instruction. 

161.  If  any  command  be  required  in  connection  with  the 
characteristic  use  of  the  pistol  in  mounted  combat,  it  consists 
simply  of  an  indication  of  the  moment  at  which  fire  may  begin. 
For  this  purpose  the  command  COMMENCE  FIRING  may  be 
employed  in  any  case  for  which  a  command  may  be  desirable. 

MANUAL   OF   THE    SABER,    DISMOUNTED. 

162.  For  this  instruction,  dismounted,  the  saber  in  the  scab- 
bard is  carried  in  the  left  hand. 

In  the  position  of  attention  the  saber  will  be  held  upright  by 
the  side,  guard  to  the  front,  the  shoe  of  the  scabbard  resting 
on  the  ground  close  to  the  left  foot  and  just  in  front  of  the 
heel.  The  left  arm  will  be  extended,  the  fingers  and  thumb 
grasping  the  scabbard,  back  of  the  hand  outward. 

In  the  necessary  movements  on  foot  with  the  saber  in  hand 
the  saber  is  carried  Mith  the  hilt  to  the  front  and  higher 
than  the  shoe  of  the  scabbard. 

Officers,  dismounted,  may  carry  the  saber  in  the  hollow  of 
the  left  arm,  elbow  bent,  forearm  horizontal,  guard  of  the 
saber  to  the  front,  blade  vertical.  An  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  habitually  draws  saber  before  giving  any  com- 


60  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

maiicls  involving  the  use  of  that  weapon  by  those  under  him. 
Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  out  of  ranks  draw  saber 
only  on  occasions  when  the  men  draw  saber  unless  otherwise 
prescribed.    The  saber  may  be  drawn  for  signaling. 

163.  The  saber  is  intended  for  mounted  combat.  The  in- 
structor will  impress  upon  the  recruit  from  the  first  that  the 
use  of  the  saber  in  war  is  ordinarily  limited  to  occasions  of 
mounted  combat,  and  that  instruction  on  foot  in  its  use  is 
merely  preliminary  to  the  mounted  training  which  the  recruit 
will  receive  later. 

164.  For  dismounted  instruction,  if  the  squad  is  in  ranks, 
the  instructor  causes  intervals  or  distances  (pars.  85-88)  to  be 
taken  before  drawing  saber. 

165.  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  draw,  grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  about  4  inches  from  the  mouth,  place  the  left  hand 
against  the  thigh,  and  carry  the  hilt  to  the  front;  turn  the 
head  slightly  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  position  and 
glance  at  the  saber  knot ;  engage  the  right  wrist  in  the  saber 
knot  and  give  it  two  turns  inward  to  secure  it ;  grasp  the  hilt 
with  the  right  hand  and  draw  the  saber  about  6  inches  from 
the  scabbard  and  look  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  saber,  draw  the  saber  quickly,  raising  the 
arm  to  the  front  and  upward  to  its  full  length,  saber  in  pro- 
longation of  the  arm.  Make  a  short  pause  with  the  saber 
raised,  then  bring  it  down  with  the  blade  against  the  hollow 
of  the  right  shoulder,  guard  to  the  front,  right  hand  at  the 
hip,  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  on  the  back  of  the  gTip  and 
the  elbow  back. 

The  left  hand  holds  the  scabbard  as  at  attention. 

This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber  dismounted. 

166.  1.  Return,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  return,  grasp  the  scabbard  as  in  draw  saber 
and  carry  the  opening  to  the  front.  Carry  the  saber  to  the 
front  with  arm  half  extended  until  the  thumb  is  about  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  chin,  the  blade  vertical,  guard  to  the 
left,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  side  of  the  grip,  the  little 
finger  joined  with  the  others. 

At  the  command  saber,  move  the  wrist  to  opposite  the  left 
shoulder,  lower  the  blade  and  pass  it  across  and  along  the 
left  arm,  point  to  the  rear.    Turn  the  head  to  the  left,  fixing 


MANUAL  OF  THE   SABER,  DISMOUNTED. 


61 


the  eyes  upon  the  opening  of  the  scabbard ;  raise  the  right 
hand  and  insert  the  blade  in  the  scabbard  and  push  it  home. 
Disengage  the  wrist  from  the  saber  knot  and  resume  the 
position  of  attention. 

167.  Being  at  carry  saber:   1.  Present,  2.  SABER. 
Without  changing  the  position  of  tlie  left  hand,  execute  at 

the  command  saber  what  is  prescribed  in  par.  166  at  the  com- 
mand return,  except  that  the  grip  is  held  in  the  full  grasp. 
The  saber  is  said  to  be  held  in  the  full  grasp  when  all  four 
fingers  grasp  the  grip,  the  thumb  extending  along  the  back 
in  the  groove,  the  fingers  pressing  the  back  of  the  grip  against 
the  heel  of  the  hand. 

Officers  at  the  command :  1.  Present,  execute  present  saber 
as  described  above ;  at  the  command :  2.  SABER,  they  lower 
the  saber  until  the  point  is  12  inches  from  the  ground  and 
directed  to  the  front,  guard  to  the  left,  right  arm  straight, 
hand  beside  the  thigh.  Mounted,  the  point  is  lowered  to  the 
level  of  the  stirrup. 

168.  Being  at  carry  saber:   1.  Port,  2.  SABER. 

Carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right,  bring  the 
left  hand  to  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand  and  raise  the 
saber  to  a  vertical  position,  guard  to  the  front,  grip  held  in 
the  full  grasp,  right  hand  about  12  inches  in  front  of  the 
shoulder. 

To  resume  the  carry:   1.  Carry,  2.  SABER. 

169.  Being  at  carry  saber,  or  in  any  position 
Carry  the  right 

foot  about  24 
inches  to  the  right 
and  bend  knees  to 
simulate  the  posi- 
tion mounted.  In- 
cline the  body  to 
the  front  from  the 
waist  ( not  the 
hips).  Let  the 
blade  fall  to  the 
front  to  a  position 
nearly  horizontal, 
elbow  well  away  from  the  body,  forearm  and  saber  forming  one 
straight  line,  guard  to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of  the  ad- 


GUARD. 


Ou^rdL  to  the,  #  I?i<ght  Tront 


Fig.  24,  par,  169. 


62  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

versary's  breast,  the  left  hand  in  the  position  of  the  bridle 
hand.     (Fig.  24.) 

170.  Being  at  carry  saber:  1.  Inspection,  2.  SABER. 
Carry  the  right  hand  upward,  arm  half  extended  until  the 

thumb  is  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  grip  held  in  the  full  grasp, 
blade  vertical,  guard  to  the  left.  Make  a  slight  pause,  then 
loosen  the  grasp  on  the  grip  and  turn  the  saber  with  the 
guard  to  the  right.  Again  make  a  slight  pause,  then  resume 
the  first  position  and  return  to  the  carry. 

171.  Saber  exercise  is  conducted,  and  instruction  given,  as 
prescribed  in  the  Saber  Exercise.  For  Manual  of  the  Saber, 
Mounted,  see  par.  245. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED. 

Genekal  Provisions. 

172.  Ohject. — The  primary  object  of  this  school  is  to  train 
the  trooper  in  horsemanship  and  in  the  ready  use  of  his 
weapons  while  mounted. 

173.  The  instructor. — It  is  essential  that  the  instructor  (par. 
87)  be  a  skilled  and  experienced  horseman,  properly  mounted. 
He  should  always  supplement  the  original  e:fplanation  of  a 
movement  by  executing  it  himself,  so  that  the  recruits  may 
actually  see  the  result  that  is  desired  and  the  means  by 
which  it  is  effected. 

174.  Cautions  to  instructors. — The  instructor  must  first  de- 
velop the  confidence  of  the  recruit,  give  him  a  proper  seat, 
and  make  him  supple  on  the  horse.  Progress  should  be 
suited  to  his  capacity  and  exempt  him  as  far  as  practicable 
from  falls  or  other  accidents.  Instruction  in  the  use  of  the 
aids  and  in  the  means  employed  to  train  the  horse  to  obey 
them  will  follow. 

When  the  recruit  has  acquired  confidence  in  his  ability  to 
ride  and  control  his  horse  he  will  be  instructed  in  the  use  of 
arms  mounted. 

Instruction  is  given  individually ;  every  new  movement  is 
made  the  object  of  a  particular  lesson  given  to  each  trooper 
in  turn. 

During  the  exercise  the  instructor  avoids  general  remarks 
and  (in  so  far  as  possible)  unfamiliar  terms;  in  the  correc- 
tion of  faults  he  addresses  by  name  those  committing  them. 

He  passes  frequently  from  one  trooper  to  another  repeating 
advice  and  endeavoring  to  impress  upon  the  troopers  the  prin- 
ciples embodied  in  the  regulations.  In  doing  this  he  need  not 
use  the  language  of  the  text. 

The  instructor  may  be  on  foot  or  mounted.  For  the  first 
lessons  it  is  advantageous  to  remain  on  foot  so  as  better  to 
explain  movements  and  correct  faults. 

63 


64  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Steady,  well-traiued  horses  are  selected  for  the  first  lessons. 
The  troopers  exchange  horses  from  time  to  time  during  the 
lesson  on  indication  from  the  instructor. 

There  should  be  frequent  rests,  especially  with  recruits. 
During  these  rests  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  opportunity 
to  question  the  troopers  respecting  the  instruction  they  have 
received. 

In  all  exercises  the  instructor  varies  the  gait  so  as  not  to 
weary  the  troopers  or  the  horses.  The  instruction  is  conducted 
without  hurry.    The  daily  work  begins  and  ends  at  the  walk. 

175.  The  standard  required  of  troopers. — To  be  a  good  mili- 
tary horseman  each  trooper  should — 

{a)  Have  a  strong  seat. 

(&)  Be  able  \o  apply  correctly  the  aids  by  which  a  horse  is 
controlled. 

(c)  Be  capable  of  covering  long  distances  on  horseback  with 
the  least  possible  fatigue  to  his  horse  and  to  himself. 

id)  Be  able  to  use  his  horse  to  the  utmost  advantage  in  a 
mounted  fight. 

(e)  Be  capable  of  riding  across  country. 

(/)  Under  proper  directions,  be  able  to  train  an  unbroken 
horse  in  garrison  and  in  the  field,  understand  how  to  detect 
and  treat  the  minor  ailments  to  which  the  horse  is  liable,  and 
be  a  good  groom. 

All  officers,  in  addition  to  being  good  military  horsemen 
and  instructors  in  riding,  must  be  able  to  train  remounts  and 
to  direct  their  training. 

176.  Periods. — For  convenience  in  imparting  instruction,  and 
in  order  that  it  may  progress  in  a  natural  sequence,  the 
school  of  the  trooper  is  divided  into — 

(a)  First  period,  or  preparatory  exercises  and  explanations. 

(&)  Second  period,  or  M'ork  on  the  snaffle. 

(c)  Third  period,  or  work  on  the  double  snaffle. 

Id)  Fourth  period,  or  work  on  the  bit  and  bridoon. 

First  Period,  or  Preparatory  Exercises  and  Explanations. 

General  provisions   (par.  177). 

To  fold  the  saddle  blanket  (par.  178). 

To  put  on  the  blanket  and  surcingle  (par.  179). 

To  put  on  and  take  off  the  watering  bridle  (par.  ISO). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        66 

To  saddle  (pars.  181,  182). 

To  unsaddle  (par.  183). 

To  put  on  and  take  off  the  bit  and  bridoon  bridle  (pars. 
184-186). 

Stand  to  horse  (par.  187). 

To  lead  out  (pars.  188,  189). 

Stirrups   (par.  190). 

To  mount  (pars.  191-193). 

To  dismount  (pars.  192,  193). 

To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate  them  (pars. 
194-197). 

Position  of  the  trooper,  or  attention,  mounted  (pars.  198, 
199). 

The  aids  (pars.  200-208). 

Suppling  exercises   (pars.  209-217). 

To  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground  (pars.  218-220). 

To  rest  (par.  221). 

To  dismiss  (par.  222). 

Stand  to  heel  (par.  223). 

177.  General  provisions. — For  the  preparatory  exercises  the 
horses  are  saddled  and  equipped  with  the  snaffle  bit  only, 
saddles  stripped.     Spurs  are  not  worn. 

These  exercises  are  conducted  at  first  in  a  riding  hall  or 
on  an  inclosed  course  out  of  doors. 

References  to  the  riding  hall  are  to  be  understood  as  ordi- 
narily applying  equally  to  any  out-of-doors  inclosure  or  to 
the  space  included  in  any  course  marked  off  for  instruction 
in  equitation  (pars.  269,  296). 

At  first,  the  troopers,  dismounted,  load  their  horses  to  the 
riding  hall  and  return  them  to  the  stable  in  the  same  manner. 
When  they  have  received  sufficient  instruction  they  go  and 
return  mounted. 

As  soon  as  the  instruction  has  advanced  sufficiently  to  per- 
mit the  use  of  such  commands  and  methods,  the  instructor  will 
confine  himself  to  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Trooper. 

TO   FOLD   THE    SADDLE   BLANKET. 

178.  The  blanket,  after  being  well  shaken,  w^ll  be  folded  into 
six  thicknesses,  as  follows:  Hold  it  well  up  by  the  two  cor- 

38218  °— 18 5 


66  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ners,  the  long  way  up  and  down;  double  it  lengthwise  (so  the 
fold  will  come  between  the  "  U  "  and  "  S  " ) ,  the  folded  corner 
(middle  of  blanket)  in  the  left  hand;  take  the  folded  corner 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  thumb 
pointing  to  the  left ;  slip  the  left  hand  down  the  folded  edge 
two-thirds  its  length  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  second 
finger;  raise  the  hands  to  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the 
blanket  between  them  extended ;  bring  the  hands  together, 
the  double  fold  falling  outward ;  pass  the  folded  corner  from 
the  right  hand  into  the  left  hand,  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger,  slip  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  between 
the  folds  and  seize  the  double  folded  corner;  turn  the  left 
(disengaged)  corner  in  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand,  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand 
stretching  and  evening  the  folds ;  after  evening  the  folds  grasp 
the  corners  and  shake  the  blanket  well  in  order  to  smooth  the 
folds;  raise  the  blanket  and  place  it  between  the  chin  and 
breast;  slip  the  hands  down  half  way,  the  first  two  fingers 
outside,  the  other  fingers  and  thumb  of  each  hand  Inside,  seize 
the  blanket  with  the  thumbs  and  first  two  fingers  and  let  the 
part  under  the  chin  fall  forward ;  hold  the  blanket  up,  arms 
extended,  even  the  lower  edges,  seize  the  middle  points  be- 
tween the  thumbs  and  forefingers,  and  flirt  the  outside  part 
over  the  right  arm ;  the  blanket  is  thus  held  before  placing  it 
on  the  horse. 

While  retaining  the  general  method  of  folding  the  blanket 
as  above  indicated,  troop  commanders  will  require  the  blanket 
to  be  refolded  frequently  with  a  view  to  equalizing  the  wear 
on  the  different  sections  of  the  blanket. 

TO    PUT   ON    THE    BLANKET   AND    SUKCINGLE. 

179.  The  instructor  commands:  BLANKET. 

Approach  the  horse  on  the  near  ( left )  side,  with  the  blanket 
folded  and  held  as  just  described;  place  it  well  forward  on 
his  back  by  tossing  the  part  of  the  blanket  over  the  right  arm 
to  the  off  (right)  side  of  the  horse,  still  keeping  hold  of  the 
middle  points ;  slide  the  blanket  once  or  twice  from  front  to 
rear  to  smooth  the  hair.  Being  careful  to  raise  the  blanket 
in  bringing  it  forward,  place  the  blanket  with  the  forefinger  of 
the  left  hand  on  the  withers  and  the  forefinger  of  the  right 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        67 

hand  on  the  backbone,  the  blanket  smooth ;  it  should  then  be 
\^ell  forward  with  the  edges  on  the  left  side ;  remove  the  locks 
of  mane  that  may  be  under  it;  pass  the  buckle  end  of  the 
surcingle  over  the  middle  of  the  blanket  and  buckle  it  on  the 
near  side  a  little  below  the  edge  of  the  blanket. 

TO  PUT  ON  AND   TAKE  OFF  THE  WATERING  BRIDLE. 

180.  The  instructor  commands:  BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  bit  in  the  left;  ap- 
proach the  horse  on  the  near  side,  slip  the  reins  over  the 
horse's  head  and  let  them  rest  on  his  neck ;  reach  under  and 
engage  the  snap  in  the  right  halter  ring ;  insert  the  left  thumb 
in  the  side  of  the  horse's  mouth  above  the  tush  and  press  open 
the  lower  jaw ;  insert  the  bit  and  engage  the  snap  in  the  left 
halter  ring.  The  bit  should  hang  so  as  to  touch,  but  not  draw 
up,  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  At  the  command  unbridle,  pass 
the  reins  over  the  horse's  head  and  disengage  the  snaps. 

TO    SADDLE. 

181.  (a)  (McClellan  saddle.)  For  instri*?tion  the  saddle  may 
be  placed  four  yards  in  rear  or  front  of  the  horse.  The  stir- 
rups are  crossed  over  the  seat,  the  right  one  uppermost ;  then 
the  cincha  and  cincha  strap  are  crossed  a]x>ve  the  stirrups,  the 
strap  uppermost.  The  blanket  having  been  placed  as  previ- 
ously explained,  the  instructor  commands  :  SADDLE. 

Seize  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  wath  the  left  hand  and  the 
cantle  with  the  right,  approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side 
from  the  direction  of  the  croup  and  place  the  center  of  the 
saddle  on  the  middle  of  the  horse's  back,  the  end  of  the  side 
bar  about  three-finger  widths  behind  the  point  of  the  shoulder 
blade;  let  down  the  cincha  strap  and  cincha,  pass  to  the  off 
side,  adjust  the  cincha  and  straps,  and  see  that  the  blanket 
is  smooth ;  return  to  the  near  side,  raise  the  blanket  slightly 
under  the  pommel  arch  so  that  the  withers  may  not  be  com- 
pressed ;  take  the  cincha  strap  in  the  right  hand,  reach  under 
the  horse  and  seize  the  cincha  ring  with  the  left  hand,  pass 
the  end  of  the  strap  through  the  ring  from  underneath  (from 
inside  to  outside),  then  up  and  through  the  upper  ring  from 
the  outside;  if  necessary,  make  another  fold  in  the  same 
manner. 


68  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  strap  is  fastened  as  follows :  Pass  the  end  through  the 
upper  ring  to  the  front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand,  place  the 
fingers  of  the  right  between  the  outside  folds  of  the  strap, 
pull  from  the  horse  with  the  right  hand  and  take  up  the 
slack  with  the  left;  cross  the  strap  over  the  folds,  pass  the 
end  of  it  with  the  right  hand  underneath  and  through  the 
upper  ring  back  of  the  folds,  then  down  and  under  the  loop 
that  crosses  the  folds  and  draw  it  tightly ;  weave  the  ends  of 
the  strap  into  the  strands  of  the  cincha. 

Another  method  of  fastening  the  cincha  strap  is  as  follows: 
Pass  the  end  through  the  upper  ring  to  the  rear ;  seize  it 
with  the  right  hand ;  place  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  between 
the  outer  folds  of  the  strap ;  pull  from  the  horse  with  the  left 
hand  and  take  up  slack  with  the  right;  pass  the  end  of  the 
strap  underneath  and  draw  it  through  the  upper  ring  until  a 
loop  is  formed ;  double  the  loose  end  of  the  strap  and  push  it 
through  the  loop  and  draw  the  loop  taut.  The  free  end 
should  be  long  enough  to  be  seized  conveniently  with  the 
hand. 

Having  fastened  the  cincha  strap,  let  down  the  right  stirrup 
and  then  the  left. 

The  surcingle  is  then  buckled  over  the  saddle,  and  should  be 
a  little  looser  than  the  cincha. 

The  cincha  when  first  tied  should  admit  a  finger  between 
it  and  the  belly.  After  exercising  for  a  while  the  cincha  will 
be  found  too  loose  and  should  be  tightened. 

(Jj)  (S^vice  saddle,  model  of  1912.)  Troops  equipped  with 
this  model  will  saddle  as  prescribed  for  the  McClellan  saddle 
with  the  following  modifications : 

Place  the  saddle  on  the  blanket  so  that  the  front  edge  of 
the  side  bar  approaches  the  shoulder  blade  without  pressing 
upon  it.  After  the  saddle  has  been  so  placed,  let  down  the 
girth ;  pass  to  the  off  side,  adjust  the  girth  and  saddle  skirt, 
and  see  that  the  blanket  is  smooth,  return  to  the  near  side 
and  push  the  blanket  well  up  into  the  pommel  arch ;  reach 
under  the  horse,  seize  the  girth  with  the  left  hand  and  bring 
up  its  free  end  to  the  near  side  of  the  saddle ;  with  the  right 
hand  raise  the  saddle  skirt  and  buckle  the  girth  straps  to  the 
corresponding  buckles  of  the  girth,  beginning  with  the  forward 
strap,  lower  the  saddle  skirt  and  let  down  the  stirrups  begin- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        69 

ning  with  the  right  stirrup.     The  girth  should  ordinarily  be 
about  4  inches  in  rear  of  the  point  of  the  elbow. 

182.  To  approximate  the  length  of  the  stirrup  straps  before 
mounting,  they  are  adjusted  so  tliat  the  length  of  the  stirrup 
strap,  including  the  stirrup,  is  about  1  inch  less  than  the 
length  of  the  arm,  fingers  extended. 

TO   UNSADDLE. 

183.  The  instructor  commands:  UNSADDLE. 

(a)  (INIcClellan  saddle.)  Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the 
horse ;  unbuckle  and  remove  the  surcingle ;  cross  the  left  stir- 
rup over  the  saddle ;  loosen  the  cincha  strap  and  let  down  the 
cincha ;  pass  to  the  oif  side,  cross  the  right  stirrup,  then  the 
cincha ;  pass  to  the  near  side,  cross  the  cincha  strap  over  the 
saddle ;  grasp  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand,  the  cantle  with 
the  right,  and  remove  the  saddle  over  the  croup  and  place  it 
in  front  or  rear  of  the  horse  as  may  be  directed,  pommel  to 
the  front ;  grasp  the  blanket  at  the  withers  with  the  left  hand 
and  at  the  loin  with  the  right,  remove  it  in  the  direction  of 
the  croup,  the  edges  falling  together,  wet  side  in,  and  place  it 
on  the  saddle,  folded  edge  on  the  pommel. 

If  in  the  stable,  place  the  saddle  on  its  peg  when  taken  off 
the  horse. 

(6)  (Service  saddle,  model  of  1912.)  Stand  on  the  near 
side  of  the  horse ;  cross  the  left  stirrup  over  the  saddle ;  raise 
the  saddle  skirt  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right 
unbuckle  the  girth  straps,  beginning  with  the  rear  strap;  let 
down  the  girth;  pass  to  the  off  side;  cross  the  right  stirrup 
and  then  the  girth  over  the  saddle;  pass  to  the  neai'  side, 
grasp  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand,  the  cantle  with  the 
right,  and  remove  and  dispose  of  the  saddle  as  prescribed 
in  (a). 

The  service  saddle,  model  1912,  should  be  hung  on  a  bracket 
sufficiently  wide  for  the  saddle  to  rest  on  its  side  bars.  If  a 
narrower  support  is  used,  the  saddle  will  rest  on  the  low  point 
in  the  leather  seat  and  become  misshapen. 

TO   PUT    ON    AND   TAKE    OFF    THE   BIT   AND   BKIDOON    BKIDLE    (MODEL 

1909). 

184.  Before  bridling  the  curb  chain  is  unhooked  on  the  near 
side.     The  instructor  commands:  SRIDLE.  ^ 


70  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right,  the  crownpiece  in  the  left  hand ; 
approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side,  passing  the  right  hand 
along  his  neck;  slip  both  reins  over  his  head  and  let  them 
rest  on  his  neck;  take  the  crownpiece  in  the  right  hand  and 
the  lower  left  branch  of  the  curb  bit  in  the  left  hand,  the 
forefinger  against  the  mouthpiece,  the  snaffle  bit  above  and 
resting  on  the  mouthpiece  of  the  curb  bit;  bring  the  crown- 
piece in  front  of  and  slightly  below  its  proper  position ;  insert 
the  thumb  into  the  side  of  the  mouth  above  the  tush;  press 
open  the  lower  jaw  and  insert  the  bits  by  raising  the  crown- 
piece; with  the  left  hand  draw  the  ears  gently  under  the 
crownpiece,  beginning  with  the  left  ear ;  arrange  the  forelock, 
secure  the  throatlatch,  and  hook  up  the  curlb  chain  on  the 
near  side  below  the  snaffle  bit. 

The  bridle  is  adjusted  as  prescribed  in  par.  302. 

The  throatlatch  should  admit  four  fingers  between  it  and 
the  throat. 

185.  At  the  discretion  of  the  instructor,  the  halter  may  be 
taken  off  before  bridling,  the  reins  being  first  passed  over  the 
neck ;  the  hitching  strap,  if  not  left  at  the  manger  or  picket 
line,  is  tied  around  the  horse's  neck ;  if  the  horse  be  saddled,  in 
the  near  pommel  ring. 

186.  The  instructor  commands:  TTNBRIDLE. 

Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse;  pass  the  reins  over 
the  horse's  head,  placing  them  on  the  bend  of  the  left  arm ; 
unhook  the  curb  chain  on  the  near  side ;  unbuckle  the  throat- 
latch, grasp  the  crownpiece  with  the  right  hand  and,  assisting 
with  the  left  hand,  gently  disengage  the  ears;  gently  dis- 
engage the  bits  from  the  horse's  mouth  with  the  left  hand  by 
lowering  the  crownpiece ;  place  the  crownpiece  in  the  palm  of 
the  left  hand,  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  pass  them 
together  over  the  crownpiece,  make  two  or  three  turns  around 
the  bridle,  then  pass  the  bight  between  the  brow  band  and 
crownpiece  and  draw  it  snug. 

The  bridle  is  hung  up  by  the  reins  or  placed  across  the  sad- 
dle on  the  blanket. 

If  the  horse  has  no  halter  on,  unbridle  and  push  the  bridle 
back  so  that  the  crownpiece  will  rest  on  the  neck  behind  the 
poll  until  the  halter  is  replaced. 

187.  Stand  to  horse:  At  this  command  each  trooper  places 
himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  oppo- 


SCHOOI  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  71 

site  his  head,  and  takes  the  position  of  attention,  except  that 
the  right  hand,  nails  down,  grasps  the  reins,  the  forefinger 
separating  tliem,  about  6  inches  from  the  bit.  The  bights  of 
the  reins  rest  on  the  neck  near  the  pommel  of  the  saddle. 

188.  To  lead  out:  The  troopers  being  at  stand  to  horse,  to 
leave  the  stable  or  picket  line,  the  instructor  commands  •  LEAD 
OUT. 

Each  trooper,  holding  his  right  hand  well  up  and  firm 
leads  his  horse,  without  looking  at  him,  to  the  place  desio-- 
nated  by  the  instructor. 

189.  Upon  entering  the  riding  hall  or  inclosure  the  instructor 
disposes  the  troopers  upon  a  line  at  intervals  of  3  vards  the 
troopers  at  stand  to  horse,  the  horses  correctly  disposed' and 
perpendicular  to  the  line  of  troopers. 

A  horse  is  correctly  disposed  when  he  stands  squarelv  on  all 
four  feet,  having  his  head,  neck,  and  body  in  line. 

190.  Stirrups:  The  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted  when,  the 
trooper  being  properly  seated  with  the  feet  removed  from  the 
stirrups  and  the  legs  falling  naturally,  the  tread  of  the  stir- 
rups IS  about  1  inch  above  the  top  of  the  heel  of  the  shoe 

The  stirrups  should  bear  only  the  weight  of  the  lower  leg- 
about  one-third  of  the  foot  should  be  inserted  in  the  stirrup 
so  that  the  ball  of  the  foot  rests  on  the  tread,  the  heel  lower 
than  the  toe. 

The  flat  of  the  stirrup  strap  should  rest  against  the  leg  of 
the  mounted  trooper.  To  accomplish  this  the  trooper's  toe 
should  be  so  inserted  in  the  stirrup  as  to  place  the  front 
branch  of  the  latter  on  the  outside.  By  the  front  branch  of 
the  stirrup  is  meant  the  forward  branch  as  the  stirrup  hangs 
before  the  trooper  mounts. 

Placing  too  much  weight  on  the  stirrup  disturbs  the  seat 
and  contracts  the  leg,  hindering  its  freedom  of  action. 

If  the  toe  is  not  inserted  far  enough  the  trooper  risks  losing 
his  stirrup ;  if  inserted  too  far  suppleness  is  diminished 

The  heel  is  carried  naturally  lower  than  the  toe  if  the 
ankle  joint  is  not  rigid. 

For  the  extended  gallop,  in  the  charge,  for  the  use  of 
weapons,  and  for  leaping  obstacles  the  foot  is  inserted  fully 
in  the  stirrup.  ^ 


72  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

191.  To  tnount:   Being  at  stand  to  horse,  MOUNT. 

(a)  Face  to  the  right,  drop  the  right  rein,  grasp  the  left 
rein  in  the  right  hand,  talce  two  steps  to  the  right,  sliding 
the  hand  along  the  left  rein,  make  a  half  face  to  the  left 
when  opposite  the  girth ;  with  the  aid  of  the  left  hand  take 
both  reins  in  the  right,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  the 
right  hand  on  the  pommel,  the  reins  coming  into  the  hand 
on  the  side  of  the  forefinger,  and  held  so  as  to  feel  lightly 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  bight  falling  on  the  off  side.  Place 
the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  left  hand  if  neces- 
sary, and  bring  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle ;  grasp  a 
lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  lock  coming  out  between 
the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

(&)  Spring  from  the  right  foot,  keeping  the  hands  firmly  in 
place,  the  left  knee  bent  and  pressed  against  the  saddle,  bring 
the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left,  body  inclining  slightly 
forward ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without 
touching  it,  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle ;  let  go  of  the  mane ; 
insert  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand 
if  necessary ;  take  a  rein  in  each  hand,  the  rein  coming  into 
the  hand  under  the  little  finger  and  passing  out  over  the 
second  joint  of  the  forefinger,  the  thumbs  closed  on  the  reins, 
the  bight  of  the  reins  falling  to  the  right. 

The  reins  should  be  so  held  that  the  trooper  feels  lightly 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  fingers  closed  until  the  nails  lightly 
touch  the  palms  of  the  hands ;  the  reins  well  up  in  the  crotch 
of  the  fingers ;  the  backs  of  the  hands  vertical  and  in  pro- 
longation of  the  forearm ;  the  wrists  flexible ;  the  elbows 
near  the  body  and  low,  so  that  the  forearms  will  be  in  pro- 
longation of  the  reins;  the  hands  about  9  inches  apart. 

The  instructor  takes  care  that  the  recruit  in  adjusting  the 
reins  provokes  no  movement  of  the  horse  and  deranges  in  no 
manner  the  position  of  the  horse's  head. 

The  instructor  cautions  the  trooper  to  avoid  touching  the 
horse  with  the  left  toe  in  mounting;  tbis  fault  begets  nearly 
all  the  resistance  of  horses  to  standing  quietly  while  being 
mounted. 

The  modifications  incident  to  mounting  and  dismounting  a 
horse  equipped  with  the  double  snaffle  or  bit  and  bridoon  are 
indicated  in  pars.  271,  303,  and  307.  The  troopers  are  also 
trained  to  mount  on  the  right  side. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  78 

192.  To  dismount:  Being  halted,  DISMOUNT. 

(a)  Seize  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  in  front  of  and  near 
the  left,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  the  reins  entering  the 
hand  from  the  side  of  the  forefinger ;  drop  the  reins  with  the 
left  hand ;  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel ;  grasp  a  lock 
of.  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  coming  out  between 
the  thumb  and  forefinger;  take  the  right  foot  out  of  the 
stirrup. 

( h )  Rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent 
over  the  croup  without  touching  the  horse,  and  bring  the  right 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  left,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle, 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward ;  descend 
lightly  to  the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

The  troopers  are  also  trained  to  dismount  on  the  right  side. 

193.  Commanding  officers  may  authorize  the  following  alter- 
native method  of  mounting  and  dismounting  by  officers  and 
enlisted  men  on  all  occasions  except  those  when  it  is  required 
that  mounting  and  dismounting  be  executed  in  unison  at 
the  corresponding  command  (par.  354).  Instruction  in  the 
methods  authorized  in  this  paragraph  is  optional. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  at  the  command  MOUNT,  face  to  the 
right,  drop  the  right  rein,  take  a  step  to  the  right  to  be  oppo- 
site the  shoulder  of  the  horse ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  bights 
of  the  reins  in  the  right  hand  and  pull  them  taut  enough  to 
give  a  gentle,  even  bearing  on  the  horse's  mouth ;  grasp  the 
reins  with  the  left  hand,  with  the  little  finger  between  them, 
and  the  bight  coming  out  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger, 
which  also  hold  a  lock  of  the  mane.  Place  the  left  foot  in  the 
stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary,  and  bring  the 
left  knee  against  the  saddle. 

Place  the  right  hand  upon  the  cantle,  rise  by  an  effort  of 
the  right  leg,  aided  by  the  arms,  the  left  knee  bent  and 
pressed  against  the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the  body  in- 
clined slightly  forward  to  keep  the  saddle  from  turning; 
bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left;  change  the  right 
hand  to  the  pommel,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the 
croup  without  touching  it,  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle. 
Put  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand 
if  necessary. 

At  the  command  DISMOUNT,  pass  the  right  rein  into  the 
left  hand  and  grasp  with  this  hand  a  lock?  of  the  mane,  place 


T4  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

the  right  hand  on  the  pommel,  and  remove  the  right  foot  from 
the  stirrup ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  with- 
out touching  the  horse  and  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  left,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  inclined  slightly  forward,  right  hand  on  the  cantle. 
Descend  lightly  to  the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand 
to  horse. 

194.  To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate  them:  At 
the  command  IN  LEFT  HAND  TAKE  REINS,  place  the  left 
hand  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  pass  the  right  rein  into 
the  left  hand,  separating  it  from  the  left  rein  by  the  little 
finger ;  let  the  right  hand  fall  by  the  side. 

195.  At  the  command  IN  BOTH  HANDS  TAKE  REINS,  grasp 
the  right  rein  with  the  right  hand  and  replace  the  hands  9 
inches  apart. 

The  reins  are  taken  in  the  right  hand  and  again  separated 
in  a  similar  manner. 

196.  To  adjust  the  reins  the  trooper  brings  the  wrists  to- 
gether and  grasps  with  one  hand,  above  and  near  the  opposite 
thumb,  the  rein  that  he  desires  to  shorten. 

197.  The  instructor  causes  the  reins  to  be  dropped  and  re- 
taken by  the  commands  DROP  REINS  and  REINS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  drops  tiie  reins  behind 
the  pommel  and  lets  the  hands  fall  by  the  side. 

The  reins  are  dropped  as  an  exceptional  measure,  and 
always  with  precaution  against  accident. 

198.  Position  of  the  trooper,  or  attention  (mounted) :  The 
position  described  below  should  be  considered  a  standard 
toward  which  all  troopers  should  gradually  approximate. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  and  well  forward  in  the 
middle  of  the  saddle. 

The  thighs  turned  without  constraint  upon  their  flat  side, 
clasping  the  horse  evenly  and  stretched  only  by  their  own 
weight  and  that  of  the  lower  legs. 

The  knees  bent  and  flexible. 

The  lower  legs  falling  naturally,  the  calves  in  contact  with 
the  horse  without  pressure,  the  toes  dropping  naturally  when 
the  trooper  is  without  stirrups. 

The  back  supple  and  never  hollowed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  easy,  free,  and  erect. 

The  shoulders  thrown  back  evenly. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TEOOPER,  MOUNTED.  75 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally. 

The  head  -  erect  and  turned  to  the  front,  but  without 
stiffness. 

Eyes  alert,  well  up,  and  directed  to  the  trooper's  front. 

The  reins  held  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

This  position  may  be  modified  by  the  instructor  to  suit 
varying  conditions  and  unusual  conformations.  When  not  at 
attention,  the  head  and  eyes  are  directed  so  as  best  to  favor 
alertness  and  observation.  In  other  respects  the  position 
should  be  practically  unchanged. 

199.  The  body  and  lower  legs  are  movable  and  should  be 
under  the  control  of  the  trooper,  either  acting  intermittently 
as  aids  for  guiding  the  horse  or  as  a  means  of  binding  the 
rider  to  the  horse  while  following  his  movements. 

The  thighs,  on  the  other  hand,  should  remain  fixed  im- 
movably to  the  saddle,  except  while  posting  at  the  trot.  This 
fixity  should  be  obtained  not  by  the  pressure  of  the  knees 
but  by  the  clinging  of  the  buttocks,  which  is  secured  by  the 
suppleness  of  the  loins  and  the  relaxation  of  the  thighs.  It 
is  acquired  very  rapidly  by  daily  *' rotation  of  the  thighs," 
which  gradully  presses  the  large  thigh  muscles  to  the  rear 
and  permits  the  femur  to  rest  solidly  against  the  saddle. 

The  trooper  should  sit  with  his  buttocks  well  under  the 
upper  part  of  his  body,  and  especially  avoid  bowing  the 
back  by  thrusting  the  buttocks  to  the  rear  and  the  lower  part 
of  the  spine  to  the  front.  Sitting  well  forward  in  the  middle 
of  the  saddle  will  tend  to  assist  the  trooper  in  avoiding  the 
defect  just  referred  to.  If  the  buttocks  are  thrust  back  too 
much,  the  trooper  can  not  conform  to  the  movements  of  the 
horse  and  carries  forward  the  upper  part  of  his  body. 

If  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  horizontal,  the  trooper  is  doubled 
up  and  his  power  of  action  diminished ;  if  the  thigh  is  too 
nearly  vertical,  the  trooper  is  on  the  crotch  and  lacks  ease. 

To  sum  up :  The  trooper  should  take  a  relaxed  sitting  posi- 
tion, squarely  on  his  buttocks,  with  the  thighs  inclined  down- 
ward. 

The  various  defects  of  position  are  overcome  by  suitable 
suppling  exercises    (pars.  209-220). 

200.  The  aids. — The  legs,  the  reins,  and  the  weight  are  the 
means  of  controlling  the  horse  in  riding.  They  are  called 
the  aids. 


76  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

201.  The  legs:  The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to 
increase  his  pace  or  gait,  and  to  engage  the  hinci  quarters  or 
move  them  laterally.  The  legs  act  by  the  pressure  of  the 
calves.  If  pressure  alone  is  insufficient  the  trooper  increases 
the  action  by  blows  with  his  calves. 

It  is  essential  to  obtain  from  the  horse  perfect  obedience  to 
the  action  of  the  legs.  He  should  respond  to  the  simultaneous 
and  equal  action  of  both  legs  by  engaging  his  hindquarters 
and  moving  forward ;  to  the  predominant  action  of  one  leg  by 
moving  his  haunches  to  the  opposite  side. 

202.  The  reins:  The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  to 
move,  to  decrease  or  increase  his  pace,  to  change  the  gait,  or 
to  change  direction. 

Contact  is  a  light  bearing  of  the  mouth  of  the  horse  on  the 
hand  of  the  rider.    It  should  be  constantly  maintained. 

The  reins  are  held  in  the  full  hand,  the  thumb  pressing 
them  lightly  upon  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger.  By 
means  of  closing  and  relaxing  the  fingers  and  flexing  the 
wrist,  arm,  and  shoulder,  the  trooper,  while  maintaining  con- 
tact and  keeping  the  reins  taut,  follows  easily  the  movements 
of  the  head  of  the  horse  without  anticipating  or  interfering 
with  these  movements.  The  hand  is  then  said  to  be  passive. 
It  is  kept  so  as  long  as  the  trooper  is  not  required  to  change 
the  pace,  gait,  or  direction. 

203.  The  direct  rein:  When  the  trooper,  with  the  hands  sep- 
arated and  the  reins  adjusted,  closes  his  fingers  upon  the  reins 
without  raising  the  hands  he  exercises  an  action  from  front  to 
rear,  called  the  effect  of  the  direct  reins.  This  effect,  when  on 
one  rein  only,  is  called  that  of  the  right  (or  left)  direct  rein. 

204.  The  leading  rein:  When  the  trooper  carries  the  right 
hand  to  the  right  and  forward  in  a  manner  to  preserve  contact 
but  not  to  increase  pressure  on  the  bit  the  effect  is  called  that 
of  the  right  leading  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrist  in 
prolongation  of  the  forearm,  the  elbow  remaining  near  the 
body. 

The  horse's  head  and  neck  are  drawn  to  the  right,  the  shoul- 
ders follow,  and  he  turns  to  the  right. 

205.  The  bearing  rein;  When  the  trooper  carries  the  right 
hand  forward,  upward,  and  to  the  left  in  a  manner  to  pre- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        77 

serve  contact,  but  not  to  increase  pressure  on  the  bit,  the 
effect  is  said  to  be  that  of  the  right  bearing  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrist  in 
prolongation  of  the  forearm. 

The  horse's  head  is  turned  slightly  to  the  right,  but  the 
effect  is  to  the  left ;  the  neck  bends  and  is  convex  to  the  left 
and  is  followed  by  the  shoulders.    The  horse  turns  to  the  left. 

The  action  of  the  bearing  rein  is  much  more  powerful  than 
that  of  the  leading  rein,  and  is  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the 
latter  to  turn  the  horse  when  riding  with  the  reins  in  one 
hand. 

206.  The  indirect  rein  of  opposition:  When  the  trooper  car* 
ries  the  right  hand  to  the  left  in  a  manner  to  press  the  shoul- 
ders to  the  left  and  to  produce  a  diagonal  traction  on  the  rein 
in  the  direction  of  the  left  shoulder  or  haunch  the  effect  is 
called  that  of  the  right  indirect  rein  of  opposition. 

Its  effect  may  be  produced  in  front  of  the  withers  if  the  hand 
be  slightly  raised ;  in  rear  of  the  withers  if  the  hand  be  slightly 
lowered.  It  is  frequently  used  by  the  trooper  when  riding 
with  one  hand  (as  he  must  do  in  order  to  use  his  weapons), 
and  its  effect  should  be  studied  and  practiced  from  the 
beginning. 

207.  Manner  of  applying  the  aids:  The  action  of  the  reins 
and  legs  and  weight  should  not  be  continuous.  The  trooper 
alternately  closes  and  relaxes  the  fingers,  the  hands  preserv- 
ing contact  in  the  intervals  between  the  actions.  In  the  same 
manner  he  uses  the  legs,  neither  gripping  nor  releasing  alto- 
gether, but  preserving  light  contact  in  the  intervals  between 
the  blows  with  the  calves.  The  weight  likewise  is  used  in  a 
similar  manner,  being  quickly  applied  to  the  front,  to  the 
rear,  or  to  a  side,  alternating  with  returns  to  the  normal 
position. 

If  an  action  of  the  aids  is  prolonged  the  horse  has  oppor- 
tunity to  establish  the  corresponding  resistance,  but  if  pro- 
duced by  repeated  applications  the  effect  is  very  marked. 

All  action  of  the  aids  should  diminish  in  intensity  when 
obedience  begins  and  cease  entirely  as  soon  as  the  desired 
result  is  secured. 

Troopers  must  be  thoroughly  trained  in  riding  with  the 
reins  in  one  hand. 


78  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

208.  The  instructor,  in  teaching  troopers  to  avail  themselves 
of  their  legs  and  reins,  is  governed  by  the  preceding  consid- 
erations, and  from  the  first  watches  vigilantly  the  action  of 
the  aids. 

The  hand  should  always  be  kept  low.  The  most  thought- 
ful care  should  be  exercised  in  the  combined  application  of  the 
aids,  so  that  they  may  not  be  opposed  to  each  other  in  their 
action  ;  that  is,  one  favoring  the  intended  movement,  the  other 
opposing  it. 

The  instructor  impresses  upon  the  troopers  that  their  hands 
must  be  kept  still ;  that  is,  free  from  bobbing  up  and  down, 
and  pulling,  and  from  giving  and  taking  when  there  is  no 
reason  therefor. 

Likewise  their  legs  should  remain  in  light  contact  with  the 
horse's  sides  and  the  heels  not  be  used  to  kick  the  horse 
constantly  in  a  nervous  manner. 

Moreover,  that  the  effects  of  the  aids  may  be  perfectly 
clear,  and  that  there  may  be  no  contradiction  between  them, 
there  should  never  he  simultaneous  action  of  the  direct  reins 
demanding  slowing  up  or  halting  and  of  the  legs  provoking  a 
forward  movement.  This  condition  is  essential  for  preserving 
the  composure  indispensable  to  the  horses  of  the  troop. 

209.  Suppling  exercises. — Before  the  suppling  exercises  are 
given  at  the  various  gaits  they  should  be  thoroughly  ex- 
plained and  practiced  at  the  halt. 

These  exercises,  if  understood  and  intelligently  applied, 
produce  rapid  results. 

They  are  given  daily  throughout  the  entire  course  of  instruc- 
tion of  the  trooper  with  a  view  to — 

(a)   Strengthening  the  muscles  used  in  riding. 

(&)  Assuring  the  correct  seat. 

(c)  Giving  the  trooper  balance  and  inspiring  him  with  confi- 
dence in  his  ability  to  maintain  his  seat,  while  inducing  gen- 
eral suppleness  and  relaxation  of  the  body. 

{d)  Accustoming  him  to  keep  the  thighs  constantly  pressed 
against  the  horse. 

(e)  Leading  him  to  acquire  independence  in  the  use  of  the 
aids. 

The  exercises  herein  indicated  are  recommended  as  the 
most  useful,  but  they  are  not  the  only  ones  in  which  the 
troopers  may  be  exercised. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  79 

Instructors  may  add  other  suitable  exercises  for  the  pur- 
pose of  varying  the  work  and  adding  to  its  interest. 

210.  To  execute  the  suppling  exercises  a  movement  is  an- 
nounced and  begun  without  further  command.  The  movement 
is  then  continued  and  repeated  until  the  command :  AS  YOTJ 
WERE. 

The  troopers  take  the  reins  in  one  or  both  hands,  drop  and 
retake  them,  as  necessary,  without  command. 

211.  Flexion  of  the  loins:  At  the  command  BEND  TO  THE 
RIGHT  AND  LEFT,  the  trooper,  without  deranging  the  position 
of  the  hands  or  of  the  part-  of  the  body  lielow  the  waist,  slowly 
inclines  the  upper  part  of  the  body  to  the  right ;  then,  return- 
ing slowly  through  the  initial  position,  makes  a  corresponding 
movement  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  STROKE  YOTJR  HORSE  ON  THE  RIGHT 
FLANK,  sit  down  in  the  saddle  by  pushing  th©  buttocks  for- 
ward, turn  the  body  at  the  hips  without  deranging  the  posi- 
tion of  the  legs  and,  leaning  backward  but  not  to  the  side, 
place  the  right  hand  as  low  as  possible  on  the  horse's  flank. 

212.  Rotation  of  the  loins:  At  the  command  STROKE  YOTJR 
HORSE  ON  THE  LEFT  HAUNCH  WITH  THE  RIGHT  HAND, 
turn  in  the  saddle  without  deranging  the  seat  or  the  posi- 
tion of  the  thighs  and  stroke  the  horse  on  the  left  haunch 
with  the  right  hand,  taking  care  to  avoid  opening  out  the  left 
elbow  or  pulling  on  the  reins. 

213.  Rotation  of  the  arm:  At  the  command  ROTATE  THE 
RIGHT  ARM  VERTICALLY,  extend  the  arm  upward,  palm  to 
the  front ;  then  drop  the  arm  to  the  rear  and  describe  slowly 
and  with  uniform  movement  a  vertical  circle,  keeping  the 
head  erect  and  high  while  the  arm  is  descending. 

214.  Rotation  of  the  thigh:  At  the  command  ROTATE  THE 
RIGHT  THIGH,  remove  the  knee  from  the  saddle  and  carry  it 
back,  straightening  the  leg ;  turn  the  knee  in  as  much  as  pos- 
sible and  then,  replacing  the  thigh  flat  upon  the  saddle,  draw 
it  forward  to  its  normal  position  w^ith  much  friction  in  order 
to  press  the  thick  muscles  to  the  rear  and  to  permit  the  femur 
to  rest  solidly  against  the  saddle. 

215.  Raising  the  thighs:  At  the  command  RAISE  THIGHS, 
raise  the  knees  only  so  much  as  is  necessary  to  detach  the 
thighs  and  lower  legs  from  the  saddle,  and  incline  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  slightly  backward.    If  the  trooper  is  sitting 


80  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

too  far  back  in  the  saddle,  the  instructor  directs  him  to  draw 
himself  forward  by  grasping  the  pommel. 

This  position  compels  the  trooper  to  supple  his  body  in  order 
to  keep  his  seat. 

When  his  equilibrium  is  well  established  the  trooper  gently 
replaces  his  thighs  upon  the  saddle,  being  careful  to  keep  his 
loins  in  the  same  position  as  during  the  movement. 

This  exercise  fixes  the  loins  in  place  and  puts  them  in  proper 
position  to  maintain  the  balanced  seat.  It  is  executed  only  at 
a  walk,  slow  trot,  or  canter. 

216.  Flexion  of  the  leg:  At  the  command  FLEX  THE  RIGHT 
LEG,  bend  the  leg  slowly  without  deranging  the  position  of  the 
knee  or  that  of  the  body. 

217.  Flexion  of  the  ankle:  At  the  command  CIRCLE  THE 
RIGHT  FOOT,  trace  with  the  toe  of  the  designated  foot,  by  a 
slow  and  uniform  movement,  a  vertical  circle  from  outward 
inwardly,  and  from  below  upward,  without  disturbing  the  posi- 
tion of  the  leg.  The  circle  with  the  right  foot  is  made  clock- 
wise, with  the  left  foot  contraclockwise. 

218.  To  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground:  At  the  com- 
mand VAULT  INTO  THE  SADDLE,  take  position  as  prescribed 
in  (a)  of  paragraph  191,  except  that  the  left  foot  is  not  in- 
serted in  the  stirrup ;  spring  upward  and  forward,  bearing  the 
weight  upon  the  extended  arms ;  remain  a  moment  in  this  posi- 
tion, then  throw  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  with 
out  touching  it  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle.  Take  a 
rein  in  each  hand. 

219.  To  vault  to  the  ground:  At  the  command  VAULT  TO 
THE  GROUND,  take  position  as  prescribed  in  (a)  of  par.  192. 
Rise  upon  the  extended  arms;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent, 
over  the  croup  without  touching  it;  carry  it  to  the  side  of 
the  left;  remain  a  moment  in  this  position  and  come  lightly 
to  the  ground,  the  heels  joined,  the  knees  bent.  Take  the 
position  of  stand  to  horse. 

220.  To  vault  to  the  ground  and  into  the  saddle  without 
pause  the  instructor  commands:  VAULT  TO  THE  GROUND 
AND  INTO  THE  SADDLE. 

The  troopers  are  frequently  exercised  in  vaulting  into  the 
saddle  and  to  the  ground,  and  to  the  ground  and  into  the 
saddle  from  both  sides. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        81 

Diiringr  the  early  lessons  these  movements  are  to  be  executed 
only  at  the  halt. 

When  the  instruction  is  well  advanced  the  recruits  will  be 
trained  to  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground  while  the 
horse  is  in  motion,  worked  on  the  longe  by  the  instructor. 
During  the  exercises  at  the  trot  and  gallop  the  trooper  when 
dismounted  keeps  pace  with  the  horse  at  the  shoulder  by 
means  of  the  galloping  step,  which  he  executes  (keeping  one 
hand  on  the  withers)  by  a  succession  of  leaps,  rising  and 
alighting  with  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  forehand  of  the  horse, 
keeping  the  left  or  right  foot  in  advance,  according  as  he  is 
on  the  left  or  right  side  of  the  horse,  and  supporting  his 
weight  on  the  balls  of  the  feet.  Frequent  short  rests  should 
be  given  in  order  not  to  strain  or  unduly  fatigue  men  who 
are  not  accustomed  to  the  exercises. 

The  vault  into  the  saddle  while  the  horse  is  in  motion  is 
executed  as  prescribed  from  the  halt,  except  that  the  trooper 
is  at  the  galloping  step ;  that  he  springs  forward  faced  to  the 
front,  and  that  as  he  drops  into  his  seat  he  catches  against 
the  side  with  his  leg  to  avoid  passing  over  the  horse. 

Vaulting  to  the  ground  is  exec\ited  as  prescribed  from  the 
halt,  except  that  when  the  legs  are  joined  the  trooper  presses 
the  leg  against  the  side  of  the  horse  to  push  his  body  clear 
and  alights  on  the  ground  faced  to  the  front  and  takes  the 
galloping  step. 

221.  To  rest:  Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  rest  is 
executed  as  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  dismounted,  except 
that  the  troopers  hold  the  reins  and  keep  their  horses  in  place. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  halt,  at  the  command  REST,  or  being 
in  march,  at  the  command  ROUTE  ORDER,  the  men  are  per- 
mitted to  turn  their  heads,  to  talk,  and  to  make  slight  changes 
of  position,  but  not  to  lounge  on  their  horses  or  to  lose  their 
relative  places. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  AT  EASE  is  executed 
as  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  dismounted. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  command  AT  EASE  the  men  are  per- 
mitted to  turn  their  heads  or  to  make  slight  changes  of  posi- 
tion, but  preserve  silence. 
38218  °— 18 6 


82  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

To  resume  the  attention :  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

Each  trooper  if  dismounted  takes  the  position  of  stand  to 
horse;  if  mounted,  he  takes  the  position  of  the  trooper  mounted 
(par.  198). 

222.  To  dismiss:  Tlie  troopers  being  dismounted,  in  column 
of  troopers,  at  the  command  FALL  OUT  the  leading  trooper 
leads  his  horse  directly  to  tlie  stable  or  picket  line.  Tlie  other 
troopers  follow  in  their  existing  order  at  4  feet  distance  until 
near  their  places  in  the  stable  or  on  the  line,  when  they  leave 
the  column  and  move  directly  to  their  respective  places. 

The  troopers  being  dismounted,  in  line  with  intervals  (par. 
189),  at  the  commands:  1.  By  the  right  (left),  2.  FALL  OUT, 
the  right  trooper  leads  directly  to  the  stable  or  picket  line. 
The  other  troopers  follow  and  complete  the  execution  of  the 
command  as  indicated  above.  If  the  troopers  are  facing  their 
respective  positions  on  the  picket  line,  the  command  FALL  OUT 
may  be  given.  Each  trooper  then  moves  directly  to  his 
place.  Under  the  direction  of  the  instructor  each  trooper 
removes  his  equipment,  cares  for  and  secures  his  horse,  cleans 
his  equipment,  and  places  the  latter  as  prescribed. 

The  instructor  satisfies  himself  by  inspection  that  the 
horses  and  equipments  are  properly  cared  for  and  that  the 
precautions  required  on  the  return  from  exercise  have  been 
observed. '  The  men  are  then  ordered  to  fall  in,  marched  to 
the  troop  parade,  and  are  there  dismissed  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  trooper  dismounted. 

223.  Stand  to  heel:  At  this  command  each  man  stands  at 
attention  1  yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  horse. 

Second  Period,  or  Work  on  the  Snaffle. 

General  provisions  (par.  224). 
The  walk  (par.  225). 
To  gather  the  horse  (par.  226). 
To  move  forward  (par.  227). 
To  halt  (par.  228). 
By  the  right  or  left  flank  (par.  229). 
The  oblique  by  trooper  (par.  230). 

General  provisions  regarding  work  on  the  track  (par.  231). 
Marching  on  fixed  points  and  upon  a  designated  objective 
(par.  232). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  83 

Circling  (par.  233). 

The  trot  (par.  234). 

The  gallop  (pars.  235-237). 

The  gallop  depart  (par.  238). 

Changes  of  gait  (par.  239). 

To  change  hands  (par.  240). 

Suppling  exercises  with  the  horse  in  motion  (par.  241). 

Posting  (par.  242). 

Care  of  horses  and  saddlery  (par.  243). 

The  use  of  arms,  mounted  (pars.  244-255). 

Inspection  of  arms  and  equipment,  mounted  (pars,  256-268). 

224.  General  provisions:  These  exercises,  in  connection  with 
the  suppling  exercises,  embrace  all  that  is  necessary  to  give 
the  recruit  confidence,  to  make  him  supple,  to  give  him  steadi- 
ness in  the  saddle,  and  to  prepare  him  to  benefit  by  instruction 
in  the  first  principles  of  equitation. 

The  recruits  are  disposed  on  the  track  behind  a  leader,  or 
mounted  upon  well-broken  horses  held  on  the  longe,  or  each 
recruit  is  accompanied  by  an  old  trooper,  who  holds  the  horse 
of  the  recruit  by  a  strap  buckled  to  the  snaffle. 

The  instructor  determines  the  order  in  which  the  various 
exercises  are  to  be  employed,  according  to  the  aptitudes  and 
defects  of  the  recruits  under  his  charge.  He  must  keep  in 
mind  that  these  various  exercises  are  for  the  purpose  of 
teaching  the  trooper  his  correct  position  on  horseback  at  the 
different  gaits  and  of  preparing  him  to  acquire  independence  in 
the  use  of  the  aids,  instruction  in  which  will  be  given  in  subse- 
quent lessons. 

In  order  to  inspire  confidence  in  the  troopers  and  to  enable 
them  as  soon  as  possible  to  remain  long  on  horseback  without 
weariness  they  should  be  permitted  to  use  the  stirrups  in  the 
first  lessons.  They  are  taught  to  ride  without  them  (first  at 
a  walk  and  then  at  the  faster  gaits)  only  after  they  have 
become  accustomed  to  the  movement  of  the  horse. 

The  instructor  mounts  the  recruits  outside  the  riding  hall 
or  inclosure  as  soon  as  their  progress  warrants  it.  Each  of 
the  horses  may  at  first  be  held  in  check  by  an  old  trooper,  as 
previously  indicated. 

225.  The  walk:  The  walk  is  a  gait  in  which  the  feet  are 
raised  successively  and  planted  in  the  order  in  which  raised; 
for  example,  right  front,  left  hind;  left  front,  right  hind. 


«4  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  walk  should  be  free.  Its  speed  is  about  117  yards  per 
minute,  or  4  miles  per  hour. 

226.  To  gather  the  horse :  Having  a  light  pressure  of  the  bit 
against  the  horse's  mouth  and  a  light  feel  of  the  lower  legs 
against  his  sides,  increase  the  pressure  of  the  lower  legs,  heels 
well  down,  and  slightly  increase  the  pressure  of  the  bit  against 
the  bars  by  squeezing  the  fingers  on  the  reins. 

This  is  called  gathering  the  horse.  It  serves  as  a  signal  to 
attract  the  attention  of  the  horse  and  to  prepare  him  to  re- 
spond promptly  to  the  subsequent  application  of  the  aids. 
The  gather  should  be  employed  at  the  preparatory  command 
whenever  the  corresponding  command  of  execution  is  to 
involve  response  on  the  part  of  the  horse  to  the  application 
of  the  aids.  This  preparatory  signal  to  the  horse  should 
always  be  the  same  whatever  may  be  the  movement  that  is 
to  be  executed  and  whatever  the  gait  at  which  the  horse  may 
be  moving. 

227.  To  move  forward:  Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command: 
1.  Forward,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  command :  2.  MARCH, 
close  the  legs  (already  in  contact  with  the  horse)  with  a 
quick,  sharp  pressure,  the  hand  remaining  passive  (par.  202). 
If  the  horse  does  not  respond  at  once  by  moving  forward 
continue  until  the  horse  moves  forward  at  a  walk  (par.  239) 
a  succession  of  similar  leg  pressures,  each  quick,  distinct,  and 
given  with  a  degree  of  force  graduated  to  the  sensitiveness 
of  the  horse.  A  long  continued  squeezing  effect  with  the  legs 
is  particularly  to  be  avoided. 

228.  To  halt:  Being  at  the  walk,  at  the  command:  1.  Squad, 
gather  the  horse.  At  the  command:  2.  HALT,  sit  well  dowa 
in  the  saddle  and  carry  the  weight  of  the  body  upward  and 
backward  and  act  by  the  direct  reins  until  the  horse  stops 
(pars.  203,  207). 

229.  By  the  right  flank:  1.  By  the  right  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  first  command  gather  the  horse.  At  the  second  com- 
mand carry  both  hands  to  the  right  until  the  horse  has  turned 
through  an  arc  of  90°,  and  then  replace  the  hands  and  move 
straight  in  the  new  direction.  During  the  movement  the  legs 
maintain  impulsion  and  hold  the  horse's  body  so  that  it  fol- 
lows the  curve  on  which  he  is  turning;  that  is,  if  the  horse 
tends  to  carry  his  haunches  to  the  inside  of  the  curve,  the 
action  of  the  inside  leg  should  predominate;  if  he  tends  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        85 

carry  his  haunches  to  the  outside  of  the  curve,  then  the  action 
of  the  outside  leg  should  predominate. 

When  the  trooper  holds  the  reins  in  both  hands  he  makes  use 
simultaneously  of  the  leading  rein  and  the  bearing  rein.  With 
the  reins  in  one  hand  he  makes  use  of  the  hearing  rein  only. 

The  action  of  the  reins  in  turning-  is  governed  by  the  prin- 
ciples explained  in  paragraphs  204  and  205.  The  trooper 
carries  the  hands  in  the  direction  toward  which  he  wishes  to 
turn  and  displaces  them  only  to  the  extent  necessary.  Event- 
ually the  turn  should  be  made  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose 
radius  is  2  yards  at  the*  walk,  4  yards  at  the  trot,  and  6  yards 
at  the  gallop  . 

230.  The  oblique  by  trooper  involves  a  change  of  direction  of 
45°  to  the  right  or  left,  executed  by  each  trooper.  The  com- 
mands are :  1.  Troopers,  right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  in  par.  229,  except  that  each 
trooper  turns  his  horse  through  an  arc  of  only  45°.  To  resume 
the  original  direction  of  march  by  similar  means :  1.  Forward, 
2.  MARCH. 

231.  Provisions  regarding  work  on  the  track. — The  trooper  is 
said  to  march  to  the  right  hand  or  to  the  left  hand  according 
as  he  has  his  right  or  left  side  toward  the  inner  side  of  the 
track. 

At  the  command  TAKE  THE  TRACK  TO  THE  RIGHT  HAND, 
each  trooper  directs  his  horse  straight  toward  the  track,  and 
arriving  there  turns  toward  the  right. 

The  troopers  are  distributed  over  the  whole  circumference 
of  the  track.  They  endeavor  to  keep  their  horses  collected 
and  moving  straight  to  the  front,  and  to  preserve  a  free  and 
even  gait. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  maintain  the  gait 
ordered  while  turning  at  the  corners  and  that  they  approach 
the  corners  closely  at  the  walk  and  trot ;  he  permits  a  larger 
radius  at  the  gallop. 

To  give  oral  instruction  to  all  the  troopers  at  the  same  time 
the  instructor  may  command :  RIDE  IN.  The  troopers,  mov- 
ing at  the  gait  at  which  they  were  riding,  or  at  the  designated 
gait,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  group  themselves  about  the 
instructor.  To  resume  the  ride,  the  instructor  commands : 
CLOSE  ON  (SUCH  TROOPER).  The  trooper  designated  (by 
name)  takes  the  track  and  gait  as  indicated ^by  the  instructor. 


86  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  other  troopers  move  by  the  shortest  line  and  place  them~ 
selves  on  the  track,  one  behind  the  other,  with  4  feet  distance 
from  head  to  croup. 

As  soon  as  the  collective  instruction  is  sufficiently  advanced 
the  commands  and  methods  indicated  in  the  school  of  the 
squad  may  be  employed  to  group  the  troopers  near  the  in- 
structor and  to  cause  them  to  take  the  track  again. 

As  soon  as  the  troopers  understand  the  principles  of  con- 
trolling their  horses,  the  instructor  frequently  commands : 
RIDE  AT  WILL.  The  troopers  scatter  out  in  the  interior  of 
the  riding  hall  or  rectangle  or  over  ft  larger  designated  area 
out  of  doors,  and  riding  at  the  gait  ordered  execute  the  exer- 
cises on  their  own  initiative. 

When  troopers  meet  each  keeps  to  the  right. 

There  should  be  much  M-ork  on  the  track  without  regard  to 
distance  between  troopers  in  which  the  troopers  are  absolutely 
independent  of  each  other,  the  only  obligation  being  to  main- 
tain the  gait  and  to  march  to  the  hand  directed  when  on  the 
track.  If  the  column  becomes  crowded,  individual  troopers 
are  permitted  to  turn  out  at  will  and  take  the  track  at  a  con- 
venient place  on  the  opposite  side.  They  should  move  straight 
across  the  hall,  maintaining  the  gait. 

The  commands  do  not  involve  immediate  compliance.  Each 
trooper  conforms  to  them  when  his  place  on  the  track  and  the 
state  of  preparation  of  his  horse  puts  him  in  proper  position 
to  execute  steadily  the  movement  directed.  Each  should 
choose  his  ground  so  as  to  avoid  interfering  with  his  neigh- 
bors. 

232.  Marching  upon  fixed  points  and  upon  a  designated  ob- 
jective: The  instructor  also  exercises  the  troopers  in  riding 
the  horses  at  a  designated  gait  upon  a  distant  object.  This 
exercise  is  begun  as  soon  as  possible  and  is  continued  during 
the  whole  course  of  instruction  and  combined  progressively 
with  the  jumping  of  obstacles  and  the  use  of  arras.  To  assist 
in  the  earlier  phases  of  this  instruction  distinctive  marks  are 
placed  on  the  walls  of  the  riding  hall  or  outside  the  rectangle 
to  serve  as  points  of  direction.  Proficiency  in  this  exercise  is 
essential  to  the  satisfactory  execution  of  collective  movements, 
and  instruction  in  it  must  be  correspondingly  thorough. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  87 

233.  Circling:  The  troopers  being  on  the  track,  at  the  coin- 
mand  IN  CIRCLE,  the  leader,  followed  by  the  other  troopers 
rides  on  a  circle  between  the  two  tracks. 

At  the  command  TAKE  THE  TRACK,  the  leader  take's  the 
track  to  the  hand  toward  which  he  is  marching,  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  other  troopers. 

234.  The  trot:  The  trot  is  a  gait  in  which  the  horse  springs 
from  one  diagonally  disposed  pair  of  feet  to  the  other  ;  between 
the  beats  all  the  feet  are  in  the  air.  The  rate  of  the  maneuver- 
ing trot  is  8  miles  per  hour  or  235  yards  per  minute.  For  the 
purposes  of  individual  instruction  the  rate  may  be  reduced  to 
6  miles  per  hour  by  the  command:  1.  Slow  trot,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command :  1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH,  the  rate  of  8  miles  per 
hour  is  resumed. 

The  trot  alternating  with  the  walk  is  the  gait  best  adapted 
for  long  road  marches. 

When  trotting  without  stirrups  the  trooper  endeavors  to 
reduce  the  shock  by  suppling  his  back ;  ^^'hen  with  stirrups,  by 
posting. 

235.  The  gallop. — The  gallop  is  the  most  rapid  of  the  gaits. 
It  must  not  be  used  unnecessarily  over  long  distances,  particu- 
larly on  hard  roads  and  when  the  saddle  is  packed.  How- 
ever, when  the  rapidity  of  the  regulation  trot  is  not  sufficient 
the  trooper  out  of  ranks  should  take  the  gallop  in  preference 
to  increasing  the  speed  of  the  trot. 

236.  The  varieties  of  the  gallop  are: 

The  maneuvering  gallop,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  12  miles  per 
hour,  or  352  yards  per  minute. 

The  extended  gallop 'which  is  at  the  rate  of  16  miles  per 
hour,  or  469  yards  per  minute. 

The  school  gallop,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  about  8  miles  per 
hour. 

The  horse  is  said  to  gallop  with  the  right  lead  when  the 
right  fore  is  planted  in  front  of  the  left  fore  and  the  right 
hind  in  front  of  the  left  hind. 

When  the  feet  are  planted  in  the  inverse  order  the  horse 
is  said  to  gallop  with  the  left  lead. 

The  gallop  is  marked  by  three  beats  and  a  period  of  sus- 
pension. 

If  the  horse  be  galloping  with  the  right  lead,  the  first  beat 
is  marked  by  the  left  hind  foot,  the  second  by  the  nearly 


88  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

simultaneous  placing  of  the  right  hind  the  left  fore  feet,  and 
the  third  by  the  placing  of  the  right  fore  foot. 

In. galloping  with  the  left  lead  the  beats  are  right  hind, 
left  hind  and  right  fore,  left  fore. 

A  horse  gallops  true  when  he  gallops  with  the  right  lead  in 
turning  to  the  right  and  with  the  left  lead  in  turning  to  the 
left. 

He  gallops  false  when  he  gallops  with  the  left  lead  in  turn- 
ing to  the  right,  or  conversely. 

A  horse  is  disunited  when  he  gallops  with  the  right  lead  with 
his  fore  feet  and  with  the  left  lead  with  his  hind  feet,  or 
conversely. 

237.  The  gallop  should  be  begun  on  the  circle  because  the 
horse  thus  starts  off  more  calmly  and  the  trooper  is  enabled 
to  regulate  the  pace  by  describing  a  circle  of  greater  or  less 
radius. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  breaks  into  the  gallop  the  trooper 
moves  in  cadence  with  his  horse.  The  back  and  legs  unite 
in  the  rhythm  of  the  gait,  the  hands  accompany  gently  and 
without  exaggeration  the  movements  of  the  head  and  the 
neck. 

During  the  gallop  the  command  at  ease  is  frequently  given. 
The  troopers  execute  the  suppling  exercises  which  have  been 
indicated  as  necessary  in  each  case;  they  abandon  themselves 
completely  to  the  motion  of  the  horse  and  thus  acquire  ease 
and  flexibility.  Prolonged  periods  at  the  gallop  on  calm  and 
free-moving  horses  are  most  favorable  for  easily  obtaining 
this  result. 

238.  The  gallop  depart:  The  aids  used  to  cause  thef  horse  to 
take  the  gallop  with  the  right  lead  (par.  236)  are:  Left  direct 
rein,  to  restrain  the  left  shoulder ;  left  leg  a  little  in  rear 
of  the  girth,  to  push  the  haunches  a  little  to  the  right ;  weight 
slightly  on  the  left  buttock ;  right  leg  on  the  girth ;  right  rein 
taut  to  prevent  bending  the  neck  too  much  to  the  left ;  both 
legs  thus  placed  used  vigorously  to  push  the  horse  into  the 
gallop.  Corresponding  aids  are  used  to  obtain  the  gallop 
depart  with  the  left  lead. 

With  some  old  horses  that  have  been  habitually  galloped 
with  one  lead  it  will  be  very  difficult  to  get  the  other  lead. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        89 

In  these  cases,  or  when  time  is  too  limited  to  practice  proper 
methods,  the  following  rough  method  will  serve  the  purpose: 
If  the  horse  habitually  gallops  with  lead  left  and  a  lead 
right  is  desired,  take  a  good  extended  trot  on  the  right 
hand,  approach  the  knee  guard  of  the  riding  hall  at  an  angle 
of  about  45°,  with  the  horse  well  up  against  the  bit,  and 
just  as  the  horse  reaches  the  guard  kick  hard  with  the  left 
heel  and  let  him  move  along  the  track  to  the  right  at  the 
gallop.  In  all  probability  the  lead  right  will  be  had ;  if  so, 
maintain  it  for  some  time,  using  the  correct  aids.  A  few  of 
these  lessons  will  be  sufficient. 

239.  Changes  of  gait:  To  pass  from  the  halt  or  the  walk  to 
the  trot  or  the  gallop,  the  means  prescribed  for  passing  from 
the  halt  to  the  w^alk  are  employed  and  continued  until  the 
desired  gait  is  taken  (par.  227). 

To  pass  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot,  the  trot  to  the  walk,  or 
to  halt,  the  means  prescribed  for  passing  from  the  walk  to 
the  halt  are  employed  and  continued  until  the  desired  gait  is 
taken  or  the  horse  has  stopped  (par.  228). 

The  commands  are:  1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH;  1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH; 
1.  Walk,  2.  MARCH;   and  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 

Changes  of  gait  are  habitually  made  progressively,  the  walk 
being  taken  from  the  halt,  the  trot  from  the  walk,  the  gallop 
from  the  trot,  and  vice  versa.  For  instruction  purposes  and 
when  necessary  in  service  an  increase  or  decrease  of  gait  may 
be  made  more  abruptly. 

A  change  from  the  halt  to  the  walk,  from  the  walk  to  the 
trot,  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  or  vice  versa,  is  to  be  under- 
stood when  reference  is  made  in  these  regulations  to  a  change 
of  gait  of  one  degree. 

240.  To  change  hands:  At  the  command  CHANGE  HANDS, 
each  trooper  after  having  passed  the  corner  and  marched  a 
horse  length  on  the  long  side  directs  himself  toward  the 
diagonal  corner  so  as  to  take  the  track  to  the  opposite  hand 
and  at  about  two  horse  lengths  from  the  corner.  Troopers 
pass  those  going  in  an  opposite  direction  by  keeping  to  the 
right. 

241.  Suppling  exercises  with  the  horse  in  motion:  The  exer- 
cises which  have  been  taught  at  the  halt  are  repeated  at  the 
different  gaits,  except  as  indicated. 


90  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

To  pat  the  squad  in  march  the  instructor  designates  a 
trooper  to  act  as  leader  and  causes  him  to  take  the  track;  he 
then  causes  tlie  recruits  to  take  their  places  in  column  of 
troopers  behind  the  leader. 

The  instructor  limits  his  explanations  to  the  essential  princi- 
ples for  putting  the  horse  in  motion  and  stopping  him. 

The  troopers  are  restricted  to  letting  their  horses  follow 
those  in  front. 

The  instructor  is  especially  careful  that  the  movement  of 
one  part  of  the  body  does  not  react  on  any  other  part;  for 
example,  that  an  exercise  of  the  right  arm  does  not  disturb 
the  left  arm  nor  the  position  of  loins  or  legs. 

Any  movement  is  proper  Mdiich  engages  the  trooper's  atten- 
tion and  leads  him  to  forget  that  he  is  on  horseback  and 
thereby  brings  about  relaxation. 

The  end  desired  is  attained  by  the  frequency  and  variety  of 
the  exercises;  the  instructor  must  carefully  avoid  prolonging 
a  movement  to  weariness,  which  inevitably  brings  on  rigidity. 

He  must  likewise  avoid  any  movement  that  would  result 
in  lifting  the  buttocks  from  the  saddle  or  in  sinking  the 
loins  and  hollowing  the  back. 

At  first  the  gait  should  be  the  walk  or  the  slow  trot.  The 
8-mile  trot  should  not  be  used.  The  gallop  should  be  employed 
very  early  in  the  instruction ;  it  is  the  most  favorable  gait  for 
suppling  the  loins. 

As  soon  as  the  troopers  have  acquired  a  fair  security  of 
seat  at  the  trot  and  have  grown  accustomed  to  a  fast  gait  the 
instructor  begins  to  train  them  at  the  gallop.  The  first  les- 
sons are  given  on  a  large  circle  so  that  the  horses  will  have 
less  tendency  to  pull.  The  troopers  retain  their  stirrups  until 
they  have  gained  confidence.  The  instructor  causes  them  to 
abandon  the  stirrups  when  he  believes  that  sufficient  progress 
has  been  made. 

As  soon  as  the  instructor  causes  the  trooper  to  take  the 
reins  he  teaches  him  to  keep  touch  with  the  mouth  of  the 
horse,  while  leaving  the  horse  the  free  use  of  his  neck.  To 
do  this  it  is  necessary  for  the  trooper  to  follow  with  his  hands 
the  movements  of  the  horse's  neck. 

The  cadence  at  the  increased  gaits  is  easy  to  follow  with 
the  reins  lightly  held.  In  a  short  time  the  hand  follows  in- 
stinctively the  movement  of  the  neck. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED.        91 

Constant  effort  should  be  made  to  overcome  stiffness  of  the 
arms  and  shoulders,  which  is  the  usual  cause  of  a  heavy  hand. 

242.  Posting:  Posting  is  habitually  employed  when  the  troop- 
ers have  stirrups  and  understand  their  use. 

It  is  executed  as  follows:  The  horse  moving  at  a  trot,  the 
trooper  inclines  the  upper  part  of  his  body  forward,  then 
supporting  himself  on  the  stirrups  Vv'hile  maintaining  the 
clinging  of  his  knees  he  rises  under  the  impulsion  of  the  horse, 
maintains  his  position  detached  from  the  saddle  while  the. 
succeeding  impulse  is  produced,  again  sits  down  in  the  saddle, 
and  continues  in  this  way,  avoiding  alternate  impulses. 

At  the  beginning  the  mechanism  of  posting  is  made  easier 
to  the  trooper  by  causing  him  to  stroke  the  horse's  neck  or  to 
grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  either  hand,  thus  determining 
the  forward  inclination  of  the  body. 

Its  proper  execution  requires  that  the  seat  be  raised  moder- 
ately, that  contact  with  the  saddle  be  resumed  gently  and 
without  shock,  that  the  full  support  of  the  stirrup  be  obtained 
wiiile  keeping  the  lower  leg  steady,  that  the  ankle  joint  be 
supple,  and  that  the  heel  be  kept  lower  than  the  toe, 

243.  Care  of  horses  and  saddlery:  The  recruits  will  be  given 
talks  and  practical  illustrations  in  every  phase  of  the  care  of 
horses  and  the  care  of  saddlery.  This  in  addition  to  their 
daily  attention  to  those  subjects  as  a  matter  of  routine. 

244.  The  use  of  arms,  mounted. — During  the  period  in  ^yhich 
the  instruction  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  is  held,  there  must 
be  thorough  instruction  in  the  use  of  arms  mounted.  After  the 
first  few  drills  there  should  be  daily  instruction  in  some  phase 
of  this  important  part  of  the  trooper's  training.  Progress  in 
the  more  advanced  steps  of  this  instruction  must  necessarily 
depend  upon  the  trooper's  progress  in  horsemanship;  but  by 
making  the  dismounted  instruction  thorough  and  keeping  it 
well  in  advance  of  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  mounted 
program,  many  difficulties  will  be  obviated  and  much  time 
saved.  Success  with  the  pistol  and  saber  will  be  dependent 
upon  that  familiarity  with  their  use  that  can  be  gained  only 
by  daily  practice  extending  over  a  considerable  period.  The 
dismounted  instruction  already  prescribed  in  connection  with 
the  use  of  the  weapons  must  be  supplemented  by  thorough 
mounted  work  at  all  gaits,  when  passing  obstacles,  etc.  The 
trooper  must  learn  to  control  his  horse  thoroughly  with  one 


92  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

hand  wliile  carrying  and  using  his  weapon  in  the  other;  he 
must  learn  to  handle  his  weapon  mounted  with  a  minimum  of 
danger  to  himself,  his  comrades,  or  his  horse.  The  principal 
drill  on  at  least  one  day  of  each  week  during  the  entire  period 
devoted  to  the  school  of  the  trooper  should  ordinarily  be  de- 
voted to  the  above  instruction,  thus  supplementing  and  testing 
the  results  accomplished  in  the  shorter  daily  drills.  At  this 
v»^eekly  drill  the  troopers  should  habitually  appear  fully  armed 
and  equipped,  the  saddles  being  packed  as  for  field  service. 

The  employment  of  the  saber  mounted  is  taught  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  Saber  Exercise;  the  use  of  the  pistol  in  firing 
mounted,  as  prescribed  in  the  Small- Arms  Firing  Manual. 

245.  Manual  of  the  Saber,  Mounted:  The  saber  suspended 
from  the  left  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Draw,  2.  SABER.  Pass  the  right  hand  over  the  reins  and 
execute  with  it  rapidly  what  is  prescribed  for  drawing  the 
saber  on  foot;  place  the  pommel  near  the  hip  and  resting  on 
top  of  the  thigh,  flat  of  the  blade  against  the  point  of  the  shoul- 
der.    This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber,  mounted. 

246.  The  saber  suspended  from  the  right  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Draw.  Turn  the  head  to  the  right  without  deranging  the 
position  of  the  body  and  glance  toward  the  hilt ;  engage  the 
right  wrist  in  the  saber  knot ;  pull  the  hilt  forward ;  seize  the 
grip  in  the  full  hand,  nails  to  the  right ;  draw  the  blade  6 
inches  from  the  scabbard,  and  look  to  the  front. 

2.  SABER.  Draw  the  saber  as  prescribed  on  foot  and  take 
the  position  of  carry  saber. 

247.  The  troopers  are  also  exercised  in  drawing  the  saber  as 
quickly  as  possible  at  the  single  command  :  DRAW  SABER. 

248.  To  return  saber:  The  scabbard  suspended  from  the  left 
side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Return.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.  Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot,  supporting  the 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  left  forearm  until  the  point 
is  engaged  in  the  scabbard. 

This  command  is  given  only  at  a  halt  or  when  marching  at 
a  walk. 

249.  The  scabbard  suspended  on  the  right — 

1.  Return.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.  Carry  the  wrist  opposite  the  right  shoulder; 
lower  the  blade  to  the  right  of  the  horse's  neck;  let  the  grip 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER,  MOUNTED.  93 

turn  in  the  hand  so  that  the  hand  grasps  the  guard  at  the 
pommel,  back  of  the  hand  up ;  turn  the  head  to  the  right  and 
fix  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the  scabbard ;  raise  the  hand ; 
insert  the  blade  and  push  it  home;  disengage  the  wrist  from 
the  saber  knot ;  and  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

When  the  saber  is  carried  on  the  right  the  return  saber  is 
executed,  so  far  as  possible,  at  the  halt. 

250.  Inspection  saber  and  present  saber  are  executed  as  when 
dismounted. 

251.  Guard. — ^Thrust  the  feet  home  in  the  stirrups  and  crouch 
slightly  in  the  saddle,  bending  forward  from  the  waist.  Other- 
wise as  explained  dismounted. 

In  the  charge  in  close  order  the  trooper  (in  single  rank) 
assumes  the  position  indicated  in  par.  297,  the  body  almost  in 
a  horizontal  line  over  the  horse's  neck,  the  arm  fully  extendeo 
to  the  front,  the  saber,  in  the  full  grasp,  in  prolongation  of  the 
arm,  guard  up,  finger  nails  to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of 
the  eye.  When  difficult  ground  is  encountered  the  trooper 
takes  the  position  of  guard  while  passing  it. 

If  charging  in  double  rank,  the  front-rank  troopers  conform 
to  the  positions  indicated  for  single  rank.  Those  troopers  who 
are  in  the  rear  rank  or  who  are  directly  in  rear  of  others,  take 
the  position  of  port  saber. 

In  the  melee  the  troopers  take  the  position  of  guard  toward 
the  nearest  enemy,  crouching  slightly  in  the  saddle  and  alive 
to  all  possible  attacks. 

Manual  of  the  Pistol,  Mounted. 

252.  The  modifications  of  the  dismounted  manual,  incident  to 
the  employment  of  the  pistol  mounted  are  explained  in  the  cor- 
responding paragraphs  of  the  Manual  of  the  Pistol,  Dismounted 
(pars.  145-156). 

THE  KIFLE. 

(For  troops  armed  with  the  Cavalry  Equipment,  Model  of 
1912.) 

253.  Before  standing  to  horse  the  trooper  attaches  his  rifle 
to  his  belt  by  passing  the  muzzle  up  through  the  belt  ring 
and  engaging  the  snap  hook  of  the  belt  ring  into  the  trigger 
guard. 


94  CAVALEY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Beins^  at  stand  to  horse,  upon  any  preparatory  command, 
except  for  mounting  or  securing  horses,  unsling  the  rifle  from 
the  belt  ring  and  take  the  position  of  order  arms,  removing 
the  snaffle  reins  from  the  horse's  neck  and  passing  the  right 
arm  through  them  if  necessary. 

If  a  command  to  secure  horses  is  given,  link  or  couple  first 
and  then  unsling  the  rifle. 

To  mount,  proceed  as  without  the  rifle.  When  seated  in 
the  saddle,  grasp  the  rifle  at  the  bolt  with  the  left  hand,  barrel 
to  the  front,  place  the  butt  of  the  rifle  in  the  bucket,  steady- 
ing the  latter  with  the  left  foot  if  necessary  and  take  the 
position  of  the  trooper  mounted. 

To  dismount:  At  the  preparatory  command,  seize  the  rifle 
at  the  bolt  with  the  left  hand,  give  it  a  quick,  forcible  pull, 
lifting  the  butt  from  the  bucket,  and  let  the  rifle  hang  from 
the  belt. 

(For  troops  armed  with  equipment  corresponding  to  the 
MeClellan  saddle.) 

254.  At  stand  to  horse,  the  rifle  is  held  on  the  left  side  of  the 
trooper  in  a  position  corresponding  to  order  arms  (par.  93),  as 
modified  by  substituting  the  word  left  for  right  wherever  the 
latter  occurs. 

In  leading  out,  and  on  all  occasions  when  the  trooper  leads 
his  horse  for  short  distances,  the  rifle  is  carried  at  the  left 
trail  (par.  108)  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

255.  In  mounting,  the  rifle  is  inserted  in  the  scabbard  after 
the  trooper  steps  back  opposite  the  girth  and  before  he  takes 
the  reins  in  his  right  hand  (par.  191). 

On  dismounting,  each  trooper,  after  placing  the  bights  of  the 
reins  on  the  horse's  neck,  and  before  stepping  forward  to  take 
the  position  of  stand  to  horse  (par.  192),  takes  the  rifle  from 
the  scabbard  and  assumes  the  left  trail.  A  modification  of  this 
provision  applies  when  the  trooper  dismounts  for  inspection. 
The  rifle  is  never  carried  on  the  saddle  when  the  trooper  is 
dismounted,  except  as  specially  authorized  at  inspections, 
with  the  equipment  corresponding  to  the  MeClellan  saddle 
(par.  262). 

256.  Inspection  of  arms  and  equipment,  mounted. — It  is  as- 
sumed that  the  troopers  before  being  formally  inspected 
mounted  and  under  arms,  Mill  have  advanced  in  elementary 
collective  instruction  to  a  point  when  they  can  be  formed  and 


INSPECTION  OF  ARMS,  MOUNTED.  95 

aligned  as  a  mounted  squad  (par.  350).  Should  this  not  be  the 
case,  the  instructor  will  place  the  troopers  in  line  with  inter- 
vals in  advance  of  the  inspection.  References  to  the  guide  and 
to  alignment  will  then  be  disregarded  and  the  command  front 
will  be  omitted. 

The  inspection  is  described  below  upon  the  assumption  that 
all  arms  are  inspected.  The  inspection  of  pistols  is  explained 
for  both  the  mounted  and  dismounted  execution.  The  neces- 
sary modification  in  case  the  inspection  of  any  weapon  be 
omitted  is  indicated  in  par.  266. 

257.  When  arms  are  inspected  mounted  they  are  always  in- 
spected in  the  order :  Saber,  pistol.  AVhen  inspected  dis- 
mounted they  are  always  inspected  in  the  order :  Rifle,  pistol. 
Sabers  are  not  inspected  dismounted,  nor  are  rifles  inspected 
mounted.  Pistols  may  be  inspected  either  mounted  or  dis- 
mounted. 

258.  The  troopers  being  mounted  and  fully  armed  and  in 
line:  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  second  command  all  align  themselves  on  the  guide. 
The  inspector,  having  verified  the  alignment,  takes  position 
3  yards  to  the  right  and  front  of  the  right  trooper,  facing  to 
the  left,  and  commands:  FRONT,  followed  by:  1.  Draw,  2. 
SABER  (par.  165). 

259.  If  it  is  not  intended  to  inspect  the  pistols  mounted,  the 
inspector  cautions  PISTOLS  WILL  NOT  BE  INSPECTED 
MOUNTED,  and  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank. 

260.  As  the  inspector  approaches,  the  first  two  troopers  exe- 
cute the  first  motion  of  inspection  saber  (par.  170),  the  first 
trooper,  as  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  him,  executes  the 
second  and  third  motions  of  inspection  saber ;  the  second 
trooper,  as  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  him,  executes  the 
second  and  third  motions  of  inspection  saber,  the  first  trooper 
at  this  instant  resuming  the  carry  and  the  third  trooper 
executing  the  first  motion  of  inspection  saber.  The  first 
trooper  then  returns  saber.  As  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of 
the  other  troopers  the  movements  are  executed  successively  as 
just  explained. 

261.  The  inspector,  having  completed  the  inspection  of 
sabers,  passes  in  rear  from  the  left  to  the  right  of  the  rank. 
As  he  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  the  first  two  troopers 
(in  the  absence  of  indication  to  the  contrary)    (par.  259)  exe- 


96  CAVALHY  DRILL  REGULATIONS, 

cute  inspection  pistol  (par.  148).  Each  of  the  other  troopers, 
in  order  from  right  to  left,  successively  executes  inspection 
pistol  in  time  to  complete  the  execution  just  before  the  in- 
spector arrives  in  front  of  him.  Each  trooper  executes  return 
pistol  as  the  inspector  passes  to  the  trooper  next  on  his  left. 

262.  To  inspect  the  rifles,  to  inspect  the  pistols  dismounted, 
or  to  inspect  the  dress  and  equipment  of  the  squad  more  mi- 
nutely, the  inspector  dismounts  the  squad  without  forming 
rank. 

Troopers  when  dismounted  following  the  command  prepare 
for  inspection  take  a  special  position ;  and  a  special  exception 
is  made  in  this  case  to  the  rule  requiring  the  rifle  (if  not 
slung)  to  be  taken  from  the  scabbard  upon  dismounting  (par. 
255).  Upon  dismounting  while  at  prepare  for  inspection  each 
trooper  takes  the  snaffle  reins  off  the  horse's  neck,  passes  the 
right  arm  through  the  reins  (the  bight  of  the  reins  resting  on 
the  shoulder)  and  takes  a  position  similar  to  stand  to  horse. 
The  rifle  is  not  unslung  (or  removed  from  the  scabbard) 
unless  it  has  been  specially  designated  for  inspection;  it  is 
then  reslung  or  returned  to  the  scabbard  as  soon  as  its  in- 
spection is  completed. 

A  trooper  dismounted  at  prepare  for  inspection,  if  his  right 
hand  be  free,  grasps  the  reins  as  in  stand  to  horse.  The" snaffle 
reins  once  talven  from  the  neck  as  above  are  not  replaced 
until  the  first  command  for  mounting. 

The  above  position  is  habitually  terminated  by  the  first  com- 
mand for  mounting  or  by  stand  to  horse. 

263.  If  the  inspector  wishes  to  inspect  the  arms  after  dis- 
mounting, he  cautions,  immediatelii  follotving  the  commands 
for  dismounting:  RIFLES  AND  PISTOLS  {or  RIFLES,  or  PIS- 
TOLS) WILL  BE  INSPECTED. 

Each  trooper  at  once  unslings  his  rifle  (or  takes  it  from  the 
scabbard)  and  resumes  his  position  similar  to  stand  to  horse, 
his  rifle  at  the  order,  the  reins  as  described  in  par.  262. 

264.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  the 
trooper  on  the  right  executes  inspection  arms  (par.  112), 

The  inspector  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right  hand 
just  above  the  rear  sight,  the  man  dropping  his  hands.  The 
inspector  inspects  the  piece,  and,  with  the  hand  and  piece  in 
the  same  position  as  in  receiving  it,  hands  it  back  to  the  man, 


INSPECTION  OF  ARMS  AND  EQUIPMENT.  97 

who  takes  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  executes  port 
arms,  and  slings  the  rifle  or  places  it  in  the  scabbard,  according 
to  his  equipment. 

As  the  inspector  returns  the  piece  the  next  man  executes 
inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  troop. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each  man 
proceeds  as  above  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to  the  next 
man. 

265.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  of  odd 
numbers,  after  completing  the  inspection  of  the  rifles  of  the 
even  numbers,  the  first  two  troopers  of  the  rank  execute 
inspection  pistol. 

To  inspect  the  pistol  closely  the  inspector  grasps  it  with  his 
left  hand  above  the  trooper's  hand,  makes  such  examination 
as  is  desired,  and  hands  the  pistol  back  to  the  trooper  in  the 
same  position  as  that  in  which  the  inspector  took  the  weapon. 
The  trooper  takes  the  pistol  with  the  right  hand  as  in  inspec- 
tion pistol  and  executes  return  pistol.  Should  the  pistols  be 
inspected  without  handling,  each  man  executes  return  pistol  as 
the  inspector  passes  to  the  next  trooper. 

266.  If  no  indication  be  given  for  the  inspection  of  rifles  they 
remain  slung  or  in  the  scabbard,  according  to  the  equipment 
carried.  If  only  rifles  are  ordered  inspected,  pistols  are  not 
presented  for  inspection  and  rifles  are  slung  or  returned  to 
the  scabbard  as  soon  as  inspected. 

If  only  pistols  are  ordered  inspected,  they  are  presented  by 
the  two  troopers  on  the  right  when  the  inspector  approaches 
the  rank  the  first  time  after  dismounting. 

267.  During  the  inspection  of  arms  the  inspector  observes 
the  appearance  of  the  men,  horses,  equipment,  and  clothing. 

After  the  inspection  of  arms  is  completed  he  makes  such 
further  inspection  of  equipment,  clothing,  etc.,  as  he  may  con- 
sider desirable.  During  this  part  of  the  inspection  the  troopers 
may  be  permitted  to  stand  at  ease. 

268.  If  an  inspection  of  arms  of  a  detailed  character  be 
made  in  connection  with  a  dismounted  formation  it  is  con- 
ducted by  the  above  commands  and  in  accordance  with  the 
above  methods  in  so  far  as  applicable.  Rifles  are  presented 
for  inspection  as  described  without  special  indication  when  the 

38218  °— 18 7 


98  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

inspector  approaches  the  rank  after  commanding  FRONT  (par. 
258).  Except  when  rifles  are  slung  as  provided  in  the  next 
sentence,  each  trooper  executes  order  arms  as  soon  as  his 
rifle  is  returned  to  him.  Should  the  troopers  be  armed  with 
both  rifle  and  pistol,  each  trooper  slings  his  rifle  as  soon  as 
inspected  if  the  equipment  in  use  so  permits ;  otherwise  the 
rifles  are  stacked  (par.  115)  by  command  after  being  inspected. 
The  pistols  are  then  inspected,  after  which  take  arms  (par. 
116)  is  executed  before  Mie  troopers  are  dismissed. 

Third  Period,  or  Work  on  the  Double  Snaffle. 

General  provisions  (par.  269). 

To  adjust  the  double  snaffle  (par.  271). 

The  about  (par.  272). 

Broken  lines  (par.  273). 

Serpentines   (par.  274). 

The  figure  of  eight  (par.  275). 

Circling  individually  (par.  276). 

The  half  turn   (par.  277). 

The  half  turn  in  reverse  (par.  278). 

Increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace  (par.  279). 

To  back  and  halt  (par.  280). 

Use  of  the  aids  (par.  281). 

To  leave  the  ranks   (par.  282). 

The  false  gallop  (par.  283). 

Jumping  obstacles   (par.  284-289). 

Exercises  on  varied  ground  (par.  290,  291). 

Employment  of  the  spur  (par.  292). 

Work  at  fixed  distances  (par.  293). 

Changing  the  diagonal  in  posting  (par.  294). 

Work  on  long  lines  (par.  295-298). 

Bit  and  bridoon   (par.  299). 

Duty  in  the  ranks  of  the  troop  (par.  300).     • 

269.  General  provisions:  When  the  troopers  have  become 
familiar  with  the  movements  of  the  horse  at  each  gait  and 
have  begun  to  find  and  keep  a  seat  in  the  saddle,  the  in- 
structor advances  then  to  work  on  the  double  snaffle  for  the 
X)urpose  of  teaching  them  the  use  of  the  aids,  increasing  their 
confidence  and  suppleness,  and  confirming  them  in  their  seats. 


WORK  ON  THE  DOUBLE  SNAFFLE.         99 

The  exercises  indicated  for  the  work  on  the  double  snaffle 
depend  for  their  effect  upon  very  simple  actions,  the  only  ones 
the  recruits  need  be  taught. 

It  is  important  that  in  these  exercises  the  recruits  ride 
only  docile  and  well-trained  horses. 

The  instructor  returns  frequently  to  the  suppling  exercises 
and  causes  each  trooper  to  execute  during  rests  the  move- 
ments that  he  has  indicated  to  him  as  especially  adapted  to 
correct  his  faults  of  position. 

The  horses  are  equipped  with  the  double  snaffle  bit  and 
bare  saddles  and,  at  first,  the  troopers  are  without  spurs. 

The  exercises  are  conducted  in  the  riding  hall  or  outside  in 
a  rectangle,  the  corners  of  which  are  marked  by  elevated 
and  conspicuous  objects.  These  rectangles  are  of  sufficient 
dimensions  to  enable  the  troopers  to  exercise  with  freedom 
while  remaining  under  the  eye  of  the  instructor  and  within 
reach  of  his  voice.  The  instructor  changes  the  ground  as  soon 
as  the  tracks  are  worn  to  the  extent  that  the  horses  follow 
them  mechanically.  He  avoids  placing  the  rectangle  parallel 
to  adjacent  rectangles,  roads,  paths,  or  fences  so  that  from  the 
first  the  trooper  is  compelled  to  direct  his  horse. 

270.  The  troopers  are  usually  marched  to  and  from  the  riding 
hall  in  column  of  twos  or  fours.  The  instructor  avails  him- 
self of  the  opportunity  to  instruct  them  in  the  movements 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  squad. 

271.  To  adjust  the  double  snaflle:  The  bits  should  be  ad- 
justed and  the  reins  held,  etc.,  as  explained  for  the  bit  and 
bridoon  (see  par.  302),  the  snaffle  corresponding  to  the  curb 
being  attached  to  the  outside  cheek  pieces  of  the  bridle. 

The  instructor  will  show  the  recruits  how  to  hold  the  reins 
with  both  hands,  to  change  into  the  left  hand  and  the  right 
hand,  and  how  to  use  the  two  bits  for  relaxing  the  jaw  by 
vibrations  and  divisions  of  support  (par.  958). 

272.  The  about:  At  the  command:  1.  Troopers  right  (left) 
about,  2.  MARCH,  each  trooper  turns  his  horse  until  he  finds 
himself  facing  in  the  opposite  direction  and  then  moves  to 
his  new  front. 

Eventually  the  turn  should  be  made  on  the  arc  of  k  circle 
whose  radius  is  2  yards  at  a  walk,  4  yards  at  a  trot,  and  6 
yards  at  a  gallop. 


100 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


r 


Fig.  25,  par.  273. 


273.  Broken  lines:   The  broken  line  consists  of  departures 

from  and  returns  to  the  long  side  of  the  track 
by  obliques.  The  command  is :  BROKEN" 
LINE,  ONCE  (TWICE,  or  THREE  TIMES). 
As  the  trooper  enters  the  long  side  he  leaves 
the  track  by  an  oblique  and,  having  marched 
the  indicated  distance,  returns  to  the  track 
by  an  oblique  in  the  opposite  direction.  This 
is  repeated  the  number  of  times  specified ;  at 
the  other  end  of  the  long  side  the  trooper 
retakes  the  track. 

This  exercise  has  for  its 
object  teaching  the  rider  to 
make  rapid  changes  out  of 
doors,  at  the  walk,  trot,  or 
gallop,  especially  at  the  latter 
gait.  It  leads  to  work  on  ser- 
pentines, and  eventually  to 
figures  of  eight  at  the  gallop  without  chang- 
ing the  lead.      (Fig.  25.) 

274.  Serpentines:  The  serpentine  consists 
of  successive  abouts  executed 
perpendicularly  to  the  track 
and  tangent  to  each  other,  as 
indicated  in  the  figure. 

The  rider  causes  the  horse 
to  make  the  turns  slightly  on  the  haunches, 
or  slightly  on  the  forehand,  or  with  the  body 
naturally  following  the  curvature  of  the  line, 
at  the  walk  and  slow  trot,  and  eventually, 
when  well  advanced  in  the  use  of  the  aids, 
at  the  gallop  without  changing  the  lead. 
(Fig.  26.) 

275.  The  figure  of  eight:  This  exercise  con- 
sists in  describing  the  figure  eight,  at  first  per- 
pendicular to  the  long  sides  of  the  track  and 
tangent  to  them.  Later,  with  dimensions  pro- 
gressively reduced,  as  the  riders  become  more  skillful  in  the 
use  of  the  aids.     (Fig.  27.) 


r;- 

•^.  ^' 

^■^ 

*"  ~N 

l 

i 

^- 

-' 

1  ^ 

r 

"y;' 

~^'\ 

r-A. 

^'  v_ 

_x 

i^- 

^ 

-» 

1/ 
1, 

X 

^■4 

N^- 

._-' 

^<» 

1 

1  *- 

v"' 

x^ 

'^\ 

i 

J 

Fig.  27, 

par. 

275. 

__\ J 

Fig.  26,  par.  274. 


INDIVIDUAL  MOVEMENTS.  101 

276.  Circling    individually:    At    the    command:    1.  Troopers 

circle    to    the    right    (left),    2.    MARCH,    each  ^. __^ 

trooper  describes,  in  accordance  with  the  prin-  |      ("    ^\        ^y 

ciples  explained  in  par.  229,  a  complete  circle  '      \       ) /^--^ 

tangent  to  the  track,  with  a  radius  less  than  \,^""'\'^ {       ^\ 

half  the  length  of  the  short  side,  and  retakes  ( 

the  track  at  the  point  where  he  left  it.  V 


~~j^  I 


The  trooper  moves  his  horse  true  on  the  \^—^^  [  J 
circle,  to  the  right  hand,  for  example,  by  the  |,'  ^  \^  ,\ 
means  prescribed  for  moving  by  the  right  \\^y  ^<t  • 
flank;  slightly  on  the  fore-  l.-^v  /'  ^^ 
hand,  by  using  the  right  di-  j'  ^  \^  h 
rect  rein  and  right  leg ;  'V  A^'^^'^  I 
slightly  on  the  haunches,  by     '    "^  ,'         \      j 

using   the   left    indirect    rein     L l^^^"!. / 

of  opposition  in  front  of  the     p^^  og  par  ^^76 
withers  and  left  leg.  •  -  >  p 

The  first  is  the  usual  means  of  turning ;  the 
second,  as  the  radius  of  the  circle  is  reduced, 
leads  eventually  to  the  about  on  the  forehand ; 
the  third,  to  the  about  on  the  haunches.  The 
second  must  not  be  used  at 
the  gallop.     (Fig.  28.) 

277.  The     half    turn:     The 
half  turn  consists  of  an  about 
followed  by  an  oblique. 
Being  on  the  track  to  the  left  hand,  at  the 
command:  1.  Half  turn,  2.  MARCH,  the  rider 
describes  an  about  and  then  by  an  oblique  re- 
gains the  track. 

At  the  moment  the  horse  starts  the  about 
the  rider  accentuates  the  pressure  of  the  right 
leg  and  right  indirect  rein  of  opposition  in 
front  of  the  withers,  which  should  have  the 
effect  of  swinging  the  shoulders  about  the 
haunches.     The  horse  then  turns  slightly  on  ^ 

the  haunches.  The  limit,  eventually  gained  as  ^^^'  ^"'  P^^'  ^'^^• 
the  radius  is  decreased,  is  the  about  on  the  haunches.  (Fig. 
29. )  . 

278.  The  half  turn  in  reverse :  The  half  turn  in  reverse  con- 
sists of  an  oblique,  followed  by  an  about. 


1  \~           V      ! 

i   ^ 

1 
^      1 
\     1 

•  \   \ 

,'->! 

1     \ 

\     1 
,    1 

1      / 

\  1 

Fig.  29, 

par.  277. 

rr—' 

»>    1 

1  ^ 

M 

i\  \ 

\  1 

1  '^ 

\  1 
\  1 

L,X' 

/y 

102  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Being  on  the  track  to  the  left  hand,  at  the  command  :  1.  Half 
turn  in  reverse,  2.  MARCH,  the  rider  places  his  horse  on  the 
oblique  and  then,  after  moving  in  that  direction  5  or  6  yards, 
by  an  about  to  the  right  regains  the  track. 

At  the  moment  the  horse  starts  the  about  the  rider  accentu- 
ates the  effect  of  the  right  leg  and  right  direct  rein,  which 
should  have  the  effect  of  pushing  the  haunches  to  the  left. 
The  horse  then  turns  slightly  on  the  forehand.  The  limit, 
eventually  gained  as  the  radius  is  decreased,  is  the  about  on 
the  forehand.     (Fig.  30.) 

279.  Increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace:  To  increase  or  de- 
crease the  pace  or  speed  of  the  gait  the  trooper  employs  the 
means  prescribed  for  passing  from  the  halt  to  the  walk  or 
from  the  walk  to  the  halt  to  the  extent  necessary  to  obtain  the 
desired  result. 

The  horse  in  extending  the  walk  increases  the  amplitude  of 
the  movement  of  his  head  and  neck  to  the  same  degree  as  he 
increases  the  length  of  his  step ;  he  accelerates  the  movement 
of  the  head  and  neck  as  he  increases  the  cadence  of  his  step. 

The  trooper  aids  these  movements  by  yielding  the  hand  and 
giving  the  horse  greater  freedom  of  movement.  He  maintains 
contact  with  the  bit  so  that  he  can  exercise  a  gradual  restrain- 
ing influence  with  the  direct  reins  when  he  feels  the  horse  is 
about  to  spring  into  the  trot. 

To  decrease  the  pace  at  a  walk  the  trooper  makes  use  of 
the  same  aids  as  in  coming  to  the  halt.  The  step  is  shortened 
and  the  cadence  decreased. 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  at  the  trot  the  same  means 
are  used.  The  exercises  in  increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace 
afford  excellent  practice  for  the  trooper  in  the  use  of  the  aids 
and  good  training  for  the  horse  in  obeying  them ;  but  the 
trooper  out  of  ranks  should  use  only  the  regulation  gaits. 

The  instructor  may  cause  the  speed  of  the  gallop  to  be  in- 
creased or  decreased  in  the  riding  hall,  but  the  maneuvering 
gallop  and  the  extended  gallop  only  should  be  used  in  work  on 
long  lines. 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  at  any  time  the  caution 
may  be  given:  FASTER  PACE  or  SLOWER  PACE.  The  com- 
mands: 1.  Walk,  1.  Slow  trot,  1.  Trot,  1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH, 
indicate,  respectively,  the  walk  as  described  in  par.  225,  the 
slow  trot  as  described  in  par.  234,  the  maneuvering  trot  as 


INDIVIDUAL  MOVEMENTS.  103 

described  in  par.  234,  and  tlie  maneuvering  gallop  as  described 
in  par.  236.  The  extended  gallop  and  the  school  gallop  (par. 
236)  are  taken  at  the  respective  cautions:  EXTENDED  GAL- 
lOP  and  SCHOOL  GALLOP. 

280.  To  back  and  halt:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH.  At  the 
first  command  gather  the  horse  as  usual  (par.  226)  ;  at  the 
second  command  use  the  direct  reins  until  the  horse  com- 
mences to  back,  then  relax  the  fingers  and  continue  to  use  the 
direct  reins  intermittently  to  cause  the  horse  to  continue  to 
back. 

At  the  command  :  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  cease  the  action  of  the 
hands. 

The  trooper  carefully  avoids  raising  the  horse's  head.  An 
elevated  position  of  the  head,  by  constraining  the  muscles  of 
the  loins,  renders  the  backward  movement  much  more  difficult 
for  the  horse. 

281.  Use  of  the  aids:  The  training  of  the  trooper  in  the  use 
of  the  aids  is  effected  partly  by  changes  of  gait,  partly  by 
increase  and  decrease  of  pace,  and  partly  by  the  exercises 
herein  described.  AVhen  the  troopers  have  learned  to  use 
the  aids  correctly,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  execute 
changes  of  direction  combined  with  changes  of  gait. 

282.  To  leave  the  ranks  r  The  instructor  forms  the  troopers 
in  line  near  one  end  of  the  riding  hall.  To  do  this  he  may 
caution:  FORM  LINE  (par.  350).  The  troopers  move  by  the 
shortest  line  at  the  walk,  or  at  the  gait  ordered,  and  form  in 
line  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  instructor. 

•  The  instructor  then  causes  them  to  leave  the  rank  individ- 
ually by  calling  them  by  name. 

The  designated  trooper,  gathering  his  horse  and  avoiding 
abrupt  means,  rides  quietly  to  the  front  and  moves  forward 
on  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  squad.  He  takes 
the  track  on  reaching  it,  to  the  hand  designated,  or  halts  at 
a  designated  spot. 

This  movement  can  be  executed  while  the  squad  is  marching 
at  any  gait.  When  the  squad  is  halted,  the  trooper  always 
leaves  the  rank  at  the  walk,  the  faster  gait,  if  one  is  taken, 
not  being  begun  until  the  horse  has  completely  left  the  rank. 

The  troopers  are  also  practiced  in  going  through  the  rank 
both  in  the  direction  of  its  march  and  in  "the  opposite  direc- 
tion. 


104  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  instructor  avoids  forming  the  squad  parallel  to  the 
sides  of  the  riding  hall  or  on  well-marked  lines.  He  thus 
inculcates  in  the  trooper  the  habit  of  placing  himself  in  the 
direction  of  his  leader  and  then  directing  his  horse  inde- 
pendently. 

283.  The  false  gallop:  This  exercise,  of  so  much  value  in 
training  remounts  and  so  constantly  used  in  drill  and  service, 
should  be  practiced  from  the  beginning — on  wide  turns  at 
first,  and  at  last  on  serpentines,  large  circles,  and  figures  of 
eight  of  small  dimensions.  The  false  gallop  is  maintained 
by  the  same  aids  as  produce  the  gallop  with  that  lead. 

If  the  gallop  becomes  disunited,  the  trooper  must  return  to 
the  trot  and  then  again  to  the  gallop  trtce. 

284.  Jumping  obstacles. — The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to 
train  the  trooper  to  clear  obstacles  of  every  nature,  so  that 
he  may  when  riding  alone  or  with  other  men  over  a  route  pre- 
senting difficulties  be  able  to  continue  an  uninterrupted  ad- 
vance at  any  gait  upon  the  objective  in  view. 

Jumping  is  also  an  excellent  means  of  confirming  the  seat, 
increasing  the  pliancy  of  the  hand  and  arm,  strengthening 
the  legs,  and  developing  boldness  and  steadiness. 

The  work  over  obstacles  should  be  begun  early  and  con- 
tinued during  the  whole  course  of  instruction. 

Progress  must  be  regulated  prudently  and  methodically; 
undue  haste  is  liable  to  destroy  the  confidence  of  the  trooper 
and  the  willingness  of  the  horse. 

This  instruction  comprises  two  distinct  parts:  (a)  The  gym- 
nastics of  the  jump;  (&)  conducting  the  horse  to,  over,  and 
beyond  the  obstacle. 

285.  The  gymnastics  of  the  jump :  The  troopers  are  familiar- 
ized with  the  gymnastics  of  jumping  by  first  placing  bars  on 
the  ground  across  the  track  and  later  low  obstacles  about  10 
feet  apart  and  causing  the  troopers  to  ride  their  horses  over 
them  without  concerning  themselves  with  the  conduct  of  the 
horse.  The  instructor  endeavors  in  this  exercise  to  cause  the 
troopers  to  maintain  their  seats  and  remain  in  their  saddles 
by  the  suppleness  of  their  backs,  and  above  all  to  keep  their 
hands  low  and  passive,  thus  permitting  the  horse  to  use  his 
head  and  neck  in  keeping  balance. 

The  horse  that  in  going  over  an  obstacle  has  the  free  use 
of  his  head  and  neck  jumps  willingly,  calmly,  and  without 


INDIVIDUAL  MOVEMENTS.  106 

fatigue.  The  trooper  endeavors  to  keep  in  unison  with  his 
horse  whatever  changes  in  rhythm  or  speed  tlie  latter  may- 
make. 

The  jump  is  made  as  follows :  On  arriving  near  the  obstacle 
grasp  the  horse  with  the  legs,  keeping  the  body  upright,  the 
hands  low  and  passive;  at  the  moment  the  horse  rises  bend 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  at  the  waist,  the  buttocks 
remaining  in  the  saddle ;  as  the  horse  alights  sit  well  down  in 
the  saddle  without  displacing  the  hands. 

During  this  work  the  suppling  exercises  may  be  practiced 
with  excellent  results. 

286.  Conducting  the  horse  to  the  obstacle,  etc.:  When  the 
troopers  are  sufficiently  familiar  with  the  gymnastics  of 
jumping  and  with  the  use  of  the  aids  the  instructor  teaches 
them  to  conduct  their  horses  over  obstacles  by  causing  them 
to  jump,  individually,  obstacles  placed  off  the  track. 

In  general,  the  horse  should  jump  at  the  gait  at  which  he 
approaches  the  obstacle. 

On  approaching  the  obstacle  the  trooper  selects  the  point  at 
which  he  wishes  to  jump  and  conducts  his  horse  straight 
toward  it,  the  reins  separated,  the  legs  close  to  maintain  the 
forward  movement. 

If  the  horse  hesitates  on  approaching  the  obstacle,  antici- 
pate his  resistance  by  stimulating  him  vigorously  with  the 
legs. 

If  the  horse  avoids  the  obstacle,  stop  him,  quiet  him,  then 
place  him  directly  in  front  of  the  obstacle,  and  at  a  suitable 
distance  from  the  latter,  and  urge  him  with  the  legs  to  make 
him  jump. 

If  the  horse  stops  short  in  front  of  the  obstacle,  ride  back 
and  put  him  at  it  again. 

If  the  horse  halts  or  gets  out  of  hand,  pull  him  up  without, 
however,  hampering  him  when  he  takes  the  leap. 

All  horses  lacking  in  calmness  or  willingness  should  be  put 
back  in  training  over  small  obstacles. 

The  reins  must  be  long  but  taut  before,  during,  and  after  the 
jump — long  in  order  that  the  horse  may  have  free  use  of  his 
head  and  forehand ;  taut  that  he  may  have  constant  support 
and  guidance  without  jerks  on  the  mouth. 

If  necessary,  but  only  when  necessary,  £he  trooper  must  let 
the  reins  slide  through  the  fingers. 


106  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULAliOlSrS. 

287.  Jumping  is  first  practiced  with  stirrups.  When  the 
troopers  liave  become  accustomed  to  it,  have  confidence  in 
themselves,  and  are  sufficiently  sure  of  their  hands,  they 
are  made  to  jump  frequently  without  stirrups  in  order  that 
they  may  acquire  a  secure  seat  and  avoid  being  thrown  wlien 
deprived  of  the  liabitual  means  of  support. 

288.  Obstacles  for  jumping  are  of  two  classes :. 

(a)  Broad  jumps — tliose  which  require  a  leap  of  breadth 
only,  such  as  ditches,  water  jumps,  etc. 

( & )  High  jumps — those  which  require  a  leap  of  height,  such 
as  hedges,  fences,  walls,  etc. 

The  dimensions  of  the  obstacles  are  increased  in  proportion 
to  the  progress  of  the  troopers.  They  should  be  limited  to  8 
feet  for  broad  jumps  and  3  feet  for  high  jumps. 

Artificial  obstacles  should  have  a  sufficient  width  of  front 
to  prevent  the  horses  avoiding  them  easily. 

High  jumps  are  as  a  rule  taken  at  a  gallop  of  moderate 
speed  and  broad  jumps  at  an  extended  gallop.  For  broad 
jumps  it  is  important  that  the  speed  should  be  increased  as 
the  obstacle  is  approached. 

289.  The  troopers  are  prepared  for  jumping  in  formed  bodies 
by  jumping  first  in  pairs,  then  in  fours,  separated  by  con- 
siderable distances. 

The  preservation  in  this  exercise  of  the  distances  separating 
the  groups,  while  not  habitually  enforced  in  service,  is  a 
means  of  verifying  the  individual  training  of  men  and  horses. 

290.  Exercises  on  varied  ground. — The  exercises  on  varied 
ground  have  for  their  object  the  training  of  the  troopers  in 
riding  their  horses  across  country,  in  making  them  familiar 
wath  obstacles  which  they  will 'encounter  in  campaign,  and  in 
regulating  their  gait  so  as  to  husband  the  strength  of  their 
horses  in  covering  great  distances. 

This  work  is  begun  at  an  early  period  of  the  training;  its 
difficult  features,  such  as  jumping  obstacles,  are  graduated  to 
fit  the  progress  of  the  trooper,  the  end  being  to  increase  his 
confidence  and  skill. 

The  instructor  conducts  his  class  across  fields,  through 
woods,  and  in  general  over  the  most  varied  terrain  at  his 
disposal. 


WOEK  ON  VARIED  GROUND.  107 

He  may  divide  the  squad  into  small  groups,  each  under  a 
corporal,  who  conducts  the  group  and  regulates  the  gait  over 
a  route  designated  by  the  instructor. 

The  instructor  inculcates  in  the  troopers  the  p^rinciples 
which  should  govern  them  when  left  to  their  own  devices. 
They  are  as  follows : 

On  leaving  the  stable,  move  at  a  walk  for  a  short  time  in 
order  to  obtain  a  good  circulation  in  the  feet  and  legs. 

Vary  the  gaits,  but  do  not  depart  from  the  regulation  pace 
prescribed  for  each. 

Choose  for  the  rapid  gaits  nearly  level  ground.  Going  up- 
hill rapidly  necessitates  great  effort  on  the  part  of  the  horse, 
and  going  downhill  at  a  rapid  gait  exposes  him  to  injuries 
from  the  saddle  and  equipment  and  is  hard  on  his  forelegs. 

Extend  progressively  the  period  at  the  faster  gaits. 

Regulate  the  periods  spent  at  the  intermediate  gaits  by  the 
degree  of  rapidity  with  which  the  total  distance  must  be 
covered. 

Seek  under  all  circumstances  soft  footing  to  save  the  horse's 
legs  and  keep  him,  therefore,  on  the  edge  of  metaled  roads 
rather  than  in  the  middle. 

Choose  hard  ground  when  smooth  and  level  in  preference 
to  ground  that  is  heavy  or  uneven. 

Finish  at  a  walk,  more  or  less  prolonged  in  accordance  with 
the  length  and  conditions  of  the  ride  or  march,  so  that  the 
horse  shall  always  come  in  with  a  dry  skin  and  normal 
respiration. 

291.  To  these  general  principles,  w^hich  must  be  practically 
demonstrated,  the  instructor  adds  such  counsel  as  his  expe- 
rience dictates  and  such  remarks  as  the  nature  and  state  of 
the  terrain  may  render  advisable. 

The  following  rules  cover  the  majority  of  circumstances  that 
will  arise : 

To  ascend  a  steep  slope,  yield  the  hand  as  soon  as  the  horse 
has  been  given  his  direction;  carry  forward  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  and  seize  a  lock  of  the  mane  near  the  middle  of 
the  neck  over  the  reins. 

To  descend  a  steep  slope,  let  the  reins  slip  through  the 
hand  and  give  the  horse  complete  liberty  of  action ;  lean  back, 
and  if  necessary  grasp  the  cantle  with  the^right  hand. 


108  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Troopers  should  be  practiced  in  crossing  a  V-shaped  ditch, 
about  18  feet  wide  and  10  feet  deep,  so  that  they  go  down  one 
side  and  up  the  other.  This  is  a  valuable  exercise,  as  no 
horse  will  face  the  opposite  bank  unless  the  head  is  left  free. 

Long,  steep  slopes  should  be  ascended  slowly  and  quietly. 

All  slopes  should  be  descended  directly ;  short,  steep  slopes 
should  be  ascended  obliquely  if  the  surface  is  not  slippery. 

In  difficult  ground  the  horse  should  be  allowed  to  talie  the 
initiative ;  his  instincts  are  a  more  reliable  guide  than  the 
aids  of  the  trooper. 

If  marshy  ground  must  be  crossed  go  slowly  and  avoid 
following  in  trace.  If  the  horse  goes  down  and  becomes 
nervous  and  begins  to  plunge,  dismount  and  lead. 

The  trooper  must  seek  every  means  to  spare  his  horse,  above 
all  when  carrying  the  full  pack.  Where  possible  to  pass 
natural  obstacles  without  jumping,  this  should  be  done;  the 
heavily  loaded  horse  crosses  many  obstacles ;  for  example, 
wide  ditches,  with  greater  security  and  less  effort  by  climbing 
than  by  jumping. 

AVhen  the  bottom  of  the  ditch  is  boggy  it  will  generally  be 
preferable  to  jump  from  bank  to  bank. 

In  particularly  difficult  places  the  trooper  should  dismount 
and  lead,  the  horse  following.  All  horses  should  be  trained  in 
this  method  of  passing  obstacles.  A  little  of  this  training 
makes  it  easy  to  cross  considerable  obstructions  on  foot. 

292.  Emplo3anent  of  the  spur:  The  spur  is  an  aid  which  aug- 
ments the  effect  produced  by  the  leg. 

The  trooper  employs  it  in  rear  of  Mnd  near  the  girth  by 
touching  the  horse  with  it,  once  or  oftener,  according  to  his 
sensitiveness  and  degree  of  submission. 

The  spur  is  used  only  when  necessary  to  add  to  the  effect 
of  the  action  of  the  leg,  and  its  use  ceases  as  soon  as  obedi- 
ence is  obtained. 

Its  application  should  not  be  continuous  but  quick,  and  re- 
peated if  necessary. 

293.  Work  at  fixed  distances:  The  work  in  the  riding  hall  at 
fixed  distances  comprises  the  movements  executed  in  the  indi- 
vidual instruction,  but  the  movements  are  executed  in  unison 
at  command  and  the  troopers  follow  and  conform  to  move- 
ments of  the  leader. 


WORK  ON  VARIED  GROUND.  109 

The  work  therefore  requires  of  the  troopers  more  precision 
and  exactness  in  the  use  of  the  aid  and  serves  to  prepare  them 
for  work  in  ranks. 

For  the  instructor  it  is  a  check  on  the  results  accomplished. 

The  instructor  forms  the  troopers  in  one  or  two  squads; 
when  there  are  two  squads  he  designates  that  one  of  the  two 
leaders  upon  whom  the  other  will  regulate. 

The  troopers  follow  in  the  trace  of  their  respective  leaders, 
maintaining  distances  of  4  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

294.  Changing  the  diagonal  in  posting:  The  right  fore  foot 
and  the  left  hind  foot  constitute  the  right  diagonal;  the  left 
fore  and  the  right  hind  feet  the  left  diagonal. 

In  posting,  the  trooper  is  said  to  post  on  the  right  diagonal 
when  after  rising  he  sits  down  in  the  saddle  at  the  instant 
the  right  fore  foot  comes  to  the  ground. 

It  is  important  to  instruct  the  trooper  to  post  for  a  time 
on  one  diagonal  and  then  change  to  the  other,  so  that  the 
diagonal  pairs  will  each  perform  the  same  amount  of  work 
and  the  chance  of  injury  from  the  equipment  be  reduced. 

To  automatically  insure  that  the  posting  is  done  as  much  on 
one  diagonal  as  on  the  other,  the  troopers  should  be  required 
to  post  on  the  right  diagonal  when  riding  to  the  left  hand  on 
the  track  and  on  the  left  diagonal  when  to  the  right  hand. 

The  instructor  occasionally  requires  each  trooper  to  inform 
him  on  which  diagonal  he  is  posting. 

To  change  the  diagonal  the  trooper  diminishes  the  weight 
borne  on  the  stirrups  and  retains  his  seat  in  the  saddle  for  two 
successive  beats  of  the  horse's  feet  instead  of  one ;  .he  then 
rises  as  before. 

The  trooper  will  then  find  himself  posting  on  the  diagonal 
opposite  to  the  one  on  which  he  was  posting  before. 

295.  Work  on  long  lines. — This  work  is  carried  out  in  a  rec- 
tangle of  large  dimensions. 

The  troopers  are  there  exercised  at  all  gaits,  but  with  the 
movements  restricted  to  changes  of  direction,  pace,  or  gait. 

The  end  sought  is  complex :  To  confirm  the  horse  in  moving 
on  a  straight  line;  to  increase  his  willingness  to  leave  the 
other  horses ;  to  regulate  his  gaits ;  to  familiarize  the  trooper 
with  the  regulation  and  extended  gallop ;  to  exercise  the  troop- 
ers in  moving  two  and  four  abreast  and  accustom  them  to  fol- 
lowing a  leader  so  as  to  prepare  them  for  work  in  the  squad 


i'lu  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

and  platoon ;  finally,  to  cause  the  troopers  to  acquire  the  calm- 
ness that  is  indispensable  in  the  faster  gaits. 

The  troopers  are  dispersed  at  large  distances  over  the  whole 
of  the  track.  When  two  or  more  troopers  march  abreast  one 
of  them  (habitually  the  center  or  right  center  trooper)  is  des- 
ignated to  act  as  guide.  The  other  troopers  regulate  on  the 
guide. 

The  instructor  limits  his  commands  to  indicating  the  gait  or 
the  movement  to  the  trooper  or  squad  which  is  passing  in  front 
of  him.    The  others  observe  and  conform. 

296.  The  angles  of  the  rectangle  are  marked  bj^  elevated 
objects  easily  distinguished. 

To  permit  the  instructor  to  control  the  gaits  the  dimensions 
of  the  rectangle  should  be  236  by  118  yards.  These  two  dis- 
tances represent  approximately  the  distances  covered  by  the 
horse  in  one  minute  at  the  trot  and  at  the  walk,  respectively. 
The  sum  of  a  side  and  end,  taking  into  consideration  the  short- 
ening of  the  distance  traveled  due  to  rounding  the  corner,  rep- 
resents approximately  the  distance  covered  by  a  horse  in  one 
minute  at  the  regulation  gallop. 

To  represent  the  approximate  distance  which  a  horse  is  re- 
quired to  cover  in  one  minute  at  the  extended  gallop  one  side 
and  two  ends  are  used. 

In  the  Vi'ork  at  the  gallop  the  instructor  must  devote  his  ef- 
forts to  securing  that  calmness  and  regularity  of  speed  re- 
quired in  prolonged  drills  or  exercises. 

When  the  horses  move  calmly  at  the  regulation  gallop  they 
are  exercised  in  the  extended  gallop. 

297.  The  troopers  are  next  prepared  to  participate  in  the 
charge  by  exercising  them  in  galloping  at  full  speed  over  a 
distance  of  60  to  75  yards.  The  movement  is  executed  suc- 
cessively by  the  troopers.  Each  trooper  when  his  name  is 
called  gradually  yields  the  hand  sufficiently  to  give  the  horse 
the  necessary  liberty  in  extending  his  neck  while  maintaining 
support,  and  increases  the  gallop  to  full  speed. 

In  charging  the  trooper  bends  the  body  forward,  pushes  his 
feet  fully  into  the  stirrups  and  supporting  his  weight  upon  the 
latter.  He  gives  his  horse,  if  necessary,  a  touch  of  the  spur, 
and  holds  him  in  the  direction  indicated. 

The  exercises  are  facilitated  at  first  by  grouping  the  troopers 
by  twos. 


WORK  ON  VARIED  GROUND.  Ill 

To  pass  from  the  charge  to  the  gallop  employ  the  means  pre- 
scribed for  decreasing  the  gait. 

In  order  not  to  fatigue  the  horse  by  repeated  charges  or  by 
charges  executed  on  hard  ground,  the  individual  charge  should 
be  made  a  part  of  each  of  several  instruction  hours  and  should 
alv^^ays  be  executed  on  a  track  or  piece  of  ground  specially 
adapted  to  this  work. 

As  soon  as  the  trooper  is  sufficiently  advanced  in  the  instruc- 
tion without  arms  he  must  be  practiced  in  the  use  of  arms 
(par.  298)  in  connection  with  the  exercises  with  the  saddles 
packed  as  for  the  field. 

298.  The  work  in  the  large  rectangles  should  be  completed 
by  work  in  open  order. 

In  this  work  the  troopers  are  formed  in  successive  lines  of 
four  troopers  each,  with  distances  and  intervals  of  3  or  4 
yards. 

The  instructor  causes  the  troopers  thus  formed  to  move  in 
all  directions  and  at  all  gaits  and  causes  them  to  execute  the 
movements  prescribed  in  the  work  on  the  snaffle  and  bit  with 
and  without  arms,  with  saddles  both  stripped  and  packed  as 
for  field  service. 

Satisfactory  execution  of  this  work  requires  that  each 
trooper  shall  keep  his  place  exactly  with  reference  to  the 
others  and  that  the  movements  shall  be  executed  with  pre- 
cision and  in  unison.  * 

299.  Bit  and  bridoon :  At  convenient  opportunities  the  horses 
should  be  equipped  for  a  few  days  only  with  the  curb  bit  and 
snaffle  in  order  that  the  recruits  may  in  case  of  war  or  other 
emergency  be  not  unfamiliar  with  their  use.  {See  pars.  302- 
330,  inclusive.) 

300.  Duty  in  the  ranks  of  the  troop:  In  time  of  peace  the 
recruits  may  now  habitually  at  the  expiration  of  about  three 
months  be  returned  to  duty  with  the  troops  to  which  they  are 
assigned  and  participate  in  the  drills,  marches,  and  maneuvers 
incident  thereto.  Their  individual  instruction  and  training 
in  horsemanship  will  be  continued  to  completion  as  indicated 
in  the  succeeding  period  at  such  time  as  conditions  may 
permit.  It  will  be  resumed  not  later  in  any  case  than  the 
date  of  the  beginning  of  the  next  period  of  garrison  training. 

In  case  of  war  or  other  emergency,  before  their  training 
can  be  so  completed,  the  recruits  should  be  able  to  render 


112  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

good  service.  In  such  a  case  commanders  must  neglect  no 
opportunity  that  conditions  of  service  present  to  carry  for- 
ward to  completion  the  instruction  and  training  of  the 
recruits. 

Fourth  Period,  or  Work  on  the  Bit  and  Bridoon. 

Adjustment  of  the  double  bridle  (par.  302). 

Holding  and  handling  the  reins  (pars.  303-307). 

TJse  and  effect  of  the  bit  and  snaffle  (pars.  308-310). 

Repetition  with  the  bit  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle  (par.  311). 

Changes  of  direction  (par.  312). 

The  turn  in  place  (pars.  313-317). 

The  gallop  departs  with  the  horse  straight  (par.  318). 

Proof  of  training  (par.  319). 

The  trained  trooper  (par.  320). 

301.  Work  on  the  bit  is  the  most  important  element  of  the 
instruction  in  equitation.  The  instructor  causes  this  work  to 
be  taken  up  as  soon  as  the  troopers  have  acquired  a  fair  seat 
and  a  sufficient  knowledge  of  the  use  of  the  aids. 

302.  Adjustment  of  the  double  bridle :  The  bits  should  be  of 
sufficient  width  to  fit  the  horse's  mouth,  the  branches  of  the 
curb  touching  lightly  the  outer  surfaces  of  the  lips. 

The  snaffle  should  touch  lightly  the  upper  corners  of  the 
lips. 

The  curb  should  rest  just  below  the  snaffle. 

The  curb  chain  should  lie  flat  in  the  chin  groove  and  be  of 
such  length  as  to  cause  the  reins  when  stretched  from  the 
pommel  of  the  saddle,  to  form  a  right  angle  with  the  branches 
of  the  curb. 

If  the  bit  is  placed  high,  it  is  less  severe ;  if  placed  low,  it 
becomes  very  powerful. 

It  should  not  be  placed  so  low  as  to  strike  the  teeth. 

When  horses  are  restive  it  is  generally  due  to  faulty  adjust- 
ment of  the  bits  and  curb  chain. 

303.  Holding  and  handling  the  reins. — ^The  normal  method  of 
holding  the  reins  for  military  riders  is  to  take  both  reins 
in  the  left  hand.  The  bit  reins  are  separated  by  the  third 
(ring)  finger,  the  right  snaffle  rein  between  the  first  and 
second  fingers,  the  left  snaflle  rein  under  the  little  finger,  all 
of  the  reins  passing  out  of  the  hand  over  the  second  joint 


ADJUSTMENT  OF  DOUBLE   BRIDXE.  113 

of  the  first  finger,  upon  which  the  thumb  presses  them  with 
sufficient  force  to  hold  them  in  place ;  the  bight  falls  to  the 
right  of  the  horse's  neck.  The  elbow  falls  naturally,  the  wrist 
and  hand  in  line  with  the  forearm,  the  finger  nails  toward 
the  body. 

Since  the  trooper  in  mounted  combat  needs  the  right  hand 
for  his  weapon  (sword  or  pistol)  he  must  be  thoroughly 
trained  in  riding  with  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  in  riding  on 
the  curb  bit. 

304.  The  instructor  explains  to  the  troopers  that  they  can — 
(a)   Ride  the  horse  on  the  bit,  relaxing  the  snaffle  reins, 

which  is  the  normal  method  in  combat. 

(&)  Ride  the  horse  on  the  snaffle,  releasing  the  bit  reins, 
an  exceptional  method  used  with  horses  that  carry  the  neck 
arched  or  that  have  especially  sensitive  mouths. 

(c)  Ride  the  horse  on  both  reins,  supporting  the  horse  with 
both  snaffle  and  bit.  This  is  the  normal  method  used  at  drill 
and  on  the  march,  at  rest  and  in  jumping. 

305.  When  the  trooper  is  not  called  upon  to  make  immediate 
use  of  his  weapons  it  is  usually  advantageous  to  hold  the 
reins  in  both  hands.  In  this  case  he  can  use  the  right  hand 
for  holding  either  the  right  snaffle  rein  or  both  right  reins. 

To  take  the  right  snaffle  rein  in  the  right  hand,  the  trooper 
seizes  that  rein  in  front  of  the  left  hand  with  right  hand, 
the  little  finger  next  to  the  rein,  and  holds  it  as  when  riding 
with  one  rein.  He  places  his  right  hand  on  a  level  with  the 
left  hand,  the  bight  of  the  rein  coming  out  under  the  thumb. 

When  the  trooper  wishes  to  take  both  right  reins  in  the 
right  hand  he  holds  them  in  the  full  grasp,  the  reins  sepa- 
rated by  the  little  finger,  snaffle  rein  underneath.  This 
method  is  preferably  employed  in  riding  across  country,  in 
jumping  over  obstacles,  in  galloping  a  horse,  etc. 

During  the  rests  and  at  route  order  the  troopers  alternate 
in  taking  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  left  hand,  and  both 
hands.  They  thus  avoid  becoming  fatigued,  advancing  the 
shoulder,  or  by  carrying  the  reins  to  one  side,  giving  to  the 
horse  a  false  carriage  of  the  head  and  neck. 

The  method  for  holding  the  reins  in  the  right  hand  is  similar 
to  that  for  reins  in  the  left  hand. 
38218  °— 18 8 


114  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

To  allow  Ins  horse  to  ease  his  head  and  neck  at  the  walk 
or  at  the  halt,  the  trooper  opens  his  fingers  without  changing 
the  position  of  his  hand  so  as  to  permit  complete  relaxation. 

When  the  trooper  has  the  saber  or  pistol  in  hand  he  may 
use  the  right  hand  to  adjust  his  reins  or  to  separate  them 
momentarily,  but  he  must  exercise  great  care  to  keep  the 
point  of  his  sword  or  the  muzzle  of  his  pistol  elevated  to  avoid 
wounding  his  neighbors. 

306.  To  adjust  the  reins  seize  them  with  the  thumb  and  first 
finger  of  the  right  hand  above  the  left  thumb ;  slightly  open 
the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  raise  the  right  hand,  feel  lightly 
and  evenly  the  horse's  mouth  with  both  reins,  and  close  the 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  on  the  reins. 

The  troopers  are  exercised  frequently  in  changing  from  both 
reins  to  the  snaffle  reins  and  the  reverse. 

To  shorten  the  reins  seize  the  rein  or  reins  to  be  shortened 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  right  hand  above  the 
left  thumb.  To  lengthen  the  reins  seize  the  rein  or  reins  to 
be  lengthened  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand  below  the  left  hand. 

In  executing  these  movements  the  hands  should  be  displaced 
as  little  as  possible. 

307.  The  trooper  at  stand  to  horse  (par.  187)  and  in  leading 
out  (par.  188)  holds  both  reins  with  the  right  hand  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  snaffle  rein.  The  reins  are  in  neither  case 
removed  from  the  horse's  neck. 

In  mounting  (par.  191)  and  dismounting  (par.  192)  the 
trooper  manipulates  both  reins  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
snaffle.  After  dismounting,  before  leading  to  the  stable  or 
picket  line,  he  unhooks  the  curb  chain. 

308.  Use  and  effect  of  the  bit  and  snaffle:  The  effect  of  the 
snaffle  is  very  mild,  because  it  is  received  more  on  the  lips 
than  on  the  bars  of  the  mouth.  Its  action  is  upward,  and  it 
tends  to  raise  the  head  and  neck.  It  gives  a  comfortable  sup- 
port, is  the  bit  most  efficacious  for  relaxing  the  jaw  by  means 
of  vibrations,  and  if  the  horse  carries  the  head  too  low  tends 
to  correct  it. 

309.  The  effect  of  the  curb  is  much  more  Severe  than  that  of 
the  sn{¥ffle  because  it  is  received  almost  entirely  on  the  bars 
of  the  mouth ;  the  lips  and  the  tongue  ameliorate  its  pressure 
but  little.     Its  action  is  downv/ard  and  it  tends  to  lower  the 


WORK  WITH  DOUBLE  BRIDLE.  116 

head  and  neck.  It  gives  an  uncomfortable  support  if  main- 
tained continuously,  because  the  bars  of  the  mouth  become 
deadened  to  sensation  and  tlie  curb  chain  stops  circulation.  If 
the  horse  carries  the  head  too  high  the  curb  tends  to  correct 
that  fault. 

310.  To  demonstrate  these  effects  to  the  troopers  the  in- 
structor causes  them  to  take  the  bit  reins  alone  and  execute 
the  same  movements.  He  points  out  the  difference  between 
the  two  means  of  control. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  trooper  to  take  the  bit  reins 
alone  in  the  left  hand  and  terminates  this  instruction  by  the 
employment  of  the  four  reins  in  one  hand. 

311.  Repetition  with  the  bit  of  the  work  on  the  snaflle:  All 
the  exercises  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle  are  repeated  in  the 
work  on  the  bit.  This  repetition  is  for  the  purpose  of  perfect- 
ing the  troopers  in  the  use  of  the  aids  and  confirming  the  cor- 
lectness  and  regularity  of  the  various  gaits. 

The  movements  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  work 
on  the  snaffle,  always  keeping  in  mind  the  greater  power  of 
the  bit  as  compared  to  the  snaffle. 

This  repetition  and  review  should  not  be  hastened.  It  should 
have  for  its  purpose  a  better  understanding  of  instruction 
already  given,  more  accurate  riding  of  the  gymnastic  figures, 
better  control  at  all  gaits  out  of  doors,  great  skill  and  bold- 
ness over  obstacles  and  varied  terrain,  and  delicacy  of  coor- 
dination in  the  use  of  the  bit  and  spur. 

312.  Changes  of  direction — The  wide  turn:  This  is  a  change 
of  direction  executed  on  the  arc  of  a  rather  large  circle.  It  is 
executed  by  means  of  the  leading  rein  and  both  legs,  or  of  the 
bearing  rein  and  both  legs.  Of  the  two  the  first  is  more  ele- 
mentary;  the  second  is  more  efficacious  and  is  used  out  of 
doors  and  when  riding  with  the  reins  in  one  hand. 

The  short  turn :  This  is  a  change  of  direction  on  the  arc  of  a 
very  small  circle.  It  is  executed,  in  turning  to  the  right,  for 
example,  by  means  of  the  right  direct  rein  of  opposition  and 
the  right  leg,  or  by  the  left  indirect  rein  of  opposition  in  front 
of  the  withers  and  the  right  leg.  Of  the  two  the  first  is  the 
more  elementary ;  the  second  more  rapid  and  regular. 

313.  The  turn  in  place. — The  turn  in  place  consists  in  mak- 
ing the  horse  turn  on  his  own  ground,  either  on  the  forehand, 
on  tlie  haunches,  or  on  his  center. 


116  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

These  exercises  should  not  habitually  be  practiced  as  regular 
gymnastics,  because  they  tend  to  get  the  horse  behind  the  bit : 
to  prevent  which  it  is  essential  to  move  him  forward  promptly 
as  soon  as  the  movement  is  completed. 

314.  The  about  on  the  forehand:  Half  turns  in  reverse  are 
executed  with  radii  which  are  reduced  more  and  more,  pre- 
paratory to  the  about  on  the  forehand,  when  eventually,  if  the 
haunches  turn  from,  the  right  to  the  left,  the  right  front  foojt 
becomes  the  pivot  around  which  the  mass  turns. 

The  aids  to  use  are:  Both  legs  to  bring  the  weight  on  the 
shoulders ;  right  direct  rein  and  left  indirect  rein  of  opposition 
in  front  of  the  withers,  to  weight  the  right  shoulder  and  to 
keep  the  neck  straight ;  right  leg  in  rear  of  the  girth,  to  push 
the  haunches  to  the  left ;  weight  of  the  rider  slightly  to  the 
left. 

315.  The  about  on  the  haunches:  Half  turns  are  executed 
with  radii  which  are  reduced  more  and  more,  preparatory  to 
the  about  on  the  haunches,  when  eventually,  if  the  forehand 
turn  from  the  right  to  the  left,  the  left  hind  foot  becomes  the 
pivot  around  which  the  mass  turns. 

The  aids  to  use  are:  Both  legs  to  gather  the  horse  and  to 
prevent  his  backing ;  left  direct  rein  and  right  indirect  rein  of 
opposition  in  front  of  the  withers,  to  turn  the  forehand  to  the 
left ;  right  leg,  if  necessary,  to  prevent  the  haunches  swinging 
to  the  right. 

This  is  a  very  difficult  exercise  and  should  not  be  attempted 
until  the  rider  has  acquired  considerable  skill  in  the  use  of 
the  aids.  The  horse  must  under  no  circumstances  be  allowed 
to  back. 

316.  The  about  on  the  center:  This  is  of  very  easy  execution 
and  of  frequent  application.  The  left  indirect  rein  of  opposi- 
tion in  front  of  the  withers  carries  the  shoulders  to  the  right 
vvhile  the  right  leg  behind  the  girth  pushes  the  haunches  rap- 
idly to  the  left. 

317.  In  order  to  enable  the  trooper  to  grasp  the  mechanism 
of  the  wide  turns,  short  turns,  and  turns  in  place,  these  exer- 
cises are  executed  slowly  at  first,  but  the  rapidity  indispensable 
for  the  employment  of  these  movements  in  individual  mounted 
combat  must  be  obtained  by  gradual  progression. 

318.  The  gallop  departs  with  the  horse  straight. — To  be  able 
to   demand   either   lead   desired   with   the   horse   practically 


THE  TRAINED  TROOPER.  117 

Straight,  and  to  return  to  the  trot  and  immediately  take  the 
gallop  again  with  the  opposite  lead,  marks  the  limit  of  train- 
ing for  the  trooper  in  ranks. 

He  will  now  be  able  to  manage  his  horse  in  all  the  difficult 
and  varying  situations  in  which  he  may  find  himself,  at  drill, 
at  maneuvers,  on  the  march,  and  in  combat. 

Every  effort  should  be  made  to  render  him  proficient  in  all 
the  exercises  indicated  up  to  this  point. 

319.  Proof  of  training. — The  trooper  should  now  demonstrate 
practically  that  he  measures  up  satisfactorily  to  the  standard 
required  (see  par.  175).  If  so  he  may  be  utilized  thereafter  in 
the  training  of  remounts  and  may  devote  a  greater  proportion 
of  his  time  than  before  to  the  other  kindred  subjects  that  go 
to  make  up  the  total  of  the  education  of  the  trooper  in  ranks. 

320.  The  trained  trooper. — The  individual  instruction  on 
horseback  begun  with  the  recruit  must  be  kept  up  during  the 
trooper's  entire  service. 

For  the  older  troopers  prolonged  work  at  the  slow  trot  and 
gallop  without  stirrups  is  of  great  value.  With  trained  and 
hardened  troopers,  capable  of  withstanding  fatigue,  it  con- 
firms the  seat  and  renders  easy  the  correction  of  faults  of 
position. 

Troop  and  platoon  commanders  must  exercise  the  trained 
troopers  in  riding  across  country  or  on  varied  terrain  at 
rapid  gaits,  and  thus  train  them  in  husbanding  the  strength 
of  their  mounts  while  using  them  fully  for  the  end  in  view ; 
they  should  perfect  them  in  the  use  of  arms  by  constant  prac- 
tice on  dummies  and  in  combat  exercises  and  endeavor,  above 
all,  to  make  of  them  fearless  horsemen  confident  in  their 
ability  to  defeat  the  enemy  in  mounted  combat. 

The  individual  worth  of  each  trooper,  together  with  his 
feeling  of  invincibility,  gives  to  the  organization  the  confi- 
dence and  audacity  which  enables  the  leader  to  undertake  the 
most  daring  enterprises. 


PART  II.— ELEMENTARY  COLLECTIVE 
INSTRUCTION. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

321.  The  elementary  collective  instruction  of  the  trooper  in- 
cludes the  instruction  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  and  in  the 
mechanism  of  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the 
Platoon.  This  latter  instruction  is  given  as  prescribed  in  par. 
444. 

BASIC  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL. 

322.  The  following  provisions  apply  generally  to  the  School 
of  the  Squad  and  to  all  subsequent  drill.  Previous  provisions 
of  a  similar  general  character  are  to  be  found  in  pars.  43-49. 

323.  Leading:  A  commander  leading  his  unit  marches  in 
the  direction  and  at  the  gait  desired.  He  is  followed  at  a 
specified  distance  by  the  base  (Def.),  wiiich  conforms  to  his 
gait  and  direction.  The  commander  thus  controls  the  move- 
ments of  the  base,  and  may  at  any  time  by  his  indication 
conveyed  in  the  most  convenient  way  (as  by  his  own  move- 
ments, his  commands,  or  signals)  cause  the  base  to  change 
its  direction  or  to  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  or  gait  or  to 
halt,  according  to  the  object  in  view.  Elements  of  the  same 
kind  as  the  base  regulate  upon  the  latter  conforming  to  its 
gait  and  direction. 

324.  Directing  leader,  directing  guide:  A  commander  who 
desires  to  become  temporarily  free  in  his  movements  may  leave 
his  position  as  leader,  first  indicating:  DISREGARD  {see  Sig- 
nals) for  the  information  of  the  leader  of  the  base  unit,  who 
then  becomes  the  directing  leader  (Del).  The  latter  then 
ceases  to  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  commander  and  tem- 
porarily conducts  the  march.  In  the  absence  of  other  indi- 
cation from  the  leader  he  maintains  the  existing  direction 
and  gait. 

118 


BASIC  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  119 

When  necessary  the  conduct  of  the  march  of  a  group  (e.  g., 
a  platoon)  having  no  subordinate  leader  may  similarly  be 
intrusted  to  the  guide.  The  latter  then  becomes  the  directing 
guide  (Def.), 

325.  Whenever  a  change  of  formation  involves  a  break  in 
the  continuity  of  the  leading  the  leader  habitually  moves  at 
once  to  his  new  position,  so  as  to  resume  leadership  with  the 
least  practicable  delay.  He  usually  starts  at  the  command  of 
execution  for  the  movement.  Should  he  start  for  his  new 
position  before  the  command  of  execution  he  first  cautions  or 
signals :  DISREGARD  for  the  information  of  the  base. 

326.  Change  of  directing  unit  (base) :  Whenever  a  change  of 
formation  results  in  a  change  of  the  base,  the  base  of  the 
formation  from  which  the  movement  is  executed  continues,  in 
the  absence  of  specific  indication  to  the  contrary,  to  be  the 
base  until  the  new  base  is  indicated. 

In  movements  from  line  by  which  column  is  formed  directly 
to  a  flank,  the  element  of  the  column  on  the  flank  toward  which 
the  column  is  formed  is  the  base  upon  which  other  similar 
elements  regulate  during  the  formation  of  the  column  as  well 
as  after  the  column  is  formed. 

327.  Changes  of  direction:  Any  movement  may  be  executed 
either  from  the  halt  or  when  marching,  unless  otherwise  pre- 
scribed. If  executed  from  the  halt  the  command  forward  need 
not  be  prefixed  to  any  other  preparatory  command  that  indi- 
cates a  direction  of  march ;  thus,  being  at  a  halt,  1.  Column 
right,  2.  MARCH;   but,  1.  Forward,  trot,  2.  MARCH. 

328.  To  insure  certainty  of  prompt  execution,  commands 
(and  signals)  must  be  so  given  that  their  meaning  is  unmis- 
takable. The  preparatory  command  must  be  given  at  such  an 
interval  of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  will 
admit  of  the  former  being  properly  understood,  and  should 
be  followed  by  a  distinct  pause  that  properly  varies  in  length 
with  the  size  of  the  body  of  troops  that  is  to  execute  the 
movement.  The  command  of  execution  should  be  given  the 
instant  the  movement  is  to  begin. 

329.  All  changes  of  direction  are  simply  applications  of  the 
principle  of  leading  as  explained  in  pars.  323  and  367. 

(a)  The  turn  (par.  386)  and  half  turn  (par.  388)  are  special 
cases  of  the  change  of  direction  in  line  in  that  tliey  involve  a 
change  of  direction  of  90°  and  -^5°,  respectively;  as  executed 


120  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

hy  the  platoon  and  squad,  they  differ  further  from  the  general 
case  of  the  change  of  direction  in  tliat  the  leader  follows  a 
specially  prescribed  arc  during  the  turn  (par.  387)  ;  in  the 
troop  and  larger  units,  the  leader  in  each  case  regulates  the 
arc  upon  which  he  moves  during  the  turn  in  accordance  with 
the  length  of  the  front  and  the  requirements  of  the  special 
case. 

( b )  For  a  change  of  direction  in  any  column  formation,  the 
elements  of  the  column  successively  change  direction  on  the 
same  ground,  the  change  in  each  successive  element  being 
made  in  accordance  with  the  principles  that  regulate  the 
change  of  direction  in  line  (a).  In  each  successive  element 
the  leader  (if  any)  and  the  guide  move  over  the  same  path 
that  is  follotved  by  the  leader  at  the  head  of  the  column. 

330.  The  principles  and  methods  laid  down  in  the  School  of 
the  Trooper  (dismounted  and  mounted)  are,  except  as  may 
otherwise  be  indicated,  or  where  clearly  applicable  only  to  in- 
dividual instruction,  to  be  followed  in  corresponding  instruc- 
tion in  the  School  of  the  Squad  and  in  all  subsequent  training. 
The  same  commands  apply  unless  otherwise  stated. 

Certain  modifications  in  the  execution  of  some  of  the  move- 
ments, incident  to  their  use  in  collective  instruction,  are  noted 
in  appropriate  places  in  the  School  of  the  Squad. 

331.  Column  of  twos  and  of  troopers:  Movements  involving 
the  use  of  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  although  simple  in  prin- 
ciple, are  not  adapted  to  execution  as  movements  of  ijrecision, 
and  the  details  of  their  execution  will  be  regulated  accord- 
ingly (pars.  393-400).  Familiarity  with  the  practical  use 
of  these  formations  must  be  insisted  upon,  but  they  will  be 
taken  in  the  simplest  manner  consistent  with  efficiency  in 
their  use. 

332.  To  avoid  repetition  the  detailed  descriptions  and  ex- 
planations of  collective  movements  are,  as  a  rule,  based  only 
upon  the  execution  of  the  mounted  movements. 

333.  Gaits  for  mounted  movements. — All  mounted  movements 
not  specially  excepted  may  be  executed  at  the  trot  or  gallop 
(par.  239). 

For  the  execution  of  a  movement  at  the  trot  or  gallop  the 
command  trot  or  gallop  precedes  the  command  march  unless 
marching  at  the  gait  desired  or  unless  it  be  otherwise  pre- 


BASIC  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  121 

scribed.  When  the  indication  for  the  trot  or  gallop  is  included 
in  the  command  for  the  movement  it  precedes  the  command 
inarch;   thus,  1.  Forward,  trot;   2.  MARCH. 

334.  When  tlie  troopers  of  any  element  (Def.)  move  at  differ- 
ent gaits,  if  the  gait  of  such  element  be  referred  to,  the  gait  of 
its  base  is  to  be  understood. 

335.  A  gait  is  said  to  be  correspondingly  faster  or  corre- 
spondingly slower  than  another  gait  when  there  is  a  difference 
of  one  degree  between  the  two  (par.  239). 

336.  In  the  rules  included  in  pars.  333  to  337  the  expression 
"other  elements"  (Def.)  means  in  each  case  elements  of  the 
same  kind  as  the  base. 

337.  (a)  In  movements  from  the  halt  the  base  moves  at  the 
walk  unless  another  gait  be  stated  in  the  command  or  indi- 
cated by  the  leader's  movements. 

(b)  In  forming  line  to  the  front  from  column  the  other  ele- 
ments (par.  336)  take,  without  command,  a  correspondingly 
faster  gait  than  the  base.  If  gallop  be  commanded  at  any 
time,  it  applies  only  to  the  other  elements  (/).  The  ba^e 
(leading  element)  habitually  preserves  the  gait  of  march  (a). 
The  leader  controls  the  movements  of  the  base  according  to 
the  object  in  view.  He  may  diminish  its  pace  or  gait  or  halt 
it  to  hasten  the  formation.  A  command  to  decrease  the  gait 
or  to  halt,  given  during  the  execution  of  the  movement,  ap- 
plies only  to  those  elements  that  have  already  completed  the 
movement.  The  leader  habitually  so  controls  the  base  that 
elements  in  rear  need  not  move  faster  than  a  maneuver  gallop 
in  order  to  execute  the  movement. 

(c)  Column  to  the  front  is  formed  from  line  on  the  base  at 
the  gait  of  march  (a)  or  at  the  gait  ordered  (e).  The  other 
elements  (par.  336)  take  or  maintain  a  correspondingly 
slower  gait  (or,  if  halted,  remain  so)  until  they  can  move 
at  the  gait  of  the  base  to  take  their  places  in  the  column.  If 
an  increased  gait  be  commanded  at  any  time,  it  is  taken  at 
first  only  by  the  leader  and  base  or  by  the  leader  and  those 
elements  that  have  already  moved  to  enter  the  column  (/). 

(d)  In  cases  not  covered  by  (&)  pr  (c),  if  the  base  and  other 
elements  have  equal  distances  to  go  they  move  at  the  gait  of 
march  or  at  that  indicated  in  the  command  (e.  g.,  1,  Platoons 
right  turn,  trot;  2.  MARCH). 


122  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(e)  In  cases  not  covered  hy  (h),  (c),  or  (d)  (e.  g.,  assemble 
from  foragers,  par.  414),  or  by  some  special  provision  in  tlie 
description  of  the  corresponding  movement  (e.  g.,  echelon,  par. 
702)  the  base  maintains  the  gait  of  march  (a)  or  takes  that  of 
the  leader ;  the  other  elements  move  at  a  correspondingly- 
faster  or  slower  gait  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  execution 
of  the  movement  and  on  arriving  at  their  places  take  the 
gait  of  the  base  (par.  338).  If  a  special  gait  be  commanded, 
it  is  taken  by  the  base  or  by  the  other  elements,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principle  stated  in  (/). 

(/)  When  the  commander  indicates  a  special  gait,  whether 
in  the  preparatory  command  or  during  the  execution  of  the 
movement,  the  effect  is  always  to  liaMen  the  completion  of 
the  movement.  This  principle  will  assist  in  applying  the 
rules  in  (6),  (c),  and  (e). 

{g)  Changes  of  gait  made  by  elements,  without  command,  in 
accordance  with  the  above  rules,  are,  except  as  specially  indi- 
cated in  the  commands,  changes  of  one  degree. 

338.  Any  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  are  noted  where  they 
occur. 

339.  Gaits  for  movements  on  foot. —  (a)  The  general  princi- 
ples of  gaits  for  mounted  movements  apply  to  movements  on 
foot  with  the  modifications  noted  in  {h)  to  (g),  below,  and 
such  others  as  are  to  be  readily  inferred  from  the  application 
of  the  principles  of  the  School  of  the  Trooper,  Dismounted. 

(?>)  No  element  moves  in  double  time  unless  the  movement 
be  executed  when  marching  in  double  time  or  double  time  be 
commanded  (par.  47)  or  otherwise  indicated  by  the  leader. 
No  trooper  increases  the  length  of  the  step  or  the  cadence 
unless  specially  so  prescri])ed. 

(c)  The  leader  so  controls  the  movements  of  the  base  as  to 
facilitate  the  execution  of  the  movement  in  accordance  with 
(6),  above.  This  will  involve  halting  the  base  whenever  cer- 
tain movements  (e.  g.,  those  from  column  into  line)  are 
executed  in  quick  time. 

id)  If  double  time  be  included  in  the  preparatory  command 
for  a  movement,  the  indication  is  obeyed  in  accordance  with 
the  principles  of  par.  337. 

(c)  In  movements  from  line  into  column,  and  in  other  simi- 
lar movements,  if  executed  at  attention,  the  troopers  while 
waiting  to  take  their  places  in  the  column  do  not  halt  unless 


THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD.  123 

halt  be  commanded  by  a  platoon  (or  troop)  commander.  They 
mark  time  instead  if  necessary  for  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment. 

(/)  In  applying  the  rules  for  mounted  movements  to  move- 
ments on  foot  quick  time  will  be  understood  where  walk  is 
referred  to  and  double  time  where  any  faster  gait  is  referred  to. 

(g)  Any  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  are  stated  where  they 
occur. 

THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD. 

340.  As  soon  as  the  troopers  are  sufficiently  advanced  in 
their  instruction  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper  they  will  be 
grouped  into  temporary  squads  for  elementary  collective  in- 
struction. This*  instruction  will  be  conducted  in  accordance 
with  the  general  principles  indicated  in  par.  42 ;  progress 
therein  should  be  so  regulated  that  no  collective  movement 
will  be  taken  up  until  the  trooper,  by  previous  individual  in- 
struction, has  been  properly  prepared  for  its  execution. 

341.  Instruction  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  is  intended  pri- 
marily to  teach  recruits  the  elementary  movements  upon  which 
the  entire  drill  is  based.  It  may  be  recurred  to  whenever  nec- 
essary in  cases  where  troopers  evidence  the  need  of  further 
elementary  work. 

342.  For  elementary  collective  instruction  groups  of  not  to 
exceed  six  or  eight  men  can  be  used  to  best  advantage.  The 
actual  instruction  of  each  group  should  l)e  conducted  by  a 
noncommissioned  officer,  but  the  instruction  must  be  closely 
supervised  by  a  commissioned  officer   (par.  37). 

343.  The  system  of  drill  contained  in  these  regulations  is 
basetl  largely  upon  the  actual  leading  of  units  by  their  re- 
spective chiefs  or  commanders.  During  the  elementary  in- 
struction of  recruits,  both  mounted  and  dismounted,  leading 
will  be  emphasized  as  indicated  in  par.  344.  Thereafter  the 
application  of  leading  will  conform  to  pars.  448  to  456. 

344.  The  first  collective  instruction  will,  therefore,  be  in 
conforming  to  the  march  of  a  leader,  thus  confirming  and 
extending  the  instruction  given  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper 
(pars.  295,  298)  ;  and  reasonable  proficiency  in  this  instrvc- 
tion  must  be  secured  before  any  attempt  is  made  to  utilize 
either  ccymtnands  or  signals  in  the  execution  of  collective 
movements,  except  as  prescribed  in  par.  363. 


124  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

345.  It  is  difficult  for  a  leader  to  lead  the  squad  properly 
and  at  the  same  time  to  supervise  the  march  and  correct  the 
errors  of  individual  troopers.  For  this  reason  it  is  desirable, 
especially  in  the  earlier  collective  drills,  that  the  instructor 
have  as  an  assistant  another  noncommissioned  officer  or  a 
well-instructed  trooper.  The  instructor  then  leads  the  squad 
and  requires  his  assistant  (who  takes  the  positions  best 
adapted  for  the  purpose  in  view)  to  supervise  closely  the 
movements  of  the  troopers  and  to  correct  errors  by  means  of 
cautions  addressed  quietly  by  name  to  the  individual  man  or 
men  concerned.  Later  the  instructor  similarly  supervises  the 
execution  of  the  march  while  requiring  his  assistant  to  lead 
the  squad.  As  the  troopers  advance  in  the  instruction  the 
instructor  should  give  each  of  them  such  practice  in  leading 
the  squad  as  the  progress  of  the  individual  frooper  concerned 
may  appear  to  justify. 

346.  When  instruction  in  leading  (par.  367)  has  advanced 
to  the  point  where  the  guide  can  preserve  his  proper  distance 
from  the  leader  and  conform  promptly  and  smoothly  to  the 
latter 's  movements,  the  other  troopers  meantime  preserving 
their  interval  and  alignment  without  undue  constraint  or 
unnecessarily  abrupt  changes  of  gait  or  pace,  the  instruction 
is  extended  progressively  to  include,  in  accordance  with  the 
methods  prescribed  in  par.  347,  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ments prescribed  for  the  squad. 

347.  Throughout  the  instruction  prescribed  by  par.  346  the 
squad  will  continue  as  before  to  be  led.  In  teaching  each 
new  movement  the  example  and  movements  of  the  instructor 
as  leader  will  be  supplemented  at  first,  by  oral  commands 
only,  then  by  oral  commands  accompanied  by  the  correspond- 
ing arm  signals  for  those  movements  for  which  such  signals 
are  provided  {see  Signals,  pars.  988-996),  then  by  signals 
alone.  The  commands  and  signals  will  he  given  hy  the  actual 
leader.  When  the  instructor  is  not  actually  leading  (par. 
345)  he  may  either  indicate  to  the  leader  the  movements  to 
b('  executed  or  else  leave  to  him  the  selection  of  such  move- 
ments. 

348.  After  the  oral  commands  and  arm  signals  are  thor- 
oughly understood  the  instructor  will  practice  the  squad  in 
passing  from  one  formation  to  another,  using  oral  commands 
for  some  movements,  signals  for  some,  and  causing  some  (e.  g., 


FORMING  THE   SQUAD.  125 

changes  of  direction)  to  be  executed  by  conforming  to  the 
movements  of  the  leader  without  the  additional  indication  of 
either  oral  commands  or  signals. 

349.  The  troopers  must  be  accustomed  to  conforming,  ivith- 
out  the  assistance  of  any  command  or  signal  given  to  the  squad 
as  a  ivhole,  to  simple  movements  (e.  g.,  movements  front  into 
line)  Initiated  at  the  head  of  a  column  formation  by  a  com- 
mand so  given  as  to  be  heard  by  only  the  leading  troopers. 

With  reasonable  practice  the  more  essential  changes  of  for- 
mation that  are  executed  toward  the  direction  of  march  can 
readily  be  taken  by  the  squad  by  conforming,  without  other 
indication,  to  the  movements  of  the  troopers  nearest  the  leader. 
As  many  movements  in  service  must  be  executed  under  condi- 
tions of  noise,  dust,  etc.,  that  will  render  it  difficult  for  the 
commands  or  signals  of  the  leader  to  be  understood  except  by 
those  near  him,  practice  in  conforming  promptly  and  intelli- 
gently to  the  movements  of  the  elements  nearest  the  leader  is 
important  and  must  he  given  careful  attention. 

The  object  ultimately  to  be  sought  In  the  instruction  is  the 
quiet,  rapid,  and  effective  handling  of  the  squad  with  a  mini- 
mum of  either  oral  commands  or  signals.  The  squad  is  re- 
quired to  pass  rapidly  from  one  formation  to  another,  a  new 
movement  being  occasionally  initiated  before  the  execution  of 
the  one  preceding  it  has  been  completed. 

To  Form  the  Squad,  Mounted. 

350.  To  form  the  squad  in  line  (par.  36S-a),  the  leader 
(instructor)  designates  a  trooper  to  act  as  the  base  of  the 
formation,  indicates  to  such  trooper  the  point  where  the  right 
of  the  squad  is  to  rest  and  the  direction  in  which  the  line  is 
to  face,  takes  position  at  a  convenient  distance  in  front  of  and 
facing  the  point  where  the  center  of  the  squad  is  to  rest,  and 
commands:  LEAD  INTO  LINE.  The  base  trooper  leads  out 
(par.  188)  and  takes  position  as  indicated;  the  other  troopers 
lead  out  so  as  to  approach  the  line  successively  directly  from 
the  rear  and  in  single  rank  form  on  the  line  established  by 
the  base  trooper,  in  order  from  right  to  left.  The  troopers 
form  at  stand  to  horse  (par.  1.87)  with  intervals  of  18  inches 
between  horses. 


126  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  line  having  thus  formed,  the  leader  calls  the  roll  and 
commands,  COUNT  FOURS  (par.  84). 

Where  there  is  an  incomplete  four  the  troopers  in  it  are 
cautioned  as  to  the  numbers  finally  assigned  them  (par.368-&). 

When  but  a  single  trooper  is  available  for  an  incomplete 
four  the  four  is  habitually  broken  up  and  a  trooper  is  placed 
as  an  extra  file  closer.  This  rule  may,  however,  be  modified 
in  connection  with  the  instruction  of  recruits. 

The  squad  having  counted  fours,  the  leader  causes  the  squad 
to  mount  (par.  358). 

351.  The  formation  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers 
(par.  368-&,  c,  d)  is  similar! v  executed.  The  leader  com- 
mands: LEAD  INTO  COLUMN  (COLUMN  OF  TWOS,  COLUMN 
OF  TROOPERS).  The  trooper  upon  whom  the  formation  is  based 
(par.  350)  becomes  No.  1  of  the  leading  four.  The  elements 
of  the  column  form,  in  order  from  front  to  rear,  with  dis- 
tances of  4  feet  between  successive  fours,  twos,  or  troopers. 
Ill  column  of  fours  or  twos  each  four  or  two  forms  on  its  right 
trooper  as  in  line. 

When  the  formation  is  in  column  of  fours  the  command 
COUNT  FOURS  is  omitted.  The  leader  cautions :  NOTE  YOUR 
NUMBERS. 

352.  The  squad  may  also  form  in  similar  manner  after  the 
troopers  mount.  In  this  case  the  leader  causes  the  troopers  to 
mount  individually  after  saddling  and  commands :  RIDE  INTO 
LINE  (COLUMN,  COLUMN  OF  TWOS,  COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS). 
The  interval  between  the  mounted  troopers  is  6  inches  from 
knee  to  knee. 

To  Form  the  Squad,  Dismounted. 

353.  For  the  dismounted  formation  of  the  squad,  in  line, 
when  not  armed  with  the  rifle,  the  leader  designates  the 
trooper  to  act  as  the  base,  indicates  the  latter's  position,  and 
takes  his  own  position  as  described  in  par.  350,  above.  He 
then  commands :  FALL  IN.  The  troopers  form  as  in  pars.  57 
and  58.  The  leader  then  calls  the  roll  and  causes  the  squad 
to  count  fours. 

If  armed  with  the  rifle,  the  troopers  fall  in  with  rifles  at  the 
order.  As  soon  as  the  line  or  column  is  formed  the  leader  com- 
mands: 1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Right   shoulder,  4.  ARMS 


FORMING  THE  SQUAD.  127 

(par.  01-2d),  and  calls  the  roll.     Each  man,  as  Ms  name  is 
called,  answers  here  and  executes  order  arms. 

The  formation  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  is  con- 
ducted in  accordance  with  the  modifications  indicated.  The 
comm.ands  of  the  leader  are:  FALL  IN,  IN  COLUMN  (COLUMN 
OF  TWOS,  COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS).  The  distance  between 
successive  fours  is  92  inches ;  between  successive  twos,  40 
inches ;  between  successive  troopers,  14  inches. 

To  Mount  and  Dismount. 

354.  The  squad  being  in  line,  at  stand  to  horse,  the  habitual 
commands  for  mounting  are:  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT; 
8.  Form,  4.  RANK.  At  the  first  command  the  odd  numbers 
lead  out  4  yards  directly  to  the  front,  and  all  execute  the 
movements  and  take  the  final  positions  prescribed  in  par. 
191-a.  At  the  second  command  all  the  troopers  complete, 
simultaneously,  the  movements  of  mounting  as  prescribed  in 
par.  191-&.  At  the  fourth  command  the  even  numbers  move 
up  into  their  intervals  in  the  line.  If  the  squad  has  dis- 
mounted from  line  and  has  formed  rank  (par.  356),  the 
odd  numbers  stand  fast  at  the  command  Prepare  to  mount  and 
all  mount  in  place. 

If  the  squad  be  mounted  in  column  of  fours,  the  third  and 
fourth  commands  are  omitted.  At  the  first  command  the 
troopers  of  each  four  open  out  fanwise,  Nos.  1  and  2  to  the 
right,  Nos.  3  and  4  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  4  open  out  a  little 
more  than  Nos.  2  and  8,  all  opening  only  enough  to  permit  the 
troopers  to  mount  without  interfering  with  each  other.  The 
troopers  habitually  straighten  their  horses  in  the  column  as 
soon  as  they  have  mounted,  but  this  requirement  may  be 
relaxed  whenever  mounting  in  unison  is  not  required  (par. 
358).  The  squad  in  column  of  twos  is  mounted  by  commands 
and  methods  conforming  to  those  used  for  mounting  from 
column  of  fours. 

355.  The  preparatory  oral  command  for  mounting  may  be 
omitted.  The  squad  then  executes  at  the  command  MOUNT 
all  the  movements  prescribed  in  par.  354  for  the  commands, 
1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT.  The  troopers  mount  promptly, 
but  not  in  unison. 


128  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  preparatory  signal  for  mounting,  when  followed  imme- 
diately by  the  signal  of  execution,  will  be  understood  as  equiv- 
alent to  the  oral  command  MOUNT,  and  will  be  executed 
accordingly. 

356.  The  squad  being  in  line,  the  habitual  commands  for 
dismounting  are:  1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT;  3. 
Form,  4.  RANK.  At  the  first  command  the  odd  numbers  ride 
4  yards  directly  to  the  front,  regulating  on  the  right,  and  all 
the  troopers  execute  the  movements  and  take  the  final  position 
prescribed  in  par.  192-a.  At  the  second  command  the  troopers 
execute,  simultaneously,  the  movements  prescribed  in  par. 
192-&,  At  the  fourth  command  the  even  numbers  lead  into 
their  intervals  in  the  rank.  The  third  and  fourth  commands 
are  given  only  in  case  it  is  desired  to  form  rank.  The  squad 
may  be  dismounted  and,  without  forming  rank,  execute  rest 
or  at  ease  (par.  359),  or  be  inspected,  mounted,  or  dismissed. 
The  modifications  indicated  for  dismounting  in  column  of 
fours  and  column  of  twos  correspond  to  those  prescribed  in 
par.  354  for  mounting  from  the  corresponding  formation, 
except  that  the  horses  are  not  habitually  straightened  in  the 
column  after  dismounting  unless  the  dismounted  squad  moves 
forward   (the  troopers  leading  their  horses). 

357.  The  preparatory  oral  command  for  dismounting  may  be 
omitted.  The  squad  then  executes  at  the  command  DISMOUNT 
all  the  movements  prescribed  in  par.  356  for  the  commands : 
1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT.  The  troopers  dismount 
promptly  but  not  in  unison. 

The  preparatory  signal  for  dismounting,  when  followed 
immediately  by  the  signal  of  execution  will  be  understood  as 
equivalent  to  the  oral  command  DISMOUNT,  and  will  be 
executed  accordingly. 

358.  Until  the  individual  instruction  of  recruits  has  ad- 
vanced to  a  point  where  they  have  acquired  reasonable  pro- 
ficiency in  mounting  and  dismounting,  these  movements  will 
be  executed  at  collective  as  well  as  at  individual  instruction 
by  the  commands  and  methods  indicated  in  pars.  355  and  357. 
After  such  proficiency  has  been  acquired,  mounting  and  dis- 
mounting at  close-order  drills,  at  ceremonies,  and  at  all  occa- 
sions of  a  ceremonial  nature  will  habitually  be  executed  in 


FORMING  THE  SQUAD.  129 

unison  by  the  commands  and  methods  prescribed  in  pars. 
354  and  356,  respectively.  The  commands  and  methods  pre- 
scribed in  pars.  355  and  357,  respectively,  may,  in  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  commander,  continue  to  be  employed  on  all 
other  duty. 

The  Rests  and  Route  Ordee. 

359.  The  mounted  squad  executes  the  rests  and  route  order 
as  prescribed  in  par.  221.  After  dismounting  from  line,  rest 
or  at  ease  may  be  given  either  before  or  after  forming  rank. 

The  dismounted  squad  executes  the  rests  and  route  order  as 
prescribed  in  pars.  60  and  61. 

To  Dismiss  the  Squad. 

360.  The  squad,  in  column  of  troopers,  is  dismissed  as  pre- 
scribed for  that  formation  in  par.  222.  The  squad  in  column 
of  fours  is  dismissed  at  the  same  command.  The  trooper  on 
the  right  of  the  leading  four  leads  out  as  indicated  in  par.  222 
and  is  followed,  in  turn,  by  the  other  troopers  of  that  four, 
then  by  the  troopers  of  the  next  four,  and  so  on  successively 
to  the  rear  of  the  column.  In  each  four  the  troopers  lead  out 
in  order  from  right  to  left.  The  dismissal  from  column  of 
twos  is  similarly  executed.  The  squad  being  in  line  is  dis- 
missed by  the  commands  and  methods  prescribed  in  par.  222 
for  a  line  with  intervals,  except  that  the  troopers,  in  order  to 
have  their  proper  distance,  move  out  successively  from  right 
to  left  instead  of  simultaneously.  At  the  commands:'  1.  By 
the  right  and  left,  2.  FALL  OUT,  the  movement  is  executed  in 
a  similar  manner  from  both  flanks  of  the  line.  After  having 
dismounted  from  line  the  squad  may  be  dismissed  w^ithout 
forming  rank. 

Dismounted,  without  horses  and  not  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand is  DISMISSED. 

Dismounted,  without  horses  but  armed  with  the  rifle,  the 
squad  is  dismissed  as  in  par.  114. 
38218  °— IS 9 


130  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIOJS-S. 

.    Alignments. 

361.  At  the  preliminary  instruction  (conducted  without  for- 
mal command)  the  instructor  has  two  troopers  on  the  right 
of  the  rank  move  forward  a  convenient  distance  and  halt.  He 
then  aligns  these  two  troopers  carefully,  with  the  proper  inter- 
val as  in  line  (par.  368-a),  and  causes  the  other  troopers  to 
note  the  details  of  the  alignment.  The  other  troopers  are  then 
required  to  move  up  one  at  a  time  and  align  themselves,  with 
the  correct  interval,  on  the  line  thus  established.  The  troopers 
move  forward,  in  order  from  right  to  left,  at  successive  repeti- 
tions by  the  instructor  of  the  caution  NEXT.  Each  trooper, 
when  on  or  near  the  line,  executes  eyes  right  (par.  64),  aligns 
himself  accurately  on  the  line  established  by  the  trooper  or 
troopers  on  his  right,  and  looks  to  the  front  as  soon  as  he 
thinks  himself  correctly  aligned.  The  instructor  explains  and 
corrects  any  errors.  Similar  instruction  is  given  the  troopers 
in  aligning  themselves  to  the  left.  As  soon  as  reasonable 
proficiency  is  attained  but  a  single  trooper  is  moved  forward 
and  the  alignment  is  made  in  the  same  manner  upon  the 
single  trooper  established  as  the  base. 

The  instruction  is  similarly  given  with  the  center  trooper 
moved  to  the  front  as  a  base.  Two  troopers,  one  on  the  right, 
the  other  on  the  left  of  the  base,  then  move  forw^ard  at  each 
repetition  of  the  caution,  NEXT. 

The  instructor  observes  in  the  mounted  instruction :  That 
each  trooper  moves  his  horse  promptly  and  halts  with  his  horse 
correctly  disposed ;  that  he  sits  squarely  on  his  horse  without 
advancing  either  shoulder  or  leaning  his  body  to  the  front  or 
rear;  that  he  dresses  promptly  as  he  arrives  on  the  line; 
and  that  he  makes  proper  use  of  the  aids  (pars.  200  to  208). 

In  the  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established 
parallel  to  the  front  of  the  section;  afterwards  in  oblique 
directions. 

362.  When  the  troopers  have  acquired  reasonable  proficiency 
in  aligning  themselves,  as  above,  the  alignment  is  executed  at 
the  command  DRESS,  given  by  the  instructor  from  his  position 
as  leader.  The  trooper  designated  as  the  guide  (par.  371)  is 
always  the  base  trooper  of  the  alignment  and  places  himself 
accurately  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  leader.    All  the  other  troopers 


AilGlTING  THE  SftTJAD.  131 

align  themselves  promptly  on  the  base  trooper,  continuing  to 
look  toward  him  until  the  command,  FRONT.  At  this  last 
command,  given  when  the  alignment  is  completed,  all  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  quickly  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of 
attention  (pars.  59,  198).  Movements  in  the  rank  then  cease. 
The  instructor  then  habitually  faces  the  squad  or  goes  to 
either  flank  to  verify  the  accuracy  of  the  dressing,  first  cau- 
tioning the  guide  to  remain  in  place. 

363.  The  troopers  and  their  mounts  must  be  so  trained  as 
to  enable  alignment  and  interval  to  be  kept  with  sufficient 
accuracy  to  maintain  cohesion  in  the  mounted  charge  and  to 
present  a  creditable  appearance  at  ceremonies  and  at  other 
occasions  of  a  formal  or  ceremonial  character. '  A  dispropor- 
tionate amount  of  time  and  energy  will  not  be  devoted  to  this 
detail. 

364.  The  use  of  dressing  by  command  is  ordinarily  confined 
to  elementary  instruction  (as  preparation  for  tlue  march  in 
line)  and  to  formations  of  a  distinctly  ceremonial  character. 
At  all  other  times  the  troopers  are  required  habitually  to 
align  themselves  on  the  base  trooper  without  special  command 
and  to  look  to  the  front  as  soon  as  aligned. 

Formal  dressing  is  employed  only  when  the  squad  is  at  a 
halt. 

365.  The  caution:  DRESS,  may,  if  necessary,  be  given  to 
the  squad  when  marching  (par.  367)  ;  but  it  will  not  be 
employed  when  it  is  practicable  to  use  instead  cautions  ad- 
dressed by  name  to  the  individual  trooper  or  troopers  who  are 
at  fault. 

366.  Alignments,  dismounted,  are  executed  by  the  same  gen- 
eral methods  as  when  mounted.  At  the  command  :  DRESS,  the 
hand  is  placed  upon  the  hip  to  verify  the  interval  (par.  57). 
Each  trooper  in  dressing  so  places  himself  that  his  right  arm 
rests  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  man  on  his  right  and  that 
his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  w^ith  those  of  the  man  on 
hiis  right.  The  left  hand  is  dropped  to  the  side  at  the  command 
FRONT. 


133  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Leading  the  Squad. 
(See  also  pars,  322-332.) 

367.  The  squad  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  directs 
the  guide  (par.  371)  to  maintain  a  position  at  a  distance  of 
3  yards    (about   one  horse   length)    in  rear  of  him   and  to 


LEADING  THE  SQUAD 

WHEN  DEPLOYED  AS  FORAGERS.. 


^ 


COMMAKUT 

LfOfiAGERS.  2.  MARCH. 


a  / 


I  '      LEJIDING  THE  SQUAD. 

I  ' 


Fig.  31,  par.  367. 

follow  accurately  in  his  path,  whether  such  path  be  a  straight 
line  or  a  curve.  He  explains  to  the  other  troopers  that  iji 
marching  they  are  so  to  regulate  on  the  guide  as  to  pre- 


LEADING  THE  SaUAD.  133 

serve  as  nearly  as  practicable  their  alignment  and  interval 
in  the  rank,  individually  increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait 
or  pace  (Def.)  as  may  be  necessary  to  do  this.  All  are  cau- 
tioned that  they  must  learn  to  keep  their  proper  positions  in 
the  rank  without  unnecessary  rigidity  without  making  sudden 
changes  in  gait  or  pace  and  without  keeping  their  eyes  con- 
stantly fixed  on  the  guide.  They  are  instructed  that  while 
riding  with  the  head  and  eyes  habitually  directed  as  in  par. 
198  they  will  keep  an  alert  lookout  over  the  ground  in  front, 
cast  frequent  glances  toward  the  leader  so  as  to  observe  the 
latter's  movements,  and  glance  occasionally  toward  the  guide 
to  assure  that  the  alignment  is  being  correctly  maintained. 
Having  given  these  instructions,  the  leader  places  himself, 
facing  to  the  front,  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guide,  commands ; 
FOLLOW  ME,  and  moves  forward.  The  leader  must  be  care- 
ful to  march  steadily,  so  regulating  his  direction  and  gait  at 
first  as  to  enable  the  guide  to  conform  without  difficulty. 

Each  trooper  keeps  his  horse  straight  in  the  rank,  maintain- 
ing his  alignment  with  the  guide  and  his  proper  interval 
ipar.  368-a)  from  the  man  next  him  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 
The  troopers  yield  to  pressure  from  the  side  of  the  guide  and 
resist  pressure  from  the  opposite  direction.  All  adjustments 
are  made  gradually  without  crowding  or  confusion. 

In  the  beginning  the  leader  moves  at  a  walk  and  makes  only 
slight  changes  of  direction.  As  the  instructor  completes  each 
change  of  direction  he  indicates  the  neic  direction  of  march  by 
extending  his  arm  as  in  signal  forward  (par.  990),  dropping 
the  hand  to  the  side  when  the  guide's  horse  is  straightened 
in  the  neio  direction.  When  the  troopers  have  become  suffi- 
ciently practiced  in  adjusting  themselves  to  the  movements 
of  the  instructor,  the  latter  makes  the  changes  of  direction 
more  marked,  and  moves,  during  such  changes,  on  the  arcs  of 
smaller  circles.  Finally,  he  requires  the  squad  to  apply  the 
principles  of  leading  in  the  manner  indicated  in  pars.  346-349. 
As  each  movement  is  taken  up  the  principles  of  leading  that 
apply  are  explained  in  detail,  so  that  all  may  understand 
clearly  the  identity  and  position  of  the  base.  The  base 
trooper  (guide)  must  clearly  understand  his  duties.    (Fig.  31.) 


1S4  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Squad  Formations. 

The  formations  of  the  squad  for  drill,  march,  or  combat  are 
as  follows  : 

CLOSE    ORDER. 

368.  (a)  Line:  The  troopers  are  abreast  of  each  other  with 
intervals  (Def.)  of  6  inches  (mounted)  or  4  inches  (dis- 
mounted)   between  troopers. 

(&)  Column  of  fours:  The  troopers  of  each  four  are  ar- 
ranged as  in  line.  The  fours  follow  successively  one  behind 
another  with  distances  (Def.)  between  successive  fours  of  4 
feet,  mounted,  or  92  inches,  dismounted.  When  a  four  in- 
cludes less  than  four  troopers  it  is  an  incomplete  four.  Places 
in  an  incomplete  four  are  habitually  filled  in  the  following 
order:  No.  2,  No.  3,  No.  4,  No.  1  (par.  374). 

(c)  Column  of  twos:  The  troopers  of  each  two  are  arranged 
as  in  line,  the  twos  following  successively,  one  behind  another, 
with  distances  between  successive  twos  of  4  feet,  mounted,  or 
40  inches,  dismounted.  If  any  two  have  but  a  single  troopev 
the  latter  takes  the  position  corresponding  to  the  right  trooper 
of  the  incomplete  two  (par.  374). 

(d)  Column  of  troopers:  The  troopers  of  each  four  follow 
successively,  one  behind  another,  with  distances  between  con- 
secutive troopers  of  4  feet  when  mounted,  or  14  inches  when 
dismounted. 

EXTENDED    ORDER. 

(e)  Foragers:  The  troopers  are  abreast  of  each  other,  with 
intervals  of  3  yards  between  troopers,  unless  some  other 
interval  be  specially  designated. 

The  dismounted  formation  corresponding  to  foragers  is  skir- 
mishers. The  interval  between  troopers  in  line  of  skirmishers 
is  one-half  pace  unless  some  other  interval  be  designated. 

In  the  employment  of  a  squad  or  other  small  detachment 
the  designation  of  a  greater  interval  than  one-half  pace  is 
habitual  rather  than  exceptional  (par.  408). 


ORDER   IN  THE  SQUAD.  135 

In  a  line  of  skirmishers  at  one-half  pace  interval  each  man 
may  be  considered  as  occupying,  including  his  interval,  about 
1  yard  of  front. 

The  squad  may  also  be  extended  in  depth  as  prescribed  in 
par.  413. 

Order  in  the  Squad. 

369.  When  it  is  said  that  a  unit  is  in  order  in  any  formation 
it  is  meant  that  the  arrangement  and  condition  of  the  compo- 
nent elements  is  such  that  the  unit  is  ready  to  execute,  in  the 
accustomed  manner,  any  movement  that  is  intended  to  be  exe- 
cuted from  the  formation  in  question.  The  conditions  essen- 
tial to  order  in  each  formation  of  the  squad  are  stated  in  par. 
370.  The  squad,  fn  line,  for  example,  would  not  be  in  order 
if  the  troopers  did  not  know  their  numbers,  for  it  could  then 
execute  no  movement  based  upon  the  division  into  fours,  twos, 
or  troopers. 

370.  The  squad  in  line,  column  of  fours,  or  foragers  is  in 
order  when  the  troopers  of  each  four  are  arranged,  from  right 
to  left  in  the  four,  in  the  order  of  their  respective  numbers, 
and  each  knows  his  number. 

The  squad  in  column  of  twos  is  in  order  when  the  twos  of 
each  four  are  next  to  each  other  in  the  column,  odd  numbers 
on  the  right,  and  each  trooper  knows  his  number. 

When  the  two  composed  of  1  and  2  is  in  front,  the  column  is 
said  to  be  right  in  front;  when  the  two  composed  of  3  and  4 
is  in  front,  the  column  is  said  to  be  left  in  front. 

The  squad  in  column  of  troopers  is  in  order  when  the  troop- 
ers of  each  four  are  next  to  one  another  in  the  column,  are  ar- 
ranged from  front  to  rear  in  the  order  1,  2,  3,  4,  or  4,  3,  2,  1, 
and  each  trooper  knows  his  number.     When  the  order  is  1,  2, 

3,  4,  the  column  is  said  to  be  right  in  front ;  when  the  order  is 

4,  3,  2,  1,  left  in  front. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  order  in  the  squad,  in  any  of  the  ahove 
formations,  that  a  particular  trooper  or  troopers  be  in  any 
designated  four,  nor  that  the  fours  have  any  special  relative 
order  from  right  to  left  or  front  to  rear. 


136  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Guide  of  the  Squad. 
(See  also  Def.  Base,  and  par,  326.) 

371.  At  the  original  formation  of  the  squad  in,  line,  the 
leader  designates  a  trooper  by  name  as  guide  of  the  squad. 
The  guide  of  the  squad  in  line  and  foragers  is  habitually  a 
trooper  at  or  near  the  center  of  the  squad ;  any  trooper  may, 
however,  be  designated  as  guide. 

372.  A  trooper  having  once  been  designated  as  guide  of  the 
squad  in  line  continues  to  act  as  such,  in  line  or  foragers,  until 
another  trooper  be  specifically  designated  as  guide.  With  a 
view,  however,  to  avoiding  possible  doubt  as  to  the  identity 
of  the  guide  the  leader  at  each  change  of  formation  that  ter- 
minates in  line  or  foragers  habitually  indicates  the  guide  of 
the  new  formation. 

373.  To  designate  the  guide  the  leader  cautions :  (So-and-so) 
THE  GUIDE,  and  habitually  places  himself  3  yards  in  front  of 
the  trooper  named  if  not  already  in  that  position.  A  trooper 
designated  as  guide  will,  at  the  time  of  the  designation,  raise 
his  hand  or  weapon  to  a  position  vertically  above  his  head, 
hold  the  position  for  a  moment,  and  then  lower  his  arm  to  his 
side  without  further  command.  The  leader  or  his  assistant 
may  at  any  time  cause  the  guide  thus  to  indicate  his  identity 
to  the  other  troopers  by  cautioning :  GUIDE.  The  leader  may 
change  the  guide  of  the  squad  in  line  at  any  time  by  indicating 
disregard  (par.  990),  placing  himself  in  front  of  another 
trooper  and  designating  the  latter  as  guide  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed above. 

374.  The  base  of  the  squad  in  each  of  the  column  forma- 
tions is  the  leading  element  (four,  two,  or  trooper,  respec- 
tively). 

The  guide  of  the  leading  (base)  element  is  also  the  guide  of 
the  squad.  In  each  four  No.  2  is  the  guide ;  in  each  two  the 
right  trooper  (No.  1  or  No.  3).  In  an  incomplete  four  or  two 
the  position  of  the  guide  is  always  filled.  The  guide  of  each 
element  in  rear  of  the  base  follows  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  of 
the  base  (leading)  element  at  the  prescribed  distance. 

375.  Whenever  in  the  execution  of  any  movement  a  four  or 
two  moves  to  its  new  position  by  an  oblique  (or  movement 
approximating  an  oblique)    the  trooper  on  the  side  toward 


COMMANDS  AND  ARM  SIGNALS,  SaUAD.  137 

which  the  oblique  is  made  acts  as  guide  of  the  element  during 
the  oblique.  At  all  other  times  the  guide  in  a  four  or  two  is 
as  indicated  in  par.  374  unless  specially  otherwise  stated. 

376.  The  guide  of  the  squad  habitually  follows  the  leader  at 
8  yards  distance,  but  the  leader  may  designate  a  greater  dis- 
tance, in  which  case  the  guide  marches  accordingly. 

377.  When  a  guide  temporarily  is  directing;  guide  (par. 
324),  it  is  necessary  that  he  continue  accurately  in  the  direc- 
tion of  march  or  in  the  direction  indicated  for  him  by  the 
leader.  This  is  an  application  of  the  marching  upon  fixed 
points  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper  (par.  232). 

Mo\^MENTS  Executed  by  the  Squad. 

378.  Any  formation  (close  or  extended  order)  prescribed 
for  the  squad  may  be  taken  directly  from  any  other  close-order 
formation.  Being  in  extended  order  the  squad,  to  pass  di- 
rectly to  close  order,  must  execute  the  assembly  or  rally. 

379.  Subject  to  such  modifications  as  are  indicated  under 
the  respective  paragraphs  describing  the  movements,  the  dis- 
mounted squad  executes,  at  the  same  commands  as  prescribed 
for  the  mounted  squad,  such  movements  as  are  not  obviously 
inapplicable  to  dismounted  duty.  The  execution  of  the  dis- 
mounted movements  will,  where  differences  in  the  mounted  and 
dismounted  methods  necessarily  exist,  be  in  accord  with  the 
principles  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper,  Dismounted, 
corresponding  changes  in  the  details  of  execution  being  made. 

380.  The  general  principles  regulating  gait  and  pace  for  both 
mounted  and  dismounted  movements  are  stated  in  pars.  333- 
339.  Modifications  of  those  principles,  if  any,  are  stated  under 
the  corresponding  paragraphs  in  the  School  of  the  Squad. 

Commands  and  Corresponding  Arm  Signals. 

381.  Following  is  a  list  of  the  principal  commands  employed 
in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  together  with  the  corresponding 
arm  signals,  if  any.  The  list  includes  only  a  few  of  the  com- 
mands also  found  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper  (mounted  or 
dismounted).  The  commands  are  arranged  alphabetically  for 
convenient  reference.  The  description  of  the  signals  will  be 
found  in  par.  990. 


138 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Commands. 


Pars. 


1.  Assemble,  2.    MARCH 

1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH 

1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH.. 

CIRCLE  HORSES 

1.  Column,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Column  half  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. . 

1.  Column  of  twos,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH 

COUPLE  HEAD  AND  TAIL 

DISMOUNT 

1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH 

1,  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH 

1.  Fours  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. . 

I.  Fours  right  (left),  column  left  (right); 

2.  MARCH. 
1.  Fours  (twos  or  troopers)  at  so  many 

yards  distance,  2.  MARCH. 
1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH 


414 
384 
411 
428 
399 
396 


396 


427 
357 


408 
410 
382 
412 
391 
400 
401 
402 
403-c 

413 

382 


Arm  Signals. 


Assemble.* 

None. 

March  to  the  flank.* 

None. 

Column.* 

Change     direction.*      (See 

par.  3S6.) 
Column— twos,  t 
Change   direction.*        {See 

par.  386.) 
None. 
Prepare      to      dismount.* 

(Given  as  explained  in  par. 

357., 

'Foragers.* 
Forward.* 

March  to  the  flank.* 

To    the    rear*    (left   about 

only). 
None. 


None. 

From  the  trot  only:  Increase 
the  gait.*a 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

t  In  signals  marked  thus  (combination  signals)  the  preparatory  signal  consists 
of  more  than  one  element;  the  signal  of  execution  follows  the  last  element  of  the 
preparatory  signal. 

a  See  pars.  239,  333.  When  a  gait  signal  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command, 
the  resulting  signal  is  given  as  a  ci^mbination  signal. 


COMMAinJS  AND  ARM  SIGNALS. 


139 


Commands. 


Pars. 


Arm  Signals. 


HORSES  BACK 

INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT 

1.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4;  2.  FORM  ON  FOOT. 
MOUNT 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT 

1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT 

RALLY 

1.  Right  (left)  by  fours,  2.  MARCH 

1,  Right  (left)  by  troopers,  2.  MARCH. 

1.  Right  (left)  by  twos,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Right  (left)  forward,  fours  right  (left); 

2.  MARCH. 
1.  Right  (left)  half  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3. 

Forward,  4.  MARCH;  or  3.  Squad,  4. 

HALT. 


1.  Right  (left)  front  into  foragers  (or 
skirmishers),  2.  MARCH. 

1.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH.. 

1.  Right  (left)  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  For- 
ward, 4.  MARCH;  cr  3.  Squad, 
4.  HALT. 


None. 

None. 

None. 

Prepare  to  moimt.  (Given 
as  explained  in  par.  355.) 

Prepare  to  dismount.* 

[Prepare  to  mount.* 

Rally  (no  preparatory  sig- 
nal). Oral  command  habit- 
ually accompanies   signal. 

None. 

None. 

None. 
None. 

Change  direction.*  The  sig- 
nal of  execution  for  the 
change  of  direction  is  fol- 
lowed by  forward  or  halt* 

(par.  386). 
None. 

None. 

Change  direction.*  The  sig- 
nal of  execution  for  the 
change  of  direction  is  fol- 
lowed by  forward  *  or 
halt.* 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
•ase  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 


432 
390 
396 
436 
355 

356 

358 
354 
358 
416 


403-c 
393-& 
403-& 
393-a 
403-& 
403-d 

388 


409 


397 
386 


140 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Commands. 

Pars. 

Arm  Signals. 

1,  Skirmishers,  2.  MARGE 

1    408 

1    410 

383 

jskirmishers.* 
Halt.* 

1.  Squad,  2.  HALT 

TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT.    When  given  or- 

430 

To  fight  on  foot.      (No  pre- 

ally   the    indication  ACTION  RIGHT 

paratory  signal.) 

(L.EFT,  FRONT)  is  habitually  added  to 

the  above  command.    FIRE  AT  WILL 

may  also  immediately  follow  the  above 

command  (par.  430). 

1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH 

412 

402 

To  the  rear.* 

1.  Troopers     right     (left)     about, 

To    the    rear  *   (left  about 

2.  MARCH.    (Given  only  from  column 

only). 

of  troopers.) 

1.  Troopers    right    (left)    oblique, 

385 

None. 

2.  MARCH. 

1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH 

239 

From'  the  walk:   Increase 

the  gait.*a 

From  the  gallop:  Decrease 

the  gait.*a 

1.  Twos  right  (left),  2.  MARCH.    (Given 

400 

March  to  the  flank.* 

only  from  column  of  twos  and  as  an  ex- 

ceptional movement.) 

1.  Twos  right  (left)  about    2.   MARCH. 

402 

To   the   rear  *    (left    about 

(Given  only  from  column  of  twos.) 

only). 

1.  Walk,  2.  MARCH 

239 

From   the   trot    only:    De- 

crease the  gait.*  a 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
ease  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  9U0. 

a  See  pars.  239,  333.  When  a  gait  signal  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command, 
the  resulting  signal  is  given  as  a  combination  signal. 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQUAD.  141 

Detailed  Description  of  Movements,  Close  Order. 

382.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  march  to  the  front:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

The  leader  moves  forward,  followed  at  a  distance  of  3 
yards  by  the  guide  (par.  371),  The  other  troopers  conform 
to  the  march  of  the  guide  as  explained  in  par.  367. 

Being  at  a  halt,  to  move  forward  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  the 
commands  are  (par.  333)  :  1.  Forward,  trot,  or  1.  Forward, 
gallop:  2.  MARCH. 

Increases  of  gait  are  habitually  made  progressively  (par. 
239).. 

The  march  of  the  squad  in  line,  dismounted,  is  conducted  in 
accordance  with  the  provisions  of  pars.  68-74. 

383.  Marching  in  line,  to  halt:   1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 
All  halt  at  the  second  command. 

The  troopers,  if  not  already  aligned,  align  themselves  with- 
out command  on  the  guide  as  they  halt  (par.  364).  Move- 
ment in  the  rank  then  ceases. 

If  marching  at  the  trot  or  gallop,  the  gait  is  ordinarily 
decreased  progressively,  the  halt  being  executed  from  the 
walk  (par.  239). 

384.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  march  backward:  1,  Back- 
ward, 2.  MARCH, 

All  the  troopers  rein  back  (par.  280),  regulating  on  the 
guide,  who  maintains  his  distance  from  the  leader.  The 
execution  of  the  march  backward  as  a  collective  movement 
is  habitually  limited  to  cases  w^here  the  movement  may  be 
necessary ;  it  is  then  executed  for  short  distances  only.  It 
is  not  executed  at  an  increased  gait. 

3S5.  Being  in  line,  to  oblique  and  resume  the  original  direc- 
tion:  1.  Troopers  right   (left)    oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  trooper  as  in  par.  230.  During  the 
oblique  march  the  right  knee  of  each  trooper  should  be  just 
in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  trooper  on  his  right ;  the  trooper 
on  the  flank  toward  which  the  oblique  fe  made  acts  tempo- 
rarily without  special  indication  as  directing  guide  (Def.) 
of  the  squad.  The  line  during  the  oblique  march  should  be 
parallel  to  its  original  direction.  The  leader  does  not  take 
position  in  front  of  the  flank  trooper  during  the  oblique. 


142  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Halting  the  mounted  squad  while  at  the  oblique  should  be 
avoided.  If  the  squad  has  to  be  halted  thus,  the  troopers 
upon  halting  turn  their  horses  to  the  original  front  in  so  far 
as  practicable. 

To  resume  the  original  direction  by  similar  means,  the  com- 
mands   are:    1. 
/]  Forward,    2. 

(J  MARCH. 

,'  In    executing 

the    oblique   by- 
trooper,    dis- 
mounted,    each 
'///    COMMAND:  t  r  o  o  p  e  r    pre- 

,  ^  .  , ,  y/  1F0RWARD,2.MARCH.  serves  his  rela- 
^/'' / ' / /'//'  tive   position, 

^^^;^^^$^  keeping  his 

8'//f^''^^7^  shoulders  paral- 

'/'/'////'  lei   to   those  of 

'//////      COMMAND:  the   directing 

////'/         2. TROOPERS  guide  and  so 

RIGHT  OBLIQUE,  regulating    h  i  s 

Z.MARCH.  Step     that     the 

Fig.  32,  par.  385.  ^'^"^     ^^^^     ^^- 

main  parallel  to 

its  original   front.     In   resuming  the   original   direction,   the 

troopers  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  then  move  straight 

to  the  front.     If  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the 

oblique  march  is   resumed  by  the  commands :  1.  Oblique,   2. 

MARCH.     Should  the  halt  be  commanded  while  the  squad  is 

obliquing,  the  troopers  halt  faced  to  the  front  (fig.  32). 

386.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  to  the  right  or  left:  1.  Right 
(left)  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH;  or  3.  Squad, 
4.  HALT. 

The  principle  v)f  the  movement  is  explained  in  par.  329-a. 

The  form  of  the  third  and  fourth  commands  is  determined 
by  whether  the  turn  is  to  terminate  with  the  advance  in  line 
or  with  the  halt. 

In  the  turn  the  squad  is  led  by  its  leader  (par.  367)  through 
a  change  of  direction  of  90°.  The  leader  (and,  therefore,  the 
guide)   are  restricted  not  only  to  this  particular  change  of 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQUAD.  143 

direction  but  also  to  a  particular  arc  or  path  during  the  turn 
(par.  387). 

There  is  no  special  arm  signal  for  the  turn  as  such ;  but,  as 
the  turn  is  a  change  of  direction,  the  signal  for  the  latter 
movement  is  applicable.  The  signal  for  the  change  of  direc- 
tion does  not  in  itself  indicate  the  degree  of  the  turn,  but  the 
leader's  subsequent  signal  forward  or  halt  indicates  when  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  cease. 

In  the  turn,  as  in  any  case  of  the  march  in  line,  the 
leader,  subject  to  the  restrictions  just  indicated,  regulates  the 
direction  and  gait  of  march,  the  guide  conforms  to  the  move- 
ments of  the  leader,  and  all  the  other  troopers  regulate  their 
alignment  and  interval  on  the  guide.  The  rate  of  march  of 
the  leader  and  the  guide  should  not  be  so  rapid  as  to  make  it 
impracticable  for  the  troopers  on  the  marching  flank  of  the 
squad  to  preserve  their  alignment  on  the  guide  during  the  turn. 
The  guide  moves  in  the  U'ace  of  the  leader  during  the  turn,  as 
well  as  before  and  after  the  turn.  When  the  turn  is  executed 
by  the  marehing  squad  the  leader  gives  the  command  after  he 
has  begun  to  change  direction  and  at  the  moment  when  the 
guide  arrives  at  the  point  where  the  leader  straightened  his 
horse  in  the  neio  direction  (par,  471).  When  executed  from  a 
halt  the  second  command  can  not  be  given  aa  above  indicated. 
The  leader  in  that  case  begins  to  turn  at  the  command  of  exe- 
cution while  the  guide,  instead  of  beginning  the  actual  turn 
at  once,  moves  forward  so  as  to  move,  during  the  turn,  in  the 
trace  of  the  leader  (par.  367). 

In  executing  the  turn  dismounted  the  leader  so  regulates 
the  length  of  step  of  the  guide  that  the  trooper  on  the  marclL- 
ing  flank  can  keep  the  regular  step  corresponding  to  the  gait 
at  which  the  turn  is  made.  The  other  troopers  lengthen  or 
shorten  the  step  accordingly,  maintaining  the  cadence  and 
their  alignment  and  interval  with  respect  to  the  guide.  If  the 
turn  be  terminated  by  the  commands :  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH, 
all  the  troopers  resume  the  regular  step  at  the  fourth  com- 
mand. 

387.  In  executing  the  turn  in  a  squad  or  platoon,  the  leader, 
followed  by  the  guide,  so  turns  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  that  the 
pivot  trooper,  in  conforming  to  the  guide's  movements,  marches 
on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  varies  with  the  gait  of  the 
guide,  this  radius  being  2  yards  at  a  walk,  4  yards  at  a  trot, 


144  CAVALHY  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   01^ 

and  6  yards  at  a  gallop.  When  the  turn  is  executed  dis- 
mounted the  corresponding  radius,  in  either  quick  or  double 
time,  is  1  yard. 

388.  At  the  command:  1.  Right  (left)  half  turn,  2.  MARCH; 
3,  Forward,  4.  MARCH;  or  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT,  a  change  of  di- 
rection of  45°  may  be  made  in  accordance  with  the  principles 
explained  in  pars.  386  and  387.  The  arm  signal  for  the  half 
turn  follows  the  rule  indicated  for  the  full  turn  (par  386). 

389.  In  all  movements  in  these  regulations  in  the  course  of 
which  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  execute  a  turn  or  half  turn  this 
last  movement  is  made  by  each  element  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  explained  in  pars.  386  and  387,  except  that  the  com- 
mands 3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,  are  omitted  and  each  element 
continues  the  march  in  the  new  direction,  upon  completion  of 
the  turn,  unless  the  commands :  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT,  are  given. 
The  guide  of  a  four  in  the  turn  is  always  No.  2 ;  the  guide  of  a 
two  the  right  trooper. 

390.  Where  only  a  slight  change  in  the  direction  of  march  is 
desired,  it  is  habitually  accomplished  by  leading  without  any 
special  command  or  signal  therefor.  The  leader  may  caution : 
INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT).  The  execution  of  this 
movement^  like  that  of  the  turn,  is  a  special  case  of  leading 
applied  to  the  march  in  line.  The  leader  slightly  alters  the 
direction  of  march,  the  guide  conforms  to  the  leader's  move- 
ments, and  the  other  troopers  conform  to  the  movements  of 
the  guide. 

391.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  fours  to  a  flank: 

1.    Fours    right    (left),    2. 
/''"""    "~~-^^  MARCH. 

- — ^^'~*^— ^"^— -^^  ^^^  fours  move  simul- 

/^^^'""^^^'-^^^"^^  \,^--__j   taneously,  each  executing 
//'''Zc;:f^/-^^§.'I^§  right  turn  and  taking  up 

l^/i  AQ'A  A/1  a' A/irtA'  ^^^^  march  in  the  new  di- 

I  I     Ml  I       I    I  rection  (par.  389).    No.  2 

.UUUUUUUUUUUU  of  the  four  on  the  flank 

Fig.  33,  par.  391.  toward   which    the   move- 

ment is  executed  is  the 
guide  upon  whom  the  other  Nos.  2  regulate  during  the  move- 
ment (par.  326),  as  well  as  the  guide  of  the  resulting  column 
(par.  374).  The  leader  promptly  takes  position  in  front  of 
the  guide  (par.  325).    Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  S37-d. 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SftUAD.  145 

The  movement  dismounted  is  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples except  that  No.  2  of  each  four  regulates  his  step  and 
path  as  indicated  for  the  dismounted  turn  (pars.  386,  387). 
(Fig.  33.) 

392.  Column  of  twos  is  not  formed  directly  to  a  flank  from 
line.  Column  of  twos  may  be  formed  to  the  front  as  explained 
in  pars.  393  and  403,  and  the  head  of  the  column  be  at  once 
marched  in  any  desired  direction.  The  same  principle  regu- 
lates the  formation  of  column  of  troopers  lo  a  flank. 

393.  Being:  in  column  of  fours,  to  form  column  of  twos  or 
troopers: 

(a)  To  form  column  of  twos:  1.  Right  (left)  by  twos,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  right  two  of  the  leading  four  is  the  base.  The  other 
twos  enter  the  column  successively,  the  right  two  of  each 
four  being  followed  immediately  by  the  left  two  of  the  same 
four,  the  left  two  obliquing  to  enter  the  column  (par.  331). 
All  distances  are  4  feet  (par.  308).  Gaits  are  regulated  as  in 
movements  from  line  into  column  (par.  337-(i,  c) . 

(b)  Column  of  troopers  is  formed  on  the  same  principles  at 
the  commands:  1.  Right  (left)  by  trooper,  2.  MARCH.  The 
right  trooper  of  the  leading  four  is  the  base. 

Column  of  troopers  from  column  of  twos  is  formed  by  the 
same  commands  as  from  column  of  fours  and  in  accordance 
with  the  same  principles. 

7'he  movements  described  in  this  paragraph  are  among  those 
referred  to  in  par.  468-b. 

394.  In  executing  any  movement  by  which  a  column  of  twos 
or  troopers  is  formed,  a  four  composed  of  less  than  three 
troopers  (par.  368-?>)  acts  temporarily  as  a  two — on  the  right 
of  the  four  if  the  column  of  twos  is  formed  right  in  front  (par. 
870)  ;  on  the  left  of  the  four  if  the  column  of  twos  is  formed 
left  in  front.  When  the  column  of  fours  is  re-formed  the 
troopers  take  their  proper  places  in  column  as  indicated  in 
par.  368-&. 

395.  The  squad  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  is 
marched  to  the  front,  halted,  marched  backward,  marched  in 
an  oblique  direction,  and  marched  again  to  the  original  front 
by  the  same  commands  as  the  squad  in  line,  each  element  of 

38218  °— 18- 10 


146  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

the   column   conforming  to   the  principles    indicated   for   the 
squad  in  line  (pars.  329,  374). 

396.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  change 
direction. 

The  movement  's  executed  as  explained  in  par.  329,  the 
fours  (twos,  troopers)  successively  changing  on  the  same 
ground,  the  guide  of  each  element  moving  in  the  trace  of  the 
leader. 

In  changing  direction  in  column  of  fours,  mounted,  the 
guide  of  each  rear  four  slightly  diminishes  the  pace  when  4 
feet  from  the  turning  point,  correspondingly  increasing  the 
pace  during  the  actual  change  of  direction  so  as  to  have  the 
proper  distance  of  4  feet  from  the  four  next  in  front  when  the 
turn  is  completetl.  This  provision  does  not  apply  to  the 
corresponding  dismounted  movement,  nor  to  the  colunm  of 
twos,  or  troopers. 
To  indicate,  for  any  column  a  change  of  direction  of  90"  or 
45°,  the  leader  may  command,  respec- 
tively: 1.  Column  right  (left),  or  1.  Col- 
umn half  right  (left) ;  2.  MARCH. 

Tlie    leader    may    indicate    a    slight 
change  of  direction  bv  the  caution:  IN- 
CLINE TO  THE  RIGHT. 
The     dismounted     execution  '^of    the 
11,'/'  I  )       change   of   direction    conforms    in   each 
♦;  ;  /  I  1  1       element  of  the  column  to  the  modifica- 
'•S'S''!  1 1 1        tions  noted  in  pars.  386  and  387  for  the 
)■  '"'.;/  '  I  execution  of  the  turn  dismounted.     The 

'//[///  leader  regulates  the  length  of  his  own 

\//:/}////  step  accordingly  during  his  actual  change 

/y;-'i'ji/  of  direction,  and  the  guide  of  each  suc- 

cessive element  does  the  same  when  he 


(1 


reaches  the  turning  point. 

897.  Being   in   column   of  fours,  twos, 

or  troopers,  to  form  line  to  the  front:  1. 

Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH. 

Fig.  34,  par.  397.  ^^^^   leading   element    (four,    two,   or 

trooper)    of  the  column  is  the  base  of 

the  movement  and  moves  forward. 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQTTAD.  147 

Each  element  in  rear  of  the  base  leaves  the  column  by  a 
movement  approximating  a  right  oblique  and  proceeds  (par. 
375)  to  a  place  abreast  of  the  leading  element,  the  elements 
taking  successively,  from  left  to  right  in  the  new  line,  posi- 
tions in  the  same  order  as  that  in  which  they  previously  ap- 
peared from  head  to  rear  in  the  column. 

The  guide  of  the  leading  element,  when  the  movement  be- 
gins, acts  as  directing  guide  (Def.)  cf  the  squad  from  the 
moment  the  leader  starts  to  his  new  position  until  he  indi- 
cates the  guide  of  the  new  line  (pars.  326,  373)  when  all 
regulate  on  the  latter  guide. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  pars.  337-ff,  &.     (Fig.  34.) 

This  is  one  of  the  movements  referred  to  in  par.  Jj6S-h. 

In  the  dismounted  execution  of  the  movement  at  quick  time 
the  leader  commands :  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  as  soon  as  the  lead- 
ing element  has  advanced  to  the  point  w  here  it  is  desired  that 
the  line  shall  form  (par.  339-a,  h,  c).  Only  the  leading  (base) 
element  halts  at  the  command,  each  rear  element  halting  as  it 
arrives  on  the  line  (par.  337-/).  If  executed  while  marching 
in  double  time,  the  leader  similarly  commands :  1.  ftuick  time, 
2.  MARCH,  the  reduced  gait  being  taken  successively  by  the 
elements  as  they  reach  their  positions  (par.  337-/).  If  march- 
ing in  quick  time,  and  double  time  be  included  in  the  command, 
the  command  for  the  increased  gait  applies  only  to  the  rear 
elements   (par.  337-/). 

398.  To  prevent  the  inversion  of  twos  or  troopers  in  their 
respective  fours  the  squad  in  column  of  twos  or  column  of 
troopers  should  form  line  to  the  left  front  when  the  squad  is 
right  in  front  (par.  370),  and  vice  versa. 

399.  Being  In  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  to  form  column  of 
fours:    1.   Column,   2. 
MARCH.      {8ee   Def.    c3-v.  .  c¥:r.     r;^.. 
Column.)  '^----''    ^— --'    cj:- 

The     leading     ele-  ""  

ment  is  the  base  and  .  command:  i.  column  2.  march 

follows  the  leader.  P,^  35  399 

If    in     column     of 
twos  the  rear  two  of  the  leading  four  obliques  at  a  correspond- 
ingly faster  gait  (par.  335)  and  takes  its  proper  place  abreast 
of,  and  to  the  right  or  left  of,  the  leading  two  of  that  four,  so 


148  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

that  the  troopers  of  the  four  shall  appear,  from  right  to 
left,  in  the  order  of  their  respective  numbers.  All  the  other 
twos  take  up  a  correspondingly  faster  gait  than  the  leading 
two,  and  the  fours  forrft  successively  from  head  to  rear  in  the 
column  in  the  manner  indicated  above  (par.  331).  The  lead- 
ing two  of  each  four,  other  than  the  leading  four,,  takes  the 
gait  of  the  head  of  the  column  (or  halts)  when  at  4  feet  from 
the  corresponding  two  of  the  four  next  in  front.  In  each  four 
the  rear  two  begins  to  oblique  as  the  leading  two  of  that  four 
approaches  the  position  where  it  decreases  the  gait  (or  halts). 

The  leader  takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the 
column  (No.  2). 

Gaits  are  further  regulated  as  in  movements  from  column 
into  line  (par.  337-a,  &). 

Column  of  fours  from  column  of  troopers  is  formed  by  the 
same  commands  and  in  accordance  with  the  same  principles. 

Column  of  twos  from  column  of  troopers  is  formed  in  a  simi- 
lar manner  at  the  commands:  1.  Column  of  twos,  2.  MARCH. 
The  column  of  twos  will  be  right  in  front  or  left  in  front 
(par.  370),  according  as  the  column  of  troopers  was  right  in 
front  or  left  in  front  prior  to  the  movement. 

In  the  dismounted  execution  of  the  above  movements  in  quick 
time  the  leader  habitually  commands :  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  im- 
mediately following  the  command  of  execution  (par.  339-&,  c). 
Only  the  leading  element  halts  (par.  339-/),  each  of  the  rear 
elements  halting  when  it  reaches  its  prescribed  position  in  the 
column.  If  executed  in  double  time  the  leader  similarly  fol- 
lows the  command  of  execution  by  the  command  for  quick  time 
(par.  339-6,  c),  which  is  successively  taken  by  the  elements,  as 
above.  If  marching  in  quick  time,  and  double  time  be  com- 
manded, only  the  rear  elements  take  the  increased  gait,  each 
taking  quick  time  on  arriving  in  its  place.      (Fig.  35.) 

400.  Being:  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form  line 
to  a  flank:   1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

Each  four  turns  to  the  right  (par.  389).  Each  rear  four 
regulates  on  the  leading  four  until  the  fours  unite  in  line  (par. 
326),  when,  unless  the  leader  halts  the  squad,  all  take  up  the 
march  in  the  new  direction  without  further  command,  regu- 
lating on  the  new  guide  (pars.  325,  372).  If  the  squad  is  to 
form  line  without  advancing  in  the  new  direction,  the  leader 


MOVEMENTS   EXECUTED  BY  THE  SaUAD.  149 

gives  the  preparatory  indication  for  the  halt  immediately  fol- 
lowing the  second  command,  so  as  to  add  the  command  halt 
as  the  fours  unite  in  line. 


COLUMN  OF  FOURS  ATA  WALK, 

\^    COMMAND: 

;  1.  FOURS  LEFT, 
/    2.MARCH.3.SQUAD. 

^^-'^^'^^-'''  ' ^'       i.HALT. 

Fig.  36,  par.  400. 

In  an  emergency  a  similar  movement  may  be  executed  from 
columns  of  twos  at  the  commands:  1.  Twos  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH.  Loss  of  order  may  result.  In  the  absence  of  other 
indication,  intervals  are  closed  toward  the  guide  (par.  372). 
A  similar  movement  executed  from  column  of  troopers  results 
in  a  line  of  foragers,  which  may  be  assembled  or  rallied  to 
form  line   (pars.  414,  416). 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-cf.     (Fig.  36.) 

401.  Being  in  line,  to  face  or  march  the  line  to  the  rear: 
1.  Fours  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH, 

When  the  movement  is  executed  by  signal  the  elements  of 
the  column  always  turn  to  the  leit  about.  The  oral  command 
fouri  right  about  is  not  accompanied  by  an  arm  signal. 

Each  four  turns  ISO  degrees  in  the  direction  indicated  (par. 
889).  The  leader,  passing  around  a  flank  of  the  squad, 
promptly  takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  so  as  to  lead  the 
squad  in  the  new  direction  (pars.  325,  372). 

To  face  to  the  rear,  the  squad  is  halted  as  the  fours  unite 
in  line. 

The  modifications  incident  to  the  execution  of  the  dis- 
mounted movement  are  indicated  in  par.  391, 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-fZ. 

A  dismounted  squad  may  also  be  marched  a  short  distance 
to  the  rear  by  the  oral  command  and  metliods  indicated  in 
par.  82. 


150 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


.9;:^^^^ 


Fig.  37,  par.  402. 


402.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  face  or 
march  the  column  to  the  rear:  1.  Fours 
(twos,  troopers),  right  (left)  about,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  provision  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph regarding  the  execution  of  the 
movement  by  signal  applies  equally  to 
this  paragraph.  Each  four  (two,  trooper) 
turns  180  degrees  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated (par.  389).  The  leader  promptly 
takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  of 
the  column  (par.  325).     (Fig.  37.) 

403.  Being  in  line  to  form  column  of 
fours,    twos,    or'  troopers    to    the    front: 

1.  Right  (left)  by  fours  (twos,  troopers), 

2.  MARCH. 
The    formation    is    a    successive    one. 

The  right  element  (four,  two,  or  trooper, 
according  to  the  command)  is  the  base; 
it  moves  forward  and  follows  the  leader, 

becoming  the  leading  element  of  the  column. 

(a)   In  forming  column  of  fours  each  four  to  the  left  of  the 

base    successively    obliques    to    the 

right  (par.  385)   at  the  gait  of  the  A 

base   as   soon   as   it   has   sufficient  (J 

space,  and  resumes  the  direct  march  ^''. 

so  as  to  enter  the  column  at  4  feet  ' 

distance.     To  avoid  losing  distance 

the  oblique  must  be  begun  in  each 

four  when  the  heads  of  its  horses 

are  opposite  the  croups  of  the  horses 

of  the  four  on  its  right.     Gaits  are 

regulated  as  in  par.  SS7-a,  c.     (Fig. 

38.) 

(&)   In  forming  column  of  twos 

or    troopers    only    the   elements    of 

the  right  four  move  in  the  manner 

indicated  above.     Each  of  the  other 

elements  successively  turns  to  the 

right    (par.    389)    and    then,    after 

advancing  in  the  new  direction,   turns 


Fig.  38,  par.  403  (a). 
to  the  left  so  as  to 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQUAD. 


151 


/) 


IB 


COMMAND: 
1.  UFT  BY  mOS 


2.  MARCH. 


\f,\3\\zvj\  \M\\i:y/\  .yiyiHn 

Fig.  39,  par.  403  (6). 

Gaits  are  regu- 


enter  the  column  at  4  feet  distance  (par.  331).  Gaits  are 
regulated  as  in  par.  337-a,  c.  The  movements  described  in 
(a)  and  (&)  are  among  those 
referred  to  in  par.  468-6.  (Fig. 
S9.) 

(c)  Right  (left)  by  fours  is 
ordinarily  unsuited  to  execution 
in  groups  of  any  size.  Should  it 
be  necessary  to  break  to  the 
front  from  the  flank  of  such  a 
unit,  column  of  fours  to  the 
front  may  be  formed  by  execut- 
ing fours  right  (left)  and  then 
changing  the  direction  of  march 
of  the  head  of  the  column.  The 
oral  commands :  1.  Fours  right 
(left),  column  left  (right),  2. 
MARCH,  and  1.  Fours  right 
(left),  column  half  left  (right), 
2.  MARCH,  are  authorized  for  this  purpose, 
lated  as  in  par.  337-fZ. 

A  {d)  For  cases  that  are  not  suiv- 

\\         ably   met    by    (a)    or    (c)    of   this 
r         paragraph  the  commands :  1.  Right 
^/  (left)    forward,    fours   right    (left), 

2.  MARCH,  are  authorized.  The 
right  four  is  the  base  and  moves 
forward  following  the  leader,  who 
promptly  takes  position  in  front  of 
the  guide  of  the  column  (pars.  325, 
374).  The  second  four  from  the 
right  starts  to  move  as  in  fours 
right  (par.  391),  its  guide  decreas- 
ing the  pace  until  the  right  four 
has  partly  cleared  the  second  four, 
when  the  latter  four,  by  a  movement  approximating  an 
oblique,  enters  the  column  so  as  to  follow  in  the  trace  of  the 
leading  (original  right)  four  at  4  feet  distance.  The  other 
fours  execute  fours  right  (each  slightly  decreasing  the  pace 
during  the  turn),  and  then  column  left,  so  as  to  follow  the  sec- 
ond four  at  the  proper  distance.  The  fours  move  simultaneously 
and,  except  as  noted  above,  all  at  the  same  gait  (par.  S37-d). 


Fig.  40,  par.  403  (d). 


152  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

In  the  execution  of  the  movement  dismounted  the  right  four 
moves  forward ;  the  remainder  of  the  squad  executes  fours 
right,  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  (leading)  four  at 
92  inches  distance.  The  right  four  takes  four  short  steps  just 
after  it,  clears  the  four  next  on  its  left,  then  resumes  the  full 
step.     (Fig.  40.) 

Extended  Ordee. 

404.  In  extended-order  drills  the  troopers  habitually  march 
at  ease,  but  keep  on  the  alert  so  as  promptly  to  conform  to  the 
indications  of  the  leader  and  the  movements  of  the  guide. 

The  rifles  of  dismounted  troopers  in  extended  order  are 
carried  as  in  par.  61. 

405.  Foragers  may  be  formed  when  the  squad  is  in  any  au- 
thorized formation  (par.  468)  or  in  disorder,  when  it  is  mov- 
ing at  any  gait  or  is  halted.  The  extension  is  effected  toward 
the  direction  of  march.  When  possible  the  deployment  should 
be  made  upon  ground  protected  from  hostile  view  and  fire. 
Whatever  the  method  employed  for  the  extension,  the  leader 
controls  the  movements  of  the  base  (par.  323).  The  other 
troopers,  moving  at  a  gallop,  form  foragers  in  accordance  with 
the  methods  indicated. 

The  squad,  deployed  as  foragers,  is  marched  to  the  front 
and  halted,  obliques,  resumes  the  original  direction,  executes 
changes  in  gait  and  changes  of  direction,  by  the  commands 
and  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  in  line. 

406.  The  appropriate  substitution  of  skirmishers  for  for- 
agers, is  made  in  the  commands  for  movements  in  extended 
order,  dismounted  (par.  368-e).  The  skirmishers  move  at  a 
run  to  their  positions  on  the  line  of  foragers. 

407.  A  greater  or  less  interval  than  3  yards  between  for- 
agers may  be  ordered,  the  words  at  (so  many)  yards  being 
added  to  the  preparatory  command  so  as  immediately  to  follow 
the  word  foragers  or  skirmishers. 

408.  Being  in  line,  to  form  foragers:   1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH. 
The  guide  continues  to  be  the  base  and  advances  (par.  405) 

at  the  gait  of  march  unless  the  leader  indicates  otherwise 
(pars.  337-/,  405).  The  troopers  to  the  right  of  the  guide 
move  at  a  gallop  obliquely  to  the  right  front;  those  to  the 
left  obliquely  to  the  left  front.     The  troopers  take  position 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQUAD. 


153 


0   0   i-/)' 


/ 


abreast  of  the  base  in  the  same  order  as  in  line  and  at  inter- 
vals of  3  yards  measured  from  the  side  of  the  base.  Should 
the  ri2:ht  trooper  be  the  guide,  all  oblique  to  the  left;  should 
the  left  trooper  be  the  guide,  all  oblique  to  the  right. 

In  the  execution  of  the  corresponding  dismounted  movement 
(commands:  1.  Skirmishers,  2.  MARCH — par.  406)  the  troop- 
ers move  to  their  places  at  a  run,  taking  intervals  of  one-half 
pjice,  unless  some  other  interval  be  indicated  (pars.  36S-e, 
407).     (Fig.  31.) 

409.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form 
foragers:     1.    Right     (left) 

front     into     foragers,     2.  A 

MARCH.  (J 

The   le-ft   trooper   of   the  / 

leading  element  of  the  col- 
umn as  the  base  of  the  de- 
ployment advances  at  the 
gait  of  march  (par.  337-a) 
unless  the  leader  indicates 
o  t  h  e  r  wise  (pars.  387-/, 
405),  the  other  troopers  of 
the  leading  element  deploy- 
ing as  indicated  in  par.  408. 
The  remaining  troopers 
move  obliquely  to  the  right 
front  at  a  gallop  and  ex- 
tend the  line  in  similar 
manner,  the  order  of  the 
successive  elements  being 
the  same,  from  left  to  right 
in  line,  as  it  formerly  was 
from  head  to  rear  in  the 
column. 

The  possibility  of  the  in- 
version of  troopers  in  the 
fours  as  a  result  of  forming 
foragers  from  column  of 
tivos  or  troopers  should  be  kept  in  mind.  No  such  inversion 
can  occur  in  movements  executed  from  column  of  fours.  The 
movement  described  in  this  paragraph  is  one  of  those  referred 
to  in  par.  468-&.     (Fig.  41.) 


/ 


'  / 


[}'  / 


/ 


/■ 


y 


Fig.  41,  par.  409. 


i54  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

410.  Being  in  disorder,  to  form  foragers: 

Foragers  may  be  formed  from  any  condition  of  diKspersion 
or  disorder  by  methods  similar  to  those  indicated  in  pars.  408 
and  409.  At  the  command  :  1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH,  the  troop- 
ers nearest  the  leader  ride  toward  him  at  a  gallop.  The  leader 
indicates  the  guide  (par.  373),  who  follows  the  leader;  the 
other  troopers,  moving  at  a  gallop,  take  position,  with  the 
proper  interval,  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  guide,  without  re- 
gard to  order. 

Line  of  foragers  from  a  condition  of  disorder  may  also  be 
formed  by  first  rallying  the  squad  (par.  416)  and  then  forming 
foragers. 

Dismounted,  skirmishers  may  similarly  be  formed. 

411.  Being  deployed  as  foragers,  to  march  to  a  flank:  1.  By 
the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  trooper  turns  90°  to  the  right  and  marches  in  the  new 
direction  (par.  389).  A  column  of  troopers  at  4  feet  distance 
results.  The  line  of  foragers  may  be  resumed  by  again  march- 
ing to  the  flank  by  the  use  of  corresponding  commands  and 
methods. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  SS7-(l. 

Dismounted,  each  trooper  moves  as  in  par.  81.  If  at  a  halt 
the  movement  of  the  foragers  by  the  flank  is  executed  by  the 
same  commands  as  when  marching. 

412.  Being  deployed  as  foragers,  to  march  to  the  rear:  1.  To 
the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  trooper  executes  an  about  to  the  left  (pars.  389,  486). 
To  march  again  to  the  front  the  commands:  1.  Forward, 
2.  MARCH,  are  given.  Each  trooper  executes  another  about 
to  the  left.  If  a  line  of  foragers  be  halted  while  marching  to 
the  rear,  each  trooper  turns  to  the  left  about  and  halts, 
faced  to  the  front   (par.  474). 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  SS7-d. 

Dismounted,  each  trooper  executes  to  the  rear  (par.  82). 
If  at  a  halt,  the  movement  of  the  foragers  to  the  rear  is  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  commands  as  when  marching. 

413.  The  squad  may  be  extended  in  depth  as  well  as  in  front. 
The  commands  are :  1.  Fours  (twos,  or  troopers)  at  so  many 
yards  distance,  2.  MARCH.  This  movement  may  be  used  to 
cross  a  fire-swept  area  when  such  a  course  is  necessary.    The 


MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQTJAD.  155 

leader  indicates  the  point  wliere  the  squad  is  to  be  reassem- 
bled. The  fours  (twos  or  troopers)  move  out  successively 
from  head  to  rear  in  column  or  right  to  left  in  line.  Each 
element  may  extend  laterally  on  its  guide.  The  gait  is  the 
gallop. 

414.  Being  deployed  as  foragers  and  in  order  (par.  470) 
to    assemble:     1. 

Assemble,  2.  A 

MARCH.     The  [J 

guide  advances 
and  follows  the 
leader.  The 
other  troopers 
close    in   on   the 

guide    and    form  ___      "comwand- 

in  line  upon  him      ^^"     ..-^  1.  ASSEMBLE..  2.  MARCH .  ^  - 
in  the  same  rela- 
t  i  ve 

which  they  were 
at    the    moment  Fig.  42,  par.  414. 

the  assembly  was 

commanded.  The  leader  halts  the  guide  at  any  time  if  it  is 
desired  to  assemble  w^ithout  gaining  further  ground  in  the  di- 
rection of  march.  The  leader,  by  moving  in  any  desired  direc- 
tion, may  regulate  the  direction  toward  which  the  assembly 
is  executed.  Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-e,  the  elements 
other  than  the  base  taking  a  correspondingly  faster  gait.  The 
assembly  in  each  unit  is  explained  for  that  unit  (par.  468-&). 

The  leader  may,  by  prior  designation  of  any  trooper  (e.  g., 
a  flank  trooper)  as  guide  (par.  873),  cause  the  assembly  to 
be  executed  on  that  trooper  by  the  commands  and  methods 
just  indicated. 

The  troopers  always  start  to  assemble  in  line,  but  when  an 
assembly  in  column  is  desired  it  may  virtually  be  accom- 
plished by  the  leader's  designation  of  a  flank  trooper  as  the 
guide  before  ordering  the  assembly  and  cautioning:  COLTTMN 
as  soon  as  the  assembly  begins.  The  fours,  as  they  succes- 
sively assemble  toward  the  base,  then  take  their  places  in 
column  of  fours  instead  of  in  line;  the  leader  takes  post  in 
front  of  No.  2  (par.  325). 


same  rela-   f\  rC        i(         ^  ^  \         \        ^n 

r-.ei.':fl  0   0  fl   0   ()   0  fl 


166  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

If  there  be  not  space  to  advance  in  column  of  fours,  the 
assembly  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers  may  be  accomplished 
by  corresponding  commands  and  methods. 

The  squad  executes  assemble  only  when  deployed  as  foragers 
and  in  order.  Under  other  conditions  the  rally  (par.  416),  fol- 
lowed by  count  fours,  more  easily  accomplishes  the  purposes  of 
the  assembly  (Def.). 

In  executing  the  assembly  dismounted  the  troopers  close  in 
on  the  guide  in  double  time  tuithout  special  command  if  the 
guide  and  leader  continue  to  advance  (par.  339-fir)  ;  otherwise 
they  close  in  at  quick  time  unless  double  time  be  commanded 
(par.  339-&).     (Fig.  42.) 

415.  If  to  the  rear  (par.  412)  be  executed  by  the  squad,  a 
temporary  loss  of  order  occurs.  If  it  be  desired  to  pass  to 
close  order  without  resuming  the  march  to  the  front  and 
assembling  (par.  414),  the  squad  may  rally  (par.  416)  and 
count  fours. 

416.  Being  in  any  formation,  or  not  formed,  or  in  disorder,  to 

_  COMMAND: 


FiG.^43,  par.  416. 

rally:  RALLY.  When  the  rally  is  ordered  the  signal  is  habitu- 
ally accompanied  hy  the  oral  command,  both  the  signal  and 
the  oral  command  being  repeated  until  understood  and  obeyed. 
The  signal  is  obeyed  at  once,  there  being  no  preparatory  com- 
mand for  this  movement.. 

The  leader  takes  position  at  any  point  or  moves  in  any 
desired  direction,  and  at  any  gait  that  will  permit  the  move- 
ment to  be  executed.  The  troopers  ride  toward  the  leader  at 
an  extended  gallop  and,  in  the  absence  of  other  indication, 
form  in  rear  of  the  leader  in  line.  The  leader  promptly  desig- 
nates the  guide  (pars.  371,  373),  who  follows  the  leader.     The 


THE  MOUNTED  ATTACK.  157 

other  troopers  form,  as  they  come  up,  on  the  right  and  left  of 
the  guide  extending  the  line.  The  leader  may  caution :  COL- 
UMN, as  the  leading  troopers  approach.  The  troopers  then 
form  in  column  of  fours  instead  of  in  line.  The  leading  ele- 
ment forms  first :  the  other  troopers,  as  they  arrive,  succes- 
sively form  fours,  extending  the  column  to  the  rear.  The 
leader  designates  the  guide  (pars.  373,  374)  and  cautions: 
NOTE  YOUR  NUMBERS.  The  rally  in  column  is  exceptional 
and  is  intended  for  use  only  on  occasions  when  a  narrow 
road  or  other  circumstances  of  the  terrain  prevent  the  rally 
in  line. 

Should  the  route  along  which  the  leader  is  moving  when 
the  rally  is  ordered  be  too  narrow  to  permit  the  formation  of 
column  of  fours,  the  leader  may  caution:  COLUMN  OF  TWOS 
(COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS)  as  the  leading  troopers  approach. 
The  movement  is  executed  as  explained  for  the  rally  in  column 
of  fours.  Fours  should  be  counted  at  once.  The  rally  in 
column  of  twos  or  troopers  is  to  be  regarded  as  very  excep- 
tional. 

The  squad  being  rallied  in  line,  though  ordinarily  not  in 
order  until  fours  are  counted  (par.  470),  is  available  at  once 
to  charge  or  to  execute  any  movement  that  does  not  involve  a 
knowledge  of  their  respective  numbers  on  the  part  of  the  indi- 
vidual troopers.  Unless  the  charge  is  to  be  executed  at  once, 
fours  should  be  counted  without  delay  after  rallying,  so  that 
the  squad  may  be  in  order  and  ready  to  execute  any  move- 
ments whatever  that  conditions  may  demand. 

The  rally,  dismounted,  is  always  executed  at  a  run. 
(Fig.  43.) 

The  Mounted  Attack. 

417.  The  mounted  attack  is  made  with  the  pistol  or  saber  in 
accordance  with  the  principles  indicated  in  par.  562-565. 
The  typical  saber  charge  is  executed  in  line.  Under  some 
circumstances,  as  in  the  attack  of  a  dispersed  enemy,  etc.,  a 
saber  charge  may  be  made  by  troopers  deployed  as  foragers. 
The  pistol  attack  is  usually  made  in  foragers.  In  exceptional 
circumstances  (as  in  breaking  out  from  an  ambush,  attacking 
in  a  narrow  road,  etc.)  it  may  be  made  in  line  or  in  column 
of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers. 


168  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

418.  Cohesion  in  the  line  and  vigor  in  the  shock  are  essential 
to  the  success  of  the  saher  charge.  High  speed  is  necessary 
for  tlie  desired  sliock;  and  in  tlie  saber  cliarge,  as  executed 
in  combat,  tlie  horses  are,  at  the  culmination  of  the  charge, 
habitually  "  turned  loose "  and  urged  to  the  highest  speed. 
This,  except  with  men  and  horses  that  are  highly  trained, 
necessarily  involves  lo^s  of  control  over  the  horse  on  the  part 
of  the  trooper.  The  saber  charge,  executed  with  poorly 
trained  horsemen,  especially  if  on  imperfectly  trained  or 
excitable  horses,  is  apt  to  be  futile  as  regards  the  instruction 
of  the  trooper  and  to  result  in  more  or  less  permanent  loss  of 
control  over  the  horses.  Control  of  the  mount  by  the  trooper 
is  essential  during  the  execution  of  the  pistol  attack  (ordi- 
narily made  in  line  of  foragers),  and  is,  of  course,  necessary 
during  march  and  maneuver.  For  these  reasons  it  is  consid- 
ered advisable  that  the  first  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the 
actual  saber  charge  be  deferred  until  after  platoon  instruction 
and  that  it  be  given  then  only  after  the  troop  commander  is 
satisfied  that  the  recruit's  progress  in  horsemanship  and  in  the 
use  of  his  weapon  has  advanced  to  a  point  when  the  exercise 
will  be  of  value. 

419.  The  work  in  the  squad,  with  a  view  to  preparing  the 
recruit  for  the  mounted  attack  tvith  the  saber  and  pistol,  will 
therefore  be  limited  to  those  exercises  in  which  the  horse  Is 
controlled.  It  should  consist,  in  substance,  of  an  extension  to 
collective  work  of  the  individual  instruction  described  in  par. 
297,  and  should  include  occasional  practice  in  advancing  as 
rapidly  as  can  be  done  while  maintaining  a  close  formation 
and  control  of  the  mount.  The  increase  in  speed  should  be 
made  quietly  and  progressively,  be  continued  but  a  short  dis- 
tance, and  invariably  be  'terminated  by  the  quiet  resuming  of 
a  sloiv  gait.  As  the  recruit  gets  more  skill  and  confidence  the 
exercise  will  be  conducted  with  sabers  drawn,  the  troopers 
taking  the  charging  position  (par.  251)  when  the  instructor 
does  so  and  returning  to  the  carry  with  him.  Similar  exercises 
will  be  conducted  with  the  pistol,  with  especial  attention  to 
directing  the  horses  through  lines  of  silhouette  targets  and  to 
drawing,  returning,  and  manipulating  the  pistol.  The  exer- 
cises with  the  pistol  will  usually  be  conducted  in  foragers  and 
may  be  extended  to  include  the  actual  execution  of  the  pistol 
attack  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  159 

In  campaign  any  small  group  executes  the  mounted  attack 
as  explained  for  the  platoon. 

420.  In  combat  of  every  kind  skill  on  the  part  of  the  indi- 
vidual trooper  in  the  use  of  the  weapon  or  weapons  employed 
is  essential.  So  important  is  this  part  of  the  training  that, 
where  time  for  the  training  of  the  troopers  is  limited  all  but 
the  most  essential  portions  of  close-order  drill  should  be  de- 
ferred or  omitted  in  order  that  the  training  of  the  trooper  in 
the  use  of  his  weapons  may  be  thorough  and  efficient. 

Movements    for    Passing    from    Mounted    Action    to    Dis- 
mounted Action. 

421.  A  body  of  troops  that  resorts  to  dismounted  action  may 
leave  with  the  horses  a  sufficient  number  of  horse  holders  to 
permit  a  change  of  position  of  the  horses  to  be  made  at  any 
time  by  leading.     The  led  horses  are  then  said  to  be  mobile. 

AVhen  the  horses  of  a  body  of  troops  that  resorts  to  dis- 
mounted action  are  so  linked,  tied,  or  grouped  that  they  can 
not  change  position  without  a  change  of  formation,  or  the 
assistance  of  additional  horse  holders,  or  both,  the  horses  are 
said  to  be  immobile. 

Mobility  of  the  led  horses  has  the  advantages  incident  to 
the  possibility  of  quickly  changing  position,  but  it  is  open  to 
the  objection  that  it  involves  withdrawing  a  large  percentage 
of  the  troopers  from  the  dismounted  firing  line. 

422.  When  the  horses  are  mobile  (par.  421)  a  trooper  is 
designated  to  take  immediate  charge  of  the  horses  and  of  the 
men  who  remain  with  the  horses  (par.  431).  Such  designa- 
tion, if  not  made  in  advance  (par.  434),  is  habitually  made 
immediately  preceding  or  following  the  commands  for  passing 
to  dismounted  action.  When  the  horses  are  left  immobile  a 
trooper  is  similarly  designated  to  take  charge. 

423.  With  a  view  to  putting  the  squad  into  dismounted 
action,  the  horses  of  the  squad  may  be  coupled  head  and  tail 
in  pairs  (par.  427)  ;  or  grouped  in  a  circle  (par.  428)  ;  or  the 
squad  may  be  dismounted  to  fight  on  foot  and  the  horses  of 
each  two  or  four  left  in  charge  of  a  mounted  horse  holder 
(par.  4.30). 

424.  Whenever  the  horses  are  coupled  ..or  circled,  or  the 
squad  is  dismounted  to  fight  on  foot,  the  leader  dismounts 


160  CAVALRY   DRILL   REGULATIONS. 

promptly  and  runs  to^Yard  the  position  where  he  desires  the 
dismounted  men  to  form.  The  dismounted  troopers  run  at 
once  toward  the  leader  and  form  in  rear  of  liim  in  line,  or  in 
such  formation  as  he  may  indicate,  without  any  attention  to 
previous  relative  order  in  the  squad.  Should  the  leader  com- 
mand :  1.  Skirmishers,  2.  MARCH,  the  troopers  proceed  di- 
rectly to  places  on  the  indicated  line,  taking  advantage  of 
the  available  cover.  Movements  of  the  dismounted  squad 
are  executed  in  accordance  with  the  usual  commands  and 
methods ;  they  should  be  of  the  simplest  possible  character. 
Fours  may  be  counted  if  necessary  for  any  purpose. 

425.  The  horses  of  a  dismounted  squad  may  be  held  without 
linking  or  fastened  together  by  twos,  by  fours,  or  in  a  single 
group.  The  details  of  securing  the  horses,  whether  coupled, 
circled,  or  linked  together  for  leading,  vary  with  the  par- 
ticular equipment  in  use.  The  bridoon  (snaffle)  reins,  halter 
rope  (or  strap),  or  link  may  each  be  employed  to  fasten 
horses  together.  The  reins  of  the  curb  bit  should  never  be 
so  employed,  and  when  the  link  is  used  it  should  never  be 
attached  to  the  ring  of  the  curb  bit. 

In  coupling  head  and  tail  with  the  1912  equipment  (which 
is  provided  with  no  link)  the  two  horses  of  each  pair  may 
be  kept  together  by  tying  the  bridoon  reins  of  each  horse  to 
the  cantle  of  the  saddle  of  the  other.  One  method  is  to  place 
the  horses  with  their  right  sides  together  and  tie  the  bridoon 
reins  of  each  to  the  attaching  strap  of  the  saber  carrier  of 
the  other.  When  the  McClellan  saddle  is  used  with  equip- 
ment of  the  type  issued  prior  to  1912,  coupling  may  be  done 
by  securing  each  horse's  head  to  the  cantle  ring  on  the  saddle 
of  the  other  horse  of  the  pair. 

When  a  horse  is  tied  or  linked  to  another  for  leading  (par. 
431),  the  bridoon  reins,  halter  rope,  or  link  of  the  first  horse 
is  secured  to  the  halter  ring  of  the  second. 

When  horses  are  grouped  in  a  circle,  each  horse  may  be 
fastened  to  a  small  circle  of  rope  or  leather.  A  coiled  lariat 
or  extra  stirrup  strap  may  be  used  for  this  purpose.  The 
number  of  horses  in  a  full-strength  section  (16)  is  about  the 
maximum  number  that  should  be  so  grouped. 

A  horse  that  is  tied  or  linked  to  another  horse  by  any  of 
the  methods  indicated  above  will  be  more  easily  controlled. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  161 

if  the  fastening  rein,  rope,  or  link  be  short.  When  horses  are 
tied  together,  a  slip  knot  should  be  used. 

426.  Whenever  horses  are  fastened  together  by  any  of  the 
indicated  methods  or  are  held  or  led  by  horse  holders,  the 
curb  reins  of  each  dismounted  trooper  and  the  snaffle  reins, 
except  when  used  to  hold  or  tie  the  horse,  are  placed  behind 
the  pommel  and  secured  by  crossing  a  stirrup  in  front  of  the 
pommel.  Each  trooper  secures  his  own  reins  in  this  manner 
upon  dismounting  to  couple  or  circle  horses  or  to  form  on  foot 
as  in  par.  436.  When  the  squad  dismounts  to  fight  on  foot 
(par.  430)  the  horse  holders  must  make  any  necessary  ad- 
justment of  the  reins  and  stirrups  of  the  dismounted  men. 

427.  The  following  provisions  for  coupling  horses  are  based 
upon    the    assumption    that    the   horses    are 
coupled  with  their  off  {right)  sides  together.  ^  (jK 
Should  the  equipment  used  make  it  prefer- 
able that  the  near   (left)   sides  be  together, 
the  even  numbers  ride  forward,   turning  to    p^^  44  par'  427 
the  rig/it  about  instead  of  as  described  below. 

Other  necessary  changes  in  the  execution  of  the  movement 
when  the  near  sides  are  together  will  be  evident.  The  horses 
of  Nos.  1  and  2  of  each  four  form  one  couple,  the  horses  of 
Nos.  3  and  4  forming  another  pair. 

Being  mounted,  in  column  of  fours,  at  the  command,  COITPLE 
HEAD  AND  TAIL,  all  nalt,  if  marching,  and  the  fours  open  out 
as  to  dismount;  each  odd-numbered  trooper  rides  forward 
about  2  yards  and  turns  to  the  left  about  on  the  forehand, 
so  as  to  face  the  trooper  with  whom  he  is  to  couple.  All  dis- 
mount and  each  odd-numbered  trooper  leads  his  horsei  along- 
side the  horse  of  the  corresponding  even-numbered  trooper. 
The  horses  are  then  secured  as  indicated  in  pars.  425  and 
426.  A  noncommissioned  officer  or  trooper  out  of  ranks,  or  a 
trooper  of  an  incomplete  two,  fastens  his  horse  to  either  horse 
of  the  nearest  couple.  A  trooper  is  usually  left  in  charge  of 
the  horses   (pars.  422,  434). 

The  dismounted  squad  forms  as  indicated  in  par.  424. 

Coupling  may,  with  minor  modifications  that  will  be  evident, 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and  similar  methods  from 
line  or  from  any  other  formation  of  the  squad. 
38218  °— 18 11 


162 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


CIHCU;  HOHSES. 

Fig.  45,  par.  428. 


A  dismounted  squad  may  couple  horses  at  the  same  com- 
mands  and  by  similar  methods. 

The  squad  remounts  as  indicated  in  pars. 
438,  442.      (Fig.  44.) 

428.  It  may  at  times  prove  convenient  to 
group  the  horses  in  a  circle  (par.  437)  ;  they 
may  then  be  linked  or  tied  together  and  left 
in  care  of  a  single  horse  holder  (pars.  422, 
434),  Before  circling  the  horses  the  squad 
usually  forms  line. 

At  the  command:  CIRCLE  HORSES,  the 
center  of  the  line  halts,  if  not  already  at  a  halt ;  the  flanks  of 
the  line  move  forward  and  simultaneously  close  toward  each 
other  so  as  to  make  an  approximate  circle.  All  dismount,  and 
the  horses  are  then  secured  to  the  circle  of  rope  (or  other  suit- 
able material)  at  the  center  of  the  group  (pars.  425,  426). 

The  leader  and  any  other  troopers  out  of  ranks  take  position 
on  the  flanks  of  the  squad  before  the  latter 
meet.  The  horses  may  similarly  be  circled 
after  the  squad  has  dismounted.  The  dis- 
mounted squad  forms  as  indicated  inpar.  424. 
The  squad  remounts  as  indicated  in  pars. 
438-442.      (Fig.  45.) 

429.  The  squad,  before  dismounting  to 
fight  on  foot,  is  ordinarily  formed  in  col- 
umn of  fours,  and  the  movement  is  ex- 
plained accordingly ;  the  movement  may, 
however,  be  executed  from  any  formation 
with  such  modifications  of  the  methods  ex- 
plained as  are  indicated  or  as  may  readily 
be  inferred. 

430.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  dis- 
mount to  fight  on  foot,  the  horses  remain- 
ing mobile:   TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT. 

When  the  movement  is  signaled  (par.  990) 
the  direction  of  the  action  is  included  in  the 
signal.  When  given  orally  the  indication 
ACTION  RIGHT  (LEFT,  FRONT)  is  habitu- 
ally added  to  the  command. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt  if  marching.    The  leader  and 
Nos.  1  and  4  dismount  at  once.    No.  1  may  dismount  either 


/       //  '4 

'Ik    '! 


Fig,  4o,  par.  430. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  163 

to  the  right  or  left.  The  leader  on  dismounting  passes  his 
reins  to  the  file  closer,  to  the  nearest  horse  holder,  or  to  a 
trooper  designated  in  advance  to  take  his  horse. 

When  Nos.  1  and  4  dismount  No.  2  seizes  the  snaffle  reins  of 
No.  1  and  No.  3  seizes  the  snaffle  reins  of  No.  4,  making,  if 
conditions  permit,  the  adjustment  required  by  par.  426.  The 
horses  can  then  be  quickly  led  in  any  desired  direction  should 
it  be  necessary  to  move  them  (par.  431). 

If  the  movement  be  executed  from  column  of  troopers,  or 
fi'om  foragers,  Nos.  1  and  4  dismount  at  once,  but  do  not 
leave  their  horses  until  the  reins  are  taken  by  the  respective 
horse  holders  (Nos.  2  and  3).  The  horse  holders  move  quickly 
to  the  side  of  the  dismounted  troopers  and  take  the  reins. 

If  the  movement  be  executed  from  line  the  odd  numbers 
dismount  in  place  without  moving  forward.  Should  the  squad 
resort  'to  dismounted  action  wiiile  in  foragers,  without  first 
assemblying  or  rallying,  the  leader  may  direct  that  the  horses 
be  assembled  or  coupled  (par.  437). 

The  dismounted  squad  forms  as  indicated  in  par.  424.  The 
squad  remounts  as  indicated  in  pars.  438^42.     (Fig.  46.) 

431.  When  the  squad  dismounts  to  fight  on  foot  the  leader, 
if  conditions  permit,  habitually  gives  the 
trooper  in  charge  of  the  led  horses  (pars.  422, 
434)  special  instructions  regarding  the  dispo- 
sition of  the  men  still  remaining  mounted  and 
the  horses.  In  the  absence  of  other  instruc- 
tions the  trooper  in  charge  of  the  led  horses 
immediately  disposes  the  latter  so  as  to  facili- 
tate rapid  remounting  and  to  utilize  the  best 
cover  available  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of 


the  dismounted  men.    If  the  position  in  which      UOUD/'"'    / 
the  squad  dismounts  meets  the  requirements 
just  stated  the  led  horses  are  not  moved.    The 
horses  will  be  taken  beyond  the  immediate  pro- 
tection of  the  dismounted  line  only  by  direc- 
tion of  the  leader.    The  horses  being  satisfac- 
torily disposed  near  the  dismounted  line,  the 
trooper  in  charge,  in  the  absence  of  other  in-  fig.  47,  par.  431. 
structions,   causes  the  horse  holders  to  form 
column  of  fours,  if  not  already  in  that  formation,  and  com- 
mands :  1.  Nos.  2,  2.  DISMOUNT.    Each  No.  2  on  dismounting 


164  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

passes  the  bridoon  reins  of  his  horse  to  No.  3,  secures  his  curb 
reins  and  both  reins  of  No.  I's  horse  (par.  426),  fastens  No.  I's 
horse  to  his  (par.  425),  moves  at  a  run  to  the  position  of  the 
squad  leader,  falls  in,  in  rear  of  the  leader  in  line  (or  as  di- 
rected ) ,  and  awaits  orders.  Should  the  movement  be  executed 
under  fire  the  Nos.  2  take  cover  iu  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
the  leader,  making  their  presence  known  to  the  latter.  The 
leader  places  the  additional  men  on  the  firing  line  or  uses  them 
as  he  sees  fit.  The  led  horses  thus  remain  mobile,  but  with  a 
single  horse  holder  to  each  four.  The  trooper  in  ch-arge  of 
the  led  horses  supervises  the  execution  of  the  above  movements 
by  the  horse  holders  and  inspects  to  see  that  the  horses  of  each 
four  are  properly  secured.  The  above  habitual  procedure  may 
be  varied  in  accordance  with  special  instructions  of  the  leader. 
For  example,  the  leader  may,  w^here  a  special  case  requires  it, 
order  the  horses  back  to  more  distant  cover  (par.  432),  or 
he  may  direct  the  trooper  in  charge  of  the  led  horses  to 
couple  head  and  tail  (par.  427)  or  to  circle  horses  (par.  428). 
In  such  cases  the  horse  holders  assist  each  other  as  may  be 
necessary.  In  all  cases  where  contrary  directions  are  not 
given  all  troopers  not  needed  for  duty  in  connection  imth  the 
horses  under  the  indicated  arrangement  are  required  by  the 
trooper  in  charge  of  the  led  horses  to  proceed  promptly  to  the 
position  of  the  leader  so  as  to  he  available  for  the  dismounted 
line.  The  leader's  instructions  may  require  that  Nos.  2  remain 
mounted.  The  above  procedure  is  then  modified  accordingly ; 
and  if  the  horses  are  in  column  of  twos,  they  may  remain  in 
that  formation. 

Dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  should  be  practiced  from  all 
formations  with  special  attention  to  em.ergency  action  under- 
taken from  column  of  twos  and  troopers.  At  drills  and  exer- 
cises the  instructions  of  the  leader  to  the  trooper  in  charge 
of  the  led  horses  should  be  frequently  varied  and  at  times 
omitted  altogether.     (Fig.  47.) 

432.  Should  the  leader  desire  the  horses  taken  to  a  more 
protected  position  than  is  available  in  the  immediate  vicinity 
of  the  dismounted  line,  his  special  instructions  include  the  com- 
mand :  HORSES  BACK,  and  he  points  toward,  or  otherwise 
indicates,  the  desired  cover. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  165 

The  trooper  in  charge  then  leads  the  horse  holders  and 
horses,  ordinarily  in  column  of  fours  or  twos,  to  the  indicated 
cover  and  carries  out  any  additional  special  instructions  that 
he  may  have  received  from  the  leader.  The  trooper  in  charge 
habitually  moves  at  the  trot,  but  takes  the  gallop  if  the  occa- 
sion or  his  instructions  so  require.  Should  no  special  instruc- 
tions have  been  given  to  the  trooper  in  charge,  the  latter,  on 
arriving  at  the  indicated  cover,  forms  the  column  in  such 
position  and  formation  as  will  enable  it  to  be  moved  quickly 
in  any  probable  direction  of  movement,  preserving  as  far  as 
practicable  the  original  order  of  the  horses  in  the  column.  He 
then  causes  Nos.  2  to  dismount  as  in  par.  431.  The  horses 
having  been  formed  in  column  of  fours  with  Nos.  3  as  horse 
holders,  or  having  been  otherwise  arranged  as  required  by  the 
leader's  additional  instructions,  the  trooper  in  charge  desig- 
nates one  of  the  dismounted  men  to  take  charge  of,  and 
report  promptly  to  the  leader  for  duty,  all  dismounted  men 
not  required  with  the  horses.  The  leader's  special  instructions 
may,  as  in  par.  431,  require  that  the  horses  be  coupled  or 
circled,  thus  increasing  the  number  of  men  who  may  be  sent 
forward  dismounted,  but  this  should  not  be  done  if  there  is 
any  probability  that  occasion  may  arise  to  move  the  horses. 
Should  the  movement  of  the  horses  to  cover  be  made  under 
fire  the  trooper  in  charge  may  command :  DISPERSE.  Each 
horse  holder  then  moves  independently  and  rapidly  toward  the 
indicated  cover. 

The  trooper  in  charge  of  the  led  horses  must  take  such 
steps  as  are  practicable  with  the  men  at  his  disposal  to  guard 
the  horses  against  surprise  or  attack  (par.  434),  must  keep 
in  touch  with  the  leader,  and  must  insure  that  the  position 
of  the  led  horses  is  known  to  the  leader. 

433.  To  provide  for  the  exceptional  occasions  that  may  call 
for  the  material  separation  of  the  dismounted  line  and  led 
horses  (par.  432),  the  horses  must  be  practiced  in  leading  at 
all  gaits  in  column  of  twos  and  fours,  and  in  the  dispersed 
formations  best  adapted  to  a  movement  under  fire  should  such 
a  movement  be  unavoidable. 

434.  A\  hen  a  squad  or  other  small  group  resorts  to  dis- 
mounted action  conditions  usually  require  that  one  or  more 
patrols  provide  for  the  security  of  the  horses  and  of  the 
dismounted  line.     The  number  and  strength  of  such  patrols 


166  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

depend  wholly  upon  the  circumstances  of  the  particular  case 
and  must  be  regulated  accordingly.  The  general  principle 
may  well  be  kept  in  mind  that  in  proportion  as  conditions 
seem  to  require  a  large  percentage  of  troopers  for  use  as 
patrols  and  horse  holders  the  advisability  of  resorting  to  dis- 
mounted action  becomes  more  and  more  open  to  question. 
The  presence  of  other  friendly  groups  operating  in  the  same 
vicinity  and  any  measures  for  security  taken  by  a  higher 
commander  naturally  tend  to  simplify  the  duties  of  group 
leaders  as  regards  security  and  may  even  in  exceptional  cases 
render  unnecessary  any  further  measures.  When  mounted 
patrols  are  needed  they  should,  if  not  previously  sent  out,  be 
designated  in  advance  of  the  commands  for  dismounting  so 
that  they  will  remain  mounted.  It  will  tend  toward  rapid  and 
efficient  action  if  the  trooper  or  troopers  designated  for  patrols 
or  for  other  special  duties  connected  with  passing  to  dis- 
mounted action  be  given  such  advance  instructions  as  to  their 
duties  as  may  be  practicable  and  be  placed  in  the  file  closers 
or  in  an  incomplete  four.  In  a  squad  a  man  may  thus  be 
designated  in  advance  and  instructed  with  a  view  to  his 
taking  general  charge  of  the  horse  holders  and  led  horses,  if 
the  horses  are  kept  mobile,  or  to  his  remaining  in  charge  of 
the  horses  if  they  are  rendered  immobile. 

435.  In  emergencies  the  command  FIRE  AT  "WILL  may  im- 
mediately follow  the  command  to  fight  on  foot.  The  dis- 
mounted troopers  (Nos.  1  and  4)  at  once  open  fire  on  the 
enemy  from  the  most  advantageous  positions  in  the  immediate 
vicinity. 

436.  For  purposes  calling  for  dismounted  duty,  but  not  con- 
nected with  the  tactical  employment  of  troops  in  serince,  and 
not  requiring  special  rapidity  of  execution,  the  oral  com- 
mands: 1.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4;  2.  FORM  ON  FOOT,  may  be 
given  to  the  squad  in  column  of  fours.  The  movement  is 
executed  in  the  general  manner  indicated  for  to  fight  on  foot 
(par.  430),  with  the  following  modifications.  No.  2  of  each 
four  dismounts  with  Nos.  1  and  4,  at  once  passing  over  his 
own  bridoon  reins  to  No,  3,  fastening  No.  l"s  horse  to  his  own 
as  prescribed  in  par.  431.  No.  2  then  falls  in  with  the  other 
dismounted  troopers  (par.  424).  The  leader  nnd  dismounted 
troopers  take  their  places  promptly,  but  in  quick  time.     The 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  167 

horses  are  not  moved  at  all   uuless  the  leader  specially  so 
directs. 

437.  Each  of  the  three  methods  (par.  423)  for  passing  to 
dismounted  action  possesses  certain  advantages  and  disad- 
vantages. All  should  be  practiced  until  they  can  be  executed 
rapidly  and  quietly. 

Coupling  and  circling  place  more  men  on  the  firing  line  than 
dismounting  to  fight  on  foot,  but  the  latter  enables  half  of 
the  troopers  to  open  fire  immediately  (par.  435). 

Coupling  and  circling  render  the  horses  immobile,  while 
dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  leaves  them  very  mobile  until 
No.  2  dismounts  and  reasonably  mobile  as  long  as  No.  3  re- 
mains mounted ;  this  mobility,  however,  is  obtained  at  the  cost 
of  an  increased  number  of  men  withdrawn  from  the  firing  line. 

Coupling  usually  takes  less  time  to  effect  than  circling, 
the  horses  are  less  apt  to  give  trouble,  especially  in  case  one 
or  more  be  w^ounded  or  break  loose,  remounting  can  usually 
be  more  quickly  effected,  and  the  arrangement  is  well  suited 
to  opening  dismounted  fire  promptly  after  dismounting  from 
foragers,  each  pair  of  horses  remaining  under  cover  near  the 
corresponding  troopers.  Horses  in  couples  also  present  a 
poorer  target  to  an  enemy's  fire  than  when  in  a  larger  group 
and  are  more  easily  concealed  in  certain  kinds  of  cover.  A 
horse  that  is  left  coupled  for  some  time  is  apt  to  chew  the 
equipment  of  the  other  horse  of  the  pair. 

Circling  has  the  advantage  of  requiring  no  knowledge  of 
their  numbers  by  the  troopers.  It  can  be  executed,  therefore, 
by  a  group  that  has  just  rallied  or  that,  from  any  cause,  is 
not  in  order.  It  may  also,  in  small  groups,  be  executed  very 
quickly  if  one  of  the  troopers  take  the  reins  of  the  others,  the 
horses  not  being  tied  or  linked.  This  last  arrangement  also 
favors  rapid  remounting.  Circling  is  generally  the  least  safe 
of  the  three  methods  in  so  far  as  regards  the  danger  of  the 
horses  becoming  unmanageable.  It  is  frequently  convenient 
for  purposes  not  connected  with  combat  (e.  g.,  camping). 

Dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  permits  half  the  troopers  to 
open  fire  at  once  if  necessary ;  makes  it  practicable  quickly  to 
lead  the  horses  to  such  cover  as  may  be  available  in  the  imme- 
diate vicinity  or,  in  exceptional  cases,  to  distant  cover ;  per- 
mits the  location  of  the  horses  to  be  changed,  if  necessary, 
without  withdrawing  men  from  the  firing  line  for  that  pur- 


168  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

pose ;  permits  the  horses  to  be  subsequently  coupled,  circled, 
or  linked  in  fours,  thus  freeing  additional  men  for  the  firing 
line;  and  lends  itself  to  the  carrying  out  of  such  special  in- 
structions as  the  leader  may  see  fit  to  give  as  to  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  horses  and  horse  holders.  It  will  be  seen,  there- 
fore, that  dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  may  frequently  be  so 
applied  as  largely  to  combine  its  own  advantages  with  those 
of  the  other  methods. 

The  method  prescribed  in  par.  436  involves  merely  a  slight 
modification  of  pars.  430  and  431.  It  may  be  found  convenient 
for  use  in  connection  with  certain  special  dismounted  duties 
not  connected  with  combat. 

Remounting  After  Dismounted  Action. 

438.  The  squad  having  previously  dismounted  in  accordance 
with  pars.  427,  428,  430,  or  436,  the  leader  may  lead  the  squad 
in  the  most  convenient  manner  to  the  vicinity  of  the  led  horses ; 
or  he  may  cause  the  led  horses  (if  mobile)  to  be  brought  up 
to  the  dismounted  troopers  (par.  440)  ;  or  he  may  cause  the 
dismounted  squad  and  the  led  horses  to  move  toward  each 
other. 

439.  The  dismounted  troopers  being  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
led  horses,  the  squad  may  be  mounted  as  prescribed  in  par. 
355 ;  each  dismounted  trooper,  before  mounting,  uncrosses  his 
stirrup  and  takes  his  reins  from  the  horse  holder  or  unlinks. 

The  leader  may  command  :  STAND  TO  HORSE.  Each  trooper 
moves  quickly  but  quietly  to  his  horse,  takes  his  reins  or  un- 
links and  stands  to  horse.  The  squad  may  then  be  mounted  in 
the  usual  manner  (pars.  354,  355). 

440.  The  signal  prepare  to  mount,  given  when  the  dis- 
mounted troopers  are  not  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the 
horses,  is  an  indication  for  the  horses  to  be  brought  up.  The 
trooper  in  charge  habitually  leads  them  toward  the  leader  at 
a  trot,  but  takes  the  gallop  if  an  increased  gait  be  ordered  or 
if  the  occasion  seems  to  require  it.  The  command  mount  (par. 
439)  is  given  when  the  horses  are  near  the  dismounted 
troopers. 

441.  At  TO  HORSE  the  horses  are  brought  up  at  a  gallop. 
The  dismounted  troopers  are  led  rapidly  to  meet  the  horses, 
and  mount  as  quickly  as  possible. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  RECRUITS.  169 

442.  It  is  particularly  important  that  the  troopers  be  trained 
to  remount  from  either  side  of  the  horse  quickly,  without 
noise  or  confusion  and  without  unnecessarily  exciting  the 
horses.  Upon  mounting  the  troopers  look  at  once  toward  the 
leader  for  his  indication  of  the  movement  next  to  follow\ 

Obstacles   in  the  Lixb  of  March. 

443.  When  an  obstacle  which  interferes  with  only  a  few 
troopers  is  encountered  when  marching  in  line  or  foragers, 
the  troopers  whose  march  is  interfered  with  open  out  slightly, 
or  fall  back  without  command,  so  as  to  pass  the  obstacle  and 
then  resume  their  places.  When  an  obstacle  that  can  not  well 
be  avoided  is  encountered  by  the  head  of  a  column  the  ele- 
ments of  the  column  open  out  so  as  to  pass,  the  rear  elements 
conforming  to  the  movements  of  the  leading  element. 

If  there  appears  to  be  any  question  as  to  an  obstacle's  being 
noted  in  time  by  the  troopers  the  leader  should  indicate  the 
obstacle,  as  by  cautioning,  "  hole,"  "  wire,"  etc.,  anJI  pointing 
to  the  obstacle.  The  caution  is  similarly  passed  back  through 
the  column  by  the  Nos.  2.  When  marching  over  ground  where 
obstacles  are  liable  to  be  met  each  trooper  must  be  on  the 
alert  with  a  view  to  avoiding  injury  to  himself  or  his  mount. 

When  a  terrain  covered  with  obstacles  is  encountered  the 
squad  opens  out  and  alignment  is  no  longer  kept.  Each 
trooper  chooses  his  route,  glancing  frequently  toward  the 
leader,  who  continues  to  regulate  the  gait  and  direction. 

FURTHER  ELEMENTARY  INSTRUCTION  OF 
RECRUITS. 

444.  The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  mechanism  *  of 
platoon  drill  properly  pertains  to  and  completes  his  elementary 
collective  instruction  in  so  far  as  the  latter  is  conducted  on 
the  drill  ground.  For  reasons  connected  with  convenience  of 
arrangement  the  School  of  the  Platoon  follows  the  general  pro- 
visions relative  to  the  troop  (pars.  489-5CT).  The  corre- 
sponding instruction  of  the  recruit  should,  however,  be  com- 
pleted immediately  following  the  instruction  in  the  School  of 
the  Squad  end  may  be  begun  before  the ^  completion  of  the 


170  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

squad  instruction.  There  is  no  special  drill  prescribed  for  the 
section  (par.  491). 

445.  For  the  platoon  instruction  enough  recruit  squads  may 
be  united  to  make  a  provisional  platoon,  or  the  necessary 
additional  instructed  troopers  may  be  utilized  to  till  out  a 
platoon,  or  if  necessary  the  recruit's  instruction  may  be  given 
at  the  regular  drills  of  the  permanent  platoons.  This  last 
method  will  be  avoided  where  practicable. 

The  instructor  will  be  assisted  by  the  noncommissioned 
officers  or  instructed  troopers  needed  to  act  as  section  chiefs 
and  substitute  chiefs.  Provisional  sections  will  be  organized 
in  advance  of  the  drill  and  the  platoon  formed  and  drilled  as 
though  such  sections  were  permanent,  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  the  School  of  the  Platoon  (pars.  508-511). 


PART  III.— GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE 
DRILL. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

446.  The  following  principles,  taken  in  connection  with  pro- 
visions of  a  similar  general  character  contained  in  pars.  43-49 
and  322-339,  constitute  the  basis  of  the  system  of  drill  under 
these  regulations. 

The  following  paragraphs  are  particularly  important : 

Pars.  323  and  329,  with  reference  to  leading : 

Pars.  333  to  339,  with  reference  to  gaits ; 

Pars.  458  to  460,  regarding  the  base; 

Pars.  462  to  465,  regarding  commands ; 

Par.  470,  as  to  the  use  of  the  methods  of  the  squad ; 

Pars.  478  and  479,  regarding  movements  to  the  front  and 
flank; 

Pars.  480  and  481,  regarding  successive  formations. 

Familiarity  with  the  paragraphs  above  listed  will  be  a 
sufficient  guide  for  the  execution  of  the  more  essential  move- 
ments in  the  troop,  squadron,  and  regiment  once  the  names  of 
the  formations  and  positions  of  the  officers  are  learned. 

In  applying  the  general  principles  they  should  be  read  care- 
fully with  a  view  to  getting  a  good  general  idea  of  the  system 
which  they  outline.  As  practice  work  in  the  drill  progresses 
they  should  frequently  be  referred  to  and  any  doubtful  points 
cleared  up  from  time  to  time.  The  subheads  will  assist  in 
this  connection.  References  included  in  the  description  of  the 
various  movements  appearing  hereafter  in  the  text  should 
be  read  and  familiarity  thus  be  acquired  with  the  application 
of  the  principles. 

447.  All  bodiesi  of  troops  are  habitually  formed  in  single 
rank,  whether  for  mounted  or  dismounted  duty.  Provi- 
sion, however,  is  made  whereby  double  rank  may  be  formed 
from  certain  single  rank  formations  of  the  platoon  and  larger 

units. 

171 


172  CAVALRY   DRILL   REGULATIONS. 

LEADING. 

{See  pars.  323,  325,  471,  480.) 

448.  The  commander  of  a  squadron,  or  of  any  smaller  unit, 
habitually  leads  his  unit  in  person.  The  commander  of  a 
regiment  habitually  controls  his  unit  through  his  subordinate 
commanders,  but  may  lead  in  person.  The  commander  of  a 
unit  may  temporarily  leave  the  guidance  of  his  unit  to  a 
subordinate  (pars.  454-456),  thus  acquiring  the  freedom  of 
movement  needed  for  any  special  purpose. 

The  general  principle  of  leading,  as  above  stated,  is  sub- 
ject to  modification  in  extended-order  movements,  in  combat 
involving  fire  action,  in  dismounted  movements  in  general 
(par.  484),  and  in  certain  column  formations  where  there  is 
not  sufficient  space  in  the  column  to  permit  the  leaders  to 
take  their  customary  positions  (par.  451). 

449.  When  not  actually  leading,  a  commander  for  whom  an- 
other special  position  is  not  prescribed  moves  as  best  suited 
to  accomplish  the  purpose  in  view.  He  regulates  the  move- 
ments of  his  unit,  indicating  the  objective  to  the  leader  of  the 
base,  w^ho  causes  the  march  to  be  directed  accordingly.  In  a 
platoon  or  squad  the  leader  indicates  the  objective  to  the 
guide.  Should  a  leader  take  position  at  any  time  in  the  line 
he  becomes  the  actual  guide  of  his  unit  and  continues  so  until 
he  designates  another  guide. 

450.  The  position  of  the  leader  in  each  of  the  several  schools 
is  indicated  and  is  habitually  stated  as  so  many  yards  in 
front  of  the  corresponding  leader  (or  guide).  The  leader 
having  once  taken  his  position  as  such,  the  duty  of  main- 
taining the  trace  and  distance  rests  upon  the  base. 

451.  When  the  post  of  the  leader  of  any  unit  in  a  column 
formation  is  on  a  flank  of  the  column  (pars.  601-603)  the  base 
of  the  corresponding  unit  temporarily  conducts  the  march  of 
that  unit  in  the  column.  The  leader  on  the  flank  gives  any 
necessary  directions  to  the  base  (directing  guide)  at  the  head 
of  his  own  unit,  but  does  not  act  as  guide  of  his  unit.  He 
resumes  actual  leadership  as  soon  as  a  change  in  the  forma- 
tion permits. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES   OF  THE  DRILL.  173 

452.  When  the  leader  of  a  unit  marches  the  latter  by  fours 
to  a  flank  for  only  a  short  distance  he  need  not  move  to  his 
position  as  leader.  Others  out  of  rank  conform  to  the  leader's 
example  in  this  respect,  retaining  convenient  relative  positions 
pending  the  resumption  of  the  direct  march. 

453.  The  commander  of  a  squadron  or  higher  unit  may 
specifically  direct  the  leader  of  the  base  unit  (par.  324)  or 
other  subordinate  to  conduct  the  march,  or  he  may  instead 
designate  a  subordinate  to  assume  temporary  leadership. 

454.  Conducting:  the  march:  A  subordinate  v^^ho,  without 
being  assigned  as  temporary  leader  (par.  456)  is  instructed  by 
the  commander  to  conduct  the  march  exercises  no  other  func- 
tion of  command  as  a  result  of  such  assignment.  In  the 
absence  of  other  directions  from  the  commander  the  subordi- 
nate (directing  leader)  so  designated  maintains  the  existing 
direction  and  gait  of  march.  The  post  of  such  subordinate 
remains  unchanged  provided  (as  in  the  normal  case)  he  is 
already  the  leader  of  the  base;  if  other  than  such  leader  he 
takes  the  commander's  post  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  base, 
notifies  the  latter,  and  conducts  the  march,  the  leader  of  the 
base  conforming.  In  units  smaller  than  a  regiment  the  use  of 
a  subordinate  to  the  commander  to  conduct  the  march  is 
exceptional  at  drills  at  attention. 

455.  Should  a  change  of  formation  be  ordered  by  a  com- 
mander while  the  march  of  his  unit  is  being  conducted  by  a 
subordinate  not  specifically  assigned  as  a  temporary  leader, 
the  subordinate  who  is  conducting  the  march  moves  in  the 
direction  and  at  the  gait  indicated  by  the  principles,  of  the 
drill  and  the  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  usual 
methods. 

456.  Temporary  leader :  A  subordinate  who  is  directed  by  the 
commander  to  assume  temporary  leadership  of  a  unit  takes 
position  as  leader,  and  while  acting  as  leader  gives  the  neces- 
sary indication  for  any  movements  to  be  executed.  A  tem- 
porary leader  must  be  senior  to  all  whom  he  leads.  The 
commander  may  indicate  to  such  temporary  leader  the  move- 
ments to  be  executed,  or  he  may  leave  the  selection  of  such 
movements  to  the  temporary  leader.  For  instruction  the  as- 
signment of  a  temporary  leader  may  properly  be  utilized  as  a 
means  of  giving  subordinates  practice  in  th^  leading  of  a  unit 
greater  than  that  appropriate  to  their  respective  grades  and 


174  CAVALRY   DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

also  as  an  occasional  procedure  to  permit  the  commander  to 
supervise  more  satisfactorily  the  execution  of  movements  by 
his  unit. 

In  field  exercises  and  in  campaign  the  designation  of  a 
temporary  leader  may  frequently  become-  advisable  when  the 
commander  leaves  his  regular  position  for  reconnaissance  or 
other  similar  purpose. 

The  designation  of  a  temporary  leader  should,  to  avoid 
possible  confusion,  be  communicated  in  any  convenient  man- 
ner to  the  leader  of  the  base  and  similar  units  as  well  as  to  the 
designated  leader. 

The  temporary  leader  must  keep  in  constant  communication 
with  the  commander  (by  means  of  connecting  files  if  neces- 
sary), unless  the  commander  specifically  directs  otherwise. 

CENTER. 

457.  References  in  these  regulations  to  the  center  unit  of  a 
command  in  any  line  formation  will,  in  cases  where  the 
number  of  units  comprised  in  the  command  is  even,  be  under- 
stood as  applying  to  the  right  center  unit.  Thus,  in  a  troop 
comprised  of  but  two  platoons  the  center  platoon  in  line  is 
the  right  center  (right)  platoon. 

BASE. 

i8ee   pars,    326,   477,   478.) 

458.  The  base  of  a  squad  in  each  formation  is  explained  in 
pars.  371-377. 

The  base  of  a  platoon  in  any  line  formation  is  the  right 
section. 

The  base  of  a  troop  is  a  platoon;  of  a  squadron,  a  troop; 
of  a  regiment,  a  squadron.  Reference  to  the  base  in  connec- 
tion with  any  one  of  the  units  stated  is  to  be  understood 
accordingly,  unless  distinctly  otherwise  indicated. 

459.  In  any  line  formation  of  a  troop  or  larger  unit  the  cen- 
ter unit  (par.  457)  is  always  the  base  unless  some  other  unit 
be  specially  so  designated.  If  the  commander  take  position 
as  leader  in  front  of  any  unit  other  than  the  center  unit  he 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL  175 

thereby  indicates  such  other  unit  as  the  base.  When  not 
leading:  the  commander  may  designate  any  unit  of  a  line 
formation  as  the  base  by  cautioning:  SUCH  PLATOON  (TROOP, 
SaTJADRON)  THE  BASE. 

In  any  column  formation  the  leading  unit  is  always  the 
base. 

460.  In  movements  executed  toward  the  direction  of  march 
the  base  does  not  change  unless,  in  movements  from  line 
formations,  another  base  be  specifically  stated  in  the  com- 
mand. To  so  indicate  another  base  the  leader  prefixes  to  the 
preparatory  command  the  words:  On  (such  platoon,  troop, 
squadron). 

COMMANDS. 

(See  pars.    327,   471,   474,   475,   478,    479.) 

461.  When  not  otherwise  indicated,  the  commands  prescribed 
in  the  portion  of  the  drill  regulations  pertaining  to  each  unit 
are  those  of  the  commander  of  the  unit  in  question. 

When  commands,  duties,  etc.,  are  indicated  as  those  of 
the  colonel,  major,  or  captain,  etc.,  they  are  to  be  under- 
stood as  those  of  the  regimental,  squadron,  or  troop  com- 
mander, re.spectively.  The  units  may  actually  be  commanded 
by  officers  or  noncommissioned  officers  junior  or  senior  to  the 
grades  corresponding  to  the  command  thereof.  Officers  must 
be  practiced  frequently  in  commanding  a  unit  greater  than 
that  pertaining  to  their  grade. 

462.  In  all  movements  leaders  give  the  necessary  commands 
or  other  indications  to  insure  the  execution  by  their-  respec- 
tive units  at  the  proper  time  of  the  movements  necessary  to 
carry  out  the  will  of  the  commander.  Should  any  leader  not 
receive  or  fully  understand  a  command  or  signal  of  a  higher 
commander,  he  conforms  to  the  apparent  intent  of  the  com- 
mander. To  avoid  possible  uncertainty  as  to  their  meaning, 
commanders  endeavor  to  give  their  commands  and  signals 
exactly  as  prescribed,  and  in  all  exercises  whose  purpose  is 
instruction  they  exact  corresponding  accuracy  on  the  part 
of  subordinate  leaders. 

463.  Whenever  it  is  statetl  that  the  platoon  or  troop  may 
execute,  by  corresponding  commands,  the  movements  pre- 
scribed for  the  squad,  the  commands  as  gi^^n  in  the  School  of 


176  CAVALRY   DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

the  Squad  will  be  used,  except  that  the  appropriate  substitu- 
tion of  platoon  or  troop  for  squad  will  be  made. 

464.  In  giving  commands  a  leader  may,  whenever  necessary, 
prefix  the  same  by  the  designation  of  the  unit  that  is  to  exe- 
cute the  movement,  as  1.  First  Platoon,  forward,  2.  MARCH; 
1.  C  Troop,  fours  right,  2.  MARCH. 

465.  In  the  drill  of  the  platoon  and  higher  units  the  troopers 
execute  the  movements  in  compliance  with  the  immediate 
commands  or  other  indications  of  the  respective  platoon  lead- 
ers, supplemented  by  such  cautions  as  may  be  necessary  on 
the  part  of  the  file  closers  and  section  chiefs. 

466.  Except  when  a  specific  method  is  temporarily  pre- 
scribed for  instruction  purposes  commanders  are  ordinarily  al- 
lowed discretion  as  to  the  particular  one  of  the  authorized 
methods  (pars.  988-990)  or  particular  combination  of  those 
methods  that  may  be  employed  to  communicate  the  order  for  a 
movement.  The  test  of  efficiency  in  this  connection  is  prompt 
compliance  with  the  commander's  will,  accomplished  with  a 
minimum  of  noise. 

MOVEMENTS  IN  GENERAL. 

467.  The  drill  as  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon  and 
School  of  the  Troop  is  based  upon  the  assumption  that  the 
platoon  and  troop  are  subdivided  into  their  component  units 
(par.  491).  A  platoon  that  is  not  divided  into  sections  or  a 
troop  that  is  not  divided  into  platoons  can  be  maneuvered  only 
bv  the  commands  and  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  (par. 
470). 

The  drill  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  is  that  employed  in  the 
first  collective  instruction  of  recruits.  Its  movements  and 
those  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon  are  described  in  detail,  and 
are  intended  (with  the  exception  of  certain  movements  by 
twos  and  troopers — par.  331)  to  be  executed  with  the  pre- 
cision that  is  regarded  as  essential  for  the  trooper's  training. 
The  drill  as  it  progresses  through  the  Schools  of  the  Troop 
and  Squadron  becomes  more  and  more  an  exercise  in  the  prac- 
tical application  of  certain  underlying  i)rinciples  with  a  gradu- 
ally increasing  responsibility  placed  upon  the  leaders  of  com- 
ponent units. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  177 

After  proficiency  has  been  acquired  in  executing  the  move- 
ments as  prescribed,  leaders  may,  in  the  discretion  of  the 
commander,  be  given,  in  the  selection  of  methods,  a  latitude 
that  increases  with  the  size  of  their  respective  units. 

The  methods  indicated  for  the  regiment  involve  merely  the 
further  application  of  principles  with  which  the  leaders 
should  become  thoroughly  familiar  in  the  course  of  troop  and 
squadron  drill.  They  constitute  a  general  guide  for  such 
changes  of  formation  as  the  regiment  as  a  whole  may  execute ; 
but  the  majors  should  be  permitted  in  the  details  of  maneuver- 
ing their  squadrons  as  wide  a  latitude  as  may  be  exercised 
without  interference  with  other  units. 

468.  The  drill  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  comprises  move- 
ments of  two  general  classes : 

(a)  Those  which,  in  addition  to  their  use  in  the  squad,  are 
frequently  employed  as  regular  maneuver  movements  in  the 
platoon  and  higher  units.  This  class  includes  such  movements 
as  the  ordinary  marchings,  fours  right  (left),  right  (left) 
turn,  etc.  Movements  of  this  class  are  of  general  application 
throughout  the  several  schools,  subject  to  such  modification  as 
may  be  specially  noted. 

(&)  Those  whose  primary  purpose  is  the  instruction  of  the 
recruit  in  the  mechanism  of  the  movements  upon  which  the 
habitual  drill  of  the  platoon  and  higher  units  is  based.  The 
corresponding  movements  in  the  higher  units  are  habitually 
executed  by  different  commands  and  differ  in  the  details  of 
execution. 

469.  The  execution  of  movements  of  the  class  referred  to  in 
par.  468-6  is  ordinarily  restricted  to  detachments  smaller  than 
a  platoon,  though  applicable  to  larger  bodies  for  which  no 
special  drill  is  prescribed.  It  is  practicable  for  a  platoon  or 
troop  to  execute,  at  the  command  corresponding  to  that  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  any  movement  referred  to 
in  par.  468-&;  and,  in  emergencies,  it  may  at  times  be  neces- 
sary temporarily  to  employ  such  movements  in  maneuvering 
a  platoon  or  troop  that  has  not  been  subdivided  in  the  usual 
manner  or  that,  although  originally  so  subdivided,  has  subse- 
quently suffered  a  loss  of  order.  These  movements  may  also 
properly  be  used  in  the  platoon  or  troop  for  marchings  con- 
nected with  such  routine  duties  of  camp -or  garrison  as  call 
for  no  observance  of  a  division  into  subunits. 

38218  °— 18 12 


178  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

470.  In  all  movements,  however,  connected  with  the  tactical 
employment  of  a  platoon  or  troop  the  commands  and  methods 
prescribed  for  the  squad  should  be  used  only  for  those  move- 
ments for  which  no  corresponding  provision  is  made  in  the 
platoon  or  troop  drill.  The  corresponding  platoon  and  troop 
movements  are  better  adapted  to  the  purposes  of  the  larger 
units ;  and  if  a  platoon  or  troop,  subdivided  in  the  usual  man- 
ner, executes  by  the  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad,  move- 
ments involving  the  use  of  twos  or  troopers,  loss  of  order  is  apt 
to  result.  In  the  description,  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  of 
each  movement  of  the  class  referred  to  in  par.  468-?>,  a  refer- 
ence to  that  paragraph  will  be  found. 

CHANGES  OF  DIRECTION. 

471.  When  a  change  of  direction  of  any  unit  in  line  or 
column  is  commanded  by  a  higher  commander,  the  latter  gives 
his  command  of  execution  at  the  moment  when  the  leader 
of  the  subordinate  unit  is  to  begin  the  turn  (par.  386).  When 
the  higher  commander  is  to  continue  to  lead  his  command 
throughout  the  change  of  direction,  the  command  of  execution 
must  be  given  at  the  instant  the  subordinate  leader  (or  guide) 
reaches  the  point  where  the  commander  began  his  own  change 
of  direction  (par.  329). 

MOVEMENTS  IN  COLUMN  OF  TWOS  AND  TROOPERS. 

472.  The  drill  of  the  squad  could  be  much  simplified  were  it 
practicable  to  confine  its  close  order  formations  to  line  and 
column  of  fours,  and,  under  favorable  conditions,  this  may  ba 
done. 

Special  conditions,  however,  such  as  narrow  roads  or  trails 
or  difficult  ground,  frequently  render  impracticable  the  use  of 
any  march  formation  other  than  column  of  twos  or  column  of 
troopers;  and  these  last  formations  are  also  convenient  in  con- 
nection with  various  routine  duties  of  garrison  and  field  serv- 
ice. Cavalry  will  often  have  to  march  in  column  of  twos  or 
troopers  and  under  conditions  where  promptness  of  action  will 
be  of  vital  importance.  These  formations  should  therefore 
frequently  be  employed  during  instruction,  preferably  at  field 
exercises,  rather  than  at  formal  drill  (par.  331). 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  179 

EXTENDED  ORDER  MOVEMENTS. 

473.  A  body  of  troops  in  extended  order  must  be  assembled 
or  rallied  in  order  to  pass  to  close  order. 

The  assembly  of  any  unit  is,  in  the  absence  of  other  indica- 
tions, executed  in  the  same  formation  in  which  the  unit  habitu- 
ally forms;  that  is,  for  a  squad  (or  a  section  acting  alone), 
in  line;  for  a  platoon,  in  double  column;  for  a  troop,  in  line 
of  double  columns;  for  a  squadron,  in  mass;  for  a  regiment,  in 
line  of  masses. 

Provision  is  made  in  these  regulations  for  the  execution  of 
the  assembly  in  other  than  the  usual  formation.  In  such  cases 
the  desired  formation  is  specially  indicated. 

474.  When  the  halt  is  ordered  while  marching  to  the  rear  in 
extended  order  all  face  to  the  front,  the  commander  of  each 
group  then  in  close  order  giving  the  necessary  commands. 
Foragers  turn  about  individually.    All  turn  to  the  left  about. 

SIMULTANEOUS  MOVEMENTS  BY  PLATOONS, 
TROOPS,  AND   SQUADRONS. 

475.  The  captain  may  cause  the  platoons  of  the  troop  to 
execute  simultaneously  movements  not  otherwise  provided  for. 
In  such  cases  the  word  platoons  is  prefixed  to  the  usual  prepar- 
atory command,  thus :  1.  Platoons,  column  right,  2.  MARCH. 
A  corresponding  principle  is  applicable  to  troops  in  a  squadron 
and  to  squadrons  in  a  regiment. 

EXCEPTIONAL  MOVEMENTS. 

476.  Whenever  as  the  result  of  the  execution  of  any  move- 
ment in  the  troop,  squadron,  or  regiment  (e.  g.,  fours  right 
from  mass)  there  results  a  formation  not  habitually  used  for 
drill  or  maneuver  (e.  g.,  close  column  of  troops,  resulting  from 
the  above  example),  an  habitual  formation  is  usually  resumed 
by  a  corresponding  movement  (e.  .g.,  in  above  case,  by  fours 
left ) .  Any  emergency  movement  that  may  be  ordered  while  a 
command  is  in  an  unusual  formation  of  such  character  will 
be  executed  in  accordance  with  the  general  principles  of 
tJie  drill. 


180  CAVALIvY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

CHA^^GES  OF  FORMATION. 

477.  Changes  of  formation  are  usually  executed  (par.  460) 
so  as  to  involve  no  change  in  the  base.  The  commander  then 
maintains,  through  leading,  complete  and  uninterrupted  con- 
trol of  the  direction  and  gait.  By  leading  the  base  toward 
any  direction,  the  commander  may  execute  a  desired  change 
of  formation  toward  that  direction  as  in  par.  481-c.  Should 
space  and  time  not  permit  this,  essential  formations  may  be 
taken  directly  to  a  flank  (par.  479). 

478.  With  certain  exceptions,  noted  where  they  occur  in  the 
text,  any  formation  (close  or  extended  order),  prescribed  for 
a  platoon  or  higher  unit,  may  be  taken  toward  the  direction 
of  march  directly  from  any  other  close-order  formation  pre- 
scribed for  the  same  unit.  The  preparatory  command  for 
every  such  movement  for  which  no  special  base  is  designated 
consists  simply  of  the  name  of  the  formation  to  ivhich  it  is 
desired  to  pass;  the  corresponding  command  of  execution  is 
always:  MARCH;  for  example,  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH;  1.  Col- 
umn of  platoons,  2.  MARCH.  When  column  of  fours  is  the 
desired  formation  the  preparatory  command  is  abbreviated 
to  column,  thus:  1.  Column,  2.  MARCH.  If  the  commander 
desires  to  designate  a  unit  other  than  the  base  as  the  one 
upon  which  the  movement  is  to  be  regulated,  the  preparatory 
command,  as  stated  above,  must  be  preceded  by  the  corre- 
sponding designation  of  the  special  base,  thus:  1.  On  fourth 
platoon,  column;  2.  MARCH. 

479.  Provision  is  made  in  these  regulations  for  forming  line 
directly  to  a  flank  from  column  formations,  for  forming  column 
directly  to  a  flank  from  line  formations  to  meet  conditions  when 
the  corresponding  formation  of  line  or  column  toward  the  di- 
rection of  march  would  not  be  suited  to  the  purpose  in  view. 
Changes  of  formation  thus  made  directly  to  a  flank  are  exe- 
cuted at  special  commands  not  based  upon  the  principle  stated 
in  par.  477,  as :  1.  Fours  right,  2.  MARCH. 

SUCCESSIVE  FORMATIONS  (Def.). 

480.  In  successive  formations  of  the  troop  each  platoon  is 
habitually  led  to  its  place  by  the  shortest  route  and  simplest 
methods  consistent  with  an  orderly  execution  of  the  movement. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES   OF  THE  DRILL.  181 

The  same  principle  regulates  the  movements  of  troops  in  the 
squadron,  and  of  squadrons  in  the  regiment.  The  principle  is 
modified  in  the  drill  of  the  squad  and  of  the  platoon  to  the 
extent  that  the  elements  of  those  units  are  not  actually  led^ 
but  conform  to  the  movements  of  a  guide  in  the  ranks  (par. 
326).  Certain  general  principles  are  prescribed  for  the  guid- 
ance of  leaders  in  conducting  their  units  into  positions  in  suc- 
cessive formations  (par.  481).  These  provisions  are  supple- 
mented, where  necessary,  by  more  detailed  provisions  included 
in  the  paragraphs  describing  the  various  movements.  When- 
ever specific  routes  or  methods  are  indicated,  it  is  vv^ith  a 
vievv^  to  that  degree  of  uniformity  which  is  considered  neces- 
sary to  insure  that  the  units  do  not  interfere  with  one  an- 
other's movements. 

481.  (a)  The  rules  stated  below  are  of  general  application 
to  the  drill  of  troop,  squadron,  and  regiment.  For  simplicity 
they  are  stated  only  for  the  troop.  The  corresponding  rules 
may  be  obtained  for  the  squadron  by  substituting  squadron 
for  troop  and  troop  for  platoon,  and,  for  the  regiment,  by  sub- 
stituting regiment  for  troop  and  squadron  for  platoon. 

(&)  Successive  formations  are  always  executed  toward  the 
direction  of  march.  The  direction  and  gait  of  the  base 
platoon  are  controlled  by  the  commander  (pars.  323,  477). 
The  other  platoons  are  habitually  led  to  their  new  positions 
by  changes  of  direction.  When,  however,  restricted  space 
or  other  special  conditions  make  it  necessary,  other  methods 
may  also  be  employed  (e.  g.,  an  oblique  or  movement  to  a 
flank  by  fours).  In  the  regiment  much  latitude  is  allowed 
squadron  commanders  in  maneuvering  their  squadrons. 

(c)  If  it  is  desired  to  have  the  new  formation  face  wholly 
or  partially  to  a  flank  a  change  of  direction  to  the  desired 
degree  is  made  either  before  the  movement  is  ordered,  or 
shortly  after,  and  during  an  early  stage  of  its  execution 
(par.  477).  In  the  case  of  a  deployment  the  head  of  the 
column  is  faced  in  the  required  direction  before  the  movement 
is  ordered.  In  the  case  of  a  ployment  the  head  of  the 
column  is  caused  to  face  in  required  direction  as  soon  as  the 
base  platoon  has  formed  column. 

(d)  In  successive  formations  from  line  into  column  the  base 
platoon  is  followed  immediately  by  the  "platoon  next  on  its 
left,  then  by  the  one  next  on  its  right,  and  so  on,  the  platoons 


182  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

being  taken  alternately  from  the  left  and  right  of  the  base. 
If:  there  be  no  platoon  on  one  side  of  the  base,  or  if  any  platoon 
originally  on  that  side  has  moved  to  enter  the  column,  platoons 
that  remain  on  the  other  side  of  the  base  enter  the  column  in 
the  order  of  their  nearness  to  the  latter. 

Thus,  in  a  troop  of  four  platoons,  if  the  column  be  formed 
on  the  second  platoon  in  line  as  the  base — 

The  third  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  second  platoon  in 
column ; 

The  first  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  third  platoon  in 
column  ; 

The  fourth  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  fourth  platoon  in 
column. 

Or,  if  column  be  formed  on  the  third  platoon  in  line  as  the 
base — 

The  fourth  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  second  platoon  in 
column  ; 

The  second  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  third  platoon  in 
column ; 

The  first  platoon  in  line  becomes  the  fourth  platoon  in 
column. 

Par.  469  covers  certain  exceptional  cases. 

(e)  In  formations  from  column  into  line  the  deployment  is 
fan-wise.  The  platoon  immediately  in  rear  of  the  base 
platoon  of  the  movement  takes  position  on  the  left  of  the 
latter ;  the  platoon  next  in  rear  takes  position  on  the  right  of 
the  base;  and  so  on  alternately  to  the  left  and  right. 

Should  any  reason  (such  as  lack  of  space)  prevent  a  unit 
in  rear  from  taking  its  proper  place  on  the  line  it  is  held  by 
its  leader  in  rear  of  the  line  in  readiness  to  take  its  position 
as  soon  as  conditions  permit,  or  to  act  as  special  instructions 
or  the  circumstances  of  the  case  may  require. 

Par.  469  covers  certain  exceptional  cases. 

(/)  The  change  of  formation  for  the  troop  may  also  involve 
a  change  in  the  formation  of  each  platoon  as  well  as  a  change 
in  the  position  of  the  latter.  For  example,  if  the  troop  in 
column  of  platoons  (par.  584-(Z)  forms  line  of  platoon  columns 
(par.  622-6)  each  platoon  nuist  not  only  be  led  to  its  new 
place  but  must  change  its  formation  from  line  to  column  of 
fours  on  the  way. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  183 

(g)  In  cases  under  (/)  the  base  platoon,  if  it  has  tl^e 
necessary  space  when  the  movement  is  commanded,  takes 
the  new  formation  at  the  command  of  execution,  otherwise  it 
takes  the  new  formation  as  soon  as  the  necessary  space  is 
gained. 

The  time  at  which  each  of  the  other  platoons  changes  for- 
mation is  determined  by  the  nature  of  ihe  change.  As  column 
formations  are  habitually  preferable  to  line  formations  for 
purposes  of  evolutions,  if  the  movement  requires  a  reduction 
in  the  front  of  the  platoon  (as  from  line  to  column),  the 
change  is  made  when  the  platoon  begins  to  execute  the  move- 
ment.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  an  increase  in  the  front  of  the 
platoon  is  involved  (as  from  column  to  line),  the  change  is 
delayed  as  long  as  practicable  subject  to  the  requirement  that 
it  must  be  completed  before  the  platoon  takes  its  place  in  the 
n^iv  formation  (par.  331). 

{h)   Gaits  are  regulated  as  indicated  in  pars.  333-337. 

In  movements  involving  a  change  of  formation  from  column 
to  line  in  the  platoons,  the  rear  elements  of  the  latter  will 
habitually  have  to  make  a  second  increase  of  gait  while  form- 
ing line.    This  same  principle  applies  throughout. 

MOVEMENTS  ON  FOOT. 

482.  The  platoon  and  troop  dismounted  may,  when  neces- 
sary, execute  the  close-order  movements  prescribed  for  the 
mounted  drill,  with  the  modifications  incident  to  dismounted 
movements  as  indicated  in  the  School  of  the  Troopier,  Dis- 
mounted; and  School  of  the  Squad.  The  habitual  execution  of 
such  dismounted  movements  as  features  of  precise  and  formal 
drill  is  not  contemplated. 

483.  The  platoon  and  troop,  dismounted,  execute  extended- 
order  movements  by  the  commands  and  methods  prescribed 
for  the  mounted  troop  subject  to  the  modifications  incident  to 
dismounted  movements. 

484.  In  applying  to  dismounted  movements  the  principles  of 
leading  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  use  of  a  subordi- 
nate to  conduct  the  march  is  properly  more  frequent  in  dis- 
mounted than  in  mounted  movements.  Dismounted  combat 
usually  involves  fire  action,  made  effective  by  a  line  of  rifle- 


184  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

men  systematically  fed  from  the  rear  with  men  and  ammu- 
nition. Such  conditions  are  necessarily  inconsistent  with  the 
exercise  of  physical  leadership  by  a  commander  posted  in  front 
,of  his  unit,  except  during  the  advance  prior  to  opening  fire 
and  during  such  advances  as  are  made  while  fire  is  locally  sus- 
pended. The  slower  speed  of  dismounted  movements  and  the 
reduced  importance  of  gaits  as  a  factor  in  their  execution  also 
affect  the  extent  to  which  physical  leadership  is  essential  in 
dismounted  work.  In  marching  dismounted,  incident  to  the 
performance  of  ordinary  routine  duties  of  camp  and  garrison 
(e.  g.,  in  marching  from  the  quarters  to  the  stables),  the  officer 
or  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  may  properly  relinquish 
actual  leadership,  leaving  to  the  directing  leader  or  guide 
(Def.)  the  conduct  of  the  march  (par.  324). 

ORDER. 

485.  The  conditions  essential  to  order  in  the  squad  and 
platoon  are  explained  in  pars.  370  and  515,  respectively.  In 
the  troop  and  larger  units  the  general  rule  applies  that  a  unit 
is  in  order  when  its  component  elements  are  united  in  any 
formation  prescribed  for  the  unit  in  question  and  each  element 
is  in  order.  Thus,  a  troop  is  in  order  when  its  platoons  are 
united  in  any  troop  formation  and  each  platoon  is  in  order. 
Any  body  of  troops  that  is  temporarily  being  maneuvered  by 
commands  and  methods  corresponding  to  those  prescribed  for 
the  squad  is,  for  such  movements,  in  order  when  it  fulfills  that 
requirement  for  order  in  the  squad.  Any  movement  that 
results  in  a  loss  of  order  should  ordinarily  be  followed  by  the 
assembly  at  the  earliest  practicable  moment. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

486.  In  turning  about,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  officers 
and  men  turn  to  the  left  about  when  mounted  and  to  the 
right  about  when  dismounted. 

487.  Officers,  and  noncommissioned  officers  acting  as  platoon 
leaders,  draw  and  return  saber  with  the  superior  commander. 

In  all  formations  and  movements  a  noncommissioned  officer 
commanding  a  platoon  or  troop  carries  his  rifle  as  the  men  do. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  DRILL.  185 

488.  The  guidon  is  not  habitually  carried  at  drill.  The  cap- 
tain will  cause  it  to  be  carried  sufficiently  often  to  familiarize 
the  guidon  sergeant  with  his  duties.  At  squadron  or  regi- 
mental drill  the  guidon  is  not  carried  unless  directed,  respec- 
tively, by  the  major  or  colonel.  The  guidon  is  always  carried 
at  ceremonies  and  is  also  carried  on  occasions  of  a  cere- 
monial nature  when  the  commander  so  directs.  It  is  carried 
in  campaign  and  on  the  march,  but  is  cased  or  furled  when- 
ever it  might  give  information  of  value  to  an  enemy.  The 
guidon  when  carried  is  borne  by  a  noncommissioned  officer, 
usually  a  sergeant,  selected  with  regard  to  his  possible  duties 
as  in  charge  of  the  led  horses  of  the  troop  (par.  648). 


PART  IV.— THE  TROOP  AND  ITS  SUB- 
DIVISIONS. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

*  e 

■489.  The  troop  is  divided  by  the  captain  into  permanent 
platoons,  eacli  under  a  permanently  assigned  leader.  The 
latter  is  a  lieutenant  when  practicable;  otherwise  a  sergeant. 
Each  platoon  is  divided  into  two  sections. 

490.  The  first  sergeant  is  not  ordinarily  assigned  to  the  com- 
mand of  a  platoon.  He  performs  the  special  duties  incident 
to  his  position,  acts  as  the  general  assistant  to  the  captain 
in  coordinating  the  duties  of  the  other  noncommissioned 
officers,  and  sees  that  platoon  leaders  who  may  be  absent  or 
disabled  are  promptly  replaced  by  their  proper  successors. 

The  supply  sergeant,  mess  sergeant,  and  troopers  o^  special 
grades  perform,  in  addition  to  their  special  functions,  such 
duties  as  the  captain  may  direct. 

491.  The  number  of  platoons  is  dependent  upon  the  size  of 
the  troop  and  the  capacity  of  the  available  leaders.  Ordi- 
narily the  troop  is  divided  into  three  or  four  platoons,  each 
having  a  leader,  a  file  closer,  and  a  rank  composed  of  two  sec- 
tions. The  drill  is  equally  applicable  to  any  number  of  pla- 
toons. It  is  possible  to  conduct  a  complete  troop  drill  with 
but  two  platoons,  each  having  two  sections,  consisting  of  a 
single  four  each  (par.  500). 

492.  The  noncommissioned  officer  next  in  rank  to  the  platoon 
leader  is  designated  as  the  file  closer  of  the  platoon.  He 
assists  the  platoon  leader  by  supervising  the  execution  of  the 
movements,  maintains  discipline,  endeavors  to  prevent  mis- 
takes by  anticipating  them  and  cautioning  those  concerned, 
and  holds  himself  in  constant  readiness  to  replace  the  leader 
without  delay  should  the  latter  be  absent  or  disabled.  When 
taking  position  as  leader  in  such  a  case,  he  designates  the 
next  senior  noncommissioned  officer  as  file  closer,  makes  the 
corresponding  designation  of  a  section  chief,  and  causes  any 
necessary  changes  in  position  to  be  made. 

186 


THE  TROOP  AND  ITS  SUBDIVISIONS.  187 

493.  The  section  consists  of  a  section  chief,  a  substitute 
chief,  and  habitually  not  less  than  6  nor  more  than  14  other 
troopers,  depending  upon  the  strength  of  the  platoon.  The 
chief  is  a  sergeant  where  one  is  available ;  otherwise  a  cor- 
poral. The  substitute  chief  is  a  noncommissioned  officer  if 
one  be  available;  otherwise  a  selected  trooper.  He  is  the 
assistant  of  the  section  chief  when  the^  latter  is  present  and 
the  substitute  when  absent.  When  acting  as  chief,  he  desig- 
nates a  new  substitute  chief,  unless  one  has  previously  been 
designated  by  higher  authority. 

494.  The  section  is  the  smallest  fixed  unit  of  cavalry;  that 
is,  the  smallest  unit  for  which  the  effort  is  made  to  maintain, 
as  far  as  conditions  permit,  a  permanent  personnel. 

When  the  platoon  is  at  or  near  full  strength,  each  section 
may  be  divided  into  two  squads,  each  consisting  of  not  to 
exceed  two  sets  of  fours.  In  any  case  that  might  require 
these  squads  to  be  employed  under  separate  leaders  the  sec- 
tion chief  would  lead  the  squad  in  which  posted  and  the  sub- 
stitute chief  would  lead  the  other.  Such  a  subdivision  of  the 
section,  if  made,  does  not  affect  the  execution  of  any  of  the 
regular  drill  movements ;  but  it  may  be  found  useful  for 
special  purposes,  particularly  in  a  platoon  that  is  operating 
separately  from  its  troop. 

495.  The  efficiency  of  troops  in  essential  matters  will  be 
measured  largely  by  the  extent  to  w^hich  platoon  leaders 
and  section  chiefs  are  trained  and  developed.  They  must  be 
made  to  realize  that  their  responsibilities  do  not  cease  with 
the  mere  tactical  handling  of  their  respective  units,  but  in- 
clude making  themselves  effective  assistants  to  their  superiors 
in  matters  of  discipline,  instruction,  and  the  systematic  carry- 
ing out  of  the  details  of  interior  troop  administration.  Sub- 
ordinate leaders  should  as  a  rule  be  intrusted  with  responsi- 
bility to  the  full  extent  of  their  capacity  for  efficient  per- 
formance. 

Every  effort  must  be  made  to  maintain  the  permanency  of 
the  subdivision  into  platoons  and  sections,  additional  men 
being  regularly  assigned  to  such  units  vrhen  necessary  with 
a  view  to  replacing  absentees  at  drills  and  exercises.  No 
attempt  will  be  made  to  assign  fixed  places  in  the  rank  of  the 
section  to  individual  troopers.  The  important  point  in  this 
connection  is  that  the  section  as  such  shall  be  kept  intact  as 


188  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

far  as  practicable,  and  that  the  responsibility  of  its  chief 
shall  be  habitually  exercised  over  the  same  men,  thus  tending 
to  mutual  confidence  and  understanding. 

496.  Should  conditions  render  the  maintenance  of  permanent 
sections  impracticable,  the  platoons  must  be  maintained  as 
permanent  units  as  long  as  possible,  a  temporary  division  of 
each  platoon  into  sections  being  then  effected  at  every  forma- 
tion for  duty  that  requires  such  a  division  (par.  500). 

In  order  to  maintain  permanent  units  within  the  troop,  de- 
pleted sections  and  platoons  will  be  combined  and  new  assign- 
ments made  when  necessary.  When  at  any  formation  a 
platoon  or  section  is  depleted  below  the  usual  minimum 
strength  it  is  ordinarily  broken  up  and  its  members  tem- 
porarily assigned  to  places  in  other  similar  units. 

Adjustments  in  Platoons  and  Sections. 

497.  To  avoid  multiplying  incomplete  fours  in  the  troop,  sec- 
tions are  habitually  adjusted  at  platoon  formations  as  indi- 
cated in  par.  522. 

The  question  as  to  whether  adjustments  will  be  made  at 
formations  between  platoons  of  the  troop  to  equalize  strength 
or  to  minimize  the  number  of  incomplete  fours  in  the  troop 
(otherwise  than  as  indicated  in  par.  779  or  regulated  by  order 
from  higher  authority)  rests  in  the  discretion  of  the  troop 
commander.  Except  at  ceremonies,  there  is  no  reason  why  the 
platoons  should  be  of  equal  strength  (par.  491).  Incomplete 
fours  in  the  troop  tend  to  lengthen  the  march  column  and  to 
reduce  the  proportion  of  men  available  for  the  dismounted 
firing  line.  On  the  other  hand,  where  platoons  are  apt  to  be 
separated  for  some  time,  due  to  incidents  of  service,  it  may 
be  desirable  to  keep  the  personnel  of  each  wholly  intact,  even 
if  incomplete  fours  or  extra  file  closers  in  the  troop  result. 

Designation   of  Platoons   and   Sections. 

498.  The  permanent  platoons  of  the  troop  are  given  numeri- 
cal designations,  as  First  Platoon,  etc.  These  fix  the  relative 
positions  of  the  permanent  platoons  in  the  original  formation 
of  the  troop  for  any  duty,  but  are  not  subsequently  employed 
in  drill  or  maneuver. 


FORMING  THE  TROOP.  189 

The  troop  having  been  formed  as  prescribed,  in  whatever 
formation  it  may  be  at  any  particular  moment  thereafter,  the 
platoons  are  given,  for  the  purposes  of  drill  and  maneuver, 
numerical  designations  (First  Platoon,  Third  Platoon,  etc.), 
based  upon  the  order,  from  right  to  left,  of  their  respective 
temporary  positions  in  line,  or  from  head  to  rear  in  column. 
In  exercises  other  than  formal  drill  a  platoon  may  be  desig- 
nated by  the  name  of  its  leader,  as:  Lieutenant  So-and-so's 
Platoon.  This  latter  method  of  designation  is  necessarily  em- 
ployed when,  due  to  any  disposition  of  the  platoons  other  than 
in  a  distinct  line  or  column  formation,  possible  doubt  may 
exist  as  to  their  respective  temporary  numerical  designations. 

Sections  are  given  similar  permanent  numerical  designa- 
tions in  the  troop,  as  First  Section,  Fifth  Section,  etc.  These 
fix  their  relative  positions  at  the  original  formations  of  their 
respective  platoons.  After  the  platoon  is  once  formed  no  fur- 
ther attention  is  paid  to  such  permanent  designations,  the 
sections  being  designated,  if  necessary,  as  right  (leading)  or 
left  (rear)  section,  (such)  platoon. 

FOEMATIOX. 

499.  The  formation  and  drill  of  the  platoon  and  troop  are 
explained  upon  the  assumption  that  the  division  into  perma- 
nent subordinate  units  is  maintained.  A  platoon  that  is  not 
divided  into  sections,  or  a  troop  that  is  not  divided  into  pla- 
toons, can  be  maneuvered  only  by  commands  and  methods 
corresponding  to  those  prescribed  for  the  squad  (par.  469). 
When  no  prior  division  into  permanent  subordinate  units  ex- 
ists a  platoon  or  troop  may  originally  be  formed  only  by  com- 
mands and  methods  corresponding  to  those  prescribed  for  the 
squad.  A  temporary  subdivision  may  then  be  made  at  the 
formation  (pars.  501,  502). 

A  section  has  no  special  formation  or  drill  of  its  own.  It 
may  be  formed  and  maneuvered  as  a  separate  unit  by  com- 
mands and  methods  corresponding  to  those  employed  in  the 
squad  (par.  463). 

500.  When  less  than  32  troopers  are  present  and  available 
for  the  rank  of  the  troop  at  any  duty  the  division  into  platoons 
may  be  omitted. 


190  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Platoons  are  habitually  limited  to  not  more  than  32  nor  less 
than  16  men  (in  the  rank).  Smaller  platoons  may  be  em- 
ployed when  the  depleted  condition  of  the  troop  or  other  spe- 
cial conditions  render  their  use  advisable. 

If  a  division  into  platoons  be  not  made,  the  troop,  at  the 
duties  listed  in  par.  501,  is  maneuvered  as  a  single  platoon 
under  command  of  the  captain,  but  regains  its  designation  as  a 
troop.  Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  are  assigned  to 
duties  as  the  captain  may  direct. 

501.  At  formations  for  field  service,  marches,  drills,  inspec- 
tions, and  ceremonies  the  formation  of  a  platoon  or  troop  is 
based  upon  the  corresponding  subdivision  into  permanent  units 
if  such  division  exist  (par.  489).  If  such  division  can  not  be 
maintained,  the  formation  is  conducted  by  commands  and 
methods  corresponding  to  those  of  the  squad,  a  temporary 
subdivision  being  made  at  tiie  formation. 

502.  For  duties  of  a  character  not  covered  by  par.  501 
formations  may  be  conducted  in  accordance  with  any  of  the 
authorized  methods.  If  the  method  prescribed  for  the  squad 
be  used,  the  division  into  subordinate  units  may  be  made  or 
omitted  in  the  discretion  of  the  commander. 

503.  The  original  dismounted  assembly  for  mounted  forma- 
tions is  made  at  either  the  barracks  or  stables.  The  verifica- 
tion for  mounted  formation  is  habitually  made  at  the  stables. 

The  dismounted  troop  being  at  the  stables  or  picket  line,  the 
noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  commands :  SADDLE  AND 
PREPARE  TO  LEAD  OUT.  The  saddling  must  be  done  quickly 
and  quietly  and  the  formation  completed  without  unnecessary 
loss  of  time. 

504.  Whenever  a  platoon  or  troop  is  formed,  in  accordance 
with  the  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  for  a  duty  of  the 
kind  listed  In  par.  501,  noncommissioned  officers  should,  if 
practicable,  be  assigned  to  duties  in  advance  of  the  formation 
w  itli  a  view  to  taking  their  proper  positions  on  leading  out  as 
nearly  as  this  can  be  done.  Noncommissioned  officers  not  so 
assigned  take  position,  temporarily,  in  line  3  yards  in  rear  of 
the  right  of  the  rank  and  in  order  of  rnnk  from  right  to  left. 
In  column  they  take  position  one  behind  another,  1  yard  to 
the  right  of  the  column,  in  order  of  rank  from  front  to  rear, 
w^itli  the  leading  noncommissioned  officer  abreast  of  the  head 


FORMING  THE  TROOP.  191 

of  the  column.  Any  such  noncommissioned  officer  who  may 
not  be  assigned  to  special  duties  during  the  formation  takes 
position  as  an  extra  file  closer  as  soon  as  the  formation  is 
completed. 

Verification. 

505.  Any  unit  or  detachment  of  a  troop  formed  for  duty  is, 
in  the  absence  of  instructions  to  the  contrary,  verified  by  the 
noncommissioned  officer  or  trooper  who  conducts  the  forma- 
tion and  a  report  of  the  result  of  such  verification  is  made. 
When  not  otherwise  prescribed  the  report  is  made  to  the  first 
sergeant  who  reports  all  absentees  frora  any  duty  to  the  troop 
commander.  All  absentees  reported  to  a  commissioned  officer 
in  charge  of  a  platoon  will  be  reported  by  such  oflicer  to  the 
troop  commander.  At  formations  of  the  troop,  based  upon  a 
prior  division  into  platoons,  each  platoon  is  habitually  verified 
by  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  for  duty  with  it  (leader 
or  file  closer).  The  captain  may  direct  that  the  verification 
be  made  by  the  first  sergeant,  but  when  the  troop  is  formed 
without  reference  to  a  prior  division  into  platoons,  the  verifi- 
cation is  made  by  the  first  sergeant. 

When  a  unit  armed  with  the  rifle  is  verified  at  a  dismounted 
formation,  rifles  are  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  immediately 
after  inspection  arms  is  executed  (par.  91).  The  roll  is  then 
called.  Each  man  as  he  answers  his  name  comes  to  the  order. 
When  the  first  sergeant  verifies  the  troop,  the  command :  IN- 
SPECTION ARMS,  is  omitted  at  the  formation  of  the  platoons, 
which  precedes  the  formation  of  the  troop  (par.  598), 

Reports. 

506.  Reports  connected  with  formations,  made  by  noncom- 
missioned officers  forming  platoons,  follow  the  form :  Corporal 
absent;  or,  All  present.  All  such  reports  to  a  commis- 
sioned officer   are  preceded  by  Sir.     The  report  of  the  first 

sergeant  to  the  captain  is  in  the  form :  Sir,  Corporal  • 

and  Private absent;  or, Sir,  all  present  or  accounted  for. 

In  each  of  the  above  cases  the  noncommissioned  officer  making 
the  report  salutes  as  he  begins  the  report  and  the  salute  is 
returned.  When  no  verification  is  required,  the  form  of  the 
report  is :   (Sir)  the  platoon  (troop)  is  formed. 


192  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

After  reporting,  a  noncommissioned  officer,  unless  otherwise 
prescribed,  takes  his  post,  habitually  at  a  trot.  Reports  at 
formations  are  made  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from  head 
to  rear  in  column.  At  formations  in  column  noncommissioned 
officers  may  be  directed  to  make  their  reports  at  the  head  of 
the  column.  Reports,  when  necessary,  will  be  preceded  by  the 
designation  of  the  unit  referred  to,  thus:  1st  Platoon,  all 
present. 

Inspection  at  Formx^tion. 

507.  Whenever  a  unit  or  detachment  is  formed  for  any  duty 
its  commander  makes,  during  the  formation  or  immediately 
subsequent  thereto,  such  an  inspection  as  may  be  required 
by  his  instructions  or  by  the  nature  of  the  duty  in  view.  This 
inspection  will  always  include  a  noting  of  the  general  appear- 
ance and  condition  of  the  troopers  and  their  mounts,  as 
required  by  par.  49,  and  the  inspection  of  arms  prescribed  in 
par.  91.  It  will  further  include  all  that  is  necessary  to  assure 
the  commander  that  his  unit  is  in  proper  condition  for  the 
duty.  When  on  field  duty  such  inspection  must  be  especially 
thorough,  including  arms,  ammunition,  equipment,  clothing, 
shoeing  of  the  horses,  and  similar  essentials. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  PLATOON. 

Special  Provisions. 

508.  When  recruits  have  learned  the  mechanism  of  the 
phitoon  drill  they  should  participate  in  the  regular  drills  of 
the  platoon  and  troop  in  so  far  as  their  progress  in  horseman- 
ship permits.  Individual  troopers  whose  more  elementary  in- 
struction may  be  found  to  be  below  the  required  standard  for 
satisfactory  platoon  drill  will  be  given  further  instruction  in 
the  School  of  the  Squad.  As  far  as  practicable,  such  instruc- 
tion will  be  in  addition  to,  and  at  different  hours  from,  the 
regular  platoon  drills,  so  that  progress  in  the  systematic  course 
of  training  may  not  be  delayed  by  a  few  poorly  instructed 
troopers.  Every  effort  should  be  made  to  avoid  the  monoto- 
nous repetition  of  elementary  instruction  by  men  who  are 
ready  to  advance  to  other  work.  When  there  are  not  available 
a  sufficient  number  of  well-instructed  men  for  a  satisfactory 
platoon  drill,  two  or  more  platoons  should  be  combined  and 
progressive  instruction  along  some  special  line  of  training 
(e.  g.,  patrolling)  should  be  given  those  troopers  who  are 
ready  to  advance.  Meanwhile  the  less  efficient  troopers  may 
be  brought  to  the  necessary  standard  by  further  drill  in  the 
School  of  the  Trooper  or  School  of  the  Sqnad. 

509.  Section  chiefs,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  remain  in 
their  places  in  the  rank  and  give  no  commands  or  signals. 
They  must,  however,  closely  observe  their  sections  and  by 
cautions  given  in  a  low  tone  prevent  or  correct  errors. 

At  any  time  other  than  in  drills  at  attention  a  platoon 
leader  may  cause  each  section  chief  to  take  position  in  front 
of  his  respective  section  and  lead  it.  In  certain  cases — e.  g., 
in  dismounted  fire  action — the  platoon  commander  may  cause 
his  section  chiefs  to  take  position  in  rear  of  the  line  with  a 
view  to  giving  more  effective  assistance  in  direction  and 
control  of  fire  and  the  maintenance  of  fire  discipline.  When 
each  section  is  led  by  its  chief  the  platoon  leader  indicates  the 
base  section  and  controls  its  movements  by  appropriate  indi- 

38218  "=—18 13  -  193 


194  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

cation  to  the  leader.    The  other  section  then  regulates  on  the 
base  section. 

510.  When  the  section  as  a  whole  changes  position  in  the 
execution  of  a  platoon  movement  the  guide  of  the  section  acts 
as  a  directing  guide  and  the  other  troopers  of  the  section 
conform  accordingly. 

511.  It  is  essential  to  the  execution  of  the  movements  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Platoon  that  each  trooper  keep 
constantly  in  mind  the  section  to  which  he  belongs  and  its 
temporary  position  in  the  platoon  (leading  or  rear,  right  or 
left).  Section  chiefs  and  substitute  chiefs  will  give  special 
attention  to  seeing  that  this  requirement  is  observed.  In  line 
and  foragers  the  file  closer  will,  whenever  necessary,  caution 
the  troopers  near  the  center  of  the  platoon  as  to  the  point  of 
division  between  the  sections. 

Platoon  Formations. 

612.  The  close-order  formations  of  the  platoon  for  march; 
maneuver,  or  combat  are: 

(a)   Line  (single  or  double  rank); 
(&)   Double  column; 

(c)  Column  of  fours; 

(d)  Column  of  twos;  and 

(e)  Column  or  troopers. 

The  only  formation  involving  the  extension  of  the  front 
of  the  platoon  to  a  greater  extent  than  corresponds  to  a  de- 
ployment into  line  is  foragers  (corresponding  dismounted 
formation  skirmishers)  ;  but  the  platoon  may  also  be  extended 
in  depth. 

(a)  In  line,  single  rank,  each  section  of  the  platoon  is  in 
line  as  in  par.  368-a,  and  the  two  sections  are  abreast  of  each 
other  without  interval  other  than  that  between  adjacent  indi- 
vidual troopers. 

In  line,  double  rank,  the  platoon  is  in  two  ranks,  each  in 
line  as  in  the  squad,  the  rear  rank  being  habitually  at  a  dis- 
tance of  3  yards  mounted  and  40  inches  dismounted  from 
the  front  rank.  The  platoon  leader  or  file  closer  may  direct 
the  guide  of  the  rear  rank  to  increase  the  distance  when 
necessary.    Each  rank  habitually  consists  of  one  section. 


PLATOON  FORMATIONS.  195 

Whenever  line  is  commanded  in  the  platoon,  single-rank  line 
is  to  be  understood.  Single-rank  line  is  referred  to  in  the  text 
either  as  "  line "  or  "  single  rank " ;  double-rank  line  as 
"double  rank." 

( Z> )  lu  double  column,  each  section  is  in  column  of  fours,  the 
leading  fours  of  the  two  sections  being  abreast  of  each  other, 
with  an  habitual  interval  between  sections  of  2  yards  mounted 
or  1  yard  dismounted, 

(c)  (d)  (e)  In  column  of  fours,  column  of  twos,  and  column 
of  troopers  each  section  is  in  the  corresponding  formation  as 
exi^lained  for  the  squad  (par.  368),  one  section  being  in  rear 
of  the  other  at  4  feet  distance. 

(/)  In  foragers,  each  section  is  deployed  as  foragers,  the  two 
sections  being  abreast  of  each  other,  without  interval  other 
than  that  between  adjacent  individual  foragers. 

(g)  The  extension  in  depth  is  made  on  the  principle  ex- 
plained in  the  squad.  This  extension  may  be  by  successive 
sections,  squads  (par.  494),  or  smaller  elements. 

513.  Column  of  fours,  in  addition  to  its  general  utility  as  a 
march  formation,  has,  as  compared  to  column  of  twos  or  col- 
umn of  troopers,  certain  important  advantages.  Its  use  always 
tends  to  maintain  tlie  platoon  in  order  (par.  369).  A  platoon, 
once  properly  formed,  can  not  lose  order  as  long  as  its  move- 
ments are  confined  to  any  combinations  of  line  (single  rank), 
column  of  fours,  and  double  column.  Column  of  fours  further 
permits  line  to  be  formed  to  a  flank  almost  on  the  ground 
occupied  by  the  column  and  without  loss  of  order;  and,  by 
wheeling  about  by  fours  when  in  column  of  fours,  a  change 
of  180°  in  the  direction  of  march  of  a  column  m.ay  be  made 
almost  on  the  ground  occupied  by  the  column,  with  no  appre- 
ciable loss  of  time  and  without  loss  of  order.  Column  of  fours 
is  a  formation  that  can  be  easily  taken,  even  while  in  rapid 
motion  following  a  previous  condition  of  disorder ;  it  obviates 
the  necessity  for  counting  fours  and  it  tends  to  prevent  pos- 
sible delay  or  confusion  due  to  the  troopers  forgetting  their 
respective  numbers. 

514.  Double  column  possesses  all  those  advantages  incident 
to  the  use  of  column  of  fours  that  relate  to  the  maintenance  of 
order.  It  is,  in  substance,  a  line  of  section  columns  and  is 
useful  in  connection  with  the  original  formation  of  the  platoon 
and  for  reforming  or  assembling   (pars.  559,  560)   following 


196  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

any  movement  as  a  r&sult  of  which  the  troopers  of  the  two 
sections  become  intermingled  or  a  general  loss  of  order  results. 
Where  conditions  permit  its  use  it  decreases  the  depth  of  a 
column,  lends  itself  to  a  rapid  deployment  to  the  front,  per- 
mits the  formation  of  double  rank  to  a  flank,  and  is  well 
adapted  to  certain  special  uses. 

Order. 

515.  A  platoon  divided  into  sections  is  in  order  (in  any 
formation  except  column  of  twos  or  troopers)  when  its 
two  component  sections  are  united  in  any  one  of  the  forma- 
tions prescribed  for  the  platoon  (par.  512)  and  each  section  is 
in  order  (par.  370).  In  column  of  twos  or  troopers  a  further 
essential  to  order  is  that  the  right  (or  leading)  section  shall 
be  left  in  front  and  the  left  (or  rear)  section  shall  be  right  in 
front.  TJds  last  condition  automatically  results  if  the  column 
of  tivos  or  troopers  he  formed  and  maneuvered  as  prescribed  in 
the  platoon  drill.  It  is  not  essential  to  order  in  the  platoon 
that  the  section  chiefs  and  substitute  chiefs  have  the  positions 
indicated  for  them  in  par.  519.     (Fig.  49.) 

516.  A  platoon  not  divided  into  sections  is  in  order  when  it 
fulfills  the  requirements  prescribed  for  order  in  the  squad 
(par.  370),  but  it  can  then  execute  only  the  movements  pre- 
scribed  for  the  squad. 

To  Form  the  Platoon,   Mounted. 

517.  When  the  platoon  leader  is  a  commissioned  officer  the 
platoon  is  habitually  formed  by  the  platoon  file  closer  under 
the  supervision  and  direction  of  the  platoon  leader.  When 
the  platoon  leader  is  a  noncommissioned  officer  he  forms  the 
platoon  and  the  file  closer  assists  in  the  formation.  Unless 
otherwise  prescribed,  the  order  of  the  sections  from  right  to 
left  in  line,  or  head  to  rear  in  column,  is  that  of  their  re- 
spective permanent  numerical  designations  (par.  498). 

518.  The  platoon  is  habitually  formed  in  double  column. 
The  platoon  may  be  formed  in  column  of  fours,  or  in  line,  by 
similar  methods.  The  platoon  is  also  formed  at  times  by 
commands  and  methods  corresponding  to  those  prescribed  for 
the  squad  (pars.  501,  502). 


TO  FORM  THE  PLATOON.  197 

519.  At  the  formation  of  the  platoon,  section  chiefs  and  sub- 
stitute chiefs  habitually  take  position  as  follows : 

{a)  When  the  formation  is  in  double  column,  the  section 
chief  of  the  right  section,  as  No.  1  of  the  rear  four  of  that 
section ;  the  section  chief  of  the  left  section,  as  No.  4  of  the 
rear  four  of  that  section;  the  substitute  chief  of  the  right 
section,  as  No.  4  of  the  leading  four  of  that  section;  the 
substitute  chief  of  the  left  section,  as  No.  1  of  the  leading  four 
of  that  section. 

(&)  Should  the  formation  be  in  column  of  fours,  the  posi- 
tions may  be  obtained  by  substituting  in  (a)  leading  section 
for  right  section  and  rear  section  for  left  section. 

(c)  Should  the  formation  be  in  line,  the  section  chiefs  of 
the  right  and  left  sections  are  on  the  right  and  left  of  the 
platoon  rank,  respectively,  and  the  substitute  chiefs  on  the 
left  of  the  right  section  and  right  of  the  left  section,  re- 
spectively. 

(d)  In  each  of  the  above  formations  should  the  four  to 
which  a  section  chief  or  substitute  chief  belongs  be  incom- 
plete, par.  36S-&  is  modified  to  the  extent  that  a  section  chief 
01-  substitute  chief  habitually  takes  in  an  incomplete  four  his 
regular  position  (No.  1  or  No.  4)  as  indicated,  respectively,  in 
(a),  (&),  and  (c)  of  this  paragraph. 

(c)  The  arrangement  of  noncommissioned  officers  indicated 
in  this  paragraph,  while  desirable,  is  not  essential  to  the  em- 
ployment of  the  platoon  at  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  combat. 
Should  the  positions  indicated  not  be  taken  when  the  platoon 
forms  (or  assembles)  they  are  habitually  taken  as  soon  as 
practicable. 

520.  To  form  the  platoon  in  double  column  (its  habitual 
formation)  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  platoon 
takes  position,  mounted,  3  yards  in  front  of  the  line  upon 
which  the  heads  of  the  two  section  columns  are  to  rest  and 
facing  the  approximate  center  of  the  position  the  front  of  the 
platoon  is  to  occupy  when  formed.  He  then  commands: 
FORM  PLATOON.  The  section  chief  of  the  right  section  takes 
position  at  stand  to  horse  abreast  of  the  noncommissioned 
officer  forming  the  platoon,  on  the  latter's  left,  with  an  inter- 
val of  2  yards  between  the  horses.  The  section  chief  of 
the  left  section  similarly  takes  position  2  yards  from  the  non- 


198  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

commissioned  officer  forming  the 
platoon,  on  the  latter's  right,  with 
the  same  interval  between  horses. 
The  two  section  chiefs  face  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer  forming  the  platoon. 
The  troopers  of  each  section  lead 
into  column  (par.  351)  without 
further  command.  The  trooper 
first  to  lead  out  in  each  section 
takes  position,  as  No.  1  of  its  lead- 
ing four,  3  yards  directly  in  front 
.  v^w^v  of  his  respective  section  chief  and 

g      j^.  An'  facing    him.     Each    section    chief 

^    tj.-5!i  AmAQ      ^'     supervises    the    formation    of    his 

•^    J^S  .         uUUb      ^     section,  leading  into  his  own  posi- 
§    ^^^  ;        ]      ^     tion    (par.  519-a)    as  soon  as  the 

^u^^^         A  AAA      '=^     troopers    of    his    section    are    in 
^l^^^l         OOOO      I    ranks.     (Fig.  48.) 
Q.^5:«oS  ;  _  j      §         521.  The  file  closer  (if  not  form- 

^     ing    the    platoon)    assists    in    the 
s     formation  and  takes,  at  stand  to 
horse,  the  position  prescribed  for 
ft  I  ,■'  /  '  /'  him  in  double  column   (par.  528.) 

522.  As  soon  as  the  two  section 

^  , ,     -vy    . , , ,  chiefs  have  taken  position  in  their 

i       ,_7^rv,^"^^=.^'.  V  respective  section  columns  the  non- 

.     commissioned   officer   forming   the 

^     platoon  calls  the  roll  (unless  pre- 

»^     viously  instructed  to  omit  the  roll 


ll 

ii 
I- 


1 1^ 

r-*      O     p. 
o     ea    o 

€55 


1 3     call — par.    505)     and    makes    any 
I^     necessary  adjustment  between  sec- 
;i     tions  (par.  497).     Should  the  rear 
j5     four  of  either  section  (or  of  both 
r        sections)    be  incomplete  the   non- 
[        commissioned     officer      habitually 
I        makes    such    adjustment    as    will 
leave  the  rear  four  of  one  section 
complete,  and  the  rear  four  of  the 
other  section  as  nearly  complete 
Fig.  48,  par.  520.  as  practicable. 


TO  FORM  THE  PLATOON.  199 

523.  If  the  platoon  leader  be  a  commissioned  officer,  the 
noncommissioned  officer  forming  the  platoon  reports  (except  in 
the  case  of  a  platoon-in-troop — par.  .593)  to  the  platoon  leader, 
who  takes  position  at  a  convenient  point  in  front  of  and  facing 
the  platoon  in  time  to  receive  the  report  (par.  506).  The 
noncommissioned  officer  takes  his  post  as  file  closer,  habitually 
remaining  mounted  unless  the  platoon  leader  dismounts.  The 
leader  causes  the  platoon  to  mount   (pars.  .529,  507). 

If  the  platoon  leader  be  a  noncommissioned  officer  he 
(except  in  the  case  of  a  platoon-in-troop — par.  .593)  gives  the 
commands  for  mounting  as  soon  as  the  adjustment  between 
sections  has  been  made. 

524.  When  the  formation  is  in  column  of  fours  (par,  518), 
the  chief  of  the  rear  section  posts  No.  1  of  his  leading  four 
directly  in  rear  of  the  corresponding  trooper  of  the  leading 
section  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  depth  of  the  leading  section 
in  column  of  fours.  When  the  formation  is  in  line,  the  first 
position  of  the  section  chief  of  the  right  section  (par.  520)  is 
at  an  interval  equal  to  section  front  (instead  of  2  yards)  from 
the  noncommissioned  officer  forming  the  platoon.  The  latter, 
as  soon  as  the  section  chiefs  have  taken  position  in  the  ranks 
(par.  519-c),  commands:  1.  Section,  2.  COLTNT  FOTJHS.  Any 
excess  distance  or  interval  remaining  betvreen  the  sections 
when  the  adjustment  completed  is  closed  at  once  without 
command. 

525.  When  the  platoon  is  formed  by  the  commands  and 
methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  (pars.  3.50-.352,  518),  if  the 
duty  in  view  calls  for  a  division  into  sections  (pars.  501,  502), 
such  division  is  made  after  the  roll  has  been  called  and  fours 
counted.  The  assignment  and  placing  of  noncommissioned 
officers  (par.  504),  if  not  complete,  is  then  completed.  Any 
troopers  whose  numbers  are  changed  thereby  are  cautioned  as 
to  their  new  numbers. 

526.  The  platoon  may  form,  after  the  troopers  have  mounted, 
in  accordance  with  any  of  the  methods  authorized  above. 
The  commands  of  the  noncommissioned  officer  forming  the 
platoon  are  the  same  as  those  already  given.  If  the  troopers 
are  not  mounted,  the  section  chiefs  are  directed  in  advance  of 
the  formation  to  cause  the  trooi)ers  to  mount  (par.  352). 

527.  The  dismounted  formation  of  the  platoon  is  conducted 
on  the  same  principles  as  the  corresponding  mounted  forma- 


200  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

tion  with  the  necessary  modifications  as  indicated  in  par.  853. 
When  the  platoon  forms  in  double  column,  the  commands  are 
the  same  as  in  par.  520.  Each  section  chief  takes  position 
with  an  interval  of  4  feet  from  the  platoon  leader.  This  will 
place  the  left  section  at  approximately  1  yard  interval  from 
the  right  section  when  the  formation  is  completed,  and  will 
give  it  approximately  its  proper  distance  from  the  front  rank 
when  double  rank  is  formed  as  in  par.  552. 

If  armed  with  the  rifle,  the  platoon  leader  and  the  section 
chiefs,  until  they  take  their  places  in  the  rank,  carry  their 
rifles  at  the  right  shoulder  (par.  487). 

If  the  verification  is  made  by  the  noncommissioned  ofticer 
forming  the  platoon  (par.  507),  the  latter,  as  soon  as  all  are 
in  their  places  in  ranks,  commands  (par.  91)  :  1.  Inspection, 
2.  ARMS;  3.  Right  shoulder,  4.  ARMS,  and  calls  the  roll. 
If  the  verification  is  to  be  made  by  the  first  sergeant,  the  com- 
mands indicated  above  are  omitted  at  the  platoon  formation. 

Positions  of  the  Platoon  Leader  and  File  Closee. 

528.  (a)  The  habitual  position  of  the  platoon  leader  is  3 
yards  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the  platoon  (par.  450).  He 
occupies  other  positions  in  special  cases.  For  dismounted  fire 
action  the  platoon  leader  takes  post  in  rear  of  the  line  at  such 
place  as  may  best  enable  him  to  direct  and  control  the  fire 
of  the  platoon.  Special  positions  are  indicated  for  the  leader 
in  certain  phases  of  mounted  combat  with  the  pistol  (par. 
567)  and  saber  (par.  563).  In  certain  column  formations  of 
the  troop  the  leaders  of  platoons  other  than  the  base  take 
position  abreast  of  their  respective  leading  elements  and 
cease  temporarily  the  direct  leadership  of  the  platoons,  though 
retaining  supervision  and  control  of  the  latter  (par.  451). 

(&)  The  habitual  position  of  the  file  closer  is,  in  line  or 
foragers,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the  platoon ;  in  double 
rank,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the  rear  rank  (par.  533). 
In  double  column  and  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers 
he  is  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  platoon  and  in  the  trace  of  the 
guide  of  the  platoon.  In  certain  column  formations  of  the 
troop  the  file  closers  have  positions  differing  from  those  indi- 
cated above  (par.  599). 

(c)  If  there  be  any  extra  file  closer  with  the  platoon,  he 
rides,  in  line  and  in  double  rank,  abreast  of  the  platoon  file 


MOUNTING  AND  DISMOUNTING  PLATOON.  201 

closer  and  in  rear  of  such  four  as  the  file  closer  may  designate ; 
in  double  column  and  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers 
he  rides  abreast  of  a  four  (two  or  trooper)  designated  by  the 
file  closer  on  the  flank  opposite  to  that  indicated  for  the  chief 
of  platoon  in  par.  602. 

(d)  When  the  platoon  is  wheeled  about  by  fours  the  move- 
ments of  the  leader  and  file  closers  conform  to  pars.  605,  606. 

To  Mount  and  Dismount. 

529.  The  platoon  in  any  prescribed  formations  mounts  and 
dismounts  by  the  commands  and  methods  corresponding  to 
those  indicated  for  the  squad  (pars.  354-35S).  If  the  platoon 
be  mounted  or  dismounted  in  double  rank,  the  odd  numbers 
of  the  rear  rank  lead  forward  only  3  yards. 

Immediately  following  the  execution  of  the  first  command 
for  mounting  or  dismounting,  a  platoon  leader  habitually 
takes  position,  mounted,  in  front  of  and  facing  the  platoon 
and  at  a  distance  of  3  yards  from  the  leading  rank  or  element 
of  the  platoon.  ^  As  soon  as  the  platoon  forms  rank  after 
mounting  (w^hen  the  platoon  mounts  from  line),  or  as  soon  as 
it  mounts  (when  the  mounting  is  executed  from  a  formation 
other  than  line-),  the  platoon  leader  habitually  takes  his  pre- 
scribed position  (par.  528)  for  the  formation  in  question. 

To  Dismiss  thf  Platoon. 

530.  The  platoon  is  dismissed  as  prescribed  for  the  squad 
(par.  360). 

If  the  platoon  be  in  double  column  or  in  column  of  fours, 
twos,  or  troopers,  the  leader  may  command :  1.  Sections,  2. 
FALL  OUT.     Each  section  executes  the  movement. 

Alignment. 

531.  The  alig-nment  of  the  platoon  acting  alone  is  conducted 
upon  the  same  principles  as  that  of  the  squad  (pars.  362-366). 

Leading  the  Platoon. 

532.  The  platoon  is  led  by  its  leader  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  stated  in  pars.  323-325,  367,  and  448-452. 

Guide  of  the  Platoon. 

533.  In  line  and  in  foragers  the  left  trooper  of  the  right 
section  is  the  guide  of  the  platoon.    At-  each  change  of  forma- 


202  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

tion  in  line  or  foragers  the  file  closer  cautions  the  guide  as 
indicated  in  par.  373. 

In  double  rank,  the  platoon  leader,  on  taking  position  in 
front  of  the  front  rank,  designates  a  trooper  near  the  center 
of  that  rank  as  guide  of  the  platoon;  the  file  closer  designates 
the  corresponding  trooper  of  the  rear  rank  as  guide  of  the 
latter.  The  guide  of  the  rear  rank  follows  in  the  trace  of 
the  guide  of  the  front  rank  at  3  yards  distance  unless  other- 
wise indicated  (par.  550). 

In  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  the  guide  is  regulated 
as  prescribed  for  the  corresponding  formations  of  the  squad 
(par.  374). 

In  double  column  the  right  section  is  the  base  and  No.  2  of 
the  leading  four  is  the  guide  of  the  platoon.  In  each  section 
of  the  double  column  the  guide  is  as  prescribed  for  the  squad 
in  column  of  fours  (par.  374).  The  guide  of  the  left  section 
regulates  on  the  guide  of  the  right  section. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  guide  of  the  platoon  may,  as  the 
platoon  passes  from  one  formation  to  another^  be  a  private,  a 
substitute  chief,  or  a  section  chief. 

534.  Whenever  the  platoon  leader  takes  position  in  the  rank 
he  becomes  the  guide  of  the  platoon. 

535.  The  guide  habitually  follov/s  the  platoon  leader  at  a 
distance  of  3  yards ;  the  platoon  leader  may  specially  indicate 
a  greater  distance. 

Movements  Executed  by  the  Platoon. 

538.  The  platoon  in  double  column  marches  to  the  front, 
halts,  marches  backward,  obliques  by  trooper,  and  resumes 
the  original  direction,  executes  changes  of  direction,  including 
the  turn  and  half  turn,  and  marches  to  the  rear  by  commands 
and  methods  corresponding  to  those  prescribed  for  the  squad 
in  line. 

537.  In  accordance  with  the  principles  stated  in  pars.  469 
and  470,  the  platoon,  toheu  divided  info  sections,  habitually 
forms  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  lo  the  direction  of 
march  from  line  as  prescribed  in  par.  545,  instead  of  as  pre- 
scribed in  pa)\  403-a,  b;  forms  line  to  the  direction  of  march 
from  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  as  prescribed  in  par. 
546,  instead  of  as  prescribed  in  par.  397;  forms  column  of 


PLATOON  MOVEMENTS   AND  COMMANDS. 


ftOZ 


twos,  or  troopers  from  column  of  fours  as  prescribed  in  par. 
547  instead  of  as  prescribed  in  par.  393. 

A  platoon  divided  into  sections  habitually  forms  column  of 
fours,  twos,  or  troopers  by  breaking  to  the  direction  of  march 
from  its  center  in  line ;  and  it  habitually  forms  either  line  or 
foragers  from  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  by  a  fan^ioise 
deployment. 

538.  Movements  on  foot  are  executed  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  stated  in  pars.  482-484. 

539.  The  principles  stated  in  pars.  446-488  are,  with  such 
modifications  as  are  indicated  in  the  platoon  drill,  generally 
applicable  to  that  drill. 

Commands  and  Cokkesponding  Aem  Signals. 
(For  list  of  commands  and  signals  for  these  movements  executed  as 
prescribed  for  the  squad,  see  par.  3S1.) 
540. 


Commands. 


Pars. 


Arm  Signals. 


1.  Charge 

1.  Column,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Column  of  twos,  2.  MAUCH 

1.  Column  of  troopers,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Double  column,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Double  rank,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Line,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Pistol  attack 

1.  Single  rank,  2.  MARCH 

1.  Skirmishers,  2.  MARCH 


563 

r        &11 

l545-a,  548 

\        545-6 

1    547,548 

545-&,  547 

542,544 

551 

557 

5-13,  546 

567 

554 
557 


None    except    leader's    ex- 
ample. 

(•Column.* 

Column— twos.f 

Column— troopers.f 
Double  column.'* 
None. 
Foragers.* 
Line.* 

None    except    leader's    ex- 
ample. 
None. 
Skirmishers.* 


*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

t  In  signals  marked  thus,  the  preparatory  signal  consists  of  more  than  one  ele- 
ment; the  signal  of  execution  follows  the  last  element  of  the  preparatory  signal. 


204  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Detailed  Description  of  Movements — Close  Order. 

541.  Being  in  double  column,  to  form  column  of  fours,  twos, 
or  troopers. 

(a)  To  form  column  of  fours:  1.  Column,  2.  MARCH.  The 
right  section  is  the  base ;  it  advances  and  follows  the  leader. 
The  left  section  takes  or  maintains  a  correspondingly  slower 
gait  (or  if  halted,  remains  so)  until  its  leading  four  is  about 
abreast  of  the  rear  four  of  the  right  section,  when  the  left 
section  inclines  to  the  right  (par.  510)  at  the  gait  of  the 
right  section  and  takes  its  place  in  column  of  fours  in  rear 
of  the  other  section,     (Fig.  48.) 

(b)  Column  of  twos  or  troopers  is  formed  at  the  commands: 
1.  Column  of  twos,  or  1.  Column  of  troopers,  2.  MARCH.  The 
right  section  executes  left  by  twos  (troopers)  as  in  par.  393-a, 
b;  the  left  section  executes  right  by  twos  (troopers)  in  time 
to  take  its  position  in  the  column  as  explained  in  (a),  above 
(par.  331). 

Gaits  in  both  (a)  and  (&)  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-a,  c. 

542.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form 
double  column:  1.  Double  column,  2.  MARCH. 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  the  leading  section,  as  the  base 
(par.  459)  advances  and  follows  the  leader.  The  rear  section 
inclines  to  the  left  (par.  510)  at  a  correspondingly  faster  gait, 
resumes  the  march  to  the  front  so  as  to  have  its  interval  of 
2  yards,  and,  when  its  leading  four  is  abreast  of  the  guide 
of  the  base  section,  takes  the  gait  of  the  latter.     (PI.  V.) 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-a,  b. 

It  is  practicable  to  form  double  column  from  column  of  twos 
or  troopers  on  similar  principles,  each  section  executing  column 
(par.  399)  during  the  movement  (par.  331).  Double  column 
is  ordinarily  executed  from  either  column  of  fours  or  line. 

543.  Being  in  double  column,  to  form  line:  1.  Line,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  right  section  as  the  base  (par.  458)  executes  right  front 
into  line  (par.  397).  Its  leading  four  advances  and  follows 
the  platoon  leader. 

The  left  section  executes  left  front  into  line,  except  that 
the  right  trooper  of  its  leading  four  closes  in  upon  the  left 
of  the  leading  four  of  the  right  section  and  regulates  upon 
the  guide  of  the  line  (par.  326). 


PLATOON  MOVEMENTS  AND  COMMANDS.  205 

PLATE  I.— THE  PLATOON. 
(Jfar.  543.) 


I 


(column  PABIIY  FOHJflB.) 


'//J 


PLA  TOON   ,t/'>7//  /  /J/), 


(position  of  filecloser  not  shown) 


COMMAND: 
1.C0LUMN.ZMARCH. 


PLATOON  /N    S   \  \  ^       ^N   \  /     ,     .     -      /     /    /     '    OAMMAMH 

DOUBLE  COLUMN  ^^'f[Mf\         ArtAH///    '     ^O'^^^^ND: 


I 


206  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Any  command  for  a  gait  applies  only  to  the  execution  of 
front  into  line  in  the  sections  (par.  337-/).      (PI.  I.) 

544.  Being  in  line,  to  form  double  column:  1.  Double  column, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  right  section  as  the  base  (par.  458)  executes  left  by 
fours  (par.  403-a),  its  left  four  advancing  and  following  the 
platoon,  leader.  The  left  section  simultaneously  executes 
right  by  fours,  its  guide  regulating  on  the  guide  of  tlie  right 
section  and  gradually  gaining  the  interval  of  2  yards  between 
sections. 

The  two  sections  advance  at  the  same  gait  (par.  334),  the 
left  section  regulating  on  the  right. 

545.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  fours,  twos,  or 
troopers. 

(a)   To  form  column  of  fours:  1.  Column,  2.  MARCH.    (PI.  I.) 

The  right  section  as  the  base  (par.  459)  executes  left  by 
fours  (par.  403-a),  its  left  four  advancing  and  following  the 
platoon  leader.  The  left  section  executes  right  by  fours  (at 
the  gait  of  the  head  of  the  column)  in  time  to  incline  to  the 
right  and  take  its  place  in  the  column  in  rear  of  the  right  sec- 
tion at  4  feet  distance.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  file  closer  to  see 
that  the  right  four  of  the  left  section  begins  the  execution  of 
right  by  fours  at  the  proper  moment. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-a,  c. 

(h)  To  form  column  of  twos  or  troopers:  1.  Column  of  twos, 
or  1.  Column  of  troopers,  2.  MARCH.  Executed  on  the  same 
principles  as  in  (a)  above  (par.  331).  The  right  section  exe- 
cutes left  by  twos  (par.  403-6),  the  left  section  right  by  twos. 

546.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form 
line  to  the  front:  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH,  The  leading  section, 
as  the  base  (par.  459),  executes  right  front  into  line  (par. 
397),  its  leading  element  advancing  and  following  the  platoon 
leader  (pars.  334,  337-a).  The  rear  section  executes  left 
front  into  line  with  the  modification  that  its  leading  element 
obliques  to  the  left  at  the  same  time  as  the  other  elements  of 
that  section  and  forms  abreast  of  and  to  the  left  of  the  left 
trooper  of  the  other  section,  who  becomes  the  guide  of  the 
platoon  (par.  533)  in  the  new  line.  All  the  elements  of  the 
colunm  except  the  leading  one  in  the  platoon  move  as  pre- 
scribed in  par  337-&. 


DETAILS  OF  PLATOON  MOVEMENTS.  207 

Line  to  a  flank  or  to  any  oblique  direction  may  be  formed 
on  tlie  same  principles, 
the  head  of  the  column 
being    directed     toward 
the  new  front  before  the 

gh'^n  (par. 481-0) ^''(Fig^  @U(JU UUUUUI 

547.  Being  in   column  .... 

of  fours,  to  form  column 
of  twos  or  troopers:  1. 
Column  of  twos,  or  1. 
Column  of  troopers,  2, 
MARCH.      Executed   ac-  \  \  \  ^'.  \\^\\\\i  >i'n !  /'  /  /  / 


\  \\u   ''/'/'////// 


cording  to  the  principles  \  \  \  \  ^  \\  \ 

of  par.   393-a,    h.     The 

leading    section    always 

executes    left    by    twos 

and     the     rear     section 

right     by     twos      (par. 

331). 

54S.  Being  in   column  \  \ 

of   twos   or   troopers,   to  \ 

form    column    of    fours:  \  \  \  \\ 

1.    Column,    2.    MAHCH.  \  \V  ' 


Executed  as  in  the  squad 
(par.  399),  except  that 
the  rear  two  (or  troop- 
er) of  each  four  of  the 
leading  section  oblique 
to  the  right,   while  the 

corresponding  oblique  in  _ 

the  rear  section  is  to  the  "v  \  ^  'v^m) 

left  (par.  331).    Column  \)l'^~^5 

of  twos  from  column  of  WV^>cr:ZD 

troopers  is  formed  in  a  ^      .^         't^T^f"^ 

similar      manner     (par.  Fig.  49.  par.  546. 

331)     at    the    command:    1.    Column    of    twos,    2.    MARCH. 


208  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Double  Rank, 

549.  Double  rank  in  the  platoon  is  formed  in  two  ways — 
toward  the  direction  of  march  from  single  rank  (par.  551), 
and  to  the  flank  from  double  column  (par.  552).  Conversely, 
the  platoon  in  double  rank  executes  but  three  changes  of 
formation — single  rank  (par.  554)  and  foragers  (par.  557), 
executed  toward  the  direction  of  march,  and  double  column 
(par.  555),  formed  to  a  flank. 

550.  The  platoon  in  double  rank  executes  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  methods  as  the  platoon  in  single  rank  all  move- 
ments that  do  not  involve  a  change  of  formation.  (See  also 
pars.  554,  555.)  In  executing  the  changes  of  direction  (in- 
cluding the  turn  and  half  turn)  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank 
incline  outward  during  the  turn  so  as  to  gain  ground  toward 
the  marching  flank ;  and  those  nearest  the  pivot  move  their 
horses'  haunches  toward  the  marching  flank,  so  as  to  clear 
the  ground  for  any  follovving  unit. 

551.  Being  in  single  rank,  to  form  double  rank  to  the  front: 
1.  Double  rank,  2.  MARCH. 

The  right  section  as  the  base  (par.  458)  advances  and  fol- 
lows the  platoon  leader.  The  left  section  takes  or  maintains 
a  correspondingly  slower  gait  (or,  if  halted  remains  so)  .until 
it  has  gainecl  a  distance  of  3  yards  from  the  right  section  (par. 
510).  It  then  obliques  to  the  right  by  trooper,  the  guide  (par. 
385)  so  regulating  the  gait  and  pace  as  to  keep,  during  the 
oblique,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  other  section.  As  the  right 
trooper  of  the  rear  section  approaches  the  right  of  the  other 
section  the  rear  section  resumes  the  march  to  the  front  and 
follows  the  base  section  at  3  yards  distance. 

The  gaits  of  the  two  sections  are  regulated  as  in  par.  SST-a, 
e.     (PI.  II.) 

552.  Being  in  double  column,  to  form  double  rank  to  a  flank: 
1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH  (pars.  325,  400). 

If  the  purpose  of  the  connnand  is  to  gain  a  short  distance 
to  the  flank,  the  leader  and  file  closer  need  not  move  to  their 
new  positions,  nor  need  a  new  guide  be  indicated   (par.  326). 

553.  In  executing  double  rank  as  prescribed  in  pars.  551 
and  552  the  right  section  of  the  line  or  double  column  becomes 
the  front  rank  of  the  double  rank;  the  left  section,  the  rear 


PLATE  II.— THE  PLATOON. 

(Par.  551.) " 


mmmmmmmmMm. 


'^riP'.^,r'r'f';V'^,  r,  Pif' 


'^fe>y:vhXS?i^N^vsS-\v^iN  1'  1 


:^,  '  J 


I     1  1 

.     I  ' 


PLATOON  IN  DOUBLE  RANKj 
1.  SIBGLS  RANK.  2.  MARCH. 


PLATOON  IN  SINGLE  HAKK; 
1.  DOUBLE  RANK, 
2. MARCH, 


.^'f>  f^  9 ''P, 'P.  F\  p'-^.B  n  p  P, r,  ;■■;  «'^, 


I      < 

1      ' 


38218  ° — 18 14 


200 


210  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

rank.  Should  the  rear  rank,  however,  have  more  troopers  in 
it  than  are  in  the  front  rank,  the  file  closer  directs  enough 
troopers  from  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  to  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  at  the  first  indication  for  a  charge,  to  give  the  front 
rank  a  strength  not  less  than  that  of  the  rear  rank.  In  all 
such  cases,  before  ordering  subsequent  movements  that  require 
knowledge  by  the  troopers  of  their  respective  numbers,  the 
leader  commands:  1.  Sections,  2.  COUNT  FOURS,  or  else  as- 
sembles the  platoon  (par.  560). 

554.  Being  in  double  rank  to  form  single  rank  to  the  front: 

1.  Single  rank,  2.  MARCH.  The  front  rank,  as  the  base  sec- 
tion, advances  and  follows  the  platoon  leader.  The  rear  rank 
obliques  to  the  left  at  a  correspondingly  faster  gait  as  in  par. 
551,  resuming  the  march  to  the  front  so  as  to  take  its  position 
in  single  rank  on  the  left  of  the  other  section.     (PI.  II.) 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-«,  e. 

555.  Being  in  double  rank,  to  form  double  column  to  a 
flank:   1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH  (par.  325). 

Extended  Order. 

556.  Pars.  404-407  are  applicable  to  the  platoon. 

557.  Being  in  any  formation,  to  form  foragers:   1.  Foragers, 

2.  MARCH.  If  the  platoon  be  in  double  column,  column  of 
fours,  column  of  twos,  or  column  of  troopers,  the  right  section 
forms  right  front  into  foragers  (par.  409).  The  left  section 
forms  left  front  into  foragers  based  upon  the  left  trooper  of 
the  leading  element  of  the  right  (or  leading)  section,  who  ad- 
vances (par.  337-a)  and  follows  the  leader  (par.  325). 

The  platoon  deploys  on  foot  as  skirmishers  by  correspond- 
ing commands  and  methods. 

If  the  platoon  be  in  line,  the  movement  is  executed  as  in 
par.  408.  The  right  section  deploys  to  the'  right,  the  left  sec- 
tion to  the  left.     (Fig.  50.) 

If  the  platoon  be  in  double  rank,  the  front  rank  deploys  on 
its  left  trooper  (par.  408),  who  becomes  the  guide  of  the  pla- 
toon and  advances,  following  the  leader  (pars.  325,  337-a). 
The  rear  rank  moves  obliquely  to  the  left  as  in  par.  551,  the 
troopers  successively  deploying  at  a  gallop  as  they 'gain  the 
necessary  space.  The  right  trooper  of  the  rear  rank  takes 
position  on  the  left  of  the  left  trooper  of  the  front  rank. 


EXTENDED     ORDER- IN  PLATOON. 


211 


558.  The  platoon  may- 
be extended  in  depth  by 
commands  and  methods 
corresponding  to  those 
indicated  in  par.  413. 
The  elements  of  the  ex- 
tension are  usually  sec- 
tions, but  may  be  squads 
(par.  494),  fours,  twos, 
or  troopers. 

559.  Being  in  foragers 
and  in  order,  to  assem- 
ble: 1.  Assemble,  2. 
MARCH. 

Each  section  assembles 
in  column  of  fours  on  its 
inner  flank  (par.  414), 
the  file  closer  cautioning 
the  troopers  if  necessary. 
The  guide  of  the  right 
section  advances  and  fol- 
lows the  leader  (par. 
325).  The  left  section 
regulates  on  the  right 
section,  closing  to  2  yards 
interval.  The  gait  of 
the  leading  fours  of  the 
two  sections  is  regulated 
as  indicated  in  pars  334, 
337-a,  e. 

Should  it  be  desired  to 
advance  in  column  of 
fours  instead  of  in  dou- 
ble column,  the  leader 
-may,  instead  of  waiting 
until  the  assembly  is 
completed  and  then  exe- 
cuting the  correspond- 
ing movement,   caution: 


M  I  I  I  I  I  MM  I  I  I  !  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  t 


\    \/  FpRAGERS.  2.MARCH. 


^    '    -  1111/  / 

\  Willi/ 
N  ^  nil 

^  \II!I 

Mill 

l.ASSt'MBLEf2.MARCH.  (Hatoon  leader 
,-''Z^''    -'/"     /•         ^cautions  COLUIJN.) 
M  I  \\\  1  \\\  M  I  M  Tl  M  I  I  1  \{ 

'n    '\      \     i  i     /     /    /' 

'n^  '\/.  FOR/{GERS.  2.MARCH. 

'n  Mill  1111/  ^ 

Ngjljj.     (Normal  assembly^ 

^  Lj^S^EMBLEZ. MARCH. 

-'""/•'"'//'    ;'    \\  %""""-^ 

I'll  Tl'll  m'  M  i  M  M  M  I  Til  Tl 

^.    \    \     I   /    /    / 
^^\\  \       /    i  / 

^s      \        »  /        /       / 

\  l.FORAGERS,  2.MARCR. 


,  '' l.ASSEMBiE)2.MARCH.^\^^t,ri  leadaP 

,'       /         /'  "'        \  cautions  LIHE.) 

I        ;  N^         \^ 

r  M  I  M  II  M  II  I  II  I  I  M  M  M  'i 
I 
PLATOON /NUNE  OF  FORAGERS.  ^  order.) 
Fig.  50,  pars.  557,  559. 


212 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


PLATOON  IN  COLUMN. 


COMMAND^ 
TO  FIGHT  ON  foot: 
ACTION  FRONT! 


COLUMN,  immediately  following  the  commands  for  the  assem- 
bly. Each  section  assembles  as  before,  but  the  head  of  the  left 
section  moves  at  a  correspondingly  slower  gait  (or  halts)  until 
that  section  can  take  its  place  in  column  in  rear  of  the  base 
section  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  par.  458.  The 
leader  may  similarly  caution:  LINE.  The  platoon  then  as- 
sembles in  line  on  its  guide  as  in  the  squad.     (Fig.  50.) 

560.  To  assemble  the  platoon  when  the  latter  is  not  in  order: 
,  1.  Assemble,  2. 

•::••::•,  march. 

The  move- 
ment is,  with 
minor  modifi- 
cations, e  X  e  - 
cuted  upon  the 
same  princi- 
p 1 e  s  upon 
which  the 
original  for- 
mation of  the 
platoon  is 
based.  Certain 
features  of  the 
original  for- 
mation (e.  g., 
the  roll  call, 
report,  and  in- 
spection) are 
omitted. 

The  leader 
is  the  base  of 
the  assembly 
and  moves  in 
the  direction 
toward    which 


THE  PLATOON  ASSEMBLED,  \ 


/ 
PLATOON  RALLIEOiiJfll^ 


COMMAND-. 

2.  COLUMN,  2.  MARCH. 


COMMAND: 

1.ASJEM8LE,  2.MARCH. 


/COMMAND!,  RAayi^ 


MARCHING  IN  COLUMN  OF  TWOS. 

Fig.  51,  pars.  560,  561. 

ho  desires  the  platoon  to  face.  The  section  chiefs  move  quickly 
to  their  respective  positions  abreast  of  the  leader  (par.  520) 
and  move  in  the  same  dii-ection.  The  troopers  move  toward 
their  respective  section  chiefs  and  the  sections  form,  each  in 
column  of  fours,  3  yards  in  rear  of  its  chief.  Each  trooper 
takes  a  correspondingly  faster  gait  than  his  chief,  if  neces- 


THE  RALLY  OF  THE  PLATOON.  213 

sary,  to  gain  his  position.  The  first  trooper  to  arrive  in  rear 
of  the  section  chief  becomes  No.  1  of  the  leading  four  of  that 
section  (par.  351).  Each  trooper  forms  in  his  own  section, 
but  with  no  attention  to  liis  former  position.  The  platoon 
leader,  as  soon  as  the  leading  four  of  the  right  section  forms, 
takes  position  in  front  of  No.  2  of  that  four.  The  left  sec- 
tion regulates  on  the  right  section.  The  section  chiefs,  as 
soon  as  their  respective  base  troopers  and  the  leader  and 
guide  of  the  platoon  are  in  position,  are  free  to  move  to 
where  they  can  best  supervise  the  formation  of  their  sections. 
In  separating  the  personnel  of  two  sections  whose  troopers 
have  become  intermingled,  the  troopers  of  the  base  (right) 
section  have  the  right  of  way  and  pass  in  front  of  the 
troopers  of  the  left  section.  Each  section  leader  takes  his 
position  (par.  519)  as  soon  as  his  section  is  formed.  The  file 
closer  assists  as  usual  in  the  formation  and  takes  his  position 
(par.  528). 

If  it  is  desired  to  assemble  the  platoon  in  column,  the  cau- 
tion COLUMN  may  be  given  following  the  command  of  execu- 
tion for  the  assembly.  The  leader  of  the  section  that  would 
have  formed  on  the  left  in  double  column  causes  the  section  to 
take  a  correspondingly  slower  gait  until  it  can  take  its  place 
in  rear  of  the  other  section. 

The  movement  described  in  this  paragraph  may  be  executed 
w^hether  the  platoon  be  in  any  formation,  or  in  partial  or  com- 
plete disorder,  provided  a  prior  division  into  sections  has  been 
made  and  each  trooper  knows  to  which  section  he  belongs. 
The  movement  is  important  and  should  be  practiced  fre- 
quently.    (Fig.  51.) 

The  Rally. 

561.  Being  in  any  formation,  or  not  formed,  or  in  disorder, 
to  rally: 

The  command,  signal,  and  method  of  execution  are  the  same 
as  those  indicated  for  the  squad  (par.  416).  The  file  closer 
assists  as  usual  in  the  formation. 

In  campaign,  the  rally,  unless  executed  with  a  view  to  mak- 
ing a  charge,  should  habitually  be  follow^ed  as  soon  as  prac- 
ticable by  the  assembly  (par.  560). 

In  instruction,  however,  the  rally  should  frequently  be  exe- 
cuted and  the  platoon  practiced,  following  the  rally,  in  charg- 


214  CAVALEY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ing  without  reforming,  and  also  in  assembling  quickly  while 
marching.     These  exercises  are  of  exceptional  importance. 

The  rally  differs  from  the  assembly  in  that  it  is  always 
executed  at  a  very  rapid  gait  and  that  it  does  not  habitually 
result  in  a  condition  of  order.  It  is  an  emergency  movement, 
and  its  use,  except  for  instruction  purposes,  should  be  confined 
to  those  occasions  when  the  assembly  will  not  meet  the  situa- 
tion.    (Fig.  51.) 

The  Charge. 

562.  The  characteristic  feature  of  the  cavalry  charge  is 
utilizing  the  momentum  of  a  group  of  horses  at  high  speed  in 
connection  with  the  troopers'  use  of  their  weapons.  The  effect 
of  tha  impact  increases  with  the  speed  of  the  horses  and  the 
compactness  of  the  group.  Hence  the  normal  formation  for 
the  charge  is  line;  and,  as  line  is  not  a  formation  which  favors 
the  most  effective  use  of  the  pistol,  the  usual  weapon  for  the 
charge  is  the  saber. 

The  saber  charge  may  also  be  executed  in  foragers,  the 
troopers  then  ordinarily  attacking  in  couples.  Such  a  forma- 
tion would  be  ineifective  against  an  opposing  charge  in  close 
order,  but  it  may  be  employed  under  special  conditions ;  as 
when  tli«  enemy  is  dismounted  or  is  in  an  extended  formation 
or  v»'hen  the  ground  does  not  permit  a  charge  in  line.  Since 
there  is  then  no  cohesion  in  this  charging  group,  the  effect 
of  the  impact  is  greatly  reduced.  The  purpose  of  attacking  in 
couples  is  to  afford  mutual  support. 

Under  certain  conditions  the  pistol  may  be  advantageously 
used  for  the  charge.  A  command,  surprised  in  column  forma- 
tion on  a  road  or  other  place  where  obstacles  prevent  quick 
deployment,  may  then  break  through  a  hostile  force.  Column 
of  twos  would  enable  all  the  pistols  to  be  used  ;  column  of  fours, 
while  permitting  only  the  men  on  the  flanks  of  the  fours  to 
fire,  would  have  greater  momentum. 

The  charge  is  described  for  the  normal  case — the  attack  in 
line.  Speed  and  cohesion  are  the  essential  elements.  The 
charge  should  begin  at  a  short  distance  from  the  enemy.  The 
gaits  employed  to  reach  the  charging  point  will  depend  upon 
the  terrain  as  known  or  as  indicated  by  the  ground  scouts,  the 
condition  of  the  horses,  and  other  circumstances. 

The  charge  must  be  pushed  home. 


THE  CHARGE  AND  PISTOL  ATTACK.  215 

In  instruction  exercises  the  enemy  should  always  be  out- 
lined or  represented  (par.  21)  and  the  plan  of  the  exercise 
should  be  carefully  explained. 

563.  The  platoon  with  sabers  drawn,  marching  at  the  gallop 
or  at  the  extended  gallop,  the  leader,  when  at  about  50  yards 
from  the  enemy,  commands:  CHARGE.  Each  trooper  pushes 
his  horse  to  full  speed  and  takes  the  charging  position  (par. 
297).  The  troopers  close  on  the  leader,  but  do  not  permit 
their  horses  to  pass  the  leader's  horse. 

The  troopers  habitually  cheer  at  the  command  charge. 

564.  When  the  pistol  is  used  the  leader  raises  his  pistol  so 
that  the  troopers  can  see  it  and  commands :  1.  Raise,  2.  PIS- 
TOL. When  practicable,  this  is  done  before  charge  is  com- 
manded. The  leadier  takes  position  on  a  flank  of  the  leading 
element  of  the  column.  The  troopers  hold  their  fire  until  the 
leader  at  the  head  of  the  column  opens  fire.  Circumstances 
may  require  that  a  charge  of  this  character  be  made  in  line. 
The  troopers  then  close  on  the  leader,  who  takes  position 
in  the  rank  (par.  534). 

565.  The  charge  in  general  may  be  followed  by  the  rally, 
with  a  Yiew^  to  restoring  control  and  cohesion  and  charging 
back.  If  the  enemy  break  and  scatter  the  pursuit  may  be 
pressed  by  the  troopers  riding  individually  or  in  small  groups, 
thus  approximating  the  charge  as  foragers.  The  troopers 
keep  on  the  alert  for  the  command  or  signal  rally. 

The  charge  may  terminate  with  the  melee  resolving  itself 
into  a  series  of  individual  combats. 

The  platoon  should  be  assembled  as  soon  as  practicable 
(par.  485). 

''  The  Pistol  Attack. 

566.  The  pistol  attack  is  the  normal  form  of  mounted  attack 
in  all  cases  in  which  it  is  not  intended  to  use  the  momentum 
of  the  horses  as  one  of  the  weapons  of  the  attacking  force.  Ac- 
curacy in  firing  the  pistol,  rapidity  in  loading  and  in  perform- 
ing the  other  operations  connected  Avith  the  handling  of  the 
weapon,  the  ability  to  direct  and  control  the  horses,  and 
the  habitual  withholding  of  fire  until  within  close  range  of -the 
enemy  are  essential  features  in  the  successful  pistol  attack. 
The  particular  use  of  the  pistol  referred  to  in  par.  564  is  ia 
reality  a  special  case  of  the  charge  and  is  to  be  clearly  dis- 


216  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

tinguished  from  the  normal  pistol  attack,  which  is  habitually 
made  in  foragers  and  does  not  depend  upon  the  momentum  of 
the  horse  as  an  important  feature  in  its  execution.  The 
speed  of  the  horse  is,  however,  employed  that  the  trooper  may 
place  himself  within  close  range  of  his  enemy  and  in  the  rela- 
tive position  that  is  most  to  his  own  advantage  and  his 
enemy's  disadvantage. 

567.  The  platoon  being  deployed  as  foragers,  at  raise  pistol 
the  leader  commands :  PISTOL  ATTACK,  and  leads  the  platoon 
against  the  enemy.  The  guide  moves  up  abreast  of  the  leader 
and  on  his  left,  the  other  troopers  conforming  (par.  534). 
The  troopers  are  trained  in  instruction  exercises  to  withhold 
their  fire  habitually  until  within  10  yards  of  the  enemy  and 
to  avoid  firing  in  the  direction  of  their  own  men. 

In  action,  the  troopers  habitually  withhold  their  fire  until 
the  platoon  leader  opens  fire.  The  distance  from  the  enemy 
at  which  fire  is  opened  varies  with  the  rapidity  with  which 
the  opposing  forces  are  approaching  each  other  and  the  nature 
of  the  target,  but  should  in  no  case  be  more  than  25  yards. 

Following  the  attack,  pistols  must  be  reloaded  at  once.  The 
subsequent  movements  of  the  platoon  depend  on  the  situation 
that  results  from  the  attack.  The  attack  may  be  repeated, 
the  pursuit  taken  up  or  the  platoon  be  rallied. 

568.  The  pistol  attack  is  usually  executed  when  the  platoon 
is  deployed  as  foragers,  but  any  formation  (e.  g.,  column  of 
twos)  that  permits  the  effective  use  of  the  pistol  may  be  em- 
ployed if  conditions  favor  its  use. 

Ground  Scouts  and  Combat  Patrols. 

569.  The  special  mission  of  ground  scouts  (Def.  Scouts)  is 
to  ascertain  if  the  ground  in  the  immediate  front  is  suitable 
for  cavalry,  and,  if  not,  to  indicate  where  points  of  passage 
may  be  found. 

Ground  scouts  should  always  be  designated  in  advance  and 
trained  for  their  special  duty.  They  should  be  equipped  with 
wire  cutters. 

The  noncommissioned  officer  in  each  flank  four  (section 
chief  or  substitute  chief)  acts  as  a  ground  scout  unless  other- 
wise directed.     The  two  scouts  move  forward  at  the  gallop  at 


DISMOUNTED   ACTION.  217 

the  caution :  GROUND  SCOUTS  FORWARD,  or  at  the  first  indi- 
cation of  a  coming  charge  by  the  platoon. 

Ground  scouts  reconnoiter  the  ground  to  a  considerable  dis- 
tance in  front  of  the  command,  generally  from  200  to  500 
yards,  taking  care  to  be  able  to  communicate  quickly  and  in- 
telUciihly  the  information  ohtained. 

When  the  charge  is  sounded  or  ordered,  the  scouts  clear  the 
front  of  the  advancing  line  and  join  on  the  nearest  flank. 

570.  The  following  signals  should  be  used  by  ground  scouts : 
If  the  ground  is  unfavorable  the  signal  halt  will  be  given  and 
the  scout  will  ride  for  the  point  which  appears  practicable, 
pointing  toward  it  with  the  hand  or  weapon.  If  the  ground  is 
wholly  impracticable  the  scout  will  ride  back  to  report,  giving 
the  signal  halt. 

571.  In  addition  to  sending  out  ground  scouts  to  ascertain 
and  communicate  the  suitability  of  ground  for  mounted  action, 
cavalry  units  engaged,  or  about  to  engage,  in  mounted  combat 
will  usually  require  special  patrols  (Def.)  to  provide  for  im- 
mediate security  against  possible  attacks  from  the  flank  or 
rear.  Such  patrols,  usually  designated  "  combat  patrols," 
should  be  limited  in  number  and  strength  to  the  minimum  rea- 
sonably sufficient  for  the  purposes  indicated.  The  extent  to 
which  they  may  be  required  will  obviously  vary  with  the  con- 
ditions attending  the  combat.  The  presence  of  friendly  troops 
on  the  immediate  flanks  and  rear  of  the  attacking  unit  may,  in 
rare  cases,  render  them  unnecessary.  Whenever  ground 
scouts  or  combat  patrols  are  needed  for  the  proper  protection 
of  any  unit,  the  immediate  commander  of  the  attacking  line  is 
responsihle  that  necessary  provision  is  made  for  them. 

M0\^MENTS     FOR     PASSING     FROM      MOUNTED      ACTION      TO     DIS- 
MOUNTED  Action. 

572.  The  platoon  may  pass  to  dismounted  action  and  re- 
mount by  the  .commands  and  methods  corresponding  to  those 
prescribed  for  the  squad  (pars.  421,  442),  with  such  modifica- 
tions as  are  noted  below. 

573.  It  is  important  that  the  platoon  leader  move  quickly  to 
the  place  where  the  dismounted  platoon  is  to  form  (par.  575). 
He  must,  therefore,  not  be  delayed  in  connection  with  the  care 
of  his  horse.     On  dismounting  he  passes  his  reins  to  the  file 


218.        CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

closer  or  to  a  near-by  trooper  or  links  his  horse  to  a  convenient 
trooper's  mount,  according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 
The  horse  holder  nearest  the  leader  must  endeavor  to  assist  in 
quickly  freeing  the  leader  from  the  care  of  his  horse. 

574.  In  the  absence  of  orders  to  the  contrary,  the  file  closer 
performs  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  trooper  in  charge  of  the 
horse  holders  and  led  horses  of  the  squad  (par.  431).  Should 
the  file  closer's  orders  require  him  to  leave  the  horses,  after 
once  assuming  charge  of  them,  he  must,  before  doing  so,  see 
tlmt  a  responsible  and  properly  instructed  trooper  is  placed  in 
charge.  When  the  file  closer  dismounts  he  links  his  horse  to 
the  horse  of  the  most  convenient  trooper.  The  platoon  file 
closer  notices  particularly  that  the  platoon  leader's  horse  is 
promptly  taken  on  dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  and  promptly 
brought  up  for  remounting.  When  necessary  he  leads  the  pla- 
toon leader's  horse. 

575.  Whenever  the  platoon  passes  to  dismounted  action  the 
platoon  leader  (dismounted)  hurries  to  the  point  where  he 
desires  the  platoon  to  form.  The  section  chiefs  take  position 
on  his  right  and  left  and  the  dismounted  platoon  forms  in 
double  column  as  in  the  assembly  (par.  560),  each  trooper 
moving  at  the  ri«i  to  his  own  section.  The  platoon  leader 
may  command:  1.  Skirmishers,  2.  MARCH,  as  the  troopers 
approach.  The  first  trooper  of  the  right  section  to  arrive  near 
the  chief  then  takes  position  behind  the  latter  as  guide  of  the 
platoon,  the  other  troopers  of  the  right  section  deploy  on  his 
right,  and  the  troopers  of  the  left  section  deploy  on  his  left. 
Each  section  chief  supervises  the  deployment  and,  in  the  ab- 
sence of  other  instructions,  takes  position  on  the  outer  flank 
of  his  section. 

576.  The  platoon,  having  dismounted,  executes  any  neces- 
sary movements.  Fire  action  is  conducted  by  the  usual  com- 
mands and  methods.  If  the  platoon  be  not  divided  into  sec- 
tions it  forms,  and  is  maneuvered,  by  commands  and  means 
corresponding  to  those  employed  for  the  squad.  ( Fig.  51,  par. 
560.) 

Obstacles. 

577.  Obstacles  are  passed  as  in  the  squad  (par.  443).  The 
platoon  file  closer  and  the  section  chiefs  and  substitute  chiefs 
see  that  cautions  are  passed  back  and  other  necessary  steps 
taken  to  avoid  accidents. 


COMBAT  or  THE  PLATOON.  219 

Combat. 

578.  The  saber  charge  and  pistol  attack  are  the  characteristic 
features  of  mounted  combat.  The  rifle  is  the  habitual  weapon 
of  dismounted  combat.  In  exceptional  cases  the  pistol,  in 
addition  to  its  use  for  individual  protection,  may  be  employed 
in  the  charge  or  in  dismounted  combat ;  for  example,  in  a  dis- 
mounted rush  at  close  quarters  made  by  cavalry  not  armed 
with  the  bayonet.  Rifle  firing  mounted  may  also  be  excep- 
tionally employed  by  small  groups  of  specially  trained  men 
and  horses. 

579.  The  question  as  to  which  weapon  shall  he  used  is  one  of 
tactics.  Each  weapon  has  its  own  function  for  which  it  is 
best  suited  and  for  which  it  should  be  employed.  Nothing 
except  a  knowledge  of  the  general  principles  that  govern  the 
use  of  each,  experience,  and  sound  judgment  can  indicate  the 
weapon  to  be  selected  in  any  particular  case. 

For  a  mounted  attack  made  against  an  equally  well-trained 
and  well-mounted  enemy,  under  conditions  that  offer  no  special 
advantage  to  either  side  up  to  the  moment  of  contact,  and  over 
ground  favorable  to  its  use,  the  close-order  charge  M'ith  the 
saber  may  prove  more  effective  than  the  pistol  attack. 

For  an  attack  made  when  exposed  to  an  elfective  fire  of  any 
kind  the  normal  formation  (foragers)  for  the  pistol  attack  is 
much  less  vulnerable  than  the  normal  formation  (line)  for 
the  saber  charge.  The  pistol  attack  can  also  be  delivered  in 
many  cases  where  the  nature  of  the  ground  or  the  existence 
of  obstacles  will  make  an  effective  saber  charge  impossible. 
Where  the  terrain  does  not  favor  the  advance  at  high  speed 
of  a  close-order  line,  where  the  enemy  is  in  a  dispersed  forma- 
tion fas  foragers  or  skirmishers),  and  under  any  conditions  in 
which  actual  contact  can  be  avoided  by  the  enemy  if  he  so 
desire,  the  pistol  is  apt  to  prove  more  effective  than  the  saber. 

Where  so  outnumbered  as  to  render  defensive  tactics  neces- 
sary, where  the  terrain  does  not  permit  of  successful  mounted 
action,  where  opportunities  occur  for  suddenly  surprising  with 
fire  an  enemy  in  close  order,  and  in  other  similar  cases,  dis- 
mounted action  may  be  advisable. 

580.  Commanders  of  small  isolated  groups  should  be  particu- 
larly careful  not  to  resort  to  dismounted  action  unless  the 
jidvantages  of  such  a  course  are  clear ;  and,  when  such  action 


220  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

is  called  for,  should  be  on  the  alert  for  the  first  favorable 
opportunity  to  resume  mounted  action.  The  commander  of 
such  a  group  will  very  rarely  be  justified  in  resorting  to  dis- 
mounted action  if  a  reasonable  prospect  for  successful 
mounted  action  is  presented,  or  if  dismounted  action  involves 
the  material  separation  of  the  horses  from  the  dismounted 
line,  thus  dividing  the  command.  A  separation  of  the  dis- 
mounted line  and  horses  not  only  sacrifices  mobility  and 
weakens  the  firing  line  to  provide  horse  holders  and  guards, 
but,  in  the  presence  of  an  alert  enemy,  may  easily  lead  to 
disaster. 

581.  The  commands  and  formations  for  each  type  of  action 
are  those  appearing  in  the  corresponding  portions  of  the  drill 
regulations  (pars.  562-576). 

Once  facility  in  the  use  of  weapons,  familiarity  ^vith  the 
mechanism  of  the  movements,  and  skill  in  horsemanship  have 
been  acquired,  the  best  peace  training  for  combat  is  constant 
practice  in  field  exercises. 


THE  TROOP. 

Special  Provisions. 

582.  The  captain  is  the  commander  and  tactical  leader  of  the 
troop  (par.  461). 

583.  If  platoons  are  properly  instructed,  troop  drill  will  con- 
sist practically  in  the  leading  and  handling  of  the  platoons  by 
their  respective  leaders  in  accordance  with  the  captain's  will, 
as  indicated  by  his  own  example  and  movements,  his  com- 
mands and  signals.  Troop  drill  must  not  be  made  the  means 
of  giving  individual  instruction  or  elementary  collective  in- 
struction to  the  troopers  in  the  ranks  of  the  platoons,  though 
it  may  properly  be  used  to  test  the  thoroughness  of  such 
instruction. 

Teoop  Formations. 
(Plate  III.) 

584.  The  close-order  formations  of  the  troop  for  march, 
maneuver,  and  combat  are: 

(a)  Line  (single  or  double  rank). 

(&)  Line  of  double  columns. 

(c)  Line  of  platoon  columns. 

(d)  Column  of  platoons  (single  rank  only). 

(e)  Double  column. 
(/)  Column  of  fours. 
(g)  Column  of  twos. 
(h)  Column  of  troopers. 

Route  order  (par.  604)  is  a  modified  form  of  (e),  (/), 
(g),  or  (h).  The  formations  in  which  the  front  of  the  troop 
is  extended  to  a  greater  degree  than  corresponds  to  deploy- 
ment into  line  are  (i)  line  of  platoons  and  (j)  foragers.  The 
troop  may  also  be  extended  in  depth  (k). 

(a)  In  line  (single  or  double  rank)  each  platoon  is  in  line 
(par.  512-a).  The  platoons  are  abreast  of  each  other  or  are 
echeloned  as  prescribed  in  par.  587. 

(&)  In  line  of  double  columns  the, platoons,  each  in  double 
column,  are  abreast,  with  intervals  sufficient  for  the  troop  to 
deploy  into  line  toward  the  direction  of  march. 

221 


222  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(c)  In  line  of  platoon  columns  the  platoons,  each  in  column 
of  fours,  are  abreast  of  one  another,  with  intervals  sufficient 
for  the  troop  to  deploy  into  line  toward  the  direction  of  niarcli. 

(d)  In  column  of  platoons  the  platoons,  each  in  line,  are 
one  behind  another,  with  distances  equal  to  platoon  front,  less 
3  yards. 

(e),  (/),  (g),  ill).  In  double  column  and  in  column  of  fours, 
twos,  or  troopers  each  platoon  is  in  the  corresponding  forma- 
tion (par.  512).  The  distance  between  ihe  rear  of  any  platoon 
and  the  head  of  the  platoon  next  in  rear  is,  in  each  formation, 
the  same  as  the  distance  between  other  elements  of  the  cor- 
responding column. 

(/)  In  line  of  platoons  the  platoons  are  deployed  with  inter- 
vals sufficient  to  permit  the  troop  to  deploy  into  foragers 
toward  the  direction  of  march.  The  interval  is  based  upon 
foragers  being  placed  at  intervals  of  3  yards  unless  another 
interval  has  previously  been  designated.  The  platoons  are 
abreast  of  each  other  or  echeloned  as  in  par  587.  The 
platoons  are  usually  in  one  of  the  prescribed  close-order  for- 
mations (par.  512). 

(i)  In  foragers  each  platoon  is  in  foragers,  the  interval  be- 
tween platoons  being  the  same  as  between  adjacent  troopers 
in  foragers.  The  platoons  are  abreast  of  each  other  or 
echeloned  as  in  par.  587. 

[k)  The  extension  of  the  troop  in  depth  is  similar  to  that 
explained  for  the  squad  and  platoon. 

Ordeb. 

585.  A  troop  divided  into  platoons  is  in  order  when  its  com- 
ponent platoons  are  united  in  any  one  of  the  formations  pre- 
scribed for  the  troop  and  each  is  In  order  as  explained  in 
par.  515. 

586.  A  troop  that  is  not  divided  into  platoons  is  in  order 
when  it  fulfills  the  conditions  for  order  in  the  squad  (par. 
370)  ;  but  it  can  then  execute  only  the  movements  prescribed 
for  the  squad. 

Echeloning  of  Platoons. 

587.  Whenever  the  troop  advances  in  line,  line  of  platoons, 
or  foragers,  the  platoons  next  on  the  right  and  left  of  the 


TO  FORM  THE  TROOP.  223 

directing  platoons  are  echeloned  (without  interval)  upon  the 
base  platoon,  habitually  at  a  distance  of  3  yards;  this  will 
place  the  leaders  of  the  two  platoons  adjacent  to  the  base 
platoon  on  a  line  with  the  rank  of  the  latter.  A  platoon  not 
immediately  adjacent  to  the  base  platoon  is  similarly  eche- 
loned upon  the  nearest  platoon  on  the  side  of  the  base.  The 
platoons  are  not  echeloned,  as  above,  in  double  rank,  nor  in 
case  the  troop  be  marched  backward,  nor  when  the  troop  is 
halted.  In  extended  order,  the  captain  may,  by  instructions  to 
the  platoon  commanders,  increase  the  distance  at  which  the 
platoons  are  echeloned. 

When  the  troop,  marching  in  line,  is  halted,  the  base  platoon 
halts  at  once  (pars.  462.  465)  ;  each  of  the  other  platoons  halts 
when  the  rank  of  the  platoon  in  question  arrives  abreast  of 
the  rank  of  the  base  platoon. 

When  the  troop  advances  from  the  halt  in  line,  line  of 
platoons,  or  foragers,  the  base  platoon  moves  out  at  once ;  each 
of  the  other  platoons  moves  out  so  that  the  platoon  in  ques- 
tion will  be  properly  echeloned  as  required  above.  When- 
ever the  troop  in  line,  line  of  platoons,  or  foragers  is  marched 
to  the  rear,  the  platoons  other  than  the  directing  platoon 
take  a  correspondingly  slower  gait  (par.  335)  until  they  are 
echeloned  as  prescribed  above. 

The  principle  laid  down  in  this  paragraph  is  similarly  ap- 
plied in  the  execution  of  all  movements  terminating  in  any 
one  of  the  three  formations  named  above. 

To  FOKM  THE  TeOOP,  MOUNTED. 

588.  The  troop  is  habitually  formed  by_^  the  first  sergeant 
under  the  supervision  and  direction  of  the*  captain. 

589.  The  troop  habitually  forms  in  line  of  double  column; 
it  may  be  formed  in  column  of  fours  or  in  line  by  similar 
methods.  The  center  platoon  (par.  457)  is  the  base  platoon  of 
the  formation. 

590.  When  no  prior  division  into  platoons  and  sections  has 
been  made,  the  troop  is  formed  by  a  modification  of  the 
method  prescribed  for  forming  the  squad  (pars.  350-353). 
This  latter  method  may  also  be  used  when  the  troop,  though 
previously  divided  into  such  units,  is  formed  for  a  duty  at 


224  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

which  the  maintenance  of  such  division  is  unnecessary  (pars. 
501,  504). 

591.  All  organizations  must  be  practiced  in  forming  rapidly 
and  quietly,  not  only  in  those  formations  that  are  best  suited 
to  ordinary  garrison  routine,  but  also  in  such  as  may  have  to 
be  employed  under  the  varying  conditions  of  field  service,  in- 
cluding night  operations. 

592.  The  captain  habitually  gives  the  commands  for  mount- 
ing the  troop.  The  platoons  are  mounted  separately  by  their 
leaders  only  when  so  directed  in  advance  by  the  captain 
(par.  523).  The  captain  may  give  general  or  specific  instruc- 
tions as  to  the  type  of  inspection  to  be  made  by  platoon  com- 
manders at  the  formation  (par.  507).  In  the  absence  of  other 
instructions  the  platoon  commanders  do  not  delay  the  forma- 
tion by  any  special  inspection ;  they  always  note,  however, 
during  the  formation,  the  condition  of  the  troopers  and  the 
appearance  of  the  Tatter's  mounts,  equipment,  and  clothing, 
and  take  the  necessary  steps  to  remedy  defects. 

593.  To  form  the  troop  in  line  of  double  columns  (the  habit- 
ual formation)  the  first  sergeant  indicates  to  the  senior  non- 
commissioned officer  of  the  base  platoon  the  position  in  which 
that  platoon  is  to  form  and  the  direction  in  which  the  troop  is 
to  face,  takes  position  at  a  convenient  point,  and  commands ; 
FORM  TROOP. 

The  base  platoon  is  formed  in  double  column  on  the  desig- 
nated ground  as  prescribed  in  par.  520. 

The  platoons'  other  than  the  base  form  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  base  platoon,  so  taking  position  as  to  appear,  from  right 
to  left,  in  numerical  order  (par.  498).  The  platoons  form 
simultaneously  when  practicable,  otherv>ise  successively. 

To  indicate  to  his  section  chiefs  their  first  positions  (par. 
520)  each  noncommissioned  officer  forming  a  platoon  other 
than  the  base  takes  position  abreast  of,  and  facing  in  the  same 
direction  as,  the  noncommissioned  officer  forming  the  base 
platoon,  habitually  with  the  interval  necessary  to  permit  the 
troop,  Avhen  formed',  to  execute  line.  This  interval  may  be 
decreased  by  prior  indication  of  the  first  sergeant  when  re- 
stricted space  or  other  conditions  make  such  action  desirable. 
It  should  not  be  less  in  any  case  than  12  yards. 

The  first  sergeant,  while  the  platoons  are  forming,  rides 
where  he  can  best  supervise  the  formation,  noting  any  neces- 


TO  FORM  THE  TROOP.  225 

sary  adjustments  between  platoons  that  may  be  required  (par. 
497).  He  also  notes  whether  the  noncommissioned  officer 
forming  each  platoon  is  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer 
who  should  be  present  for  duty  with  that  platoon. 

Each  noncommissioned  officer  forming  a  platoon,  as  soon  as 
his  platoon  is  formed,  takes  position  facing  to  the  fronit,  3 
yards  in  front  of  the  guide  of  his  platoon  (par.  533). 

As  soon  as  the  platoons  are  formed  and  the  noncommis- 
sioned officers  forming  them  have  taken  position  as  above 
indicated  the  first  sergeant  takes  position  about  8  yards  in 
front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  troop  and  commands: 
REPORT.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  with  each 
platoon  reports  (par.  506).  The  first  sergeant  then  faces  the 
captain,  who  takes  position  to  receive  the  report  about  12 
yards  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  troop.  The  first 
sergeant  reports  and  takes  his  post  (par.  603).  Each  non- 
commissioned officer  forming  a  platoon,  if  not  the  platoon 
leader,  takes  his  position  as  file  closer  as  soon  as  the  first 
sergeant  starts  to  his  post. 

594.  If  the  first  sergeant  is  to  call  the  roll  "(par.  505)  he 
omits  the  command  REPORT,  calls  the  roll,  and  reports  to  the 
captain   (pars.  506,  507,  592). 

595.  When  necessary  the  troop  may  be  formed  in  accordance 
with  similar  principles  in  column  of  fours  or  in  line.  The 
platoons  then  form  as  indicated  in  par.  524. 

The  commands  are:  FORM  TROOP  IN  COLUMN  OF  FOURS 
or  FORM  TROOP  IN  LINE. 

596.  When  the  troop  is  formed  in  accordance  wuth  the  com- 
mands and  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad,  if  the  duty  be 
one  requiring  a  division  of  the  troop  into  platoons  and  sec- 
tions (pars.  501,  502),  the  first  sergeant,  having  called  the 
roll,  may  fall  out  the  noncommissioned  officers  and  command 
CALL  OFF  to  assist  in  locating  the  desired  points  of  division 
between  the  platoons.  The  troopers  count  aloud  consecutive 
numbers  from  right  to  left.  The  first  sergeant  divides  the 
troop  into  platoons  and  assigns  the  noncommissioned  officers 
to  platoons,  if  such  assignment  has  not  already  been  made 
(par.  504). 

The  roll  having  been  called,  the  division  into  platoons  made, 
and  the  noncommissioned  officers  assigned,  the  first  sergeant 
commands:  FORM  YOUR  PLATOONS. 
38218  °— IS 15 


226  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  seDior  noucommissioued  officer  assigned  to  each  platoon 
completes  the  formation  of  his  platoon  by  assigning  and  placing 
his  noncommissioned  officers  as  may  be  required  to  complete 
the  formation  of  the  platoon.  He  then  (unless  the  platoon  is  in 
column  of  fours)  commands,  1.  Sections,  2.  COUNT  FOURS, 
and  takes  position  facing  to  the  front  as  \yhen  i-eporting  to 
the  first  sergeant  (par,  593).  When  all  the  noncommissioned 
(»fficei*s  formmg  platoons  have  faced  to  the  front  the  first 
sergeant  reports  the  troop  (par.  506). 

597.  The  troop  may  also  form  after  the  troopers  have 
mounted  (pars.  352,  526). 

To  FoEM  THE  Troop,  Dismounted. 

598.  A  dismounted  formation  of  the  troop  is  conducted  on 
tlie  same  principles  as  the  corresponding  mounted  formation. 

When  the  troop  is  formed  as  in  pars.  593  and  595,  but  the 
verification  is  made  by  the  first  sergeant  instead  of  in  each 
platoon  (par.  594),  the  first  sergeant,  if  the  troop  be  armed 
with  the  rifle,  commands,  .just  before  calling  the  roll :  1.  In- 
spection, 2.  ARMS;  3.  Right  shoulder,  4.  ARMS  (par.  91). 
The  first  sergeant  gives  the  same  commands  just  before  calling 
the  roll  if  the  troop,  being  armed  with  the  rifle,  is  formed  in 
accordance  with  the  methods  prescribed  in  par.  596.  The 
formation  in  both  cases  is  completed  in  the  usual  manner. 

Positions  of  Officers,  Noncommissioned  Officers,  and 
Others  Out  of  Ranks. 

(Plate  III.) 

599.  (a)  The  habitual  position  of  the  captain  in  all  close- 
order  formations  is  6  yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  base 
platoon.  In  extended  order  he  may  take  position  as  in  close 
order  or  go  wherever  necessary  (par.  448). 

(b)  Except  where  otherwise  indicated,  the  positions  of 
platoon  leaders  and  file  closers  are  the  same  as  shown  in 
par.  528. 

600.  In  certain  column  formations  of  the  squadron  (par. 
676)  modifications  occur  in  the  positions  of  the  captain  and 
first  sergeant  as  stated  below. 


POSTS  IN  THE  TROOP.  227 

601.  In  par.  603  positions  prescribed  for  certain  platoon 
leaders  and  others  out  of  ranks  are  stated  as  "  on  the  flank  of 
the  column."  In  such  cases  each  is  separated  from  the  trooper 
of  the  adjacent  element  of  the  colitmn  by  the  usual  interval 
between  troopers.  The  particular  flank  upon  which  platoon 
leaders  are  posted  in  the  cases  in  question  is  regulated  by  par. 
602;  all  take  position  on  the  same  flank.  File  closers  and 
other  enlisted  men  out  of  ranks  who  march  on  the  flank  of 
the  column  are  on  the  flank  opposite  to  that  prescribed  for 
the  chiefs  of  platoons. 

602.  When  the  formation  taken  by  the  troop  involves  a 
change  of  formation  in  the  platoons  from  line  to  either  double 
column,  column  of  fours,  column  of  twos,  or  column  of  troop- 
ers, platoon  leaders,  for  whom  a  position  on  a  flank  is  pre- 
scribed in  par.  603,  take  position  on  the  right  flank  of  the 
column  unless  the  latter  be  formed  through  the  execution,  by 
the  platoons,  of  fours  right;  in  this  excepted  case  they  take 
position  in  the  left  flank  of  the  column.  The  subsequent 
movements  of  platoon  leaders  are  indicated  in  pars.  605,  606. 

603.  Platoon  leaders:  In  double  column,  and  in  column  of 
fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  the  leader  of  each  platoon  in  rear  of 
the  base  platoon  is  posted  on  the  flank  of  the  column  (par. 
601)  abreast  of  the  leading  element  of  the  corresponding 
platoon. 

First  sergeant:  In  line,  line  of  double  columns,  and  line  of 
platoon  columns,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  file  closer  of  the  base 
platoon;  in  column  of  platoons,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  file 
closer  of  the  rear  platoon ;  in  double  column,  and  in  column  of 
fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  rear  platoon, 
in  the  trace  of  the  guide  of  the  platoon;  in  extended  order  he 
accompanies  the  captain  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

Guidon:  When  the  guidon  is  carried  uncased  the  noncom- 
missioned oflicer  carrying  it  accompanies  the  captain,  unless 
otherwise  directed,  riding  1  yard  to  the  rear  and  1  yard  to 
the  right  of  the  captain's  horse.  If  the  guidon  be  cased,  the 
noncommissioned  officer  carrying  it  rides  as  an  extra  file  closer 
near  the  head  of  the  column  unless  assigned  duties  requiring 
a  different  position. 

Platoon  file  closers:  In  column  of  platoons  the  file  closer 
of  a  platoon  having  less  than  16  trooperg  in  the  ranks  takes 


22'8         CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ptosition  on  the  left  of  the  rank.  If  the  column  be  marched  to 
the  rear  by  a  movement  of  fours  he  turns  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  the  fours  and  continues  in  the  same  flank  as  before. 

In  double  column,  and  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers, 
the  file  closer  of  each  platoon  is  posted  on  the  flank  of  the 
column  abreast  of  the  rear  element  of  the  corresponding 
platoon  (pars.  601,  602). 

Buglers:  "When  the  troop  is  alone  one  bugler  accompanies 
the  captain,  riding  1  yard  to  the  rear  and  1  yard  to  the  left 
of  the  captain's  horse.  The  other  bugler  habitually  rides  as 
an  extra  file  closer  near  the  head  of  the  column,  but  may  be 
placed  in  ranks.  The  buglers  of  a  troop-in-squadron  both  ride 
as  file  closers,  or  in  the  ranks,  when  the  buglers  of  the  squad- 
ron are  not  assembled  elsewhere. 

Extra  file  closers,  if  not  attached  to  any  platoon,  take  posts 
in  the  general  manner  indicated  in  par.  528.  The  first  ser- 
geant designates,  if  necessary,  the  four  near  which  each  such 
file  closer  shall  ride.  When  the  platoon  file  closer  takes  posi- 
tion on  the  flank  of  the  platoon  any  extra  file  closer  takes  a 
similar  position  on  the. left  of  the  platoon  file  closer. 

604.  Being  in  double  column,  or  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or 
troopers,  at  the  command  ROUTE  ORDER  all  chiefs  of  platoon 
and  file  closers  and  others  riding  on  the  flank  of  the  column 
as  above  prescribed  take  position  in  the  column  as  follows, 
unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  captain : 

The  guidon  and  one  bugler  at  the  head  of  the  column ;  the 
leader  of  each  platoon,  except  the  rear  platoon,  in  front  of 
his  respective  platoon ;  the  leader  of  the  rear  platoon  and  the 
first  sergeant  in  rear  of  the  column ;  each  platoon  file  closer, 
except  the  file  closer  of  the  rear  platoon,  in  rear  of  his  re- 
spective platoon ;  the  file  closer  of  the  rear  platoon  in  front 
of  that  platoon ;  all  other  men  riding  out  of  ranks  at  the  rear 
of  their  respective  platoons.  The  additional  personnel  thus 
placed  between  any  two  platoons  rides  abreast  so  as  to  mini- 
mize the  corresponding  increase  in  the  length  of  the  column. 
In  each  element  so  formed  the  senior  habitually  rides  on  the 
right  of  a  junior.  Distances  throughout  the  column  are  4 
feet  unless  greater  distances  between  platoons  be  specially 
authorized. 


TO  MOUNT   AND  DISMOUNT.  a«9 

MO^^MENTS,  BY   FOUKS,   TwOS,   AND  TkOOPERS. 

605.  Movements  by  fours,  twos,  and  troopers  are  executed 
in  the  troop  by  commands  and  methods  corresponding  to  those 
prescribed  for  the  platoon  (pars.  470,  537).  The  following 
rules  govern  the  movements  of  the  captain,  chiefs  of  platoons, 
and  others  out  of  ranks : 

(a)  In  wheeling  about  by  fours  from  double  column  or 
column  of  fours,  all  out  of  ranks  turn  about  individually  in 
the  same  direction  as  the  fours  wheel  and  hasten  to  their 
new  posts.  Platoon  leaders  and  file  closers  posted  on  a  flank 
of  the  column  do  not  change  to  the  opposite  flank  of  the 
column.  A  similar  rule  applies  to  the  corresponding  move- 
ment executed  in  colunm  of  twos  or  troopers. 

(&)  In  wheeling  about  by  fours  from  line  all  out  of  ranks 
habitually  pass  around  the  flanks.  The  captain  and  chiefs 
of  platoons  may  pass  between  the  fours  wdien  necessary. 

(c)  When  the  column  is  wheeled  by  fours  into  line  tow^ard 
the  side  of  the  file  closers,  each  chief  of  platoon  usually  passes 
between  his  leading  four  and  the  rear  four  of  the  preceding 
platoon;  or,  if  necessary,  may  pass  around  the  flanks.  All 
others  pass  around  the  flanks. 

606.  Being  in  double  colunm  or  in  column  of  fours,  tw^os,  or 
troopers,  to  cause  the  platoon  leaders  of  rear  platoons  to 
change  flanks,  the  captain  commands :  1.  Leaders  on  the  right 
(left)  flank,  2.  MARCH.  All  platoon  leaders,  file  closers,  and 
others  out  of  ranks,  and  posted  on  a  flank  of  the  column,  turn 
individually  away  from  the  column,  pass  around  the  rear  of 
the  column,  and  take  corresponding  positions  on  the  opposite 
flank.  The  platoon  leaders  pass  between  the  file  closers  and 
the  column. 

607.  Vv'hen  the  troop,  marching  in  line,  executes  fours  right 
(left)  the  leaders  of  platoons  in  rear  of  the  new  base  cause 
their  platoons  promptly  to  cover* in  column.  Conversely,  in 
advancing  in  line  after  executing  fours  right  (left)  from 
column  of  fours,  platoons  other  than  the  new  base  promptly 
conform  to  the  principles  of  par.  587. 

To  Mount  and  Dismount. 

608.  The  troop  mounts  and  dismounts  by  the  commands  and 
methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  and  platoon.     If  the  troop 


230  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

formation  does  not  afford  sufficient  space  for  a  platoon  leader 
to  take  position  as  indicated  in  par.  529,  he  takes  position 
facing  his  platoon  and  on  a  flank  of  the  leading  rank  or  ele- 
ment. 

Rests,  at  Ease,  and  Route  Oeder. 

609.  Rest,  at  ease,  and  route  order  are  executed  as  in  the 
squad  (par.  359),  with  the  following  further  provisions: 

Being  at  route  order,  if  the  command,  1.  Troop,  2.  ATTEN- 
TION, be  given,  all  resume  the  attention,  but  retain  their 
places  in  route  order  unless  the  captain  commands:  POSTS. 
At  the  latter  command  all  take  their  regular  posts  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  corresponding  column,  and  the  platoons  close 
to  the  usual  distance. 

Being  at  route  order  in  any  column  formation  named  above, 
if  any  other  be  commanded  it  is  taken  by  the  usual  methods, 
but  with  positions  and  distances  corresponding  to  route  order, 
unless  attention  and  posts  be  commanded  as  above. 

In  emergencies  any  movement  may  be  executed  from  route 
order  by  the  same  commands  and  methods  as  from  attention. 
Except  as  stated  above,  positions  are  the  same  in  formations 
at  route  order  and  at  attention. 

To  Dismiss  the  Troop. 

610.  The  captain  directs  the  first  sergeant:  DISMISS  THE 
TROOP. 

The  officers  fall  out.  The  first  sergeant  commands:  DIS- 
MISS YOTJR  PLATOONS.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officei- 
of  each  platoon  gives  the  necessary  commands  (par.  530)  as 
soon  as  his  platoon  has  the  necessary  space. 

If  no  division  of  platoons  has  been  made  the  first  sergeant 
dismisses  the  troop  as  prescribed  for  the  squad  (par.  360). 

Alignments. 

611.  The  commands  and  principles  explained  for  the  squad 
apply  (pars.  362-364).  The  leader  of  the  center  platoon  is 
the  basis  of  the  alignment.  The  leader  of  each  of  the  other 
platoons  aligns  himself  upon  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon  and 
the  guide  of  each  platoon  takes  positions  3  yards  directly  in 


LEADING  AND  CHANGES  OF  DIRECTION.  231 

rear  of  liis  respective  leader.  The  first  sergeant  and  platoon 
file  closers  assist  in  securing  a  correct  alignment,  giving  the 
necessary  cautions  to  prevent  the  troopers  from  closing  in  to 
such  an  extent  as  to  cause  gaps  in  the  line. 

Platoon  leaders  and  file  closers  look  to  the  front  as  soon  as 
they  have  aligned  themselves. 

Prompt  dressing  must  be  insisted  upon  and  the  command 
FRONT  not  delayed  unduly  on  account  of  minor  inaccuracies. 

The  captain  may  verify  the  alignment  of  the  platoon  leaders 
from  a  position  at  the  flank  of  the  line  of  platoon  leaders, 
facing  along  the  front  of  that  line,  or  he  may  command 
FRONT  vvithout  leaving  his  regular  position. 

At  the  command  dress,  when  the  troop  is  in  column  of 
platoons,  each  platoon  leader  gives  the  command  front  from 
his  position.  He  does  not  go  to  the  flank  to  verify  the  align- 
ment of  the  platoon  unless  directed  by  the  captain  to  do  so. 

Leading  the  Teoop. 

612.  The  troop  is  led  by  the  captain  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  of  leading  as  heretofore  explained  (pars.  323-325, 
448-460). 

The  leader  of  the  base  platoon  habitually  follows  the  cap- 
tain at  6  yards  distance.  The  other  platoon  leaders  regulate 
on  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon,  observing  the  echelon  as 
required  (par.  587).  In  each  platoon  the  guide  follows"  his 
platoon  leader  while  each  trooper  regulates  on  the  guide  of  his 
2Jlafoo7i. 

Whenever  the  captain  ceases  temporarily  to  lead  the  troop, 
and  designates  no  leader  to  take  his  place,  the  chief  of  the 
base  platoon  acts  as  directing  leader  of  the  troop. 

Changes  of  Dikection. 

613.  The  troop  executes  changes  of  direction  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principles  of  leading  (pars.  329,  471).  In  line 
each  chief  of  platoon  habitually  so  regulates  his  movements  as 
to  keep  abreast  of  the  rank  of  the  platoon  next  toward  the 
base,  the  rank  of  his  own  platoon  being  parallel  to  the  rank 
of  the  base  platoon.     Should  a  platoon  oa  a  flank  be  unable 


232  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

thus  to  keep  its  relative  position  without  unduly  extending 
the  gallop,  its  leader  may  increase  the  depth  of  the  echelon 
upon  the  adjacent  platoon;  but  cohesion  in  the  platoon  must 
be  maintained. 

The  troop  executes  the  turn  and  half  turn  by  the  commands 
indicated  for  the  squad.  The  captain  Is  not,  however,  re- 
stricted to  any  special  radius.  Abrupt  changes  of  direction  on 
a  large  front  are  difficult  to  execute  smoothly. 

In  line  of  columns  the  change  of  direction  is  made  by  the 
same  commands  and  on  the  same  principle  as  when  in  line, 
except  that  the  platoons  are  not  habitually  echeloned  on  the 
base. 

The  troop,  in  any  column  formation,  changes  direction  by 
the  commands  and  methods  indicated  in  par.  396.  In  column 
of  platoons  each  platoon  successively  changes  direction  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  provision  of  par.  386,  the  platoon  leader  tim- 
ing his  command  of  execution  as  there  indicated  (par.  471). 

The  Oblique. 

614.  Being  in  any  formation  except  double  column  or  for- 
agers: 1.  Right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH.  Each  platoon  exe- 
cutes right  half  turn  if  in  line  or  column  half  right  if  in  any 
column  formation.  The  platoon  on  the  flank  toward  which 
the  oblique  is  made  is  the  base  during  the  oblique  in  any  line 
formation.  The  original  direction  is  resumed  by  a  corre- 
sponding movement  at  the  commands :  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  troop  may  be  moved  a  few  yards  to  a  flank  by  the 
commands:  1.  Troopers  right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH  (par. 
885). 

OBSTACLES  IN  THE  LINE  OF  MARCH. 

615.  Each  platoon  leader  takes  the  necessary  steps  in  con- 
nection with  the  passage' of  obstacles  (par.  577). 

The  captain,  when  necessary,  indicates  to  the  platoon  leader 
at  the  head  of  a  column  the  existence  of  an  obstacle  (par. 
443).  Each  platoon  leader  is  responsible  that  the  caution  is 
passed  on  to  the  platoon  next  in  rear. 


COMMANDS  AND  SIGNALS  IN  TROOP.  233 

COMMANDS    AND    CORRESPONDING    ARM    SIGNALS. 

{See  also,  in  connection  with  pars.  468-470,  similar  lists  in  pars. 
381  and  540.  The  list  does  not  include  variations  of  the  com- 
mands due  to  designating  a  special  base,  interval,  etc.) 

616. 


Commands. 

Pars. 

Arm  Signals. 

1.  Platoons,    right    (left)    turn; 

618, 624 

Platoons— change       direc- 

2.  MARCH. 

tion.t 

1,  Platoons,      double     column; 

021 

Platoons— double  column.f 

2.  MARCH, 

1.  Line  of  platoon  columns,  2.  MARCH. 

622 

Line  of  platoon  columns.* 

1.  Column  of  platoons,  2.  MARCH 

623 

Column — platoons. t 

1.  Double  column,  2.  MARCH 

625 

Double  column.* 

1.  Line  of  platoons,  2.  MARCH 

632 

Platoons — extend. t 

1.  Platoons,  at  (so   many)  yards  dis- 

634 

None. 

tance;  2.  MARCH. 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

t  In  signals  marked  thus,  the  preparatory  signal  consists  of  more  than  one  ele- 
ment; the  signal  of  execution  follows  the  last  element  of  the  preparatory  signal. 


Movements  Executed  cy  the  Troop,  Close  Order. 


LINE   or    single    RANK. 


617.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MAUCH:  When  executed  from 
any  formation  except  line,  double  rank  (par.  Qll-a),  the  com- 
mands are:  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH  (par.  478). 

In  each  of  the  movements  referred  to  in  (a),  (&),  (c),  and 
(cZ)  the  movements  of  the  base  platoon  conform  to  par.  323. 
Should  th*e  captain  halt  the  base  platoon,  all  the  other  pla- 
toons halt  abreast  of  it  (par.  .587).  Should  the  base  platoon 
continue  the  march,  the  leader  of  each  of  the  other  platoons 


234  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

takes  the  gait  of  the  base  platoon  when  his  own  platoon  is 
echeloned  as  prescribed  in  par.  587.  In  the  march  in  line  the 
leader  of  each  platoon  other  than  the  base  is  habitually  abreast 
of  the  rank  of  the  adjacent  platoon  on  the  side  toward  the 
base. 

(a)  Single  rank  is  formed  from  double  rank  at  the  com- 
mand :  1.  Single  rank,  2.  MARCH.  The  formation  is  a  suc- 
cessive one  (par.  4S1).  Each  platoon  other  than  the  base 
gains  the  interval  (par.  481-&)  necessary  to  form  single  rank. 
The  base  platoon  forms  single  rank  (par.  554)  as  soon  as  it 
has  the  necessary  space  (par.  481-g).  Each  of  the  other 
platoons  executes  single  rank  so  as  to  complete  the  movement 
before  arriving  at  its  Dosition  in  the  new  formation  (par. 
481-g). 

( h )  From  line  of  double  columns  and  line  of  platoon  columns 
the  platoons  form  simultaneously.  If  the  base  platoon  con- 
tinues the  march,  the  platoons  other  than  the  base  decrease 
the  pace  until  each  gets  its  proper  position  in  echelon  (par. 
587).     (PI.  IV.) 

(c)  From  column  of  platoons:  The  formation  is  a  successive 
one  (par.  481).  Each  platoon  other  than  the  base  is  led  by  its 
leader  to  its  position  in  the  new  formation  (par.  481-&). 
(PI.  VI.) 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par,  337-6. 

(d)  From  double  column,  and  from  column  of  fours,  twos, 
or  troopers:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par.  481). 
Each  platoon  other  than  tlie  base  is  led  toward  its  new  posi- 
tion as  in  (c),  forming  line  so  as  to  complete  that  movement 
before  its  position  in  the  new  troop  formation  is  reached 
(par.  481-5'). 

During  the  actual  formation  of  line  by  platoons  in  rear  of 
the  base  the  rear  elements  make  a  second  increase  of  gait, 
unless  already  moving  at  the  gallop  (pars.  837-&,  481-/0. 

618.  TO   THE   FLANK. 

(a)  From  column  of  platoons:  1.  Platoons  right  (left)  turn, 
2.  MARCH. 

Executed  simultaneously  by  the  platoons  (pars.  462,  471). 
To  halt  the  troop  the  captain  commands:  1.  Troop'  2.  HALT, 
as  the  platoons  complete  the  turn  (par.  .587).  Each  platoon 
leader  in  the  absence  of  the  command  halt  from  the  captain 


TROOP  MOVEMENTS,  CLOSE  ORDER,  235 

commands:  Forward  (par.  386),  so  as  to  add  MARCH  as  his 
platoon  completes  a  chan.2:e  of  direction  of  90°  (pars.  325.  326). 

(&)   From  column  of  fours :    1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

Line  may  be  formed  from  column  of  twos  or  troopers  as 
exi^lained  in  par.  400. 

DOUBLE    BANK. 

619.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH:  Being  in  single  rank: 
1.  Double   rank,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  platoon  other  than  the  base  forms  double  rank  (par. 
551),  closes  toward  the  base,  and  takes  Its  position  (par.  4Sl-g) 
in  double  rank.  The  troop  forms  double  rank,  to  the  direc- 
tion of  march,  from  no  formation  except  single  rank. 

620.  TO  THE  FLANK:  Being  in  double  column:  1.  Fours 
right    (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  principle  indicated  in  par.  452  applies  to  movements  for 
a  short  distance  to  the  flank.     (PI.  YII.) 

LINE    OF    DOUBLE    COLUMNS. 

621.  Except  as  used  for  the  original  formation  of  the  troop 
for  a  duty  (par.  593)  or  for  a  subsequent  assembly  of  the  troop 
(par.  635),  line  of  double  columns  is  formed  in  close  order, 
only  from  the  simultaneous  execution  by  platoons  of  double 
column   (par.  415). 

The  platoons  in  line  of  platoons  (extended  order)  may  take 
double  column  when  conditions  render  that  formation  useful 
(par.  632).  The  captain  may  command:  1.  Platoons,  double 
column,  2.  MARCH;  or  may  cause  the  base  platoon  to  form 
column,  the  other  platoons  habitually  conforming  (par.  632)  ; 
or  a  platoon  leader  may  cause  his  platoon  to  execute  double 
column  whenever,  in  extended  order,  conditions  render  the 
formation  desirable. 

LINE   OF   PLATOON    COLUMNS. 

622.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  478)  :  1.  Line  of 
platoon    columns,  2.  MARCH, 

(a)  From  line  and  line  of  double  columns:  The  platoons 
execute  column  simultaneously,  regulating,  on  the  base. 


236  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(&)  From  column  of  platoons:  The  formation  is  a  successive 
one  (par.  481).  All  the  platoons  execute  column  (par.  481-^)  ; 
those  in  rear  of  the  base  are  then  led  to  their  positions  (par. 
481-&,  e). 

(c)  From  double  column:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one 
(par.  481).  The  base  platoon  executes  column  (par.  481-^'). 
Each  of  the  rear  platoons,  as  soon  as  it  gains  the  necessary 
space  from  the  platoon  in  front,  forms  column  (par.  481-^7) 
and  moves  to  its  position  (par.  481-&,  e). 

(d)  From  column  of  fours:  As  in  (c),  except  that  each 
platoon  in  rear  of  the  base  moves  at  once  to  its  position. 

(e)  From  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  as  in  (d),  except  that 
each  platoon  forms  column  of  fours  before  taking  its  place  in 
the  new  formation  (par.  331). 

TO  THE  FLANK:  (a)  From  column  of  platoons:  1.  Fours 
right    (left),  2.  MARCH. 

(b)  From  column  of  fours:  1.  Platoons,  column  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

COLL^MN   OF  PLATOONS. 

623.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  478)  :  1.  Col- 
umn of  platoons,  2.  MARCH. 

(a)  From  line:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par. 
481).  Each  platoon  other  than  the  base  is  led  to  its  place  in 
the  column  (par.  481-&,  d).     (PI.  IV.) 

(b)  From  line  of  double  columns  and  line  of  platoon  col- 
umns: The  movement  is  a  successive  one  (par.  481).  The 
platoons  other  than  the  base  successively  move  out  (par. 
481-&),  form  line  (par.  481-^'),  and  take  their  places  in  the 
column  (par.  481-d). 

(c)  From  double  column:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one 
(par.  481).  The  base  platoon  forms  line  at  once  (par.  481-g). 
The  other  platoons  take  a  correspondingly  slower  gait,  and 
successively  execute  line,  each  completing  the  latter  movement 
(par.  4Sl-g)  in  time  to  take  the  gait  of  the  platoon  in  front 
when  at  platoon  distance  from  the  latter, 

(d)  From  column  of  fours:  The  platoons  form  line  simulta- 
neously, the  leader  of  each  rear  platoon  maintaining  the 
gait  of  the  base. 

(e)  From  column  of  twoj  or  troopers:  The  platoons  other 
than  the  base  successively  execute  line  while  moving  at  the 


TROOP   MOVEMENTS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  237 

increased  gait,  each  completing  the  movement  in  time  to  take 
the  gait  of  the  platoon  in  front  when  at  platoon  distance  from 
the  latter  (par.  331,  481-<7). 

624.  TO  THE  FLANK. 

(a)  From  line:  1.  Platoons  right  (left)  turn,  2.  MARCH. 
The  platoon  on  the  flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted is  the  base  during  the  movement  as  well  as  in  the  new 
formation  (par.  326).  The  commands  of  the  platoon  leaders 
are  given  as  in  pars.  471.  618. 

(1))  From  line  of  platoon  columns:  1.  Form  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

DOUBLE    COLUMN. 

625.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  478)  :  1.  Double 
column,  ?..  MARCH. 

(a)  From  line:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par. 
481).  The  base  forms  double  column  (par.  481-^).  The  pla- 
toons other  than  the  base  successively  form  double  column 
(par.  481-g)  and  take  their  places  in  the  new  formation  (pars. 
481-&,  d). 

(&)  From  line  of  platoon  columns:  The  formation  is  a  suc- 
cessive one.  The  base  forms  double  column  (par.  481-^).  The 
platoons  other  than  the  base  move  toward  their  places  (par. 
481-&,  (Z),  each  forming  double  column  before  taking  its  posi- 
tion in  the  new  formation  (par.  481-^). 

(c)  From  line  of  double  columns:  The  movement  is  a  suc- 
cessive one  (par.  481).  The  platoons  other  than  the  base 
successively  move  to  their  places  in  the  new  formation  (par. 
481-&,  d). 

(d)  From  column  of  platoons:  The  formation  is  a  successive 
one  (par.  481).  The  platoons  form  double  column  at  once 
(par.  481-r/).  Each  platoon  in  rear  of  the  base  then  closes 
to  4  feet  distance. 

(e)  From  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers:  The  base  ex- 
ecutes double  column  (par.  4Sl-g).  The  formation  is  a  suc- 
■cessive  one  (pars.  331.  481).  The  platoons  other  than  the  base 
successively  execute  double  column  at  the  increased  gait,  each 
on  completing  the  change  of  formation  (par.  481-r/)  taking 
position  in  the  column  at  a  distance  of  4  feet  from  the  platoon 
in  front.     (Pis.  V  and  YII.) 


238  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

626.  TO  THE  FLANK:  Being  in  double  rank:  1.  Fours 
right  (left),  2.  MARCH  (par.  452). 

COLUMN    OF   FOURS. 

627.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  47S)  :  1.  Col- 
umn, 2.  MARCH. 

(a)  From  line:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par. 
481).  The  base  forms  column  (par.  481-^).  Each  platoon 
other  than  the  base  successively  executes  column  and  takes  its 
place  in  the  new  formation  (par.  337-c).     (PI.  VII.) 

( b )  From  line  of  double  columns :  The  base  executes  column 
(par.  481-5').  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par.  481). 
The  platoons  other  than  the  base  successively  execute  column 
(par.  481-^),  moving  out  so  as  to  take  their  proper  places  in 
the  new  formation  (par.  481-?),  d).     (PI.  V.) 

(c)  From  line  of  platoon  columns:  The  formation  is  a  suc- 
cessive one  (par,  481).  The  base  advances.  The  platoons 
other  than  the  base  successively  move  to  their  proper  places 
in  the  column  (par.  481-5,  d). 

(d)  From  column  of  platoons:  The  platoons  execute  column 
simultaneously  and  should  have  their  proper  distances  in  the 
column. 

(e)  From  double  column:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one 
(par.  481).  The  base  executes  column  at  once;  each  of  the 
other  platoons  executes  column  when  it  has  the  necessary 
space  (par.  481-^). 

(/)  From  column  of  twos  or  troopers:  The  formation*  is  a 
successive  one  (pars.  331,  481).  The  base  executes  column 
(par.  4:81-g).  Each  platoon  other  than  the  base  takes  a  cor- 
respondingly faster  gait  (par.  335),  successively  executes  col- 
umn at  the  increased  gait  and  takes  the  gait  of  the  base  when 
at  4  feet  distance  from  the  preceding  platoon. 

628.  TO  THE  FLANK:  From  line:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH. 

COLUMN    OF    TWOS    OR    TROOPERS. 

629.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  478)  :  1.  Column 
of  twos  (troopers),  2.  MARCH. 


TROOP  MOVEMENTS,  EXTENDED  ORDER.  239 

(a)  From  line,  line  of  double  columns,  line  of  platoon  col- 
umns, column  of  platoons,  double  column,  and  column  of  fours: 
The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (pars.  331,  481).  The  base 
executes  column  of  twos  (troopers).  The  platoons  other  than 
the  base  successively  execute  column  of  twos  (troopers),  each 
(par.  545-&)  moving  out  so  as  to  take  (or  retain)  its  proper 
place  in  the  column  (par.  481-&,  d)  at  4  feet  distance. 

(&)  Column  of  troopers  from  column  of  twos  is  formed  on 
the  same  principle. 

Movements  Executed  by  the  Troop — Extended  Okdee. 

630.  The  principles  applicable  to  the  squad  and  platoon  apply 
to  the  troop.  The  interval  between  platoons  in  line  of  platoons 
is,  except  where  a  special  interval  is  ordered,  based  upon  4 
yards  per  man  (including  the  space  occupied  by  the  trooper). 

631.  Line  of  platoons  or  foragers,  to  any  direction  other  than 
the  direction  of  march  is  executed  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  of  par.  481-c. 

line   or   PLATOONS. 

632.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH  (par.  478)  ;  1.  Line  of 
platoons,  or  1.  Line  of  platoons,  at  so  many  yards;  2.  MARCH 
(par.  460). 

(a)  From  line,  line  of  double  columns,  line  of  platoon  col- 
umns, column  of  platoons,  double  column,  column  of  fours,  twos, 
or  troopers:  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par.  481). 
The  base  advances  (par.  481-?>).  Each  platoon  other  than 
the  base  is  led  by  its  leader  to  its  new  position  (par.  481-e). 
The  platoons  habitually  conform  to  tlie  formation  taken  by 
the  base  platoon,  but  each  platoon  leader  is  allowed  whatever 
latitude  is  necessary  in  adapting  the  formation  of  his  platoon 
to  the  ground  and  conditions. 

(h)  From  foragers:  1.  Platoons,  assemble,  2.  MARCH.  Ex- 
ecuted simultaneously  by  the  platoons. 

FORAGERS. 

633.  TO  THE  DIRECTION  OF  MARCH:  .1.  Foragers,  or  1. 
Foragers,  at  so  many  yards;  2.  MARCH. 


240  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(a)  From  any  close  order  formation  (including  double 
rank) :  The  formation  is  a  successive  one  (par.  481).  The  base 
platoon  deploys  ay  stated  in  par.  481-^.  Each  of  the  other 
platoons  is  led  by  its  leader  (par.  481-&,  e)  and  deployed 
so  as  to  take  its  place  (par.  4Sl-g). 

(&)  From  line  of  platoons:  The  platoons  deploy  simultane- 
ously. 

634.  The  troop  may  be  extended  in  depth.  The  captain 
commands:  1.  Platoons,  at  (so  many)  yards  distance;  or,  1. 
On  such  platoon,  at  (so  many)  yards  distance;  2.  MARCH.  The 
movement  is  executed  on  the  principles  indicated  in  par.  413. 
The  captain  indicates  to  his  base  platoon  the  objective  and 
gait.  In  the  absence  of  special  indication  from  the  captain 
the  platoon  leaders  regulate  the  formation  taken  by  his  platoon 
during  the  movement. 

The  Assembly. 

635.  The  assembly  may  be  commanded  when  the  troop  is  in 
any  extended  order  formation,  in  a  close  order  formation  but 
not  in  order  (e.  g.,  following  the  rally),  or  dispersed  in  dis- 
order. The  commands  are  always :  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH, 
and  the  general  method  of  execution  is  always  the  same.  The 
troop  habitually  assen\bles  in  line  of  double  columns;  but 
double  column,  column  of  fours,  or  line  may  be  formed  in  con- 
nection with  the  assembly  upon  special  indication  from  the 
captain. 

636.  In  every  case  the  platoons,  if  not  already  assembled,  are 
assembled  by  their  respective  leaders  (pars.  559-560).  The 
captain  leads  in  the  desired  direction,  and  at  the  desired  gait, 
the  platoon  that  is  to  be  the  base  of  the  assembly.  The  other 
platoons  are  led  toward  the  base  platoon  in  the  most  con- 
venient formation  and  at  a  correspondingly  faster  gait.  Each, 
in  the  absence  of  other  indication  from  the  captain,  approaches 
the  base  platoon  in  double  column  so  as  to  take  its  respective 
place  in  line  of  double  columns.  The  captain  may  follow  the 
commands  for  the  assembly  by  the  caution :  DOUBLE  COLUMN 
(COLUMN  or  LINE).  Such  caution  is  given  before  the  platoon 
nearest  the  base  takes  its  position  in  line  of  double  columns. 
The  base  platoon  advances  in  the  formation  indicated  by  the 
captain's  caution;  the  other  platoons  complete  any  necessary 


i\ 

TROOP  MOVEMENTS,  EXTENDED   ORDER.  24J| 

change  of  formation  before  taking  their  places  in  the  assem- 
bled troop. 

In  the  assembly  the  troops  habitually  preserve  the  relative 
order  existing  at  the  moment  the  movement  is  ordered ;  and, 
if  an  assembly  in  a  column  formation  be  ordered  from  any 
previous  line  formation,  the  platoons  habitually  enter  the  col- 
umn in  accordance  with  the  usual  rule  (par.  4Sl-d).  When 
for  any  reason  the  foregoing  rule  is  not  readily  applicable,  pla- 
toons in  the  absence  of  special  instructions  take  position  as 
they  arrive,  extending  the  formation  from  the  base  in  such 
manner  that  the  latter  shall  remain  the  center  platoon  in  line 
or  the  leading  platoon  in  column. 

637.  The  assembly  from  the  rally  or  whenever  not  in  order 
is  conducted  on  the  principles  of  the  formation  of  the  troop 
(par.  593).  The  platoon  leader  nearest  the  captain  takes 
position  at  once  6  yards  in  rear  of  the  latter.  The  other 
platoon  leaders  take  positions  abreast  ol  the  rank  of  the  base 
platoon  if  the  latter  continues  to  advance  (par.  587).  Each 
platoon  assembles  as  in  par.  5G0.  Section  chiefs  take  their 
positions  promptly.  The  assembly  from  a  condition  of  disorder 
is  an  important  movement  and  should  be  practiced  frequently 
at  all  gaits. 

The  Rally. 

638.  Being  in  any  formation,  or  not  formed  or  in  disorder : 
RALLY. 

Each  platoon  leader  rallies  his  platoon  (unless  already  as- 
sembled or  rallied)  and  moves  it  toward  the  captain,  as  rap- 
idly as  is  consistent  with  maintaining  cohesion  in  the  rank. 
If  the  platoon  be  not  already  in  line,  the  latter  formation  is 
taken  while  the  platoon  is  approaching  the  captain's  position. 
The  first  platoon  to  arrive  takes  position  in  line  in  rear  of  the 
captain ;  the  others  extend  the  line  so  that  the  base  platoon 
shall  remain  the  center  unit.  Unless  the  troop  is  to  charge 
at  once,  the  assembly  (par.  637)  should  be  executed  at  the 
earliest  possible  moment  if  the  rally  result  in  a  loss  of  order. 
If  a  prompt  assembly  of  the  troop  is  for  any  reason  not  prac- 
ticable, partial  order  may  quickly  be  secured  by  the  command : 
1.  Platoons,  2.  COUNT  FOURS.  If  it  is  necessary  to  reduce  the 
front  of  the  troop  the  captain  cautions :-  COLUMN  OF  PLA- 

38218  °— 18 16 


U2  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

TOONS  (COLUMN,  COLUMN  OF  TWOS,  COLUMN  OF  TROOP- 
ERS). The  platoon  leaders  cause  their  platoons  to  conform  in 
the  most  practicable  manner. 

The  Mounted  Attack. 

the  teoop  acting  alone. 

639.  When  the  troop  acting  alone  charges  it  is  ordinarily 
divided  into  two  parts,  viz,  the  attacking  line  and  the  reserve, 
but  a  platoon  is  never  kept  in  rear  except  when  the  captain 
so  directs. 

If  the  attacking  line,  or  reserve,  consists  of  only  one  platoon, 
it  is  led  by  its  chief ;  if  it  consists  of  two  or  more  platoons,  it 
is  led  by  the  senior  chief  of  platoon  or  by  the  captain. 

When  a  chief  of  platoon  takes  post  as  leader  of  two  or  more 
platoons,  his  place  as  platoon  leader  is  taken  by  the  corre- 
sponding file  closer.  Whenever  the  rally  or  assembly  is  or- 
dered, the  captain  may  cause  the  guidon  to  be  displayed  at  the 
rallying  or  assembly  point  indicated. 

640.  In  instruction  exercises  the  enemy  must  always  be  out- 
lined or  represented  by  troopers,  who  may  carry  flags,  undei 
command  of  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer.  In  the 
beginning  of  this  instruction  these  m^n  will  occupy  fixed  posi- 
tions ;  later  they  will  be  instructed  to  ride  so  as  to  represent 
the  movements  of  an  aggressive  enemy.  The  captain  will  ex- 
plain to  the  commander  the  object  of  the  exercise  and  tell 
him  what  to  do. 

641.  The  platoons  of  the  attacking  line  may  attack  in  one 
line  or  successively,  as  from  column  of  platoons  with  extended 
distances.  The  captain,  in  addition  to  designating  a  reserve, 
may  direct  one  or  more  platoons  to  execute  any  special  mis- 
sion. In  the  absence  of  special  instructions  from  the  captain 
the  leader  of  each  platoon,  or  combination  of  platoons,  that  is 
acting  separately  uses  his  discretion,  endeavoring  so  to  em- 
ploy his  command  as  best  to  assist  in  carrying  out  the  general 
plan  indicated  by  the  captain's  orders. 

642.  The  reserve,  in  the  absence  of  special  instructions,  fol- 
lows the  attacking  line  at  from  100  to  150  yards  in  readiness 
to  support  the  attacking  line,  meet  a  counter  attack,  or  press 
the  pursuit,  as  occasion  may  require. 


THE  MOUNTED  ATTACK,  TROOP.  243 

A  platoon  designated  for  a  flank  attack  io  so  conducted  by 
its  leader  as  to  fall  opportunely  upon  the  enem;y's  flank. 

If  a  flank  platoon  be  so  designated,  it  attacks  from  that 
flank  unless  otherwise  directed. 

To  guard  against  a  flank  attack  or  an  enveloping  attack 
the  captain  may  detach  a  platoon  to  move  to  the  threatened 
flank  so  as  to  take  an  enveloping  attack  in  flank  or  meet  a 
flank  attack.  If  a  flank  platoon  be  so  designated,  it  acts  on 
the  corresponding  flank  unless  otherwise  directed.  When  no 
platoon  is  specially  designated  for  flank  guard  the  correspond- 
ing duties  fall  upon  the  reserve. 

643.  The  captain's  commands  should  include  an  indication 
of  the  objective,  unless  the  latter  is  obvious,  designate  the 
elements  of  the  attack,  and  state  any  special  mission  that  is 
assigned  to  any  element.  The  captain's  orders  also  usually 
include  an  indication  of  the  weapon  to  be  used  by  the  several 
elements  of  the  attack  and  may  presci'ibe  the  formations  to 
be  employed.  All  details  not  prescribed  by  the  captain  are 
left  to.  the  discretion  of  the  commanders  of  the  several  ele- 
ments into  w:hich  the  attack  is  divided. 

Where  the  same  weapon  is  to  be  used  by  all  it  is  ordinarily 
drawn  at  the  captain's  orders  before  the  instructions  for  the 
attack  are  given.  Otherwise,  each  commander  gives  the  proper 
orders  for  drawing  saber  or  raising  pistol. 

644.  The  troop  being,  for  example,  in  line,  marching  at  a 
gallop  with  sabers  drawn,  the  captain  may  command:  Objec- 
tive, Cavalry  in  front;  Second  and  Third  platoons,  to  the 
charge;  First  platoon,  flank  attack;  Fourth  platoon;  reserve. 
Each  element  of  the  attack  proceeds  at  once  to  carry  out  its 
orders.  The  leader  of  the  attacking  line  (whether  the  cap- 
tain or  a  lieutenant)  directs  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon 
to  close  on  him  before  charge  is  ordered  (par.  563).  In  other 
respects,  the  charge  is  conducted  as  explained  for  the  platoon 
(pars.  562-564). 

The  troop  being,  for  example,  in  column  of  platoons,  march- 
ing at  a  gallop,  no  weapon  drawn,  the  captain  may  command 
(the  objective  being  obvious)  :  First  and  Second  platoons,  pistol 
attack;  Third  platoon,  reserve;  Fourth  platoon,  left  flank 
guard.  The  leader  of  the  attacking  line  commands :  1.  As 
foragers,  2.  MARCH,  and  attacks  with  the  pistol  according  to 
the  principles  explained  for  the  platoon   (pars.  566-568)   as 


244  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

soon  as  the  second  platoon  completes  its  deployment  on  the 
left  of  the  first  platoon.  The  commanders  of  the  third  and 
fourth  platoons  move  to  their  positions,  drawing  saber  or 
raising  pistol  in  their  discretion. 

Should  the  captain  command,  for  example :  First  and  Second 
platoons,  pistol  attack  in  two  lines;  Third  platoon,  charge 
enemy's  right  flank;  Fourth  platoon,  reserve,  the  third  platoon 
may  charge  with  the  saber. 

Should  the  captain  cause  pistols  to  be  raised  before  order- 
ing the  attack  all  use  the  pistol. 

The  above  are  only  examples  to  indicate  the  character  of 
the  captain's  commands.  The  actual  orders  must  meet  the 
situation  presented. 

645.  At  the  first  indication  for  the  charge  the  ground  scouts 
move  out  from  the  flanks  of  the  attacking  line  (par.  569) 
unless  otherwise  specially  directed.  The  captain  usually  sends 
out  any  necessary  combat  patrols ;  but  each  leader  of  a  sepa- 
rate group  is  responsible  that  any  further  steps  necessary  for 
the  immediate  protection  of  his  own  flanks  are  taken.. 

THE    TROOP    IN    THE    SQUADRON. 

646.  The  troop  in  squadron,  in  mounted  attack,  has  no  re- 
serve, but  may  have  a  support  in  the  discretion  of  the  major. 
If  on  the  flank  of  the  squadron,  its  own  flank  defense  must 
be  provided  by  the  captain  in  the  absence  of  instructions. 

Passing  from  Mounted  Action  to  Dismounted  Action. 

647.  The  movements  are  executed  by  commands  and  methods 
corresponding  to  those  already  explained  for  the  squad  and 
platoon,  with  the  following  modifications  and  additions 
thereto : 

The  horses  of  the  captain  and  of  one  bugler  who  accom- 
panies the  captain  are  held  by  the  other  bugler  or  by  a  man 
specially  designated  in  advance  for  that  duty. 

The  horses  of  the  first  sergeant  and  other  men  out  of  ranks, 
and  not  otherwise  specially  provided  for,  are  secured  in  the 
manner  indicated  in  the  corresponding  provisions  for  the 
squad  and  platoon. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  TROOP.  245 

648.  The  guidon,  in  the  absence  of  instructions  to  the  con- 
trary, takes  g-eneral  charge  of  the  led  horses  and  performs  the 
duties  prescribed  for  the  trooper  in  charge  of  the  horse  holders 
and  horses  (par.  431).  Should  one  of  the  platoon  file  closers 
be  senior  to  the  guidon,  the  first  sergeant  cautions  such  file 
closer  and  the  guidon  in  advance  that  the  senior  will  have 
general  charge  of  the  led  horses  of  the  troop  while  such  senior 
remains  with  the  horses.  In  the  absence  of  other  special  in- 
structions, the  file  closer  of  each  platoon  reports  the  additional 
troopers  of  his  i)latoon  to  the  troop  commander  after  Nos.  2 
dismount.  The  guidon  remains  in  general  charge  of  the  other 
horse  holders  and  the  horses,  a  designated  trooper  having, 
under  the  guidon,  immediate  charge  of  the  horse  holders  and 
horses  of  each  platoon. 

649.  The  captain  gives  any  desired  special  instructions  to 
the  guidon  and  sees  that  proper  measures  for  security  are 
taken.  On  dismounting,  the  first  sergeant  remains  near  the 
horses  long  enough  to  see  that  the  designated  noncommis- 
sioned officer  is  in  charge  and  is  making  proper  provision  as 
regards  the  horses ;  he  then  joins  the  captain.  Any  sergeants 
who  may  be  extra  file  closers  without  special  assignment  of 
duties  join  the  captain ;  other  extra  file  closers  not  specially 
assigned  join  the  platoons  with  which  they  were  riding.  The 
captain,  on  dismounting,  .takes  position  at  the  point  where  he 
desires  the  base  platoon  to  form  or  otherwise  indicates  that 
position  to  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon.  The  platoon  that 
was  the  base  when  the  troop  dismounted  remains  the  base  of 
the  dismounted  formation  in  the  absence  of  other  indication. 
Its  leader  takes  position  at  once  in  rear  of  the  captain,  or  as 
indicated  by  the  latter,  and  the  dismounted  platoon  forms  in 
double  column  or  as  directed.  The  other  platoons  form  so 
as  to  extend  the  formation  in  line  of  double  columns,  or  as  the 
captain  orders,  in  accordance  with  the  principles  governing 
the  assembly  of  the  troop.  The  captain  may  direct  the  pla- 
toon leaders  to  proceed  at  once  to  designated  positions  without 
forming  the  troop  as  a  unit.  In  all  cases  the  measures  taken 
must  he  such  as  to  prevent  unnecessary  exposure  of  men  or 
horses  to  hostile  vieiv  or  fire. 


246  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Dismounted  Combat   (The  Troop), 
general  considerations. 

650.  When  the  troop,  acting  alone,  dismounts  to  engage  in 
deliberate  fire  action  the  captain  makes  provisions  for  the  led 
horses  (par.  649)  and  at  once  sends  out  scouts  (usually  two 
experienced  men  detailed  and  trained  as  such)  to  the  front  to 
reconnoiter.  The  captain  reconnoiters  usually  in  rear  of,  but 
in  touch  with  the  scouts,  and  accompanied  by  platoon  com- 
manders and  the  first  sergeant ;  he  explains  to  them  the  pur- 
pose of  the  attack,  gives  them  all  the  information  he  has  about 
the  enemy  and  about  our  own  troops  in  the  vicinity,  points  out 
to  them  the  objective  of  each  platoon  if  they  are  to  advance, 
or  indicates  the  parts  of  the  line  to  be  held  by  each  if  to  take 
the  defensive. 

651.  The  advance  of  a  troop  after  dismounting,  in  anticipa- 
tion of  fire  action  either  in  attack  or  defense  is  made  in  close 
order,  preferably  in  column  of  fours  or  twos,  until  the  proba- 
bility or  the  actual  encountering  of  hostile  fire  makes  it  advis- 
able to  deploy.  After  such  deployment  the  advance  (now  desig- 
nated the  approach)  may  be  continued  in  line  of  skirmishers 
or  other  suitable  formation  before  opening  fire.  The  approach 
dismounted  may  often  be  facilitated,  better  advantage  taken 
of  cover,  and  losses  minimized  by  using  formations  such  as 
line  of  platoons  each  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  or  a  suc- 
cession of  thin  lines  at  varying  distances,  one  directly  behind 
the  other  or  echeloned.  The  choice  of  a  formation  would 
depend  upon  conditions,  such  as  the  effectiveness  of  the  en- 
emy's fire,  cover  afforded  by  folds  of  the  ground,  or  by  natural 
obstacles.  If  the  deployment  is  found  to  be  premature,  it  will 
generally  be  better  to  assemble  the  troop  and  resume  the 
advance  in  close  order. 

The  formations  mentioned  as  facilitating  the  advance,  viz, 
line  of  platoons  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  or  a  succession 
of  thin  lines  find  application  most  frequently  in  the  approach 
when  the  ground  is  so  difficult  or  the  cover  so  limited  as  to 
make  it  desirable  to  take  advantage  of  the  few  favorable 
routes  on  which  to  piove  forward. 

652.  The  approach  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is,  if  pos- 
sible,  made   by   sections   under   the   immediate  direction   of 


DISMOUNTED   COMBAT,  TROOP.  247 

platoon  commanders  with  wide  intervals  between  skirmishers. 
By  so  advancing  continuous  control  of  the  line  is  assured.  If 
that  method  is  not  practicable,  then  the  successive  lines  are 
made  up  of  one  or  more  men  from  each  four  of  a  platoon  on 
the  skirmish  line,  the  command  being :  1.  Numbers  1  (or  such 
number  or  numbers),  first  (or  such)  platoon,  forward;  2. 
MARCH. 

The  captain  having  pointed  out  in  advance  the  selected  posi- 
tion in  front  of  the  lines  which  are  to  be  occupied,  the  desig- 
nated numbers  move  to  the  front.  The  line  thus  formed  pre- 
serves the  original  intervals  as  nearly  as  practicable;  when 
this  line  has  advanced  to  the  indicated  position,  a  second  line 
is  sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so  on  at  irregular 
distances  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced.  Upon  arriving 
at  the  indicated  position  the  first  line  is  halted.  Successive 
lines  upon  arriving  halt  on  line  with  the  first,  and  the  men 
take  their  proper  places  in  the  skirmish  line. 

Ordinarily  each  line  is  made  up  of  one  man  or  more  from 
each  four  of  a  platoon,  and  the  men  of  a  four  are  sent  for- 
ward in  order  from  right  to  left.  The  first  line  is  led  by  the 
platoon  leader  of  that  platoon,  the  second  by  its  file  closer, 
and  so  on.  Under  favorable  conditions  the  successive  lines 
may  be  made  up  from  all  of  the  platoons  which  are  deployed 
as  skirmishers. 

The  movement  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  conditions 
make  double  time  necessary. 

After  the  entire  troop  has  reached  the  line  a  further  ad- 
vance in  the  same  manner  may  be  found  advisable. 

The  movement  iti  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to  cross 
a  wide  stretch  swept  or  likely  to  be  swept  by  artillery  fire  or 
heavy  long-range  rifle  fire  which  can  not  profitably  be 
returned.  Its  purpose  is  the  building  up  of  a  strong  skirmish 
line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a  fire  fight.  This  method  of 
advancing  by  thin  lines  results  in  serious,  though  temporary, 
loss  of  control  over  the  successive  platoons  of  the  troop.  Its 
advantages  lie  in  the  fact  that  it  offers  a  less  definite  target, 
hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

653.  These  are  merely  suggested  methods  of  advancing  pre- 
liminary to  opening  the  fire  attack;  other  formations  better 
adapted  to  particular  occasions  or  terrain  may  be  devised. 
The  best  formation  is  that  which  advances  the  line  the  far- 


248  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

the^  without  drawing  the  enemy's  fire,  or,  if  he  does  open  fire, 
then  with  the  least  loss  of  men,  time,  and  control. 

THE    FIKE    ATTACK. 

654.  The  principles  involved  in  the  fire  attack  are  discussed 
under  Dismounted  Fire  Action,  the  Squadron  (par.  716),  and 
necessary  modifications  as  to  details  made  under  Dismounted 
Action,  the  Regiment  (par.  760). 

When  the  enemy's  fire  makes  it  impracticable  for  the  troop 
to  move  forward  in  one  of  the  above-mentioned  formations, 
it  may  advance  by  rushes. 

Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  By  platoon  (section)  from  tlie 
right  (left),  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  flank  arranges  the  de- 
tails for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution  of  the  rush  and 
puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable.  If  necessary  he 
designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated  unit.  When  about 
to  rush  he  causes  the  men  of  the  indicated  unit  to  suspend 
firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat  on  the  ground  but  in  readi- 
ness to  spring  forward  instantly.  The  leader  of  the  rush  (at 
the  signal  of  the  platoon  leader  if  the  latter  is  not  the  leader 
of  the  rush)  commands.  Follow  me,  and,  running  at  top  speed, 
leads  the  fraction  to  the  new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes 
it  to  open  fire.  The  leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if 
it  has  not  been  previously  designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new  line, 
the  next  like  fraction  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon  leader 
without  further  command  from  the  captain,  and  so  on,  succes- 
sively, until  the  entire  troop  is  on  the  line  established  by  the 
first  rush. 

The  men  must  be  trained  to  lie  perfectly  still  until  the  com- 
mand (since  any  movement  might  warn  the  enemy  of  the  rush 
to  follow),  then  at  command  to  spring  instantly  and  together 
to  their  feet,  run  at  top  speed,  and  drop  together  at  command. 

655.  In  an  advance  by  rushes,  leaders  of  platoons  in  firing 
positions  are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  an  effective  fire  to 
cover  the  advance  of  each  rushing  fraction.  Troops  are  cau- 
tioned so  to  fire  as  not  to  endanger  the  flanks  of  advanced  por- 
tions of  the  firing  line.    The  husbanding  of  ammunition  for  the 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  TROOP.  249 

final  stages  of  the  fire  attack  must  be  constantly  impressed  on 
the  men. 

The  rush  of  a  troop  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the  captain 
on  the  same  principle  as  described  for  the  platoon.  The  cap- 
tain leads  the  rush,  platoon  leaders  lead  their  respective  pla- 
toons, and  file  closers  follow  the  line  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running,  becomes 
impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that  carries  the  attack 
closer  to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling,  should  be  employed. 

The  charge  corresponds  to  that  described  in  the  squadron. 

656.  Supports  and  reserves:  The  troop  dismounted,  acting 
alone,  should  in  the  fire  attack  always  have  a  reserve.  It  may 
be  small — a  single  platoon  or  less — but  the  reserve  should  not 
be  omitted,  although  the  suiyport  may  be  and  usually  is  dis- 
pensed with.  When  no  support  is  provided,  the  reserve  per- 
forms the  double  function  of  support  and  reserve;  that  is,  it 
prot'ects  the  flanks  and,  under  orders  of  the  captain,  strength- 
ens the  firing  line,  if  necessary. 

In  the  advance  and  during  the  fire  attack  comhat  patrols 
on  one  or  both  flanks  are  especially  important.  Each  leader  of 
a  flank  platoon  details  a  man  to  watch  for  signals  of  the  patrol 
or  patrols  on  his  own  flank. 

When  ordered  to  reinforce  the  firing  line,  the  support,  if 
there  be  one,  is  kept  assembled  as  long  as  practicable.  In  the 
advance  it  adopts  suitable  formations  following  the  principles 
laid  down  in  par.  651.  If,  after  deploying,  a  favorable  oppor- 
tunity arises  to  hold  it  for  some  time  in  a  close-order  forma- 
tion, it  should  be  reassembled.  It  is  again  deployed  when 
necessary.  The  movements  of  the  support  as  a  whole  and  the 
dispatch  of  reinforcements  from  it  to  the  firing  line  are  con- 
trolled by  the  captain.  In  order  to  be  felt,  the  support  of  a 
single  troop,  being  necessarily  small,  should  ordinarily  be  sent 
to  the  firing  line  as  a  whole  and  not  be  fed  in  a  few  men  at  a 
time,  which  would  produce  little  effect. 

A  reinforcement  sent  to  the  firing  line  alw^ays  carries  extra 
bandoliers.  It  joins,  deployed  as  skirmishers,  passes  the 
extra  belts  of  ammunition  to  skirmishers  already  on  the  line, 
and,  if  necessary,  gets  from  them  the  range  and  target  loca- 
tion. The  leader  of  the  reinforcement  places  it  in  an  interval 
in  the  line  if  a  suitable  one  exists  and  commands  it  thereafter 


250  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

as  a  unit.  If  no  such  interval  exists,  the  reinforcement  is 
advanced  with  increased  intervals  between  skirmishers,  each 
man  occupies  the  nearest  interval  in  the  firing  line,  and  each 
then  obeys  the  nearest  chief  of  section  or  platoon  leader. 

A  reinforcement  joins  the  firing  line  as  quickly  as  possible 
without  exhausting  the  men. 

The  original  platoon  and  section  divisions  of  the  troop  in  the 
firing  line  should  be  maintained,  if  possible,  and  should  only 
be  broken  up  if  the  mingling  of  reinforcements  renders  it 
unavoidable. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  accompanying  a  reinforcement  take  over  the  duties  of 
others  of  like  grade  who  have  been  disabled,  or  they  distribute 
themselves  so  as  best  to  exercise  their  normal  functions. 
Conditions  vary  and  no  exact  rules  can  be  prescribed.  It  is 
essential  that  all  assist  in  mastering  the  increased  difficulties 
of  control. 

FIEE. 

657.  Ordinarily  rifles  are  loaded  and  extra  ammunition  in 
bandoliers  is  distributed  before  the  troop  deploys  for  combat. 
In  close  order  the  troop  executes  the  firings  at  the  command 
of  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the  center. 

Firings  in  close  order  are  exceptional. 

658.  Signals  during  fire  action:  The  voice  is  generally  in- 
adequate for  giving  commands  during  firing,  and  must  be  re- 
placed by  signals  of  such  character  that  proper  fire  direction 
and  control  are  assured  (par.  989).  To  attract  attention  sig- 
nals must  usually  be  preceded  by  the  whistle  signal  (short 
blast).  A  fraction  of  the  firing  line  about  to  rush  should  avoid 
using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  indication  to  suspend  firing. 
Officers  and  men  behind  the  firing  line  can  not  ordinarily  move 
freely  along  the  line,  but  each  must  depend  on  the  other's 
watchfulness,  in  addition  to  his  own,  and  make  use  of  pre- 
scribed signals  (par.  997).  All  should  place  themselves  so  as 
to  see  their  immediate  superiors  and  subordinates. 

The  bugler  with  the  captain  assists  by  observing  the  enemy, 
the  target,  and  the  fire  effect,  and  by  watching  for  and  trans- 
mitting commands. 

The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence  of  the  ground  in  relation 
thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  instruction  in  marks- 
manship are  treated  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  TROOP.  251 

659.  Volley  fire  has  limited  application.  It  has  a  moral 
effect  both  on  the  troops  employing  it  and  on  those  subjected 
to  it.  It  may  be  employed  to  restore  control.  In  defense  it 
may  be  used  in  the  early  stages  of  the  action  if  the  enemy 
presents  a  large  compact  target.  It  may  be  used  by  troops 
especially  posted  on  the  flank  or  in  a  dominant  position  in 
rear  of  an  attacking  force  for  the  purpose  of  aiding  the 
advance  by  so-called  fire  of  position.  When  the  ground  near 
the  target  is  such  that  the  strike  of  bullets  can  be  seen  from 
the  firing  line,  ranging  volleys  may  be  used  to  correct  the 
sight  setting. 

In  combat,  volley  firing,  if  used,  is  executed  habitually  by 
platoon. 

660.  Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in 
attack  or  defense. 

661.  Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally  used 
(a)  in  the  early  stages  of  combat  to  steady  the  men  by 
habituating  them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing;  (&)  to  produce  a 
short  burst  of  fire. 

FIRE   DIRECTION. 

662.  When  the  troop  is  large  enough  to  be  divided  into 
platoons,  it  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  command  it  in 
combat.  His  efficiency  in  managing  the  firing  line  is  measured 
by  his  ability  to  enforce  his  will  through  the  platoon  leaders. 
Having  indicated  clearly  what  he  desires  them  to  do,  he  avoids 
interfering  except  to  correct  serious  errors  or  omissions. 

The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  his  troop  or  of  designated 
platoons.  He  designates  the  target  and,  when  practicable, 
allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon.  Before  beginning 
the  fire  action  he  determines  the  range,  announces  the  sight 
setting,  and  indicates  the  class  of  fire  to  be  employed  and  the 
time  to  open  fire.  Thereafter  he  observes  the  fire  effect,  cor- 
rects material  errors  in  sight  setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of 
the  ammunition  supply,  and  causes  the  distribution  of  such 
extra  ammunition  as  may  be  received. 

FIRE    CONTROL. 

663.  In  combat  the  platoon  is  the  /?re  unit.  From  20  to  35 
rifles  are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 


282  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands  or 
directions  of  the  captain,  having  tirst  taken  such  precautions 
to  insure  correct  sight  setting  and  clear  description  of  the 
target  or  aiming  point  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires 
(par.  141)  ;  thereafter  he  gives  such  additional  commands 
or  directions  as  are  necessary  to  exact  compliance  with  the 
.captain's  will.  He  corrects  the  sight  setting  when  necessary. 
When  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  he  desig- 
nates an  aiming  point  (by  one  of  the  methods  described  in 
par.  141  if  necessary)  and  orders  fire  upon  it,  first  announcing 
the  proper  sight  setting  to  correct  the  error  of  aim. 

In  general,  platoon  leaders  observe  the  target  and  the  effect 
of  the  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  captain's  commands ; 
they  observe  and  regulate  the  rate  of  fire.  The  file  closers 
watch  the  firing  line  and  check  every  breach  of  fire  discipline. 
Chiefs  of  section  transmit  commands  when  necessary,  observe 
the  conduct  of  their  sections  and  abate  excitement,  assist  in 
enforcing  fire  discipline,  and  participate  in  the  firing  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  platoon  commanders. 

The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to  fire  control. 
To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss  of  control  should  be  the  constant 
aim  of  all. 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability  of  the  commander  to '  stop 
the  firing,  change  the  sight  setting  and  target,  and  resume 
a  well-directed  fire. 

riEE    DISCIPLINE. 

664.  Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  an  unquestioning  habit 
of  obedience  to  commands,  a  control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier, 
(the  result  of  training),  which  will  enable  him  in  action  to 
make  hits  instead  of  misses.  It  embraces  taking  advantage 
of  the  ground ;  proper  understanding  of  orders  as  to  target 
designation;  care  in  setting  the  sight  and  delivery  of  fire; 
constant  attention  to  the  orders  of  the  leaders,  and  careful 
observation  of  the  enemy  ;  an  increase  of  fire  when  the  target 
is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when  the  enemy  disap- 
pears ;  economy  of  ammunition.  Orderly  and  regular  methods 
on  the  part  of  leaders  aid  fire  discipline.  Self  possession  and 
a  confident  tone  in  giving  commands  and  instructions  are  in- 
dispensable. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  TROOP.  253 

In  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or  position, 
and  thus  reduce  tlie '  effectiveness  of  his  fire,  liave  the  approxi- 
mate value  of  hits ;  such  shots  only,  or  actual  hits,  contribute 
toward  fire  superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without  leaders, 
each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  directs  effective 
fire  upon  the  proper  target. 

665.  To  create  a  correct  appreciation  of  the  requirements  of 
fire  discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of  fire  having 
constantly  in  view  the  available  ammunition  supply,  should 
be  as  rapid  as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aiming ;  that  the 
rate  will  depend  upon  the  visibility,  proximity,  and  size  of 
the  target;  and  that  the  proper  rate  will  ordinarily  suggest 
itself  to  each  trained  man,  usually  rendering  cautions  or  com- 
mands unnecessary. 

666.  In  attack,  ammunition  must  be  used  with  extreme  cau- 
tion in  order  that  the  highest  rate  of  fire  may  be  employed  at 
the  halt  preceding  the  assault  and  in  pursuing  fire. 

667.  In  defense,  when  the  target  disappears  behind  cover, 
platoon  leaders  suspend  fire,  prepare  their  platoons  to  fire 
upon  the  point  where  it  is  expected  to  reappear,  and  greet 
its  reappearance  instantly  with  a  vigorous  burst  of  fire.  In 
defense,  the  available  ammunition  supply  is  not  ordinarily 
so  limited  as  in  the  attack. 

668.  For  communication  .between  the  firing  line  and  the  re- 
serve or  commander  in  rear  certain  signals  are  prescribed 
(par.  997):  In  transmission  their  concealment  from  the 
enemy's  view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of  signal 
flags  the  headdress  or  other  substitute  may  be  used. 

EANGES. 

669.  For  convenience  of  reference,  ranges  are  classified  as 
follows : 

0  to  600  yards,  close  range. 
600  to  1.200  yards,  effective  range. 
1.200  to  2X>00  yards,  long  range. 
Over  2,000  yards,  distant  range. 
The   distance   to    the   target   must   be   determined    as    accu- 
rately as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly.     Aside  from 


254  CAVALRY/DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

training  and  morale  this  is  the  most  important  single  factor  in 
securing  effective  fire  at  the  longer  ranges. 

Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position,  the 
most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining 
the  range,  in  absence  of  a  suitable  mechanical  range  finder, 
will  generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  estimates  made 
independently. 

Estimation  of  ranges. — Five  or  six  oflficers  and  men,  se- 
lected from  the  most  accurate  estimators  in  the  troop  and 
designated  as  range  estimator's,  should  be  specially  trained 
in  estimating  distances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles 
the  range  estimators,  points  out  the  target  to  them,  and  adopts 
the  mean  of  their  estimates.  The  range  estimators  then  take 
their  customary  posts. 

AVhen  a  range  is  announced,  the  men  at  once  set  their  sights 
to  correspond,  and  whenever  practicable  an  examination  of 
the  pieces  is  made  in  order  to  verify  the  sight  setting. 

(C.  C.  D.  R.  No.  1.) 

KECONNAISSANCE    BEFORE    COMBAT. 

670.  Combat,  mounted  or  dismounted,  should  always  be  pre- 
ceded by  a  reconnaissance  suited  to  give  the  leader  the  best 
practicable  idea  of  the  terrain  and  of  the  conditions,  and  to 
enable  him  to  utilize  both  to  the  fullest  advantage.  The 
form  and  extent  of  such  reconnaissance  will  necessarily  vary 
from  the  hurried  glance,  for  which  alone  there  may  be  time 
before  making  dispositions  to  meet  a  sudden  emergency,  to 
the  deliberate  survey  and  study  that  may  be  practicable  in 
exceptionally  favorable  cases.  The  leader's  personal  recon- 
naissance will  ordinarily  be  supplemented  by  the  use  of  scouts 
or  patrols  or  both.  The  reconnaissance  must  in  no  case  be 
overlooked  and  must  always  be  made  in  as  complete  and  care- 
ful a  manner  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  permit.  It 
will  frequently  be  advisable  for  a  leader  to  push  rapidly  ahead 
of  his  command  for  this  purpose  when  combat  is  imminent, 
taking  with  him  such  subordinate  leaders  as  he  sees  fit  and 
leaving  the  command  to  follow  (par.  456). 


TROOP  FORMATIONS. 


255 


PLATE  III.— THE  TROOP. 

(Par.  584.) 


DOUBLE  COLi/MA 


w 

IZI 
IZl 
IZI 
IZ! 

IZIUz, 
(2 

IZ 
IZ 
[Z 


>  j5  j5 

000000000000 


,a..^2. 


E^SSZZZIZ 


COLUMN  OF 
\PL 

PLATOONS 

\PL. 

\/*'SGT. 


IZ 
IZ 
IZ 


\PL 


IZ 
IZ 

S.- 


J  ft  i^'scr 


C.   CAPT^/N 
PL  PLATOON L£APE/t 
PC  P/L£  CiOS£/f 
/''SOr 
-  Gu,   GO/ DON 
Bu    BOCLf/f 
NOAfCMLS.  yDS. 

\PL 

IZ 
IZ 
IZ 

IZ 

/rl 


Bu\    I  Gut 
\PL  \PL 

Klx-kVV^l^LZ2 


\PL 


NN'nKKNNNKJNNnI'S' 


\rc 


Ac   ^ 

sJ]  \Gt// 

\PL. 


V.c 

3 


pc\ 


\PL. 

SS^^0ZZZ' 


L/NE  ^ANC/N(^ 


\^\AA/\ 
pcV 


PLATE  IV.— THE  TROOP. 

(Pars.  617  (&),623  (a).,) 

"W ""       -^^^ 


CAPTAJN,  L£:AD//V6. 


iiiiiiiiiiiiiiniisiiiu 


WNOfiMAL  FORMATION  OF  TROOP  TAKEN  AT 
'COMMAND:  "FORM  troop:  CAPTAIN  THEN 
COMMANDS-.ILINE  Z.MARCH, FOLLOWED 
BY  1.  COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS   Z.MARCH 


/  >.<?^-'. 


/  •  \>/    y  \     ' 

-  >;  V  I      iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiu^ 
I       iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniimii^  ;  ;  !  iM 
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiifev!;:;j±:::i:ur:::::::' 

\\i  rX  //V;;  /ill  /  /\\;  ;i  L  / 
\  jiii  iiii//'     Aiiii  iiii/  r      :  iiii  iiirv 


COll/MA/  OFPLATVOfVS 
rORMEP 


COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS 
BUNG  FORMED 


,,-'-' A  „.\ 


A  \ 

(ilHIIiiillilillllillii^ 


nil  IIII 

nil  nil''        nil  \\\\/         iiii  \\\\         nii  \\\\  troop 

nil  mi ini  iin iin  nil iin  nn  formed 

I  I  I  I 


256 


PLATE  v.— THE  TROOP. 

(Pars.  625  (e),627  (6).) 


COMMAND: 
1.C0LUMN  2. MARCH 


TfiOOP/NLINEOF  .' 
DOUBLE  COLU/^m, 


S  0'""* 
SIZI3 

SIZl... 
I 

38218  °— 18- 


^. 


<I>/ 


^4>/i 


w 
I 

13 
12 
0 

13  2 

S 
IS 
01 
IZl 
IZl 

s' 

IS 

la 

0 

s' 


^A^ 
%& 


-17 


V 


Kf0- 

S0£ 

.S  0... 


T"/?^^/*  //y  ^^Z^y«//K       IZl 

COMMAND  ••  r-71 

IDOUBLS:  COLUM/^  ^ 

2.  MARCH  \Z\ 

IS 

01 

IZl 
IZl 


"*H^lZ 
SZl 


IS 
IZli 
IZl 
IZI 

IS 

I 


257 


PLATE  VI.— THE  TROOP.      1  I 
(Par.  617  (c).)  \ 


|NiNlSSJil2:i;:rL^ 


a^lMf/l^  OFPLATOOm 
J.UJV£  ZMA/fC/f 


I 
I  I 


/ 


258 


I 

{ 

I 


PLATE  VII.— THE  TROOP. 

(Pars.  620,  625  (e),627  (a).) 


ill! 


COll/MA/  MAffCM/m.- 
J.ffOi/BLECOLl/M/V  ZM/lffC/f 


COLUMN  FOffM/JVG 


1 
/    > 

LINE  HALTED: 
/                1  COL  UM/V.  2.MAffC// 

f                                 1     ' 

A  ' 

r\J^KKI/M/1/KKM\l/l/1/I/KKKI\MXl/M 

259 


PART  v.— THE  SQUADRON  AND  HIGHER 
UNITS. 

THE  SQUADRON. 

Special  Provisions. 

671.  The  major  is  the  commander  and  tactical  leader  of  the 
squadron.  He  is  responsible  for  its  theoretical  and  practical 
training.  He  supervises  the  training  of  the  troops  with  a 
view  to  securing  thoroughness  and  uniformity  in  their 
instruction. 

In  the  instruction  of  the  squadron  as  a  whole  his  efforts 
will  be  directed  chiefly  to  the  development  of  tactical  effi- 
ciency,  devoting  only  such  time  to  the  mechanism  of  the  drill 
and  to  ceremonies  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure  precision, 
smartness,  and  proper  control. 

672.  The  squadron  consists  of  not  more  than  four,  nor  less 
than  two,  troops.  In  this  school  the  squadron  consists  of  four 
troops,  but  the  drill  is  equally  applicable  to  a  squadron  of  two 
or  three  troops.  The  object  of  the  school  of  the  squadron  is  to 
train  the  troops  to  execute  together  what  they  have  learned 
separately  and  to  teach  the  squadron  its  movements,  whether 
acting  alone  or  in  regiment. 

673.  Except  at  ceremonies  (par.  787),  troops  are  arranged 
from  front  to  rear  in  column  or  from  right  to  left  in  line,  in 
the  order  of  their  letter  designations.  Their  arrangement  may 
be  varied,  however,  to  afford  each  troop  opportunities  for 
maneuvering  both  as  a  flank  and  as  an  interior  troop.  After 
the  squadron  has  been  formed,  in  whatever  way  it  faces, 
troops  are  numbered  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from  front 
to  rear  in  column  or  echelon,  first  troop,  second  troop,  etc. 
Troops  have  a  fixed  place  in  squadron  only  when  it  is  first 
assembled,  and  the  squadron  maneuvers  without  regard  to  the 
order  of  troops  in  line  or  column. 


POSTS  IN  THE  SQUADRON.  261 

To    FOKM    THE    SQUADKON. 

674.  The  troops  having  been  formed,  mounted,  and  marched 
to  the  place  of  assembly,  the  major  commands :  FORM  SQUAD- 
RON. The  squadron  is  formed  in  rear  of  the  major  in  mass. 
The  troops  are  led  in  succession  to  their  places  in  mass;  the 
captain  of  the  base  troop  halts  12  yards  directly  in  rear  of  the 
major. 

For  ceremonies  or  for  special  purposes  the  squadron  may  be 
formed  in  line  or  in  platoon  mass  (pars.  797-799). 

The  squadron  may  be  formed  in  platoon  mass,  column  of 
fours  or  column  of  platoons  by  adding  IN  PLATOON  MASS, 
IN  COLUMN,  or  IN  COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS  to  the  command 
FORM  SQUADRON.  If  not  already  in  the  required  troop  for- 
mation, the  troops  make  the  necessary  change  before  taking 
their  places  in  squadron.  If  a  line  formation  is  ordered,  the 
squadron,  unless  otherwise  directed,  forms  on  the  base  troop. 
The  major  may  direct  the  squadron  to  form  on  a  flank  troop. 
If  a  column  formation  is  ordered,  the  squadron  forms  on  the 
troop  that  will  lead  in  column. 

675.  To  dismiss  the  squadron  the  major  commands:  DIS- 
MISS YOUR  TROOPS. 

Posts  of  Officers,  etc. 

676.  Except  in  route  order  (par.  706)  the  captain  of  the 
base  troop  follows  the  major  at  12  yards.  The  adjutant  is  2 
yards  on  the  left  of  the  major  and  abreast  of  him.  The  ser- 
geant major  and  bugler  follow  the  adjutant  and  major,  re- 
spectively, at  1  horse  length.  The  squadron  orderlies,  if  pres- 
ent, are  abreast  of  the  sergeant  major  and  2  yards  to  his  left. 

In  column  formations  the  captains  of  the  troops  other  than 
the  leading  troop  take  post  3  yards  from  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn on  the  same  side  as  and  abreast  of  the  chiefs  of  their 
leading  platoons.  In  column  of  platoons  they  are  on  the  right 
flank  of  the  column  unless  the  latter  has  been  formed  by  the 
execution  of  platoons  right  turn,  in  which  case  they  take  post 
on  the  left  flank  (par.  451). 

If  the  column  be  marched  to  the  rear  by  a  movement  of 
fours,  the  captains  on  the  flank  of  the  column,  turn  about, 


262  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

and  take  post  as  above  prescribed,  but  do  not  change  post  to 
the  opposite  flank. 

Wlien  tl)e  squadron  is  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers, 
or  in  double  column,  the  tirst  sergeants  take  post  on  the  flank 
of  the  column,  on  the  same  side  as  the  platoon  file  closers  and 
abreast  of  the  next  to  the  last  element  of  the  rear  platoons  of 
their  troops.     (PL  VIII.) 

677.  The  major  regulates  the  direction  and  gait  by  signal^, 
messengers,  or  by  the  voice.  Trumpet  signals  are  only  used 
when  the  squadron  is  alone,  and  then  only  to  the  extent  neces- 
sary to  instruct  the  squadron  in  this  method  of  command. 

Although  the  major  gives  his  command  to  all  the  troops, 
their  execution  in  each  troop  is  determined  by  the  command 
of  its  captain.  The  captains  give  the  necessary  commands  to 
cause  their  troops  to  conform  to  the  movement  directed  and 
to  insure  its  execution  at  the  proper  moment. 

When  the  commands  are  given  by  the  voice  the  captains 
repeat  such  of  the  commands  as  are  to  be  immediately  ex- 
ecuted by  their  troops,  such  as  forward,  fours  right,  halt,  etc. 
They  do  not  repeat  the  major's  commands  which  are  not  essen- 
tial to  the  execution  of  the  movement  by  their  troops. 

678.  In  all  formations  and  movements  of  the  squadron  the 
captains  conform  to  the  principles,  whenever  applicable,  laid 
down  for  platoon  leaders  in  the  School  of  the  Troop.  The 
squadron  in  any  close-order  formation  (except  in  column  of 
twos  or  troopers)  may  gain  ground  to  a  flank,  or  to  the  rear, 
bj  a  movement  by  fours. 

The  captains  must  constantly  hear  in  mind  the  vital  im- 
portance of  order  and  cohesion.  Regularity  and  uniformity 
of  the  gaits  are  indispensable. 

Squadron  Formations. 
(Plate  VIII.) 

LINE    FORMATIONS. 

679.  Close  order: 

{a)   Line:   The  troops  are  in  line  with  their  base  platoons 
abreast  of  each  other.    The  interval  between  troops  is  8  yards. 
(&)   Line  of  troop  columns, 
(c)  Line  of  platoon  columns. 
id)  Mass. 


SQUADRON  FORMATIONS.  263 

In  line  of  troop  columns  and  mass,  the  troops  are  in  column 
of  fours.  In  line  of  platoon  columns,  the  platoons  are  in 
column  of  fours.  In  each  case  the  columns  are  parallel,  with 
their  heads  abreast  of  each  other.  In  line  of  troop  columns 
the  interval  between  troops  is  troop  front  and  4  yards.  In 
line  of  platoon  columns  the  interval  between  troops  is  platoon 
front  and  4  yards.  In  mass  the  interval  between  troops  is 
8  yards. 

(e)  Platoon  mass:  The  troops  are  in  column  of  platoons, 
with  their  leading  platoons  abreast  of  each  other.  The  inter- 
val between  troops  is  8  yards. 

(/)  Double  rank:  The  troops  are  in  double  rank  line,  with 
their  base  platoons  abreast  of  each  other.  The  interval  be- 
tween troops  is  8  yards. 

COLUMN    FORMATIONS. 

(g)   Column  of  fours. 

(/i)   Column  of  platoons. 

(i)    Double  column. 

In  these  formations  the  troops  are  in  column  of  fours,  col-- 
umn  of  platoons,  and  double  column,  respectively.  The  troops 
are  arranged  one  behind  the  other  and,  in  marching,  the  rear 
troops  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  leading  troop.  In  column  of 
fours  and  double  column  the  distance  between  troops  is  9 
yards.  In  column  of  platoons  the  distance  between  troops  is 
platoon  front  and  5  yards. 

(./)  Column  of  troops:  The  troops  are  in  line,  and  are 
arranged  one  b^iind  the  other.  Column  of  troops  is  taken  for 
the  purpose  of  inspection  (par.  883)  or  for  camping,  and  will 
result  when  a  line  of  troop  columns  is  marched  to  a  flank  by 
a  movement  of  fours.  Its  use  is  exceptional  for  march  or 
maneuver.  The  distance  between  troops  is  troop  front  and 
5  yards. 

ORDER   IN   ECHELON. 

(k).  Echelon:  The  leading  element  is  a  flank  troop  of  the 
squadron.  The  troops  are  so  arranged  that  each  is  less  ad- 
vanced than  the  troop  next  toward  the  leading  flank  and  is 
unmasked  by  the  troops  which  proceed  it.     In  whatever  for- 


264 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


mation  the  troops  may  be,  such  intervals  and  distances  are 
maintained  as  will  permit  the  troops  to  form  line  to  the  front 
or  to  a  flank  and  retain  echelon  formation  without  overlapping 
or  undue  extension.  While  neither  a  line  nor  a  column, 
echelon  has  certain  characteristics  of  both. 

Extended  order:  The  squadron  takes  extended  order  for  the 
purposes  of  maneuver  only.  Extended-order  formations  by 
formal  command  are  confined  to  units  not  larger  than  the 
troop. 

Route  order  (par.  706). 


Commands  and  Signals. 


680. 


Commands. 


Pabs. 


Arm  Signals. 


(o)  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH 

(6)  1.  Line  of  troop  columns,  2.  MARCH. 

(c)  1.  Line  of  platoon  columns,  2.  MARCH 

(d)  1.  Mass,  2.  MARCH 

(e)  1.  Platoon  mass,  2.  MARCH 

(/)  1.  Double  rank,  2.  MARCH 

ig)  1.  Column,  2.  MARCH 

(A)  1.  Column  of  platoons,  2.  MARCH... 

(i)  1.  Double  colximn,  2.  MARCH 

(k)  1.  On  first    (fourth)  troop,  echelon, 

2.  MARCH. 
1.  Right    (left)    front   into    echelon,    2. 
j"        MARCH. 


683 
685 
686 
688 
690 
692 
696 


700 
703 


704 


Line.* 

Line,  followed  by  column.f 

Line  of  platoon  columns. 

Mass.* 

Platoon  mass.* 

No  signal. 

Col\unn.='= 

Column,  foUo-^/ed  by  pla- 

toon.f 
Double  colunm.t 
No  signal. 

No  signal. 


*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

t  In  signals  marked  thus  the  preparatory  signal  consists  of  more  than  one  ele- 
ment; the  signal  of  execution  follows  the  last  element  of  the  preparatory  signal. 

681.  The  squadron  maneuvers  in  line  of  troop  columns,  line 
of  platoon  columns,  mass,  platoon  mass,  column  of  fours, 
column  of  platoons,  double  column  and  echelon. 


SQUADRON  EVOLUTIONS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  265 

It  marches  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  and,  under 
favorable  conditions,  in  double  column.  It  takes  extendied 
order  and  dismounts  to  fight  on  foot. 

Close  Order. 


682.  Except  when  used  as  an  attack  formation,  the  march 
in  line  is  an  exceptional  movement.  A-s  a  rule  the  squadron 
in  close  order  will  advance  in  column,  double  column,  or  a 
line  of  columns. 

The  squadron  in  line  is  led  on  the  same  principles  as  apply- 
to  the  troop  in  line,  and  changes  of  direction  are  accomplished 
by  corresponding  commands  and  methods. 

Errors  in  direction  should  he  corrected  gradually. 

To  make  slight  changes  of  direction,  the  major  leads  in  the 
new  direction,  and  may  caution:  Incline  to  the  right   (par. 


The  base  troop  follows  the  major,  making  the  necessary 
change  in  direction.  The  other  troops  take  a  parallel  direc- 
tion and  resume  their  places  in  line  by  increasing  or  decreas- 
ing the  gait  as  may  be  necessary. 

If  it  is  desired  to  execute  a  complete  change  of  front  at 
right  angles  to  its  former  direction  as  a  general  rule  the 
squadron  forms  column  to  a  flank  and  then  forms  line  on  the 
head  of  the  column. 

683.  To  form  line  to  the  direction  of  march: 

1.  Line;  or  1.  On  (such)  troop,  line;  2.  MARCH. 

From  line  of  troop  columns,  or  line  of  platoon  columns:  A 
simultaneous  movement ;  the  troops  form  line  to  the  direction 
of  march  at  the  command  of  execution  (par.  617-&,  d). 

From  mass,  or  platoon  mass  (PI.  IX)  :  A  successive  forma- 
tion ;  the  base  troop  forms  line  when  it  has  sufficient  space, 
the  other  troops  as  they  approach  their  places  in  line  (pars. 
480,  481-/,  g,  617-c,  d). 

From  column  of  fours,  column  of  platoons,  or  double  column: 
A  successive  formation ;  the  base  troop  forms  line  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution ;  the  other  troops  as  they  approach  their 
places  in  line  (pars.  481-e,  /,  617-c,  d). 


266  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

To  form  line  to  a  flank: 

From  column  of  fours:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 
From  column  of  platoons:   1.  Platoons,  right   (left)  turn; 
2.  MARCH   (par.  618). 

LINE   OF    TEOOP    COLUMNS. 

684.  Line  of  troop  columns  and  line  of  platoon  columns  are 
formations  for  maneuver  and  may  be  used  for  an  approach 
preceding  a  deployment.  They  are  dispositions  which  facili- 
tate handling  the  squadron  and  a  rapid  formation  in  line. 
The  troops  or  platoons  may  vary  their  intervals  to  conform 
to  the  terrain  or  to  avoid  fire-swept  areas.  They  should  regain 
their  intervals  when  a  deployment  is  imminent. 

685.  To  form  line  of  troop  columns  to  the  direction  of 
march: 

1.  Line  of  troop  columns;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  line  of 
troop  columns;   2.  MARCH. 

From  line  or  line  of  platoon  columns:  A  simultaneous  move- 
ment;  the  troops  form  column  of  fours  to  the  direction  of 
march  at  the  command  of  execution  (par.  627-a,  c). 

From  double  column:  A  successive  formation ;  the  base  troop 
forms  column  of  fours  at  the  command  of  execution,  the  other 
troops  form  column  of  fours  successively  (pars.  481-e,.  627-e). 

From  any  other  formation:  A  successive  formation;  at  the 
command  of  execution  the  troops,  unless  already  in  that  for- 
mation, form  column  of  fours  at  the  command  of  execution 
(pars.  480,  481-d,  e,  627-df). 

To  form  line  of  troop  columns  to  a  flank: 

From  column  of  fours:  1.  Troops,  column  right  (left);  2. 
MARCH   (par.  475). 

LINE   OF   PLATOOIT    COLUMNS. 

686.  To  form  line  of  platoon  columns  to  the  direction  of 
march : 

1.  Line  of  platoon  columns;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  line  of 
platoon  columns,  2.  MARCH. 

From  line  or  line  of  troop  columns  (PI.  X)  :  A  simultaneous 
movement;  the  troops  form  line  of  platoon  columns  to  the 


SQUADRON  EVOLUTIONS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  267 

direction  of  march  at  the  command  of  execution  (par. 
622-a,  d). 

From  mass:  A  successive  formation;  the  base  troop  forms 
line  of  platoon  columns  to  the  direction  of  march  when  it  has 
sufficient  space,  the  other  troops  when  they  approach  their 
places  in  line  of  platoon  columns  (pars.  480,  622-d). 

From  column  of  fours :  A  successive  formation ;  the  base 
.troop  forms  line  of  platoon  columns  to  the  direction  of  march 
at  the  command  of  execution,  the  other  troops  as  they  approach 
their  places  in  line  of  platoon  columns  (pars.  481-e,  Q22-d). 

From  platoon  mass:  The  troops  form  column  of  fours  at  the 
command  of  execution,  and  the  movement  is  completed  as 
from  mass. 

From  column  of  platoons:  The  troops  form  column  of  fours 
at  the  conmiand  of  execution,  and  the  movement  is  completed 
as  from  column  of  fours. 

From  double  column :  A  successive  formation ;  the  base  troop 
forms  column  of  fours  at  the  command  of  execution ;  the  other 
troops  form  column  of  fours  successively ;  the  movement  is 
completed  as  from  column  of  fours. 

To  form  line  of  platoon  columns  to  a  flank: 

From  column  of  fours:  1.  Platoons,  column  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH    (par.  475). 

From  column  of  platoons:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH 
(par.  479). 

MASS. 

687.  Mass  is  a  formation  for  concentration  in  a  position  of 
readiness.  Beyond  the  zone  of  hostile  fire  it  may  ])e  used  as 
a  maneuver  formation  or  as  a  march  formation  under  cover  of 
an  advance  guard. 

On  account  of  its  great  milnerabilitp  mass  sJiovld  not  he 
used  in  the  approacli.  As  soon  as  troops  in  7nass  enter  the 
dangerous  zone  they  should  open  out. 

688.  To  form  mass: 

1.  Mass;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  mass;  2.  MARCH. 

From  double  column :  A  successive  formation  ;  the  base  troop 
forms  column  of  fours  at  the  command  of  execution,  the 
other  troops  form  column  of  fours  successively  (pars.  481-e, 
627-e). 


268  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

From  any  other  formation :  A  successive  formation ;  at  the 
command  of  execution  the  troops,  unless  already  in  that  forma- 
tion, form  column  of  fours  to  the  direction  of  march  (pars. 
480,  481-e,  627-a,  c,  d).     (PI.  XI.) 

PLATOON    MASS. 

689.  Platoon  mass  is  a  formation  for  maneuver  and  for 
mounted  attack  when  more  than  one  line  is  required  to  add 
weight  to  the  charge.  It  may  also  be  used  as  a  ceremonial 
formation. 

690.  To  form  platoon  mass: 

1.  Platoon  mass;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  platoon  mass,  2. 
MARCS. 

Prom  column  of  platoons:  A  successive  formation  (par. 
481-e). 

From  line :  A  successive  formation ;  at  the  command  of  exe- 
cution the  troops  form  column  of  platoons  to  the  direction  of 
march  (pars.  480,  62a-a). 

From  line  of  troop  columns,  column  of  fours,  or  double  col- 
umn: A  successive  formation;  the  base  troop  forms  column  of 
platoons  at  the  command  of  execution,  the  other  troops  as 
they  approach  their  places  in  platoon  mass  (pars.  480, 
623-c,  d). 

From  mass :  A  successive  formation ;  the  base  troop  forms 
column  of  platoons  when  it  has  a  sufficient  space,  the  other 
troops  as  they  approach  their  places  in  platoon  mass  (pars, 
480,  623-(?). 

From  line  of  platoon  columns  (PI.  X)  :  A  successive  forma- 
tion ;  at  the  command  of  execution  the  troops  form  column  of 
fours  to  the  direction  of  march ;  the  movement  is  completed  as 
from  line  of  troop  columns. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION. 

691.  The  squadron  in  line  of  troop  columns,  line  of  platoon 
columns,  mass  or  platoon  mass,  is  marched  to  the  front,  halted, 
executes  movements  by  fours,  obliques,  and  changes  direction 
by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for  the  squadron  in 
line,  except  as  indicated  below. 

When  in  line  of  troop  columns,  line  of  platoon  columns  or 
mass,  in  executing  the  oblique  the  change  of  direction  is  made 
bj  heads  of  columns. 


SaUADRON  EVOLUTIONS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  869 

DOUBLE  RANK. 

692.  The  squadron  in  line  or  double  columm  forms  double 
rank  by  the  same  commands  and  by  similar  means  as  in  The 
Troop.  In  forming  double  ranli  from  line  the  troops  execute 
double  rank  simultaneously  at  the  command  of  execution  and 
then  close  interval  upon  the  base  troop. 

When  the  squadron  marches  in  double-rank  line,  the  troops 
are  echeloned  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  prescribed  for  pla- 
toons in  troop  (par.  587).  The  interval  between  troops  will 
be  preserved. 

693.  The  squadron  in  double  rank  line  forms  single  rank  by 
the  same  commands  and  by  similar  means  as  in  The  Troop 
(par.  620).  The  troops  other  than  the  base  troop  are  led 
diagonally  to  their  places  in  line  and  form  single  rank  on 
approaching  the  same, 

694.  The  squadron  in  double  rank  is  subject  to  the  same 
limitations  as  to  movements  and  changes  of  formation  as  Tke 
Troop  in  double  rank  (par.  619). 

COLUMN    OF    iOUTlS. 

695.  Column  of  fours  is  a  formation  for  march  and  ma- 
neuver. 

696.  To  form  column  of  fours  to  the  direction  of  march: 
1.  Column;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  column;  2.  MARCH. 
From  column  of  platoons:   A  simultaneous  movement;  the 

troops  form  column  of  fours  at  the  command  of  execution 
(par.  627-d). 

From  double  column:  A  successive  formation;  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution  the  base  troop  forms  column  of  fours,  the 
other  troops  form  column  of  fours  successively  (par.  627-e). 

From  any  other  formation :  A  successive  formation ;  at  the 
command  of  execution  the  troops,  unless  already  in  that  for- 
mation, form  column  of  fours  to  the  direction  of  march  (pars. 
481-d,  627-a,  c,  /).     (PI.  XI.) 

To  form  column  of  fours  to  a  flank: 

From  line:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH  (par.  479). 

From  line  of  troop  columns:  1.  Troops,  column  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

From  line  of  platoon  columns:  1.  Platoons,  column  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH  (par.  475). 


27G  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS. 

697.  Column  of  platoons  is  a  formation  for  maneuver.  In 
open  country  or  for  ceremonial  purposes  it  may  be  used  as  a 
march  formation. 

To  avoid  checks  in  the  march  distances  between  platoons 
may  be  reduced,  and  a  platoon  may  uncover  or  overlap  the 
preceding  platoon  temporarily. 

698.  To  form  column  of  platoons  to  the  direction  of  inarch. 
1.  Column   of  platoons;    or,   1.    On    (such)    troop   column   of 

platoons,  2.  MARCH. 

From  column  of  fours:  A  simultaneous  movement;  the 
troops  form  column  of  platoons  at  the  command  of  execution 
(par.  62.3-fO. 

From  platoon  mass:  A  successive  formation  (par.  4Sl-d). 

From  line  (PI.  IX)  :  A  successive  formation;  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution  the  troops  form  column  of  platoons  to  the 
direction  of  march  (pars.  481-d,  6i*3-«). 

From  line  of  troop  columns :  A  successive  formation ;  the 
base  troop  forms  column  of  platoons  at  the  command  of  ex- 
ecution, the  other  troops  as  they  approach  their  places  in 
column  of  platoons   (pars.  481-d,  623-fO. 

From  line  of  platoon  columns :  A  successive  formation ;  at 
the  command  of  execution  the  troops  form  column  of  fours  to 
the  direction  of  march,  and  the  movement  is  completed  as  from 
line  of  troop  columns. 

From  mass :  A  successive  formation ;  the  troops  form  column 
of  platoons  successively,  each  when  it  has  sufficient  space 
(pars.  4Sl-(/,  623-fZ). 

From  double  column :  A  successive  formation ;  the  base  troop 
forms  column  of  platoons  at  the  command  of  execution,  the 
other  troops  form  column  of  platoons  successively  (par. 
623-c). 

To  form  column  of  platoons  to  a  flank: 

From  line:  1.  Platoons  right  (left)  turn,  2.  MARCH  (par. 
624-a). 

From  line  of  platoon  columns:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH   (par.  479). 

DOUBLE    COLUMN. 

699.  Double  column  is  a  formation  for  march  and  maneuver. 
It  may  be  used  as  a  march  formation  when  conditions  permit 


SQUADRON  EVOLUTIONS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  271 

the  squadron  to  advance  on  a  broader  front  than  that  ordi- 
narily practicable  for  route  column.  It  facilitates  a  rapid 
deployment  to  the  fiont  by  reason  of  the  reduction  in  the 
depth  of  the  column. 

700.  To  form  double  column  to  the  direction  of  march. 

1.  Double  column;  or,  1.  On  (such)  troop,  double  column, 
2.  MARCH. 

From  line,  line  of  platoon  columns,  or  platoon  mass:  A  suc- 
cessive formation;  the  troops  form  double  column  at  the 
command  of  execution  (pars.  481-f/,  62.3-«,  h,  d). 

From  line  of  troop  columns:  A  successive  formation;  the 
base  troop  forms  double  column  at  the  command  of  execution, 
the  other  troops  as  they  approach  their  positions  in  double 
column   (pars.  481-f/,  625-e). 

From  mass :  A  successive  formation ;  the  troops  form  double 
column  successively,  each  when  it  has  sufficient  space  (pars. 
4Sl-r?,  625-e). 

From  column  of  platoons:  A  successive  formation;  the  troops 
form  double  column  at  the  command  of  execution  (pars. 
480,  625-rf). 

From  column  of  fours  (PI.  XI)  :  A  successive  formation;  the 
base  troop  forms  double  column  at  the  command  of  execution, 
the  other  troops  form  double  column  successively  (pars. 
480.  625-e). 

To  form  double  column  to  a  flank  from  double  rank:  1.  Fours 
right   (left),  2.  MARCH. 

ECHELON. 

701.  Echelon  formation  permits  of  advancing  a  flank  to  over- 
lap the  enemy,  at  the  same  time  remaining  ready  to  face  him 
at  any  instant  or  avoid  envelopment  by  refusing  a  flank. 
Echelon  is  a  formation  for  maneuver  only. 

In  forming  echelon  the  troops  will  retain  the  formation  they 
have  when  the  movement  is  ordered.  If  conditions  necessitate 
a  change  in  troop  formation,  the  major  will  give  the  appro- 
priate command. 

Changes  in  troop  formation  may  be  effected  during  the 
formation  of  echelon.  In  whatever  formation  the  troops  may 
be  such  intervals  and  distance  will  be  maintained  as  to  per- 


272  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

mit  the  troops  to  form  fine  to  the  front  or  to  a  flaHk  and  retain 
echelon  formation  without  overlapping  or  undue  extension. 

In  echelon  the  most  advanced  troop  is  the  base  troop. 
Echelon  is  always  formed  on  a  flank  troop  in  line  or  the  lead- 
ing troop  in  column. 

702.  Echelon  is  formed  from  line,  line  of  troop  columns, 
or  line  of  platoon  columns  on  the  base  troop  at  the  gait  of  the 
march,  or  at  the  gait  ordered.  The  other  troops  take  or  main- 
tain a  slower  gait  or  halt  until  they  can  take  their  places  in 
echelon. 

Echelon  is  formed  from  any  other  formation  on  the  base 
troop  at  the  gait  of  the  march  or  gait  ordered.  The  gait  of 
the  other  troops  is  so  regulated  by  their  captains  that  they  will 
take  their  places  in  echelon  promptly  and  with  as  few  changes 
of  gait  as  practicable. 

703.  The  squadron  being  in  any  line  formation,  to  form 
echelon: 

1.  On  first  (fourth)  troop,  echelon,  2.  MARCH. 

If  the  squadron  is  in  line,  line  of  troop  columns  or  line  of 
platoon  columns,  echelon  is  formed  as  prescribed  in  par.  702. 
If  the  squadron  is  in  mass  or  platoon  mass,  the  base  troop 
maintains  gait  and  direction  and  the  other  troops  move  by  the 
most  direct  route  to  their  places  in  echelon.     (PL  XII.) 

704.  The  squadron  being  in  any  column  formation : 
1.  Right  (left)  front  into  echelon,  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  troop  advances.  The  other  troops  move  diag- 
onally to  the  right  (left)  front  and  take  their  places  in 
echelon.     (PI.  XIII.) 

705.  The  squadron  in  echelon  is  not  readily  maneuvered  by 
oral  commands  or  visual  signals.  Tlie  captain  of  the  base 
troop  follows  the  major's  movements  and  causes  his  troop  to 
execute  any  changes  of  formation  that  the  major  may  indi- 
cate. The  other  troops  conform  to  the  movements  and  forma- 
tions of  the  base  troop,  preserving  their  relative  positions 
with  respect  to  the  latter.  Should  the  squadron  in  echelon  be 
marched  to  the  flank  or  rear,  the  major  takes  position  in 
front  of  the  new  base  troop,  unless  the  march  to  the  original 
front  is  to  be  resumed  promptly. 

To  re-form  the  squadron  in  line  or  other  formation,  the 
major  commands  or  signalie:  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 


SftUADRON  EVOLUTIONS,  CLOSE  ORDER.  273 

The  troops  are  led  toward  the  major,  who  indicates  as 
they  approach  the  formation  that  he  desires  the  squadron  to 
take. 

Route  Marches. 

706.  In  route  marches  the  major  and  adjutant  ride  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  followed  respectively  at  4  feet  by  a  bugler 
and  sergeant  major.  The  squadron  orderlies  follow  the  ser- 
geant major  and  trumpeter.  At  the  command  ROUTE  ORDER 
the  troops  take  route  formation  (par.  604).  The  leading 
troop  follows  the  major's  party  at  12  yards.  The  prescribed 
distance  between  troops  v>^ill  be  retained  unless  a  greater  dis- 
tance is  authorized. 

THE   ASSEMBLY. 

707.  The  squadron  is  assembled  when  the  troops  of  the 
squadron  are  united  in  any  authorized  formation  of  the  squad- 
ron and  each  troop  is  assembled  (pars.  635-637).  The  assem- 
bly is  executed  in  mass  unless  the  major  indicates  some  other 
formation,  in  which  case  the  indication  is  given  as  the  troops 
approach  the  major's  position  and  suthciently  in  advance  for 
each  captain  to  lead  his  troop  to  its  proper  position. 

The  order  taken  by  the  troops  in  assembling  will  be  the  same 
as  that  taken  at  the  original  formation  of  the  squadron  unless 
the  major  directs  otherwise. 

The  commands  of  the  major  are:  1:  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 
Each  troop,  if  not  already  assembled,  is  assembled  by  its  cap- 
tain before  taking  its  place  in  the  squadron. 

THE  RALLY. 

708.  The  command  RALLY,  given  by  the  major,  is  repeated 
by  all  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  and  buglers.  The 
squadron  rallies  in  line,  unless  the  major  indicates  some  other 
formation.  Each  troop  is  rallied  by  its  captain  (par.  638)  and 
led  at  an  extended  gallop  toward  the  major.  Any  troop  that 
is  not  in  a  formation  to  be  rapidly  led,  as  just  indicated,  will 
bo:  rallied  immediately  by  its  captain  and  then  led  toward  the 
major.    The  first  troop  to  arrive  in  rear  of  the  major  is  desig- 

38218  ° — 18- 18 


274  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

nated  as  the  base  troop,  its  captain  following  the  major.  The 
other  troops  place  themselves  to  the  left  and  right  of  the  base 
troop  if  the  rally  be  in  line.  Should  the  major  indicate  a  for- 
mation other  than  line,  the  troops  successively  take  positions 
so  as  to  extend  the  formation. 

It  is  very  important  that  each  trooper  rally  with  his  own 
troop  in  so  far  as  practicable;  but  this  must  not  operate  to 
unduly  delay  the  execution  of  the  movement.  A  trooper  who 
is  unable  for  any  reason  to  locate  and  join  his  own  organiza- 
tion attaches  himself  temporarily  to  the  nearest  troop. 

Extended  Oeder. 

709.  Extended  order  may  be  used  in  mounted  combat  where 
the  pistol  or  saber  is  employed,  and  it  has  a  specially  impor- 
tant application  in  connection  with  dismounted  fire  action.  It 
also  forms  a  convenient  method  of  making  a  rapid  advance 
over  fire-swept  areas.  The  extension  may,  as  in  the  troop,  be 
taken  in  line  with  increased  intervals  or  in  depth  by  successive 
subdivisions.     . 

A  formation  of  special  value  for  the  squadron,  due  to  de- 
creased vulnerability  to  artillery  fire,  is  line  of  columns,  or 
an  echelon  of  columns  with  wide  intervals,  moving  at  a  rapid 
gait.  To  cross  ground  without  cover  exposed  to  infantry  or 
artillery  fire,  lines  of  foragers  may  be  thrown  forward  at  a 
rapid  gait,  the  troops  halting  and  re-forming  when  cover  is 
reached. 

Regular  drills  hy  command,  in  extended  order,  habitually 
terminate  with  the  instruction  of  the  troop.  Two  or  more 
troops  may  be  extended  upon  the  same  principles  as  apply  to 
a  single  troop,  but  the  major  usually  effects  the  desired  dis-. 
position  of  the  squadron  by  means  of  tactical  orders,  instead 
of  through  formal  commands  of  the  character  employed  in 
drill.  The  major's  orders  habitually  indicate  the  objective, 
the  gait,  and  the  formation,  and  they  may  also  state  the 
interval  or  distance  which  is  to  separate  the  troops.  The 
base  troop  is  led  accordingly.  The  other  troops  conform  in 
general  to  the  base  troop,  but  the  captains  may  modify  their 
formation  according  to  circumstances.  In  extended-order 
formation  the  major's  position  is  that  from  which  he  can  best 
control  and  regulate  the  movements  of  the  squadron.    If  he 


THE  MOUNTED  ATTACK,  SQUADRON.  275 

does  not  lead  the  squadron,  the  captain  of  the  base  troop 
directs  the  march  in  accordance  with  the  major's  direction. 

In  the  exceptional  case  where  the  extension  by  command  of 
two  or  more  troops  into  a  line  of  platoons  or  a  line  of  foragers 
may  be  desired,  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  troop  may 
be  employed.  The  base  troop  is  designated  before  the  com- 
mands for  the  deployments  are  given  and  conforms  to  the 
movements  or  indication  of  the  major  or  other  officer  com- 
manding the  particular  troops  designated  to  deploy.  Each  of 
the  other  troops  designated  to  deploy  is  led  by  its  captain  so 
as  to  deploy  and  extend  the  line  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  troop. 

The  squadron  in  extended  order  is  assembled  and  rallied  as 
indicated  in  pars.  707  and  708.  Any  troops  (for  example, 
those  of  the  reserve)  not  deployed  move  toward  the  major 
and  execute  the  assembly  with  the  other  troops,  unless  the 
major  directs  otherwise.  Should  the  rally  be  commanded,  any 
troops  not  deployed  are,  in  the  absence  of  other  instructions, 
led  rapidly  toward  the  major  and  ordinarily  form  the  nucleus 
of  the  new  formation. 

Mounted  Attack. 

710.  In  the  mounted  attack,  the  squadron  follow^s,  in  general, 
the  methods  prescribed  for  the  troop. 

711.  The  close-order  attack  may  be  made  in  one  or  more 
lines,  in  platoon  mass,  or  in  echelon.  The  formations  em- 
ployed will  depend  upon  the  tactical  situation.  Under  certain 
conditions  it  may  be  necessary  to  charge  in  column  of  platoons. 

THE    SQUADRON    ACTING   ALONE. 

712.  When  acting  alone,  the  squadron  is  formed  in  two  or 
three  parts — an  attacking  line  and  reserve,  or  an  attacking 
line,  support,  and  reserve.  The  attacking  line  should  consist 
of  at  least  half  the  squadron.  The  senior  officer  with  each 
line  is  the  leader  of  that  line  and  takes  post  as  such. 

The  major  designates  the  troops  that  compose  each  line, 
indicates  the  objective,  and,  if  there  is  an  opportunity,  states 
the  special  mission  of  each  line.  He  provides  for  the  neces- 
sary flank  defense  and  gives  instructions  for  any  flank  attack 


276  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

he  may  have  in  view.  His  orders  will  generally  take  the  form 
suggested  in  par.  644. 

In  the  absence  of  special  instructions,  the  support,  or  the 
reserve  if  there  be  no  support,  follows  the  attacking  line  at 
from  80  to  100  yards.  If  there  be  a  support,  the  reserve  fol- 
lows the  attacking  line  at  from  150  to  200  yards.  Distances 
will  vary  with  the  character  of  the  terrain  and  the  condition 
of  the  horses.  The  support  and  reserve  may  be  disposed  on 
the  same  or  on  opposite  flanks  of  the  attacking  line. 

The  major  may  accompany  any  fraction  of  the  squadron. 
Whichever  he  selects  he  takes  post  on  the  left  of  the  leader 
of  the  line ;  the  adjutant  and  others  accompanying  the  major 
take  post,  in  line,  on  his  left. 

The  rally,  or  assembly,  following  a  charge,  is  executed  as 
prescribed  in  pars.  707  and  708. 

713.  Owing  to  the  extension  of  front  required  for  the  pistol 
attack  it  will  generally  be  impracticable  to  make  the  same 
by  units  larger  than  the  troop.  When  the  terrain  permits 
the  deployment,  as  foragers,  of  more  than  one  troop  in  a 
single  line  the  diflficulties  of  control  by  a  single  leader  are 
such  that  better  results  can  be  expected  if  the  control  of  each 
troop  is  left  to  its  captain.  The  simplest  form  of  pistol  attack 
is  by  successive  lines  of  foragers,  each  line  composed  of  one 
troop,  led  by  its  captain.  In  such  case  the  major  indicates 
the  objective  and  may  prescribe  the  distances  at  which  the 
successive  lines  follow  the  leading  troop. 

When  the  attack  is  made  in  successive  lines  each  line  after 
attacking  will  rally  to  a  flank  as  quiclily  as  possible  to  avoid 
masking  the  fire  of  the  lines  which  follow. 

Where  an  opportunity  is  offered  for  a  converging  attack 
the  major  may  indicate  a  special  mission  for  each  troop  of 
the  attacking  line.  The  troops  then  take  the  necessary  inter- 
vals before  deploying  as  foragers. 

In  every  case  the  major  holds  out  a  reserve,  or  a  support 
and  a  reserve,  which  retain  close-order  formations  as  long  as 
practicable. 

714.  The  squadron  may  combine  pistol  attack  with  close- 
order  attack.  The  enemy's  front  may  be  attacked  in  close 
order,  and  his  flank  by  a  line  of  foragers  using  the  pistol. 
The  pistol  is  a  most  efficient  weapon  for  individual  combat, 


DISMOTTNTED  COMBAT,  SaUADRON.  277 

and  the  pistol  attack  may  be  employed  to  good  advantage  by 
the  support  or  reserve,  or  both,  in  the  melee  which  may  follow 
a  charge,  or  in  the  pursuit. 

THE   SQUADRON    IN   EEGTMENT. 

715.  In  the  mounted  attack,  when  the  squadron  is  in  regi- 
ment, the  major,  in  the  discretion  of  the  colonel,  may  hold 
out  a  support.  He  makes  the  necessary  arrangements  for  the 
defense  of  his  exposed  flank. 

DISMOUNTED   FIRE   ACTION. 

716.  Certain  elementary  principles  are  enunciated  under 
Dismounted  combat  in  The  Troop  (pars.  650-669). 

The  principles  and  methods  here  discussed  pertain  more 
especially  to  the  squadron,  either  acting  alone  or  as  part  of 
a  larger  unit. 

717.  The  squadron  dismounted,  whether  acting  alone  or  in 
regiment,  is  the  tactical  unit  best  suited  to  carry  on  the  fire 
fight;  this  holds  in  both  attack  and  defense.  In  dismounted 
combat,  by  reason  of  smaller  units  and  deductions  for  horse 
holders,  the  squadron  at  war  strength  would  ordinarily  occupy 
about  half  the  front  allotted  to  an  infantry  battalion  at  war 
strength,  but  the  organization  of  the  two  units  being  the  same 
the  duties  of  officers  and  noncommissioned  ofiicers,  as  herein 
explained,  correspond. 

718.  To  the  major,  the  captains,  and  the  lieutenants  of  a 
squadron  (subject  to  limitation  imposed  by  higher  authority) 
are  committed  the  initiative,  direction,  and  control  in  fire 
action.  To  efficiently  carry  out  the  duties  pertaining  to  their 
grades  practical  experience  in  combat  exercises  is  a  prime 
requisite ;  knowledge  of  a  technical  nature  is  also  necessary. 

719.  A  guiding  principle  in  dismounted  action  is  that  cavalry 
should  employ  its  mobility  to  compensate  for  its  lack  of  num- 
bers. 

Its  power  to  break  off  the  action  in  one  part  of  the  field  and 
resume  it  in  another,  to  pass  at  a  favorable  moment  from 
fire  action  to  mounted  attack,  or  vice  versa,  to  break  off  an 
action  and  withdraw  mounted,  as  in  rear  guard  or  delaying 
actions,  should  never  be  lost  sight  of. 


278  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Rapidity  of  movement  in  dismounting,  in  assuming  battle 
formations  on  foot,  in  moving  liorses  to  shelter,  and  in  opening 
and  maintaining  accurately  aimed  fire  are  characteristics  of 
well-trained  cavalry. 

720.  The  fire  fight  of  dismounted  cavalry  acting  alone,  as 
distinguished  from  that  in  which  they  participate  with  other 
arms,  frequently  presents  points  of  difference  that  demand 
consideration.  In  the  former  case  the  combat  is  likely  to 
occur  when  separated  by  long  distances  from  supporting 
troops  and  their  own  field  trains  so  that  it  is  imperative  that 
a  tactical  decision  should  be  reached  quickly,  even  though 
some  chances  are  taken ;  this  being  the  case,  the  reconnais- 
sance must  be  prompt  and  aggressive  and  the  attack  must  be 
characterized  by  a  surprise,  if  possible,  or,  in  any  event,  by 
the  most  energetic  measures  and  a  full  development  of  fire  at 
the  beginning  of  the  action.  The  principles  of  the  infantry 
fire  attack  are  modified  accordingly. 

While  infantry  bases  the  details  of  combat  upon  a  succes- 
sion of  progressive  efforts  made  by  troops  echeloned  in  depth, 
dismounted  cavalry  is  frequently  compelled  to  rush  the  attack 
or  to  stop  the  advancing  enemy  at  a  distance  by  employing  at 
once  upon  an  extended  front  all  the  men  and  rifles  available. 
The  relative  weakness  in  numbers  of  the  cavalry  and  responsi- 
bility for  the  led  horses  are  not  favorable  to  a  combat  of  long 
duration.  On  the  contrary  the  facility  afforded  by  its  horses 
for  carrying  additional  ammunition,  its  spirit  of  enterprise, 
its  characteristics  of  action  and  of  mobility  fit  it  admirably 
for  enveloping  movements  rapidly  executed  and  for  maneuver- 
ing on  the  defensive  to  avoid  the  blows  of  an  adversary. 

Skill  and  rapidity  in  the  execution  of  the  approach,  prompt- 
ness in  decision,  and  celerity  in  opening  the  action  furnish  an 
element  of  surprise  which  in  actions  of  this  nature  is  essential 
to  success. 

721.  Occasions  will  arise,  however,  when  dismounted  cavalry, 
either  acting  alone  or  in  conjunction  with  other  arms,  will 
have  to  drive  home  a  determined  attack.  In  such  cases  the 
principles  and  methods  governing  the  employment  of  fire  ac- 
tion by  infantry  must  control.  Some  of  the  more  generally 
accepted  of  these  principles,  modified  only  to  the  extent  neces- 
sary to  conform  to  dismounted  cavalry  and  their  led  horses, 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  SQUADRON.  279 

here  follow.     They  are  in  a  measure  supplementary  to  those 
given  under  The  Troop. 

722.  Deployment:  The  following  principles  of  deployment 
are  applicable  to  attack  or  defense. 

After  dismounting,  the  approach,  taking  advantage  of 
cover,  should  be  continued  as  long  as  possible  in  some  open 
formation,  such  as  line  of  columns,  before  deployment  into  line 
of  skirmishers,  which  latter  necessitates  a  fatiguing  and  dis- 
organizing advance  and  should  not  be  assumed  until  fire  may 
reasonably  be  anticipated.  The  depth  of  deployment  and  the 
density  and  extent  of  the  firing  line  are  regulated  by  the 
major,  subject  to  such  restrictions  as  may  have  been  prescribed 
by  his  senior. 

During  and  after  deployment  into  extended  order,  move- 
ments of  units  larger  than  a  troop  are  not  controlled  by  drill 
commands,  but  by  orders;  troops  designated  for  the  firing 
line  are  marched  or  led  independently  to  the  place  of  deploy- 
ment, are  deployed  and  advanced,  conforming  in  general  to  the 
base  troop. 

723.  Designation  of  objective  and  of  sectors:  In  defense,  with 
squadron  dismounted,  the  major  designates  the  portions  of  the 
line  to  be  held  bj'  each  troop  and  the  sector  to  be  observed  by 
each. 

In  attack,  he  designates  the  base  or  directing  troop,  the 
direction  of  the  enemy  or  objective,  and  the  order  and  extent 
of  front  of  troops  in  the  attacking  line. 

724.  Distribution  of  fire:  Greater  difficulty  is  always  en- 
countered in  securing  a  proper  distribution  of  fire .  than  in 
maintaining  a  concentrated  fire.  If  the  enemy's  whole  line  is 
kept  under  fire,  it  neutralizes,  to  an  extent,  his  fire,  which 
otherwise  could  be  concentrated  on  exposed  parts  of  our  lines 
with  increased  effectiveness. 

In  many  instances  portions  of  the  assigned  target  will  be  in- 
distinct and  in  some  cases  invisible.  The  tendency  of  men  is 
to  fire  only  on  that  part  which  can  be  seen.  This  tendency 
must  be  overcome  and  men  taught  that  when  given  a  sector  of 
a  target  every  part  of  it  must  be  kept  under  fire  whether  it 
can  be  seen  or  not  (par.  663).  As  a  rule,  whatever  the  size  of 
a  sector  assigned  to  a  troop,  the  troop  connnander  should 
cover  it  all  by  fire  by  assigning  parts  to  his  platoon  command- 
ers corresponding  to  their  positions  in  line,  and  they  in  turn 


280  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

should    require   their    sections    to    similarly    cover   the   parts 
allotted  to  their  platoons. 

725.  Fire:  Fire  direction  and  fire  control  are  functions  of 
troop  and  platoon  commanders,  respectively.  The  major 
makes  the  primary  apportionment  of  the  target  in  defense  by 
assigning  sectors  of  fire  and  in  attack  by  assignment  of  the 
objectives.  If  impracticable  for  the  major  to  assign  sectors  of 
fire  or  objectives,  each  captain  takes  that  part  of  the  general 
objective  which  lies  in  his  own  front. 

The  major,  whether  the  squadron  is  acting  alone  or  as  part 
of  a  larger  unit,  should  indicate  the  point  or  the  time  at  v,^hich 
the  fire  fight  is  to  open.  He  may  do  this  in  his  order  for 
deployment  (par.  729),  or  he  may  follow  the  firing  line  close 
enough  to  do  so  at  the  proper  time.  If  impracticable  to  do 
either,  the  senior  officer  with  the  firing  line  in  each  squadron 
decides  upon  the  time  or  place  for  opening  fire. 

726.  Firing  line;  supports;  reserves:  When  the  squadron  is 
acting  alone,  the  major  designates  the  size  of  the  troop  sup- 
ports and  makes  suitable  disposition  of  the  machine-gun  unit 
if  attached  to  his  squadron.  He. also  designates  which  troops 
are  to  constitute  the  firing  line  and  which  are  to  form  the 
squadron  reserve.  By  a  judicious  use  of  this  reserve  he  can 
exert  an  influence  over  his  firing  line  not  otherw^ise  possible 
and  can  control  within  reasonable  limits  an  action  once  begun. 
It  may,  according  to  circumstances,  be  held  in  one  or  two 
bodies  and  placed  behind  one  or  both  flanks  of  the  firing  line. 
It  should  be  of  sufficient  strength  to  maintain  the  original  fire 
power  of  the  firing  line  (after  the  troop  supports  have  been 
absorbed)  and  also  to  perform  the  functions  of  a  reserve, 
whatever  the  issue  of  the  action.  The  functions  of  a  reserve 
are :  In  attack,  to  protect  the  flanks,  to  secure  the  full  advan- 
tage of  a  victory,  or  to  cover  defeat ;  in  defense,  to  extend  the 
firing  line,  to  effect  a  counter  attack,  or  to  cover  a  withdrawal. 
The  reserve  should  be  held  in  readiness,  awaiting  the  proper 
moment  for  its  deployment.  Fire  action  will  seldom  come  to  a 
successful  issue  without  its  employment  in  some  form.  The 
local  reserve  of  a  squadron,  acting  as  part  of  a  larger  force 
which  has  its  own  reserve,  becomes  actually  a  "  support " 
(par.  761)  and  is  used  by  the  major  in  replacing  depleted 
troop  supports  and  in  strengthening  and  protecting  the  firing 
line  in  the  charge. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  SftTJADRON.  281 

The  distance  from  the  firing  line  to  the  supports  shonkl  be 
as  short  as  the  necessity  for  protection  from  heavy  losses  will 
permit.  No  distance,  even  approximate,  can  be  laid  down  as  a 
guide. 

After  the  supports  have  joined  the  firing  line,  whether  the 
squadron  is  acting  alone  or  as  part  of  a  larger  force,  the  func- 
tions of  its  reserve  include  those  of  a  support,  and  the  reserve 
is  moved  closer  to  the  firing  line. 

727.  Flanks:  When  the  squadron  is  operating  alone  the 
major  provides  for  the  reconnaissance  and  protection  of  his 
flanks;  if  part  of  a  larger  force,  the  major  makes  similar 
provisions  when  on  an  exposed  flank  without  waiting  for 
orders  from  higher  authority,  but  in  neither  case  does  it  re- 
lieve commanders  of  flank  troops  from  taking  necessary  pre- 
cautions for  protecting  their  own  flanks.  In  other  words, 
patrols  are  always  sent  out  by  flank  troops  for  the  purposes 
of  reconnaissance  and  combat  unless  the  captain  is  instructed 
to  the  contrary. 

728.  led  horses:  The  troops  designated  for  the  dismounted 
attack  are  led  mounted  as  close  to  the  position  each  is  to 
occupy  on  the  firing  line  as  a  consideration  of  all  the  circum- 
stances, including  the  safety  of  the  led  horses,  will  permit. 
Aftev  dismounting,  the  led  horses  should  be  held  as  near  to 
their  respective  troops  as  concealment  from  the  fire  and  view 
of  the  enemy  will  justify ;  this  is  especially  necessary  in  rear 
guard  and  delaying  actions.  The  horses  should  be  so  faced 
and  be  in  such  formation  as  to  permit  their  movement  without 
delay  toward  the  firing  line ;  they  should,  however, .  be  con- 
stantly  under  the  effective  protection  of  the  reserve  for  the 
reason  that  efforts  of  the  enemy  to  stampede  them  may  other- 
wise be  expected. 

729.  Orders:  Initial  combat  orders  issued  to  units  smaller 
than  a  brigade  are  usually  oral.  In  tlie  case  of  a  squadron, 
either  in  attack  or  defense,  the  major  assembles  his  captains, 
if  practicable,  and  directs  the  disposition  of  the  troops  by 
means  of  tactical  orders.  He  controls  subsequent  movements 
of  the  squadron  by  signals,  by  orders,  or,  occasionally,  by 
commands  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

In  a  deployment  of  the  squadron  for  combat,  either  in 
attack  or  defense,  the  major's  order  should  give  subordinates 
sufficient  information  of  the  enemy,  of  the  position  of  sup- 


282  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

porting  and  neighboring  troops,  and  of  the  object  sought,  to 
enable  them  to  conform  intelligently  to  the  general  plan.  It 
should  specify  the  troops  which  are  to  constitute  the  firing 
line,  the  order  and  extent  of  front  of  troops  in  that  line,  and 
(if  the  squadron  is  acting  alone)  the  size  of  the  troop  sup- 
ports and  the  size  and  location  of  the  squadron  reserve.  If 
the  squadron  is  part  of  a  larger  unit  the  major's  order,  con- 
forming to  instructions  given  him  by  higher  authority,  would, 
ordinarily,  specify  the  troops  for  the  firing  line  and  those  to 
constitute  the  squadron  support. 

In  attack,  the  major's  order  should,  in  addition,  designate 
the  objective  or  the  direction  of  the  attack  and  one  of  the 
flank  troops  as  the  base  or  directing  troop. 

In  defense,  the  order  should  apportion  the  target  by  assign- 
ing the  sector  to  be  observed  by  each  troop. 

When  the  squadron  is  acting  alone  the  major's  order 
should  provide,  in  addition,  for  the  reconnaissance  and  pro- 
tection of  his  flanks ;  when  part  of  a  larger  force  he  makes 
similar  provision,  when  necessary,  without  w^aiting  for  orders 
from  higher  authority. 

As  a  general  rule,  in  combat,  actual  or  pending,  the  com- 
mander of  any  flank  unit  as  large  as  a  troop  is  responsible 
for  the  flank  protection  of  the  firing  line,  and  if  orders  fail 
to  reach  him  he  must,  of  his  own  initiative,  provide  such 
protection  by  means  such  as  reconnoitering  or  combat  patrols. 

Extra  ammunition  is  always  ordered  issued  by  the  major 
when  he  dismounts  the  squadron  in  anticipation  of  fire  action, 
and  he  takes  advantage  of  supports  going  forward  to  send 
extra  bandoliers  to  the  front. 

730.  Reconnaissance,  preceding  a  fire  attack,  is  made  by  the 
major,  accompanied  by  his  captains,  who  move  wherever 
necessary  in  rear  of  the  scouts.  During  this  reconnaissance 
the  major  gives  his  officers  such  information  of  the  enemy  as 
he  possesses,  also  the  positions  of  the  supporting  and  adjacent 
troops  and  the  object  sought,  so  that  each  may  be  able  to 
conform  intelligently  to  the  general  plan. 

731.  Scouts  and  patrols:  The  rules  governing  the  use  of 
scouts  and  patrols  in  dismounted  action  are  in  no  sense  in- 
variable. The  initiative  and  responsibility  for  making  suit- 
able provision  for  their  use  rests  with  certain  commanders. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  SQUADRON.  283 

The  -usual  method  followed  is  for  each  troop  to  have  its 
two  scouts  reconnoiter  to  the  front  before  the  beginning  of  the 
action  and  for  them  to  be  absorbed  by  the  line  during  its 
advance.  They  communicate  by  signals.  Patrols  for  combat 
and  for  observation,  when  used,  remain  on  the  flanks,  advance 
with  the  firing  line,  and  keep  in  touch  by  signaling.  They  do 
not  join  in  the  main  attack. 

732.  The  fire  attack:  The  squadron,  whether  acting  alone  or 
as  part  of  a  larger  unit,  is  the  attack  imit. 

If  his  squadron  be  one  of  several  in  the  firing  line,  the  major, 
in  executing  his  part  of  the  attack,  pushes  his  squadron  for- 
ward as  vigorously  as  possible  within  the  front,  or  section, 
assigned  to  it.  The  great  degree  of  independence  allowed 
to  him  as  to  details  demands,  in  turn,  the  exercise  of  good 
judgment  on  his  part.  Better  leadership,  better  troops,  and 
more  favorable  terrain  enable  one  squadron  to  advance  more 
rapidly  in  attack  than  another  less  fortunate,  and  such  a 
squadron  will  insure  the  further  advance  of  the  others.  The 
leading  squadron  should  not,  however,  become  isolated ;  isola- 
tion may  lead  to  its  destruction. 

The  deployment  having  been  made,  the  firing  line  advances 
without  firing.  The  predominant  idea  must  be  to  close  with 
the  enemy  as  soon  as  possible,  without  ruinous  losses.  The 
limited  supply  of  ammunition  and  the  uncertainty  of  resupply, 
the  necessity  for  securing  fire  superiority  in  order  to  advance 
to  within  the  shorter  ranges,  and  the  impossibility  of  securing 
such  fire  superiority  at  ineffective  ranges,  make  it  imperative 
that  fire  be  not  opened  as  long  as  the  advance  can  be  con- 
tinued without  demoralizing  losses.  The  attack  wiiich  halts  to 
open  fire  at  long  range  (over  1,200  yards)  is  not  likely  ever  to 
reach  its  destination.  Every  effort  should  be  made,  by  using 
cover  or  inconspicuous  formations  (par.  652),  or  by  advancing 
the  firing  line  as  a  whole,  to  arrive  within  800  yards  of  the 
enemy  before  opening  fire. 

Occasionally  the  fire  of  adjacent  squadrons,  or  of  troops 
employing  fire  of  position,  or  of  supporting  artillery,  will  per- 
mit the  further  advance  of  the  entire  firing  line  from  this 
point,  but  it  will  generally  be  necessary  to  advance  by  rushes 
of  fractions  of  the  line  (par.  654). 

The  fraction  making  the  rush  should  be  as  large  as  the  hos- 
tile fire  and  the  necessity   for  maintaining  fire  superiority 


284  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

will  permit.  Depending  upon  circumstances,  the  strength  of 
the  fraction  may  vary  from  a  troop  to  a  few  men. 

The  advance  is  made  as  rapidly  as  possible  without  losing 
fire  superiority.  The  smaller  the  fraction  that  rushes  the 
greater  the  number  of  rifles  that  continue  to  fire  upon  the 
enemy.  On  the  other  hand,  the  smaller  the  fraction  that 
rushes,  the  slower  will  be  the  progress  of  the  attack. 

Enough  rifles  must  continue  in  action  to  insure  the  success 
of  each  rush.  Frequently  the  successive  advances  of  the  firing 
line  must  be  effected  by  rushes  of  fractions  of  decreased  size ; 
that  is,  advances  by  rushes  may  first  be  made  by  troop,  later 
by  platoon,  and  finally  by  sections  or  files ;  but  no  subsequent 
opportunity  to  increase  the  rate  of  advance,  such  as  better 
cover  or  a  decrease  of  the  hostile  fire,  should  be  overlooked. 

Whenever  shelter  for  the  entire  firing  line  is  practically  the 
same,  the  rush  is  begun  by  a  flank  fraction  of  the  line.  In  the 
absence  of  express  directions  from  the  major,  the  captain  of 
a  flank  troop  determines  when  an  advance  by  rushes  shall  be 
attempted.  A  troop  which  inaugurates  an  advance  by  rushes, 
crawling,  etc.,  becomes  the  base  or  directing  troop ;  others 
conform  to  it  and  move  forward  in  succession.  Whenever 
shelter  exists  for  part  of  the  line,  the  advance  should  ordi- 
narily begin  there,  and  the  units  thus  advanced  assist  in  keep- 
ing down  the  enemy's  fire  so  as  to  protect  the  advances  of  the 
others  which  follow.  The  fractions  need  not  be  uniform  in 
size.  Each  captain  indicates  how  his  troop  shall  rush,  having 
due  regard  to  the  ground  and  the  state  of  the  fire  fight. 

A  fraction  about  to  rush  is  sent  when  the  rest  of  the  line  is 
firing  vigorously,  otherwise  the  chief  advantage  of  this  method 
of  advancing  is  lost. 

The  length  of  the  rush  will  vary  from  30  to  80  yards,  de- 
pending upon  the  existence  of  cover,  positions  for  firing,  and 
the  hostile  fire. 

When  the  entire  firing  line  of  the  squadron  has  advanced  to 
the  new  line,  fresh  opportunities  are  sought  to  advance  as 
before. 

Two  identical  situations  will  never  confront  the  squadron; 
hence  at  drill  it  is  prohibited  to  arrange  the  details  of  an 
advance  before  the  preceding  one  has  been  concluded  or  to 
employ  a  fixed  or  prearranged  method  of  advancing  by  rushes. 


DISMOUNTED  COMBAT,  SQUADRON.  285 

The  major  posts  himself  so  as  best  to  direct  the  reinforcing 
of  the  firing  line  from  the  squadron  support  (or  reserve  when 
the  squadron  is  acting  alone).  When  all  or  nearly  all  of  the 
reinforcements  have  been  absorbed  by  the  firing  line,  he  joins 
and  takes  full  charge  of  the  latter. 

Reinforcing  the  firing  line  by  driblets  of  a  few  men  has  no 
appreciable  effect.  The  firing  line  requires  either  no  reinforce- 
ment or  a  strong  one.  Generally  one  or  two  platoons  at  a 
time  will  be  sent  forward  under  cover  of  a  heavy  fire  of  the 
firing  line. 

To  facilitate  control  and  to  provide  intervals  in  which  rein- 
forcements may  be  placed,  the  troops  in  the  firing  line  should 
be  kept  closed  in  on  their  centers  as  they  become  depleted  by 
casualties  during  the  advance. 

When  this  is  impracticable,  reinforcements  must  mingle 
with  and  thicken  the  firing  line.  In  battle  the  latter  method 
will  be  the  rule  rather  than  the  exception,  and  to  familiarize 
the  men  with  such  conditions  the  combat  exercise  of  the  squad- 
ron should  include  both  methods  of  reinforcing.  Occasionally, 
to  provide  the  necessary  intervals  for  reinforcing  by  either  of 
these  methods,  the  firing  line  should  be  thinned  by  causing  men 
to  drop  out  and  simulate  losses  during  the  various  advances. 
Under  ordinary  conditions  the  depletion  of  the  firing  line  for 
this  purpose  wall  be  from  one-fifth  to  one-half  of  its  strength. 

733.  Subject  to  orders  from  higher  authority,  the  major  de- 
termines the  point  from  which  the  assault  is  to  be  made.  The 
firing  line  having  arrived  at  that  point  and  being  in  readiness, 
the  major  causes  the  charge  to  be  sounded.  The  signal  is 
repeated  by  the  buglers  of  all  parts  of  the  line. 

The  platoon  and  troop  commanders  repeat  the  command 
charge,  spring  in  front  of  their  units  and  lead  them  to  the 
assault. 

The  further  conduct  of  the  assaulting  troops  w^ill  depend 
upon  circumstances.  They  may  halt  and  engage  in  pursuing 
fire ;  they  may  advance  a  short  distance  to  obtain  a  better  field 
of  fire  or  to  drive  the  enemy  from  the  vicinity ;  they  may 
rally ;  or  they  may  assemble  and  reorganize.  If  the  enemy 
vacates  his  position,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  open  fire 
at  once  on  the  retreating  mass,  reorganization  of  the  attacking 
troops  being  of  secondary  importance  to  the  infliction  of  fur- 
ther losses  upon  the  enemy  and  the  increase  of  his  confusion. 


286  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  horses  may  be  brought  up  and  a  portion  of  the  attacking 
line  may  be  quickly  mounted  to  conduct  a  more  rapid  pursuit 
and  to  intercept  the  enemy's  retreat. 

734.  The  defense:  In  defense,  as  in  attack,  the  squadron  is 
the  tactical  unit  best  suited  to  independent  assignment.  De- 
fensive positions  are  usually  divided  into  sections  and  a  regi- 
ment assigned  to  each. 

The  colonel  assigns  to  squadrons  portions  of  the  section 
allotted  to  the  regiment. 

The  major  locates  such  fire,  communicating,  and  cover 
trenches  and  obstacles  as  are  to  be  constructed.  He  assigns 
troops  to  construct  them  and  details  the  troops  to  occupy  them. 

The  major  reinforces  the  firing  line  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  applicable  to  the  attack  and  explained  in  connection 
therewith,  maintaining  no  more  rifles  in  the  firing  line  than 
are  necessary  to  prevent  the  enemy's  advance. 

The  supply  of  ammunition  in  the  defense  being  usually 
ample,  fire  is  opened  as  soon  as  it  is  possible  to  break  up  the 
enemy's  formation,  stop  his  advance,  or  inflict  material  loss; 
but  this  rule  must  be  modified  to  suit  the  ammunition  supply. 

If  ordered  or  compelled  to  withdraw  under  hostile  rifle  fire, 
the  reserve  will  be  posted  so  as  to  cover  the  retirement  of  the 
firing  line.  -. 

When  the  squadron  is  operating  alone,  the  reserve  must  be 
strong  and — all  troop  supports  being  in  action — it  must  be 
fed  sparingly  into  the  firing  line,  especially  if  a  counter  attack 
is  planned.  Opportunities  for  counter  attack  should  be  sought 
at  all  times. 

COMBAT    EXERCISES. 

735.  In  combat  exercises  the  major  will  assume  a  situation 
and  terminate  the  assault  accordingly. 


SQUADRON  FORMATIONS. 

PLATE  VIII.— THE  SQUADRON. 

C  Pars.  676,  G79.) 


287 


i:]::Ei:i:r:i:i::i::i:] 


LINE  or  PLATOON  COLUMNS. 


DOUBLE 
COLUMN. 


LINE.  OF 
TROOP  COLUMNS. 


MASS. 


-POSTS  IN  SOUADRON 
DirrEiRlNG  FROM  TRQOP.- 
■CAPTAiN  OF  BASH  TROOP 

FOLLOWS  MAJOR  AT  DISTANCE 

OF  //  YDS  IN  ALL   EVOLUTIONS. 
-OTHER  CAPfS  IN  ALL  COLUMN  FORMATIONS, 

ARE  ON  ONE    FLANK-  ON  LINE -EACH 

WITH  CHIEF  OF  HIS  LEADING 

■PLATOON  AND  3  YDS-  FROM  THE  COLUMN. 

-FIRST  SERGEANTS  -  IN  COLUMN  AND  IN 

DOUBLE  COLUMN  -  IN  FRONT  OF  FILE  CLOSERS. 
-ADJUTANT  ON  LEFT  OF  MAJOR. 
-BUGLER  IN  REAR  OF  MAJOR 
>3ZRCEANT  MAJOR  IN  REAR  OF  ADJUTANT. 


PLATOON  MASS. 


LINE  (ADVANCING) 


PLATE  IX.— THE  SQUADRON. 

(Pars.  683,698.) 

rT; 


COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS  FROM  ANY  CLOSE  ORDER  i 
FORMATION.  AS  LINE.  i        ji 

CSMWm-L  COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS,  2.MARCH.     ' 


0/ 


;  ^ 


\/'l  \/    UNEiHALTEp   ^^\: 


/    ;   J- 


LINE  ADVANCING 


>  C      I  I   1  I       5 

!    -?    :    /    i  J  -!  i   .?    :    / 


V        <^    >/ 


.        'c-S±-.yi 


LINE  FROM  ANY  CLOSE  ORDER   "> 
FORMATION  AS  PLATOON  MASS 
COMMAND: 

2.  LINE,  2.  MARCH. 


i — t- 


±=d 


PLATE  X.— THE  SQITADRON. 

(Pars.  686,690.) 


BEING  IN  LINE  OF  PLATOON  COLUMNS 

'  COMMAND:  ; 

1.  PLATOON  MASS.  2.  MARCH, 


// 


71. 


,<>"' 
.,<'''/ 


i      i  I      •      I 
\      »  I.     I      I 

=4="!  !~T~! 
;    '■'•  J  /  '■ 


\  /.I 


'/^ 


:3/ 


i;:H::Li;ii;:::i::ii:i:izi 


ADVANCING 
2/3  213      HALTED  3 


2/3 


LI 


1 


•      ^ 


H^/i 


u 


\\        i       I; 
u       IJ        L' 


\\     //      BE/NG  IN  ANY  CLOSE  ORDER  FORMATION  AS' LINE  OF  TROOP.  \C0Llj}^N3, 
v.    Vf         \\Z'M\hk\\.^:.l..LINEOF PLATOON.COLUMNS.  2.MARCH1     " 


38218  °— 18 19 


289 


PLATE  XI.— THE  SaUADRON. 

(Pars.  688,  696,  700.) 


^ 


V\  BEING  IN  COLUMN  OR  ANY OTHEJi 
A\     CLOSE  ORDER  FORMATION. 
\  COMMAND:  i.  DOUBLE.  COLUMN. 
\\  2.  MARCH. 


BEING  IN  MASS  OR  OTHER  CLOSE 
ORDER  FORMATION. 
COMMAND: 

1.  COLUMN,  i.  MARCH. 


SQUADRON  BEING  IN  ANY  CLOSE  ORDER  FORMA  TION.  AS 

i  LINE  OFJROOP  COLUMNS.    ^ 

Uk^O^  ZQ\A\J[kmi:l.  ON  FOURTH  (F/RST)  TROOP,     ^ MASS,  2.  MARCH. 

UD i.C 1.^ \  A 


290 


PLATE  XH.— THE  SaUADRON. 

(Par.  703.) 


CCHUON.  EXECUTED  ON  FOURTH  TROOP,  FROM  MASS. 


BEING  IN  ANY  CLOSE  ORDER  LINE  FORMATION,  AS.  MASS. 
THE.  MAJOR  COMMANDS:  1.  ON  FOURTH  (FIRST)  TROOP, 
ECHELON  2.  MARCH 


201 


PLATE  XIII.— THE  SQUADRON. 

(Par.  704.: 

CCHELON  DCECUTID  TO  THE.  LEFT  FRONT 
FROM  DOUBLE  COLUMN 


THE  SQUADRON-BEING  IN  ANY  COLUMN  FORMATION  AS 

DOUBLE  COLUMN 

•THL  MAJOR  COMMANDS: 

2  LEFT  (RIGHT)  FRONT  INTO  ECHELON    2.  MARCH 


292 


THE  REGIMENT. 

Special  Provisions. 

736.  The  colonel  as  commander  of  the  regiment  is  response 
ble  for  the  preparedness  of  his  regiment  for  war  service  (pars. 
1-33). 

For  the  purposes  of  drill  and  maneuver,  the  regiment  con- 
sists of  three  squadrons  and  a  machine-gun  troop.  The  move- 
rients  prescribed  apply  equally  to  a  less  number  of  squadrons. 

In  whatever  formation  the  regiment  may  be,  or  in  w^hatever 
direction  it  may  be  facing,  the  squadrons  retain  their  perma- 
nent administrative  designations  of  first  squadron,  second 
squadron,  etc. ;  for  convenience  at  drill,  however,  they  are 
always  designated  when  in  line  as  right,  center,  or  left  squad- 
ron, and  whenever  in  column,  as  leading,  center,  or  rear 
squadron,  these  designations  applying  to  their  actual  posi- 
tions at  the  time  in  line  or  in  column. 

To  FoKM  THE  Regiment. 

737.  Except  for  ceremonies,  the  regiment  is  habitually 
formed  in  line  of  masses.  It  may  be  formed  in  line  of  platoon 
masses,  in  column  of  fours,  or  in  column  of  masses  by  first 
notifying  squadron  commanders  as  to  the  formation  desired. 

At  adjutant's  call,  sounded  by  the  sergeant  bugler,  each 
squadron  is  formed  by  its  major  as  in  the  squadron.  The 
squadrons  being  formed  and  in  the  vicinity  of  and  in  rear  of 
the  line  on  which  the  regiment  is  to  form,  the  colonel  com- 
mands:  Form  regiment  (or  has  his  bugler  sound  adjutant's 
call,  followed  by  regimental  call),  and  with  his  staff  takes 
post  facing  in  the,  direction  the  line  is  to  face. 

The  squadrons  are  led  to  their  positions  in  succession  from 
the  rear,  the  leader  of  the  base  squadron  halting  it  when  he 
is  24  yards  in  rear  of  the  colonel. 

As  soon  as  the  last  squadron  is  in  line,  the  machine-gun 
troop  takes  its  post. 

293 


294  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  regiment  is  similarly  formed  in  line  of  platoon  masses, 
in  column  of  fours,  or  in  column  of  masses. 

To  form  the  regiment  for  a  ceremony,  see  par.  810. 

To  Rest  or  Dismiss   the  Regiment. 

738.  The  regiment  is  rested  and  called  to  attention  as  in  the 
squadron,  substituting  squadrons  for  troops  wherever  used  in 
the  commands.  To  dismiss  the  regiment  the  colonel  com- 
mands:  DISMISS  YOUR  SQUADRONS.  Each  major  conducts 
his  squadron  to  its  parade  ground,  where  it  is  dismissed  as 
prescribed. 

Base  Squadron. 

(See  par.  459.) 
Posts  of  Officers,  Etc. 

739.  Tlie  colonel. — Except  in  route  column  and  in  ceremo- 
nies, the  major  of  the  base  squadron  follows  the  colonel  at 
a  distance  of  24  yards,  when  the  latter  is  acting  as  leader  of 
the  regiment.  When  not  leading,  the  colonel  goes  wherever 
his  presence  is  necessary  (par.  448). 

740.  The  lieutenant  colonel. — In  all  line  formations  the  post 
of  the  lieutenant  colonel  is  30  yarUs  in  front  of  the  right  flank 
of  the  regiment.  In  column  his  post  is  abreast  of  the  major 
of  the  leading  squadron  and  6  yards  from  either  flank. 

During  field  exercises  and  marches  the  duties  of  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  are  to  assist  the  colonel  as  the  latter  may 
direct,  and,  unless  charged  with  regulating  the  pace  and 
direction  of  the  march  (par.  454),  he  is  not  restricted  to  any 
particular  post. 

741.  Majors. — In  line  formations  posts  are  the  same  as  in 
The  Squadron.  In  column  formations  the  post  of  the  major 
of  the  leading  squadron  is  as  in  The  Squadron;  the  post  of 
each  of  the  others  is  abreast  of  his  leading  captain  and  6 
yards  from  the  column  on  the  same  side  as  .the  captains  who 
march  on  the  flank  of  the  column.     (PI.  VIII.) 

For  posts  at  ceremonies  and  inspections,  see  pars.  798,  801, 
812,  830,  883. 

During  route  marches  and  field  exercises  majors  go  wher- 
ever they  can  best  command  their  squadrons. 


POSTS  IN  THE  REGIMENT.  295 

742.  Staff  and  no'ticom missioned  staff. — At  all  regimental  ex- 
ercises except  ceremonies  (par.  775),  the  adjutant  rides  on 
the  colonel's  left;  other  staff  officers  (if  present)  in  line  in 
order  of  rank  from  right  to  left,  the  senior  3  yards  in  rear 
of  the  colonel ;  the  sergeant  bugler  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  staff 
officer  on  the  right  of  the  line,  the  sergeant  major,  other 
members  of  the  noncommissioned  staff  (if  present),  and  or- 
derlies on  his  left. 

743.  Band. — In  line  and  in  line  of  columns  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  band  is  12  yards  to  the  right  of,  and  in  line 
with,  the  rank  of  the  right  squadron  or  leading  subdivision. 
In  column  it  is  12  yards  in  front  of  the  officers  of  the  leading 
subdivision. 

744.  Guard  to  the  standard. — In  line  and  in  line  of  columns 
the  guard  is  posted  by  itself,  midway  between  the  second  and 
third  troops  of  the  center  squadron,  on  line  with  the  leading 
unit.  If  there  be  but  two  squadrons  it  is  similarly  posted  be- 
tween them.  In  column,  it  maintains  a  corresponding  position 
in  the  center  of  the  column.  In  route  marches  the  guard  to 
the  standard  is  at  the  head  of  the  column,  in  rear  of  the 
orderlies. 

745.  Headquarters  troop,  supply  troop. — As  organizations 
these  troops  have  no  assigned  posts  in  regimental  formations. 
In  marches  and  in  campaign  the  headquarters  troop  (except 
the  members  assigned  to  squadrons)  marches  and  camps 
with  the  colonel ;  the  supply  troop  marches  and  camps  with 
the  regimental  train.  * 

746.  MacTiine-gun  troop. — The  position  of  the  machine-gun 
troop  is  usually  designated  by  the  colonel.  In  the  absence 
of  such  designation  its  position  in  all  line  formations  except 
ceremonies  (par.  783)  is  30  yards  in  rear  of  the  center.  In 
all  column  formations,  except  inspections  (par.  883),  it  is 
30  yards  in  rear  of  the  rear  v.nit  of  the  column.  In  cam- 
paign the  machine-gun  troop  will  be  employed  as  the  colonel 
may  direct. 

Geneeal  Peovisions  as  to  Regimental  Drills  and  Exercises. 
{See  also  pars.   322-339   and   446-467.) 

747.  A  squadron,  while  awaiting  the  completion  of  a  move* 
ment  by  other  squadrons,  may  be  permitted  by  its  major  to 
stand  at  case. 


296  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

748.  When  leading  in  person  and  not  certain  tliat  his  com- 
mands will  be  heard  or  his  signals  observed,  the  colonel  util- 
izes messengers. 

749.  When  the  leadership  of  the  regiment  is  temporarily 
turned  over  to  a  junior,  the  staff  and  noncommissioned  staff 
accompany  the  junior   (par,  456). 

750.  If  the  colonel's  orders  are  transmitted  by  messenger 
(whether  an  officer  or  an  enlisted  man)  the  messenger  uses 
the  formula,  Colonel's  (Regimental  commander's)  orders,  Sir, 
and  then  repeats  the  message  in  the  exact  words  in  which 
given,  or  delivers  the  message  if  a  written  one. 

751.  The  colonel  signals  or  has  sounded  attention  prepar- 
atory to  giving  an  oral  command  or  a  signal.  When  the 
regiment  is  in  more  than  one  line,  if  the  movement  is  to  be 
executed  by  one  of  the  lines  only,  first  {or  such)  luie  is  speci- 
fied in  the  preparatory  command ;  the  commander  of  the  desig- 
nated line  alone  repeats  and  executes  the  command. 

Regimental  Formations. 
(Plates   XIV,   XV,   XVI.) 

LINE  FORMATIONS. 

752.  Close  order: 

(1)  Line  (exceptional  for  regiment,  intervals  between 
squadrons,  16  yards). 

(2)  Line  of  plafaon  columns  (each  squadron  in  line  of 
platoon  columns,  all  on  line,  squadron  interval,  platoon  front 
plus  12  yards). 

(3)  Line  of  troop  columns  (each  squadron  in  line  of  troop 
columns,  all  on  line,  squadron  interval,  troop  front  plus  12 
yards). 

(4)  Line  of  platoon  masses  (the  squadrons,  each  in  platoon 
mass,  are  abreast  with  intervals  of  16  yards). 

(5)  Line  of  masses  (the  squadrons,  each  in  mass,  are 
abreast  with  intervals  of  16  yards). 

COLUMN   FORMATIONS. 

(1)  Column  of  fours  (each  squadron  in  column  of  fours, 
with  distances  between  squadrons  of  IT  yards). 


REGIMENTAL  FORMATIONS.  29^ 

(2)  Double  column  (each  squadron  in  double  column,  squad- 
ron distance,  17  yards). 

(3)  Column  of  platoons  (each  squadron  in  column  of  pla- 
toons, squadron  distance,  platoon  front  plus  13  yards). 

(4)  Column  of  masses  (each  squadron  in  mass,  squadron 
distance,  40  yards). 

(5)  Column  of  troops  (each  squadron  in  column  of  troops, 
squadron  distance,  troop  front  plus  13  yards ;  exceptional  for- 
mation for  evolutions;  used  for  squadron  and  regimental  in- 
spections and  for  camps)   (par.  476). 

Echelon:  As  in  squadron,  a  maneuver  formation  (normally 
the  squadrons  maintain  the  formations  they  had  when  the 
evolution  was  ordered). 

Two  (or  more)  lines:  Maneuver  formations. 

Extended  order:  Maneuver  formations  through  squadron 
commanders. 

753.  The  command  for  the  regiment  to  pass  to  the  direction 
of  march  from  any  one  of  the  foregoing  close-order  formations 
to  any  other  such  formation  consists  of  the  name  of  the  forma- 
tion desired  followed  by  the  command  of  execution.  Tlius,  to 
form  column  of  fours  from  any  other  close-order  formation,  as 
line  of  platoon  columns,  the  command  is:  1.  Column,  2. 
MARCH  (par.  478). 

The  commands  for  taking  formations  to  a  flank  correspond 
to  those  in  The  Squadron. 

Signals  are  the  same  as  in  The  Squadron  for  formations  of 
like  names.  For  Line  of  Masses  and  Line  of  Platoon  Masses 
the  corresponding  signals  in  The  Squadron  are  preceded  by  the 
signal  for  line;  for  column  of  masses,  by  that  for  column. 

Certain  formations  and  evolutions  are  indicated  in  Plates 
XIV  and  XV,  also  an  elementary  regimental  maneuver 
against  an  outlined  enemy  in  Plate  XVI.  The  formation  for 
the  charge  is  suggestive  only  and  for  greater  clearness  shows 
but  one  (the  base)  troop  of  the  charging  squadron,  which 
latter  actually  consists  of  four  troops  (less  one  platoon)  led 
by  the  major,  the  second  and  third  platoons  of  each  troop 
regulating  on  their  own  base  platoons. 

Route  Marches. 

754.  The  regiment  takes  route  formation  at  the  command, 
ROUTE,   ORDER. 


298  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

In  route  marches,  the  colonel  rides  at  the  head  of  the 
column  with  the  adjutant  on  his  left.  They  are  followed  by 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  senior  surgeon  (if  there  be  more 
than  one  surgeon),  and  such  other  staff  officers,  except  supply 
officers  and  junior  surgeons,  that  may  be  attached  to  regi- 
mental headquarters.  They  are  followed  by  such  of  the  head- 
quarters troop  as  do  not  properly  ride  with  the  squadron  or 
tlie  train  in  the  following  order :  The  regimental  noncommis- 
sioned staff,  the  orderlies,  the  color  guard,  and  the  band. 
Regimental  headquarters  usually  marches  in  column  of  twos. 

The  supply  officers,  the  supply  troop,  and  those  members  of 
the  headquarters  troop  whose  duties  properly  lie  therewith, 
ride  with  the  train.  The  surgeon,  if  there  be  but  one ;  or,  if 
there  be  more  than  one,  the  junior  surgeons,  ride  with  the 
sanitary  train. 

The  major  of  the  leading  squadron  follows  regimental  head- 
quarters at  20  yards  and  the  squadrons  increase  their  distance 
to  20  yards  (par.  706). 

The  Charge. 

755.  The  mounted  charge  may  be  executed  by  the  regiment 
in  accordance  with  methods  prescribed  for  the  squadron,  the 
colonel  and  staff  taking  posts  on  left  of  the  major  and  staff  of 
the  base  squadron. 

The  Assembly. 

756.  At  the  command,  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH,  the  squadron 
commanders  form  their  squadrons  (par.  707)  and  lead  them 
toward  the  colonel.  The  regiment,  without  further  commands, 
is  formed  as  in  par.  737.  Should  the  command  be,  1.  Squad- 
rons assemble,  2.  MARCH,  the  squadrons  are  formed  and  held 
in  place  awaiting  instructions  from  the  colonel. 

The  Rally. 

757.  The  command,  RALLY,  by  the  colonel  is  repeated  as  in 
The  Squadron.  Squadron  commanders  rally  their  squadrons 
(par.  708)  and  lead  them  toward  the  colonel,  who  gives  such 
further  instructions  as  circumstances  require. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION— THE    REGIMENT.  299 

Extended  Order. 

758.  Formations  in  extended  order  are  taken  as  in  the  squad- 
ron ;  they  are  not  taken  directly  by  the  regiment. 

759.  After  the  mechanism  of  the  drill  has  been  learned, 
every  exercise,  in  so  far  as  practicable,  should  be  in  the  nature 
of  a  maneuver  against  an  outlined  or  represented  enemy. 
Such  exercises  should  always  be  conducted  under  an  assumed 
situation,  which  should  have  been  carefully  worked  out  be- 
forehand, and  each  should  be  followed  by  a  discussion  of  the 
principles  involved  (pars.  12-22).  Fixed  or  prearranged 
methods  of  attack  or  defense  are  prohibited. 

The  value  in  action  of  the  regiment  as  a  tactical  unit  de- 
pends not  only  upon  the  actual  efficiency  of  its  component 
units  but  upon  the  facility  with  which  the  commander  can 
handle  such  units  in  combination. 

Dismounted  Action. 

760.  When  it  is  impracticable,  owing  to  the  tactical  situa- 
ation,  to  the  nature  of  the  terrain,  or  to  other  causes  to  accom- 
plish by  mounted  action  a  mission  assigned  to  the  regiment,  it 
resorts  to  dismounted  combat. 

Under  tactical  situations  so  considered  may  be : 

(a)  Occasions  when  the  proximity  of  the  opposing  forces 
has  practically  reduced  operations  to  those  of  a  siege,  and 
the  enemy's  numbers  and  dispositions  prevent  turning  his 
flanks. 

(b)  Instances  in  which  Important  defensive  positions  at  a 
distance  from  our  main  body  have  been  seized  and  must  be 
held  pending  the. arrival  of  our  infantry. 

(c)  Forcing  a  defensive  position  held  by  the  enemy  in  order 
to  clear  the  way  for  further  advance. 

(d)  In  pursuit,  to  take  up  positions  on  the  enemy's  line  of 
retreat. 

(e)  In  retreat,  to  take  up  corresponding  positions  in  order 
to  delay  his  advance. 

Under  nature  of  the  terrain  there  may  be : 

(a)  Country  that  is  densely  wooded,  exceedingly  rough,  or 
very  marshy. 

Under  other  causes  may  be  classed  conditions  such  as : 

(a)  That  the  horses  have  become  so  worn  down  by  service 
conditions  as  to  render  mounted  action  inadvisable. 


300  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(&)  That  the  time  may  have  been  too  short  to  train  the 
regiment  for  effective  mounted  action. 

761.  The  colonel  (subject  to  orders  from  higher  autliority  if 
the  regiment  be  not  acting  alone)  in  his  orders  gives  his  squad- 
ron commanders  information  as  to  the  situation  and  the  pro- 
posed plan  of  action,  he  designates  the  troops  (ordinarily  a 
squadron)  for  the  regimental  reserve,  and  may  designate  the 
number  of  troops  of  each  of  the  other  squadrons  for  the  fir- 
ing line.  The  remaining  troops  of  such  squadrons  constitute 
the  squadron  supports  under  their  respective  majors  and  are 
used  by  them  in  reinforcing  their  firing  lines  after  the  troop 
supports  have  been  absorbed  (par.  726). 

The  regiment  is  deployed  by  the  colonel's  orders. 

The  fire  attack  in  each  squadron  is  conducted  by  its  major, 
captains,  and  lieutenants  as  in  The  Squadron.  The  colonel,  in 
attack,  designates  the  base  squadron  and  the  general  direction 
of  the  enemy ;  in  defense,  the  portions  of  the  line  to  be  held 
by  each  squadron  and,  in  general,  the  sector  to  be  observed 
by  each ;  in  both  attack  and  defense,  the  employment  of  the 
machine  guns  should  be  prescribed  and  the  position  of  the 
reserve  indicated. 

The  Regiment  in  the  Brigade. 

general  considerations. 

762.  The  regiment  as  part  of  a  larger  Cavalry  unit  conforms 
to  the  principles  heretofore  laid  down,  except  in  so  far  as 
modifications  are  necessary  in  order  to  act  harmoniously  as  a 
fraction  of  the  whole. 

A  brigade  reserve  is  always  held  out  by  the  brigade  com- 
mander, thus  miflimizing  the  necessity  for  a  regimental  re- 
serve (which  is  always  required  when  the  regiment  is  acting 
alone).  The  regimental  reserve  should,  however,  be  retained 
for  use  as  a  local  reserve  by  the  colonel  and  as  a  support  to 
his  own  attacking  line  in  case  of  need. 

THE  BRIGADE. 

763.  The  typical  Cavalry  brigade  is  a  tactical  unit  and  con- 
sists of  a  headquarters  and  three  regiments  of  Cavalry,  com- 
manded by  a  brigadier  general. 


BRIGADE  AND  DIVISION.  301 

Brigade  Formations. 

764.  The  brigade  is  formed  in  line  of  masses,  in  line  of 
platoon  masses,  or  in  column  of  masses;  intervals  and  dis- 
tances may  be  varied  to  suit  the  occasion. 

Regiments  in  a  brigade  are  posted  in  line  and  in  column  as 
the  brigade  commander  may  direct.  For  convenience  (such) 
regiment  is  said  to  be  the  leading,  center,  or  rear  regiment  if 
in  column,  or  the  right,  center,  or  left  regiment  if  in  line. 

In  route  marches  the  brigade  moves  by  regiment  and,  if 
possible,  on  parallel  roads. 

Field  Exercises. 

765.  The  brigade  does  not  engage  in  prescribed  drills,  but  is 
maneuvered  by  regiments  in  field  exercises  which  are  con- 
ducted by  tactical  orders  formulated  to  suit  the  assumed 
situation. 

766.  The  general's  orders  are  transmitted  by  agents  of  com- 
miinicatioii;  as  a  rule  each  regiment  detaches  for  this  purpose 
an  officer  and  a  bugler  for  duty  at  brigade  headquarters. 

767.  The  brigade  is  maneuvered  by  tactical  orders  sent  to 
regimental  commanders. 

THE  DIVISION. 

768.  The  typical  Cavalry  division  is  both  an  administrative 
and  a  tactical  unit,  and  consists  of  a  headquarters,  three 
Cavalry  brigades,  one  regiment  of  Field  Artillery  (horse), 
one  battalion  of  mounted  engineers,  one  field  signal  battalion 
(mounted),  one  aero  squadron,  one  ammunition  train,  one 
supply  train,  one  engineer  train,  and  one  sanitary  train,  and 
is  commanded  by  a  major  general. 

769.  Batteries  of  horse  artillery  that  accompany  brigades 
when  detached  are,  when  the  division  is  united,  formed  with 
their  regiment. 

770.  Brigades  in  the  division  have  designations  correspond- 
ing to  those  of  regiments  in  brigade  and  the  same  principles 
as  in  the  brigade  apply  to  both  field  and  combat  exercises. 

771.  Positions  of  the  Artillery  and  of  special  units  are  pre- 
scribed by  the  division  commander. 


PLATE  XIV.— THE  REGIMENT. 

(Pars.  752,  753.) 


IIH, 

mi. 
iHi 


^m 


■v^^. 


mi 


■III 


colone:l\commands:      "-----' 

I  mCHT FffONT INTO  ECHELON.  2.MAffCH. 


li 
li 

is 

I 


,  1 


COLUMN  or  MASSES 


COLONEL  \EADING; 


NO  COMNfANDS. 


ffEG/Marr/N  une 


302 


'/Aw 

/''A'i> 

////'  Kitv 

/ 

'/    !!*S^ 

v^ 

//' 

'/'      1 "  1 ' 

^v''\'>> 

/  /  *, 

^.*  \\ 

//f' 

;:?; 

v''3's 

.4?' 

,/i|\ 

'v* 

'' >'  \ 

/    1    I    \ 

1 

■<   <■'<■'  ■'■'■'' 

,\       COLONEL  COMMANDS: 
^X\  1.  COLUMN  or MJiSSES, 
\  V\       2.  MANCH. 


LEFTSCfDh     CENTENS&DN.    N/GffT  SQ'DH 


PLATE  XV.— THE  REGIMENT. 

(Pars.  752,  753.  j 


COLUMN  OF  PLATOONS 


\ii  II I  I  n     If  I  1 1 1  II I  III     1 1 1  1 1  M  1 1  Ml 
T    ^Lmi.LZ^\h\hkmbJ.COWMNmHT.ZMMCfi 


LINE  OF  PLATOON  COLU^Ns/k       /  •/  i  \       'I    A  V"X       COLON  ELL  COMMANDS: 
i  i  i  1 1 J  I  !  ! !  i !   J  i  1 1  i  i  I  i !  i !  I    !  !  I  1 1!  !  1 !  i  !  I  2.MARCH 

i:;ii:i!mj  vliyiivTiilj  \!'ii;\;;\:i    colon eil commands: 

V  V  j'    I      V  y  y   i'      i\    i   pt-'f^^OFPLATOONCOU/MHS 
l/N£OF77fOOPCawms\     I     1     I       I     I     I     I       I     I      I     I  2.AMPC// 

\S\\\\  \!  J  I J  J 

\\\\  \  1  j  /  ////  colonel  COMMANDS: 

''•'i^'l.\iii ;..'.''  ILINEOFTPOOP  COLUMNS 
UNE0FMAS5ES                                        llll  HII  !|l|  2./tfAPC/f 

/Jji  /ill  \V'\  COLONtL  COMMANDS: 

♦  ;~r~T '  ' 
J  i  •  I  :  i  :  • 
3     i: : ; !  ';  colonel  commands:  i.  line  of 

\       \\''\'.''        \  PLATOON  MASSES    Z.MARM 


REGIMENT  IN  COLUMN 


!  Y/' 


303 


PLATE  XVI.— THE  REGIMENT. 

(Pars.  752,  753.) 


COLUMN  OF  PLA  TOONS 

III  III  III  III  III  III  III  III  III  III  III 

COLONEL  %\mk\k-.-2.FdUfiS'filGHT,Z.MARaf 

; ; ;  ■ ;  \FORMiNs  : ; ;  ;:;;;:;;  ;| 

UNEOF  PLATOON  COLUMNS  \ ; ; 


REGIMENT  ACTING  ALONE 


III  til    III 


3tiaUN£ 


;  Mil  M.G.TROOP : ;  ; : :  : 

!l  III  III     III  III  III  III 

i  COLONEL  GIVES  FOLLOWING  ORDERS: 

■  TO  MAJOaCENTER  SgUN:  RCGT.  TO  FORM  IN  THREE  LINES:  MOVE  CENTER 
SO'DN.  FORWARD  AS  FIRST  UNE,  AT  A  TROT! 
TO  MAJOR.  RIGHT  SQ'D'N:  REGT  TO  FORM  IN  THREE  LINES:  FORM  RIGHT 
a>h';\'  SQ'D'N.  INLINE  OF  TROOP  COLUMNS  AND  FOL' 

id '  LOtV  CENTER  SQ'D'N  AT  800  YDS.  DISTANCE^ 

lii  TO  MAJOR.  LEFT  SWN:  REGT  TO  FORM  IN  THREE  LINES;  FORM  LEFT 
SQVN  IN  MASS  AND  FOLLOW  RIGHT  SC'DTN  AT 
•-;-  aOOrOSDISTANCEl    M.G.TROOPmLLREfSRTTOim 

>      \'  -TO  0.0  M.G.  TROOP:  REGT  TO  FORM  IN  THREE  LINES;  REPORT  TO  GiO. 
\      -     ^  LEFTSQriTN. 


/    \  \\ 
/    i    \    i'\ 

ISrUN£\\\  \\\  11}  Mi 


1 1 1  ^ 


w 


^y 


• /-  //    , 
//-      -- 

COLONEIL:  (NEAR  FLANK  OF  1ST.  LINE]  SENDS  FOLLOWING: 

TO  CO.  I  SI  UNE:  FORM  PLATOON  MASS  AND  CHARGE  ENEMY  TO  LEFT  FRONT. 

2ND  LINE  miL  SUPPORT  YOU/ 
TO  00  2ND.  LINE:  F/RST  LINE  ABOUT  TO  CHARGE.  SUPPORT  IT! 
TO  CO.  3RD.  LINE:  ACT  AS  REGIMENTAL  RESERVE:  MOVE  TO  SHELTER  OF  WOODS  ON 
YOUR  LEFT  FRONT! 
WTE:  CO.  1ST  LINE  DETACHES  A  PLATOON  AS  RIGHT  FLANK  GUARD. 

CO.  ZND.UNE.UPON  RECEIVING  ORDaR,  DECIDES  TO  rOUOW  FIRST  Ul^  IN  ECHELON  OF  COUJMNS.WITH 
ONE  TROOP  AS  RIGHT  FLANK  GUARD. 

CO  SRD.  LINE.  UPON  REACHING  WOODS,  RECONNOITRES  TO  FRONT  AND  FINDING  FIRE  ACTION  POSSIBLE 
PLACES  THE  MACHINE  GUNS  AND  TWO  TROOPS  DISMOUNTED  ON  THE  LINE. 

304 


PART  VL— CEREMONIES,  INSPECTIONS,  AND 
MUSTER. 

772.  The  prescribed  ceremonies  are  reviews,  parades,  escorts 
of  honor,  funeral  escorts,  escorts  to  the  standard,  and  guard 
mounting. 

Genekal  Rules  for  Reviews. 
(When  applicable  to  other  ceremonies,  reference  is  made.) 

773.  Reviews  are  ceremonies  tendered  to  high  civil  or  mili- 
tary officials,  or  to  foreign  dignitaries ;  they  may  also  be 
ordered  by  commanders  for  the  purpose  of  making  a  general 
inspection  of  the  arms,  clothing,  equipment,  and  personnel  of 
an  organization,  as  well  as  a  test  of  horsemanship,  condition 
and  endurance  of  mounts,  precision  of  evolutions,  etc. 

774.  The  reviewing  ground  is  usually  rectangular  in  shape 
and  of  a  size  suited  to  the  command;  the  troops  are  formed 
on  the  middle  portion  of  one  of  the  long  sides  facing  the  field, 
the  reviewing  officer's  post  being  at  the  middle  point  of  the 
opposite  side  and  facing  the  troops. 

775.  Adjutant,  staff,  and  noncommissioned  staff:  As  soon  as 
the  unit  has  formed  on  the  line  and  been  reported  (pars.  797, 
810),  its  commander,  staff,  and  noncommissioned  staff  turn 
about  and  take  corresponding  positions  facing  to  the  front, 
except  that  the  adjutant's  post  is  not  with  the  commanding 
officer  (par.  742),  but  on  the  right  of  the  staff. 

776.  Band,  field  music:  The  band  of  an  organization  plays 
while  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  in  front  and  in  rear  of 
the  organization.  In  the  march  past,  it  changes  direction  at 
the  markers  without  command  and  immediately  after  passing 
the  reviewing  officer,  turns  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in 
front  of  and  facing  the  reviewing  officer  and  continues  to  play 
until  its  regiment  has  passed.     In  a  review  of  more  than  one 

88218  °— 18 20  -  305 


306  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

regiment  when  the  band  of  the  following  regiment  arrives 
within  100  yards  of  the  reviewing  officer  the  band  of  the  pre- 
ceding regiment  ceases  playing  and  joins  its  regiment.  The 
band  of  the  following  regiment  then  begins  to  play.  Whenever 
the  regimental  standard  salutes  in  formations  for  review,  the 
National  Anthem  will  be  played  by  the  band  or  To  the  Stand- 
ard, the  GeneraVs  March  and  flourishes  will  be  sounded  by 
the  buglers,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  personage  saluted ; 
also  in  passing  in  review  with  the  band  halted  in  front  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  the  band  continues  to  play  while  the  flour- 
ishes and  march  are  sounded  by  the  buglers  with  the  band 
(pars.  908,  922). 

When  the  command  is  to  pass  at  an  increased  gait,  the  baud 
remains  in  front  of  the  reviewing  officer  and  continues  to  play 
until  the  column  has  completed*  its  first  change  of  direction 
after  passing  the  reviewing  officer.  As  soon  as  the  increased 
gait  is  taken  up  by  the  column,  the  band  plays  in  appropriate 
time.  Upon  completion  of  the  review,  the  band  returns  to  the 
position  it  occupied  before  marching  in  review  or  is  dismissed 
as  may  be  directed. 

If,  after  the  first  march  past,  a  formation  with  a  front  so 
wide  as  to  interfere  with  the  band  is  ordered,  the  latter  takes 
position  12  yards  to  the  right  of  and  on  line  with  the  review- 
ing officer. 

When  mounted,  the  band  is  usually  formed  in  column  of 
fours ;  dismounted,  it  is  formed  in  two  or  more  ranks  with 
sufficient  intervals  between  the  musicians  and  distances  be- 
tween the  ranks  to  permit  the  free  use  of  instruments. 

The  buglers,  when  united,  form  with  and  in  rear  of  the  band, 
their  intervals  and  distances  corresponding  to  those  of  the 
band.  When  the  band  is  not  present,  the  posts,  movements, 
and  duties  of  the  united  buglers  are  similar  to  those  prescribed 
for  the  band.  The  posts  of  the  band,  dismounted,  correspond 
to  those  when  mounted. 

The  post  of  the  first  sergeant  (drum  major)  of  the  band  is 
3  yards  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  band  ;  he  gives  the  signals 
for  its  movements ;  when  signals  are  not  used,  the  band  is 
marched  as  explained  for  The  Squad,  substituting  in  the 
command  the  word  "  band  "  for  "  squad." 

Signals  for  movement  of  the  band  correspond  to  the  saber 
signals  as  far  as  practicable. 


GENERAL  RTTLES  FOR  REVIEWS.  30? 

777.  Brigades  and  larger  bodies:  In  review  of  brigades  and 
larger  or  mixed  commands,  the  commander  of  each  regiment 
or  corresponding  unit  will  maintain  the  gait  and  pace  after 
passing  the  reviewing  officer  and,  unless  otherwise  ordered, 
will  leave  the  column  and  return  to  camp  or  stables  by  the 
most  practicable  route,  so  conducting  its  march  after  leaving 
the  column  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  march  of  the  units  in 
rear. 

778.  Commanding  officer  and  staff:  When  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  unit  being  reviewed  faces  the  line  to  give  com- 
mands, the  staff,  noncommissioned  staff,  and  orderlies  do  not 
change  position. 

During  each  march  past  the  commanding  officer  of  troops 
and  his  staff,  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  turn  out  of 
the  column,  the  commanding  officer  takes  post  at  the  right 
of  the  reviewing  officer  and  the  members  of  his  staff  take 
post  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer's  staff;  sabers  are 
not  returned.  When  the  rear  element  of  his  command  has 
passed,  the  commanding  officer  of  troops,  without  changing 
his  position,  salutes  the  reviewing  officer ;  he  and  the  mem- 
bers of  his  staff  then  rejoin  the  command. 

If  the  person  reviewing  the  command  be  not  mounted  the 
commanding  officer  and  his  staff  on  turning  out  of  the  column, 
after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  dismount,  preparatory  to 
taking  post.  In  such  case  the  salute  of  the  commanding  officer, 
prior  to  rejoining  his  command,  is  made  with  the  hand  before 
mounting. 

779.  Formations:  To  secure  uniformity  and  precision  of 
movement  platoons  should  be  equalized  throughout,  as  nearly 
as  practicable,  avoiding,  however,  transfers  from  one  troop 
to  another. 

In  forming  for  review  the  troops  may  be  placed  in  any 
authorized  line  formation.  The  squadi'on  is  usually  formed 
in  line;  it  may  be  in  platoon  mass;  the  regiment  is  -usually 
in  line  of  platoon  masses  or  line  of  masses ;  the  brigade  in  line 
of  masses.  If  the  ground  is  restricted  formations  and  move- 
ments must  be  adapted  to  the  space  and  intervals  and  dis- 
tances reduced. 

780.  Gaits:  Mounted  troops  pass  in  review  the  first  time 
around  at  a  walk  and  thereafter  at  sucb  gaits  as  the  review- 


308  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ing  officer  may  direct.     For  gaits,  if  formations  are  changed 
(par.  337). 

781.  Guidon:  At  all  ceremonies  the  post  of  the  guidon  is  on 
the  right  of  the  rank  if  the  troop  is  in  line,  or  on  the  right  of 
the  leading  platoon  if  it  is  in  column  of  platoons. 

782.  Headquarters  troop :  The  organization,  as  such,  does  not 
attend  ceremonies,  inspections,  and  muster  with  the  regiment ; 
unless  excused,  all  enlisted  men,  however,  attend,  forming 
on  line  with  and  to  the  left  of  the  regimental  noncommissioned 
staff.  For  formation  of  the  headquarters  troop  by  itself  for 
inspection  and  muster  see  par.  886. 

783.  Machine-gun  troop:  When  the  machine-gun  troop  is 
present  at  review  or  other  ceremonies  it  maintains  its  habitual 
formation.  Its  post,  in  line,  is  16  yards  to  the  left  of  the 
rank ;  in  column,  16  yards  in  rear  of  the  last  element. 

784.  March  in  review:  The  first  march  past  is  always  made 
at  a  walk  and  (except  in  brigades  and  larger  units)  in  column 
of  platoons.  The  reviewing  officer  may  direct  subsequent  pass- 
ings in  review  at  any  gait  or  in  any  authorized  formation.  If 
he  orders  the  formation  changed  the  evolution  is  made  immedi- 
ately after  the  second  change  of  direction  beyond  the  review- 
ing stand.  In  commands  comprising  more  than  one  arm  the 
width  of  front  in  the  march  past  is  made,  as  nearly  as  is  prac- 
ticable, the  same  for  all  arms.  Troops  march  in  review  with 
the  reviewing  officer  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  column ;  in 
the  latter  case  the  commander  and  his  staff,  on  turning  out  of 
the  column,  take  post  as  prescribed,  but  to  the  left  of  the 
reviewing  officer.  The  march  past  will  be  so  regulated  that 
the  different  arms  when  passing  the  reviewing  officer  will  be 
separated  by  a  distance  of  about  100  yards. 

785.  Markers:  The  adjutant  posts  mounted  men,  or  other- 
wise marks  the  points  where  the  column  is  to  change  direc- 
tion in  such  manner  that  the  right  flank  of  the  column  in 
passing  will  be  about  10  yards  from  the  reviewing  officer. 

786.  Precedence  of  troops,  squadrons,  regiments,  and  bri- 
gades: On  occasions  of  ceremony,  except  funerals  and  re- 
views of  large  forces,  troops  will  be  arranged  from  right  to 
left  in  line  and  from  head  to  rear  in  column  in  the  following 
order :  First,  Infantry ;  second.  Field  Artillery ;  third,  Cavalry. 
Artillery,  Engineer,  and  Signal  Corps  troops,  equipped  as  In- 
fantry, are  posted  as  Infantry ;  dismounted  Cavalry  and  Ma- 


GENERAL  RTTLES  FOR  REVIEWS.  309 

rines  attached  to  the  Army  are  on  the  left  of  the  Infantry  in 
the  order  named ;  companies  or  detachments  of  tlie  Hospital 
Corps  and  mounted  detachments  of  Engineers  are  assigned  to 
phices  according  to  the  nature  of  tlie  ceremony ;  mounted  com- 
panies and  detachments  of  the  Signal  Corps  are  posted  as 
Cavalry.  When  Cavalry  and  Field  Artillery  are  reviewed  to- 
gether without  other  troops,  the  Artillery  is  posted  on  the  left. 
Troops  in  column  in  funeral  escorts  will  be  arranged  from 
head  to  rear  in  the  following  order :  First,  Cavalry ;  second. 
Field  Artillery ;  third,  Infantry.  In  the  same  arm  Regulars, 
militia  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  and  Volunteers  are 
posted  in  line  from  right  to  left  or  in  column  from  head  to 
rear,  in  the  order  named.  In  reviews  of  large  bodies  of  troops 
the  different  arms  and  classes  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of 
the  commanding  general,  due  regard  being  paid  to  their  posi- 
tion in  camp.  On  all  other  occasions  troops  of  all  classes  are 
posted  at  the  discretion  of  the  general  or  senior  commander. 
(Par.  6,  A.  R.) 

787.  When  forming  for  ceremonies,  the  troops  in  the  squad- 
rons, the  squadrons  in  the  regiment,  and  the  regiments  in  the 
brigade  are  posted  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from  front  to 
rear  in  column  in  the  order  of  rank  of  their  respective  com- 
manders presert  in  the  formation,  the  senior  on  the  right  in. 
line  or  at  the  head  in  column. 

783.  In  commands  larger  than  a  brigade,  the  order  in  col- 
umn or  in  line  is  as  prescribed  by  the  general  commanding. 
When  an  organization  is  to  be  review^eil  by  an  inspector  junior 
in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer,  the  commanding  officer  re- 
ceives the  review  and  is  accompanied  by  the  inspector,  who 
takes  post  on  his  left. 

789.  Reviewing  officer  and  his  staff:  The  post  of  the  review- 
ing officer,  usually  opposite  the  center  of  the  line,  is  marked 
by  a  flag. 

790.  Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade  and  distinguished 
personages  invited  to  accompany  the  reviewing  officer  place 
themselves  on  his  left ;  their  staffs  and  orderlies  place  them- 
selves, respectively,  on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  of 
the  reviewing  officer ;  all  others  who  accompany  the  reviewing 
officer  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  his  staff,  their  orderlies 
in  rear.     The  flag  of  a  general  officer  is  on  the  right  of  his 


310  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

orderly.     A  staff  ofRcer  is  designated  to  escort  distinguished 
personages  and  to  indicate  to  them  their  proper  positions. 

791.  The  troops  being  in  readiness,  tlie  reviewing  officer,  as 
an  indication  to  the  commanding  officer  to  proceed  with  the 
review,  rides  alone  a  few  steps  toward  him  and  receives  the 
salute;  then,  accompanied  or  not  by  his  staff,  he  either  joins 
the  commanding  officer  and  rides  around  the  troops  or  instead 
thereof  directs  the  commanding  officer  to  march  the  troops  in 
review,  he  (the  reviewing  officer)  returning  to  his  post  at  the 
flag. 

When  passing  around  the  troops  (which  may  be  dispensed 
with,  if  desired),  the  reviewing  officer  and  those  accompany- 
ing him  salute  the  standard  when  passing  in  front  of  it,  the 
standard  not  saluting.  The  reviewing  officer  and  others  at 
the  reviewing  stand  salute  the  standard  as  it  passes;  the 
reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute  of  tlie  commanding  officer 
of  troops  only.  Those  who  accompany  the  reviewing  officer 
salute  only  the  standard. 

792.  When  riding  around  the  troops,  the  reviewing  officer 
may  direct  his  staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  to  remain  at  the  post 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  or  that  only  his  personal  staff  and  flag 
shall  accompany  him.  In  either  case  the  commanding  officer 
alone  accompanies  the  reviewing  officer.  If  the  reviewing 
officer  is  accompanied  by  his  entire  staff,  the  staff  officers  of 
the  commander  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  staff  of 
the  reviewing  officer. 

793.  Salutes  by  standards  and  guidons:  The  standards,  na- 
tional and  regimental,  are  with  the  squadron  designated  by 
the  colonel,  usually  the  center,  the  color  guard  being  posted 
on  line  with  the  rank  and  midway  between  the  second  and 
third  troops ;  in  line  of  columns  the  guard  is  similarly  placed 
on  line  with  the  leading  subdivisions.  In  column  formations 
it  occupies  a  corresponding  position  near  the  center  of  the 
column,  equally  distant  from  the  flanks.  When  but  two 
squadrons  are  present,  the  color  guard  is  posted  between  the 
squadrons. 

794.  Each  guidon  and,  when  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer 
entitles  him  to  the  honor,  each  regimental  standard  salutes  at 
the  command,  Present  saber,  and  again  in  the  first  march 
past.  The  troops  may  pass  several  times  at  different  gaits,  in 
which  case  the  salutes  are  rendered  the  first  time  only.     In 


SQUADRON  FORMATIONS  FOR  CEREMONIES.  311 

the  first  march  past,  at  the  walk,  all  officers  and  all  com- 
manders of  platoons,  the  noncommissioned  staff,  and  the 
guidons  salute;  those  salutin.c;  turn  the  head  and  eyes  toward 
the  reviewing  officer  (par.  922). 

795.  Supply  troop:  The  supply  troop  attends  with  the  field 
train  all  reviews,  inspections,  and  musters  at  which  the  train 
is  present.  At  other  such  ceremonies  officers  and  men,  unless 
excused,  attend  individually,  the  officers  as  members  of  the 
colonel's  staff  and  the  men  in  a  group  on  line  with  and  to  the 
left  of  the  headquarters  troop  detachment  (par.  888). 

796.  The  national  standard  renders  no  salutes. 

To  Form  the  Squadron  for  Ceremonies. 

797.  In  line :  Each  troop,  having  been  formed,  mounted,  and 
Inspected  by  its  captain,  proceeds  to  the  place  designated  for 
the  formation,  and  is  halted  in  line  in  rear  of  the  ground  on 
which  the  squadron  line  is  to  be  formed. 

The  buglers  and  band,  if  there  be  one,  take  position  in  rear 
and  a  little  to  the  right  of  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the 
line  is  to  rest  after  the  squadron  has  been  formed. 

The  adjutant,  accompanied  by  the  sergeant  major,  the  latter 
on  his  left,  precedes  the  troops  to  the  place  of  the  formation. 
When  the  troops,  band,  and  field  music  are  all  on  the  ground, 
the  adjutant  signals  the  field  music  to  sound  ADJUTANT'S 
CALL.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  then  post  them- 
selves, facing  each  other,  the  adjutant  a  few  yards  outside  of 
the  point  where  the  right,  and  the  sergeant  major  a  few  yards 
outside  of  the  point  where  the  left,  of  the  squadron  is  to  rest. 

The  squadron  is  formed  on  its  right  troop  (par  787),  which 
approaches  from  the  rear,  and  is  led  toward  the  line  estab- 
lished by  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major.  The  troop  is 
halted  a  little  short  of  the  line  and  the  captain  followed  by 
the  guidon  turns  about  and  faces  it.  The  platoon  leaders  then 
signal  disregard  and  place  themselves  on  the  line.  The  adju- 
tant aligns  the  platoon  leaders  on  the  sergeant  major,  and 
when  their  positions  have  been  verified,  the  captain  com- 
mands DRESS  and  FRONT  (par.  611).  The  guidon  then  takes 
post  on  the  right  of  the  rank  after  which  the  captain  turns 
about  and  takes  post  accurately  in  front  of  the  leader  of  his 
base  platoon.    The  other  troops  are  led  successively,  in  their 


312  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

proper  order  from  right  to  left,  to  their  places  in  line,  and 
are  aligned  as  prescribed  for  the  base  troop. 

798.  During  the  formation  of  the  line  the  band  plays.  As 
the  right  troop  is  approaching  its  place  in  line,  the  band  and. 
buglers  advance  and  take  post  12  yards  from  the  right  of  the 
squadron,  with  its  front  rank  in  line  with  the  squadron  front. 
When  the  last  troop  has  arrived  on  the  line  and  the  color 
guard  if  present  has  taken  its  post  (par.  793),  the  band  ceases 
playing. 

The  major  takes  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  line  and 
facing  the  squadron  at  a  convenient  distance,  generally  about 
half  its  front. 

When  the  adjutant  has  aligned  the  platoon  leaders  of  the 
last  troop,  he  turns  to  the  front,  and  passing  in  front  of  the 
line  of  captains,  moves  at  the  trot  or  gallop  to  a  point  midway 
between  the  center  of  the  line  and  the  major,  faces  toward  the 
line,  and  halts. 

The  sergeant  major  joins  the  major  at  the  trot  or  gallop. 

When  the  alignment  is  complete  the  adjutant  turns  to  the 
front,  salutes  the  major,  and  reports:  Sir,  the  squadron  is 
formed. 

The  major  returns  the  salute  and  directs  the  adjutant: 
Take  your  post,  Si7\ 

The  adjutant  moves  at  the  trot  or  gallop  and  takes  post 
on  the  left  of  the  major,  passing  by  his  right  and  rear. 

799.  In  platoon  mass:  The  squadron  is  formed  in  platoon 
mass  on  the  same  principles  as  in  line.  As  the  base  troop  ap- 
proaches the  line,  distances  in  column  of  platoons  will  be 
carefully  corrected.  The  leaders  of  the  rear  platoons  of  the 
troops  other  than  the  base  halt  their  platoons  abreast  of  the 
corresponding  platoon  of  the  base  troop.  The  adjutant  aligns 
the  leaders  of  the  leading  platoons  only,  but  before  leaving 
the  right  of  the  squadron  he  verifies  the  general  alignment  of 
the  rear  platobns  and  directs  any  changes  necessary  to  secure 
a  good  appearance.  The  post  of  each  guidon  at  the  command 
FRONT  is  on  the  right  of  the  leading  platoon  of  the  troop. 

800.  In  forming  the  squadron  for  ceremonies,  the  troops  will 
complete  any  necessary  change  in  troop  formation  at  least 
30  yards  in  rear  of  the  line  on  which  the  squadron  is  formed. 


CEREMONIES— SaUABRON  REVIEW.  313 

Squadron  Review. 

801.  In  line:  The  squadron  having  been  formed  and  reported 
to  its  commander  (par.  797),  he  and  his  staff  take  their  posts 
(par.  775).  The  reviewing  officer  moves  a  few  steps  toward 
the  major  and  halts,  the  major  then  turns  to  the  right  about 
and,  facing  the  squadron,  commands:  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER; 
1.  Present,  2.  SABER,  and  again  turns  to  the  right  about  and 
salutes  the  reviewing  officer  (par.  794). 

802.  The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute,  the  major 
turns  about  as  before,  commands:  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER,  and 
again  turns  about,  facing  to  the  front.  The  reviewing  officer, 
if  he  does  not  desire  to  ride  around  the  line,  returns  at  once 
to  his  post  and  the  march  past  follows ;  otherwise  he  ap- 
proaches the  major,  who  then  joins  the  reviewing  officer, 
salutes  him,  and  riding  on  his  right  both  proceed  to  the 
right  of  the  band  and  ride  around  the  squadron,  passing  in 
front  of  the  troop  officers  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  in  rear 
of  the  file  closers  and  band  in  returning  to  right. 

803.  When  the  major  joins  the  reviewing  officer  preparatory 
to  riding  around  the  squadron  each  captain  proceeds  to  the 
right  of  his  troop  and  takes  post  facing  to  the  front  6  yards 
in  front  of  the  guidon. 

804.  As  the  reviewing  officer  approaches  the  right  of  each 
troop,  its  captain  joins  him,  salutes  with  the  saber,  and,  riding 
on  his  left,  accompanies  him  as  far  as  the  left  of  his  troop. 
When  the  reviewing  officer  in  returning  passes  in  rear  of  a 
troop  its  captain  rides  on  his  left  as  far  as  the  right  of  the 
troop,  whence  he  returns  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  leader 
of  his  base  platoon. 

805.  On  arriving  again  at  the  right  of  the  line,  the  major 
salutes,  halts,  and  when  the  reviewing  officer  and  staff  have 
passed  moves  direct  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  squadron,  faces 
it,  and  commands:  1.  Platoons  right  turn,  2.  liIARCH;  3. 
Squadron,  4.  HALT. 

806.  The  band,  at  the  command  march,  moves  (without 
playing)  to  the  front  sufficiently  to  be  directly  in  front  of  the 
leading  platoon  when  the  latter  has  changed  direction  to  the 
right ;  it  then  executes  column  right,  and  is  halted  when  12 
yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  first  platoon  (par.  776). 


314  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

807.  The  major  then  commands :  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  For- 
ward, 3.  MARCH,  and,  followed  by  his  staff,  sergeant  major, 
bugler,  and  orderlies,  takes  post  in  column  24  yards  in  front 
of  the  band  and  leads  the  column.  When  at  6  yards  from  the 
reviewing  officer,  the  major  and  his  staff  salute  together,  turn- 
ing the  head  and  eyes  toward  the  reviewing  officer ;  the  staff 
return  to  the  carry  with  the  major  when  they  have  passed  6 
yards  beyond  the  reviewing  officer.  The  major  then  signals 
disregard  and,  followed  by  his  staff,  sergeant  major,  bugler, 
and  orderlies,  leaves  the  column  and  joins  the  reviewing 
officer  (,par.  778).  When  the  squadron  arrives  near  its  original 
position  in  column  the  major  gives  appropriate  commands  for 
taking  up  the  gait  directed  and  the  squadron  again  passes 
in  review  as  before  (par.  784).  The  review  terminates  when 
the  column  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  for  the  last  time; 
the  band  then  ceases  to  play  and,  unless  otherwise  directed  by 
the  major,  is  dismissed ;  the  major  and  his  staff  rejoin  the 
squadron.  The  squadron  then  executes  such  movements  as 
the  reviewing  officer  may  direct  or  is  marched  to  its  parade 
ground  and  dismissed. 

808.  In  platoon  mass:  With  the  following  exceptions,  the 
rules  for  the  review  in  line  apply : 

(a)  The  major's  command  (par.  807)  is:  1.  Pass  in  review, 
2.  Column  of  platoons,  3.  MARCH.  The  base  troop  moves  to 
the  front  and  is  led  at  once  to  the  right  by  its  captain ;  the 
other  troops  follow  successively ;  the  column  moves  out  with- 
out halting,  maintaining  its  distance  from  the  band. 

(h)  The  band  (par.  806),  at  the  command  MARCH,  moves 
(playing)  to  the  front,  executes  column  right,  and  is  not 
halted. 

809.  The  march  in  review:  In  case  the  reviewing  officer,  after 
the  first  march  past  in  column  of  platoons,  directs  that  the 
squadron  be  marched  in  review  in  platoon  mass  at  a  desig- 
nated gait,  the  major  forms  the  squadron  in  platoon  mass  on 
the  long  side  of  the  reviewing  field  opposite  the  reviewing 
officer.  Similarly  other  required  formations  or  gaits  are 
taken  up. 

To  Form  the  Regiment  for  Ceremonies. 

810.  In  line  of  platoon  masses:  With  the  following  excep- 
tions and  additions,  the  formation  corresponds  to  that  of  the 
squadron : 


REGIMENTAL  FORMATIONS  FOR  CEREMONIES.       315 

(a)  At  adjutant's  call  each  squadron,  formed  in  platoon 
mass  (par.  799),  is  held  in  rear  of  the  line  on  which  the  regi- 
ment is  to  form. 

(h)  At  adjutant's  call,  followed  by  regimental  call,  the 
regimental  adjutant  and  regimental  sergeant  major  take  posts 
facing  each  other  at  a  distance  apart  slightly  gi-eater  than  the 
front  of  the  regiment  and  establish  the  line  on  which  the  regi- 
ment is  to  form. 

(c)  As  the  senior  major  (par.  787)  leads  his  squadron 
toward  the  right  of  the  line,  its  squadron  adjutant  and  squad- 
ron sergeant  major  ride  ahead  and  take  posts  on  the  line, 
facing  the  regimental  adjutant  at  a  distance  apart  equal  to 
the  front  of  the  squadron,  the  adjutant  on  the  right.  Their 
positions  are  verified  by  the  regimental  adjutant. 

(d)  The  squadron,  in  proper  alignment,  is  halted  with  the 
chiefs  of  its  leading  platoons  on  the  line  established  by  its 
adjutant  and  sergeant  major.  The  other  squadrons  in  suc- 
cession are  similarly  placed  on  the  line,  and  the  machine-gun 
troop  takes  its  post  (par.  783).  When  the  last  squadron  is 
halted,  the  regimental  sergeant  major  moves  at  a  gallop  to 
his  post  (par.  742). 

(e)  No  commands  for  dressing  are  given.  After  verifying 
the  general  alignment  of  the  rear  platoons,  the  regimental 
adjutant  moves  rapidly  to  a  point  midway  between  the  center 
of  the  regiment  and  the  colonel,  faces  the  regiment,  and  com- 
mands, POSTS,  at  which  the  squadron  adjutants  and  sergeants 
major  take  their  posts  (par.  676).  He  then  faces  to  the  front, 
salutes,  and  reports  as  in  the  squadron  and  takes  his  post 
(par.  775). 

811.  In  line:  The  regiment  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the 
same  principles. 

Regimental  Review. 

812.  In  line  of  platoon  masses:  The  regiment  is  formed  and 
reported  to  its  commander  (par.  810),  after  which  the  com- 
mander and  stalf  take  their  posts  (par.  775). 

With  the  following  exceptions,  the  review  corresponds  to 
that  of  the  squadron. 

(a)  In  case  the  reviewing  officer  indicates  his  intention  of 
riding  around  the  regiment  with  the  colonel,  each  major  moves 


31G  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

to  the  right  of  his  squadron  and,  as  the  reviewing  officer  ap- 
proaches, joins  him,  salutes  with  the  saber,  and,  riding  on  his 
left,  accompanies  him,  passing  in  front  of  the  line  of  captains 
as  far  as  the  left  of  his  squadron.  When  the  reviewing  officer, 
in  returning,  passes  in  rear  of  a  squadron,  its  major  rides  on 
his  left  as  far  as  the  right  of  the  squadron,  whence  he  returns 
to  his  post.    Captains  remain  at  their  posts. 

( h )  To  march  the  regiment  in  review  in  column  of  platoons 
(first  march  past),  the  colonel  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review, 
2.  On  right  squadron,  column  of  platoons,  3.  MARCH. 

The  major  of  the  right  squadron  commands:  1.  Column  of 
platoons,  2.  MARCH.  The  center  and  left  squadrons  follow  in 
succession,  each  by  command  of  its  major,  and  conform  to 
the  movements  of  the  right  squadron. 

(c)  The  post  of  the  band  in  column  of  platoons  is  12  yards 
in  front  of  the  major  of  the  leading  squadron,  who,  with  his 
staff,  occupies  his  normal  position. 

((Z)  As  soon  as  the  march  in  review  begins  the  colonel,  fol- 
lowed by  his  staff,  takes  post  24  yards  in  front  of  the  band 
find  leads  the  column. 

813.  Formation  in  line  of  masses:  The  commands  of  the 
colonel  and  majors  are  as  in  par.  812-&. 

814.  Formation  in  line :  The  commands  of  the  colonel  are  the 
same  as  of  the  major  in  squadron  review,  substituting  squad- 
rons for  squadron. 

815.  The  march  in  review:  In  case  the  reviewing  officer, 
after  the  first  march  past  in  column  of  platoons,  directs  that 
the  regiment  be  marched  in  review  in  any  other  formation, 
each  squadron  takes  the  required  formation  as  in  squadron 
review. 

Brigade  Review. 

816.  The  brigade  is  formed  in  line  of  platoon  masses,  or  in 
line  of  masses,  with  intervals  of  48  yards  between  regiments. 
The  reviewing  officer  being  at  his  post,  each  colonel  calls  his 
regiment  to  attention,  causes  it  to  mount  and  to  draw  saber. 

The  command  Pass  in  review  is  not  given,  the  brigade  is  not 
reported  to  its  commander,  does  not  execute  present  saber, 
and  the  ride  around  the  line  is  usually  dispensed  with.     If,  , 
however,  the  reviewing  officer  should  ride  around  the  brigade, 
he  passes  in  front  of  the  line  of  majors,  the  colonel  of  each 


CEREMONIES— SQUADRON  PARADE.  317 

regiment  joining  and  riding  with  him  wliile  in  front  and  in 
rear  of  his  regiment. 

At  the  sounding  of  attention  and  forward  march  by  the 
brigade  commander's  bugler,  tlie  brigade  is  brol^en  into  column 
by  regiment  in  succession  and  the  march  in  review  is  con- 
ducted as  previously  explained,  except  that  in  brigades  and 
larger  units  the  first  march  in  review  may  be  in  column  of 
masses  or  column  of  platoon  masses. 

Unless  otherwise  directed,  the  review  of  each  regiment 
terminates  when  it  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer. 

Garrison  Review. 

817.  A  review  of  larger  bodies  or  of  a  body  of  troops  com- 
posed of  different  arms  is  conducted  on  the  principles  laid 
down  for  a  brigade,  the  senior  officer  present  with  each  arm 
commanding  the  troops  of  that  arm.  For  passing  in  review, 
mounted  troops  will  not  be  put  in  march  until  the  foot  troops 
have  gained  sufficient  distance  to  prevent  a  check  in  the 
column. 

Parades. 

818.  Formal  parades  are  ceremorries  ordered  by  the  com- 
mander for  the  purpose  of  publishing  complimentary  orders, 
of  presenting  medals,  and  of  emphasizing  the  importance  of 
smartness  in  appearance  of  men  and  horses  and  of  smoothness 
and  life  in  evolutions. 

The  squadron  is  always  formed  in  line,  the  regiment  in  line 
or  line  of  platoon  masses. 
Armament — saber  only. 

SQUADRON   PARADE. 

819.  In  line :  At  adjutant's  call  the  squadron  is  formed  as  in 
par.  797,  with  the  following  modifications: 

The  position  of  the  platoon  leaders  having  been  verified,  the 
sergeant  major  takes  post  4  yards  to  the  left  of  the  rank, 
other  noncommissioned  staff,  2  yards  to  his  left ;  the  adjutant 
2  yards  to  the  right  of  the  rank  on  the  line  of  captains  and 
facing  to  the  left;  the  adjutant  and  noncommissioned  staff 
draw  saoer. 


318  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  major  takes  post  a  convenient  distance  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  line  facing  the  squadron;  staff  officers  other 
than  the  adjutant  take  posts  as  in  par.  742.  All  buglers  form 
with  the  band. 

820.  As  soon  as  the  formation  is  complete,  the  adjutant  di- 
rects the  captain  of  the  first  troop  to  draw  saber.  The  cap- 
tains, commencing  at  the  right,  successively  draw  saber,  turn 
about  and  command:  1.  Troop  A  (or  B,  etc.),  2.  Draw,  3. 
SABER,  and  resume  their  front.  When  the  last  troop  has 
drawn  saber,  the  adjutant  faces  to  the  front  and  commands: 
SOUND  OFF.  The  band,  playing  a  march,  passes  in  front  of 
the  captains  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  back  to  its  post  on  the 
right;  it  then  ceases  playing.  At  evening  parade,  when  the 
band,  after  sounding  off,  ceases  playing,  the  retreat  is  blown 
by  the  buglers;  the  major  then  draws  saber,  commands:  1. 
Present,  2.  SABER,  and  the  band  plays  the  National  Anthem, 
or,  if  the  band  is  not  present,  the  buglers  sound  to  the  stand- 
ard. During  the  playing  all  officers  retain  the  position  of 
present  and  complete  present  saber  at  the  last  note  of  the 
anthem. 

821.  When  the  music  has  ceased  the  major  commands:  1. 
Carry,  2.  SABER;  the  adjutant  then  moves  up  to  the  line  of 
captains,  turns  to  the  Ifeft  and  commands :  1.  Squadron,  2. 
Attention,  3.  Prepare  for  parade,  4.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  MARCH  the  rank  stands  fast,  commis- 
sioned officers  commanding  platoons  ride  forward  and  halt 
on  the  line  of  captains ;  noncommissioned  officers  commanding 
platoons  take  post  on  the  line  of  the  rank,  1  yard  to  the  right 
of  the  guidon,  or  1  yard  to  the  left  of  the  troop,  according  as 
their  platoons  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  center  of  the 
troop;  a  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  a  troop  takes 
post  on  the  line  of  the  rank,  to  the  right  of  the  chiefs  of 
platoon  who  are  on  the  right  of  the  troop. 

The  adjutant  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  officers,  who  cast 
their  eyes  to  the  front  as  soon  as  their  alignment  is  verified. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  FRONT,  moves  at  the  trot  or 
gallop  by  the  shortest  line  to  a  point  midway  between  the 
major  and  the  center  of  the  squadron,  faces  the  squadron, 
halts,  and  commands:  1.  Present,  2.  SABER.  He  then  turns 
left  about,  salutes  the  major,  and  reports:  Sir,  the  parade  is 
formed. 


CEREMONIES— SaUADIlON  PARADE.  319 

822.  The  major  returns  the  salute  and  directs  the  adjutant : 
Take  your  post,  Sir.  The  adjutant  moves  at  the  trot  or  gallop, 
and  passing  by  the  major's  right  takes  post  facing  the  squad- 
ron. 3  yards  to  the  left  of  the  major  and  1  yard  less  advanced*, 
or,  if  other  staff  officers  are  present,  he  takes  post  on  their 
right. 

823.  The  adjutant  having  taken  his  post,  the  major  com- 
mands: 1.  Carry,  2.  SABER,  and  adds  such  exercises  in  the 
manual  of  the  saber,  or  other  saber  exercise,  as  he  may  desire, 
concluding  with  the  squadron  at  return  saber. 

He  then  directs  the  adjutant.  Receive  the  reports,  Sir,  and 
returns  saber;  staff  officers  other  than  the  adjutant  draw  and 
return  saber  with  the  major.  The  adjutant,  passing  by  the 
major's  left,  advances  at  the  trot  or  gallop  toward  the  center 
of  the  line,  halts  midway  between  it  and  the  major,  and  com- 
mands:  1.  First  sergeants,  2.  Front  and  center,  3.  Trot  (or 
Gallop),  4.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  first  sergeants  draw  saber. 

At  the  command  MARCH  they  leave  their  posts,  and,  passing 
between  the  rank  and  the  line  of  officers,  assemble  opposite 
the  center,  facing  to  the  front.  The  adjutant  then  commands : 
REPORT. 

The  first  sergeants,  commencing  on  the  right,  successively 
salute  and  report :  Band  and  bugle?'s  present  or  accounted  for; 
or  (so  many)  musicians  or  buglers  absent;  Troop  A,  etc., 
present  or  accounted  for;  or  (so  many)  sergeants  or  corporals 
or  privates  absent. 

The  reports  having  been  made,  the  adjutant  commands: 
1.  First  sergeants,  2.  Posts,  3.  Trot  (or  Gallop),  4.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  MARCH  the  first  sergeants  successively 
turn  to  the  right  or  left,  and  passing  in  rear  of  the  line  of 
officers,  resume  their  posts;  all  except  the  drum  major  then 
return  saber.  Each  troop  first  sergeant  in  leaving  and  in  re- 
turning to  his  post  passes  around  the  right  flank  of  his  troop. 

824.  The  adjutant  then  turns  about,  salutes,  and  reports: 
Sir,  all  are  present  or  accounted  fw;  or  (so  many)  officers 
or  enlisted  men  are  absent.  The  major  returns  the  salute 
and  directs:  Publish  the  orders,  Sir. 

The  adjutant  turns  about  and  commands:  ATTENTION  TO 
ORDERS.  After  publishing  the  orders,  he  commands:  1.  Offi- 
cers, 2.  Center,  3.  MARCH. 


320  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

At  the  command  CENTER  all  officers  except  the  adjutant 
return  saber. 

At  the  command  MARCH  officers  turn  and  close  toward  the 
X'enter  and  successively  turn  to  the  front  and  halt  15  yards 
from  the  line;  the  adjutant  returns  saber,  turns  about,  and 
takes  his  post  to  the  rear  of  the  major  as  before. 

825.  The  officers  having  formed,  the  senior  troop  ofiicer 
commands :  1.  Officers,  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  officers  advance,  the  band  playing;  the  captain  of  the 
base  troop  is  the  guide,  and  marches  on  the  major ;  at  6  yards 
from  the  major  the  senior  troop  officer  commands :  1.  Officers 
2.  HALT. 

The  music  ceases;  the  officers  halt  and  salute,  keeping  the 
hand  at  the  visor  till  the  salute  is  returned;  all  drop  the 
hand  at  the  same  time  with  the  major.  The  major  then  gives 
such  instructions  as  he  may  deem  necessary ;  this  concludes 
the  ceremony  unless  the  major  directs  otherwise  (par.  827). 

826.  As  the  officers  disperse  the  music  is  resumed,  the  ser 
geant  major  and  other  noncommissioned  staff  fall  out,  each 
first  sergeant  draws  saber,  rides  in  front  of  his  troop,  com- 
mands, POSTS,  at  which  the  guidon  and  noncommissioned 
officers  in  command  of  platoons  resume  their  posts.  The  first 
sergeants  then  march  their  troops  to  the  stables  or  picket 
lines  and  dismiss  them,  the  band  playing  until  the  troops  leave 
the  parade  ground. 

827.  The  commanding  officer  may  direct  that  the  sergeant 
major  march  the  squadron  in  column  of  platoons  around  the 
parade  ground  with  sabers  drawn,  changing  direction  and 
saluting  as  in  passing  in  review.  In  this  case  the  officers 
align  themselves  in  order  of  rank  on  the  left  of  the  staff. 
After  the  squadron  has  passed  the  major  the  sergeant  major 
commands:  Dismiss  your  troops,  and  falls  out;  the  first  ser- 
geants march  their  troops  to  the  stable  or  picket  lines. 

828.  Previous  to  executing  saber  exercise,  the  major  causes 
the  troopers  to  take  distances  to  the  front  (par.  87).  In 
this  the  troop  officers,  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  guard 
of  the  standard,  band,  and  noncommissioned  officers  command- 
ing troops  or  platoons  advance  with  and  preserve  their  posi- 
tions relative  to  the  rank  of  Nos.  1;  the  guidons  stand  fast 
until  Nos.  4  advance,  then  move  up  and  halt  in  line  with  them. 
The  file  closers  preserve  their  relative  distances  in  rear  of 


CEREMONIES— REGIMENTAL  PARADE.  321 

Nos.  4.  At  tlie  conclusion  of  saber  exercise  the  major  orders 
sabers  returned  and  distances  closed. 

829.  The  machine-gun  troop,  headquarters  troop,  and  supply- 
troop  do  not  ordinarily  attend  parade.  If  for  the  publication 
of  orders  or  for  other  reasons  they  do  attend,  the  machine-gun 
troop  takes  post  as  in  par.  783  and  conforms;  the  personnel 
of  the  headquarters  troop  and  the  supply  troop  take  posts 
as  in  pars.  782  and  795. 

REGIMENTAL   PARADE. 

830.  In  line  of  platoon  masses:  Regimental  parade  corre- 
sponds to  that  of  the  squadron,  with  the  following  additions 
and  exceptions : 

(a)  The  regiment  is  formed  as  in  par.  810,  except  that  the 
command  POSTS  is  given  by  the  regimental  adjutant  from 
his  original  position  on  the  right  of  the  regiment,  at  which 
command  squadron  adjutants  take  post  with  their  majors 
(par.  676)  and  sergeants  major  take  post  as  in  squadron 
parade ;  the  regimental  sergeant  major  takes  post  3  yards 
to  the  left  of  the  sergeant  major  of  the  left  squadron  and  the 
regimental  adjutant  6  yards  to  the  right  of  the  lieutenant 
colonel. 

(&)  The  colonel  takes  post  at  a  convenient  distance  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  regiment,  facing  it. 

(c)  The  colonel's  commissioned  staff  (except  the  adjutant) 
take  posts  (par.  742). 

(d)  The  lieutenant  colonel's  post  is  as  in  The  Regiment 
(par.  740). 

(e)  Each  major,  as  soon  as  the  command  POSTS  has  been 
given  by   the  regimental   adjutant,   draws  saber,   commands, 

1.  Prepare  for  parade,  2.  MARCH;  verifies  the  alignment,  if 
necessary,  regulating  on  the  base  squadron,  commands,  FRONT, 
and,  moving  at  the  trot  or  gallop,  takes  post  12  yards  in  front 
of  and  facing  the  captain  of  his  center  troop.  The  majors 
then,   in   turn,   beginning  on  the  right,   command :   1.  Draw, 

2.  SABER,  and  face  to  the  front. 

(/)  When  the  left  squadron  has  drawn  saber  the  adjutant, 
from  his  post  6  yards  to  the  right  of  the  post  of  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  commands,  SOUND  OFF,  and  faces  to  the  front. 

38218  °— 18 21 


322  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(g)  The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  adjutant  and 
field  officers  to  the  left  of  the  regiment  and  back  to  its  post 
on  the  right,  when  it  ceases  playing.  If  the  line  is  very  long 
the  band,  on  indication  from  the  adjutant,  may  sound  off 
from  its  post  on  the  right  of  the  regiment.  The  colonel  gives 
the  .commands  for  presenting  saber  before  the  playing  of  the 
National  Anthem  or  to  the  standard,  and  afterward  the  com- 
mands for  carrying  saber. 

(h)  The  adjutant  then  moves  rapidly  by  the  shortest  line 
to  a  point  midway  between  the  colonel  and  the  center  of  the 
regiment,   faces  the  regiment,   and   commands :  1.  Squadrons, 

2.  Attention,  3.  Present,  4.  SABER,  faces  the  colonel,  salutes, 
and  reports :  Sir,  the  parade  is  formed. 

(i)  When  the  colonel  directs  the  adjutant,  Receive  the  re- 
ports, Sir,  the  adjutant  faces  the  line  and  commands :  1.  Ad- 
jutants, 2.  Front  and  center,  3.  Trot  (or  Gallop),  4.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  MARCH  the  squadron  adjutants,  passing  in 
front  of  the  troop  officers,  close  to  the  center,  and  halt,  facing 
to  the  front,  midway  between  the  line  of  field  and  troop 
officers.  The  adjutant  then  commands,  REPORT;  the  squad- 
ron adjutants,  commencing  on  the  right,  successively  salute 
and  report:  (Such)  squadron  present  or  accounted  for;  or, 
(SucJi)  squadron  (so  many)  officers  and  enlisted  men  are 
absent.     The  adjutant  then  commands :  1.  Adjutants,  2.  Posts, 

3.  Trot  (or  Gallop),  4.  MARCH.     The  squadron  adjutants,  mov- 
ing by  the  shortest  lines,  return  to  their  posts. 

(/c)  At  the  command:  1.  Officers,  2.  Center,  3.  MARCH,  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  the  majors,  and  their  adjutants  turn  in- 
dividually left  about  and  form  on  the  line  of  troop  officers; 
the  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  of  the  right  squadron 
with  his  adjutant  on  his  left,  on  the  right  of  the  line;  the 
majors  of  the  center  and  left  squadrons,  each  with  his  adjutant 
on  his  left,  are  on  the  left  of  the  line. 

(Z)  The  lieutenant  colonel  or,  if  not  present,  the  senior 
major  commands:  1.  Officers,  2.  Forward,  3.  MARCH.  The 
officers  advance,  the  band  playing;  the  captain  of  the  center 
troop  is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the  colonel ;  at  6  yards 
from  the  colonel  the  senior  commands :  1.  Officers,  2.  HALT. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  join  the  colonel,  other 
officers  rejoin  their  squadrons ;  the  squadrons  are  marched  by 
their  majors  to  their  parade  grounds  and  dismissed ;  or,  other- 


CEREMONIES— ESCORTS.  323 

wise,  if  the  colonel  so  directs,  the  regiment  may  be  marched 
in  review  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 
In  line :  The  formation  corresponds  to  line  of  platoon  masses. 

Escorts. 

escorts  of  honoe. 

831.  Escorts  of  honor  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  receiv- 
ing and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil  or  military, 
when  they  arrive  and  depart.  The  troops  for  this  purpose 
are  selected  for  their  soldierly  appearance  and  superior  dis- 
cipline. 

The  escort  forms  in  line  opposite  the  place  where  the  per- 
sonage is  to  present  himself,  the  band  on  the  flank  of  the 
escort  toward  which  it  will  march.  On  the  appearance  of 
the  personage  he  is  received  with  the  honors  due  his  rank. 
The  escort  is  formed  into  column  of  platoons  or  fours  and 
takes  up  the  march  without  halting,  the  personage  and  his 
staff  or  retinue  taking  positions  in  rear  of  the  column.  When 
he  leaves  the  escort  line  is  formed  and  the  same  honors  are 
paid  as  before. 

An  ofticer  is  appointed  to  attend  the  personage  and  bear 
such  communication  as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  escort. 

When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  distance 
from  the  point  where  the  personage  is  to  be  received,  as,  for 
instance,  where  a  courtyard  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double 
line  of  troopers,  with  intervals,  facing  inward,  may  be  posted 
from  that  point  to  the  escort ;  the  troopers  successively  salute 
as  he  passes  and  are  then  relieved  and  join  the  escort. 

FUNERAL   ESCORT. 

832.  "  The  funeral  escort  of  the  Secretary  of  War  or  General 
of  the  Army  will  consist  of  a  regiment  of  Infantry,  a  squadron 
of  Cavalry,  and  a  battalion  of  Field  Artillery ;  of  the  Assistant 
Secretary  of  War  or  the  lieutenant  general,  a  regiment  of 
Infantry,  a  squadron  of  Cavalry,  and  a  battery  of  Field 
Artillery ;  of  a  major  general,  a  regiment  of  Infantry,  a  troop 
of  Cavalry,  and  a  battery  of  Field  Artillery;  of  a  brigadier 


324  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

general,  a  regiment  of  Infantry,  a  troop  of  Cavalry,  and  a 
platoon  of  Field  Artillery ;  of  a  colonel,  a  regiment ;  a  lieu- 
tenant colonel  or  major,  a  battalion  or  squadron;  a  captain, 
one  company;  a  subaltern,  a  platoon."     *     *     *     (A.  R.  426.) 

833.  "  The  funeral  escort  of  a  noncommissioned  staff  officer 
will  consist  of  16  men  commanded  by  a  sergeant;  of  a  ser- 
geant, of  14  men  commanded  by  a  sergeant ;  of  a  corporal,  of 
12  men  commanded  by  a  corporal ;  of  a  private,  of  8  men  com- 
manded by  a  corporal."     *     *     *     (A.  R.  428.) 

834.  "  Six  pallbearers  will  be  selected  as  far  as  practicable 
from  the  grade  of  the  deceased."     (A.  R.  429.) 

835.  If  a  commissioned  officer,  the  casket  is  borne  by  eight 
noncommissioned  officers;  if  a  noncommissioned  officer  or 
private,  by  eight  privates. 

836.  The  escort  is  formed  opposite  the  chapel  or  the  quar- 
ters of  the  deceased ;  the  band  on  that  flank  of  the  escort 
toward  which  it  is  to  march. 

837.  Upon  the  appearance  of  the  casket  the  commander  com- 
mands:  1.  Present,  2.  SABER,  and  the  band  sounds  a  dirge. 

838.  The  casket  having  been  placed  on  the  caisson  or  in  the 
hearse,  the  escort  is  next  formed  into  column  of  platoons  or 
fours.     The  procession  is  formed  in  the  following  order : 

1.  Band.  7.  Other  officers  and  enlisted 

2.  Escort.  men. 

3.  Clergy.  8.  Distinguished  persons. 

4.  Casket  and  pallbearers.  9.  Delegations. 

5.  Mourners,  10.  Societies. 

6.  Members  of  the  former  com-  11.  Civilians. 

mand  of  the  deceased. 
Officers  and  enlisted  men   (Nos.  6  and  7),  with  side  arms, 
are  in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors  in  front. 

839.  The  escort  marches  slowly,  the  band  playing  a  dirge. 
The  column  having  arrived  opposite  the  grave,  line  is  formed 
facing  it. 

The  casket  is  then  carried  along  the  front  of  the  escort  to 
the  grave ;  sabers  are  presented,  the  band  sounds  a  dirge,  and 
the  casket  having  been  placed  over  the  grave,  sabers  are 
brought  to  the  carry. 

During  the  funeral  service,  officers  and  men  bow  the  head. 

840.  When  the  casket  is  lowered  into  the  grave  and  the 
funeral  service  concluded,  the  commander  causes  the  escort  to 


CEREMONIES— FUNERAL  ESCORT.  325 

return  saber  and  dismounts  it.  He  then  forms  the  escort  at  a 
convenient  place  opposite  the  grave  and  fires  tliree  rounds  of 
blanlv  cartridges  over  the  grave,  the  muzzles  of  the  rifles 
being  elevated.  When  the  escort  is  greater  than  a  squadron, 
one  squadron  only  is  designated  to  dismount  and  fire  the 
volleys. 

A  bugler  at  the  head  of  the  grave  then  sounds  taps,  which 
concludes  the  ceremony. 

841.  The  escort  is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  to  the 
point  where  it  was  assembled,  and  dismissed. 

842.  The  band  does  not  play  until  it  has  left  the  inclosure. 
Wlien  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable, 

the  escort,  after  having  left  the  camp  or  garrison,  may  march 
at  ease  until  it  approaches  the  burial  ground,  when  it  is 
brought  to  attention. 

843.  When  arms  are  presented  at  the  funeral  of  a  person 
entitled  to  special  honors  (pars.  907,  908),  the  band  plays  the 
prescribed  national  air  or  the  buglers  sound  to  the  standard, 
march,  or  flourishes,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  deceased, 
after  which  the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air. 

844.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  man  his  horse,  in 
mourning  caparison,  follows  the  hearse. 

845.  Should  the  entrance  to  the  cemetery  prevent  the  cais- 
son from  accompanying  the  escort  to  the  grave,  the  column  is 
halted  at  the  entrance  long  enough  to  take  the  casket  from 
the  caisson,  when  it  is  again  put  in  march.  The  Cavalry  and 
Artillery,  when  unable  to  enter  the  inclosure,  turn  out,  form 
line  facing  the  column,  and  salute  the  remains  as  they  pass. 
If  necessary,  the  Cavalry  may  be  dismounted  and  marched 
into  the  cemetery  on  foot. 

When  the  remains  are  escorted  from  the  quarters  of  the 
deceased  to  the  church  before  the  funeral  service,  arms  are 
presented  upon  receiving  them  and  as  they  are  borne  into  the 
church. 

The  commander  of  the  escort,  previous  to  the  funeral,  gives 
the  clergyman  and  pallbearers  all  needed  directions. 

846.  Funeral  ceremonies,  dismounted,  are  conducted  accord- 
ing to  the  sam.e  principles.  After  the  coffin  has  been  placed 
over  the  grave,  the  command  is  brought  to  parade  rest,  and 
heads  are  bowed  during  the  service. 


326  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ESCORT  TO  THE   STANDAED. 

847.  Colors  and  standards:  The  silken  national  and  regi- 
mental colors  or  standards  shall  be  carried  in  battle,  cam- 
paign, and  on  all  occasions  of  ceremony  at  regimental  head- 
quarters in  which  two  or  more  companies  (troops)  of  the  regi- 
ment participate.     *     *     * 

When  not  in  use  as  prescribed  in  this  paragraph,  colors  and 
standards  will  be  kept  in  their  waterproof  cases.     (A.  R.  232.) 

848.  When  new  national  or  regimental  standards  are  fur- 
nished to  a  regiment  they  are  received  with  the  ceremony 
Escort  to  the  standard. 

849.  If  the  ceremony  is  for  both  standards,  both  color,  ser- 
geants go  with  the  escort;  if  for  the  national  standard  only, 
the  regimental  standard  remains  with  the  regiment;  if  for 
the  regimental  standard  only,  the  national  standard  is  not 
brought  out  to  the  ceremony. 

The  directions  following  are  for  escorting  the  national 
standard  only ;  with  modifications  above  noted,  they  apply  to 
the  other  cases. 

850.  The  regiment  being  formed  in  line  of  platoon  masses  or 
in  line  at  carry  saber,  the  colonel  details  a  troop  other  than  the 
standard  troop  to  receive  and  escort  the  national  standard  to 
its  place  in  line.  During  the  ceremony  the  regimental  stand- 
ard remains  with  the  guard  of  the  standard  at  its  post  with 
the  regiment. 

851.  The  band  upon  intimation  from  the  adjutant  moves 
straight  to  the  front  until  clear  of  the  line  of  field  officers, 
changes  direction  to  the  right  and  is  halted ;  the  designated 
troop  is  moved  to  the  front  and  formed  in  column  of  platoons 
in  rear  of  the  band,  the  standard  bearer  between  the  platoons. 
The  escort  then  marches  without  music  to  the  colonel's  office 
or  quarters,  is  formed  in  line  facing  the  entrance  and  halted, 
the  band  on  the  right,  the  standard  bearer  in  the  line  of  file 
closers. 

The  first  lieutenant,  standard  bearer,  and  a  sergeant, 
designated  by  the  troop  commander,  dismount  in  front  of  the 
colonel's  quarters,  their  horses  being  held  by  a  bugler;  the 
standard  bearer,  preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant  and  followed 
by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  then  goes  to  receive  the  standard. 

When  the  standard  bearer  comes  out,  followed  by  the  lieu- 
tenant and  sergeant,  they  halt  before  the  entrance  and  mount, 


CEREMONIES— ESCORT  TO  THE  STANDARD.  327 

the  lieutenant  on  the  right,  the  sergeant  on  the  left;  the 
bugler  returns  to  his  post ;  the  captain  then  commands : 
1.  Present,  2.  SABER;  the  escort  presents  saber;  the  buglers 
sounding  to  the  standard. 

852.  The  sabers  are  brought  to  the  carry ;  the  lieutenant 
and  sergeant  retm*n  to  their  posts ;  the  troop  is  broken  into 
column  of  platoons  to  the  right  and  halted ;  the  standard 
bearer  places  himself  midway  between  the  first  and  second 
platoons. 

The  escort  marches  back  to  the  regiment,  the  band  playing ; 
the  march  is  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at 
50  yards  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  regiment,  the  direction 
of  the  march  shall  be  parallel  to  its  front,  when  the  standard 
arrives  opposite  its  place  in  line  the  escort  is  formed  in  line 
to  the  left  and  halted;  the  standard  bearer,  passing  between 
the  platoons,  advances  and  halts  12  yards  in  front  of  the 
colonel. 

853.  The  standard  bearer  having  halted,  the  colonel  faces 
the  line,  commands :  1.  Present,  2.  SABER,  faces  to  the  front, 
and  salutes;  the  buglers  sound  to  the  standard,  and  the  regi- 
mental standard  and  guidons  execute  the  prescribed  salute. 

The  colonel  then  faces  about,  brings  the  regiment  to  a  carry, 
and  the  standard  bearer  takes  his  place  in  the  guard  of  the 
standard. 

The  escort  presents  and  carries  saber  with  the  regiment,  at 
the  command  of  the  colonel,  after  which  the  captain  forms 
it  in  column  and,  preceded  by  the  band,  marches  it  to  its  place 
in  line,  passing  around  the  left  flank  of  the  regiment. 

The  band  plays  until  the  escort  passes  the  left  of. the  line, 
•when  it  ceases  playing  and  returns  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
passing  in  rear  of  the  regiment. 

854.  The  standard  is  escorted  by  the  guard  of  the  standard 
from  the  parade  ground  of  the  standard  troop  to  the  colonel's 
quarters  or  office. 

855.  Escort  to  the  standard  is  executed  by  a  squadron  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  the  formation  being  in  line  or 
in  platoon  mass. 

Guard  Mounting. 

85G.  Guard  mounting  will  be  formal  or  informal,  as  the 
commanding  officer  may  direct.    It  will  be  held  as  prescribed 


328  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm  of  the  service  to  which  the 
guard  belongs ;  if  none  is  prescribed,  then  as  for  Infantry.  Iq 
case  the  guard  is  composed  wholly  of  mounted  organizations, 
guard  mounting  may  be  held  mounted.  (Manual  of  Interior 
Guard  Duty.) 

FORMAL   GUAED    MOUNTING MOUNTED. 

857.  Formal  guard  mounting  will  ordinarily  be  held  only  in 
posts  or  camps  where  a  band  is  present.  At  the  assembly 
the  men  of  each  troop  designated  for  guard  form  at  stand  to 
horse  on  their  troop  parade  grounds,  the  noncommissioned 
officers  falling  in  as  file  closers;  the  supernumeraries  do  not 
fall  in ;  each  first  sergeant  verifies  his  detail  and  inspects  the 
dress  and  general  appearance,  replaces  any  man  unfit  to  go 
on  guard,  turns  the  detail  over  to  the  senior  noncommissioned 
officer  and  retires.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  then 
mounts,  draws  saber  and  causes  the  detail  to  mount.  The 
band,  accompanied  by  the  buglers,  takes  its  place  on  the  parade 
ground  so  that  the  left  of  its  front  rank  shall  be  12  yards 
to  the  right  of  the  rank  when  the  guard  is  formed. 

858.  At  adjutant's  call  the  adjutant  takes  post  so  as  to  be 
12  yards  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  when 
formed ;  the  sergeant  major  takes  post  facing  to  the  left  12 
yards  to  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  band ;  the  band  plays 
in  appropriate  time,  the  details  are  marched  to  the  parade 
ground  by  their  senior  noncommissioned  officers;  the  detail 
that  arrives  first  is  marched  to  the  line  so  that  upon  halting 
the  head  of  the  horse  of  the  man  on  the  right  shall  be  on  line 
with  and  near  to  the  sergeant  major's  horse,  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer  having  halted  his  detail  places  himself  facing 
the  sergeant  major  at  a  distance  from  him  a  little  greater 
than  the  front  of  his  detail,  and  commands :  DRESS.  The 
detail  dresses  on  its  right  trooper;  the  noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  detail  in  the  line  of  file  closers  rein  back  so  as 
to  be  six  yards  in  rear  of  the  rank;  the  noncommissioned 
officer  in  command  of  the  detail  then  commands,  Front, 
salutes  and  reports.  The  detail  is  correct,  or  (so  many)  ser- 
geants, corporals,  or  privates  are  ahsent ;  the  sergeant  major 
returns  the  salute;  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  of 
the  detail  then  passes  by  the  right  of  the  guard  and  takes  post 


CEREMONIES— FORMAL  GUARD   MOUNTING.  329 

on  the  line  of  noncommissioned  officers  in  rear  of  the  right 
trooper  of  his  detail.  Should  there  be  more  than  one  detail 
it  is  formed  in  like  manner  on  the  left  of  the  one  preceding; 
the  privates,  nonconmiissioned  officers,  and  commander  of 
each  detail  dress  on  those  of  the  preceding  details  in  the  same 
rank  or  line. 

Should  the  detail  from  a  troop  not  include  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  one  will  be  detailed  to  perform  the  duties  of 
commander  of  the  detail.  In  this  case  such  noncommissioned 
officer  after  reporting  to  the  sergeant  major  passes  around 
the  right  flank  between  the  guard  and  the  band  and  retires. 

The  troops  detailed  alternate  in  taking  the  right  of  the  line. 

859.  When  the  last  detail  has  formed  the  sergeant  major 
draws  saber,  verifies  the  details,  causes  the  guard  to  count 
fours,  and,  if  there  be  more  than  five  fours,  divides  the  guard 
into  two  or  more  platoons ;  he  designates  the  center  guide  or 
guides  and  then  commands,  DRESS  (par.  362),  verifies  the 
alignment  of  rank  and  the  line  of  noncommissioned  officers, 
and  then  returns  to  the  right  of  the  rank,  turns  to  the  left, 
commands,  FRONT,  passes  to  a  point  midway  between  the 
adjutant  and  center  of  the  guard,  halts  facing  the  adjutant, 
salutes,  and  reports:  Sir,  the  details  are  correct;  or.  Sir,  (so 
many)  sergeants,  corporals,  or  privates  are  absent;  the  adju- 
ta-nt  returns  the  salute,  directs  the  sergeant  major :  Take  your 
2)ost,  and  then  drawls  saber;  the  sergeant  major  turns  to  the 
left  about  and  takes  post  3  yards  to  the  left  of  and  on  a  line 
wath  the  rank.  When  the  sergeant  major  has  completed  Iiis 
report  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes  post  facing  to  the  front 
8  yards  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  guard  and  draws  saber. 
The  adjutant  then  directs,  Inspect  your  guard,  Sir,  at  which 
the  commander  of  the  guard  turns  about,  commands :  1.  Draw, 
2.  SABER;  3.  Prepare  for  inspection,  4.  MARCH,  moves  toward 
and  inspects  the  guard,  as  in  troop  inspection.  During  the 
inspection  the  band  plays. 

The  adjutant  returns  saber,  observes  the  general  condition 
of  the  guard,  and  falls  out  any  man  who  is  unfit  for  guard 
duty  or  does  not  present  a  creditable  appearance.  Substitutes 
will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at  the  guard  house. 

The  adjutant  when  so  directed  selects  orderlies  and  color 
sentinels  as  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty 
and  notifies  the  commander  of  the  guard  of  his  selection.    He 


330  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

may  require  a  trooper  to  move  out  of  the  rank  and  to  dis- 
mount for  a  more  minute  inspection.  He  also  notifies  the  two 
senior  noncommissioned  officers  to  act  as  platoon  leaders  if 
there  has  been  a  division  into  platoons.  If  there  be  a  junior 
officer  of  the  guard,  he  takes  post  at  the  same  time  as  the 
senior,  facing  to  the  front  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  the  senior  of  the  two  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers acts  and  takes  post  as  chief  of  the  second  platoon.  The 
junior  officer  of  the  guard  may  be  directed  by  the  commander 
of  the  guard  to  assist  in  inspecting  the  guard. 

860.  If  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard  the  adjutant  inspects 
the  guard  and  during  the  inspection  notifies  the  senior  non- 
commissioned officer  to  command  the  guard  and  the  next  two 
senior  noncommissioned  officers  to  serve  as  platoon  leaders. 
A  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  the  guard  takes  the 
post  of  the  officer  of  the  guard,  the  next  senior  noncommis- 
sioned offixcer  the  post  of  the  junior  officer  of  the  guard. 

The  inspection  ended,  the  adjutant  places  himself  about  30 
yards  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  and  draws 
saber.  The  new  officer  of  the  day  takes  post  in  front  of  and 
facing  the  guard  about  30  yards  from  the  adjutant.  The  old 
officer  of  the  day  takes  post  3  yards  to  the  right  of  and  1  yard 
less  advanced  than  the  new  officer  of  the  day.  The  commander 
of  the  guard  takes  post  8  yards  in  front  of  the  right  trooper, 
facing  to  the  front,  and  draws  saber. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER,  3.  SOUND 
OFF. 

The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  commander  of  the 
guard  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  back  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
when  it  ceases  playing. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  POSTS,  at  which  platoon 
leaders  take  their  posts  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guides  of 
their  platoons,  facing  to  the  front,  and  the  commander  of  the 
guard  takes  post  6  yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  center 
(right)  platoon,  facing  to  the  front,  and  the  file  closers  resume 
their  places  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  rank.  If  there  be  no  junior 
officer  of  the  guard,  the  commander  of  the  guard  takes  post  3 
yards  in  front  of  the  center  guide. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  and  the  chiefs  of  platoon  and 
file  closers  having  taken  their  posts,  the  adjutant  commands : 


CEREMONIES— FORMAL  GUARD  MOUNTING.  331 

1.  Present,  2.  SABER,    faces   toward    the   officer   of   the   day, 
salutes,  and  then  reports.  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed. 

The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported, 
salutes  with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adjutant,  March  the 
guard  in  revieio,  Sir. 

861.  The  adjutant  turns  about,  brings  the  guard  to  a  carry, 
and  commands:  1.  Platoons  right  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT.  The  platoons  execute  the  movement  as  in  the 
troop,  the  band  takes  post  in  front  of  the  column  (par.  806). 
The  adjutant  places  himself  abreast  of  the  first  platoon  and 
6  yards  from  Its  left  flank ;  the  sergeant  major  abreast  of  the 
second  platoon  and  6  yards  from  its  left  flank.  The  adjutant 
then  commands :  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  FORWARD,  3.  MARCH. 

The  guard  marches  at  the  walk  past  the  officer  of  the  day, 
according  to  the  principles  of  squadron  review,  the  adjutant, 
commander  of  the  guard,  chiefs  of  platoon,  sergeant  major, 
and  drum  major  saluting.  The  new  officer  of  the  day  returns 
the  salute  of  the  commander  of  the  guard  and  the  adjutant 
only,  making  one  salute  with  the  hand. 

862.  The  band,  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  turns 
to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  places  itself  opposite  to  and 
facing  him,  and  continues  to  play  until  the  guard  leaves  the 
parade  ground.  The  buglers  detach  themselves  from  the  band 
Mhen  the  latter  turns  out  of  the  column  and  remain  in  front 
of  the  guard,  commencing  to  play  when  the  band  ceases.  In 
the  absence  of  the  band  the  buglers  do  not  turn  out  of  the 
column,  but  continue  to  play  in  front  of  the  guard. 

863.  The  guard  having  passed  12  yards  beyond  the  officer  of 
the  day,  the  adjutant  halts;  the  sergeant  major  halts  along- 
side of  the  adjutant  and  1  yard  to  his  left;  they  then  return 
saber,  salute,  and  retire.  The  commander  of  the  guard  then, 
without  halting,  breaks  the  guard  into  column  of  fours  and 
marches  it  to  its  post. 

864.  The  officers  of  the  day  turn  toward  each  other  and 
salute,  the  old  officer  of  the  day  turning  over  the  orders  to  the 
new  officer  of  the  day. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off  and  while  the  guard  is  pass- 
ing in  review  the  officers  of  the  day  remain  at  attention. 

865.  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons  the  adjutant 
commands  :  1.  Guard  right  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT, 
and  it  passes  in  review  as  explained;  the  commander  of  the 


332  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

guard  is  3  yards  in  front  of  its  center  guide,  the  adjutant  is 
6  yards  from  the  ranl^  and  abreast  of  the  commander,  the 
sergeant  major  covers  the  adjutant  and  marches  abreast  of 
the  rank. 

relieving  the  old   guard (formal   guard   mounting, 

mounted). 

866.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guardhouse  the  old 
guard  is  formed  in  line  at  the  carry  saber,  its  buglers  3  yards 
to  its  right;  when  the  buglers  at  the  head  of  the  new  guard 
arrive  opposite  the  left  of  the  old  guard  its  commander  com- 
mands: 1.  Present,  2.  SABER;  both  commanders  salute  and, 
when  the  new  guard  has  passed  the  commander  of  the  old 
guard,  the  latter  commands  :  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER.  The  buglers 
and  guard  continue  marching  without  changing  direction  until 
the  rear  of  the  column  has  passed  9  yards  beyond  the  buglers 
of  the  old  guard,  when  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  com- 
mands :  1.  Fours  right,  2.  MARCH. 

867.  The  buglers  and  guard  are  marched  3  yards  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  the  old  guard,  when  the  commander  of  the  new 
guard  commands :  1.  Fours  right  about,  2.  MARCH ;  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT;  5.  DRESS;  he  then,  facing  to  the  front,  aligns  his 
guard  so  as  to  be  on  a  line  with  the  old  guard  and  commands, 
Front;  the  buglers  of  the  new  guard  are  3  yards  to  the  right 
of  the  rank. 

868.  The  new  guard  being  dressed,  the  commander  of  each 
guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands:  1.  Pre- 
sent, 2.  SABER,  resumes  his  front,  salutes,  resumes  the  carry, 
faces  his  guard,  and  commands :  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER. 

Each  guard  is  then  presented  by  its  commander  to  its  officer 
of  the  day ;  if  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day  present,  or 
if  an  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new  officer  of  the 
day,  each  guard  is  presented  to  him  by  its  commander. 

869.  If  another  person  entitled  to  a  salute  approaches,  each 
commander  of  the  guard  brings  his  own  guard  to  attention  if 
not  already  at  attention.  The  senior  commander  of  the  two 
guards  then  commands:  1.  Old  and  new  guards,  2.  Present, 
3.  SABER.  The  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  "  Present, 
Saber,"  given  by  the  senior.     After  the  salute  has  been  ac- 


CEREMONIES— FORMAL  GUARD  MOTJNTHSlG.  333 

knowledged   the  senior   brings  both  guards  to   the  "  Carry, 
Saber." 

870.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  officers 
of  the  day  each  guard  returns  saber  by  command  of  its  own 
officer  of  the  guard ;  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  then 
directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and  report. 

871.  The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  mem- 
bers of  the  guard  for  detached  posts  placing  them  under  charge 
of  the  proper  noncommissioned  officer,  divides  the  guard  into 
three  reliefs,  first,  second,  and  tliird,  from  right  to  left,  and 
directs  a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  by  reliefs.  The  sentinels 
and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at  once  relieved  by  mem- 
bers of  the  new  guard,  the  two  guards  standing  at  ease  or  dis- 
mounted while  these  changes  are  being  made.  The  com- 
mander of  the  old  transmits  to  the  commander  of  the  new 
guard  all  his  orders,  instructions,  and  information  concerning 
the  guard  and  its  duties. 

872.  The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  has  his  own 
guard  fall  out,  takes  possession  of  the  guardhouse  and  verifies 
the  articles  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

873.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that  portion 
of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding  officer  may 
direct  that  as  soon  as  the  orders  and  property  are  turned  over 
to  the  new  guard  the  portion  of  the  old  guard  at  the  guard- 
house may  be  marched  off  and  dismissed.  In  such  case  the 
remaining  detachments  of  the  old  guard  will  be  inspected  by 
the  commander  of  the  new  guard  when  they  reach  the  guard- 
house. He  will  direct  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer 
present  to  march  these  detachments  off  and  dismiss  them  in 
the  prescribed  manner. 

874.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  or  after  long  marches  the 
music  may  be  omitted  or  the  buglers  may  take  the  place  of 
the  band  and  sound  off  standing  on  the  right  of  the  guard  and 
the  march  in  review  be  omitted. 

In  cases  in  which  an  organization,  entire  or  in  part,  is 
detailed  for  guard,  it  is  marched  to  the  parade  ground  as  a 
single  detail  (par.  858). 

875.  For  detailed  instructions  for  guards  and  sentinels  see 
Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty. 


334  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIOlfS. 

FORMAL   GUARD   MOUNTING,    DISMOUNTED. 

876.  Guard  mounting,  dismounted,  and  relieving  the  old 
guard  are  conducted  on  the  same  principles  as  when  mounted, 
with  the  following  modifications : 

(«)  The  men  designated  for  guard  fall  in,  dismounted,  on 
their  troop  parade  grounds ;  noncommissioned  officers  not 
commanding  detail,  2  paces  in  rear  of  rank. 

(J))  The  detail  that  is  to  be  on  the  right  is  marched  to  the 
line  so  that  upon  halting  the  breast  of  the  man  on  the  right 
shall  be  near  to  and  opposite  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant 
major.  At  the  command  DRESS,  the  detail  dresses  up  to  the 
line  of  the  sergeant  major  and  its  commander,  the  man  on  the 
right  placing  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant 
major. 

(c)  When  the  last  detail  has  formed,  the  sergeant  major 
takes  a  side  step  to  the  right,  draws  saber  if  armed  with  one, 
verifies  the  detail,  takes  post  2  paces  to  the  right  and  2 
paces  to  the  front  of  the  guard,  facing  to  the  left  and  causes 
the  guard  to  count  fours. 

(d)  When  the  sergeant  major  has  reported,  the  officer  of 
the  guard  takes  post  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
guard,  draivs  saher  and  orders  saber,  the  guard  being  at 
order  arms. 

The  inspection  which  corresponds  to  that  of  par.  882  being 
ended,  and  the  officers  of  the  day,  the  adjutant,  and  the 
commander  of  the  guard  having  taken  their  posts,  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  draws  saber  with  the  adjutant  and 
comes  to  the  order. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  1.  Parade,  2.  Rest,  3.  SOUND 
Orr,  and  comes  to  the  order  and  parade  rest. 

(e)  After  the  band  has  sounded  off,  the  adjutant,  com- 
mander of  the  guard  and  platoon  leaders  come  to  attention, 
and  the  adjutant  commands :  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  faces  toward 
the  officer  of  the  day  and  reports :  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed. 
The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported, 
returns  the  salute  with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adjutant: 
March  the  guard  in  review,  Sir.  The  adjutant  carries  saber, 
faces  about,  brings  the  guard  to  an  order  and  commands:  1. 
At  trail,  platoons  (or  guard)  right  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT. 


ISOOx  INSPECTION,  MOUNTED.  835 

The  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  officer  of  the  day, 
according  to  the  principles  as  \yhen  mounted. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off  and  while  the  guard  is 
marching  in  review,  the  officers  of  the  day  stand  at  parade 
rest  with  arms  folded.  They  take  this  position  when  the 
adjutant  comes  to  parade  rest,  resume  the  attention  with  him, 
again  take  the  parade  rest  at  the  first  note  of  the  march  in 
review,  and  resume  attention  as  the  head  of  the  column  ap- 
proaches. 

(/)  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons,  the  adjutant 
commands :  1.  At  trail,  guard  right  turn,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT,  and  it  passes  in  review  as  explained;  the  commander 
of  the  guard  is  3  paces  in  front  of  its  center  guide. 

INSPECTIONS. 

TROOP    INSPECTION,    MOUNTED. 

877.  The  troop  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  captain  draws 
saber  and  commands:  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH, 
3.  FRONT. 


lil  KKKKiXiyM.-rxKKKMx1^yKKKKIx17T7T71i  II  I 

Fig.  52,  par.  877. 

At  the  command  MARCH  the  troop  is  aligned  (par.  611)  and 
posts  taken  as  follows :  The  guidon  on  the  right  of  the  rank ; 
buglers  2  yards  to  the  right  of  the  guidon ;  file  closers  2  yards 
to  the  left  of  the  troop;  platoon  leaders  (as  soon  as  the 
positions  of  their  center  guides  are  assured)  8  yards  in  front 
of  their  respective  guides. 

After  commanding  FRONT  the  captain  takes  post  facing  to 
the  left  8  yards  in  front  of  the  guidon  and  commands:  1. 
Draw,  2.  SABER. 

If  pistols  are  not  to  be  inspected  the  captain  then  so  an- 
nounces (par.  259). 

The  captain  habitually  requires  the  chiefs  of  platoon  to 
inspect  their  own  platoons  in  accordance  with  his  instruc- 


336  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

tions;  if  not  required  to  inspect  their  platoons  they  turn  about 
and  remain  at  ease,  facing  their  platoons.  Wlien  a  platoon  is 
inspected  by  its  chief  the  men  raise  their  weapons  for  inspec- 
tion at  his  approach  instead  of  at  the  captain's. 

As  the  inspector  approaches  the  buglers  they  raise  their 
bugles  for  inspection  (par.  886). 

The  inspection  of  the  rank  is  conducted  as  in  Inspection  of 
Arms  and  Equipments,  mounted  (pars.  256-268). 

878.  When  the  troop  is  to  be  dismounted,  the  platoon  lead- 
ers return  saber,  dismount  with  the  troop  and  inspect  their 
platoons ;  or  otherwise,  if  instructed  not  to  inspect,  they  face 
toward  the  troop  and  after  dismounting  remain  at  ease,  re- 
suming their  front  on  the  completion  of  the  inspection  of 
arms. 

When  the  captain  dismounts  his  horse  is  held  by  his  bugler ; 
the  horses  of  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  if  they  are  to  inspect  their 
platoons,  are  held  by  a  bugler  or  by  a  designated  trooper. 

The  guidon  dismounts  with  the  troop,  acting  as  an  even 
number  in  dismounting  and  in  mounting. 

While  inspecting  the  troop  or  accompanying  the  inspector 
the  captain  does  not  return  his  saber  Avhile  mounted;  in  either 
case,  if  he  dismounts,  he  returns  saber  before  dismounting. 
Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  the  troop  is  mounted  and 
rank  formed. 

879.  To  resume  posts  in  line  after  inspection  the  captain; 
commands,   POSTS,    at   which    the   platoon  leaders,   the   first^ 
sergeant,  the  file  closers,  the  guidon,  and  the  buglers  resume 
their  posts.    The  troop  is  dismissed  as  in  The  Troop. 

880.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the 
captain  prepares  the  troop  for  inspection,  causes  sabers  to  be 
drawn,  commands  REST,  faces  to  the  front,  and  awaits  the 
arrival  of  the  inspector.  Upon  the  approach  of  the  inspector 
the  captain  calls  the  troop  to  attention  and  salutes  him ;  the 
inspector  returns  the  salute  and,  if  he  «o  desires,  instructs  the 
captain  as  to  the  kind  of  inspection  he  wishes.  If  necessary 
to  give  any  instructions  the  captain  turns  about,  gives  them, 
and  then  faces  to  the  front.  When  inspected  he  accompanies 
the  inspector.  Unless  the  inspector  gives  instructions  requir- 
ing it  the  troop  will  not  be  dismounted.  Upon  intimation 
from  the  inspector  the  troop  is  dismissed. 


SQUADRON  INSPECTION,  MOUNTED.  337 

881.  At  inspection  of  quarters,  the  men,  without  accoiiter- 
ments,  stand  uncovered  in  front  of  their  respective  bunks;  in 
camp  they  stand  covered,  without  accouterments,  in  front  of 
their  tents;  accouterments  and  horse  equipment  are  laid  out 
for  inspection  as  required ;  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer 
upon  the  approach  of  the  Inspector  commands :  ATTENTION. 

TKOOP    INFECTION,     DISMOUNTED. 

882.  The  troop,  armed  with  rifle  and  pistol  only,  is  formed 
dismounted.  The  inspection  corresponds  to  that  mounted, 
with  the  exceptions  noted  in  par.  268  and  the  following: 

(a)  The  posts  of  officers  are  3  yards  in  front  of  the  rank. 

(b)  Platoon  leaders  after  drawing  saber  come  to  the  order. 
At  the  command :  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH,  they 
resume  the  carry.  If  not  required  to  inspect  their  platoons 
they  face  about  and  stand  at  ease  at  the  order.  Upon  the 
completion  of  the  inspection  they  come  to  attention  and  resume 
the  order  facing  to  the  front. 

SQUADRON   INSPECTION,    MOUNTED. 

883.  If  there  be  both  inspection  and  review,  the  inspection 
may  either  precede  or  follow  the  review. 

With  the  following  additions  and  exceptions  squadron  in- 
spection corresponds  to  troop  inspection  : 

(a)  The  squadron  being  in  column  of  troops,  the  major 
commands:  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH,  and,  if  not 
the  inspector,  takes  his  post  12  yards  in  front  of  the  captain 
of  his  leading  troop  and  awaits  the  arrival  of  the  inspector. 

(b)  Each  troop  prepares  for  inspection,  its  captain,  when 
his  troop  is  dressed,  giving  the  commands,  FRONT,  and  1. 
Draw,  2.  SABER, 

(c)  The  machine-gun  troop,  if  present,  takes  post  16  yards 
in  rear  of  the  last  troop  and  prepares  for  inspection  (par. 
885). 

id]  The  band,  if  there  be  one,  passes  by  the  right  flank  of 
the  squadron,  takes  post  facing  to  the  front,  15  yards  in  rear 
ot  the  machine-gun  troop  and  opens  ranks;  the  buglers  join 
their  troops. 

38218  °— 18 22 


338  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(e)  The  guard  of  the  standard,  marched  by  the  standard 
bearer,  takes  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  first  troop 
and  on  line  with  the  sergeant  major  and  bugler. 

(/)  The  adjutant,  sergeant  major,  and  orderlies  take  post 
with  the  major  as  in  par.  676. 

{g)  Field  and  staff  officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  inspector 
do  not  take  post  in  front  of  the  column,  but  accompany  him. 

{li)  The  inspector  inspects  the  major,  and,  accompanied  by 
the  latter,  inspects  the  staff  officers,  the  sergeant  major,  and 
orderlies. 

{%)  The  major  then  commands,  REST,  returns  saber,  and 
with  his  adjutant,  sergeant  major,  and  orderlies,  accompanies 
the  inspector. 

If  the  major  is  the  inspector,  he  inspects  his  staff,  sergeant 
major,  and  orderlies,  who  return  saber  and  accompany  him ; 
he  then  commands,  REST,  and  returns  saber. 

{k)  The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
usually  inspects  the  guard  of  the  standard,  and  the  arms, 
accouterments,  dress,  horses,  and  equipment  of  each  troop  in 
succession  and  inspects  the  band,  or  otherwise  he  inspects 
such  arms,  accouterments,  or  equipments  as  be  desires. 

(?)  The  adjutant  gives  the  necessary  commands  for  the 
inspection  of  the  guard  of  the  standard  and  the  band. 

The  guard  of  the  standard  is  brought  to  a  rest  as  soon  as 
inspected,  or  it  and  the  sergeant  major  may  be  dismissed  upon 
intimation  from  the  inspector. 

(m)  As  the  inspe<?tor  approaches  each  troop  in  succession 
its  captain  proceeds  as  in  par.  880,  except  that  he  does  not 
salute. 

{n)  The  inspection  of  a  troop  being  finished,  the  captain 
commands,  POSTS;  he  then  brings  it  to  REST,  or  on  intimation 
from  the  inspector  marches  the  troop  to  its  own  grounds  and 
dismisses  it. 

(o)  The  band  plays  during  the  inspection  of  the  troops. 

At  inspection  of  quarters  or  camp  the  inspector  is  accom- 
panied by  all  the  officers  or  by  such  as  he  may  designate. 

REGIMENTAL    INSPECTION,    MOUNTED. 

884.  With  the  following  additions  and  exceptions,  regimental 
inspection  corresponds  to  squadron  inspection,  lettered  sub- 
paragraphs corresponding  thereto. 


REGIMENTAL  INSPECTION,  MOUNTED.  339 

(a)  The  re.eiment  being  in  column  of  troops,  the  colonel 
oommnnds:  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH,  and,  if 
not  the  inspector,  takes  post  24  yards  in  front  of  the  major 
of  his  leading  squadron  and  awaits  the  arrival  of  the  in- 
spector. 

(b)  Each  squadron  prepares  for  inspection  as  prescribed  in 
Squadron  inspection. 

(e)  The  guard  of  the  standard,  conducted  by  the  standard 
bearer,  takes  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  first  troop  of 
the  leading  squadron  and  on  line  with  the  colonel's  noncom- 
missioned staff. 

(/)  The  staff  and  noncommissioned  staff  take  ijost  as  in 
par.  742. 

(i^)  The  inspector  inspects  the  colonel  and  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  and,  accompanied  by  the  colonel,  inspects  the  staff 
officers. 

(i)  The  colonel  then  commands,  REST,  returns  saber,  and, 
with  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  staff,  noncommissioned  staff 
and  orderlies,  accompanies  the  inspector. 

If  the  colonel  is  the  inspector  he  inspects  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  staff,  all  of  whom  then  return  saber  and  accom- 
pany him ;  he  then  commands,  REST,  and  returns  saber. 

(m)  As  the  inspector  approaches  each  squadron  in  succes- 
sion its  major  brings  it  to  attention,  but  does  not  salute. 
Squadron  inspection  then  follows. 

(n)  The  inspection  of  a  squadron  being  finished,  the  major, 
on  intimation  from  the  inspector,  marches  the  squadron  to  its 
parade  gi*ound  and  dismisses  it.  A  similar  rule  applies  to  the 
special  units. 

MACHINE-GUN    TROOP    INSPECTION. 

885.  The  inspection  of  the  machine-gun  troop  is  conducted  as 
prescribed  in  drill  regulations  for  that  unit. 

HEADQUAETEES    TROOP    INSPECTION,     MOUNTED. 

886.  The  headquarters  troop,  as  a  unit,  is  not  inspected  at 
squadron  and  regimental  inspections.  With  the  exceptions 
and  additions  noted,  it  is  inspected  as  in  Troop  inspection. 
The  entire  troop  forms  in  single  rank  without  chiefs  of  platoon, 


340  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

members  of  the  band  forming  on  the  left,  in  order  of  rank, 
constituting  the  second  platoon;  and  all  others,  with  sabers 
drawn,  on  the  right,  in  order  of  rank,  constituting  the  first 
platoon.  The  band  leader  takes  post  3  yards  on  the  left  of 
the  rank. 

The  adjutant  after  inspecting  the  sabers  of  the  first  platoon 
inspects  the  instruments  of  the  second  platoon. 

Each  musician  as  the  inspector  approaches  him  raises  his 
instrument  in  front  of  his  body,  reverses  it  so  as  to  show  both 
sides,  and  then  returns  it  to  its  former  position.  A  bugler, 
when  inspected,  executes  with  his  bugle  what  is  prescribed 
for  a  band  musician. 

Pistols  of  the  band  are  not  inspected  while  the  band  is 
mounted.  To  inspect  the  pistols  of  the  band  when  dismounted 
the  adjutant  first  directs  suitable  disposal  of  band  instru- 
ments. 

887.  To  inspect  the  band  by  itself,  and  not  as  a  platoon  of 
the  headquarters  troop  (par.  886),  the  adjutant  commands: 
1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  Open  ranks,  3.  MARCH.  The 
front  rank  dresses  to  the  right ;  the  other  ranks  rein  back, 
each  taking  the  distance  of  3  yards  from  the  rank  preceding, 
and  dress  to  the  right. 

The  adjutant  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  ranks,  takes  post 
as  in  troop  inspection,  commands,  FRONT,  and  inspects,  begin- 
ning on  the  right  of  each  rank. 

The  inspection  being  finished,  the  adjutant  commands:  1. 
Close  ranks,  2.  MARCH.  The  front  rank  stands  fast,  the  other 
ranks  close  to  the  proper  distance.  Dismounted  inspection  of 
the  band  is  conducted  on  the  same  principles. 

SUPPLY-TKOOP   INSPECTION. 

888.  When  the  regimental  train  is  present  at  review  or  in- 
spection the  supply  troop  is  inspected  with  it,  otherwise  the 
troop  is  not  inspected  in  the  regiment  as  a  unit,  although  its 
personnel,  if  so  directed,  attends  ceremonies  and  inspections 
(par.  795). 

Its  inspection  with  the  train  is  conducted  as  the  colonel 
directs.  When  inspected  by  itself,  its  commander  arranges 
the  details. 


MUSTER— REGIMENT,  SQUADRON-,   TROOP.  341 

MUSTER. 

Regimental,  Squadron  or  Troop. 

889.  Muster  is  preceded  by  an  inspection  and,  when  practi- 
cable, by  a  review. 

The  adjutant  is  provided  with  the  muster  roll  of  the  head- 
quarters troop,  the  supply  officer  with  that  of  the  supply  troop, 
and  each  other  captain  with  the  roll  of  his  troop. 

A  list  of  absentees,  alphabetically  arranged,  showing  cause 
and  place  of  absence,  accompanies  each  roll. 

Having  been  inspected  and  still  being  in  column  of  troops  at 
prepare  for  inspection,  each  captain,  as  the  mustering  officer 
approaches,  commands :  ATTENTION  TO  MUSTER. 

The  mustering  officer,  or  captain,  then  calls  the  names  on  the 
roll ;  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers  "  here  "  and 
returns  saber. 

890.  Dismounted,  each  captain,  as  the  mustering  officer  ap- 
proaches, commands:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS,  3.  ATTEN- 
TION TO  MUSTER.  Each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers, 
"  here  "  and  brings  his  rifle  to  order  arms. 

Men  who  are  not  formed  wuth  the  troop  and  who  attend 
muster  w^ithout  arms  are  2  yards  to  the  left  of  the  file  closers ; 
each,  as  soon  as  he  answers  "  here,"  passes  2  yards  in  front 
of  the  rank,  from  left  to  right,  salutes  the  mustering  officer 
as  he  passes  him,  and  quits  the  parade  ground. 

891.  After  muster,  the  mustering  officer,  accompanied  by 
such  officers  as  he  may  designate,  verifies  the  presence  of  men 
reported  in  hospital,  on  guard,  etc. 

A  troop  may  be  mustered  in  a  similar  manner  on  its  own 
parade  ground,  the  muster  to  follow  the  troop  inspection. 


PART  VIL— MISCELLANEOUS. 

MANUALS. 

The  Guidon. 

892.  Carry  guidon:  When  dismoimted  the  lance  of  the  guidon 
is  held  vertically  in  the  right  hand,  arm  extended,  lance  rest- 
ing in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  ferrule  about  6  inches  from 
the  ground.  It  is  thus  held  in  marching  or  when  the  troop 
is  at  the  slioulder,  port,  or  trail. 

When  leading  the  horse  the  lance  is  held  in  a  correspond- 
ing position  in  the  left  hand.  When  mounted  the  ferrule  is 
inserted  in  the  guidon  socket,  the  right  hand  grasps  the  lance, 
forearm  nearly  horizontal,  the  arm  through  the  sling,  lance 
vertical. 

893.  Order  guidon:  The  ferrule  of  the  lance  rests  on  the 
ground  on  a  line  with  and  touching  the  toe  of  the  right  shoe ; 
the  right  hand  grasps  the  lance  in  the  same  manner  as  when 
at  a  carry. 

894.  Parade  rest  is  executed  as  with  the  rifle,  except  that  the 
forearms  are  nearly  horizontal. 

895.  The  order  and  parade  rest  are  executed  with  the  troop ; 
the  cnrrn  at  the  command  right  shoulder  arms. 

896.  At  stand  to  horse  the  ferrule  of  the  lance  rests  on  the 
ground  on  a  line  with  and  touching  the  toe  of  the  left  shoe, 
lance  vertical,  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  neck,  elbow  and 
forearm  closed  against  the  lance. 

897.  At  the  command  prepare  to  mount  the  lance  is  raised 
slightly  from  the  ground  while  stepping  back ;  upon  halting, 
the  ferrule  is  placed  on  the  ground  about  1  foot  in  front  of  the 
left  forefoot  of  the  horse. 

After  mounting,  the  lance  is  gi-asped  with  the  right  hand 
under  the  left,  which  lets  go  of  it  without  quitting  the  reins ; 
the  lance  is  then  raised  over  the  horse's  neck,  under  the  reins, 
and  is  lowered  on  the  right  of  the  saddle,  and  the  ferrule 
inserted  in  the  guidon  socket. 

898.  The  guidon  executes  the  salute  as  prescribed  for  the 
standard  (par.  902). 

342 


MANUAL  OF  THE  STANDARD.  34S 

The  Standard. 

899.  The  word  "  standard  "  refers  to  both  the  national  and 
the  regimental  standards.  To  distinguish  between  them  the 
terms  "  national  standard  "  and  "  regimental  standard  "  are 
used. 

900.  Standards  are  said  to  be  cased  when  furled  and  pro- 
tected by  oilcloth  covering. 

901.  In  garrison  the  standards,  when  not  in  use,  are  kept  in 
the  office  or  quarters  of  the  colonel  and  are  escorted  thereto 
and  therefrom  by  the  color  guard.  In  camp  the  standards, 
when  not  in  use,  are  displayed  in  front  of  the  colonel's  tent, 
the  national  standard  on  the  right.  From  reveille  to  retreat 
when  the  weather  permits  they  are  uncased ;  from  retreat  to 
reveille  and  during  inclement  weather  they  are  cased. 

902.  Standard  salute:  Being  mounted,  lower  the  standard  to 
the  front  until  the  lance  (under  the  right  arm)  is  horizontal. 
When  dismounted  slip  the  right  hand  up  the  lance  as  high 
as  the  eye,  then  lower  the  lance  to  the  front  by  straightening 
the  right  arm  to  its  full  extent, 

903.  The  Manual  of  the  Standard  is  as  prescribed  for  the 
guidon  (pars.  892-898),  except  that  at  carry  standard,  dis- 
mounted, the  ferrule  of  the  lance  is  supported  at  the  right  hip. 

In  marching  the  salute  is  rendered  when  at  12  yards  from 
the  person  entitled  to  the  salute ;  the  carry  is  resumed  as  soon 
as  it  has  passed  him. 

904.  The  guard  to  the  standard  (color  guard)  consists  of  the 
two  color  sergeants  of  the  regiment  and  of  two  experienced 
men,  usually  noncommissioned  officers,  selected  by  the  colonel. 
A  position  on  the  color  guard  is  one  of  responsibility  and 
honor.  The  guard  is  habitually  formed  in  single  rank,  the 
color  sergeants  being  Nos.  2  and  3.  Tlie  national  standard  is 
carried  by  the  senior  color  sergeant,  he  being  No.  2  and  com- 
manding the  guard.  When  the  regimental  standard  is  carried 
it  is  carried  by  the  junior  color  sergeant,  who  is  No.  3  of  the 
guard ;  he  conforms  to  the  movements  of  the  sergeant  who  car- 
ries the  national  standard,  except  as  regards  saluting. 

The  post  of  the  guard  to  the  standard  is  with  the  squadron 
designated  by  the  colonel,  usually  the  second.  At  formation 
of  the  regiment,  as  soon  as  the  squadrons  have  taken  their 
places,  the  color  guard  proceeds  to  its  post  (par.  793). 


344  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

When  during  exercises  the  regimenttil  formation  is  broken 
up  the  color  guard  joins  the  colonel  or  is  dismissed  as 
directed ;  in  campaign  it  joins  the  regimental  reserve  in  lieu 
of  other  orders. 

The  color  guard  executes  neither  loadings  nor  firings;  in 
rendering  honors  it  executes  all  movements  in  the  manual ; 
at  drill  all  movements  unless  specially  excused. 

805.  To  receive  the  standard,  the  color  guard,  by  command  of 
the  senior  color  sergeant,  presents  sabers ;  the  same  salute  is 
rendered  on  parting  with  the  standards.  After  parting  with 
the  standards  the  color  guard  carries  and  returns  sabers  by 
command  of  the  senior  remaining  number,  whose  post  is  on  the 
right  of  the  guard.  When  the  regiment  is  dismissed  the  color 
guard  escorts  the  standards  to  the  office  or  the  quarters  of 
the  colonel. 

906.  The  regimental  standard  salutes  in  escort  to  the  stand- 
ard and  when  saluting  a  person  entitled  to  the  honor  as  pre- 
scribed in  Army  Regulations,  but  in  no  other  case. 

The  national  standard  renders  no  salute  (pars.  793,  794, 
796). 

In  action  the  position  of  the  standards  will  be  indicated  by 
the  colonel  who  may,  through  their  display,  inspire  enthusiasm 
and  maintain  the  morale.  He  may,  however,  hold  them  back 
when  they  might  indicate  to  the  enemy  the  direction  of  the 
main  attack,  betray  the  position  of  the  main  body,  or  tend  to 
commit  the  regiment  to  defensive  action.  In  the  presence 
of  the  enemy  and  during  the  "  approach  "  the  standards  are 
carried  cased,  ready  to  be  instantly  broken  out  if  their  inspira- 
tion is  required. 


HONORS  AND  SALUTES. 

907.  ( 1 )  The  composition  consisting  of  the  words  and  music 
known  as  "  The  Star  Spangled  Banner,"  is  designated  the 
National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  of  America. 

(2)  Provisions  in  these  regulations  or  in  orders  issued 
under  the  authority  of  the  War  Department,  requiring  the 
plaj'ing  of  the  National  Anthem  at  any  time  or  place  shall  be 
taken  to  mean  "  The  Star  Spangled  Banner  "  to  the  exclusion 
of  other  tunes  or  musical  compositions  popularly  known  as 
national  airs. 

(3)  Commanding  officers  will  require  bands  to  play  national 
and  patriotic  airs  on  appropriate  occasions.  The  playing  of 
the  national  anthem  of  any  country  as  part  of  a  medley  is 
prohibited. 

908.  (1)  The  President  of  the  United  States  will  be  re- 
ceived with  regimental  standards  or  colors,  officers  and  troops 
saluting,  the  drums  giving  four  ruffles  and  the  bugles  sounding 
four  flourishes.  The  ruffles  and  flourishes  will  be  followed  by 
the  National  Anthem,  or,  in  the  absence  of  a  band,  the  field 
music  or  bugles  will  sound  to  the  color. 

(2)  An  ex-President  and  the  Vice  President  of  the  United 
States  will  be  received  with  the  same  honors  as  prescribed  for 
the  President,  except  that  the  flourishes  will  be  followed  by  a 
march  in  lieu  of  the  National  Anthem. 

(3)  The  President  of  a  foreign  republic,  a  foreign  sovereign 
or  a  member  of  a  royal  family  will  be  received  with  the  same 
honors  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  (1),  except  that  the 
national  anthem  of  his  country  will  be  played. 

(4)  Officers  of  the  following  grades  of  rank  will  be  received 
with  regimental  standards  or  colors,  officers  and  troops  salut- 

4ng,  and  field  music  playing  as  follows:  General,  four  ruffles 
and  flourishes;  lieutenant  general,  three  ruffles  and  flourishes; 
major  general,  two  ruffles  and  flourishes;  brigadier  general, 
one  ruffle  and  flourish. 

In  tendering  honors  to  a  general  officer  or  official  of  like 
rank,  the  general's  march  will  be  played  immediately  after 
the  flourishes. 

345 


346  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

909.  To  the  members  of  the  Cfibinet,  the  Chief  Justice,  the 
President  pro  tempore  of  the  Senate,  the  Speaker  of  the  House 
of  Representatives,  American  or  foreign  ambassadors,  and 
governors  within  their  respective  States  and  Territories  the 
same  honors  are  paid  as  to  the  general,  except  that  a  foreign 
ambassador  will  be  received  with  the  national  anthem  of  his 
country,  and  that  the  number  of  guns  fired  as  personal  salutes 
will  be  as  prescribed  in  Army  Regulations;  to  the  Assistant 
Secretary  of  War  and  to  American  or  foreign  envoys  or  minis- 
ters the  same  honors  as  to  the  lieutenant  general ;  to  officers 
of  the  Navy  the  honors  due  to  their  relative  rank;  to  officers 
of  marines  and  volunteers  and,  militia  when  in  the  service  of 
the  United  States,  the  honors  due  to  like  grades  in  the  regular 
service;  to  officers  of  a  foreign  service  the  honors  due  to  their 
rank. 

In  rendering  personal  honors,  when  the  command  presents 
arms,  officers  and  men  in  uniform  who  are  not  in  formation 
and  are  in  view  and  within  saluting  distance  shall  salute  and 
shall  remain  in  the  position  of  salute  until  the  end  of  the 
ruffles  and  flourishes,  or,  if  none,  until  order  arms. 

910.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  played  at  any  place 
when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  at- 
tention facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  when  they 
shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered,  they  shall 
salute  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position  of 
salute  until  the  last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform  and 
covered,  they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  hold- 
ing the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain 
until  its  close,  except  that  in  inclement  w^eather  the  headdress 
may  be  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard 
is  sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem  shall 
be  played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required 
to  be  repeated  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during 
the  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  shall 
be  shown  toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country 
when  played  upon  official  occasions.      (C.  C.  D,  R.  No.  2.) 


KOinORS  and  salutes.  347 

911.  When  makins:  or  receiving  official  reports  or  on  meet- 
ing out  of  doors,  all  officers  will  salute.  Military  courtesy 
requires  the  junior  to  salute  first,  but  when  the  salute  is  in- 
troductory to  a  report  made  at  a  military  ceremony  or  forma- 
tion to  the  representative  of  a  common  superior — as,  for 
example,  to  the  adjutant,  officer  of  the  day,  etc. — the  officer 
making  the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first ;  the 
officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge,  by  salut- 
ing, that  he  has  received  and  understood  the  report. 

912.  (1)  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers  and 
enlisted  men  not  in  a  military  formation,  nor  at  drill,  work, 
games,  or  mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meeting,  passing 
near  or  being  addressed,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the  en- 
listed man  saluting  first. 

(2)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  w^here  there  are  several 
enlisted  men,  the  word  "  attention  "  is  given  by  some  one  who 
perceives  him,  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and  remain  standing  at 
attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  other- 
wise. Enlisted  men  at  meals  stop  eating  and  remain  seated 
at  attention. 

(3)  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  faces  toward  him,  stands  at  attention,  and  salutes. 
Standing  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  par- 
ties remain  in  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such 
compliments  need  not  be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work 
do  not  cease  work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

(4)  Before  addressing  an  officer,  an  enlisted  man  makes 
the  prescribed  salute  with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is  armed, 
or,  if  unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.  He  also  makes  the  same 
salute  after  receiving  a  reply. 

913.  (1)  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in  for- 
mation, officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  as 
follows:  With  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed  for  that 
arm  (sentinels  on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without 
arms,  the  right-hand  salute. 

(2)  In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers  and 
enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right-hand 
salute. 

(3)  Officers  and  enlisted  nien  will  render  the  prescribed  sa- 
lutes in  a  military  manner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank,  or  the 


348  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

enlisted   men,   saluting  first.     When  several   officers   in  com- 
pany are  saluted,  all  entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

(4)  Except  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated  cam- 
paign conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dismounts 
before  addressing  a  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

(5)  A  man  in  formation  shall  not  salute  when  directly  ad- 
dressed, but  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest  or  at  ease. 

914.  (1)  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition 
is  easy.     In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 

(2)  When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of 
a  body  of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite 
the  post  of  the  commander. 

915.  In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains  and 
street  cars,  and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  honors  and 
personal  salutes  may  be  omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate 
or  apt  to  disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

916.  Salutes  to  the  National  Anthem  or  when  to  the  color 
(or  standard)  is  sounded  during  ceremonies  will  be  as  pre- 
scribed in  regulations,  as  herein  amended. 

917.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color  will 
render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they  will  salute  as 
per  principle  913  (1)  ;  if  in  civilian  dress  and  covered,  they 
will  uncover,  holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand;  if  uncovered  they  will  salute  with  the 
right-hand  salute. 

918.  Sentinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  conform 
to  the  foregoing  principles,  but  salute  by  presenting  arms 
when  armed  with  the  rifle.  They  will  not  salute  if  it  inter- 
feres with  the  proper  performance  of  their  duties.  Troops 
under  arms  will  salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

919.  (1)  Commanders  of  detachments  or  other  commands 
will  salute  officers  of  grades  higher  than  the  person  command- 
ing the  unit,  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to  attention  and  then 
saluting  as  in  principle  913  (1).  If  the  person  saluted  is  of  a 
junior  or  equal  grade,  the  unit  need  not  be  at  attention  in 
the  exchange  of  salutes. 

(2)  If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their  com- 
manders will  exchange  salutes,  both  commands  being  at  atten- 
tion. 

920.  Salutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by  troops 
actually  engaged  in  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  the  field  under 


HONORS  AND  SALUTES.  349 

campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions.     Troops  on  the 
service  of  security  pay  no  compliments  whatever. 

921.  If  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the  field) 
and  armed  with  the  rifle,  or  with  sabers  drawn,  it  shall  be 
brought  to  present  arms  or  present  saber  before  its  commander 
salutes  in  the  following  cases :  When  the  National  Anthem  is 
played,  or  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded 
during  ceremonies,  or  when  a  person  is  saluted  who  is  its  im- 
mediate or  higher  commander  or  a  general  officer,  or  when 
the  national  or  regimental  color  is  saluted. 

922.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall  remain  in 
the  position  of  salute  while  the  National  Anthem  is  being 
played ;  also  at  retreat  and  during  ceremonies  when  to  the 
color  is  played,  if  no  band  is  present.  If  not  under  arms,  the 
organizations  shall  be  brought  to  attention  at  the  first  note 
of  the  National  Anthem,  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard,  and 
the  salute  rendered  by  the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer 
in  command  as  prescribed  in  regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

923.  No  officer  in  civilian  clothes  or  present  informally  in 
uniform  shall  be  saluted  with  guns  or  have  a  guard  paraded 
in  his  honor. 

924.  Guards  shall  not  turn  out  on  Sundays  as  a  matter  of 
compliment  for  officers  of  the  United  States  Army,  Navy,  or 
Marine  Corps. 

925.  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps, 
National  Guard,  and  Volunteers  as  to  officers  of  their  own 
regiment,  corps,  or  arm  of  service. 

926.(1)  An  officer  arriving  at  the  headquarters  of  a  mili- 
tary command,  station,  or  post  will  call  upon  the  commander 
thereof  as  soon  as  practicable  and  register  his  name,  address, 
and  the  probable  time  of  his  stay.  If  the  visiting  officer  be 
senior  to  the  commander,  the  former  may  send  his  card  and 
his  address  for  registration,  in  which  case  it  becomes  the  duty 
of  the  commander  to  make  the  first  call. 

(2)  When  any  officer  arrives  at  Washington,  D.  C,  or  at  the 
headquarters  of  a  territorial  department,  he  will  report  as  pre- 
scribed in  paragraph  825,  A.  R. 

(3)  An  officer  arriving  for  duty  with  an  organization,  a 
staff  department,  at  the  Military  Academy,  or   any   of  the 


350  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

service  schools,  will  make  both  an  official  and  a  call  of 
courtesy  upon  the  head  or  commander  thereof  as  soon  as 
practicable.  If  the  arriving  officer  is  the  senior,  the  first  call 
will  be  made  by  the  junior. 

(4)  In  case  of  large  commands  or  posts,  an  arriving  officer 
will  pay  such  additional  visits  as  his  post,  station,  or  regi- 
mental commander  may  prescribe.  Under  normal  conditions 
it  is  considered  desirable  that  at  least  the  arriving  field  officers 
should  call  at  the  various  organization  headquarters. 

(5)  Official  calls  are  made  at  the  office  of  the  commanding 
officer.  If  made  after  office  hours  and  the  commanding  officer 
is  not  present,  the  visiting  officer  will  register,  leave  his  card 
and  repeat  the  call  informally  the  following  morning  during 
office  hours.  Social  calls  will  be  made  at  some  convenient 
time  at  the  quarters  of  the  commanding  officer. 

(6)  As  a  rule,  juniors  will  give  way  to  seniors  and  at  all 
times  juniors  will  show  deference  to  their  seniors  and  will  not 
ignore  their  presence.  These  rules  will  apply  whether  in 
vehicles,  on  horseback,  or  on  foot.  In  accompanying  officers, 
juniors  will  walk  or  ride  on  the  left  of  their  seniors,  unless 
there  be  special  reason  to  the  contrary.     (Par.  915.) 

(7)  In  case  of  an  organization  reporting  at  a  post  or  sta- 
tion for  duty,  the  commanding  officer  thereof,  accompanied 
by  his  staff  (if  there  be  one),  will  immediately  make  an  official 
call  upon  the  commander  of  the  post  or  station,  as  prescribed 
in  paragraph  (1).  The  commanding  officer  of  the  arriving 
troops  may,  at  his  discretion,  be  accompanied  by  the  other 
officers  of  his  command.  If  not  accompanied  by  them  at  this 
first  visit,  he  will  arrange  to  present  them  officially  at  some 
convenient  time  to  the  post  or  station  commander,  unless 
otherwise  directed.  A  similar  procedure  will  be  observed  on 
the  departure  of  an  organization  from  a  post  or  station. 

(8)  A  subordinate  officer,  after  reporting  officially  to  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  post,  headquarters,  or  station,  will 
report,  as  soon  as  practicable,  to  his  intermediate  commanding 
officers,  presenting  to  them  copies  of  his  assignment  or  other 
duty  order.  An  officer  returning  from  leave  or  detached  serv- 
ice makes  an  official  call,  without  delay,  on  the  post  or  sta- 
tion commander  and  upon  his  intermediate  commanders.  An 
officer  about  to  leave  the  post  or  station  for  any  length  of 


HONORS  AND  SALUTES.  351 

time  will  make  an  official  call  upon  the  commander  thereof 
and  also  upon  his  intermediate  commaudiu^-  officers. 

(9)  Newly  arrived  officers  will  be  called  upon  promptly  by 
the  other  officers  of  the  post  or  station.  In  case  of  large  com- 
mands, where  the  conditions  are  such  as  to  make  this  usual 
custom  burdensome  or  impracticable,  the  commanding  officer 
may  prescribe  that  visits  shall  only  be  exchanged  between 
senior  officers,  or  he  may  designate  officers  to  make  the  visits, 
who  shall  extend  the  usual  civilities  on  behalf  of  all  the  others, 
or  he  may  prescribe  that  no  visits  of  courtesy  shall  be  re- 
quired. A  general  officer  is  not  required  to  return  the  official 
visits  of  officers  of  his  command,  except  in  the  case  of  general 
officers  or  colonels ;  but  when  he  considers  it  advisable,  return 
calls  on  officers  of  grades  junior  to  colonel  shall  be  made  at 
his  direction  by  aids  or  other  staif  officers. 

927.  The  interchange  of  compliments  and  visits  between 
officers  of  the  service  is  of  great  importance.  Failure  to  pay 
the  civilities  customary  in  official  and  polite  society  is  to  the 
prejudice  of  the  best  interests  of  the  service.  The  well-estab- 
lished customs  of  the  Army  in  this  regard  will  be  carried  out. 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS. 

General  Pkovisions. 

928.  Time  required:  The  time  required  to  train  a  remount 
thoroughly  for  the  Cavalry  service  depends  upon  so  many  con- 
ditions, such  as  the  animal's  age,  condition,  temperament, 
capacity,  and  conformation,  and  the  skill,  zeal,  industry,  and 
ability  of  instructors  and  riders,  that  it  can  be  stated  only 
approximately.  With  young  and  undeveloped  horses  two  years 
can  profitably  be  employed.  The  first  year's  work  would  then 
include  the  Preliminary  exercises,  not  mounted;  Preliminary 
exercises,  mounted;  and  Further  conditioning  and  training,  as 
embodied  in  these  regulations ;  and  the  second  year's  work,  the 
last  part,  as  shown,  namely,  Final  conditioning  and  training. 

But  in  emergencies,  such  as  preparation  for  war,  mature 
horses  of  good  conformation  and  in  fair  condition  can  be 
molded  in  about  three  months'  time  under  competent  in- 
structors and  ordinary  riders  into  mounts  fulfilling  sufilciently 
well  for  the  time  being  the  requirements  of  the  trooper's  horse. 
The  exigencies  of  active  service  afterwards  will  not  prevent 
making  up  what  may  be  found  lacking.  To  meet  such  emer- 
gencies the  methods  and  progression  indicated  herein  for  the 
first  year's  work  under  ordinary  conditions  of  peace  time  are 
prescribed,  and  Final  conditioning  and  training  would  be 
omitted. 

929.  Isolation  upon  arrival:  When  received  in  the  regiment 
the  remounts  are  placed  under  the  care  of  the  senior  veteri- 
narian and  isolated  for  the  minimum  time  necessary.  They 
are  then  distributed  to  the  troops. 

930.  Selection  of  riders:  During  the  period  of  training  the 
young  horse  should  always  be  ridden  by  the  same  rider.  Train- 
ing takes  precedence  over  all  other  troop  work  except  the 
instruction  of  recruits.  For  this  reason  the  troopers  selected 
for  it  should  be  relieved  from  all  other  duty  during  the  period 
of  training.  They  should  be  chosen  for  their  love  of  horses 
and  their  patience  and  gentleness.  All  concerned  in  the  train- 
ing should  be  well-instructed  and  skillful  riders  or  there  is  no 
hope  of  success. 

352 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS.  353 

One  selected  trooper  may  be  required  to  train  and  care  for 
three  remounts. 

931.  Cautions  to  instructors:  The  various  means  of  training 
are  left  to  the  initiative  of  the  instructor,  but  they  should  all 
be  based  upon  two  fundamental  principles — the  winning  of 
the  horse's  confidence  and  a  methodical  progression  on  the  part 
of  the  rider,  founded  upon  the  association  of  sensations.  He 
should  never  lose  sight  of  the  benefit  to  be  derived  from  a 
training  that  progresses  methodically  and  without  haste. 

The  best  test  of  the  instructor's  ability  is  the  condition  of 
the  horses,  the  cleanness  of  their  limbs,  and  their  temper  at 
the  end  of  their  training. 

The  instructor  should  constantly  bear  in  mind  these  precepts : 

Never  begin  work  without  being  absolutely  sure  of  what  is 
to  be  done. 

Proceetl  in  the  horse's  education  from  the  known  to  the  un- 
known ;  from  the  simple  to  the  difficult. 

Always  use  exactly  the  same  effects  to  obtain  the  same 
results. 

Remember  that  in  the  execution  of  every  movement  position 
should  precede  action. 

Never  ask  anything  of  a  horse  while  he  is  still  under  the 
impression  of  a  preceding  movement. 

Never  combat  two  resistances  at  the  same  time. 

Never  attribute  to  ignorance  or  bad  temper  of  the  horse  the 
consequences  of  ignorance  or  lack  of  skill  on  the  part  of  the 
rider. 

Introduce  the  new  features  near  the  end  of  a  lesson ;  then 
caress  the  horse  and  dismount. 

It  is  pertinent  to  these  rules  to  remember  that  during  the 
whole  course  of  the  young  horse's  education  a  little  progress 
every  day  should  satisfy;  demand  that,  but  no  more. 

Remounts  are  not  to  be  considered  completely  trained  until 
they  are  able  to  execute  all  that  is  required  of  them  in  the 
school  of  the  trooper  and  have  been  accustomed  to  firing,  to 
the  music  of  bands,  to  fluttering  of  flags,  and  all  the  other 
sights  and  sounds  peculiar  to  military  formations  and  evolu^ 
tions.  Advantage  should  be  taken  of  every  opportunity  during 
work  in  the  open  to  carry  forward  this  training  of  the  horse 
in  fearlessness  of  sights  and  sounds  to  which  he  is  not 
accustomed. 

38218  °— 18 23 


354  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

932.  Work:  Work  is  most  important  in  training.  It  de- 
velops the  horse  and  l^eeps  his  health  and  temper  in  balance. 
If  he  does  not  work,  he  grows  fat  and  becomes  too  playful, 
blemishes  himself  under  his  own  weight,  increased  by  his 
riders,  spoils  ixis  mouth  by  struggling  against  the  hand.  Yet 
he  should  be  in  rather  high  condition. 

His  work  should  be  long  out  of  doors  (fully  an  hour  and  a 
half)  and  short  indoors  (not  more  than  three-quarters  of  an 
hour  at  a  time). 

Tlie  length  and  duration  of  rides  out  of  doors,  as  well  as 
the  intensity  of  reciuirements  incident  thereto,  should  vary 
from  day  to  day ;  for  instance,  a  long,  hard  ride  should  be 
followed  by  a  shorter  and  easier  one  next  day. 

933.  The  standard  required  of  horses:  A  trained  charger  or 
troop  horse  must  be : 

(a)  Well  balanced  and  capable  of  carrying  a  heavy  weight 
over  long  distances  with  minimum  loss  of  condition. 
(&)   Handy  and  quick  in  obeying  the  correct  aids. 

(c)  Steady,  both  in  and  out  of  ranks. 

(d)  Capable  of  being  ridden  with  one  hand  at  any  pace 
either  in  the  company  of  other  horses  or  alone. 

(e)  Active  on  his  legs  and  a  good  jumper  over  ordinary 
obstacles. 

(/)   Unafraid  of  entering  deep  water  or  of  swimming. 
(g)  Accustomed  to  arms. 

934.  Periods:  For  convenience  in  conducting  the  training, 
and  in  order  that  it  may  progress  in  a  natural  sequence,  the 
school  of  the  remount  is  divided  into — 

(a)   Fir^t  period;  or  preliminary  exercises  not  mounted. 
(&)   Second  period,  or  preliminary  exercises,  mounted, 
(c)  Third  period,  or  further  conditioning  and  training. 
id)   Fourth  period,  or  final  conditioning  and  training. 

935.  Bitting:  The  bits  used  are,  first  and  second  periods, 
Single  snaffle ;  third,  double  snaffle ;  fourth,  bit  and  bridoon. 

First  Pekiod,  oe  Preliminaey  Exercises,  not  Mounted. 

Leading. 

The  longe. 

Saddling, 

Mounting  lesson. 

Training  to  bear  the  saber. 


TRAINING  HEMOUNTS— FIRST  PERIOD.  355 

936.  Leading  young  horses:  Leading  by  the  side  of  steady, 
old  horses  during  the  first  days  is  an  excellent  exercise  for 
remounts.  It  accustoms  them  to  strange  objects  and  calms 
them.  They  should  be  led  first  on  one  hand  and  then  on  the 
other  so  that  the  neck  will  not  always  be  bent  to  the  same 
side. 

During  the  first  two  wrecks  of  work  they  should  be  taken 
out  to  exercise  in  this  manner  at  the  walk  for  at  least  an 
hour,  and  then  their  work  on  the  longe  immediately  afterwards 
may  be  conducted  without  too  much  playfulness  through  ex- 
cess of  spirits,  and  their  first  saddling  and  mounting  lessons 
given  without  too  much  resistance. 

937.  The  longe:  All  remounts  should  be  trained  in  work  on 
the  longe. 

The  first  lessons  are  so  important  that  they  should  be  given 
by  the  instructor  himself  or  by  a  noncommissioned  oflicer  of 
experience  and  proved  skill.  If  well  given,  only  a  few  of 
short  duration  will  be  necessary. 

If  the  work  on  the  longe  has  been  well  directed,  the  horse 
should  be  calm  and  evenly  gaited  on  the  circle;  pass  freely 
from  one  gait  to  another  at  the  simple  indication  of  the  voice ; 
come  forward  or  go  away  from  the  center  according  to  the 
freedom  given ;  in  a  word,  be  on  the  hand  with  the  slightly 
stretched  longe,  as  later  he  should  be  with  a  light  tension  on 
the  reins. 

938.  Saddling:  When  the  horse  is  quieted  by  work  and  gentle 
or.  the  longe  advantage  should  be  taken  of  that  condition  to 
teach  him  gradually  to  bear  the  saddle — a  lesson  which,  if 
given  in  the  stable,  might  prove  difficult.  The  saddle  is  first 
I>ut  on  without  stirrups  or  stirrup  straps ;  the  girth,  quite  loose 
at  first,  is  tightened  gradually  during,  the  work.  When  the 
horse  is  accustomed  to  the  contact  of  the  saddle  and  girth  the 
stirrups  are  added  and  allowed  to  hang  down  on  each  side 
at  the  walk  and  trot.  He  is  thus  prepared  for  the  mounting 
lesson,  which  becomes  easy ;  saddling  and  mounting  a  young 
horse  for  the  first  time  on  the  same  day  generally  arouses  his 
resistance. 

939.  Mounting  lesson:  The  instructor  selects,  according  to 
circumstances,  the  most  opportune  moment  for  giving  the 
mounting  lesson,  always  taking  advantage  of  the  calmness  due 
to  fatigue  at  the  end  of  the  period  of  instruction. 


356  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

This  lesson  may  also  be  given  during  the  work  on  the  longe, 
but  always  after  the  horse  has  been  quieted  by  exercise.  The 
instructor  personally  directs  the  first  lesson,  which  is  given 
to  each  horse  individually.  The  greatest  gentleness  and  pa- 
tience are  here  necessary. 

Accompanied  by  an  assistant  carrying  a  small  measure  of 
oats,  if  need  be,  he  places  himself  squarely  in  front  of  the 
horse  and  pats  him,  taking  hold  of  him  only  in  case  of  neces- 
sity ;  the  rider  approaches  the  horse's  head,  pats  him  on  the 
forehead,  over  the  eyes,  on  the  neck,  and  haunches.  He 
strikes  the  saddle,  lowers  and  raises  the  stirrups,  then  takes 
the  reins,  leaving  them  very  long.  He  mounts  without  hurry, 
but  without  hesitation.  If,  during  the  lesson,  the  horse  moves 
out  of  place  or  backs  away,  he  goes  back  to  the  head,  draws 
the  horse  forward  with  the  snaffle  reins  and  quietly  begins 
again. 

The  rider  in  putting  his  foot  in  the  stirrup  is  careful  to 
point  his  toe  down  and  not  to  touch  the  horse's  side ;  this  might 
disturb  him.  He  should  not  stop  after  raising  himself  in  the 
stirrup ;  that  would  break  the  equilibrium  and  run  counter  to 
the  end  sought.  He  should  use  his  right  hand  in  taking  the 
right  stirrup ;  in  feeling  for  it  with  the  toe  he  may  frighten  the 
horse. 

In  general  he  should  avoid  putting  the  horse  in  march  as 
soon  as  he  is  in  the  saddle,  so  that  the  idea  of  the  forward 
movement  will  not  be  associated  in  the  horse's  brain  with 
receiving  the  rider's  weight. 

It  is  best  the  first  few  times  to  end  the  day's  work  with  the 
mounting  lesson  and  send  the  horse  to  the  stable  as  a  reward. 

If  a  horse  is  found  very  difficult,  the  instructor  immediately 
puts  him  back  on  the  longe. 

The  mounting  lesson  should  be  given  on  both  the  right  and 
left  sides.  This  instruction  of  the  colt  should  be  thorough. 
Absolute  docility  must  be  obtained,  even  in  the  midst  of  noise 
and  movement.  However,  it  is  well  not  to  require  too  much 
at  the  very  beginning. 

940.  Training  to  bear  the  saber:  The  longe  may  be  utilized 
to  accustom  the  colt  to  the  saber.  As  with  all  new  require- 
ments one  should  wait  until  the  close  of  work  to  give  the 
lesson. 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS— SECOND  PERIOD.  357 

Only  the  scabbard  is  put  on  at  first.  When  the  horse  bears 
it  without  fear  the  blade  is  added,  and  he  is  then  exercised 
at  the  various  gaits.  This  work,  it  is  understood,  is  inter- 
spersed with  halts,  caresses,  and  frequent  rests. 

This,  how^ever,  is  only  a  step  toward  the  series  of  exercises 
during  work  on  the  road  which  accustom  the  horse  to  the 
saber. 

Second  Peeiod,  or  Preliminary  Conditioning  and  Training. 

Mounted  work. 

First  lessons  in  obedience  to  the  aids. 

Preliminary  conditioning. 

Hygiene. 

Preparing  the  young  horse  to  take  his  place  in  the  ranks  of 
the  troop. 

941.  Mounted  work:  This  is  carried  on  both  out  of  doors  and 
in  the  riding  hall.  As  soon  as  the  young  horse  accepts  his 
rider  his  conditioning  should  be  begun  and  continued  without 
interruption.  It  should,  whenever  possible,  take  place  out  of 
doors.  Although  the  young  horse  acquires  his  full  strength 
most  rapidly  in  the  fresh  air  and  on  straight  lines,  the  first 
lessons  should  be  given  in  the  riding  hall  to  enable  the 
instructor  to  exercise  closer  watch,  to  study  better  the  men 
and  horses,  and  to  avoid  possible  accidents. 

The  mingling  of  old  horses  with  the  remounts  has  a  very 
good  influence  at  the  beginning. 

The  riding  hall  is  used  also  when  the  weather  requires  it. 
Advantage  should  be  taken  of  the  opportunity  to  give  the 
remounts  the  first  lessons  of  the  aids. 

In  general,  the  instructor  should  plan  to  work  from  one- 
half  to  three-quarters  of  an  hour  in  a  riding  hall  or  other  in- 
closure  daily;  followed  by  work  outside  of  from  one  to  two 
hours. 

The  basis  of  all  training  is  freedom  in  the  forward  move- 
ment. From  the  first  the  horse  must  be  taught  to  respond  to 
the  legs. 

This  is  best  obtained  out  of  doors.  If  horses  are  worked 
too  much  in  a  riding  hall  they  lose  impulsion  and  get  behind 
the  bit. 


358  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

942.  First  lessons  in  obedience  to  the  aids:  This  preliminary 
education  is  quite  necessary  to  permit  the  horse  to  be  handled 
out  of  doors.     It  consists  in  teaching  him — 

(a)  To  move  forward  at  the  call  of  the  legs: 

Passing  from  the  halt  to  the  walk;  from  the  walk  to  the 
trot ;  from  the  halt  to  the  trot ;  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop ; 
and  extending  the  walk  and  the  trot. 

(b)  To  slow  up  and  stop  at  the  tension  on  the  reins : 
Passing  from  the  walk  to  the  halt ;  from  the  trot  to  the 

walk ;  from  the  trot  to  the  halt ;  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot. 

(c)  To  turn  at  the  action  of  the  leading  rein  or  bearing 
rein  and  both  legs: 

Abouts  ;  broken  lines  ;  serpentines  ;  figures  of  eight ;  circling 
individually ;  half  turns ;  and  half  turns  in  reverse. 

(d)  To  back;  limited  to  a  few  steps  and  executed  dis- 
mounted. 

943.  Preliminary  conditioning:  By  long,  slow  walks  out  of 
doors,  short  periods  at  the  trot,  and  still  sliorter  and  very 
quiet  periods  at  the  gallop,  the  young  horses  may  easily  be 
brought  in  a  short  time  to  gallop  1  mile  in  5  minutes,  and  to 
march,  by  a  reasonable  alternation  of  the  gaits,  10  miles  in 
2  hours. 

944.  Hygiene:  The  instructor  can  not  give  too  much  atten- 
tion to  the  grooming,  the  care  of  the  feet,  the  feeding  and 
bedding;  the  ventilation  of  the  stables,  and  the  appetites  of 
the  horses,  furnishing  mashes,  gruels,  green  grass,  and  car- 
rots (when  available).  With  this  in  view,  in  addition  to  daily 
visits  to  the  young  horses  in  the  stables,  the  instructors  will 
once  a  week  have  the  riders  lead  out  their  respective  mounts, 
the  latter  equipped  with  snaffle  bridles  and  without  saddles, 
and  will  minutely  inspect  the  condition  of  the  teeth,  eyes, 
nostrils,  feet,  legs,  coats,  and  state  of  health  of  the  horses  as 
exhibited  by  'their  appearance  generally.  He  will  question 
the  riders  and  arouse  their  interest  in  the  points  that  may 
require  attention. 

945.  Preparing  the  young  horse  to  take  his  place  in  the 
ranks  of  the  troop:  From  the  beginning  of  mounted  work  at 
least  one  day  each  week  should  be  devoted  to  accustoming  the 
colt: 

To  arms  and  the  handling  of  arms ;  to  the  packed  saddle ; 
to  the  trooper's  entire  equipment ;  to  firing ;  and,  during  work 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS— THIRD  PERIOD.  359 

out  of  doors,  to  marching  in  column  and  in  line,  to  deploy- 
ment, movements  by  the  flank  and  to  the  rear ;  to  leaving  the 
ranks ;  to  leaving  the  other  horses,  working  apart  from  them, 
and  returning  to  them  quietly. 

Thikd  Peeiod,  or  Fuether  Conditioning  and  Training. 

Work  out  of  doors. 

More  marked  obedience  to  the  aids. 

Jumping. 

The  use  of  arms. 

Conditioning. 

Duty  in  the  ranks  of  the  troop. 

946.  Work  out  of  doors:  Increase  the  work  out  of  doors 
according  to  the  state  and  temperament  of  the  horses :  Long 
periods  at  the  walk  are  excellent  for  quieting  the  horse ;  walk- 
ing and  trotting  up  long,  gentle  slopes,  for  developing  muscle 
and  wind;  and  long,  quiet  gallops,  for  accustoming  them  to 
the  speed  of  that  gait  without  pulling  and  for  building  up  their 
powers  of  endurance. 

947.  More  marked  obedience  to  the  aids:  More  marked  obedi- 
ence to  the  aids  should  now  be  demanded  in  all  the  movements, 
such  as  abouts,  broken  lines,  serpentines,  figures  of  eight,  indi- 
vidual circles,  half  turns,  half  turns  in  reverse,  etc. ;  increasing 
and  decreasing  the  speed  of  the  gaits  without  fighting  the  hand 
or  resisting  jthe  legs ;  changing  the  gaits  with  the  horses 
straight,  light  on  the  bit,  and  handy ;  balanced  as  regards  the 
distribution  of  weight  on  the  forehand  and  the  haunches ; 
w^alking  out  freely,  trotting  steadily,  and  galloping  at  the 
different  speeds  of  that  gait  without  excitement. 

The  remounts  should  now  be  ridden  frequently  with  the 
reins  in  one  hand. 

948.  Jumping:  The  longe  and  the  chute  should  be  used  in 
the  young  horse's  first  lessons  in  jumping.  The  obstacles 
should  in  the  beginning  be  low  and  be  gradually  increased  to 
about  3  feet  in  height  as  the  horse  gains  in  strength  and 
cleverness.  When  he  has  become  thoroughly  obedient  and 
willing  he  should  be  led  in  the  open  over  varied  obstacles, 
such  as  ditches,  little  brooks,  up  and  down  steep  slopes,  etc. 
Horses  should  be  taught  to  lead  freely  under  all  conditions. 

They  should  then  have  much  practice.,  mounted,  in  passing 
obstacles  out  of  doors,  such  as  logs,  small  ditches,  and  other 


360  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

specially  constructed  fences,  hedges,  etc.,  but  always  of  such 
dimensions  as  to  present  no  real  difficulty  or  danger  of  injury 
to  their  legs  and  so  arranged  as  to  seem  to  have  been  en- 
countered en  route. 

It  is  by  frequent  jumping  and  not  in  the  height  of  the 
jumps  that  the  horses  become  skillful  and  bold. 

949.  The  use  of  arms:  The  horses  should  now  be  accustomed 
to  the  use  of  the  pistol  while  passing  targets  and  to  running 
at  heads  with  the  saber;  at  the  walk,  slow  trot,  and  the 
canter. 

They  should  remain  quiet  in  the  presence  of  moving  bodies 
of  troops ;  be  accustomed  to  the  passing  among  them  of  dis- 
mounted men  and  to  music  and  flags;  and,  if  opportunity 
permits,  they  should  be  taught  to  swim. 

In  addition,  they  should  be  taught  to  carry  double. 

950.  Conditioning:  At  the  end  of  this  phase  of  their  training 
they  should  be  able  to  gallop  2  miles  in  eight  minutes  without 
fatigue,  and  to  march  with  full  field  equipment  by  reason- 
able alternation  of  gaits  15  miles  in  three  hours. 

Conditioning  involves  the  development  of  muscle  and  wind, 
and  endurance,  hardiness,  and  agility  on  varied  ground. 
The  instructor  can  not  be  too  solicitous  about  the  young  horse's 
legs  and  feet.  A  horse,  in  good  condition,  presents  a  general 
aspect  of  health,  wide-awake  eye,  brilliant  coat,  supple  skin, 
muscles  standing  out ;  his  flank  is  well  let  down,  and  his  easy, 
calm  gaits  show  strength. 

If  the  colts  are  barefoot,  their  feet  should  frequently  be 
leveled  and  shaped  with  the  rasp. 

951.  Duty  in  the  ranks  of  the  troop:  In  time  of  peace  the 
remounts  may  now,  habitually  at  the  expiration  of  about 
three  months,  be  returned  for  duty  with  the  troops  to  which 
they  are  assigned.  They  participate  in  the  drills,  marches, 
and  maneuvers  of  the  troop  until  such  time  (not  later  than 
the  date  of  the  beginning  of  the  next  period  of  garrison  train- 
ing) when  their  education  is  to  be  continued  and  carried  to 
completion,  as  indicated  in  the  succeeding  period. 

In  case,  however,  of  preparation  for  war  or  other  emer- 
gency they  may  now  render  good  service;  but  commanders 
must  in  war,  even  more  than  in  peace,  seek  every  opportunity 
to  improve  the  conditioning  and  training  of  their  horses. 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS— FOURTH  PERIOD.  361 

Fourth  Period,  or  Final  Conditioning  and  Training. 

Repetition  with  the  bit  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle. 
Role  and  position  of  the  head  and  neck  in  movement. 
To  obtain  engagement  of  the  hindquarters. 
To  obtain  mobility  of  the  haunches. 
To  obtain  suppleness  of  the  spinal  column. 
To  obtain  mobility  of  the  shoulders  and  lightness  of  the  fore- 
hand. 

To  obtain  suppleness  of  the  jaw  and  the  poll. 

Conditioning. 

Jumping. 

Backing. 

Changes  of  direction. 

Suppleness  and  obedience. 

The  gallop  departs  (limit  of  training  for  the  troop  horse). 

952.  Repetition  with  the  bit  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle :  This 
repetition  and  review  should  not  be  hastened.  It  should  be 
characterized  in  the  beginning  by  long  quiet  rides  out  of 
doors — at  first  at  the  walk  and  later  at  the  trot  and  the 
gallop  with  the  reins  long  but  taut,  and  the  legs  gently  urging 
the  horse  forward.  This,  in  addition  to  his  natural  inclina- 
tion to  move  forward  freely  out  of  doors,  will  induce  the  horse 
to  take  a  steady  pressure  on  the  bit  without  pulling,  and 
diminish  the  risk,  always  existing  during  the  first  lessons,  of 
getting  the  horse  behind  the  bit. 

All  the  preceding  work  on  the  snaffle  should  be  repeated 
with  the  curb,  keeping  in  mind  the  greater  power  of  the  bit 
as  compared  to  the  snaffle. 

The  instructor  himself  should  adjust  the  bits  to  each  horse 
with  the  most  solicitous  care,  and  should  not  hesitate  after- 
wards to  return  to  the  snaffle  in  individual  cases,  due  to  the 
delicacy  of  the  horse's  mouth  or,  as  often  happens,  to  the  poor 
seat  and  heavy  hand  of  the  rider. 

953.  Role  and  position  of  the  head  and  neck  in  movement: 
At  the  beginning  of  training  the  young  horse  should  be  allowed 
to  stretch  out  his  head  and  neck  to  the  front,  but  required  by 
the  rider's  legs  to  go  well  into  the  bit  and  to  keep  the  reins 
stretched. 

As  training  progresses,  in  proportion  as  the  colt  gains  bal- 
ance and  handiness  and  engagement  of  the  hindquarters  will 


362  CAVALRY   DRILL   REGULATIONS. 

the  neck  be  raised  and  curved  slightly  upward  and  the  head 
approach  the  vertical. 

The  horse  uses  the  head  and  neck  as  a  balancer,  and  the 
rider  should  always  grant  him  as  much  liberty  as  possible 
by  means  of  a  firm  seat,  light  hands  and  long,  taut  reins. 

954.  To  obtain  engagement  of  the  hindquarters:  The  horse 
should  be  induced  to  engage  his  hindquarters  and  with  them 
to  support  his  weight,  in  stopping  and  in  making  rapid 
changes  of  direction.  This  is  brought  about  by  much  practice 
in  increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace ;  passing  from  the  walk 
to  the  trot,  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  and  vice  versa ;  broken  lines, 
serpentines,  circles,  half  turns,  and  false  gallops;  with  the 
haunches  following  sometimes  the  track  of  the  forehand, 
sometimes  a  track  a  little  inside  that  of  the  forehand,  except 
in  the  case  of  the  false  gallop. 

The  false  gallop  causes  the  horse  to  lower  the  croup  and 
engage  the  hindquarters,  but  the  haunches  must  follow  the 
forehand  and  not  be  pressed  inward. 

There  should  be  much  practice  in  the  false  gallop,  for  the 
reason  that  troop  horses  at  drill  and  maneuvers  and  other 
work  out  of  doors  do  not  change  the  lead  at  each  change  of 
direction  and  should  therefore  turn  true  or  false  with  equal 
facility.  This  is  begun  by  broken  lines  and  perfected  by  ser- 
pentines and  circles  and  figures  of  eight  at  the  gallop. 

955.  To  obtain  mobility  of  the  haunches:  The  horse  should 
displace  the  haunches  to  the  right  or  left  at  the  pressure  of 
the  leg  a  little  behind  the  girth. 

The  best  movements  for  obtaining  this  are,  half  turns  in 
reverse,  executed  slightly  on  the  forehand,  the  haunches 
swinging  outward  a  little,  individual  circles  in  the  same 
manner,  both  gradually  reduced  in  dimensions,  leading  even- 
tually to  the  about  on  the  forehand. 

When  mobility  of  the  haunches  is  well  established  it  should 
not  be  practiced  afterwards  as  a  gymnastic  exercise. 

956.  To  obtain  suppleness  of  the  spinal  column:  By  this  is 
meant  the  lateral  or  vertical  bending  of  the  spinal  column. 
It  is  obtained  laterally  by  galloping  on  a  large  circle,  the 
radius  of  which  is  reduced  as  training  progresses;  vertically 
by  increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace;  changing  the  gaits, 
especially  from  the  walk  to  the  halt,  from  the  trot  to  the 
walk,  and  to  the  halt ;  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot,  to  the  walk, 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS— FOURTH  PERIOD.  363 

and  to  the  halt;   by  half  halts,  false  gallops,  and  backing; 
all  with  a  gradually  increasing  degree  of  collection. 

957.  To  obtain  mobility  of  the  shoulders  and  lightness  of  the 
forehand:  Riders  are  very  apt  to  bring  about  excessive  mo- 
bility of  the  haunches  and  to  neglect  those  exercises  tending 
to  lighten  the  forehand  and  to  render  the  horse  easy  to  manage 
out  of  doors.  The  result  is  a  horse  that  constantly  uses  his 
haunches  laterally  as  a  defense  and  is  consequently  difficult 
to  hold  straight  at  any  gait. 

Therefore,  mobility  of  the  haunches  should  be  reduced  to 
strict  necessity,  which  is  obedience  to  the  leg;  engagement  of 
the  haunches  sought  constantly  in  increasing  measure,  w^hile 
lightness  of  the  forehand  and  mobility  of  the  shoulders  should 
be  the  object  of  most  particular  concern,  because  it  is  the 
quality  that  renders  the  horse  supple  and  mobile  in  the  gallop, 
easy  to  guide,  and  clever  on  varied  gi'ound  and  over  obstacles. 

For  this  the  best  exercises  are  abouts,  broken  lines,  and 
serpentines,  causing  the  forehand  to  swing  around  the 
haunches  as  a  movable  pivot ;  the  circle  and  figure  of  eight 
with  haunches  inside;  half  turns  with  the  radii  gradually 
reduced  until  the  about  on  the  haunches  is  reached. 

Broken  lines,  increasing  and  decreasing  the  pace,  and  chang- 
ing the  gaits,  constantly  practiced,  bring  most  valuable  results 
in  the  training  of  the  trooper's  horse. 

After  collected  work  for  a  few  minutes  the  horse  should  be 
extended,  allowed  to  relax,  and  then  brought  to  the  walk  and 
petted,  to  reward  him  for  his  obedience. 

958.  To  obtain  suppleness  of  the  jaw  and  the  poll:  If  the 
gymnastic  exercises  have  been  so  conducted  as  to  bring  about 
engagement  of  the  hindquarters  and  lightness  in  the  fore- 
hand, the  jaw  and  the  poll  will  probably  have  become  supple 
as  a  natural  consequence;  and  the  acquirement  of  balance — 
that  is,  a  proper  distribution  of  the  weight  on  the  forehand 
and  the  haunches — will  have  brought  in  its  train  a  correct 
position  of  the  head  and  neck. 

If,  however,  notwithstanding  a  relative  suppleness  in  the 
rest  of  the  body,  the  horse  has  maintained  an  abnormal  stiff- 
ness of  the  jaw  and  rigidity  at  the  poll,  resort  must  be  had  to 
resistances  of  the  fingers  combined  with  energetic  action  of 
the  legs,  or  to  holding  three  reins  in  one.  hand  and  vibrating 
the  fourth,  or  to  division  of  supports  by  holding  the  snaffle 


364  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

reins  in  one  hand  and  the  curb  in  the  other  and  alternating 
the  feel  of  the  bit  and  the  snaffle. 

A  close  inspection  should  be  made  to  determine:  Whether 
the  contractions  are  due  to  ill-fitting  bits  and  curb  chains ; 
diseases  or  injury  in  the  mouth  or  defective  teeth ;  to  an 
injury  or  defect  in  the  loin  or  hocks  which  the  horse  seeks 
to  protect;  or,  as  is  often  the  case,  to  the  heavy  or  inex- 
perienced hand  of  the  rider.  To  remove  the  cause  is  to  apply 
the  remedy.* 

959.  Conditioning:  If  the  horse  has  arrived  at  this  stage  of 
his  training  without  injury,  with  appetite  and  digestion  un- 
impaired, and  with  good  wind  and  muscle,  the  rider  will  only 
need  to  increase  progressively  the  requirements  as  to  gaits, 
time,  and  distance,  with  suitable  periods  of  relaxation  or 
complete  rest,   until  the  horse  is  eventually   able   to   gallop 

3  miles  in  11  minutes  without  undue  fatigue,  and  to  execute 
easily,   with   full  field  equipment,   a  march   of  25  miles   in 

4  hours. 

960.  Jumping:  If  the  instruction  in  passing  obstacles  out  of 
doors  has  been  well  conducted,  the  horses  will  at  the  end  of 
this  period  jump  boldly,  but  without  rushing,  obstacles  3  feet 
in  height  or  8  feet  in  width  of  any  kind  or  character  ordi- 
narily encountered  in  cross-country  riding.  This  is  a  standard 
easily  reached  by  all  troop  horses.  A  greater  effort  upon  the 
part  of  all  the  horses  ought  not  to  be  demanded  except  upon 
occasions  of  necessity, 

961.  Backing:  Ordinarily,  if  the  preceding  work  has  been 
well  carried  out,  the  horse  will  be  supple,  strong,  and  light 
and  will  offer  but  little  resistance  to  backing.  The  rider  will 
use  the  right  leg  or  left  to  break  up  contractions  by  mobilizing 
the  haunches,  or  oppose  alternately  each  of  the  shoulders  to 
the  corresponding  haunch.  If  the  horse  still  refuses,  he  should 
be  driven  forward  with  the  legs  and  gathered  and  the  attempt 
renewed. 

The  horse  should  back  straight,  quietly,  with  regular  strides, 
and  be  ready  to  move  forward  promptly  at  the  call  of  the  legs. 

After  backing  a  few  steps  the  young  horse  should  be  moved 
forward  before  halting  and  then  petted.  Do  not  back  the  horse 
as  a  regular  exercise. 

In  obstinate  cases  do  a  little  work  dismounted.  Stand  facing 
the  horse's  head,  snaffle  rein  in  each  hand.    Start  to  lead  the 


TRAINING  REMOTJNTS— FOURTH  PERIOD.  365 

horse  forward  and,  just  as  he  moves,  press  him  to  the  rear 
with  the  bit.  Relax  slightly  and  press  him  again  as  each 
forefoot  is  to  be  moved.  If  the  horse  fails  to  move  a  foot, 
stepping  on  it  will  cause  him  to  do  so. 

962.  Changes  of  direction:  The  young  horse  should  now 
make  the  changes  of  direction  with  gradually  increasing  rapid- 
ity and  exactness  until  the  wide  turns,  short  turns,  and  turns 
in  place  are  executed  in  a  manner  simulating  actual  condi- 
tions of  combat.  ^ 

963.  Suppleness  and  obedience:  Suppleness  of  the  rider  is  a 
necessity  for  a  good  seat  and  light  hands.  Light  hands  are  a 
necessity  for  relaxed  muscles  of  the  jaw,  poll,  and  neck  of  the 
horse.  These  are  necessary  for  lightness  and  willing  obedi- 
ence. 

Quiet  halts  can  be  reduced  gradually  to  half  halts  and 
finally  to  forward  and  backward  movements,  reciprocally  fol- 
lowing each  other  for  a  few  steps  only  in  each  direction.  This 
will  develop  great  lightness  and  balance.  The  forward  and 
backward  or  half  halt  and  forward  movements  should  merge 
into  each  other  so  smoothly  that  there  is  no  perceptible  abrupt- 
ness. Suppleness,  free  play  of  the  shoulders,  and  engagement 
of  the  haunches  can  be  developed  by  work  on  circles,  serpen- 
tines, and  figures  of  eight. 

Steadiness  will  be  developed  by  long,  well-cadenced  trots. 

Quietness  will  come  with  even  gaits  and  long,  swinging  gal- 
lops. 

964.  The  gallop  departs:  (See  par.  238.)  If  the  preceding 
exercises  and  gjnnnastics  have  brought  about  obedience  to  the 
aids  and  at  the  same  time  rendered  the  horse  strong,  supple, 
and  well  balanced,  the  gallop  departs  with  the  lead  desired 
may  now  be  obtained,  endeavoring,  as  always,  to  keep  the 
horse  practically  straight  and  avoiding  exaggerated  displace- 
ment of  the  haunches  or  bending  of  the  neck,  both  of  which 
later  become  defenses  and  eventually  veritable  vices. 

The  gallop  departs  mark  the  limit  of  training  necessary  for 
the  troop  horse.  It  establishes  a  standard  which,  if  pressed  to 
perfection  up  to  this  point,  renders  the  trooper  able  to  man- 
age his  horse  in  all  the  situations  in  which  he  may  momen- 
tarily find  himself;  at  drill,  maneuvers,  on  the  march,  and 
in  combat.  It  is  a  standard,  moreover,  which  all  troop  horses 
may  easily  attain  if  the  instruction  is  carried  along  intelli- 
gently and  methodically. 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

POESTTS  OF  THE  HORSE. 


Head. 

16,  Back  sinew. 

30,  The  root  of  the  dock  or 

17,  Fetlock     or     pastern 

tail. 

1,  Muzzle. 

joint. 

2,  Nostril. 

18,  Coronet. 

Hind  quarter. 

3,  Forehead. 

19,  Hoof  or  foot. 

4,  Jaw. 

20,  Heel. 

31,  The  hip  joint,  round, 

5,  Poll. 

or  whirlbone. 

Body  or  middle  piece. 

32,  The  stifle  joint. 

Neck. 

33,  33,  Lower     thigh     or 

21,  Withers. 

gaskin. 

6,6,  Crest. 

22,  Back. 

34,  The  quarters. 

7,  Throttle  or  windpipe. 

23,  23,  Ribs   (forming  to- 

35, The  hock. 

gether  the  barrel 

36,  The  point  of  the  hock. 

Fore  quarter. 

or  chest). 

37,  The  curb  place. 

24,  24,  The  circumference 

38,  The  cannon  bone. 

8,8,  Shoulder  blade. 

of  the  chest   at 

39,  The  back  sinew. 

9,  Point  of  shoulder. 

this  point,  called 

40,  Pastern     or     fetlock 

10,  Bosom  or  breast. 

the  girth. 

joint. 

11,11,  True  arm. 

25,  The  loins. 

41,  Coronet. 

12,  Elbow. 

26,  The  croup. 

42,  Hoof  or  foot. 

13,  Forearm  (arm). 

27,  The  hip. 

43,  Heel. 

14,  Knee. 

28,  The  flank. 

44,  Spavin  place. 

15,  Cannon  bone. 

29,  Sheath. 

CARE  OF  HORSES. 

965.  GENERAL  PROVISIONS:  A  most  important  duty  of  the 
Cavalry  officer  is  keeping  liis  horses  in  such  training  and 
health  as  will  enable  them  to  do  their  work  to  the  best 
advantage.  The  proper  performance  of  this  duty  requires 
careful  instruction  of  the  men  in  the  treatment,  stabling, 
management,  watering,  feeding,  grooming^  and  exercising  of 
the  horses,  and  such  continuous  supervision  and  inspection 
by  officers  as  will  insure  that  instructions  are  understood 
and  are  being  carried  out. 

Cavalry  officers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  the  natural  history  and  physiology  of  the 
horse,  and  with  the  effects  of  different  methods  of  treatment, 
changes  of  diet,  etc.,  upon  his  system  and  powers  of  en- 
durance. 

They  should  know  the  symptoms  and  methods  of  treatment 
of  disease  common  to  horses,  the  measures  required  in  emer- 
gencies, the  effects  of  the  medicines  supplied  to  the  troop. 
They  should  also  be  practically  familiar  with  the  principles 
of  horseshoeing. 

Sore  backs  are  as  a  rule  the  result  of  carelessness  or  neg- 
lect; the  immediate  cause  may  be  faulty  adjustment  of  the 
saddle  or  equipment  or  bad  riding. 

At  each  halt  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  •  should 
inspect  the  adjustment  of  saddles  and  equipment  of  their  men 
and  should  at  no  time  tolerate  lounging  in  the  saddle.  The 
men  at  each  halt  should  be  required  to  inspect  and,  if  neces- 
sary, clean  out  their  horses'  feet. 

Horses  when  received  in  the  regiment  are  assigned  to 
troops  according  to  color,  under  direction  of  the  commanding 
officer.  They  are  branded  on  the  hoof  of  one  fore  foot  with 
the  letter  of  the  troop  and  the  number  of  the  regiment  on 
the  same  line,  as  D  7. 

Captains  make  permanent  assignments  of  horses;  after  a 
horse  is  so  assigned  his  rider  will  not  exchange  him  nor  allow 
him  to  be  used  by  any  other  person  without  permission. 

367 


368  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

966.  RULES  FOR  THE  CARE  OF  HORSES:  All  troopers  must 
be  taught  and  must  thoroughly  understand  the  following  rules 
for  the  care  of  horses : 

Horses  require  gentle  treatment.  Docile  but  bold  horses 
are  apt  to  retaliate  upon  those  who  abuse  them,  while  per- 
sistent kindness  often  reclaims  vicious  animals. 

Before  entering  a  horse's  stall  and  when  coming  up  behind 
him,  speak  to  him  gently,  then  approach  quietly. 

Never  kick  a  horse,  strike  him  about  the  head,  or  otherwise 
abuse  him. 

Never  punish  a  horse  except  at  the  time  he  commits  an 
oft'ense,  and  then  dhly  in  a  proper  manner — never  in  anger. 

Give  the  horse  an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving  the 
picket  line  or  stable  and  before  putting  the  bit  in  his  mouth. 
In  cold  weather  warm  the  bit  before  putting  it  in  the  horse's 
mouth. 

Never  take  a  rapid  gait  until  the  horse  has  been  warmed 
by  gentle  exercise. 

When  a  horse  is  brought  to  the  stable  or  picket  line  in  a 
heated  condition,  never  allow  him  to  stand  uncovered ;  put  a 
blanket  on  him  and  rub  his  legs  or  walk  him  until  he  is  cool. 
If  he  is  wet,  put  him  under  shelter,  not  in  a  draft,  and  rub 
him  with  a  wisp  until  dry. 

Never  feed  grain  or  fresh  grass  to  a  horse  when  heated. 
Hay  will  not  hurt  a  horse  however  heated  he  may  be. 

Never  water  a  horse  when  heated  unless  the  exercise  or 
march  is  to  be  immediately  resumed.  Sponging  out  the  mouth 
and  nostrils  is  refreshing  to  the  heated  horse  and  will  not 
hurt  him. 

Never  throw  water  on  any  part  of  a  horse  when  heated. 

Never  allow  a  horse's  back  to  be  cooled  suddenly.  To  cool 
the  back  gradually,  remove  the  pack  and  equipment  from  the 
saddle,  loosen  the  girth,  remove  the  blanket  and  replace  it 
with  the  dry  side,  next  the  horse,  replace  the  saddle,  girthing 
it  loosely. 

Never  put  the  horse  up  for  night  until  he  is  thoroughly 
clean,  especially  around  his  legs,  pasterns,  and  feet. 

Individual  men  returning  from  mounted  duty  or  pass  will 
report  their  return  to  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge 
of  stables,  who  will  inspect  each  horse  and  see  that  he  is 
properly  cared  for. 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  369 

967.  STABLES  AND  STABLE  MANAGEMENT:   Foul  air  and 

dampness  are  the  causes  of  many  diseases  of  tlie  liorse,  lience 
the  importance  and  economy  of  spacious,  clean,  dry,  and  well- 
ventilated  stables. 

The  picket  line  should  be  established  in  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  the  stable.  The  floor  of  the  picket  line  should  be 
raised  and  trenches  to  carry  off  the  rain  should  be  provided  so 
that  the  ground  upon  which  the  horses  stand  may  be  kept  dry. 

Paddocks,  with  shade  and  water,  should  be  pro\wded  near 
the  stables ;  if  there  is  no  shade,  shelter  from  the  sun  should 
be  extemporized.  The  picket  line  and  paddock  should  be 
sprinkled  to  keep  down  the  dust ;  crude  oil  may  be  used  to 
advantage.  Bedding  racks  should  be  provided  near  each 
stable. 

The  horses  are  assigned  stalls  and  places  on  the  picket 
line  by  platoons.  The  name  and  hoof  number  of  each  horse 
with  the  name  of  the  rider  is  placed  over  the  stall. 

The  stable  sergeant  takes  immediate  charge  of  the  stables, 
picket  line,  and  paddock,  forage,  and  stable  property  in 
general. 

The  stable  sergeant  is  responsible  that  the  stables  and  their 
surroundings  are  kept  at  all  times  thoroughly  policed  ajid 
free  from  smells ;  he  is  usually  assisted  by  one  or  more  stable 
orderlies. 

Sufficient  men  are  detailed  as  stable  police  to  perform  the 
general  police  and,  except  at  night,  to  collect  promptly  all 
manure  either  in  the  stables,  on  the  picket  line,  or  in  the 
paddocks.  The  stable  police  also  assist  in  the  feeding,  water- 
ing, and  bedding  of  the  horses. 

Manure  and  foul  litter  must  not  be  allowed  to  accumulate 
in  or  near  the  stable,  but  must  be  carried  to  the  manure  heap 
daily. 

In  the  morning  stalls  are  cleaned  and  the  stables  policed 
under  direction  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

The  bedding  is  taken  up,  carefully  shaken  out,  and  sorted. 
All  parts  of  the  bedding  which  can  be  used  again  are  taken 
to  the  bedding  racks  and  spread  thereon  for  a  thorough 
drying;  fjarts  which  can  not  be  used  again  are  sent  to  the 
manure  heap.  Special  attention  is  necessary  in  this  matter, 
as  the  allowance  of  straw  is  insufficient  under  most  favorable 

38218  °— 18 24 


370  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

conditions.  In  tlie  evening  the  dried  bedding,  mixed  with 
such  fresli  straw  or  bedding  as  may  be  necessary,  is  laid 
down.  The  bed  must  be  soft  and  even,  with  the  thickest  part 
toward  the  manger. 

If  practicable,  all  woodwork  within  reach  of  the  horses 
should  be  protected  with  sheet  metal  or  painted  with  a  thin 
coat  of  gas  tar ;  other  woodwork  and  brick  should  be  painted  a 
light  shade  and  then  kept  clean  and  free  from  dust. 

Feed  boxes  must  be  kept  clean ;  they  should  be  washed  with 
diluted  vinegar  from  time  to  time,  always  after  feeding  bran 
mash  or  other  soft  food. 

During  the  day,  except  in  very  cold  or  stormy  weather,  the 
horses,  when  not  being  used  or  fed,  should  stand  at  the  picket 
line  or  in  the  paddocks.  In  hot  climates,  however,  if  there  is 
not  sufficient  shade  on  the  picket  line  or  in  the  paddocks,  it  is 
better  to  keep  the  horses  in  the  stables  during  the  heat  of  the 
day. 

Smoking  in  the  stables  is  prohibited. 

One  or  more  covered  lights  should  be  provided  in  the  stables 
at  night. 

968.  STABLE  DUTY:  Captains  are  responsible  for  the  proper 
performance  of  stable  duty.  In  addition  to  the  grooming,  they 
will  require  such  other  duty  as  may  be  necessary  to  keep  the 
stables,  horses,  and  equipment  in  proper  condition. 

Mounted  work  must  be  followed  immediately  by  "  stables  " ; 
the  horses  are  then  thoroughly  gi-oomed,  the  saddlery  cleaned 
and  put  away  in  perfect  order. 

All  troop  officers  will  be  present  at  this  time,  the  platoon 
leaders  superintending  the  work  of  their  platoons. 

The  horses  should  also  be  brushed  off  before  going  out  to 
drill  or  exercise  in  the  morning. 

969.  GROOMING:  Grooming  is  essential  to  the  general  health 
and  condition  of  the  domesticated  horse.  Horses  improperly 
groomed,  with  ragged  manes,  unkempt  pasterns,  and  feet  im- 
properly looked  after  are  an  indication  of  an  inefficient  organi- 
zation. Clean  horses,  properly  equipped  and  smartly  turned 
out,  add  to  the  esprit  of  an  organization  and  give  a  fair  indi- 
cation of  its  discipline  and  efficiency. 

The  grooming  is  done  by  platoon,  under  the  supervision  of 
the  platoon  commander.  The  i^latoon  file  closer  and  the  other 
noncommissioned  officers  of  the  platoon  assist  in  such  super- 


GROOMING.  371 

vision  after  grooming  their  own  mounts.  Wtien  a  trooper  has 
finished  liis  work  and  it  lias  been  inspected  lie  may  be  allowed 
to  attend  to  other  duties  or  be  dismissed. 

According  to  circumstances,  the  platoon  or  the  troop  may 
be  marched  to  or  from  the  stables  or  the  men  may  be  allowed 
to  go  and  return  individually. 

On  returning  from  drill  or  exercise,  and  usually  in  the  field, 
the  horses  are  unbridled  and  girths  loosened.  Any  necessary 
precautions  are  then  taken  with  horses  that  appear  to  be 
too  warm  to  be  watered  at  once.  The  other  horses  are  watered 
and  fed  hay  when  the  latter  is  available.  Grain  must  not  be 
fed  or  placed  in  the  boxes  until  it  is  certain  that  the  horses 
are  thoroughly  cool.  The  men  are  then  given  an  opportunity 
to  relieve  themselves,  put  on  their  stable  clothes,  care  for 
their  equipments,  ana  prepare  for  the  work  of  grooming,  thus 
beginning  their  stable  work  comfortably  and  without  unneces- 
sary hurry. 

The  captain  or  the  officer  in  charge  supervises  generally 
the  grooming  and  care  of  saddlery  of  the  platoons,  holding 
the  platoon  commander  responsible  and  calling  his  attention 
to  any  deficiencies  or  neglects. 

The  horses  of  the  officers  and  of  the  first  sergeant  are 
groomed  by  designated  troopers.  All  other  noncommissioned 
officers  and  men  groom  their  own  mounts.  The  first  sergeant 
assigns  men  for  grooming  any  extra  horses  and  those  whose 
riders  are  absent. 

The  currycomb  should  never  be  used  on  the  legs  from  the 
knees  and  hocks  downward,  nor  about  the  head,  and  when 
cccasionally  required  to  loosen  dried  mud  or  matted  hair  on 
the  fleshy  parts  of  the  body  it  must  be  applied  gently. 

To  groom  the  horse  proceed  as  follows : 

Take  the  currycomb  in  the  right  hand,  fingers  over  back 
of  comb,  and  the  brush  in  the  left  hand ;  first  use  currycomb 
on  near  side  of  horse,  beginning  at  neclv,  then  chest,  shoulders, 
near  foreleg  down  to  knee,  then  back,  flank,  belly,  loins,  and 
rump,  then  near  hind  leg  down  to  hock. 

Change  currycomb  to  left  hand,  brush  in  right,  and  proceed 
in  a  similar  manner  on  the  off  side  of  horse. 

Strike  currycomb  against  heel  frequently^  to  free  it  from  dirt. 

Take  brush  in  left  hand,  currycomb  in  right,  and  brush 
entire  near  side  of  horse  in  same  order  as  when  currvcomb 


372  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

was  used  except  that  in  brushing  legs  brush  down  to  the  hoof. 
Take  brush  in  right  hand,  currycomb  in  left,  and  proceed  in  a 
similar  manner  on  the  off  side.  After  every  few  strokes  clean 
the  brush  from  dust  M'ith  the  currycomb. 

In  using  the  brush  the  man  should  stand  well  away  from 
the  horse,  should  keep  his  arm  stiff,  and  should  throw  the 
weight  of  the  body  against  the  brush. 

Having  done  with  the  brush,  rub  or  dust  off  the  horse  with 
the  grooming  cloth,  wipe  about  the  face,  eyes,  and  nostrils, 
arrange  the  mane  and  tail,  and  clean  the  dock.  Finally  go 
over  the  legs  once  more  and  clean  out  the  hoofs.  In  cleaning 
the  mane  and  tail  begin  brushing  at  the  end  of  the  hair  and 
gradually  work  up  to  the  roots,  separating  the  locks  with  the 
fingers  so  as  to  get  out  all  scurf  and  dirt.  Tails  require 
frequent  washing  with  warm  water  and  sof  p.  The  skin  under 
the  flank  and  between  the  hind  quarters  must  be  soft,  clean, 
and  free  from  dust. 

The  wisp  is  used  when  the  horse  comes  in  wet  and  also  for 
stimulating  the  coat.  It  is  made  by  twisting  or  plaiting  straw 
into  a  rope.  The  ends  are  then  bent  together,  cut  off  square, 
and  rubbed  on  a  board  until  they  form  a  soft,  even  straw 
brush. 

The  wisp  should  be  worked  forward  and  backward  well  into 
the  coat,  so  that  full  advantage  may  be  obtained  from  the  fric- 
tion. After  finishing  with  the  wisp  the  coat  should  be  laid 
flat. 

Hand  rubbing  is  beneficial.  AVhen  a  horse  has  had  very 
hard,  exhausting  work,  his  legs  should  be  hand  rubbed  and 
afterwards  bandaged,  taking  care  that  the  bandages  are  not 
tight.  An  exhausted  horse  should  also  be  given  stimulants 
and  warm  gruel. 

The  value  of  grooming  Is  dependent  upon  the  force  with 
which  the  brush  is  used  and  the  thoroughness  of  the  other 
work. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  should,  by  continuous 
personal  supervision,  see  that  the  grooming  is  properly  done. 

No  horse  should  be  considered  in  order  until  he  Is  thor- 
oughly clean;  his  mane  and  tail  brushed  out  and  laid  flat; 
his  eyes  and  nostrils  wiped  or  washed,  and  hoofs  put  in  order. 


WATERING.  373 

The  pasterns  and  that  part  of  the  mane  where  the  crown- 
piece  of  the  bridle  rests  should  be  neatly  trimmed,  and  the 
mane  and  tail  plucked. 

At  each  "  stables  "  the  horses'  feet  and  shoeing  are  carefully- 
examined.  Horses  requiring  shoeing  are  reported  to  the  stable 
sergeant. 

Each  horse  should  be  inspected  by  an  officer  before  the  man 
who  has  groomed  him  is  permitted  to  leave. 

The  sheath  will  be  kept  clean  by  washing  when  necessary 
with  warm  water  and  castile  soap. 

Every  trooper  should  be  a  good  horse  manager  and  groom. 

970.  WATERING:  Except  when  they  are  heated,  it  is  desir- 
able that  horses  should  have  free  access  to  water  at  all  times. 
As  this  is  usually  impossible,  it  becomes  necessary  to  water  at 
stated  times. 

Horses  should,  if  possible,  be  watered  before  feeding,  or  not 
until  two  hours  after  feeding.  As  horses  rarely  drink  in  the 
early  morning,  the  first  watering  must  follow  the  feeding, 
but  after  the  proper  interval,  if  practicable. 

A  horse  requires  from  5  to  15  gallons  of  water  daily,  de- 
pending upon  the  temperature  and  upon  the  work  he  is  doing. 
Except  in  very  cold  weather,  horses  should  be  watered  at  least 
three  times  daily — in  the  morning,  before  the  noon  feeding, 
and  before  the  evening  feeding.  In  warm  weather,  water 
drawn  from  a  cold  well  or  spring  should  be  allowed  to  stand 
long  enough  for  the  chill  to  pass  off  before  the  horse  is  allowed 
to  drink. 

On  the  march  the  oftener  the  animals  are  watered  the 
better,  especially  as  it  is  not  usually  known  when  another 
watering  place  will  be  reached.  By  watering  from  buckets 
many  watering  places  not  otherwise  available  may  be  utilized. 

If  a  mounted  command  has  to  march  a  long  distance  with- 
out water,  so  that  it  will  be  necessary  to  encamp  en  route, 
the  animals  are  fed,  but  denied  water  until  just  before  start- 
ing, when  they  are  permitted  to  drink  freely.  The  command 
marches  in  the  afternoon  and  does  not  encamp  until  it  has 
accomplished  at  least  half  of  the  distance ;  it  moves  early  the 
next  morning  to  reach  water. 

Horses  must  be  watered  quietly  and  without  confusion ;  the 
manner  in  which  this  duty  is  performed  is  a  good  test  of  the 
discipline  of  a  mounted  command. 


374  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  horses  are  led  or  ridden  at  a  walk  to  and  from  the 
watering  place.  No  crowding  will  be  allowed,  nor  will  any 
horse  be  hurried  or  have  his  head  jerked  up  from  the  water. 

The  horses  are  watered  under  the  immediate  direction  of 
the  senior  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  present  at  stables 
or  at  other  time  of  watering ;  an  officer  should  always  be 
present  when  the  horses  of  other  commands  are  liable  to  be 
met  at  the  watering  places. 

971.  FEEDING:  Horses  should  be  fed  three  times  a  day — at 
reveille,  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  and  at  niglit.  This  rule 
must  be  rigidly  enforced  on  the  march,  the  noon  grain  feed 
being  carried  on  the  horse.  A  desirable  distribution  of  the 
grain  ration  is,  for  a  horse  which  is  getting  12  pounds  per 
day,  3  pounds  in  the  morning,  3  or  4  pounds  at  noon,  and  the 
rest  at  night.  Hay,  as  a  rule,  is  not  fed  in  the  morning; 
about  one-third  of  the  ration  should  be  fed  at  noon,  except  on 
the  march,  and  the  remainder  at  night. 

The  use  of  bran  once  or  twice  a  week  is  important  for 
stabled  horses.  In  spring  or  early  summer  they  should  be 
grazed.    A  lump  of  rock  salt  should  be  kept  in  each  manger. 

Before  feeding  hay  it  should  be  thoroughly  shaken  out  with 
a  fork  so  as  to  get  rid  of  dust  and  seed  ;  it  is  also  advisable 
to  moisten  the  hay  before  giving  it  to  the  horse.  The  grain, 
if  possible,  should  be  run  over  wire  screens  or  allowed  to  fall 
through  the  air  so  as  to  remove  dust. 

In  the  morning  the  horses  are  usually  fed  at  or  before 
reveille.  The  noon  feed  of  hay  is  usually  placed  in  the 
mangers  while  the  organization  is  at  drill,  but  the  grain  is  not 
fed  until  the  horses  are  thoroughly  cool.  The  evening  feed  is 
placed  in  the  mangers  after  the  stable  has  been  thoroughly 
policed  for  the  night. 

It  is  advisable  that  the  horses  eat  at  least  a  portion  of  the 
allowance  of  hay  before  the  grain  is  fed  to  them. 

All  horses  do  not  require  the  same  amount  of  forage;  the 
amcnuit  given  each  horse  must  be  based,  therefore,  upon  his 
individual  requirements,  which  should  be  closely  watched  by 
the  stable  sergeant.  When  a  horse  leaves  some  of  his  grain, 
his  ration  should  be  reduced  that  amount.  The  amount  to  be 
fed  each  horse  each  meal  should  be  chalked  up  on  a  small 
blackboard  placed  so  as  to  be  easily  seen  by  the  men  dis- 
tributing the  grain.     A  convenient  arrangement  is  a  board 


FEEDING  AND  EXERCISING.  375 

about  12  inches  high  by  4  inches  wide  divided  by  two  hori- 
zontal lines  into  three  4-inch  squares.  In  the  uppermost 
square  should  be  marked  in  pounds  the  morning  feed  of  grain, 
in  the  center  square  the  noon  feed,  and  in  the  bottom  square 
the  night  feed.  When  a  horse  is  sick  or  injured  his  grain 
ration  should  be  reduced  to  between  6  and  9  pounds  per  day, 
depending  upon  the  horse. 

When  forage  can  not  be  obtained  grazing  should  be  required 
at  every  spare  moment,  especially  early  in  the  morr^ing  when 
dew  is  on  the  grass. 

All  forage  received  by  an  organization  should  be  checked  for 
weight  and  to  see  that  it  is  up  to  contract  specifications.  All 
officers  should  be  familiar  with  the  characteristics  of  good 
forage  and  the  manner  in  which  it  is  commercially  graded  for 
contract  specifications.  To  obtain  this  knowledge  officers 
sliould  be  encouraged  to  visit  large  commercial  stables. 

The  daily  allowance  of  oats,  barley,  or  corn  is  12  pounds  for 
each  horse ;  that  of  hay,  14  pounds.  The  allowance  of  straw 
for  bedding  is  100  pounds  per  month  for  each  animal. 

Good  oats  weigh  about  40  pounds  to  the  bushel;  barley, 
about  48  pounds ;  corn,  about  56  pounds.  Pressed  hay  weighs 
about  11  pounds  per  cubic  foot. 

The  standard  bushel  in  the  United  States  contains  2,150.4 
cubic  inches.  A  cubic  yard  contains  21.69  bushels.  A  box 
16  by  16.8  by  8  inches  holds  1  bushel ;  a  box  12  by  11.2  by  8 
inches  holds  half  a  bushel ;  a  box  8  by  8  by  8.4  inches  holds 
1  peck ;  a  box  8  by  8  by  4.2  inches  holds  one-half  peek,  or  4 
quarts. 

972.  EXERCISING:  To  keep  a  horse  in  good  condition  he 
should  have  two  hours'  exercise  daily.  This  exercise  should 
be  under  the  saddle,  or,  if  that  is  impracticable,  it  should  be 
given  by  leading  beside  another  horse. 

In  leading  care  must  be  taken  to  lead  as  much  on  the  left 
as  on  the  more  convenient  right  side.  Tliis  can  be  auto- 
matically reg-ulated  by  having  the  leading  done  on  the  right 
side  on  the  odd-numbered  days  of  the  month  and  on  the  left 
on  the  even-numbered  days. 

In  special  cases  exercise  may  be  given  on  the  longe,  but  this 
must  be  done  under  proper  supervision  or  4njury  may  result. 

Turning  a  horse  loose  in  a  paddock  does  not  give  him  proper 
exercise,  and  if  the  paddock  is  a  large  one  where  he  can  get 


376  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

up  speed,  it  results  in  giving  him  a  taste  for  freedom  which 
inspires  a  high-spirited  animal  to  try  to  get  rid  of  his  rider 
when  he  feels  like  having  a  run. 

The  horse  should  associate  the  control  of  a  rider  with  the 
pleasure  of  all  exercise  so  that  he  may  accept  it  naturally  as  a 
fixed  habit. 

It  is  objectionable  for  one  man  to  lead  more  than  one  extra 
horse  for  exercise,  as  the  gaits  must  then  be  more  restricted 
and  on  ordinary  roads  the  footing  for  some  of  the  horses  will 
b(:  poor. 

If  a  large  space  is  available  for  paddock  purposes,  it  should 
be  divided  into  several  inclosures,  giving  space  for  a  part  of 
the  animals  to  move  about  quietly  in  each,  but  not  enough  to 
encourage  them  to  gallop. 

973.  SICK  HORSES:  Horses  on  sick  report  are  under  the  im- 
mediate charge  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

When  a  veterinarian  is  present  he  should  prescribe  the 
treatment  to  be  given  to  sick  horses,  and  he  should  inspect  all 
sick  horses  at  least  once  daily. 

The  veterinarian  should  also  visit  each  organization  at  least 
once  a  day  at  one  of  the  stated  "  stables  "  ;  he  should  be  freely 
consulted  as  to  minor  ailments  and  as  to  the  means  of  keeping 
the  horses  in  fit  condition. 

In  the  absence  of  a  veterinarian  the  sick  horses  are  treated 
by  the  stable  sergeant  under  the  direction  of  the  captain. 

Serious  disease  is  best  avoided  by  immediate  and  constant 
attention  to  minor  ailments,  galls,  etc. 

If  a  horse  sustains  an  injury,  neglects  his  food,  refuses 
water,  or  gives  any  evidence  of  sickness,  his  condition  should 
be  reported  at  once  to  the  stable  sergeant.  It  is  the  duty  of 
any  man  observing  such  condition  to  make  the  necessary 
report. 

974.  SHOEING:  Horses  will  be  shod  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples outlined  in  the  authorized  manual. 

All  officers  must  understand  the  prniciples  of  proper  shoe- 
ing and  be  able  to  supervise  the  work  of  the  horseshoers. 

A  trooper  should  know  how  to  put  on  a  shoe  in  an  emer- 
gency. The  following  extracts  from  the  manual  (The  Army 
Horseshoer,  1912)  are  therefore  here  incorporated. 

"  The  foot  should  be  prepared  so  that  it  will  approximate  as 
nearly  as  possible  to  a  state  of  nature,  and  only  such  trimming 


SHOEING. 


377 


is  allowed  as  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  purpose  of  fitting 
and  securing  the  shoe. 

"  The  knife  must  never  be  used  on  the  bars  or  on  the  frog. 
The  bars  strengthen  the  hoof  and  assist  in  its  expansion.  Cut- 
ting, therefore,  weakens  them  and  prevents  them  from  per- 
forming their  function. 

"  The  practice  of  using  the  knife  to  trim  the  bars  or  to  cut  a 
notch  at  the  junction  of  the  frog  and  bar  at  the  heel   (called 
opening  the  heels  in  civilian  shops)  always  tends  to  produce', 
contracted  feet. 

''  Never  use  a  knife  on  the  hoof  of  a  horse  that  has  been  run- 
ning barefoot  nor  on  flat  feet. 

'■  Ragged  parts  of  the  frog  may  be  cut  away  by  careful  use 
of  the  nippers. 

"  With  a  flat  foot  it  is  frequently  necessary  to  remove  a  part 
of  the  outer  edge  of  the  wall  in  order  that  the  nails  may  be 
driven  in  the  white 

foot 
tlie  prepdredfor, 
tr?e  2/}oe 


5o/e  -  - 


Toe 

/     the  fro^ 

-  -Frog 
_  3uftress 
Bu/d  offra^ 


line  where  they  be- 
long. This  is 
only  case  where  it 
is  p  e  r  m  i  1 1  e  d  to 
rasp  the  outside 
wall.  The  outer 
coating  of  the  wall 
and  the  layers  of 
dead  horn  on  the 
sole  and  frog  serve 
to  retain  the  mois- 
ture in  the  hoof. 

"  The  hot  shoe  must  never  be  applied  to  the  horse's  foot 
under  any  circumstances. 

"  When  shoes  are  left  on  the  feet  for  too  great  a  length  of 
time  corns  and  other  ailments  result.  Ordinarily  a  shoe  should 
be  removed  once  a  month.  The  lightest  shoe  that  will  last  for 
this  time  is  the  best  shoe.  It  should  carefully  follow  the  form 
of  the  foot,  or  if  the  foot  is  broken  the  shoe  follows  the 
original  shape  of  the  foot.  Its  length  is  regulated  by  the  bulb 
of  the  frog. 

'•  The  ground  surface  of  the  shoe  should  be  level  and  smooth, 
except  for  use  in  snow,  when  the  shoe  with  the  ground  surface 
concaved  prevents  balling.     That  portion  of  the  upper  surface 


378  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

which  presses  against  the  bearing  surface  of  the  foot  must  be 
level,  smooth,  and  accurately  shaped  to  support  it,  and  when 
the  upper  shoe  surface  is  wider  than  the  bearing  surface  the 
inner  edge  roust  be  concaved  to  avoid  excessive  sole  pressure. 
This  is  one  of  the  most  important  requisities  of  correct  horse- 
shoeing. Concussion  of  the  sole  against  the  inner  edge  of  the 
upper  shoe  surface  invariably  produces  soreness. 

"  One  side  of  the  shank  of  a  horse  nail  is  flat.  The  other 
side  is  concave  and  also  has  a  bevel  near  the  point.  This  bevel 
as  it  enters  into  the  horn  forces  the  point  of  the  nail  in  the 
direction  of  the  other  side  (flat  side).  Therefore  in  driving 
a  nail  always  hold  it  with  the  flat  side  toward  outside  edge 
of  the  shoe. 

"  Nails  should  come  out  at  a  height  of  not  more  than  1  inch 
from  the  bottom  of  the  hoof. 

"  In  garrison,  at  the  discretion  of  the  colonel  or  of  the  com- 
manding officer,  the  horses  may  be  left  unshod,  but  shoes  will 
be  kept  fitted  for  each  horse  ready  to  be  put  on. 

"Inspection  of  shoeing:  The  following  examination  should 
be  made  while  the  horse  is  standing  on  a  level  floor  with  the 
foot  on  the  ground: 

*'(«)  Are  the  axes  correct  when  viewed  from  the  front  and 
from  the  side? 

*'(&)  Does  the  shoe  follow  the  outer  line  of  the  wall  to  the 
last  nail  hole  and  from  there  extend  outward,  allowing  about 
one-eighth  of  an  inch  at  the  heel  for  expansion?  Has  the  rule 
against  rasping  the  hoof  to  fit  the  shoe  been  violated? 

"(c)  Is  tile  toe  clip  in  the  center  properly  made  and  properly 
seated  ? 

"((Z)  Are  the  nails  driven  at  the  proper  height  and  proper 
distance  apart?    Have  any  old  stubs  been  left  in  the  wall? 

"(e)  Are  the  clinches  well  turned  and  set  in,  of  the  proper 
size,  and  have  they  been  smoothed  off  but  not  rasped  suffi- 
ciently to  weaken  them? 

"  The  foot  should  then  be  raised  and  the  examination  con- 
tinued. 

"(/)  Is  the  shoe  of  the  proper  size  and  weight ;  the  last  nail 
hole  back  of  the  bend  of  the  quartei-? 

"(i/)  Has  enougli  horn  been  removed;  has  too  much  been 
removed  ;  is  the  foot  level  ? 


CARE  OF  SADDLERY.  379 

''(h)  Does  the  shoe  rest  evenly  on  the  wall,  covering  the 
buttress  and  showing  no  air  space  at  any  point? 

"(i)  Is  the  shoe  properly  concaved  so  as  to  avoid  pressure 
on  the  sole? 

"(i)  Has  the  knife  been  used  on  the  bars,  sole,  or  frog? 

"(/r)  Are  the  nails  well  seated  and  of  the  proper  size? 

"(?)  Are  the  heels  of  the  shoe  correct  in  width  ancl  thick- 
ness, and  are  they  properly  rounded  without  sharp  edges  or 
points?     Is  their  length  even  with  the  bulb  of  the  frog?  " 

In  garrison  a  shoeing  list  should  be  kept  on  the  stable 
bulletin  board  showing  the  name  and  hoof  number  of  each 
horse,  the  date  of  last  shoeing,  and  the  class  of  shoes  then 
used.  The  corresponding  entries  should  be  made  daily,  and 
at  each  "  stables  "  the  horses  appearing  on  the  list  as  shod 
since  the  last  prior  "  stables  "  should  be  carefully  inspected 
by  the  responsible  officer.  In  general,  horses  should  be  shod 
every  four  or  five  weeks. 

CARE  OF  SADDLERY. 

975.  The  saddlery  and  equipment  must  always  be  cleaned 
after  use.  This  duty,  like  the  care  of  the  horse,  is  to  be  re- 
garded as  part  of  the  mounted  duty  itself ;  thus  a  drill  is  not 
over  until  horse,  saddlery,  arms,  and  equipments  have  been 
put  again  in  condition.  According  to  need,  the  leather  is 
simply  wiped  off  with  a  damp  sponge  or  fully  tak-en  apart 
and  well  soaped  and  cleaned.  In  no  case  must  it  be  soaked 
in  water. 

If  the  soap  used  does  not  contain  a  sufficient  amount  of  free 
oil  the  leather  must  be  oiled  to  keep  it  pliable.  A  mixture  of 
one-half  neat's-foot  oil  and  one-half  mutton  tallow,  well  rubbed 
in,  keeps  leather  in  good  condition.  Special  care  is  taken  to 
keep  the  underside  of  the  skirts  of  the  saddle  and  the  parts 
which  do  not  come  in  contact  with  the  clothing  well  oiled. 
The  seat  and  outside  of  the  skirts  will  rarely  require  oil. 

Metal  parts  are  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust;  they  may 
require  oiling  if  not  regularly  used. 

The  saddle  blanket  must  be  kept  clean  and  soft  and  free 
from  wrinkles.  After  use  it  must  be  dried  and  then  well 
shaken    (unfolded).     It  must  never  be  folded  wet  and  left 


380  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

thus  with  the  saddle.     Provision  will  be  made  in  the  saddle 
room  or  stables  for  hanging  it  up  to  dry. 

When  necessary  the  blanket  should  be  thoroughly  cleansed 
by  repeated  immersions  in  tepid  soapsuds  and  hung  over  a 
pole  or  line  to  dry  without  wringing  or  pressing  it. 

FITTING  THE  SADDLE. 

976.  The  following  principles  are  of  general  application  in 
saddle  fitting: 

(a)  The  withers  must  not  be  pinched  or  pressed  upon. 

( & )  The  central  line  of  the  back  must  have  no  pressure  put 
upon  it. 

(c)  The  shoulder  blades  must  have  full  and  unhampered 
movement. 

(d)  The  loins  must  not  carry  weight. 

(e)  The  weight  must  be  put  upon  the  ribs  through  the 
medium  of  the  muscles  covering  them. 

(/)  The  weight  must  be  evenly  distributed  over  a  surface 
which  extends  from  the  play  of  the  shoulders  to  the  last  true 
rib. 

The  above  principles  must  be  applied  whatever  the  type  of 
saddle  that  may  be  used. 


>L\RCHES.  CA>IPS- 


I  i-'t  €  *il40  i>ars.  S^  &Tu,  &71- ) 

977.  The  ":    -^---^-'   -  -  -'-  -    -'  -  rnarcfi  i5  oce  of  tb^ 
teszs  oc  tl--  -  jm-ent  not  only  of  tie  ^ym- 

maii'der,  t_;  .i  „,^  ;^_.  __-:r  oScers  as  welL  Cemam 
gen^TuI  prin^ples  and  some  exact  rules  are  MM  damn  to  fit 
the  case  of  a  normal  marcli.  bnt  taeticaJ  cooadteratMwae  as 
well  as  the  conditic-n  of  rc»iid5  and  weather,  ttie  necessatry 
forage.  water  and  shelter,  sanitation,  sn-i  orher  mcuaistamegs 
render  a  march  of  any  ctDnsiderable  'r  '  '  -T-wniefl  tro^^s 
one  reqnirin?  the  ni«Tst  nnreinirtln;r   ;  ^  id  dietsffis  «i 

the  part  of  the  c-^jnnnander  and  his  s^i :  -s.    A  soeeess- 

fol  Cavalry  marvh  whether  in  piea.ce  or  -  '  .  -  ne  that  places 
the  men  and  horses  at  the  time  and  pi- .  r  Zt-I^  M  the  best 
possible  ct-'C'iition  for  the  servlr-e  re^iiiireti  Faanre  «f 
mounted  tro^r-ps  to  snoressfnUy  carry  out  a  mission  t?  doe  as 
a  mle  to  exhaustion  or  injaries  to  the  horses  radier  tliaii 
to  the  men- 

The  training:  of  officers  of  all  srades  must  Ije  sorti  iSb^t 
solicirade  for  the  condition  of  h-r-rses  on  the  nareh.i?  sectjod 
nature :  constant  effort  should  he  made,  bcme^w  sgtete  tke 
wc»rfc.  to  stimulate  the  pri<ie  of  the  tn>?per  in  taiTiBg^  and  in 
ke^in?  his  m'>nnt  in  fit  ondition:  if  sn«:-h  strasnlTB?  Is  m- 
effective  then  the  remedy,  if  the  trooper  is  at  fault,  lies  in 
other  directions.  Fnd«r  favorable  ci?nditions  field  ser«^<-^ 
offers  the  hest  opp«?rtimity  for  c-OD»iiriooiin?  the  horses  an»l 
har'ieniniT  the  men. 

97S.  Prepararicni :  Kes7-  for  the  timely  orfJeriii?  of 
ne-^essary  rrepcirarions  :  -j  to  lea  vine:  a  perroanent 
eamp  or  starion  rests  wi:l  _:::-.i'^-  A'"~7rc*able  nee*±? 
of  the  command  for  th«?  -  t  i  ■  rred  shooM  be 
anti/ipare'i.  instm'Jtions  v  -_  .  -  -  ,-^— ^^  — .-  =-^ 
complete  form.,  and  no    '  - 

march  order  proper  &»r  :  -^     :     :  :  _i 


382  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

conforms  to  the  requirements  of  Field  Service  Regulations. 
An  order  or  memorandum  of  service  calls  will  be  issued  and 
distributed  in  ample  time  the  night  before  beginning  a  march 
stating  tlie  hour  for  reveille,  stables,  and  breakfast  and  such 
other  duties  as  can  reason.ibly  be  anticipated. 

Except  on  account  of  imperative  military  reasons,  Cavalry 
should  not  leave  camp  for  an  hour  or  more  after  daylight.  If 
grazing  is  depended  upon,  this  is  especially  necessary,  since 
horses  as  a  rule  graze  more  freely  in  the  early  morning  when 
rested.  Ample  time  should  be  allowed  after  reveille  for  groom- 
ing and  feeding  and  thereafter  for  the  men  to  breakfast.  All 
stable  duties  should  be  done  quietly  and  without  hurry  or 
confusion  under  the  immediate  supervision  of  troop  and 
squadron  commanders.  In  each  troop  a  man  is  detailed  to 
walk  th6  picket  line  while  grain  is  being  fed,  to  look  out  for 
the  horses  generally  and  to  take  off  the  feed  or  the  nose  bag 
of  a  horse  as  soon  as  he  has  finished  feeding. 

The  signals  for  striking  tents  (the  general),  for  policing, 
saddling,  and  beginning  the  march  should  be  ordered  per- 
sonally by  the  commanding  officer  and  only  when  the  duties 
pertaining  to  the  previous  signal  are  completed. 

979.  The  march,  its  length  and  rate:  The  average  daily 
march  of  a  Cavalry  column  of  the  size  of  a  squadron,  or 
larger,  is  about  25  miles  when  horses  are  in  condition ;  when 
starting  on  long-distance  marches  the  rate  per  day  for  the  first 
few  days  should  be  less  than  20  miles  and  gradually  increased. 
These  rules  may  necessarily  be  modified,  even  when  horses  are 
not  in  fit  condition,  by  reason  of  emergencies,  character  of 
roads  or  weather,  proximity  of  water,  grazing,  etc.,  but,  with 
these  exceptions  the  question  of  the  length  of  the  daily  march 
is  one  of  good  judgment  and  experience  on  the  part  of  the 
commander.  The  gait  and  pace  of  the  daily  march  are  in- 
fluenced by  both  the  time  the  horse  is  to  carry  the  load  and 
the  distance  to  be  covered.  The  quicker  a  march  can  be  com- 
pleted without  forcing,  the  less  the  fatigue  to  both  horse  and 
man.  Where  the  footing  is  good,  the  road  level,  and  other 
considerations  do  not  hamper,  the  column,  after  the  first  or  a 
subsequent  halt,  may  advance  first  by  leading  dismounted, 
then  mount  and  walk,  then  trot,  a  short  gallop  (exceptional), 
then  tlie  trot,  followed  by  the  walk  to  the  next  halt.  No  gait 
Is  to  be  maintained  continuously  long  enough  to  v;eary  either 


LENGTH  AND  RATE  OF  MARCHES.  383 

horse  or  man,  neither  must  it  be  changed  too  frequently  in 
long  colunms ;  but  whatever  pace  or  gait  is  taken  it  should 
conform  to  the  standards  (par.  279).  The  officer  setting  the 
pace  should  occasionally  drop  back  to  observe  its  effect  on  the 
column,  and  veterinarians,  if  present,  should  be  habitually- 
utilized  for  this  purpose. 

The  walk,  if  the  footing  is  good,  should  be  at  the  rate  of  4 
miles  per  hour,  exclusive  of  halts ;  the  trot  at  8  miles  per  hour, 
so  as  to  facilitate  posting;  the  gallop,  a  very  exceptional  gait 
even  for  small  commands,  should  be  not  faster  than  the 
maneuvering  gallop  (par.  236),  and  its  practicability  will  de- 
pend upon  the  training  and  condition  of  the  horses,  since  on 
long  marches,  unless  accustomed  to  this  gait  w^ith  packed 
saddles,  the  horses  will  soon  break  down. 

Very  rarely,  however,  will  the  conditions  allow  the  regular 
arrangement  of  gaits  indicated  above.  Kolling  country,  with 
ascents  and  descents,  stretches  of  hard  or  stony  road  or  of 
mud,  dust,  or  sand,  crossings  of  streams,  etc.,  will  ordinarily 
impose  corresponding  changes  of  gait  or  pace  on  each  of  the 
small  elements  of  the  column  as  it  reaches  them.  To  provide 
for  this  the  troops  in  route  column,  when  so  directed,  take 
greater  distances  than  prescribed  in  order  to  allow  for  closing 
up  at  checks. 

The  commander  must  give  this  matter  unremitting  atten- 
tion, since  normal  route-order  distances  in  column  frequently 
entail  discomfort  to  the  men  and  sometimes  injuries  to  the 
horses  which  might  have  been  avoided. 

Unless  under  exceptional  circumstances,  the  commander  of 
a  marching  column  will  authorize  each  troop  commander  to  so 
regulate  the  gait  and  pace  of  his  troop  as  to  conform  to  that 
next  in  front,  the  gait  and  pace  of  the  leading  troop  being 
regulated  by  the  commander  himself.  This  results  in  each 
troop  changing  to  the  trot,  walk,  leading  dismounted,  etc.,  at 
the  same  place  at  which  the  leading  troop  did,  and  although 
regulation  distances  are  frequently  exceeded  the  tendency  on 
all  stretches  of  good  road  is  to  close  on  the  leading  troop  of 
the  column.  With  care  this  method  of  marching  should  result 
in  enabling  each  troop  in  the  column  to  move  with  almost  the 
same  regularity  and  freedom  from  checks  as  though  it  were 
in  the  lead. 


384  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  fast  rate  of  march  that  can  be  expected  of  small  detach- 
ments and  of  single  riders  can  not  be  demanded  of  a  long 
Cavalry  column,  and  as  the  command  increases  in  size  the  rate 
of  march  will  decrease.  The  regulation  gaits  being,  at  the 
walk,  4  miles,  the  trot,  8  miles,  Cavalry  should  be  able  to 
make,  including  halts,  5  miles  per  hour  or  better.  This  rate 
can  be  maintained  for  daily  marches  of  25  miles  under  ordi- 
nary conditions  for  a  week  at  a  time,  after  which  a  day  of 
rest  should  be  allowed  before  continuing  the  march. 

980.  Formations:  The  habitual  formation  for  marches  is 
route  order  in  column  of  fours  (par.  754).  When  the  roads 
are  unsuitable  or  the  command  is  small,  column  of  twos  or 
troopers  is  permissible.  To  economize  road  space  in  large 
commands  double  column  or  parallel  columns  should  be  used 
if  practicable.  Squadrons  in  regiment  and  troops  in  squad- 
rons alternate  in  leading,  the  rule  being  that  the  one  in  front 
one  day  automatically  follows  in  rear  the  next  day. 

981.  Halts:  The  first  half  hour  of  a  march  should  be  made 
at  a  walk  and  the  first  halt  of  10  or  15  minutes  toward  the 
end  of  the  first  hour  after  starting;  it  should,  if  possible, 
be  preceded  by  a  short  trot  in  order  to  make  apparent  any 
faulty  adjustment  of  equipment.  This  halt  gives  an  oppor- 
tunity for  the  horses  to  stale  and  for  the  troopers  to  attend 
to  the  calls  of  nature,  to  tighten  girths,  and  to  adjust  saddles, 
equipment,  and  clothing. 

Other  halts  of  5  to  10  minutes  should  be  made  at  hourly 
intervals,  and,  if  the  march  is  to  be  prolonged  into  the  after- 
noon a  longer  halt  should  be  made  at  noon,  when  girths  are 
loosened,  bridles  removed,  horses  fed,  and  the  men  eat  their 
lunches. 

An  invariable  rule  on  the  march  and  in  camp  is  to  have  all 
troopers  dismount  promptly  on  halting;  in  other  words,  never 
to  permit  a  man  to  sit  a  moment  in  the  saddle  while  his  horse 
is  standing  still,  and  under  no  circumstances  to  lounge  in  the 
saddle. 

982.  Watering:  On  the  march  horses  should  be  watered 
whenever  opportunity  occurs,  conforming  as  far  as  practicable 
to  the  rule  of  watering  before  feeding  and  of  removing  the 
bit  when  by  so  doing  the  horse  can  drink  more  freely,  as 
when  the  stream  or  watering  place  is  shallow.  Public  water- 
insr  troughs  should  ordinarily  be  avoided  on  account  of  danger 


PEEDING  AND  CAMPING  ON  MARCHES.  385 

from  infection.  The  use  of  buckets  or  of  portable,  collapsible 
canvas  watering  troughs  (articles  of  issue)  will  often  make 
watering  places  otherwise  insufficient  thoroughly  satisfactory. 
On  the  march  and  in  camp  watering  is  always  done  under 
supervision  of  an  officer. 

983.  Feeding:  In  time  of  peace  when  a  regular  supply  of 
grain  and  long  forage  can  be  counted  on,  effort  should  be  made 
to  follow,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  routine  to  which  horses 
have  been  accustomed  in  garrison.  In  time  of  war  regularity 
of  supply  of  forage,  and  especially  of  the  long  forage,  can  not 
be  expected,  and  officers  must  neglect  no  opportunity  of  antici- 
pating the  needs  of  their  animals  w^hen  passing  grain  fields, 
pastures,  or  stacks  of  hay  and  other  fodder.  A  supply  for  the 
night  can  often  be  gathered  and  carried  along  on  the  w^agons 
or  it  may  be  tied  up  compactly  with  the  lariat  and  carried 
on  the  horse. 

The  trooper  with  habitual  solicitude  for  his  mount  will,  if 
permitted,  be  prompt  to  remove  the  bits  to  let  his  horse  graze 
(facing  the  wind  in  hot  weather)  at  every  delay  or  check 
and  he  will  miss  no  chance  to  pick  up  an  extra  feed  of  grain. 

984.  Camps  (see  also  Care  of  Troops,  F.  S.  R.)  :  The  ground 
being  suitable,  a  troop  encamps  in  line,  with  first  sergeant's 
cook  and  officers'  tents  on  one  flank,  the  men's  sink  on  the 
other,  and  with  picket  line  15  yards  in  front  of  and  parallel 
to  the  men's  tents,  the  open  ends  of  the  tents  toward  the 
picket  line.  A  squadron  or  regiment  encamps  in  column  of 
troops  as  above,  but  with  picket  lines  on  the  flank  of  the 
column  on  the  side  opposite  the  cook  nnd  officers'  tents,  each 
in  prolongation  of  its  own  company  street.  Intervals  and 
distances  should  approximate  those  of  the  normal  semiper- 
manent camps  (F.  S.  R.),  if  space  is  available.  For  a  shelter 
tent  camp  in  column  of  troops  w^ith  picket  lines  stretched 
betw^een  the  rows  of  tents  the  guidons  which  mark  first  ser- 
geants' tents  should  not  be  less  than  15  yards  apart.  The 
squadron  or  regiment  may  encamp  in  line  similarly  to  the 
troop  if  the  ground  is  more  favorable  for  such  form  of  camp, 
but  ordinarily  they  encamp  in  column  of  troops  with  picket 
lines  between  the  rows  of  tents. 

985.  On  nearing  the  end  of  a  day's -mar/jh,  the  regimental 
commander  will  send  his  adjutant  and  supply  officer  ahead  to 

38218  "  —  IS 25 


386  CAVALKY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

locate  the  camp  and  provide  for  the  arrival  of  the  column: 
On  approaching  the  camping  place,  squadron  adjutants  and 
the  guidon  of  each  troop  will  be  summoned  by  the  colonel's 
bugler  sounding  adjutant's  call  followed  by  guidons  (or  other- 
wise according  to  circumstances).  At  these  calls  each  squad- 
ron adjutant  followed  by  the  guidons  of  his  squadron  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  front  and  will  join  the  regimental  ad- 
jutant, who  indicates  to  each  the  ground  which  his  squadron 
is  to  occupy.  If  the  available  ground  is  sufficient  to  encamp 
the  entire  regiment  as  prescribed  in  the  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions, the  regimental  adjutant  causes  the  guidons  to  be 
aligned  and  planted  at  the  prescribed  intervals,  thereby  mark- 
ing the  first  sergeant's  tent  on  the  flank  of  each  troop,  other- 
wise each  squadron  adjutant  has  the  guidons  of  his  squadron 
so  placed  on  the  ground  allotted  to  his  squadron  as  to  conform, 
as  nearly  as  conditions  will  permit,  to  the  normal  camp,  hav- 
ing in  view  the  comfort  of  horses  and  men  and  convenience  to 
supplies.  The  object  in  marking  off  the  camp  as  prescribed, 
by  establishing  the  guidons  before  the  arrival  of  the  column, 
is  to  relieve  the  horse  of  his  rider  and  pack  as  soon  as  possble. 
To  further  minimize  delay,  commanding  ofliicers,  unless  under 
exceptional  circumstances,  will,  immediately  on  reaching  the 
ground,  direct  majors  to  dismiss  their  squadrons  and  have 
their  troop  commanders  proceed  directly  to  their  guidons, 
dismount  at  once,  and  pitch  camp. 

The  foregoing  principles  will  also,  in  so  far  as  applicable, 
be  enforced  by  commanders  of  all  units  smaller  than  the 
regiment. 

The  regimental  supply  officer  has  the  drivers  of  the  baggage 
section  of  the  regimental  train  go  direct  to  their  proper  troops 
and  unhitch.  Ordinarily,  for  convenience  in  a  one-night 
camp  or  bivouac  the  wagons  of  the  baggage  section  are  left 
between  the  cook  tents  and  the  troop  oflScers'  tents,  the  supply 
section  being  parked  outside  by  itself.  After  arrival  at  the 
camping  place  a  guard  is  at  once  placed  over  the  source  of 
supply  of  drinking  water.  . 

Before  pitching  tents  the  rifles  are  stacked,  sabers,  rolls, 
saddle  bags  and  lariats  removed  from  the  saddles,  girths 
loosened  (the  saddles  being  left  on  until  backs  are  cooled) 
and  the  horses,  either  linked  by  section,  in  circle  (par.  428) 


FORCED  AND  NIGHT  MARCHES.  387 

or  coupled  head  and  tail   (par.  427)   and  a  man  detailed  to 
watch  them  until  tents  are  pitched. 

After  pitching  tents,  stacks  are  broken,  rifles  placed  in  the 
tents,  horses  unsaddled,  unbridled,  and  tied  on  the  line  or 
herded,  saddles  placed  in  a  row  in  front  of  the  tents  and 
saddle  blankets  spread  on  them  to  dry,  fuel  secured,  sinks  dug, 
and  other  necessary  preparations  made  for  the  night.  The  use 
of  saddle  blankets  as  bedding  by  the  men  will  be  permitted 
only  under  very  exceptional  conditions,  and  special  care  must 
be  exercised  to  keep  them  free  from  dirt  and  burs.  During 
evening  stables,  troop  commanders  accompanied,  if  practicable, 
by  a  veterinarian,  inspect  the  backs  and  feet  of  their  horses, 
and  in  the  morning  they  permit  no  trooper,  who  is  not  spe- 
cially authorized,  to  saddle  his  horse  before  the  call  boots  and 
saddles,  or  to  mount  before  the  command  for  so  doing. 

986.  Herding:  In  a  hostile  country  camps  should  be  se- 
lected if  possible  where  grazing  is  good  and  beyond  rifle  range 
of  cover  for  an  enemy ;  orders  are  issued  as  to  places  of 
assembly  and  in  each  troop  men  are  detailed  beforehand  to 
go  among  the  horses  and  quiet  them  in  case  of  a  night  alarm. 
In  the  event  of  a  stampede,  men  should  mount  the  fastest 
animals  within  reach,  ride  ahead  of  the  herd,  and  lead  it  back 
to  camp.  Sometimes  the  sounding  of  stablQ  and  water  call 
will  prevent  or  check  a  stampede. 

In  case  it  is  necessary  to  graze  the  horses  in  an  enemy's 
country  they  are  sent  out  to  herd  under  charge  of  an  officer 
as  soon  as  possible  after  making  camp,  they  being  taken 
during  daylight  as  far  away  as  is  safe  so  as  to  keep  the  grass 
nearer  camp  for  the  night. 

987.  Forced  and  night  marches:  To  conduct  a  rapid  march 
of  a  command  of  any  magnitude  successfully,  horses  must  be 
in  condition  (pars.  950,  959)  and  men  must  ha^e  been  trained 
(par.  175)  ;  if  either  is  lacking,  the  daily  marches  at  first  must 
be  short. 

A  night  march,  being  slow  and  fatiguing  to  horses  and  men, 
is  seldom  undertaken  unless  as  a  forced  march  to  seize  a 
position  or  to  surprise  an  enemy  by  attacking  him  at  dawn. 
In  a  forced  march  frequently  the  gait,  if  the  footing  is  favor- 
able, and  always  the  number  of  hours  in  the  saddle  are  in- 
creased. Under  favorable  conditions  a  rate  of  50  miles  in  24 
hours  for  three  or  four  days  can  be  maintained.    During  such 


388  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

a  march,  in  addition  to  the  usual  hourly  halts,  a  halt  of  2 
hours  is  made  toward  the  end  of  the  first  half  of  each  day's 
march,  during  which  bits  are  removed,  horses  unsaddled, 
watered,  fed,  and  their  legs  hand  rubbed ;  the  rate  should  be 
about  5  miles  an  hour  exclusive  of  halts. 

Under  very  favorable  conditions  a  single  march  of  100  miles 
can  be  made  in  from  24  to  30  hours.  During  a  march  of  this 
character,  in  addition  to  the  usual  hourly  halts,  halts  of  2 
hours  are  made  toward  the  end  of  the  first  and  second  thirds 
of  the  march,  during  which  bits  are  removed,  the  horses  un- 
saddled, watered,  fed,  and  their  legs  hand  rubbed ;  the  rate  of 
march  should  be  from  5  to  6  miles  an  hour  exclusive  of  halts. 


SIGNALS. 

ARM,     WHISTLE,    BUGLE,     SEMAPHORE. 

988.  What  constitutes  an  order  is  set  forth  in  DEFINI- 
TIONS. Instructions,  oral  or  written,  wliicli  are  not  expressed 
in  prescribed  forms  are  usually  termed  orders.  Oral  orders 
for  particular  movements  or  formations,  expressed  in  a  pre- 
cise and  definitely  prescribed  wording,  are  termed  commands. 
Any  indications,  intelligibly  conveyed  by  the  commander's  sig- 
nals, movements,  etc.,  have  the  full  force  of  the  corresponding 
commands. 

989.  In  field  service,  the  commander's  indication  for  the 
execution  of  any  movement  will,  in  general,  be  conveyed  by 
the  method,  or  combination  of  methods,  best  suited  to  the  par- 
ticular occasion  and  object  in  view.  In  instruction,  all  pre- 
scribed methods  must  be  employed  with  sufficient  frequency  to 
insure  familiarity  with  their  use  by  those  concerned.  No  one 
method  of  conveying  the  will  of  the  commander  is  to  be  used 
to  the  exclusion  of  any  other  prescribed  method. 

In  addition  to  the  signals  that  are  prescribed  as  such,  the 
direction  and  gait  taken  by  the  leader  and  his  e.xample  in  gen- 
eral serve  to  convey  his  orders.  Similarly  the  base,  by  the  ex- 
ample of  its  march,  formation,  and  gait,  indicates  by  visible 
signs  the  will  of  the  commander. 

Officers  and  men  fix  their  attention  at  the  first  word  of 
command,  the  first  note  of  the  bugle  or  whistle,  or  the  first 
motion  of  the  signal. 

'  Leaders  of  subordinate  units  wait  until  the  commander 
co;mpletes  his  preparatory  signal  before  giving  their  commands 
or  signal  to  execute  the  movement. 

Before  or  during  an  engagement  special  signals  may  be 
agreed  upon  to  facilitate  the  solution  of  such  special  difficul- 
ties as  the  particular  situation  is  likely  to  (Jevelop.  but  it  must 
be  remembered  that  simplicity  and  certainty  are  indispens- 
able qualities  of  a  signal. 

389 


390  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

AEM  SIGNALS. 

990.  To  avoid  noise  and  confusion,  signals  with  the  arm  or 
hand,  the  headdress,  or  the  saber,  when  drawn,  may  be  used 
except  when  darkness,  fog,  dust,  or  other  causes  render  such 
signals  invisible  or  inappropriate.  The  preparatory  signals 
with  the  saber  are  made  from  the  carry,  with  hand  or  head- 
dress from  the  position  of  the  hand  at  the  side.  The  return  to 
the  carry,  or  bringing  the  hand  by  a  quick,  sharp  movement 
to  the  side  from  the  preparatory  signal,  is  the  command  of 
execution.  Every  signal  should  be  made  with  vigor  and  pre- 
cision and  every  position  taken  by  the  hand  and  arm  during 
the  signal  be  distinct  and  clear  cut.  In  all  cases  when  the 
contrary  is  not  indicated  the  termination  of  the  preparatory 
signal  is  marked  by  extending  the  arm  vertically,  making  a 
very  brief  pause  in  that  position  before  signaling  the  command 
of  execution. 

Combination  signals  (those  made  up  of  two  or  more  ele- 
ments) should  be  avoided  unless  the  component  elements  are 
easily  recognized ;  such  signals  should  never  be  used  for  any 
movement  for  which  a  single  signal  is  prescribed  (e.  g.,  line 
of  platoon  columns).  When  combination  signals  are  used 
they  are  always  made  in  the  order  in  which  the  commands  are 
worded — e.  g.,  platoons  right  turn  would  be  signaled  as  pla- 
toons followed  by  change  of  direction;  column  of  platoons  by 
column  followed  by  platoons;  line  of  troop  columns  by  line 
followed  by  troops  followed  by  column. 

The  signals  appearing  below  are  preparatory  signals,  except 
when  otherwise  stated. 

Assemble:  Same  as  attention,  except  that  the  circles  are 
made  larger  and  with  the  forearm. 

Attention:  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent  and 
describe  slowly  small  circles  with  the  hand,  then  drop  the 
hand  to  the  side.  This  signal  may  precede  any  command 
(par.  991).     Not  a  preparatory  signal. 

By  the  right  (left)  flank:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally,  di- 
rectly to  the  right  (left). 

Change  of  direction:  Extend  the  arm  fully  in  the  direction 
of  the  marching  flank  and  then  make  a  slow  sweeping  move- 
ment toward  the  new  direction ;  move  the  horse  in  that  direc- 
tion.    This  signal  may  be  used  for  any  change  of  direction 


ARM  SIGNALS.  391 

whether  in  line  or  column  formation ;  for  example,  for  right 
(left)  turn,  right  (left)  half  turn;  column  right  (left),  col- 
umn half  right  (left)    (par.  386). 

Column:  Describe  circles  on  the  right  in  a  vertical  plane 
with  the  arm  fully  extended.  When  not  followed  by  a  modify- 
ing element  (as  platoons,  twos,  or  troopers,  etc.)  column  of 
fours  is  to  be  understood. 

Column  right  (left) ;  Column  half  right  (left) :  See  Change 
of  direction). 

Decrease  the  gait:  Raise  the  right  elbow  to  a  position  above 
and  to  the  right  of  the  right  shoulder;  extend  the  forearm 
upward  and  to  the  left,  right  hand  above  the  head.  Except 
when  the  leader's  example  indicates  otherwise,  a  decrease  of 
gait  of  one  degree  is  to  be  understood. 

Dismount:  Extend  the  arm  diagonally  upward  to  the  right, 
palm  downward^  and  wave  several  times  toward  the  ground. 
Not  a  preparatory  signal  unless  required  to  dismount  in 
unison,  in  which  case  the  signal  will  be  preceded  by  that  for 
attention. 

Disregard:  Place  the  hand  against  the  back  at  the  height  of 
the  waist,  back  of  the  hand  toward  the  body ;  not  a  prepara- 
tory signal. 

Double  column:  Extend  the  arm  fully  and  describe  a  circle 
in  a  vertical  plane  from  front  to  rear  and,  without  pausing, 
from  rear  to  front. 

Extend:  Sweep  the  arm,  fully  extended,  slowly  and  horizon- 
tally across  the  body,  swaying  and  turning  the  body  with  the 
sweep  of  the  arm. 

Fight  on  foot:  Strike  three  or  four  blows  with  the  clenched 
fist  in  the  direction  in  which  the  action  is  desired.  In  striking, 
the  point  of  the  elbow  should  be  higher  than  the  shoulder ;  not 
a  preparatory  signal. 

Foragers:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  front  and 
move  it  rapidly  from  left  to  right  and  from  right  to  left  in  a 
horizontal  plane. 

For\vard:  Extend  the  arm  vertically,  and,  keeping  it  ex- 
tended, lower  it  to  a  horizontal  position  pointing  in  the  direc- 
tion to  be  taken. 

Fours  left  about:    Same  as  to  the  rear.    - 

Fours  right  (left) :    Same  as  by  the  right  (left)  flank. 


392  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Halt:  Extend  the  arm  vertically.  A  leader  habitually  halts 
as  he  makes  the  signal  of  execution. 

Increase  the  gait:  Alternately  raise  and  lower  the  hand 
rapidly  between  the  position  as  in  halt  and  a  position  near  the 
shoulder.  Except  when  the  leader's  example  indicates  other- 
wise, an  increase  of  gait  of  one  degree  is  to  be  understood. 

Line:  Raise  the  arm  vertically,  and,  with  the  arm  fully  ex- 
tended, wave  well  down  to  the  right  and  left  several  times 
swaying  and  turning  the  body  with  the  sweep  of  the  arm. 

Line  of  platoon  columns:  Raise  the  arm  as  in  signaling 
platoons,  carry  the  elbow  several  times  from  right  to  left  across 
the  body. 

Mass:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  right  and  bring 
the  hand  repeatedly  to  the  point  of  the  shoulder. 

Mount:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  right,  palm  up- 
ward, and  wave  upward  several  times.  Not  a  preparatory 
signal  unless  required  to  mount  in  unison  in  which  case  the 
signal  will  be  preceded  by  attention. 

Oblique :  Extend  the  arm  fully  in  the  direction  of  the  oblique 
and  move  the  horse  in  that  direction. 

Platoons:  Raise  the  right  elbow  to  the  height  of  the  shoul- 
der, forearm  vertical,  hand  closed. 

Platoon  mass:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  right, 
bring  the  hand  to  the  shoulder,  touching  same  with  the  tips 
of  the  fingers,  and  retain  the  hand  in  this  position  for  a 
few  seconds. 

Rally:  Describe  horizontal  circles  rapidly  about  the  head, 
Mdth  the  arm  as  nearly  extended  as  possible.  Not  a  prepara- 
tory signal. 

Right  (left)  turn;  Right  (left)  half  turn:  See  Change  of 
direction. 

Skirmishers:  Raise  both  arms  laterally  until  horizontal. 

To  the  rear:   Turn  and  point  to  the  rear,  arm  horizontal. 

Troops:  Place  the  hand  against  the  back  of  the  neck,  back  of 
the  jiand  to  the  rear. 

Troopers:  Raise  the  arm  vertically,  extend  first  finger,  other 
fingers  closed. 

Twos:  Raise  the  arm  vertically,  extend  and  separate  first 
and  second  fingers,  other  fingers  closed. 

Twos  (Troopers)  left  about:  Given  when  in  column  of  twos 
or  troopers.    Same  as  to  the  rear. 


WHISTLE  AND  BUGLE  SIGNALS.  393 

WHISTLE    SIGNALS. 

991.  Attention  to  orders:  A  short  blast  of  the  whistle.  This 
signal  is  used  at  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  combat  when  neces- 
sary to  fix  the  attention  of  troops,  or  of  their  commanders 
or  leaders,  preparatory  to  giving  commands,  orders,  or  signals. 

When  the  firing  line  is  firing  each  section  chief  suspends 
firing  and  fixes  his  attention  at  a  short  blast  of  his  platoon 
leader's  whistle.  The  platoon  leader's  subsequent  commands 
or  signals  are  repeated  and  enforced  by  the  section  chief.  If 
a  section  chief's  attention  is  attracted  by  a  whistle  other 
than  that  of  his  platoon  leader,  or  if  there  are  no  orders  or 
commands  to  convey  to  his  section,  he  resumes  firing  at  once. 

Suspend  firing:  A  long  blast  of  the  whistle. 

All  other  whistle  signals  are  prohibited. 

Three  types  of  whistles  of  different  and  distinctive  tone 
are  furnished  as  follows : 

(a)  For  the  squadron  group,  consisting  of  the  major,  squad- 
ron adjutant,  and  squadron  sergeant  major. 

(&)  For  the  troop  commander  group,  consisting  of  the  cap- 
tain and  two  buglers. 

(c)  For  the  platoon  leader  group  consisting  of  lieutenants 
and  sergeants. 

BUGLE    SIGNALS. 

992.  The  authorized  bugle  signals  are  not  used  by  units 
smaller  than  a  regiment,  except  when  such  unit  is  independ- 
ent, or  detached  from  its  regiment. 

In  field  service  bugle  signals  must  not  be  employed  where 
likely  to  convey  information  of  value  to  the  enemy. 

In  dismounted  action  the  bugle  signals  charge  and  rally  and 
the  signals  used  to  assemble  units  (par.  996)  are  employed 
on  the  battle  field  only  when  intended  for  the  entire  firing 
line ;  hence  they  can  be  used  only  by  the  commander  of  a 
unit  (for  example,  a  regiment  or  brigade)  which  occupies 
a  distinct  section  of  the  battle  field. 

The  following  bugle  signals  are  used  in  exceptional  cases 
on  the  battle  field.  Their  principal  uses  are  in  field  exercises 
and  practice  firing. 


394  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Commence  firing:  Officers  charged  with  fire  direction  and 
control  open  fire  as  soon  as  practicable.  When  given  to  a 
firing  line,  the  signal  is  equivalent  to  fire  at  will. 

Cease  firing:  All  parts  of  the  line  execute  cease  firing  at 
once. 

ALARM    CALLS. 

993.  Fire  call:  The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall,  in  without 
arms  to  extinguish  fire. 

To  arms:  The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in  under  arms,  dis- 
mounted, on  their  troop  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as  possible. 

To  horse:  The  signal  for  the  men  to  go  under  arms  to  their 
horses,  to  saddle,  mount,  and  assemble  in  a  designated  forma- 
tion at  a  designated  place  as  quickly  as  possible;  in  extended 
order  formations  on  foot  this  signal  is  used  to  remount  the 
troops. 

SEEVICE    CALLS. 

994.  Adjutant's  call:  The  signal  for  the  troops  to  form 
squadron,  also  for  the  guard  details  to  form  on  the  camp  or 
garrison  parade  ground  for  guard  mounting;  it  follows  the 
assembly  by  such  interval  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  com- 
manding officer. 

Assembly:   The  signal  for  the  troops  or  details  to  fall  in.  "' 

Assembly,  adjutant's  call,  retreat,  to  the  standard,  the  flour- 
ishes, and  the  marches  are  sounded  by  all  the  buglers  united. 
The  other  service  calls,  as  a  rule,  are  sounded  by  the  bugler  of 
the  guard  or  orderly  trumpeter ;  he  may  also  sound  the  assem- 
bly when  the  trumpeters  are  not  united. 

Boots  and  saddles  is  the  warning  that  the  formation  is  to  be 
mounted.  Where  the  required  formation  has  also  a  warning 
call,  as  guard  mounting  or  drill,  such  call  precedes  boots  and 
saddles;  otherwise  first  call  precedes  it. 

Call  to  quarters  is  the  signal  for  the  men  to  repair  to  their 
qunrters. 

Church,  mess,  and  fatigue,  classed  as  service  calls,  may  also 
be  used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  for  roll  call  on  foot. 

First  call,  guard  mounting,  full  dress,  overcoats,  drill,  stable, 
water,  and  boots  and  saddles  precede  the  assembly  by  such  in- 
terval as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 


BUGLE  CALLS.  395 

Full  dress  or  overcoats  signal  immediately  follows  first  call, 
guard  mounting,  or  boots  and  saddles  when  full  dress  or  the 
overcoat  is  to  be  worn. 

Guard  mounting  is  the  first  call  for  guard  mounting. 

Reveille  precedes  the  assembly  for  roll  call ;  retreat  follows 
the  assembly,  the  interval  being  only  that  required  for  forma- 
tion and  roll  call,  except  when  there  is  parade. 

Taps  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights ;  it  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  call  to  quarters,  with  such  interval  as  the  command- 
ing officer  may  direct. 

Tattoo  is  sounded  betw^een  retreat  and  call  to  quarters;  15 
minutes  thereafter  lights  in  the  squad  rooms  are  extinguished. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striliing  tents  and  loading 
wagons  preparatory  to  marching. 

To  the  standard  is  sounded  when  the  standard  salutes. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille,  or,  if 
inarches  are  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

Buglers  assemble  at  first  call  and  at  guard  mounting. 

UKILL    AND    FIELD    CALLS. 

995.  The  drill  and  field  calls  include  both  the  preparatory 
commands  and  the  command  of  execution;  the  last  note  is  the 
command  of  execution. 

When  the  command  is  given  by  bugle  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
divisions give  the  proper  commands  orally  or  by  signal; 

The  memorizing  of  drill  signals  will  be  facilitated  by  observ- 
ing that  all  movements  to  the  right  are  on  the  ascending  chord  ; 
that  the  corresponding  movements  to  the  left  are  corresponding 
signals  on  the  descending  chord ;  that  changes  of  gait  are  all 
upon  the  same  note;  that  captain's  (or  troop  commander's)  call 
is  the  first  two  bars  of  officer's  call  with  the  attention  added ; 
and  that  form  rank  and  posts  are  the  same. 

In  sounding  the  calls  for  simultaneous  movements  the  call 
platoons,  troops,  or  squadrons  precedes  the  preliminary  call  for 
the  movement. 

Drill  calls  are  sounded  in  the  same  order  as  the  commands 
are  prescribed  in  the  text. 

Gangway  is  sounded  to  clear  the  way  or  to  warn  other 
troops  that  a  passage  is  desired. 


396 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


List  of  Bugle  Calls. 

996.  The  music  for  the  various  calls  has  corresponding  num- 
bers. 

ALAEM    CALLS. 

1.  Fire.  I    3.  To  horse. 

2.  To  arms.  I 

SEEVICE   CALLS. 


4.  Adjutant's  call. 

18. 

Officers'  call. 

5.  Assembly. 

19. 

Overcoats. 

6.  Boots  and  saddles. 

20. 

Recall. 

7.  Call  to  quarters. 

21. 

Retreat. 

8.  Captains'  call. 

22. 

Reveille. 

9.  Church. 

23. 

School. 

10.  Drill. 

24. 

Sick. 

11.  Fatigue. 

25. 

Stables. 

12.  First  call. 

26. 

Taps. 

13.  First  sergeant's  call. 

27. 

Tattoo. 

14.  Full  dress. 

28. 

The  general. 

15.  Guard  mounting. 

29. 

To  the  standard 

16.  Issue. 

30. 

Water. 

17.  Mess. 

DRILL   AND   FIELD   CALLS. 


31.  Attention. 

32.  Cease  firing. 

33.  Charge. 

34.  Column,    march.     Column 

once    repeated    signifies 
double  column. 

35.  Column  left,  march. 

36.  Column  right,  march. 

37.  Commence  firing. 

3S.  Foragers    or    skirmishers, 
march. 

39.  Form  rank  or  posts. 

40.  Forward,  march. 

41.  Fours  left,  also  by  the  left 

flank,  march. 

42.  Fours   right,    also   by   the 

right  flank,  march. 


43.  Gallop  march. 

44.  Gangway. 

45.  Guidons  out. 
45a.  Halt. 

46.  Left  oblique,  march. 

47.  Left  turn,  march. 

48.  Line,  march. 

49.  lAne  of  platoons,  march. 

50.  Platoons. 

51.  Prepare  to  dismount,  dis- 

mount. 

52.  Prepare  to  mount,  mount. 

53.  Rally. 

54-78.  Regimental  calls. 

79.  Right  oblique,  march. 

80.  Right  turn,  march. 

81.  Route  order. 


BUGLE   CALLS. 


397 


DBiLL  AND  FIELD  CALLS — Continued. 


82.  Squadrons. 

83.  Squadrons: 

(a)   First  squadron. 
( & )   Second  squadron, 
(c)  Third  squadron. 

84.  To  fight  on  foot. 


85.  To  the  rear,  or  fours  left 

about,  march. 

86.  Troops. 

87.  Trot,  march. 

88.  Walk,  march. 


MISCELLANEOUS  BUGLE   CALLS. 


89.  Flourishes  for  review. 
90o  Funeral  march. 
91.  General's  march. 


92.  President's  march. 
93-102.  Quicksteps. 


THE  TWO-ARM  SEMAPHORE  CODE,  WITH  HAND 
FLAGS. 

General  Provisions. 


'Attention,"  followed  by  call  letter 
as  necessary.     Both  stations  then 


O,' 


Interval ",  repeated  three 


O,"   "Interval,"   "A,"   "Interval 


997.  To  call  or  answer : 
of  station  called.  Repeat 
make  "  Interval." 

Repeat   last    message : 
times. 

Repeat  after    (word)  : 
(word). 

End  of  word :  "  Interval." 

End  of  sentence :  "  Interval,"  twice  repeated. 

End  of  message :  "  Interval,"  three  times  repeated. 

To  break  in :  "Attention." 

Acknowledgment :  "  R." 

Affirmative:  "P." 

Annulling :  "  N." 

Attention :  See  figure  in  semaphore  code. 

Error:  'A." 

Interrogatory :  "  O." 

Interval :  See  figure  in  semaphore  code. 

Negative :  "  K." 

"  Numerals  "  (see  figures)  :  Precedes  every  number  sent  and 
indicates  numerals  until  "  Interval  "  is  made,  after  which  let- 
ters recur  without  further  indication.  When  numerals  follow 
Ifttters,  no  intervening  "  Interval "  is  necessary. 


398  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

"  Negative,"  "Affirmative,"  or  "  Interrogatory,"  followed  by 
"  Interval,'  gives  corresponding  meaning  to  the  message  fol- 
lowing it. 

Receiver  acknowledges  the  call  "Attention "  by  signaling 
"  R."  Similarly,  he  acknowledges  "  Repeat  last  message." 
"Repeat  after  (word)."  The  "End  of  message"  is  so 
acknowledged  when  the  message  is  understood. 

While  waiting  for  "Acknowledgment "  or  in  case  of  delay, 
remain  at  "  Interval." 

Words  not  in  code  are  spelled  out. 


SPECIAL  SIGNALS. 

Letter  signals  having  special  meanings  for  use  in  communi- 
cating between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve  or  commander 
in  rear.  As  far  as  possible  their  transmission  should  be  con- 
cealed from  the  enemy's  view. 


Letters  of 
alphabet. 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firing  line. 


If  signaled  from  the  firing  line  to 
the  rear. 


AM.. 
CCC 

CF... 
DT... 

F 

FL... 
G.... 
HHH 
K.... 
LT... 
M.... 
O.... 

P.... 
R.... 
RN.. 
RT... 

sss.. 

SUF. 
T.... 


Ammunition  going  forward 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times) . 

Cease  firing 

Double  time,  rush  or  hurry 

Commence  firing 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

Move  forward , 

Halt 

Negative 

Left 

Bring  up  the  horses 

What  is  the  (RN,  etc.)?  Inter- 
rogatory. (Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 

What  is  the  (RN,  etc.)?  Inter- 
rogatory. (All  methods  but 
Ardois  and  semaphore.) 

Affirmative 

Acknowledgment 

Range 

RijTht 

Support  going  forward 

Suspend  firing 

Target 


Ammunition  required. 
Am  about  to  charge  if  no  instruc- 
tions to  contrary. 
Cease  firing. 
Double  time,  rush  or  hurry.  - 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

Preparing  to  move  forward. 

Halt. 

Negative. 

Left. 

Horses  going  forward. 

What  is  the  (RN,  etc.)?  Inter- 
rogatory.  (Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 

What  is  the  (RN,  etc.)?  Inter- 
rogatory. (All  methods  but 
Ardois  and  semaphore.) 

Affirmative. 

Acknowledgment. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 


TWO  ARM  SEMAPHORE  CODE. 


4" 


AfftrmortKt 


Mesotive 


or  Undersiooi 


Intcrvol 


Interrtgotory 


Mumerols 


Repeat 


r     J^     fi 


399 


400  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

HINTS  FOR  MEMORIZING  CODE. 

A  to  D ;  Left  arm  at  "  Interval,"  right  arm  progresses 
upward. 

E  to  G :  Right  arm  at  "  Interval,"  left  arm  progresses 
downward. 

A  to  G:  Complete  series,  one  arm  at  "Interval." 

K  to  N:  Right  arm  inclined  45°  downward,  left  arm  pro- 
gresses downward. 

P  to  S :  Right  arm  horizontal,  left  arm  progresses  downward. 

H  I  and  O :  Left  arm  crosses  body. 

W  X  and  Z:  Right  arm  crosses  body. 

Opposite  letters  A  and  G,  B  and  F,  C  and  E,  H  and  Z,  I  and 
X,  J  and  P,  K  and  V,  O  and  W,  M  and  S,  Q  and  Y : 
The  numerals  are  the  first  10  letters  in  order. 


Appendix  A, 


BUGLE  CALLS. 


ALARMS. 

1.   FIRE. 


QfrtcXr.    /-s 


feMfaJ3tefc^£jUlLagt 


i 


■*-?- 


D^ 


1 


E 


Bepeat  at  VDxtL 


^^ 


^ 


I 


2.   TO   ARMS. 


m^m. 


E 


^      Repeal  at  witt. 


3.  TO  HORSE. 


^^^^^^ 


3S218  '—18 26 


401 


i02 


Qu^ti 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIOITS. 

SERVICE  CALLS. 

4.   ADJUTANT'S   CALL. 


■f^^^^^ 


5.   ASSEMBLY. 


Moderate. 


Quick. 


6.   BOOTS  AND   SADDLES. 


7.   CALL   TO    QUARTERS. 


Slow. 


APPENDIX  A. 


403 


8.   CAPTAIN'S  CALL. 


9.  CHURCH. 


^S 


^ 


Ft^ 


^if^^^^^^ 


;i=;it 


s^ 


it=a: 


-^~ft- 


t=^ 


m 


10.  DRILL. 


QuttAr. 


Quick. 


11.   FATIGUE. 

8 


fe£ 


^ 


VP?=P»: 


-^%  §  ^    , 


^ 


^         mimJ — i*^ F — j- 


i 


H ' 1 


—  ^?^+-?=  =?=T= 


:t 


y--^ 


^ 


^5^-3 


404 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
13.   FIRST  CALL. 
Quick,  ^ 

m 


^-^-^-#-#- 


i^^^s 


inw^^j^ 


13.   FIRST  SERGEANT'S  CALL. 

QuicL  8  ^^  8  ^^ 


QuieX;, 


14.   FULL  DRESS. 


15.   GUARD  MOUNTING. 


Quick. 


-^^ 


i|^^^^ 


i 


Allegro. 


5L=r 


APPENDIX  A. 
16.   ISSUE. 


409 


Et 


:1=^ 


t 


!=«: 


/TS. 


i^j-"-^ 


mrrr=^ 


17.  MESS. 


Qui^ 


^ 


-# ^ 


?r=^qgz#r^zq: 


i — I- 


t3 


I 


t^t 


^Bz^f^^ 


18.   OFFICER'S   CALL. 


QuicJe. 


Lifc ^ fi — ! j j ^    !      i—        -    - 

r^ i —     ■"■■I     j-  --1"«^,     I      t      ' 


19.   OVERCOATS. 


#1Tt-^-lcJ  f=P3^ 


406  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

20.   RECALL. 


21.   RETREAT. 


Modifraie, 


pf^ir  icda^pj^^ 


S^Sfl^^flB^f^^ 


i 


^ 


^^ 


'M  J3U 


^^^ 


^s^i^^^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
RETREAT — Continued. 


407 


^^S^^ 


1^^ 


^^^g^^^l^^ 


Quich 


22.   REVEILLE. 


^tPwic^fd^-j 


^  ^  ^    End. 


D.a 


mmm-m^^^ 


108 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
23.  SCHOOL. 


^fe=t£^ 


-*-^i*: 


iiitit: 


3=;^ 


^#  rv- 


iT^ 


24.   SICK. 


Qtttct. 


25.   STABLE. 


Slovf* 


Bi^i^sm^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
26.  TAPS. 


409 


^m 


1=^ 


fg^^L-ll^  f  r\ 


T=f^ 


I 


-^ 


27.   TATTOO. 


QMicfc. 


s^^3i:^^-r  g_i  i-H7^4^ 


EEfEE; 


N-^-T-^-j^-H.-- 


gp^^^ 


^?^^S^^ 


^glj 


^t 


r^. 


^~. 


E^EfEtEE? 


:::ije:— ■:$ZjL«-^-^»_j- 


q=^ 


fe^Et^^ 


-^a — 


^=^^^^1%=^^ 


aio 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS 


TATTOO — Continued. 


* -0  '  0   0 


-f-H 


.^«H«- 


E^HE 


ti^  .">     -«w 


»    & 


t=t: 


-# — ^ 


^ 


t^^^CT^ 


^ — •-=-#-#- 


:i=P 


^=^T-f1^^gj 


<    wrf    n 


APPENDIX  A. 


411 


TATTOO — Continued. 


i 


5=j± 


*-T-^->.  ^a  ^.-a-s  ^a^ 


*ss 


s 


CE 


j •-!-* 


u  Cj  ' 


^^^^^^^H^f^g^^j^r 


P5t 


?s; 


i 


i^^^^^^ 


^ 


is=^ 


^ 


3CZ3E 


^ 


^ — ^i 


/CN 


=i8=?PE 


2=P=p: 


-hsih 


^ 


I 


t=t: 


^-^ 


112 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
TATTOO — Continued. 


3==f^ 


^5— s: 


^^^P^ 


-J—?- 


1^^ 


:x=5=:q^ 


28.    THE   GENERAL. 


4 — I — b.^     I     I     I  ■  I     I   I — tata^-H — I 1 — ^ 


^—f-^-ft-f-f-g-^ 


-^_^-^-/r:|g-^ — ^-H- 


=^rr~^~^^ 


^— * 


^^:£B^?E^^^ 


?^=^=^-^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
29.   TO   THE   STANDARD. 


418 


QuieJi  iime. 


#-i-^ 


-^-ML 


ff^  ^  :-^px; 


-#-^#- 


■r^ 


:i^ 


IpiTC 


t=#i#: 


H«-^ 


■t— 3- 


:^=^ 


ts 


£b(f. 


i 


-^— ==> 


.0    ..-^. 


# ff.   0  .  0 ^ 


D.C. 


sjTrgj 


30.   WATERc 

f>     ^    ^  ,^    , 


^fefe* 

y^^^raM 


-f — ^ 


DRILL  AND  FIELD  CALLS. 

31.   ATTENTION. 


EEE 


114 


CAVALRY  BRILL  REGULATIONS. 
32.   CEASE   FIRING. 


Quick. 


33.   CHARGE. 


Qukh. 


Pi^^^^s^^ 


34.   Column,      MARCH. 


w 


J.=.90 


S 


^ 


^ 


35.   Column  left, 
mow. 


j|3^ 


MARCH. 


s 


36.   Column  right,     MARCH. 
!Slow. 


^^^m 


i 


Qutek, 


37.   COMMENCE   TIRING. 


1=^ 


:5=tc 


^ 


APPEITDIX  A. 


415 


^S 


38.  Foragers  or  Skirmishers,      MARCH. 


K-— ^ 


^§ 


f 


39.   FORM  RANK  OB  POSTS. 


^3 


gS 


40.   Forward,      MARCH. 
_      tSlow.  ^        ^ 


-^ 


^^ 


41.   Fours  left;  also  by  the  left  flank;      MARCH. 
Moderate. 

m 


^^1 


42.  Fours  right;  also  by  the  right  flank;      MARCH. 
Moderate. 


^^ 


43.   Gallop,      MARCH. 


^ 


Z^.-^.-\'Q^ 


416 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


44.   GANGWAY. 


J=138 


a 


^^ 


^ 


m 


45.   GUIDONS   OUT. 


45a.  HALT. 


i^lUlUjl  14\^U'    I 


^ 


46.   Left  oblique,      MARCH. 
Slow. 


^ 


^^ 


47.  Left  turn,     MARCH. 

3 


48.   Line,      MARCH. 


J  =  100 


Quick. 


APPENDIX  A. 

49.   Line  of  platoons,      MARCH. 

ML 


417 


£6^=^^ 


^^m 


50.   PLATOONS. 
Quick. 


tte^EfeM 


51.   Prepare  to  dismount,     DISMOUNT. 


_^_tf__=5v 


■A— 


^m. 


51=;^^ 


52.  Prepare  to  mount,      MOUNT. 


/TS 


E^:^a3^s^-E 


Si^ES^ 


ii 


53.   RALLY. 


Slow. 


WfTf^^ 


mm 


m 


/T\ 


^^^^-=^tT^ 


38218  °— 18 27 


418 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
54.   FIRST   CAVALRY. 


i 


J^Mi 


1 


ip    ^  * 


^^ 


55.   SECOND  CAVALRY. 


56.   THIRD   CAVALRY. 


irrrirrrlr-fl  ffl  I  r         I 


57.  FOURTH  CAVALRY. 


LthL^u^ivln^.^^ 


58.   FIFTH   CAVALRY. 


^Jirn'ni.^jL^^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
59.   SIXTH  CAVALRY. 


419 


Kn.120 


/jgjT3ii«^^lini^  *i 


-2^ 


lijiiriTi 


3 


60.   SEVENTH  CAVALRY. 


^rJIfQlr'  ■Mr[>lr.v   I 


61.    EIGHTH   CAVALRY. 


i 


^^m 


2  S        -»TT 


^ 


^ 


62.   NINTH   CAVALRY. 


I 


i 


63.   TENTH  CAVALRY. 


J  =  128 


^M 


420 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
64.   ELEVENTH  CAVALRY. 


i 


J.  =  120 


a  J^l  r^ r r^m  r^J  L^tLfir'i't 


65.   TWELFTH  CAVALRY. 


^r;/lV.jl:.il.i'.T,rif     r 


66.   THIRTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


fe^TJjU^JlTJIaliltj'^  I 


67.   EOURTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


Lively 


68.   FIFTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


J  =136 


t  j:il  r  P  ^S 


v# 


I 


APPENDIX  A. 
69.   SIXTEENTH   CAVALRY. 


421 


i 


w 


m 


70.   SEVENTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


5 


I 


S 


71.   EIGHTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


I 


72.   NINETEENTH   CAVALRY. 


i 


m 


73.   TWENTIETH  CAVALRY. 


422  CAVALRY  DRILL   REGULATIONS. 

74.    TWENTY-FIRST   CAVALRY. 


iij^^ 


75.   TWENTY-SECOND  CAVALRY. 


¥ 


76.   TWENTY-THIRD   CAVALRY. 


I 


77.   TWENTY-FOURTH   CAVALRY. 


^ 


i 


78.    TWENTY-FIFTH   CAVALRY. 


APPENDIX  A. 

79.   Right  oblique,      MARCH. 
Slow. 


g— r^-f: 


:fe^ 


80.   Right  turn,      MARCH. 


Moderate. 

3 


4     a-J-0- 


ltZ^=M: 


-ft-M-M- 


i 


^ 


81.   ROUTE   ORDER. 


9     ^ 


i-  Mr  1 


4     P^ 


82.   SQUADRONS. 

Moderate. 

a: 


83.   SQUADRON  CALLS. 


f^ne.) 


§  r  r   f     ^   r   r[=?^^^ 


^ 


1^0  r 

*  .  f 

-f- 

-^ 

=F 

ip=y 

^  U^ 

f    -      If 

-+ 

^ 

*.>j 

(Three.)  .  ^ 

F^^i^'^ 

1*    1*    ^ 

^ 

t&'^LL 

d=^ 

^ 

•^ 

-4-^-^4^= 

^ 

424 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
84.    TO   FIGHT   ON   FOOT. 


85.   To  the  rear,  MARCH, 

or  Fours  left  about,      MARCH. 


g=t 


ULj"!^   rir. 


86.   TROOPS 
Quick. 


fei^ 


^^ 


Quick, 

■t — 


87.   Trot,      MARCH. 


*^'[:f~*-rf-r=^ 


i 


88.   Walk,      MARCH. 


bm=t 


m 


MISCELLANEOUS  BUGLE  CALLS. 

89.    THE   FLOURISH. 

/7\ 


APPENDIX  A. 
90.   FUNEBAL   MARCH. 


425 


Very  slow. 


426  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

91.   GENERAL'S  MARCH. 
QUicJ:  time. 


92.   PRESIDENT'S   MARCH. 
Quick  time. 


m-^  y .  ^-^ 


:•*— ^4- 


t=#: 


i:^^^^,^ 


feE^rf-^^ 


B 


?z: 


:r s 1^ 


APPENDIX  A. 


427 


QUICKSTEPS. 


93.    QUICKSTEP   NO,    1. 


Quick' 


--2-^ 


^  ^\    P 


T^--W=^^ 


^^i^^^s^^ 


^ — 


End. 


m 


m^^ss- 


-^-!H^ 


w^rw- 


^m 


#-ML 


^     f  f  ff.  0. 


^m 


t=i 


#.i.^ 


i 


End. 


?^ 


s 


s 


# — «- 


^  '    Lj  l|-*-^bp^ 


P=!KiC 


428 


$ 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
QUICKSTEP   NO.    1 — Continued. 


■#-- 


^^s^^ 


m 


End. 


fe^^^g^-^ 


#— ^ 


-^-r-i 


94.    QUICKSTEP   NO.   2. 


^ 


95.   QUICKSTEP  NO.   3. 


t=w: 


W=s: 


m 


-m-^ 


#iip=zxz? 


jl[4„]^_l4-g^f-f^'..i-Uf 


TfTJt^HZJKZZ^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
QUICKSTEP  NO.  3 — Continued. 


429 


i^ 


-W—h 


^t^zf=-2 


^ — n- 


96.    QUICKSTEP  NO.   4. 


^-^ 


ig^ms^^ 


-Yi/^i/-A/-!-'/ 


^ 


1       I     2 


^         I    1       I'   ■=     - 


^^^^^^^s^S 


#^f-u-l *-  ^ 


^Ei:^ 


=E 


?e:§: 


^^ 


•^^ 


2  >f  ^f 


97.    QUICKSTEP  NO.   5. 


430 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


QUICKSTEP   NO.   5 — Continued. 


^xaximam^ 


m 


tf 


^1^^^ 


98.    QUICKSTEP  NO.   6. 


^^^feE^fi^^ 


r+-T— * 


-^-zsr-fS=S 


^^^^-^ 


i 


lass 


mu^j-u 


-f-?^ 


f^. 


]— H-V--' 


tS±Ei3:t; 


m 


I— i 1^2- 


f-^^-f-^F^ 


^S 


23 


-?-?- 


■t-»^^»- 


99.   QUICKSTEP  NO.  7. 


'f-j^Hl=f^^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
QUICKSTEP   NO.    7 — Continued. 


431 


^ 


^B^m^s&f^iEm^p^ 


100.    QUICKSTEP  NO.   8. 
r  Trumpet. 


fe^-^ 


^^^^ 


I 


C  Crook. 


■^^ 


m 


3=f^ 


^=.. 


^ 


I 


y     7  ^ 


^^ir-^ 


^ 


■^ 


•=q=? 


3^ 


■*-#- 


f  P  r- 


^ 


-,tzr=t=zt^ 


^-^ 


-^^--5-^f: 


^ 


5i=tH*= 


^^Ff^ 

-ttr>> 1 ?r-^Tt 

LP       -      1 

VqI      -    1 

ir  I'   "V  "\  pi^^pJT- 

432 


CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
QUICKSTEP  NO.  8 — Continued. 
Second  time.  End. 


^M 


SF^=JE 


m 


E?±Eifc±*it:ttJ 


fc==t=sfe 


-^.  l^.r 


i-#^ 


*-^ 


i-M- 


i 


/)a  Oapo. 


■^B_i__i 


gfegEN=^^=M=^^^^ 


$ 


.^Lf^gJU 


-«— ?- 


tz± 


101.   QUICKSTEP  NO.  9. 

FTecmpet. 


C  Ckook. 


I 


t^-«- 


-# ^  » 


^ 


i:nd 


^^i 


APPENDIX  A.  438 

QUICKSTEP  NO.  9— Continued. 


#„J    0 


i^^^ 


^ 


i 


t^^-=^ 


±=m: 


^ 


f-r-rf±-r 


f 


■^—^-^ 


^#^1  f'1^^ 


^ 


ft— ft 


^ 


^ 


i)rt  C5i;w. 


^m 


?s: 


gfl— --4 


:{S21S  "—IS 2J 


H^  CAVALRY  DRitt  iiB(JTJLATI01TS. 

102.   QUICKSTEP  NO.   10. 

QuicJc.  FTbttmpet. 


P 


C  Cbook. 


,rV  f -^ r — — f 


S^-^7- 


ADDITIONAL  COPIES 

OF  THIS  PUULTCATION  MAY  BK  PROCURED  FROM 

THE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

"WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

AT 

£0  CENTS  PER   COPY 
V 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  IVieclicine 
Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University 
200  Westboro  Road 
North  Grafton,  MA  01536 


■«^«fc> 


